diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:32:01 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:32:01 -0700 |
| commit | 288863620be733c9681302272983c28056d162a7 (patch) | |
| tree | cc16393a4635391a722fbd90ddc8c1e2149ce1b0 /old | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/7beng10.txt | 12607 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/7beng10.zip | bin | 0 -> 257658 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/8beng10.txt | 12607 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/8beng10.zip | bin | 0 -> 257700 bytes |
4 files changed, 25214 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/7beng10.txt b/old/7beng10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..382415a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/7beng10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12607 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of By England's Aid, by G. A. Henty + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: By England's Aid + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Release Date: August, 2005 [EBook #8679] +[This file was first posted on July 31, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: US-ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY ENGLAND'S AID *** + + + + +E-text prepared by Charles Franks, Michelle Shephard, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team + + + +By England's Aid + +Or, +Or, the Freeing of the Netherlands, 1585-1604 + +BY + +G. A. HENTY + + + + + + + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY AND LIONEL SAVE FRANCIS VERE'S LIFE] + + + + +PREFACE. + + +In my preface to _By Pike and Dyke_ I promised in a future story +to deal with the closing events of the War of Independence in Holland. +The period over which that war extended was so long, and the incidents +were so numerous and varied, that it was impossible to include the +whole within the limit of a single book. The former volume brought the +story of the struggle down to the death of the Prince of Orange and the +capture of Antwerp; the present gives the second phase of the war, when +England, who had long unofficially assisted Holland, threw herself +openly into the struggle, and by her aid mainly contributed to the +successful issue of the war. In the first part of the struggle the +scene lay wholly among the low lands and cities of Holland and Zeeland, +and the war was strictly a defensive one, waged against overpowering +odds. After England threw herself into the strife it assumed far wider +proportions, and the independence of the Netherlands was mainly secured +by the defeat and destruction of the great Armada, by the capture of +Cadiz and the fatal blow thereby struck at the mercantile prosperity of +Spain, and by the defeat of the Holy League by Henry of Navarre, aided +by English soldiers and English gold. For the facts connected with the +doings of Sir Francis Vere and the British contingent in Holland, I +have depended much upon the excellent work by Mr. Clement Markham +entitled the _Fighting Veres_. In this full justice is done to the +great English general and his followers, and it is conclusively shown +that some statements to the disparagement of Sir Francis Vere by Mr. +Motley are founded upon a misconception of the facts. Sir Francis Vere +was, in the general opinion of the time, one of the greatest commanders +of the age, and more, perhaps, than any other man--with the exception +of the Prince of Orange--contributed to the successful issue of the +struggle of Holland to throw off the yoke of Spain. + + G. A. HENTY. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +CHAP. + + I. AN EXCURSION + II. A MEETING IN CHEPE + III. IN THE LOW COUNTRY + IV. THE SIEGE OP SLUYS + V. AN HEROIC DEFENCE + VI. THE LOSS OF THE "SUSAN" + VII. A POPISH PLOT + VIII. THE SPANISH ARMADA + IX. THE ROUT OF THE ARMADA + X. THE WAR IN HOLLAND + XI. IN SPAIN + XII. RECRUITING THEIR FUNDS + XIII. THE FESTA AT SEVILLE + XIV. THE SURPRISE OF BREDA + XV. A SLAVE IN BARBARY + XVI. THE ESCAPE + XVII. A SPANISH MERCHANT +XVIII. IVRY + XIX. STEENWYK + XX. CADIZ + XXI. THE BATTLE OF NIEUPORT + XXII. OLD FRIENDS +XXIII. THE SIEGE OF OSTEND + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + +Geoffrey And Lionel Save Francis Vere's Life +The Four Pages Carry Down The Wounded Soldier +The Next Few Minutes It Was A Wild Struggle For Life +Geoffrey Carried Overboard By The Falling Mast +Geoffrey Gives Inez Her Lover's Note +Geoffrey Falls Into The Hands Of The Corsairs +Crossing The Bridge Of Boats Over The Haven +Vere's Horse Shot Under Him At The Fight Before Ostend + + * * * * * + +Plan of Sluys and the Castle, to illustrate the Siege of 1587 + +Plan of Breda and its Defences, illustrating its surprise and capture +in 1590 + +Map of Cadiz and Harbour at the time of its capture in 1596, showing +the position of the English and Spanish Ships + +Plan of Ostend and its Defences, showing the lines of the attacking +forces during the siege of 1601-4 + + + + +BY ENGLAND'S AID + +CHAPTER I + +AN EXCURSION + + +"And we beseech Thee, O Lord, to give help and succour to Thy servants +the people of Holland, and to deliver them from the cruelties and +persecutions of their wicked oppressors; and grant Thy blessing, we +pray Thee, upon the arms of our soldiers now embarking to aid them in +their extremity." These were the words with which the Rev. John +Vickars, rector of Hedingham, concluded the family prayers on the +morning of 6th December, 1585. + +For twenty years the first portion of this prayer had been repeated +daily by him, as it had been in tens of thousands of English +households; for since the people of the Netherlands first rose against +the Spanish yoke the hearts of the Protestants of England had beat +warmly in their cause, and they had by turns been moved to admiration +at the indomitable courage with which the Dutch struggled for +independence against the might of the greatest power in Europe, and to +horror and indignation at the pitiless cruelty and wholesale massacres +by which the Spaniards had striven to stamp out resistance. + +From the first the people of England would gladly have joined in the +fray, and made common cause with their co-religionists; but the queen +and her counsellors had been restrained by weighty considerations from +embarking in such a struggle. At the commencement of the war the power +of Spain overshadowed all Europe. Her infantry were regarded as +irresistible. Italy and Germany were virtually her dependencies, and +England was but a petty power beside her. Since Agincourt was fought we +had taken but little part in wars on the Continent. The feudal system +was extinct; we had neither army nor military system; and the only +Englishmen with the slightest experience of war were those who had gone +abroad to seek their fortunes, and had fought in the armies of one or +other of the continental powers. Nor were we yet aware of our naval +strength. Drake and Hawkins and the other bucaneers had not yet +commenced their private war with Spain, on what was known as the +Spanish main--the waters of the West Indian Islands--and no one dreamed +that the time was approaching when England would be able to hold her +own against the strength of Spain on the seas. + +Thus, then, whatever the private sentiments of Elizabeth and her +counsellors, they shrank from engaging England in a life and death +struggle with the greatest power of the time; though as the struggle +went on the queen's sympathy with the people of the Netherlands was +more and more openly shown. In 1572 she was present at a parade of +three hundred volunteers who mustered at Greenwich under Thomas Morgan +and Roger Williams for service in the Netherlands. Sir Humphrey +Gilbert, half-brother of Sir Walter Raleigh, went out a few months +later with 1500 men, and from that time numbers of English volunteers +continued to cross the seas and join in the struggle against the +Spaniards. Nor were the sympathies of the queen confined to allowing +her subjects to take part in the fighting; for she sent out large sums +of money to the Dutch, and as far as she could, without openly joining +them, gave them her aid. + +Spain remonstrated continually against these breaches of neutrality, +while the Dutch on their part constantly implored her to join them +openly; but she continued to give evasive answers to both parties until +the assassination of William of Orange on 10th July, 1584, sent a +thrill of horror through England, and determined the queen and her +advisers to take a more decisive part in the struggle. In the following +June envoys from the States arrived in London, and were received with +great honour, and a treaty between the two countries was agreed upon. +Three months later the queen published a declaration to her people and +to Europe at large, setting forth the terrible persecutions and +cruelties to which "our next neighbours, the people of the Low +Countries," the special allies and friends of England, had been +exposed, and stating her determination to aid them to recover their +liberty. The proclamation concluded: "We mean not hereby to make +particular profit to ourself and our people, only desiring to obtain, +by God's favour, for the Countries, a deliverance of them from war by +the Spaniards and foreigners, with a restitution of their ancient +liberties and government." + +Sir Thomas Cecil was sent out at once as governor of Brill, and Sir +Philip Sidney as governor of Flushing, these towns being handed over to +England as guarantees by the Dutch. These two officers, with bodies of +troops to serve as garrisons, took charge of their respective +fortresses in November. Orders were issued for the raising of an army +for service in the Low Countries, and Dudley, Earl of Leicester, was +appointed by the queen to its command. The decision of the queen was +received with enthusiasm in England as well as in Holland, and although +the Earl of Leicester was not personally popular, volunteers flocked to +his standard. + +Breakfast at Hedingham Rectory had been set at an earlier hour than +usual on the 6th of December, 1585. There was an unusual stir and +excitement in the village, for young Mr. Francis Vere, cousin of the +Earl of Oxford, lord of Hedingham and of all the surrounding country, +was to start that morning to ride to Colchester, there to join the Earl +of Leicester and his following as a volunteer. As soon as breakfast was +over young Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars, boys of fourteen and thirteen +years old, proceeded to the castle close by, and there mounted the +horses provided for them, and rode with Francis Vere to Colchester. + +Francis, who was at this time twenty-five years old, was accompanied by +his elder brother, John, and his two younger brothers, Robert and +Horace, and by many other friends; and it was a gay train that cantered +down the valley of the Colne to Colchester. That ancient town was all +astir. Gentlemen had ridden in from all the country seats and manors +for many miles round, and the quiet streets were alive with people. At +two o'clock in the afternoon news arrived that the earl was +approaching, and, headed by the bailiffs of the town in scarlet gowns, +the multitude moved out to meet the earl on the Lexden road. Presently +a long train was seen approaching; for with Leicester were the Earl of +Essex, Lords North and Audley, Sir William Russell, Sir Thomas Shirley, +and other volunteers, to the number of five hundred horse. All were +gaily attired and caparisoned, and the cortege presented a most +brilliant appearance. The multitude cheered lustily, the bailiffs +presented an address, and followed by his own train and by the +gentlemen who had assembled to meet him, the earl rode into the town. +He himself took up his abode at the house of Sir Thomas Lucas, while +his followers were distributed among the houses of the townsfolk. Two +hours after the arrival of the earl, the party from Hedingham took +leave of Mr. Francis Vere. + +"Good-bye, lads," he said to the young Vickars. "I will keep my +promise, never fear; and if the struggle goes on till you are old +enough to carry arms, I will, if I am still alive, take you under my +leading and teach you the art of war." + +Upon the following day the Earl of Leicester and his following rode to +Manningtree, and took boat down the Stour to Harwich, where the fleet, +under Admiral William Borough, was lying. Here they embarked, and on +the 9th of December sailed for Flushing, where they were joined by +another fleet of sixty ships from the Thames. + +More than a year passed. The English had fought sturdily in Holland. +Mr. Francis Vere had been with his cousin, Lord Willoughby, who was in +command of Bergen-op-Zoom, and had taken part in the first brush with +the enemy, when a party of the garrison marched out and attacked a +great convoy of four hundred and fifty waggons going to Antwerp, killed +three hundred of the enemy, took eighty prisoners, and destroyed all +their waggons except twenty-seven, which they carried into the town. +Leicester provisioned the town of Grave, which was besieged by the Duke +of Parma, the Spanish commander-in-chief. Axel was captured by +surprise, the volunteers swimming across the moat at night, and +throwing open the gates. Doesburg was captured, and Zutphen besieged. + +Parma marched to its relief, and, under cover of a thick fog, succeeded +in getting close at hand before it was known that he was near. Then the +English knights and volunteers, 200 in number, mounted in hot haste and +charged a great Spanish column of 5000 horse and foot. They were led by +Sir William Russell, under whom were Lords Essex, North, Audley, and +Willoughby, behind the last of whom rode Francis Vere. For two hours +this little band of horse fought desperately in the midst of the +Spanish cavalry, and forced them at last to fall back, but were +themselves obliged to retreat when the Spanish infantry came up and +opened fire upon them. The English loss was 34 killed and wounded, +while 250 of the Spaniards were slain, and three of their colours +captured. Among the wounded on the English side was the very noble +knight Sir Philip Sidney, who was shot by a musket-ball, and died three +weeks afterwards. + +The successes of the English during these two years were +counterbalanced by the cowardly surrender of Grave by its governor, and +by the treachery of Sir William Stanley, governor of Deventer, and of +Roland Yorke, who commanded the garrisons of the two forts known as the +Zutphen Sconces. Both these officers turned traitors and delivered up +the posts they commanded to the Spaniards. Their conduct not only +caused great material loss to the allies, but it gave rise to much bad +feeling between the English and Dutch, the latter complaining that they +received but half-hearted assistance from the English. + +It was not surprising, however, that Leicester was unable to effect +more with the little force under his command, for it was necessary not +only to raise soldiers, but to invent regulations and discipline. The +Spanish system was adopted, and this, the first English regular army, +was trained and appointed precisely upon the system of the foe with +whom they were fighting. It was no easy task to convert a body of brave +knights and gentlemen and sturdy country men into regular troops, and +to give them the advantages conferred by discipline and order. But the +work was rendered the less difficult by the admixture of the volunteers +who had been bravely fighting for ten years under Morgan, Rowland +Williams, John Norris, and others. These had had a similar experience +on their first arrival in Holland. Several times in their early +encounters with the Spaniards the undisciplined young troops had +behaved badly; but they had gained experience from their reverses, and +had proved themselves fully capable of standing in line even against +the splendid pikemen of Spain. + +While the English had been drilling and fighting in Holland things had +gone on quietly at Hedingham. The village stands near the head waters +of the Colne and Stour, in a rich and beautiful country. On a rising +ground behind it stood the castle of the Veres, which was approached +from the village by a drawbridge across the moat. There were few more +stately piles in England than the seat of the Earl of Oxford. On one +side of the great quadrangle was the gate-house and a lofty tower, on +another the great hall and chapel and the kitchens, on a third the +suites of apartments of the officials and retinue. In rear were the +stables and granaries, the butts and tennis-court, beyond which was the +court of the tournaments. + +In the centre of the quadrangle rose the great keep, which still +stands, the finest relic of Norman civil architecture in England. It +possessed great strength, and at the same time was richly ornamented +with carving. The windows, arches, and fireplaces were decorated with +chevron carvings. A beautiful spiral pattern enriched the doorway and +pillars of the staircase leading to galleries cut in the thickness of +the wall, with arched openings looking into the hall below. The outlook +from the keep extended over the parishes of Castle Hedingham, Sybil +Hedingham, Kirby, and Tilbury, all belonging to the Veres--whose +property extended far down the pretty valley of the Stour--with the +stately Hall of Long Melford, the Priory of Clare, and the little town +of Lavenham; indeed the whole country was dotted with the farmhouses +and manors of the Veres. Seven miles down the valley of the Colne lies +the village of Earl's Colne, with the priory, where ten of the earls of +Oxford lie buried with their wives. + +The parish church of Castle Hedingham stood at the end of the little +village street, and the rectory of Mr. Vickars was close by. The party +gathered at morning prayers consisted of Mr. Vickars and his wife, +their two sons, Geoffrey and Lionel, and the maid-servants, Ruth and +Alice. The boys, now fourteen and fifteen years old respectively, were +strong-grown and sturdy lads, and their father had long since owned +with a sigh that neither of them was likely to follow his profession +and fill the pulpit at Hedingham Church when he was gone. Nor was this +to be wondered at, for lying as it did at the entrance to the great +castle of the Veres, the street of the little village was constantly +full of armed men, and resounded with the tramp of the horses of +richly-dressed knights and gay ladies. + +Here came great politicians, who sought the friendship and support of +the powerful earls of Oxford, nobles and knights, their kinsmen and +allies, gentlemen from the wide-spreading manors of the family, stout +fighting-men who wished to enlist under their banner. At night the +sound of music from the castle told of gay entertainments and festive +dances, while by day parties of knights and ladies with dogs and +falcons sallied out to seek sport over the wide domains. It could +hardly be expected, then, that lads of spirit, brought up in the midst +of sights and sounds like these, should entertain a thought of settling +down to the tranquil life of the church. As long as they could +remember, their minds had been fixed upon being soldiers, and fighting +some day under the banner of the Veres. They had been a good deal in +the castle; for Mr. Vickars had assisted Arthur Golding, the learned +instructor to young Edward Vere, the 17th earl, who was born in 1550, +and had succeeded to the title at the age of twelve, and he had +afterwards been tutor to the earl's cousins, John, Francis, Robert, and +Horace, the sons of Geoffrey, fourth son of the 15th earl. These boys +were born in 1558, 1560, 1562, and 1565, and lived with their mother at +Kirby Hall, a mile from the Castle of Hedingham. + +The earl was much attached to his old instructor, and when he was at +the castle there was scarce a day but an invitation came down for Mr. +Vickars and his wife to be present either at banquet or entertainment. +The boys were free to come and go as they chose, and the earl's men-at- +arms had orders to afford them all necessary teaching in the use of +weapons. + +Mr. Vickars considered it his duty to accept the invitations of his +friend and patron, but he sorely grudged the time so abstracted from +his favourite books. It was, indeed, a relief to him when the earl, +whose love of profusion and luxury made serious inroads even into the +splendid possessions of the Veres, went up to court, and peace and +quietness reigned in the castle. The rector was fonder of going to +Kirby, where John, Geoffrey's eldest son, lived quietly and soberly, +his three younger brothers having, when mere boys, embraced the +profession of arms, placing themselves under the care of the good +soldier Sir William Browne, who had served for many years in the Low +Countries. They occasionally returned home for a time, and were pleased +to take notice of the sons of their old tutor, although Geoffrey was +six years junior to Horace, the youngest of the brothers. + +The young Vickars had much time to themselves, much more indeed than +their mother considered to be good for them. After their breakfast, +which was finished by eight o'clock, their father took them for an hour +and heard the lessons they had prepared the day before, and gave them +instruction in the Latin tongue. Then they were supposed to study till +the bell rang for dinner at twelve; but there was no one to see that +they did so, for their father seldom came outside his library door, and +their mother was busy with her domestic duties and in dispensing +simples to the poor people, who, now that the monasteries were closed, +had no medical aid save that which they got from the wives of the +gentry or ministers, or from the wise women, of whom there was +generally one in every village. + +Therefore, after half an hour, or at most an hour, spent in getting up +their tasks, the books would be thrown aside, and the boys be off, +either to the river or up to the castle to practise sword-play with the +men-at-arms, or to the butts with their bows, or to the rabbit-warren, +where they had leave from the earl to go with their dogs whenever they +pleased. Their long excursions were, however, generally deferred until +after dinner, as they were then free until supper-time, and even if +they did not return after that hour Mrs. Vickars did not chide them +unduly, being an easy-going woman, and always ready to make excuses for +them. + +There were plenty of fish in the river; and the boys knew the pools +they loved best, and often returned with their baskets well filled. +There were otters on its banks, too; but, though they sometimes chased +these pretty creatures, Tan and Turk, their two dogs, knew as well as +their masters that they had but small chance of catching them. +Sometimes they would take a boat at the bridge and drop down the stream +for miles, and once or twice had even gone down to Bricklesey +[Footnote: Now Brightlingsea.] at the mouth of the river. This, +however, was an expedition that they never performed alone, making it +each time in charge of Master Lirriper, who owned a flat barge, and +took produce down to Bricklesey, there to be transhipped into coasters +bound for London. He had a married daughter there, and it was at her +house the boys had slept when they went there; for the journey down and +up again was too long to be performed in a single day. + +But this was not the only distant expedition they had made, for they +had once gone down the Stour as far as Harwich with their father when +he was called thither on business. To them Harwich with its old walls +and the houses crowded up within them, and its busy port with vessels +coming in and going out, was most delightful, and they always talked +about that expedition as one of the most pleasant recollections of +their lives. + +After breakfast was over on 1st of May, 1587, and they had done their +lessons with their father, and had worked for an hour by themselves, +the boys put by their books and strolled down the village to the +bridge. There as usual stood their friend Master Lirriper with his +hands deep in his pockets, a place and position in which he was sure to +be found when not away in his barge. + +"Good-morning, Master Lirriper." + +"Good-morning, Master Geoffrey and Master Lionel." + +"So you are not down the river to-day?" + +"No, sir. I am going to-morrow, and this time I shall be away four or +five days--maybe even a week." + +"Shall you?" the boys exclaimed in surprise. "Why, what are you going +to do?" + +"I am going round to London in my nephew Joe Chambers' craft." + +"Are you really?" Geoffrey exclaimed. "I wish we were going with you. +Don't you think you could take us, Master Lirriper?" + +The bargeman looked down into the water and frowned. He was slow of +speech, but as the minutes went on and he did not absolutely refuse the +boys exchanged glances of excitement and hope. + +"I dunno how that might be, young sirs," John Lirriper said slowly, +after long cogitation. "I dus-say my nephew would have no objection, +but what would parson say about it?" + +"Oh, I don't think he would object," Geoffrey said. "If you go up and +ask him, Master Lirriper, and say that you will take care of us, you +know, I don't see why he should say no." + +"Like enough you would be ill," John Lirriper said after another long +pause. "It's pretty rough sometimes." + +"Oh, we shouldn't mind that," Lionel protested. "We should like to see +the waves and to be in a real ship." + +"It's nothing much of a ship," the boatman said. "She is a ketch of +about ten tons and carries three hands." + +"Oh, we don't care how small she is if we can only go in her; and you +would be able to show us London, and we might even see the queen. Oh, +do come up with us and ask father, Master Lirriper." + +"Perhaps parson wouldn't be pleased, young sirs, and might say I was +putting wandering thoughts into your heads; and Mistress Vickars might +think it a great liberty on my part." + +"Oh, no, she wouldn't, Master Lirriper. Besides, we will say we asked +you." + +"But suppose any harm comes to you, what would they say to me then?" + +"Oh, there's no fear of any harm coming to us. Besides, in another year +or two we mean to go over to the Low Countries and fight the Spaniards, +and what's a voyage to London to that?" + +"Well, I will think about it," John Lirriper said cautiously. + +"No no, Master Lirriper; if you get thinking about it it will never be +done. Do come up with us at once," and each of them got hold of one of +the boatman's arms. + +"Well, the parson can but say no," he said, as he suffered himself to +be dragged away. "And I don't say as it isn't reasonable that you +should like to see something of the world, young sirs; but I don't know +how the parson will take it." + +Mr. Vickars looked up irritably from his books when the servant came in +and said that Master Lirriper wished to see him. + +"What does he want at this hour?" he said. "You know, Ruth, I never see +people before dinner. Any time between that and supper I am at their +service, but it's too bad being disturbed now." + +"I told him so, sir; but Master Geoffrey and Master Lionel were with +him, and they said he wanted particular to see you, and they wanted +particular too." + +The clergyman sighed as he put his book down. + +"If Geoffrey and Lionel have concerned themselves in the matter, Ruth, +I suppose I must see the man; but it's very hard being disturbed like +this. Well, Master Lirriper, what is it?" he asked, as the boatman +accompanied by Geoffrey and Lionel entered the room. Master Lirriper +twirled his hat in his hand. Words did not come easily to him at the +best of times, and this was a business that demanded thought and care. +Long before he had time to fix upon an appropriate form of words +Geoffrey broke in: + +"This is what it is, father. Master Lirriper is going down the river to +Bricklesey to-morrow, and then he is going on board his nephew's ship. +She is a ketch, and she carries ten tons, though I don't know what it +is she carries; and she's going to London, and he is going in her, and +he says if you will let him he will take us with him, and will show us +London, and take great care of us. It will be glorious, father, if you +will only let us go." + +Mr. Vickars looked blankly as Geoffrey poured out his torrent of words. +His mind was still full of the book he had been reading, and he hardly +took in the meaning of Geoffrey's words. + +"Going in a ketch!" he repeated. "Going to catch something, I suppose +you mean? Do you mean he is going fishing?" + +"No, father,--going in a ketch. A ketch is a sort of ship, father, +though I don't quite know what sort of ship. What sort of ship is a +ketch, Master Lirriper?" + +"A ketch is a two-masted craft, Master Geoffrey," John Lirriper said. +"She carries a big mizzen sail." + +"There, you see, father," Geoffrey said triumphantly; "she carries a +big mizzen sail. That's what she is, you see; and he is going to show +us London, and will take great care of us if you will let us go with +him." + +"Do you mean, Master Lirriper," Mr. Vickars asked slowly, "that you are +going to London in some sort of ship, and want to take my sons with +you?" + +"Well, sir, I am going to London, and the young masters seemed to think +that they would like to go with me, if so be you would have no +objection." + +"I don't know," Mr. Vicars said. "It is a long passage, Master +Lirriper; and, as I have heard, often a stormy one. I don't think my +wife--" + +"Oh, yes, father," Lionel broke in. "If you say yes, mother is sure to +say yes; she always does, you know. And, you see, it will be a great +thing for us to see London. Every one else seems to have seen London, +and I am sure that it would do us good. And we might even see the +queen." + +"I think that they would be comfortable, sir," John Lirriper put in. +"You see, my nephew's wife is daughter of a citizen, one Master +Swindon, a ship's chandler, and he said there would be a room there for +me, and they would make me heartily welcome. Now, you see, sir, the +young masters could have that room, and I could very well sleep on +board the ketch; and they would be out of all sort of mischief there." + +"That would be a very good plan certainly, Master Lirriper. Well, well, +I don't know what to say." + +"Say yes, father," Geoffrey said as he saw Mr. Vickars glance anxiously +at the book he had left open. "If you say yes, you see it will be a +grand thing for you, our being away for a week with nothing to disturb +you." + +"Well, well," Mr. Vickars said, "you must ask your mother. If she makes +no objection, then I suppose you can go," and Mr. Vickars hastily took +up his book again. + +The boys ran off to the kitchen, where their mother was superintending +the brewing of some broth for a sick woman down the village. + +"Mother!" Geoffrey exclaimed, "Master Lirriper's going to London in a +ketch--a ship with a big mizzen sail, you know--and he has offered to +take us with him and show us London. And father has said yes, and it's +all settled if you have no objection; and of course you haven't." + +"Going to London, Geoffrey!" Mrs. Vicars exclaimed aghast. "I never +heard of such a thing. Why, like enough you will be drowned on the way +and never come back again. Your father must be mad to think of such a +thing." + +"Oh, no, mother; I am sure it will do us a lot of good. And we may see +the queen, mother. And as for drowning, why, we can both swim ever so +far. Besides, people don't get drowned going to London. Do they Master +Lirriper?" + +John was standing bashfully at the door of the kitchen. "Well, not as a +rule, Master Geoffrey," he replied. "They comes and they goes, them +that are used to it, maybe a hundred times without anything happening +to them." + +"There! You hear that, mother? They come and go hundreds of times. Oh, +I am sure you are not going to say no. That would be too bad when +father has agreed to it. Now, mother, please tell Ruth to run away at +once and get a wallet packed with our things. Of course we shall want +our best clothes; because people dress finely in London, and it would +never do if we saw the queen and we hadn't our best doublets on, for +she would think that we didn't know what was seemly down at Hedingham." + +"Well, my dears, of course if it is all settled--" + +"Oh, yes, mother, it is quite all settled." + +"Then it's no use my saying anything more about it, but I think your +father might have consulted me before he gave his consent to your going +on such a hazardous journey as this. + +"He did want to consult you, mother. But then, you see, he wanted to +consult his books even more, and he knew very well that you would agree +with him; and you know you would too. So please don't say anything more +about it, but let Ruth run upstairs and see to our things at once. +There, you see, Master Lirriper, it is all settled. And what time do +you start to-morrow? We will be there half an hour before, anyhow." + +"I shall go at seven from the bridge. Then I shall just catch the turn +of the tide and get to Bricklesey in good time." + +"I never did see such boys," Mrs. Vickars said when John Lirriper had +gone on his way. "As for your father, I am surprised at him in +countenancing you. You will be running all sorts of risks. You may be +drowned on the way, or killed in a street brawl, or get mixed up in a +plot. There is no saying what may not happen. And here it is all +settled before I have even time to think about it, which is most +inconsiderate of your father." + +"Oh, we shall get back again without any harm, mother. And as to +getting killed in a street brawl, Lionel and I can use our hangers as +well as most of them. Besides, nothing of that sort is going to happen +to us. Now, mother, please let Ruth go at once, and tell her to put up +our puce doublets that we had for the jousting at the castle, and our +red hose and our dark green cloth slashed trunks." + +"There is plenty of time for that, Geoffrey, as you are not going until +to-morrow. Besides, I can't spare Ruth now, but she shall see about it +after dinner." + +There was little sleep for the boys that night. A visit to London had +long been one of their wildest ambitions, and they could scarcely +believe that thus suddenly and without preparation it was about to take +place. Their father had some time before promised that he would some +day make request to one or other of the young Veres to allow them to +ride to London in his suite, but the present seemed to them an even +more delightful plan. There would be the pleasure of the voyage, and +moreover it would be much more lively for them to be able to see London +under the charge of John Lirriper than to be subject to the ceremonial +and restraint that would be enforced in the household of the Veres. +They were then at the appointed place a full hour before the time +named, with wallets containing their clothes, and a basket of +provisions that their mother had prepared for them. Having stowed these +away in the little cabin, they walked up and down impatiently until +Master Lirriper himself appeared. + +"You are up betimes, my young masters," the boatman said. "The church +has not yet struck seven o'clock." + +"We have been here ever so long, Master Lirriper. We could not sleep +much last night, and got up when it chimed five, being afraid that we +might drop off to sleep and be late." + +"Well, we shall not be long before we are off. Here comes my man Dick, +and the tide is just on the turn. The sky looks bright, and the weather +promises well. I will just go round to the cottage and fetch up my +things, and then we shall be ready." + +In ten minutes they pushed off from the shore. John and his man got out +long poles shod with iron, and with these set to work to punt the barge +along. Now that they were fairly on their way the boys quieted down, +and took their seats on the sacks of flour with which the boat was +laden, and watched the objects on the bank as the boat made her way +quietly along. + +Halstead was the first place passed. This was the largest town near +Hedingham, and was a place of much importance in their eyes. Then they +passed Stanstead Hall and Earl's Colne on their right, Colne Wake on +their left, and Chapel Parish on their right. Then there was a long +stretch without any large villages, until they came in sight of the +bridge above Colchester. A few miles below the town the river began to +widen. The banks were low and flat, and they were now entering an arm +of the sea. Half an hour later the houses and church of Bricklesey came +in sight. Tide was almost low when they ran on to the mud abreast of +the village, but John put on a pair of high boots and carried the boys +ashore one after the other on his back, and then went up with them to +the house where they were to stop for the night. + +Here, although not expected, they were heartily welcomed by John's +daughter. + +"If father had told me that you had been coming, Masters Vickars, I +would have had a proper dinner for you; but though he sent word +yesterday morning that he should be over today, he did not say a word +about your coming with them." + +"He did not know himself," Geoffrey said; "it was only settled at ten +o'clock yesterday. But do not trouble yourself about the dinner. In the +first place, we are so pleased at going that we don't care a bit what +we eat, and in the second place we had breakfast on board the boat, and +we were both so hungry that I am sure we could go till supper-time +without eating if necessary." + +"Where are you going, father?" the young woman asked. + +"I am going to set about unloading the flour." + +"Why, it's only a quarter to twelve, and dinner just ready. The fish +went into the frying-pan as you came up from the boat. You know we +generally dine at half-past eleven, but we saw you coming at a distance +and put it off. It's no use your starting now." + +"Well, I suppose it isn't. And I don't know what the young masters' +appetite may be, but mine is pretty good, I can tell you." + +"I never knew it otherwise, father," the woman laughed, "Ah, here is my +Sam. Sam, here's father brought these two young gentlemen. They are the +sons of Mr. Vickars, the parson at Hedingham. They are going to stop +here to-night, and are going with him in the _Susan_ to-morrow to +London." + +"Glad to see you, young masters," Sam said. "I have often heard Ann +talk of your good father. I have just been on board the _Susan_, +for I am sending up a couple of score sides of bacon in her, and have +been giving Joe Chambers, her master, a list of things he is to get +there and bring down for me. Now then, girl, bustle about and get +dinner on as soon as you can. We are half an hour late. I am sure the +young gentlemen here must be hungry. There's nothing like being on the +water for getting an appetite." + +A few minutes later a great dish of fish, a loaf of bread and some +wooden platters, were placed on the table, and all set to at once. +Forks had not yet come into use, and table-cloths were unknown, except +among the upper classes. The boys found that in spite of their hearty +breakfast their appetites were excellent. The fish were delicious, the +bread was home-baked, and the beer from Colchester, which was already +famous for its brewing. When they had finished, John Lirriper asked +them if they would rather see what there was to be seen in the village, +or go off to the ketch. They at once chose the latter alternative. On +going down to the water's edge they found that the tide had risen +sufficiently to enable Dick to bring the barge alongside the jetty. +They were soon on board. + +"Which is the _Susan_, Master Lirriper?" + +"That's her lying out there with two others. She is the one lowest down +the stream. We shall just fetch her comfortably." + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +A MEETING IN CHEPE. + + +A row of ten minutes took the boat with Master Lirriper and the two +boys alongside the ketch. + +"How are you, Joe Chambers?" Master Lirriper hailed the skipper as he +appeared on the deck of the _Susan_. "I have brought you two more +passengers for London. They are going there under my charge." + +"The more the merrier, Uncle John," the young skipper replied. "There +are none others going this journey, so though our accommodation is not +very extensive, we can put them up comfortably enough if they don't +mind roughing it." + +"Oh, we don't mind that," Geoffrey said, as they climbed on board; +"besides, there seems lots of room." + +"Not so much as you think," the skipper replied. "She is a roomy craft +is the _Susan_; but she is pretty nigh all hold, and we are +cramped a little in the fo'castle. Still we can sleep six, and that's +just the number we shall have, for we carry a man and a boy besides +myself. I think your flour will about fill her up, Master Lirriper. We +have a pretty full cargo this time." + +"Well, we shall soon see," John Lirriper said. "Are you ready to take +the flour on board at once? Because, if so, we will begin to +discharge." + +"Yes, I am quite ready. You told me you were going to bring forty +sacks, and I have left the middle part of the hold empty for them. Sam +Hunter's bacon will stow in on the top of your sacks, and just fill her +up to the beams there, as I reckon. I'll go below and stow them away as +you hand them across." + +In an hour the sacks of flour were transferred from the barge to the +hold of the _Susan_, and the sides of bacon then placed upon them. + +"It's a pity we haven't all the rest of the things on board," the +skipper said, "and then we could have started by this evening's tide +instead of waiting till the morning. The wind is fair, and I hate +throwing away a fair wind. There is no saying where it may blow to- +morrow, but I shouldn't be at all surprised if it isn't round to the +south, and that will be foul for us till we get pretty nigh up into the +mouth of the river. However, I gave them till to-night for getting all +their things on board, and must therefore wait." + +To the boys the _Susan_ appeared quite a large craft, for there +was not water up at Hedingham for vessels of her size; and though they +had seen ships at Harwich, they had never before put foot on anything +larger than Master Lirriper's barge. The _Susan_ was about forty +feet long by twelve feet beam, and drew, as her skipper informed them, +near five feet of water. She was entirely decked. The cabin in the bows +occupied some fourteen feet in length. The rest was devoted to cargo. +They descended into the cabin, which seemed to them very dark, there +being no light save what came down through the small hatchway. Still it +looked snug and comfortable. There was a fireplace on one side of the +ladder by which they had descended, and on this side there were two +bunks, one above the other. On the other side there were lockers +running along the entire length of the cabin. Two could sleep on these +and two on the bunks above them. + +"Now, young masters, you will take those two bunks on the top there. +John Lirriper and I will sleep on the lockers underneath you. The man +and the boy have the two on the other side. I put you on the top +because there is a side board, and you can't fall out if she rolls, and +besides the bunks are rather wider than the lockers below. If the wind +is fair you won't have much of our company, because we shall hold on +till we moor alongside the wharves of London; but if it's foul, or +there is not enough of it to take us against tide, we have to anchor on +the ebb, and then of course we turn in." + +"How long do you take getting from here to London?" + +"Ah, that I can tell you more about when I see what the weather is like +in the morning. With a strong fair wind I have done it in twenty-four +hours, and again with the wind foul it has taken me nigh a week. Taking +one trip with another I should put it at three days." + +"Well, now, we will be going ashore," John Lirriper said. "I will leave +my barge alongside till tide turns, for I could not get her back again +to the jetty so long as it is running in strong, so I will be off again +in a couple of hours." + +So saying he hauled up the dingy that was towing behind the barge, and +he and Dick rowed the two boys ashore. Then he walked along with them +to a spot where several craft were hauled up, pointing out to them the +differences in their rig and build, and explained their purpose, and +gave them the names of the principal ropes and stays. + +"Now," he said, "it's getting on for supper-time, and it won't do to +keep them waiting, for Ann is sure to have got some cakes made, and +there's nothing puts a woman out more than people not being in to meals +when they have got something special ready. After that I shall go out +with Dick and bring the barge ashore. He will load her up to-morrow, +and take her back single-handed; which can be done easy enough in such +weather as this, but it is too much for one man if there is a strong +wind blowing and driving her over to the one side or other of the +river." + +As John Lirriper had expected, his daughter had prepared a pile of hot +cakes for supper, and her face brightened up when she saw the party +return punctually. The boys had been up early, and had slept but little +the night before, and were not sorry at eight o'clock to lie down on +the bed of freshly-cut rushes covered with home-spun sheets, for +regular beds of feathers were still but little used in England. At five +o'clock they were astir again, and their hostess insisted on their +eating a manchet of bread with some cheese, washed down by a stoup of +ale before starting. Dick had the boat at the jetty ready to row them +off, and as soon as they were on board the _Susan_ preparations +were made for a start. + +The mainsail was first hoisted, its size greatly surprising the boys; +then the foresail and jib were got up, and lastly the mizzen. Then the +capstan was manned, and the anchor slowly brought on board, and the +sails being sheeted home, the craft began to steal through the water. +The tide was still draining up, and she had not as yet swung. The wind +was light, and, as the skipper had predicted, was nearly due south. As +the ketch made its way out from the mouth of the river, and the wide +expanse of water opened before them, the boys were filled with delight. +They had taken their seats, one on each side of the skipper, who was at +the tiller. + +"I suppose you steer by the compass, Master Chambers?" Geoffrey said. +"Which is the compass? I have heard about it, always pointing to the +north." + +"It's down below, young sir; I will show it you presently. We steer by +that at night, or when it's foggy; but on a fine day like this there is +no need for it. There are marks put up on all the sands, and we steer +by them. You see, the way the wind is now we can lay our course for the +Whittaker. That's a cruel sand, that is, and stretches out a long way +from a point lying away on the right there. Once past that we bear away +to the south-west, for we are then, so to speak, fairly in the course +of the river. There is many a ship has been cast away on the Whittaker. +Not that it is worse than other sands. There are scores of them lying +in the mouth of the river, and if it wasn't for the marks there would +be no sailing in or out." + +"Who put up the marks?" Lionel asked. + +"They are put up by men who make a business of it. There is one boat of +them sails backwards and forwards where the river begins to narrow +above Sheerness, and every ship that goes up or down pays them +something according to her size. Others cruise about with long poles, +putting them in the sands wherever one gets washed away. They have got +different marks on them. A single cross-piece, or two cross-pieces, or +a circle, or a diamond; so that each sand has got its own particular +mark. These are known to the masters of all ships that go up and down +the river, and so they can tell exactly where they are, and what course +to take. At night they anchor, for there would be no possibility of +finding the way up or down in the dark. I have heard tell from mariners +who have sailed abroad that there ain't a place anywhere with such +dangerous sands as those we have got here at the mouth of the Thames." + +In the first three or four hours' sail Geoffrey and Lionel acquired +much nautical knowledge. They learned the difference between the +mainmast and the mizzen, found that all the strong ropes that kept the +masts erect and stiff were called stays, that the ropes that hoist +sails are called halliards, and that sheets is the name given to the +ropes that restrain the sails at the lower corner, and are used to haul +them in more tightly when sailing close to the wind, or to ease them +off when the wind is favourable. They also learned that the yards at +the head of the main and mizzen sails are called gaffs, and those at +the bottom, booms. + +"I think that's about enough for you to remember in one day, young +masters," John Lirriper said. "You bear all that in your mind, and +remember that each halliard and sheet has the name of the sail to which +it is attached, and you will have learnt enough to make yourself +useful, and can lend a hand when the skipper calls out, 'Haul in the +jib-sheet,' or 'Let go the fore-halliards.' Now sit yourselves down +again and see what is doing. That beacon you can just see right ahead +marks the end of the Whittaker Spit. When we get there we shall drop +anchor till the tide turns. You see we are going across it now; but +when we round that beacon we shall have it dead against us, and the +wind would be too light to take us against it even if it were not from +the quarter it is. You see there are two or three other craft brought +up there." + +"Where have they come from do you think, Master Lirriper?" + +"Well, they may have come out from Burnham, or they may have come down +from London and be going up to Burnham or to Bricklesey when the tide +turns. There is a large ship anchored in the channel beyond the +Whittaker. Of course she is going up when tide begins to flow. And +there are the masts of two vessels right over there. They are in +another channel. Between us and them there is a line of sands that you +will see will show above the water when it gets a bit lower. That is +the main channel, that is; and vessels coming from the south with a +large draught of water generally use that, while this is the one that +is handiest for ships from the north. Small vessels from the south come +in by a channel a good bit beyond those ships. That is the narrowest of +the three; and even light draught vessels don't use it much unless the +wind is favourable, for there is not much room for them to beat up if +the wind is against them." + +"What is to beat up, Master Lirriper?" + +"Well, you will see about that presently. I don't think we shall be +able to lay our course beyond the Whittaker. To lay our course means to +steer the way we want to go; and if we can't do that we shall have to +beat, and that is tedious work with a light wind like this." + +They dropped anchor off the beacon, and the captain said that this was +the time to take breakfast. The lads already smelt an agreeable odour +arising from the cabin forward, where the boy had been for some time +busily engaged, and soon the whole party were seated on the lockers in +the cabin devouring fried fish. + +"Master Chambers," Geoffrey said, "we have got two boiled pullets in +our basket. Had we not better have them for dinner? They were cooked +the evening before we came away, and I should think they had better be +eaten now." + +"You had better keep them for yourselves, Master Geoffrey," the skipper +said. "We are accustomed to living on fish, but like enough you would +get tired of it before we got to London." + +But this the boys would not hear of, and it was accordingly arranged +that the dinner should be furnished from the contents of the basket. + +As soon as tide turned the anchor was hove up and the _Susan_ got +under way again. The boys soon learnt the meaning of the word beating, +and found that it meant sailing backwards and forwards across the +channel, with the wind sometimes on one side of the boat and sometimes +on the other. Geoffrey wanted very much to learn why, when the wind was +so nearly ahead, the boat advanced instead of drifting backwards or +sideways. But this was altogether beyond the power of either Master +Lirriper or Joe Chambers to explain. They said every one knew that when +the sails were full a vessel went in the direction in which her head +pointed. "It's just the same way with yourself, Master Geoffrey. You +see, when you look one way that's the way you go. When you turn your +head and point another way, of course you go off that way; and it's +just the same thing with the ship." + +"I don't think it's the same thing, Master Lirriper," Geoffrey said +puzzled. "In one case the power that makes one go comes from the +inside, and so one can go in any direction one likes; in the other it +comes from outside, and you would think the ship would have to go any +way the wind pushes her. If you stand up and I give you a push, I push +you straight away from me. You don't go sideways or come forward in the +direction of my shoulder, which is what the ship does." + +John Lirriper took off his cap and scratched his head. + +"I suppose it is as you say, Master Geoffrey, though I never thought of +it before. There is some reason, no doubt, why the craft moves up +against the wind so long as the sails are full, instead of drifting +away to leeward; though I never heard tell of it, and never heard +anyone ask before. I daresay a learned man could tell why it is; and if +you ask your good father when you go back I would wager he can explain +it. It always seems to me as if a boat have got some sort of sense, +just like a human being or a horse, and when she knows which way you +wants her to go she goes. That's how it seems to me--ain't it, Joe?" + +"Something like that, uncle. Every one knows that a boat's got her +humours, and sometimes she sails better than she does others; and each +boat's got her own fancies. Some does their best when they are beating, +and some are lively in a heavy sea, and seem as if they enjoy it; and +others get sulky, and don't seem to take the trouble to lift their bows +up when a wave meets them; and they groans and complains if the wind is +too hard for them, just like a human being. When you goes to a new +vessel you have got to learn her tricks and her ways and what she will +do, and what she won't do, and just to humour her as you would a child, +I don't say as I think she is actually alive; but every sailor will +tell you that there is something about her that her builders never put +there." + +"That's so," John Lirriper agreed. "Look at a boat that is hove up when +her work's done and going to be broken up. Why, anyone can tell her +with half an eye. She looks that forlorn and melancholy that one's +inclined to blubber at the sight of her. She don't look like that at +any other time. When she is hove up she is going to die, and she knows +it." + +"But perhaps that's because the paint's off her sides and the ropes all +worn and loose," Geoffrey suggested. + +But Master Lirriper waved the suggestion aside as unworthy even of an +answer, and repeated, "She knows it. Anyone can see that with half an +eye." + +Geoffrey and Lionel talked the matter over when they were sitting +together on deck apart from the others. It was an age when there were +still many superstitions current in the land. Even the upper classes +believed in witches and warlocks, in charms and spells, in lucky and +unlucky days, in the arts of magic, in the power of the evil eye; and +although to the boys it seemed absurd that a vessel should have life, +they were not prepared altogether to discredit an idea that was +evidently thoroughly believed by those who had been on board ships all +their lives. After talking it over for some time they determined to +submit the question to their father on their return. + +It took them two more tides before they were off Sheerness. The wind +was now more favourable, and having increased somewhat in strength, the +_Susan_ made her way briskly along, heeling over till the water +ran along her scuppers. There was plenty to see now, for there were +many fishing-boats at work, some belonging, as Master Chambers told +them, to the Medway, others to the little village of Leigh, whose +church they saw at the top of the hill to their right. They met, too, +several large craft coming down the river, and passed more than one, +for the _Susan_ was a fast boat. + +"They would beat us," the skipper said when the boys expressed their +surprise at their passing such large vessels, "if the wind were +stronger or the water rough. We are doing our best, and if the wind +rises I shall have to take in sail; while they could carry all theirs +if it blew twice as hard. Then in a sea, weight and power tell; a wave +that would knock the way almost out of us would hardly affect them at +all." + +So well did the _Susan_ go along, that before the tide was much +more than half done they passed the little village of Gravesend on +their left, with the strong fort of Tilbury on the opposite shore, with +its guns pointing on the river, and ready to give a good account of any +Spaniard who should venture to sail up the Thames. Then at the end of +the next reach the hamlet of Grays was passed on the right; a mile +further Greenhithe on the left. Tide was getting slack now, but the +_Susan_ managed to get as far as Purfleet, and then dropped her +anchor. + +"This is our last stopping-place," Joe Chambers said. "The morning tide +will carry us up to London Bridge." + +"Then you will not go on with to-night's tide?" Geoffrey asked. + +"No; the river gets narrower every mile, and I do not care to take the +risk of navigating it after dark, especially as there is always a great +deal of shipping moored above Greenwich. Tide will begin to run up at +about five o'clock, and by ten we ought to be safely moored alongside +near London Bridge. So we should not gain a great deal by going on this +evening instead of to-morrow morning, and I don't suppose you are in a +particular hurry." + +"Oh, no," Lionel said. "We would much rather go on in the morning, +otherwise we should miss everything by the way; and there is the +Queen's Palace at Greenwich that I want to see above all things." + +Within a few minutes of the hour the skipper had named for their +arrival, the _Susan_ was moored alongside some vessels lying off +one of the wharves above the Tower. The boys' astonishment had risen +with every mile of their approach to the city, and they were perfectly +astounded at the amount of shipping that they now beheld. The great +proportion were of course coasters, like themselves, but there were +many large vessels among them, and of these fully half were flying +foreign colours. Here were traders from the Netherlands, with the flag +that the Spaniards had in vain endeavoured to lower, flying at their +mast-heads. Here were caravels from Venice and Genoa, laden with goods +from the East. Among the rest Master Chambers pointed out to the lads +the ship in which Sir Francis Drake had circumnavigated the world, and +that in which Captain Stevens had sailed to India, round the Cape of +Good Hope. There were many French vessels also in the Pool, and indeed +almost every flag save that of Spain was represented. Innumerable +wherries darted about among the shipping, and heavier cargo boats +dropped along in more leisurely fashion. Across the river, a quarter of +a mile above the point at which they were lying, stretched London +Bridge, with its narrow arches and the houses projecting beyond it on +their supports of stout timbers. Beyond, on the right, rising high +above the crowded roofs, was the lofty spire of St. Paul's. The boys +were almost awed by this vast assemblage of buildings. That London was +a great city they had known, but they were not prepared for so immense +a difference between it and the place where they had lived all their +lives. Only with the Tower were they somewhat disappointed. It was very +grand and very extensive, but not so much grander than the stately +abode of the Veres as they had looked for. + +"I wouldn't change, if I were the earl, with the queen's majesty," +Geoffrey said. "Of course it is larger than Hedingham, but not so +beautiful, and it is crowded in by the houses, and has not like our +castle a fair look-out on all sides. Why, there can be no hunting or +hawking near here, and I can't think what the nobles can find to do all +day." + +"Now, young sirs," Master Lirriper said, "if you will get your wallets +we will go ashore at once." + +The boys were quite bewildered as they stepped ashore by the bustle and +confusion. Brawny porters carrying heavy packages on their backs pushed +along unceremoniously, saying from time to time in a mechanical sort of +way, "By your leave, sir!" but pushing on and shouldering passers-by +into the gutter without the smallest compunction. The narrowness and +dinginess of the streets greatly surprised and disappointed the boys, +who found that in these respects even Harwich compared favourably with +the region they were traversing. Presently, however, after passing +through several lanes and alleys, they emerged into a much broader +street, alive with shops. The people who were walking here were for the +most part well dressed and of quiet demeanour, and there was none of +the rough bustle that had prevailed in the river-side lanes. + +"This is Eastchepe," their conductor said; "we have not far to go now. +The street in which my friend dwells lies to the right, between this +and Tower Street. I could have taken you a shorter way there, but I +thought that your impressions of London would not be favourable did I +take you all the way through those ill-smelling lanes." + +In a quarter of an hour they arrived at their destination, and entered +the shop, which smelt strongly of tar; coils of rope of all sizes were +piled up one upon another by the walls, while on shelves above them +were blocks, lanterns, compasses, and a great variety of gear of whose +use the boys were ignorant. The chandler was standing at his door. + +"I am right glad to see you, Master Lirriper," he said, "and have been +expecting you for the last two or three days. My wife would have it +that some evil must have befallen you; but you know what women are. +They make little allowance for time or tide or distance, but expect +that every one can so arrange his journeys as to arrive at the very +moment when they begin to expect him. But who have you here with you?" + +"These are the sons of the worshipful Mr. Vickars, the rector of our +parish, and tutor to the Earl of Oxford and several of the young Veres, +his cousins--a wise gentleman and a kind one, and much loved among us. +He has entrusted his two sons to me that I might show them somewhat of +this city of yours. I said that I was right sure that you and your good +dame would let them occupy the chamber you intended for me, while I can +make good shift on board the _Susan_." + +"Nay, nay, Master Lirriper; our house is big enough to take in you and +these two young masters, and Dorothy would deem it a slight indeed upon +her hospitality were you not to take up your abode here too. You will +be heartily welcome, young sirs, and though such accommodation as we +can give you will not be equal to that which you are accustomed to, I +warrant me that you will find it a pleasant change after that poky +little cabin on board the _Susan_. I know it well, for I supply +her with stores, and have often wondered how men could accustom +themselves to pass their lives in places where there is scarce room to +turn, to say nothing of the smell of fish that always hangs about it. +But if you will follow me I will take you up to my good dame, to whose +care I must commit you for the present, as my foreman, John Watkins, is +down by the riverside seeing to the proper delivery of divers stores on +board a ship which sails with the next tide for Holland. My +apprentices, too, are both out, as I must own is their wont. They +always make excuses to slip down to the river-side when there is aught +doing, and I am far too easy with the varlets. So at present, you see, +I cannot long leave my shop." + +So saying the chandler preceded them up a wide staircase that led from +a passage behind the shop, and the boys perceived that the house was +far more roomy and comfortable than they had judged from its outward +appearance. Turning to the left when he reached the top of the stairs +the chandler opened a door. + +"Dorothy," he said, "here is your kinsman, Master Lirriper, who has +suffered none of the misadventures you have been picturing to yourself +for the last two days, and he has brought with him these young +gentlemen, sons of the rector of Hedingham, to show them something of +London." + +"You are welcome, young gentlemen," Dame Dorothy said, "though why +anyone should come to London when he can stay away from it I know not." + +"Why, Dorothy, you are always running down our city, though I know +right well that were I to move down with you to your native Essex again +you would very soon cry out for the pleasures of the town." + +"That would I not," she said. "I would be well contented to live in +fresh country air all the rest of my life, though I do not say that +London has not its share of pleasures also, though I care but little +for them." + +"Ah, Master Lirriper," her husband said laughing, "you would not think, +to hear her talk, that there is not a feast or a show that Dorothy +would stay away from. She never misses an opportunity, I warrant you, +of showing herself off in her last new kirtle and gown. But I must be +going down; there is no one below, and if a customer comes and finds +the shop empty he will have but a poor idea of me, and will think that +I am away gossiping instead of attending to my business." + +"Are you hungry, young sirs?" the dame asked. "Because if so the maid +shall bring up a manchet of bread and a cup of sack; if not, our +evening meal will be served in the course of an hour." + +The boys both said that they were perfectly able to wait until the meal +came; and Geoffrey added, "If you will allow us, mistress, as doubtless +you have private matters to talk of with Master Lirriper, my brother +and I will walk out for an hour to see something of the town." + +"Mind that you lose not your way," Master Lirriper said. "Do not go +beyond Eastchepe, I beg you. There are the shops to look at there, and +the fashions of dress and other matters that will occupy your attention +well enough for that short time. To-morrow morning I will myself go +with you, and we can then wander further abroad. I have promised your +good father to look after you, you know; and it will be but a bad +beginning if you meet with any untoward adventure upon this the first +day of your arrival here." + +"We will not go beyond the limits of Eastchepe; and as to adventures, I +can't see very well how any can befall us." + +"Oh, there are plenty of adventures to be met with in London, young +sir; and I shall be well content if on the day when we again embark on +board the _Susan_ none of them have fallen to your share." + +The two lads accordingly sallied out and amused themselves greatly by +staring at the goods exhibited in the open shops. They were less +surprised at the richness and variety of the silver work, at the silks +from the East, the costly satins, and other stuffs, than most boys from +the country would have been, for they were accustomed to the splendour +and magnificence displayed by the various noble guests at the castle, +and saw nothing here that surpassed the brilliant shows made at the +jousting and entertainments at Hedingham. + +It was the scene that was novel to them: the shouts of the apprentices +inviting attention to their employers' wares, the crowd that filled the +street, consisting for the most part of the citizens themselves, but +varied by nobles and knights of the court, by foreigners from many +lands, by soldiers and men-at-arms from the Tower, by countrymen and +sailors. Their amusement was sometimes turned into anger by the +flippant remarks of the apprentices; these varlets, perceiving easily +enough by the manner of their attire that they were from the country, +were not slow, if their master happened for the moment to be absent, in +indulging in remarks that set Geoffrey and Lionel into a fever to +commit a breach of the peace. The "What do you lack, masters?" with +which they generally addressed passers-by would be exchanged for +remarks such as, "Do not trouble the young gentlemen, Nat. Do you not +see they are up in the town looking for some of their master's calves?" +or, "Look you, Philip, here are two rustics who have come up to town to +learn manners." + +"I quite see, Geoffrey," Lionel said, taking his brother by the arm and +half dragging him away as he saw that he was clenching his fist and +preparing to avenge summarily one of these insults even more pointed +than usual, "that Master Lirriper was not very far out, and there is no +difficulty in meeting with adventures in the streets of London. +However, we must not give him occasion on this our first stroll in the +streets to say that we cannot be trusted out of his sight. If we were +to try to punish these insolent varlets we should have them upon us +like a swarm of bees, and should doubtless get worsted in the +encounter, and might even find ourselves hauled off to the lock-up, and +that would be a nice tale for Master Lirriper to carry back to +Hedingham." + +"That is true enough, Lionel; but it is not easy to keep one's temper +when one is thus tried. I know not how it is they see so readily that +we are strangers, for surely we have mixed enough with the earl's +family and friends to have rubbed off the awkwardness that they say is +common to country folk; and as to our dress, I do not see much +difference between its fashion and that of other people. I suppose it +is because we look interested in what is going on, instead of strolling +along like those two youths opposite with our noses in the air, as if +we regarded the city and its belongings as infinitely below our regard. +Well, I think we had best be turning back to Master Swindon's; it will +not do to be late for our meal." + +"Well, young sirs, what do you think of our shops?" Dame Swindon asked +as they entered. + +"The shops are well enough," Geoffrey replied; "but your apprentices +seem to me to be an insolent set of jackanapes, who take strange +liberties with passers-by, and who would be all the better for +chastisement. If it hadn't been that Lionel and I did not wish to +become engaged in a brawl, we should have given some of them lessons in +manners." + +"They are free in speech," Dame Swindon said, "and are an impudent set +of varlets. They have quick eyes and ready tongues, and are no +respecters of persons save of their masters and of citizens in a +position to lay complaints against them and to secure them punishment. +They hold together greatly, and it is as well that you should not +become engaged in a quarrel with them. At times they have raised +serious tumults, and have even set not only the watch but the citizens +at large at defiance. Strong measures have been several times taken +against them; but they are a powerful body, seeing that in every shop +there are one or more of them, and they can turn out with their clubs +many thousand strong. They have what they call their privileges, and +are as ready to defend them as are the citizens of London to uphold +their liberties. Ordinances have been passed many times by the fathers +of the city, regulating their conduct and the hours at which they may +be abroad and the carrying of clubs and matters of this kind, but the +apprentices seldom regard them, and if the watch arrest one for a +breach of regulations, he raises a cry, and in two or three minutes a +swarm of them collect and rescue the offender from his hands. Therefore +it is seldom that the watch interferes with them." + +"It would almost seem then that the apprentices are in fact the +masters," Geoffrey said. + +"Not quite as bad as that," Master Swindon replied. "There are the +rules which they have to obey when at home, and if not they get a +whipping; but it is difficult to keep a hand over them when they are +abroad. After the shops are closed and the supper over they have from +time immemorial the right to go out for two hours' exercise. They are +supposed to go and shoot at the butts; but archery, I grieve to say, is +falling into disrepute, and although many still go to the butts the +practice is no longer universal. But here is supper." + +Few words were spoken during the meal. The foreman and the two +apprentices came up and sat down with the family, and it was not until +these had retired that the conversation was again resumed. + +"Where are you going to take them to-morrow, Master Lirriper?" + +"To-morrow we will see the city, the shops in Chepe, the Guildhall, and +St. Paul's, then we shall issue out from Temple Bar and walk along the +Strand through the country to Westminster and see the great abbey, then +perhaps take a boat back. The next day, if the weather be fine, we will +row up to Richmond and see the palace there, and I hope you will go +with us, Mistress Dorothy; it is a pleasant promenade and a +fashionable, and methinks the river with its boats is after all the +prettiest sight in London." + +"Ah, you think there can be nothing pretty without water. That is all +very well for one who is ever afloat, Master Lirriper; but give me +Chepe at high noon with all its bravery of dress, and the bright shops, +and the gallants of the court, and our own citizens too, who if not +quite so gay in colour are proper men, better looking to my mind than +some of the fops with their silver and satins." + +"That's right, Dorothy," her husband said; "spoken like the wife of a +citizen." + +All these plans were destined to be frustrated. As soon as breakfast +was over the next morning Master Lirriper started with the two boys, +and they had but just entered Chepe-side when they saw two young men +approaching. + +"Why, Lionel, here is Francis Vere!" Geoffrey exclaimed. "I thought he +was across in Holland with the Earl of Leicester." They doffed their +caps. Captain Vere, for such was now his rank, looked at them in +surprise. + +"Why!" he exclaimed, "here are Mr. Vickars' two sons. How came you +here, lads? Have you run away from home to see the wonders of London, +or to list as volunteers for the campaigns against the Dons?" + +"I wish we were, Mr. Francis," Geoffrey said. "You promised when you +were at Hedingham a year and a half since that you would some day take +us to the wars with you, and our father, seeing that neither of us have +a mind to enter the church, has quite consented that we shall become +soldiers, the more so as there is a prospect of fighting for the +persecuted Protestants of Holland. And oh, Mr. Francis, could it be +now? You know we daily exercise with arms at the castle, and we are +both strong and sturdy for our age, and believe me you should not see +us flinch before the Spaniards however many of them there were." + +"Tut, tut!" Captain Vere laughed. "Here are young cockerels, Allen; +what think you of these for soldiers to stand against the Spanish +pikemen?" + +"There are many of the volunteers who are not very much older than they +are," Captain Allen replied. "There are two in my company who must be +between seventeen and eighteen." + +"Ah! but these boys are three years younger than that." + +"Would you not take us as your pages, Mr. Francis?" Lionel urged. "We +would do faithful service, and then when we come to the age that you +could enter us as volunteers we should already have learnt a little of +war." + +"Well, well, I cannot stop to talk to you now, for I am on my way to +the Tower on business. I am only over from Holland for a day or two +with despatches from the Earl to Her Majesty's Council, and am lodging +at Westminster in a house that faces the abbey. It is one of my cousin +Edward's houses, and you will see the Vere cognizance over the door. +Call there at one hour after noon, and I will have a talk with you; but +do not buoy yourselves up with hopes as to your going with me." So +saying, with a friendly nod of his head Francis Vere continued his way +eastward. + +"What think you, Allen?" he asked his comrade as they went along. "I +should like to take the lads with me if I could. Their father, who is +the rector of Hedingham, taught my cousin Edward as well as my brothers +and myself. I saw a good deal of the boys when I was at home. They are +sturdy young fellows, and used to practise daily, as we did at their +age, with the men-at-arms at the castle, and can use their weapons. A +couple of years of apprenticeship would be good schooling for them. One +cannot begin to learn the art of war too young, and it is because we +have all been so ignorant of it that our volunteers in Holland have not +done better." + +"I think, Vere, that they are too young yet to be enlisted as +volunteers, although in another two years, perhaps, you might admit the +elder of the two. But I see no reason why, if you are so inclined, you +should not take them with you as pages. Each company has its pages and +boys, and you might take these two for the special service of yourself +and your officers. They would then be on pretty well the same footing +as the five gentlemen volunteers you have already with you, and would +be distinct from the lads who have entered as pages to the company. I +suppose that you have not yet your full number of boys?" + +"No; there are fifteen boys allowed, one to each ten men, and I am +several short of this number, and have already written my brother John +to get six sturdy lads from among our own tenantry and to send them +over in the first ship from Harwich. Yes, I will take these lads with +me. I like their spirit, and we are all fond of their father, who is a +very kindly as well as learned man." + +"I don't suppose he will thank you greatly, Francis," Captain Allen +laughed. + +"His goodwife is more likely to be vexed than he is," Captain Vere +said, "for it will give him all the more time for the studies in which +he is wrapped up. Besides, it will be a real service to the boys. It +will shorten their probation as volunteers, and they may get +commissions much earlier than they otherwise would do. We are all mere +children in the art of war; for truly before Roger Morgan first took +out his volunteers to fight for the Dutch there was scarce a man in +England who knew how to range a company in order. You and I learned +somewhat of our business in Poland, and some of our leaders have also +had a few lessons in the art of war in foreign countries, but most of +our officers are altogether new to the work. However, we have good +masters, and I trust these Spaniards may teach us how to beat them in +time; but at present, as I said, we are all going to school, and the +earlier one begins at school the sooner one learns its lessons. +Besides, we must have pages, and it will be more pleasant for me having +lads who belong in a sort of way to our family, and to whom, if I am +disposed, I can talk of people at home. They are high-spirited and full +of fun, and I should like to have them about me. But here we are at the +Tower. We shall not be long, I hope, over the list of arms and +munitions that the earl has sent for. When we have done we will take +boat back to Westminster. Half an hour will take us there, as the tide +will be with us." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +IN THE LOW COUNTRY. + + +Master Lirriper had stood apart while the boys were conversing with +Francis Vere. + +"What do you think, Master Lirriper?" Geoffrey exclaimed as they joined +him. "We have asked Mr. Vere to take us with him as pages to the war in +the Low Country, and though he said we were not to be hopeful about his +reply, I do think he will take us. We are to go round to Westminster at +one o'clock to see him again. What do you think of that?" + +"I don't know what to think, Master Geoffrey. It takes me all by +surprise, and I don't know how I stand in the matter. You see, your +father gave you into my charge, and what could I say to him if I went +back empty-handed?" + +"But, you see, it is with Francis Vere," Geoffrey said. "If it had been +with anyone else it would be different. But the Veres are his patrons, +and he looks upon the earl, and Mr. Francis and his brothers, almost as +he does on us; and, you know, he has already consented to our entering +the army some day. Besides, he can't blame you; because, of course, Mr. +Vere will write to him himself and say that he has taken us, and so you +can't be blamed in the matter. My father would know well enough that +you could not withstand the wishes of one of the Veres, who are lords +of Hedingham and all the country round." + +"I should withstand them if I thought they were wrong," the boatman +said sturdily, "and if I were sure that your father would object to +your going; but that is what I am not sure. He may think it the best +thing for you to begin early under the protection of Master Francis, +and again he may think you a great deal too young for such wild work. +He has certainly always let you have pretty much your own way, and has +allowed you to come and go as you like, but this is a different +business altogether. I am sorely bested as to what I ought to do." + +"Well, nothing is settled yet, Master Lirriper; and, besides, I don't +see that you can help yourself in the matter, and if Mr. Vere says he +will take us I suppose you can't carry us off by force." + +"It is Mistress Vickars that I am thinking of more than your father. +The vicar is an easy-going gentleman, but Mistress Vickars speaks her +mind, and I expect she will be in a terrible taking over it, and will +rate me soundly; though, as you say, I do not see how I can help myself +in the matter. Well now, let us look at the shops and at the Guildhall, +and then we will make our way down to Westminster as we had proposed to +do and see the abbey; by that time it will be near the hour at which +you are to call upon Mr. Vere." + +But the sights that the boys had been so longing to see had for the +time lost their interest in their eyes. The idea that it was possible +that Mr. Vere would take them with him to fight against the cruel +oppressors of the Low Country was so absorbing that they could think of +nothing else. Even the wonders of the Guildhall and St. Paul's received +but scant attention, and the armourers' shops, in which they had a new +and lively interest, alone sufficed to detain them. Even the gibes of +the apprentices fell dead upon their ears. These varlets might laugh, +but what would they say if they knew that they were going to fight the +Spaniards. The thought so altered them that they felt almost a feeling +of pity for these lads, condemned to stay at home and mind their +masters' shops. + +As to John Lirriper, he was sorely troubled in his mind, and divided +between what he considered his duty to the vicar and his life-long +respect and reverence towards the lords of Hedingham. The feudal system +was extinct, but feudal ideas still lingered among the people. Their +lords could no longer summon them to take the field, had no longer +power almost of life and death over them, but they were still their +lords, and regarded with the highest respect and reverence. The earls +of Oxford were, in the eyes of the people of those parts of Essex where +their estates lay, personages of greater importance than the queen +herself, of whose power and attributes they had but a very dim notion. +It was not so very long since people had risen in rebellion against the +queen, but such an idea as that of rising against their lords had never +entered the mind of a single inhabitant of Hedingham. + +However, Master Lirriper came to the conclusion that he was, as +Geoffrey had said, powerless to interfere. If Mr. Francis Vere decided +to take the boys with him, what could he do to prevent it? He could +hardly take them forcibly down to the boat against their will, and even +could he do so their father might not approve, and doubtless the earl, +when he came to hear of it, would be seriously angry at this act of +defiance of his kinsman. Still, he was sure that he should have a very +unpleasant time with Mistress Vickars. But, as he reassured himself, it +was, after all, better to put up with a woman's scolding than to bear +the displeasure of the Earl of Oxford, who could turn him out of his +house, ruin his business, and drive him from Hedingham. After all, it +was natural that these lads should like to embark on this adventure +with Mr. Francis Vere, and it would doubtless be to their interest to +be thus closely connected with him. At any rate, if it was to be it +was, and he, John Lirriper, could do nothing to prevent it. Having +arrived at this conclusion he decided to make the best of it, and began +to chat cheerfully with the boys. + +Precisely at the appointed hour John Lirriper arrived with the two lads +at the entrance to the house facing the abbey. Two or three servitors, +whose doublets were embroidered with the cognizance of the Veres, were +standing in front of the door. + +"Why, it is Master Lirriper!" one of them said. "Why, what has brought +you here? I did not know that your trips often extended to London." + +"Nor do they," John Lirriper said. "It was the wind and my nephew's +craft the _Susan_ that brought me to London, and it is the will of +Mr. Francis that these two young gentlemen should meet him here at one +o'clock that has brought me to this door." + +"Captain Francis is in; for, you know, he is a captain now, having been +lately appointed to a company in the Earl of Leicester's army. He +returned an hour since, and has but now finished his meal. Do you wish +to go up with these young masters, or shall I conduct them to him?" + +"You had best do that," John Lirriper answered. "I will remain here +below if Captain Francis desires to see me or has any missive to +intrust to me." + +The boys followed the servant upstairs, and were shown into a room +where Francis Vere, his cousin the Earl of Oxford, and Captain Allen +were seated at table. + +"Well, lads," the earl said, "so you want to follow my cousin Francis +to the wars?" + +"That is our wish, my lord, if Captain Francis will be so good as to +take us with him." + +"And what will my good tutor your father say to it?" the earl asked +smiling. + +"I think, my lord," Geoffrey said boldly, "that if you yourself will +tell my father you think it is for our good, he will say naught against +it." + +"Oh, you want to throw the responsibility upon me, and to embroil me +with your father and Mistress Vickars as an abettor of my cousin +Francis in the kidnapping of children? Well, Francis, you had better +explain to them what their duties will be if they go with you." + +"You will be my pages," Francis Vere said, "and will perform the usual +duties of pages in good families when in the field. It is the duty of +pages to aid in collecting firewood and forage, and in all other ways +to make themselves useful. You will bear the same sort of relation to +the gentlemen volunteers as they do towards the officers. They are +aspirants for commissions as officers as you will be to become +gentlemen volunteers. You must not think that your duties will be +light, for they will not, and you will have to bear many discomforts +and hardships. But you will be in an altogether different position from +that of the boys who are the pages of the company. You will, apart from +your duties, and bearing in mind the difference of your age, associate +with the officers and the gentlemen volunteers on terms of equality +when not engaged upon duty. On duty you will have to render the same +strict and unquestionable obedience that all soldiers pay to those of +superior rank. What say you? Are you still anxious to go? Because, if +so, I have decided to take you." + +Geoffrey and Lionel both expressed their thanks in proper terms, and +their earnest desire to accompany Captain Vere, and to behave in all +ways conformably to his orders and instructions. + +"Very well, that is settled," Francis Vere said. "The earl is +journeying down to Hedingham to-morrow, and has kindly promised to take +charge of a letter from me to your father, and personally to assure him +that this early embarkation upon military life would prove greatly to +your advantage." + +"Supposing that you are not killed by the Spaniards or carried off by +fever," the earl put in; "for although possibly that might be an +advantage to humanity in general, it could scarcely be considered one +to you personally." + +"We are ready to take our risk of that, my lord," Geoffrey said; "and +are indeed greatly beholden both to Captain Francis for his goodness in +taking us with him, and to yourself in kindly undertaking the mission +of reconciling our father to our departure." + +"You have not told me yet how it is that I find you in London?" Francis +Vere said. + +"We only came up for a week, sir, to see the town. We are in charge of +Master Lirriper, who owns a barge on the river, and plies between +Hedingham and Bricklesey, but who was coming up to London in a craft +belonging to his nephew, and who took charge of us. We are staying at +the house of Master Swindon, a citizen and ship-chandler." + +"Is Master Lirriper below?" + +"He is, sir." + +"Then in that case he had better go back to the house and bring your +mails here. I shall sail from Deptford the day after to-morrow with the +turn of tide. You had best remain here now. There will be many things +necessary for you to get before you start. I will give instructions to +one of my men-at-arms to go with you to purchase them." + +"I will take their outfit upon myself, Francis," the earl said. "My +steward shall go out with them and see to it. It is the least I can do +when I am abetting you in depriving my old tutor of his sons." He +touched a bell and a servitor entered. "See that these young gentlemen +are fed and attended to. They will remain here for the night. Tell +Master Dotterell to come hither to me." + +The boys bowed deeply and retired. + +"It is all settled, Master Lirriper," they said when they reached the +hall below. "We are to sail with Captain Francis the day after to- +morrow, and you will be pleased to hear that the earl himself has taken +charge of the matter, and will see our father and communicate the news +to him." + +"That is a comfort indeed," John Lirriper said fervently; "for I would +most as soon have had to tell him that the _Susan_ had gone down +and that you were both drowned, as that I had let you both slip away to +the wars when he had given you into my charge. But if the earl takes +the matter in hand I do not think that even your lady mother can bear +very heavily on me. And now, what is going to be done?" + +"We are to remain here in order that suitable clothes may be obtained +for us by the time we sail. Will you bring down to-morrow morning our +wallets from Master Swindon's, and thank him and his good dame for +their hospitality, and say that we are sorry to leave them thus +suddenly without having an opportunity of thanking them ourselves? We +will write letters to-night to our father and mother, and give them to +you to take with you when you return." + +John Lirriper at once took his departure, greatly relieved in mind to +find that the earl himself had taken the responsibility upon his +shoulders, and would break the news long before he himself reached +Hedingham. A few minutes later a servitor conducted the boys to an +apartment where a meal was laid for them; and as soon as this was over +they were joined by the steward, who requested them to set out with him +at once, as there were many things to be done and but short time for +doing them. No difficulty in the way of time was, however, thrown in +the way by the various tradesmen they visited, these being all +perfectly ready to put themselves to inconvenience to do pleasure to so +valuable a patron as the powerful Earl of Oxford. + +Three suits of clothes were ordered for each of them: the one such as +that worn by pages in noble families upon ordinary occasions, another +of a much richer kind for special ceremonies and gaieties, the third a +strong, serviceable suit for use when actually in the field. Then they +were taken to an armourer's where each was provided with a light morion +or headpiece, breast-plate and backpiece, sword and dagger. A +sufficient supply of under garments, boots, and other necessaries were +also purchased; and when all was complete they returned highly +delighted to the house. It was still scarce five o'clock, and they went +across to the abbey and wandered for some time through its aisles, +greatly impressed with its dignity and beauty now that their own +affairs were off their mind. + +They returned to the house again, and after supper wrote their letters +to their father and mother, saying that they hoped they would not be +displeased at the step they had taken, and which they would not have +ventured upon had they not already obtained their father's consent to +their entering the army. They knew, of course, that he had not +contemplated their doing so for some little time; but as so excellent +an opportunity had offered, and above all, as they were going out to +fight against the Spaniards for the oppressed people of the Low +Countries, they hoped their parents would approve of the steps they had +taken, not having had time or opportunity to consult them. + +At noon two days later Francis Vere with Captain Allen and the two boys +took their seats in the stern of a skiff manned by six rowers. In the +bow were the servitors of the two officers, and the luggage was stowed +in the extreme stern. + +"The tide is getting slack, is it not?" Captain Vere asked the boatmen. + +"Yes, sir; it will not run up much longer. It will be pretty well +slack-water by the time we get to the bridge." + +Keeping close to the bank the boat proceeded at a rapid pace. Several +times the two young officers stood up and exchanged salutations with +ladies or gentlemen of their acquaintance. As the boatman had +anticipated, tide was slack by the time they arrived at London Bridge, +and they now steered out into the middle of the river. + +"Give way, lads," Captain Allen said. "We told the captain we would not +keep him waiting long after high-water, and he will be getting +impatient if he does not see us before long." + +As they shot past the _Susan_ the boys waved their hands to Master +Lirriper, who, after coming down in the morning and receiving their +letters for their parents, had returned at once to the city and had +taken his place on board the _Susan_, so as to be able to tell +their father that he had seen the last of them. The distance between +London Bridge and Deptford was traversed in a very short time. A vessel +with her flags flying and her canvas already loosened was hanging to a +buoy some distance out in the stream, and as the boat came near enough +for the captain to distinguish those on board, the mooring-rope was +slipped, the head sails flattened in, and the vessel began to swing +round. Before her head was down stream the boat was alongside. The two +officers followed by the boys ascended the ladder by the side. The +luggage was quickly handed up, and the servitors followed. The sails +were sheeted home, and the vessel began to move rapidly through the +water. + +The boys had thought the _Susan_ an imposing craft, but they were +surprised, indeed, at the space on board the _Dover Castle_. In +the stern there was a lofty poop with spacious cabins. Six guns were +ranged along on each side of the deck, and when the sails were got up +they seemed so vast to the boys that they felt a sense of littleness on +board the great craft. They had been relieved to find that Captain Vere +had his own servitor with him; for in talking it over they had mutually +expressed their doubt as to their ability to render such service as +Captain Vere would be accustomed to. + +The wind was from the south-west, and the vessel was off Sheerness +before the tide turned. There was, however, no occasion to anchor, for +the wind was strong enough to take them against the flood. + +During the voyage they had no duties to perform. The ship's cook +prepared the meals, and the officers' servants waited on them, the lads +taking their meals with the two officers. Their destination was Bergen- +op-Zoom, a town at the mouth of the Scheldt, of the garrison of which +the companies of both Francis Vere and Captain Allen formed part. + +As soon as the low coasts of Holland came in sight the boys watched +them with the most lively interest. + +"We are passing Sluys now," Captain Vere said. "The land almost ahead +of us is Walcheren; and that spire belongs to Flushing. We could go +outside and up the channel between the island and Beveland, and then up +the Eastern Scheldt to Bergen-op-Zoom; but instead of that we shall +follow the western channel, which is more direct." + +"It is as flat as our Essex coast," Geoffrey remarked. + +"Aye, and flatter; for the greater part of the land lies below the +level of the sea, which is only kept out by great dams and dykes. At +times when the rivers are high and the wind keeps back their waters +they burst the dams and spread over a vast extent of country. The +Zuider-Zee was so formed in 1170 and 1395, and covers a tract as large +as the whole county of Essex. Twenty-six years later the river Maas +broke its banks and flooded a wide district. Seventy-two villages were +destroyed and 100,000 people lost their life. The lands have never been +recovered; and where a fertile country once stood is now a mere swamp." + +"I shouldn't like living there," Lionel said. "It would be terrible, +every time the rivers are full and the wind blows, to think that at +any moment the banks may burst and the Hood come rushing over you." + +"It is all habit," Captain Vere replied; "I don't suppose they trouble +themselves about it. But they are very particular in keeping their +dykes in good repair. The water is one of the great defences of their +country. In the first place there are innumerable streams to be crossed +by an invader, and in the second, they can as a last resource cut the +dykes and flood the country. These Dutchmen, as far as I have seen of +them, are hard-working and industrious people, steady and patient, and +resolved to defend their independence to the last. This they have +indeed proved by the wonderful resistance they have made against the +power of Spain. There, you see the ship's head has been turned and we +shall before long be in the channel. Sluys lies up that channel on the +right. It is an important place. Large vessels can go no further, but +are unloaded there and the cargoes taken to Bruges and thence +distributed to many other towns. They say that in 1468 as many as a +hundred and fifty ships a day arrived at Sluys. That gives you an idea +of the trade that the Netherlands carry on. The commerce of this one +town was as great as is that of London at the present time. But since +the troubles the trade of Sluys has fallen off a good deal." + +The ship had to anchor here for two or three hours until the tide +turned, for the wind had fallen very light and they could not make head +against the ebb. As soon as it turned they again proceeded on their +way, dropping quietly up with the tide. The boys climbed up into the +tops, and thence could see a wide extent of country dotted with +villages stretching beyond the banks, which restricted their view from +the decks. In five hours Bergen-op-Zoom came in sight, and they +presently dropped anchor opposite the town. The boat was lowered, and +the two officers with the lads were rowed ashore. They were met as they +landed by several young officers. + +"Welcome back, Vere; welcome, Allen. You have been lucky indeed in +having a few days in England, and getting a view of something besides +this dreary flat country and its sluggish rivers. What is the last news +from London?" + +"There is little news enough," Vere replied. "We were only four days in +London, and were busy all the time. And how are things here? Now that +summer is at hand and the country drying the Dons ought to be +bestirring themselves." + +"They say that they are doing so," the officer replied. "We have news +that the Duke of Parma is assembling his army at Bruges, where he is +collecting the pick of the Spanish infantry with a number of Italian +regiments which have joined him. He sent off the Marquess Del Vasto +with the Sieur De Hautepenne towards Bois-le-Duc. General Count +Hohenlohe, who, as you know, we English always call Count Holland, went +off with a large force to meet him, and we heard only this morning that +a battle has been fought, Hautepenne killed, and the fort of Crevecoeur +on the Maas captured. From what I hear, some of our leaders think that +it was a mistake so to scatter our forces, and if Parma moves forward +from Bruges against Sluys, which is likely enough, we shall be sorely +put to it to save the place." + +As they were talking they proceeded into the town, and presently +reached the house where Francis Vere had his quarters. The officers and +gentlemen volunteers of his company soon assembled, and Captain Vere +introduced the two boys to them. + +"They are young gentlemen of good family," he said, "who will act as my +pages until they are old enough to be enrolled as gentlemen volunteers. +I commend them to your good offices. Their father is a learned and +reverend gentleman who was my tutor, and also tutor to my cousin, the +Earl of Oxford, by whom he is greatly valued. They are lads of spirit, +and have been instructed in the use of arms at Hedingham as if they had +been members of our family, I am sure, gentlemen volunteers, that you +will receive them as friends. I propose that they shall take their +meals with you, but of course they will lodge here with me and my +officers; but as you are in the next house this will cause no +inconvenience. I trust that we shall not remain here long, but shall +soon be on the move. We have now been here seven months, and it is high +time we were doing something. We didn't bargain to come over here and +settle down for life in a dull Dutch town." + +In a few hours the boys found themselves quite at home in their new +quarters. The gentlemen volunteers received them cordially, and they +found that for the present their duties would be extremely light, +consisting chiefly in carrying messages and orders; for as the officers +had all servants of their own, Captain Vere dispensed with their +attendance at meals. There was much to amuse and interest them in +Bergen-op-Zoom. It reminded them to some extent of Harwich, with its +narrow streets and quaint houses; but the fortifications were far +stronger, and the number of churches struck them as prodigious. The +population differed in no very large degree in dress from that of +England, but the people struck them as being slower and more deliberate +in their motions. The women's costumes differed much more widely from +those to which they were accustomed, and their strange and varied head- +dresses, their bright-coloured handkerchiefs, and the amount of gold +necklaces and bracelets that they wore, struck them with surprise. + +Their stay in Bergen-op-Zoom was even shorter than they had +anticipated, for three days after their arrival a boat came with a +letter from Sir William Russell, the governor at Flushing. He said that +he had just received an urgent letter from the Dutch governor of Sluys, +saying that Parma's army was advancing from Bruges towards the city, +and had seized and garrisoned the fort of Blankenburg on the sea-coast +to prevent reinforcements arriving from Ostend; he therefore prayed the +governor of Flushing to send off troops and provisions with all haste +to enable him to resist the attack. Sir William requested that the +governor of Bergen-op-Zoom would at once embark the greater portion of +his force on board ship and send them to Sluys. He himself was having a +vessel filled with grain for the use of the inhabitants, and was also +sending every man he could spare from Flushing. + +In a few minutes all was bustle in the town. The trumpets of the +various companies called the soldiers to arms, and in a very short time +the troops were on their way towards the river. Here several ships had +been requisitioned for the service; and as the companies marched down +they were conducted to the ships to which they were allotted by the +quarter-masters. Geoffrey and Lionel felt no small pride as they +marched down with their troop. They had for the first time donned their +steel-caps, breast and back pieces; but this was rather for convenience +of carriage than for any present utility. They had at Captain Vere's +orders left their ordinary clothes behind them, and were now attired in +thick serviceable jerkins, with skirts coming down nearly to the knee, +like those worn by the troops. They marched at the rear of the company, +the other pages, similarly attired, following them. + +As soon as the troops were on board ship, sail was made, and the +vessels dropped down the stream. The wind was very light, and it was +not until thirty hours after starting that the little fleet arrived off +Sluys. The town, which was nearly egg-shaped, lay close to the river, +which was called the Zwin. At the eastern end, in the centre of a +detached piece of water, stood the castle, connected with the town by a +bridge of boats. + +The Zwin formed the defence on the north side, while the south and west +were covered by a very wide moat along the centre of which ran a dyke, +dividing it into two channels. On the west side this moat extended to +the Zwin, and was crossed at the point of junction by the bridge +leading to the west gate. The walls inclosed a considerable space, +containing fields and gardens. Seven windmills stood on the ramparts. +The tower of the town-hall, and those of the churches of Our Lady, St. +John, and the Grey Friars rose high above the town. + +The ships from Flushing and Bergen-op-Zoom sailed up together, and the +800 men who landed were received with immense enthusiasm by the +inhabitants, who were Protestants, and devoted to the cause of +independence. The English were under the command of Sir Roger Williams, +who had already seen so many years of service in the Low Countries; and +under him were Morgan, Thomas Baskerville, and Huntley, who had long +served with him. + +Roger Williams was an admirable man for service of this kind. He had +distinguished himself by many deeds of reckless bravery. He possessed +an inexhaustible fund of confidence and high spirits, and in his +company it was impossible to feel despondent, however desperate the +situation. + +The citizens placed their houses at the disposal of their new allies, +handsome quarters were allotted to the officers, and the soldiers were +all housed in private dwellings or the warehouses of the merchants. The +inhabitants had already for some days been working hard at their +defences, and the English at once joined them in their labours, +strengthening the weak portions of the walls, mounting cannon upon the +towers, and preparing in all ways to give a warm reception to the +Spaniards. + +Captain Vere, his lieutenant and ensign and his two pages, were +quartered in the house of a wealthy merchant, whose family did all in +their power to make them comfortable. It was a grand old house, and the +boys, accustomed as they were to the splendours of Hedingham Castle, +agreed that the simple merchants of the Low Countries were far in +advance of English nobles in the comforts and conveniences of their +dwellings. The walls of the rooms were all heavily panelled; rich +curtains hung before the casements. The furniture was not only richly +carved, but comfortable. Heavy hangings before the doors excluded +draughts, and in the principal apartments Eastern carpets covered the +floors. The meals were served on spotless white linen. Rich plate stood +on the sideboard, and gold and silver vessels of rare carved work from +Italy glittered in the armoires. + +Above all, from top to bottom, the house was scrupulously clean. Not a +particle of dust dimmed the brightness of the furniture, and even now, +when the city was threatened with siege, the merchant's wife never +relaxed her vigilance over the doings of her maids, who seemed to the +boys to be perpetually engaged in scrubbing, dusting, and polishing. + +"Our mother prides herself on the neatness of her house," Geoffrey +said; "but what would she say, I wonder, were she to see one of these +Dutch households? I fear that the maids would have a hard time of it +afterwards, and our father would be fairly driven out of his library." + +"It is all very well to be clean," Lionel said; "but I think they carry +it too far here. Peace and quietness count for something, and it +doesn't seem to me that Dutchmen, fond of it as they say they are, know +even the meaning of the words as far as their homes are concerned. Why, +it always seems to be cleaning day, and they must be afraid of going +into their own houses with their boots on!" + +"Yes, I felt quite like a criminal to-day," Geoffrey laughed, "when I +came in muddy up to the waist, after working down there by the sluices. +I believe when the Spaniards open fire these people will be more +distracted by the dust caused by falling tiles and chimneys than by any +danger of their lives." + +Great difficulties beset the Duke of Parma at the commencement of the +siege. Sluys was built upon the only piece of solid ground in the +district, and it was surrounded by such a labyrinth of canals, ditches, +and swamps, that it was said that it was almost as difficult to find +Sluys as it was to capture it. Consequently, it was impossible to find +ground solid enough for a camp to be pitched upon, and the first labour +was the erection of wooden huts for the troops upon piles driven into +the ground. These huts were protected from the fire of the defenders by +bags of earth brought in boats from a long distance. The main point +selected for the attack was the western gate; but batteries were also +placed to play upon the castle and the bridge of boats connecting it +with the town. + +"There is one advantage in their determining to attack us at the +western extremity of the town," John Menyn, the merchant at whose house +Captain Vere and his party were lodging, remarked when his guest +informed him there was no longer any doubt as to the point at which the +Spaniards intended to attack, "for they will not be able to blow up our +walls with mines in that quarter." + +"How is that?" Francis Vere asked. + +"If you can spare half an hour of your time I will show you," the +merchant said. + +"I can spare it now, Von Menyn," Vere replied; "for the information is +important, whatever it may be." + +"I will conduct you there at once. There is no time like the present." + +"Shall we follow you, sir?" Geoffrey asked his captain. + +"Yes, come along," Vere replied. "The matter is of interest, and for +the life of me I cannot make out what this obstacle can be of which our +host speaks." + +They at once set out. + +John Menyn led them to a warehouse close to the western wall, and spoke +a few words to its owner, who at once took three lanterns from the wall +and lighted them, handing one to Vere, another to John Menyn, and +taking the other himself; he then unlocked a massive door. A flight of +steps leading apparently to a cellar were visible. He led the way down, +the two men following, and the boys bringing up the rear. The descent +was far deeper than they had expected, and when they reached the bottom +they found themselves in a vast arched cellar filled with barrels. From +this they proceeded into another, and again into a third. + +"What are these great magazines?" Francis Vere asked in surprise. + +"They are wine-cellars, and there are scores similar to those you see. +Sluys is the centre of the wine trade of Flanders and Holland, and +cellars like these extend right under the wall. All the warehouses +along here have similar cellars. This end of the town was the driest, +and the soil most easily excavated. That is why the magazines for wines +are all clustered here. There is not a foot of ground behind and under +the walls at this end that is not similarly occupied, and if the +Spaniards try to drive mines to blow up the walls, they will simply +break their way into these cellars, where we can meet them and drive +them back again." + +"Excellent!" Francis Vere said. "This will relieve us of the work of +countermining, which is always tiresome and dangerous, and would be +specially so here, where we should have to dive under that deep moat +outside your walls. Now we shall only have to keep a few men on watch +in these cellars. They would hear the sound of the Spanish approaching, +and we shall be ready to give them a warm reception by the time they +break in. Are there communications between these cellars?" + +"Yes, for the most part," the wine merchant said. "The cellars are not +entirely the property of us dealers in wine. They are constructed by +men who let them, just as they would let houses. A merchant in a small +way would need but one cellar, while some of us occupy twenty or more; +therefore, there are for the most part communications, with doors, +between the various cellars, so that they can be let off in accordance +with the needs of the hirers." + +"Well, I am much obliged to you for telling me of this," Captain Vere +said. "Williams and Morgan will be glad enough to hear that there is no +fear of their being blown suddenly into the air while defending the +walls, and they will see the importance of keeping a few trusty men on +watch in the cellars nearest to the Spaniards. I shall report the +matter to them at once. The difficulty," he added smiling, "will be to +keep the men wakeful, for it seems to me that the very air is heavy +with the fumes of wine." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE SIEGE OF SLUYS. + + +Until the Spaniards had established their camp, and planted some of +their batteries, there was but little firing. Occasionally the wall- +pieces opened upon parties of officers reconnoitring, and a few shots +were fired from time to time to harass the workmen in the enemy's +batteries; but this was done rather to animate the townsmen, and as a +signal to distant friends that so far matters were going on quietly, +than with any hopes of arresting the progress of the enemy's works. +Many sorties were made by the garrison, and fierce fighting took place, +but only a score or two of men from each company were taken upon these +occasions, and the boys were compelled to remain inactive spectators of +the fight. + +In these sorties the Spanish works were frequently held for a few +minutes, gabions thrown down, and guns overturned, but after doing as +much damage as they could the assailants had to fall back again to the +town, being unable to resist the masses of pikemen brought up against +them. The boldness of these sorties, and the bravery displayed by their +English allies, greatly raised the spirits of the townsfolk, who now +organized themselves into companies, and undertook the work of guarding +the less exposed portion of the wall, thus enabling the garrison to +keep their whole strength at the points attacked. + +The townsmen also laboured steadily in adding to the defences; and two +companies of women were formed, under female captains, who took the +names of May in the Heart and Catherine the Rose. These did good +service by building a strong fort at one of the threatened points, and +this work was in their honour christened Fort Venus. + +"It is scarcely a compliment to Venus," Geoffrey laughed to his +brother. "These square-shouldered and heavily-built women do not at all +correspond with my idea of the goddess of love." + +"They are strong enough for men," Lionel said. "I shouldn't like one of +those big fat arms to come down upon my head. No, they are not pretty; +but they look jolly and good-tempered, and if they were to fight as +hard as they work they ought to do good service." + +"There is a good deal of difference between them," Geoffrey said. "Look +at those three dark-haired women with neat trim figures. They do not +look as if they belonged to the same race as the others." + +"They are not of the same race, lad," Captain Vere, who was standing +close by, said. "The big heavy women are Flemish, the others come, no +doubt, from the Walloon provinces bordering on France. The Walloons +broke off from the rest of the states and joined the Spanish almost +from the first. They were for the most part Catholics, and had little +in common with the people of the Low Country; but there were, of +course, many Protestants among them, and these were forced to emigrate, +for the Spanish allow no Protestants in the country under their rule. +Alva adopted the short and easy plan of murdering all the Protestants +in the towns he took; but the war is now conducted on rather more +humane principles, and the Protestants have the option given them of +changing their faith or leaving the country. + +"In this way, without intending it, the Spaniards have done good +service to Holland, for hundreds of thousands of industrious people +have flocked there for shelter from Antwerp, Ghent, Bruges, and other +cities that have fallen into the hands of the Spaniards, thus greatly +raising the population of Holland, and adding to its power of defence. +Besides this, the presence of these exiles, and the knowledge that a +similar fate awaits themselves if they fall again under the yoke of +Spain, nerves the people to resist to the utmost. Had it not been for +the bigotry of the Spanish, and the abominable cruelties practised by +the Inquisition, the States would never have rebelled; and even after +they did so, terms might easily have been made with them had they not +been maddened by the wholesale massacres perpetrated by Alva. There, do +you hear those women speaking? Their language is French rather than +Flemish." + +Just as they were speaking a heavy roar of cannon broke out from the +eastern end of the town. + +"They have opened fire on the castle!" Vere exclaimed. "Run, lads, +quick! and summon the company to form in the market-place in front of +our house. We are told off to reinforce the garrison of the castle in +case of attack." + +The boys hurried away at the top of their speed. They had the list of +all the houses in which the men of the company were quartered; and as +the heavy roar of cannon had brought every one to their doors to hear +what was going on, the company were in a very short time assembled. + +Francis Vere placed himself at their head, and marched them through the +long streets of the town and out through the wall on to the bridge of +boats. It was the first time the boys had been under fire; and although +they kept a good countenance, they acknowledged to each other +afterwards that they had felt extremely uncomfortable as they traversed +the bridge with the balls whistling over their heads, and sometimes +striking the water close by and sending a shower of spray over the +troops. + +[Illustration: THE FOUR PAGES CARRY DOWN THE WOUNDED SOLDIER] + +They felt easier when they entered the castle and were protected by its +walls. Upon these the men took their station. Those with guns +discharged their pieces against the Spanish artillerymen, the pikemen +assisted the bombardiers to work the cannon, and the officers went to +and fro encouraging the men. The pages of the company had little to do +beyond from time to time carrying cans of wine and water to the men +engaged. Geoffrey and Lionel, finding that their services were not +required by Captain Vere, mounted on to the wall, and sheltering +themselves as well as they could behind the battlements, looked out at +what was going on. + +"It doesn't seem to me," Geoffrey said, "that these walls will long +withstand the balls of the Spanish. The battlements are already knocked +down in several places, and I can hear after each shot strikes the +walls the splashing of the brickwork as it falls into the water. See! +there is Tom Carroll struck down with a ball. It's our duty to carry +him away." + +They ran along the wall to the fallen soldier. Two other pages came up, +and the four carried him to the top of the steps and then down into the +court-yard, where a Dutch surgeon took charge of him. His shoulder had +been struck by the ball, and the arm hung only by a shred of flesh. The +surgeon shook his head. + +"I can do nothing for him," he said. "He cannot live many hours." + +Lionel had done his share in carrying the man down, but he now turned +sick and faint. + +Geoffrey caught him by the arm. "Steady, old boy," he said; "it is +trying at first, but we shall soon get accustomed to it. Here, take a +draught of wine from this flask." + +"I am better now," Lionel said, after taking a draught of wine. "I felt +as if I was going to faint, Geoffrey. I don't know why I should, for I +did not feel frightened when we were on the wall." + +"Oh, it has nothing to do with fear; it is just the sight of that poor +fellow's blood. There is nothing to be ashamed of in that. Why, I saw +Will Atkins, who was one of the best fighters and single-stick players +in Hedingham, go off in a dead swoon because a man he was working with +crushed his thumb between two heavy stones. Look, Lionel, what cracks +there are in the wall here. I don't think it will stand long. We had +better run up and tell Captain Vere, for it may come toppling down with +some of the men on it." + +Captain Vere on hearing the news ran down and examined the wall. + +"Yes," he said, "it is evidently going. A good earthwork is worth a +dozen of these walls. They will soon have the castle about our ears. +However, it is of no great importance to us. I saw you lads just now on +the wall; I did not care about ordering you down at the time; but don't +go up again except to help to carry down the wounded. Make it a rule, +my boys, never to shirk your duty, however great the risk to life may +be; but, on the other hand, never risk your lives unless it is your +duty to do so. What is gallantry in the one case is foolishness in the +other. Although you are but pages, yet it may well be that in such a +siege as this you will have many opportunities of showing that you are +of good English stock; but while I would have you shrink from no danger +when there is a need for you to expose yourselves, I say also that you +should in no way run into danger wantonly." + +Several times in the course of the afternoon the boys took their turn +in going up and helping to bring down wounded men. As the time went on +several yawning gaps appeared in the walls. The court-yard was strewn +with fragments of masonry, and the pages were ordered to keep under +shelter of the wall of the castle unless summoned on duty. Indeed, the +court-yard had now become a more dangerous station than the wall +itself; for not only did the cannon-shot fly through the breaches, but +fragments of bricks, mortar, and rubbish flew along with a force that +would have been fatal to anything struck. + +Some of the pages were big fellows of seventeen or eighteen years old, +who had been serving for some years under Morgan and Williams, and +would soon be transferred into the ranks. + +"I like not this sort of fighting," one of them said. "It is all very +well when it comes to push of pike with the Spaniards, but to remain +here like chickens in a coop while they batter away at us is a game for +which I have no fancy. What say you, Master Vickars?" + +"Well, it is my first experience, Somers, and I cannot say that it is +agreeable. I do not know whether I should like hand-to-hand fighting +better; but it seems to me at present that it would be certainly more +agreeable to be doing something than to be sitting here and listening +to the falls of the pieces of masonry and the whistling of the balls. I +don't see that they will be any nearer when they have knocked this +place to pieces. They have no boats, and if they had, the guns on the +city wall would prevent their using them; besides, when the bridge of +boats is removed they could do nothing if they got here." + +Towards evening a council was held, all the principal officers being +present, and it was decided to evacuate the castle. It could indeed +have been held for some days longer, but it was plain it would at +length become untenable; the bridge of boats had already been struck in +several places, and some of the barges composing it had sunk level with +the water. Were it destroyed, the garrison of the castle would be +completely cut off, and as no great advantage was to be gained by +holding the position, for it was evident that it was upon the other end +of the town the main attack was to be made, it was decided to evacuate +it under cover of night. As soon as it became dark this decision was +carried into effect, and for hours the troops worked steadily, +transporting the guns, ammunition, and stores of all kinds across from +the castle to the town. + +Already communication with their friends outside had almost ceased, for +the first operation of the enemy had been to block the approach to +Sluys from the sea. Boats had been moored head and stern right across +Zwin, and a battery erected upon each shore to protect them; but +Captains Hart and Allen twice swam down to communicate with friendly +vessels below the obstacle, carrying despatches with them from the +governor to the States-General, and from Roger Williams to the English +commanders, urging that no time should be lost in assembling an army to +march to the relief of the town. + +Both contained assurances that the garrison would defend the place to +the last extremity, but pointed out that it was only a question of +time, and that the town must fall unless relieved. The Dutch garrison +were 800 strong, and had been joined by as many English. Parma had at +first marched with but 6000 men against the city, but had very speedily +drawn much larger bodies of men towards him, and had, as Roger Williams +states in a letter to the queen sent from Sluys at an early period of +the siege, four regiments of Walloons, four of Germans, one of +Italians, one of Burgundians, fifty-two companies of Spaniards, twenty- +four troops of horse, and forty-eight guns. This would give a total of +at least 17,000 men, and further reinforcements afterwards arrived. + +Against so overwhelming a force as this, it could not be hoped that the +garrison, outnumbered by more than ten to one, could long maintain +themselves, and the Duke of Parma looked for an easy conquest of the +place. By both parties the possession of Sluys was regarded as a matter +of importance out of all proportion to the size and population of the +town; for at that time it was known in England that the King of Spain +was preparing a vast fleet for the invasion of Britain, and Sluys was +the nearest point to our shores at which a fleet could gather and the +forces of Parma embark to join those coming direct from, Spain. The +English, therefore, were determined to maintain the place to the last +extremity, and while Parma had considered its capture as an affair of a +few days only, the little garrison were determined that for weeks at +any rate they would be able to prolong the resistance, feeling sure +that before that time could elapse both the States and England, knowing +the importance of the struggle, would send forces to their relief. + +The view taken as to the uselessness of defending the castle was fully +justified, as the Spaniards on the following day removed the guns that +they had employed in battering it, to their works facing the western +gate, and fire was opened next morning. Under cover of this the Spanish +engineers pushed their trenches up to the very edge of the moat, in +spite of several desperate sorties by the garrison. The boys had been +forbidden by Captain Vere to take their place with the company on the +walls. + +"In time," he said, "as our force decreases, we shall want every one +capable of handling arms to man the breaches, but at present we are not +in any extremity; and none save those whom duty compels to be there +must come under the fire of the Spaniards, for to do so would be +risking life without gain." + +They had, however, made friends with the wine merchant whose cellars +they had visited, and obtained permission from him to visit the upper +storey of his warehouse whenever they chose. From a window here they +were enabled to watch all that was taking place, for the warehouse was +much higher than the walls. It was not in the direct line of fire of +the Spanish batteries, for these were chiefly concentrated against the +wall a little to their right. After heavy fighting the Spaniards one +night, by means of boats from the Zwin, landed upon the dyke which +divided the moat into two channels, and thus established themselves so +close under the ramparts that the guns could not be brought to bear +upon them. They proceeded to intrench themselves at once upon the dyke. + +The governor, Arnold Groenvelt, consulted with the English leaders, and +decided that the enemy must be driven off this dyke immediately, or +that the safety of the city would be gravely imperilled. They therefore +assembled a force of four hundred men, sallied out of the south gate, +where two bastions were erected on the dyke itself, and then advanced +along it to the assault of the Spaniards. The battle was a desperate +one, the English and Dutch were aided by their comrades on the wall, +who shot with guns and arquebuses against the Spaniards, while the +latter were similarly assisted by their friends along the outer edge of +the moat, and received constant reinforcements by boats from their +ships. + +The odds were too great for the assailants, who were forced at last to +fall back along the dyke to the south gate and to re-enter the town. It +was already five weeks since the English had arrived to take part in +the defence, and the struggle now began upon a great scale--thirty +cannon and eight culverins opening fire upon the walls. The heaviest +fire was on St. James' day, the 25th of July, when 4000 shots were +fired between three in the morning and five in the afternoon. While +this tremendous cannonade was going on, the boys could not but admire +the calmness shown by the population. Many of the shots, flying over +the top of the walls, struck the houses in the city, and the chimneys, +tiles, and masses of masonry fell in the streets. Nevertheless the +people continued their usual avocations. The shops were all open, +though the men employed served their customers with breast and back +pieces buckled on, and their arms close at hand, so that they could run +to the walls at once to take part in their defence did the Spaniards +attempt an assault upon them. The women stood knitting at their doors, +Frau Menyn looked as sharply after her maids as ever, and washing and +scouring went on without interruption. + +"I believe that woman will keep those girls at work after the Spaniards +have entered the city, and until they are thundering at the door," +Lionel said. "Who but a Dutch woman would give a thought to a few +particles of dust on her furniture when an enemy was cannonading the +town?" + +"I think she acts wisely after all, Lionel. The fact that everything +goes on as usual here and in other houses takes people's thoughts off +the dangers of the position, and prevents anything like panic being +felt." + +The lads spent the greater part of the day at their look-out, and could +see that the wall against which the Spanish fire was directed was fast +crumbling. Looking down upon it, it seemed deserted of troops, for it +would be needlessly exposing the soldiers to death to place them there +while the cannonade continued; but behind the wall, and in the street +leading to it, companies of English and Dutch soldiers could be seen +seated or lying on the ground. + +They were leaning out of the dormer-window in the high roof watching +the Spanish soldiers in the batteries working their guns, when, +happening to look round, they saw a crossbow protruded from a window of +the warehouse to their right, and a moment afterwards the sharp twang +of the bow was heard. There was nothing unusual in this; for although +firearms were now generally in use the long-bow and the cross-bow had +not been entirely abandoned, and there were still archers in the +English army, and many still held that the bow was a far better weapon +than the arquebus, sending its shafts well nigh as far and with a truer +aim. + +"If that fellow is noticed," Geoffrey said, "we shall have the Spanish +musketeers sending their balls in this direction. The governor has, I +heard Captain Vere say, forbidden shooting from the warehouses, because +he does not wish to attract the Spanish fire against them. Of course +when the wall yields and the breach has to be defended the warehouses +will be held, and as the windows will command the breach they will be +great aids to us then, and it would be a great disadvantage to us if +the Spaniards now were to throw shells and fire-balls into these +houses, and so to destroy them before they make their attack. Nor can +much good be gained, for at this distance a cross-bow would scarce +carry its bolts beyond the moat." + +"Most likely the man is using the cross-bow on purpose to avoid +attracting the attention of the Spaniards, Geoffrey. At this distance +they could not see the cross-bow, while a puff of smoke would be sure +to catch their eye." + +"There, he has shot again. I did not see the quarrell fall in the moat. +See, one of the Spanish soldiers from that battery is coming forward. +There, he has stooped and picked something up. Hallo! do you see that? +He has just raised his arm; that is a signal, surely." + +"It certainly looked like it," Lionel agreed. "It was a sort of half +wave of the hand. That is very strange!" + +"Very, Lionel; it looks to me very suspicious. It is quite possible +that a piece of paper may have been tied round the bolt, and that +someone is sending information to the enemy. This ought to be looked +to." + +"But what are we to do, Geoffrey? Merely seeing a Spanish soldier wave +his arm is scarcely reason enough for bringing an accusation against +anyone. We are not even sure that he picked up the bolt; and even if he +did, the action might have been a sort of mocking wave of the hand at +the failure of the shooter to send it as far as the battery." + +"It might be, of course, Lionel. No, we have certainly nothing to go +upon that would justify our making a report on the subject, but quite +enough to induce us to keep a watch on this fellow, whoever he may be. +Let us see, to begin with, if he shoots again." + +They waited for an hour, but the head of the cross-bow was not again +thrust out of the window. + +"He may have ceased shooting for either of two reasons," Geoffrey said. +"If he is a true man, because he sees that his bolts do not carry far +enough to be of any use. If he is a traitor, because he has gained his +object, and knows that his communication has reached his friends +outside. We will go down now and inquire who is the occupier of the +next warehouse." + +The merchant himself was not below, for as he did business with other +towns he had had nothing to do since Sluys was cut off from the +surrounded country; but one of his clerks was at work, making out bills +and accounts in his office as if the thunder of the guns outside was +unheard by him. The boys had often spoken to him as they passed in and +out. + +"Who occupies the warehouse on the right?" Geoffrey asked him +carelessly. + +"William Arnig," he replied. "He is a leading citizen, and one of the +greatest merchants in our trade. His cellars are the most extensive we +have, and he does a great trade in times of peace with Bruges, Ghent, +Antwerp, and other towns." + +"I suppose he is a Protestant like most of the towns-people?" Geoffrey +remarked. + +"No, he is a Catholic; but he is not one who pushes his opinions +strongly, and he is well disposed to the cause, and a captain in one of +the city bands. The Catholics and Protestants always dwell quietly +together throughout the Low Countries, and would have no animosities +against each other were it not for the Spaniards. Formerly, at least, +this was the case; but since the persecutions we have Protestant towns +and Catholic towns, the one holding to the States cause, the other +siding with the Spaniards. Why do you ask?" + +"Oh, I hadn't heard the name of your next neighbour, and was wondering +who he might be." + +The boys had now been nearly two months in Holland, and were beginning +to understand the language, which is not difficult to acquire, and +differed then even less than now from the dialect spoken in the eastern +counties of England, between whom and Holland there had been for many +generations much trade and intimate relations. + +"What had we better do next, Geoffrey?" Lionel asked as they left the +warehouse. + +"I think that in the first place, Lionel, we will take our post at the +window to-morrow, and keep a close watch all day to see whether this +shooting is repeated. If it is, we had better report the matter to +Captain Vere, and leave him to decide what should be done. I do not see +that we could undertake anything alone, and in any case, you see, it +would be a serious matter to lay an accusation against a prominent +citizen who is actually a captain of one of the bands." + +Upon the following day they took their post again at the window, and +after some hours watching saw three bolts fired from the next window. +Watching intently, they saw the two first fall into the moat. They +could not see where the other fell; but as there was no splash in the +water, they concluded that it had fallen beyond it, and in a minute +they saw a soldier again advance from the battery, pick up something at +the edge of the water, raise his arm, and retire. That evening when +Captain Vere returned from the ramparts they informed him of what they +had observed. + +"Doubtless it is an act of treachery," he said, "and this merchant is +communicating with the enemy. At the same time what you have seen, +although convincing evidence to me, is scarce enough for me to denounce +him. Doubtless he does not write these letters until he is ready to +fire them off, and were he arrested in his house or on his way to the +warehouse we might fail to find proofs of his guilt, and naught but +ill-feeling would be caused among his friends. No, whatever we do we +must do cautiously. Have you thought of any plan by which we might +catch him in the act?" + +"If two or three men could be introduced into his warehouse, and +concealed in the room from which he fires, they might succeed in +catching him in the act, Captain Vere; but the room may be an empty one +without any place whatever where they could be hidden, and unless they +were actually in the room they would be of little good, for he would +have time, if he heard footsteps, to thrust any letter he may have +written into his mouth, and so destroy it before it could be seized." + +"That is so," Captain Vere agreed. "The matter seems a difficult one, +and yet it is of the greatest importance to hinder communications with +the Spaniards. To-night all the soldiers who can be spared, aided by +all the citizens able to use matlock and pick, are to set to work to +begin to raise a half-moon round the windmill behind the point they are +attacking, so as to have a second line to fall back upon when the wall +gives way, which it will do ere long, for it is sorely shaken and +battered. It is most important to keep this from the knowledge of the +Spaniards. Now, lads, you have shown your keenness by taking notice of +what is going on, see if you cannot go further, and hit upon some plan +of catching this traitor at his work. If before night we can think of +no scheme, I must go to the governor and tell him frankly that we have +suspicions of treachery, though we cannot prove them, and ask him, in +order to prevent the possibility of our plans being communicated to the +enemy, to place some troops in all the warehouses along that line, so +that none can shoot therefrom any message to the Spaniards." + +Just as Captain Vere finished his supper, the boys came into the room +again. + +"We have thought of a plan, sir, that might succeed, although it would +be somewhat difficult. The dormer-window from which these bolts have +been fired lies thirty or forty feet away from that from which we were +looking. The roof is so steep that no one could hold a footing upon it +for a moment, nor could a plank be placed upon which he could walk. The +window is about twelve feet from the top of the roof. We think that one +standing on the ledge of our window might climb on to its top, and once +there swing a rope with a stout grapnel attached to catch on the ridge +of the roof; then two or three men might climb up there and work +themselves along, and then lower themselves down with a rope on to the +top of the next window. They would need to have ropes fastened round +their bodies, for the height is great, and a slip would mean death. + +"The one farthest out on the window could lean over when he hears a +noise below him, and when he saw the cross-bow thrust from the window, +could by a sudden blow knock it from the fellow's hand, when it would +slide down the roof and fall into the narrow yard between the warehouse +and the walls. Of course some men would be placed there in readiness to +seize it, and others at the door of the warehouse to arrest the traitor +if he ran down." + +"I think the plan is a good one, though somewhat difficult of +execution," Captain Vere said. "But this enterprise on the roof would +be a difficult one and dangerous, since as you say a slip would mean +death." + +"Lionel and myself, sir, would undertake that with the aid of two +active men to hold the ropes for us. We have both done plenty of bird- +nesting in the woods of Hedingham, and are not likely to turn giddy." + +"I don't think it is necessary for more than one to get down on to that +window," Captain Vere said. "Only one could so place himself as to look +down upon the cross-bow. However, you shall divide the honour of the +enterprise between you. You, as the eldest and strongest, Geoffrey, +shall carry out your plan on the roof, while you, Lionel, shall take +post at the door with four men to arrest the traitor when he leaves. I +will select two strong and active men to accompany you, Geoffrey, and +aid you in your attempt; but mind, before you try to get out of the +window and to climb on to its roof, have a strong rope fastened round +your body and held by the others; then in case of a slip, they can haul +you in again. I will see that the ropes and grapnels are in readiness." + +The next morning early Geoffrey proceeded with the two men who had been +selected to accompany him to his usual look-out. Both were active, wiry +men, and entered fully into the spirit of the undertaking when Geoffrey +explained its nature to them. They looked out of the dormer-window at +the sharp roof slanting away in front of them and up to the ridge +above. + +"I think, Master Vickars," one of them, Roger Browne by name, said, +"that I had best go up first. I served for some years at sea, and am +used to climbing about in dizzy places. It is no easy matter to get +from this window-sill astride the roof above us, and moreover I am more +like to heave the grapnel so that it will hook firmly on to the ridge +than you are." + +"Very well, Roger. I should be willing to try, but doubtless you would +manage it far better than I should. But before you start we will fasten +the other rope round your body, as Captain Vere directed me to do. Then +in case you slip, or anything gives way with your weight, we can check +you before you slide far down below us." + +A rope was accordingly tied round the man's body under his arms. Taking +the grapnel, to which the other rope was attached, he got out on to the +sill. It was not an easy task to climb up on to the ridge of the +dormer-window, and it needed all his strength and activity to +accomplish the feat. Once astride of the ridge the rest was easy. At +the first cast he threw the grapnel so that it caught securely on the +top of the roof. After testing it with two or three pulls he clambered +up, leaving the lower end of the rope hanging by the side of the +window. As soon as he had gained this position Geoffrey, who was to +follow him, prepared to start. + +According to the instructions Browne had given him he fastened the end +of the rope which was round Browne's body under his own shoulders, then +leaning over and taking a firm hold of the rope to which the grapnel +was attached, he let himself out of the window. Browne hauled from +above at the rope round his body, and he pulled himself with his hands +by that attached to the grapnel, and presently reached the top. + +"I am glad you came first, Roger," he said. "I do not think I could +have ever pulled myself up if you had not assisted me." + +He unfastened the rope, and the end was thrown down to the window, and +Job Tredgold, the other man, fastened it round him and was hauled up as +Geoffrey had been. + +"We will move along now to that stack of chimneys coming through the +roof four feet below the ridge on the town side," Geoffrey said. "We +can stand down there out of sight of the Spaniards. We shall be sure to +attract attention sitting up here, and might have some bullets flying +round our ears, besides which this fellow's friends might suspect our +object and signal to him in some way. It is two hours yet to the time +when we have twice seen him send his bolts across the moat." + +This was accordingly done, and for an hour and a half they sat down on +the roof with their feet against the stack of chimneys. + +"It is time to be moving now," Geoffrey said at last. "I think the best +way will be for me to get by the side of the dormer-window instead of +above it. It would be very awkward leaning over there, and I should not +have strength to strike a blow; whereas with the rope under my arms and +my foot on the edge of the sill, which projects a few inches beyond the +side of the window, I could stand upright and strike a downright blow +on the cross-bow." + +"That would be the best way, I think," Roger Browne agreed; "and I will +come down on to the top of the window and lean over. In the first place +your foot might slip, and as you dangle there by the rope he might cut +it and let you shoot over, or he might lean out and shoot you as you +climb up the roof again; but if I am above with my pistol in readiness +there will be no fear of accidents." + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +AN HEROIC DEFENCE. + + +The plan Roger Browne suggested was carried out. Geoffrey was first +lowered to his place by the side of the window, and bracing himself +against its side with a foot on the sill he managed to stand upright, +leaning against the rope that Job Tredgold held from above. Job had +instructions when Geoffrey lifted his arm to ease the rope a few inches +so as to enable the lad to lean forward. After two or three attempts +Geoffrey got the rope to the exact length which would enable him to +look round the corner and to strike a blow with his right hand, in +which he held a stout club. Roger Browne then descended by the aid of +the other rope, and fastening it round his body lay down astride of the +roof of the window with his head and shoulders over the end, and his +pistol held in readiness. + +It seemed an age to Geoffrey before he heard the sound of a footstep in +the loft beside him. He grasped his cudgel firmly and leaned slightly +forward. For ten minutes there was quiet within, and Geoffrey guessed +that the traitor was writing the missive he was about to send to the +enemy; then the footstep approached the window, and a moment later a +cross-bow was thrust out. A glance at it sufficed to show that the bolt +was enveloped in a piece of paper wound round it and secured with a +string. Steadying himself as well as he could Geoffrey struck with all +his force down upon the cross-bow. The weapon, loosely held, went +clattering down the tiles. There was an exclamation of surprise and +fury from within the window, and at the same moment Job Tredgold, +seeing that Geoffrey's attempt had been successful, hauled away at the +rope and began to drag him backward up the tiles. + +The lad saw a man lean out of the window and look up at him, then a +pistol was levelled; but the report came from above the window, and not +from the threatening weapon. A sharp cry of pain was heard, as the +pistol fell from the man's hand and followed the cross-bow down the +roof. A few seconds later Geoffrey was hauled up to the ridge, where he +was at once joined by Roger Browne. Shifting the ropes they moved along +till above the window from which they had issued. Geoffrey was first +lowered down. As soon as he had got in at the window he undid the rope +and Job Tredgold followed him, while Roger Browne slid down by the rope +attached to the grapnel; then they ran downstairs. + +As soon as they sallied out below they saw that Lionel and the men with +him had captured a prisoner; and just as they joined the party the +guard came round from the other side of the warehouse, bringing with +them the cross-bow, its bolt, and the pistol. The prisoner, whose +shoulder was broken by Roger Browne's shot, was at once taken to +Captain Vere's quarters. That officer had just arrived from the walls, +knowing the time at which the capture would probably be made. + +"So you have succeeded," he said. "Well done, lads; you have earned the +thanks of all. We will take this man at once to the governor, who is at +present at the town-hall." + +By the time they issued out quite a crowd had assembled, for the news +that William von Arnig had been brought a prisoner and wounded to +Captain Vere's quarters had spread rapidly. The crowd increased as they +went along, and Captain Vere and his party had difficulty in making +their way to the town-hall, many of the people exclaiming loudly +against this treatment of one of the leading citizens. The governor +was, when they entered, holding council with the English leader, Sir +Roger Williams. + +"Why, what is this, Captain Vere?" he asked in surprise as that +officer, accompanied by the two boys and followed by Roger Browne and +Job Tredgold guarding the prisoner, entered. + +"I have to accuse this man of treacherously communicating with the +enemy," Francis Vere said. + +"What?" Arnold de Groenvelt exclaimed in surprise. "Why, this is +Mynheer von Arnig, one of our most worshipful citizens! Surely, Captain +Vere, there must be some error here?" + +"I will place my evidence before you," Captain Vere said; "and it will +be for you to decide upon it. Master Geoffrey Vickars, please to inform +the governor what you know about this matter." + +Geoffrey then stated how he and his brother, being at the upper window +of the warehouse, had on two days in succession seen a cross-bow +discharged from a neighbouring window, and had noticed a Spanish +soldier come out of a battery and pick up something which they believed +to be the bolt, and how he and his brother had reported the +circumstances to Captain Vere. That officer then took up the story, and +stated that seeing the evidence was not conclusive, and it was probable +that if an attempt was made to arrest the person, whomsoever he might +be, who had used the cross-bow, any evidence of treasonable design +might be destroyed before he was seized, he had accepted the offer of +Master Vickars to climb the roof, lower himself to the window from +which the bolt would be shot, and, if possible, strike it from the +man's hands, so that it would fall down the roof to the court-yard +below, where men were placed to seize it. + +Geoffrey then related how he, with the two soldiers guarding the +prisoner, had scaled the roof and taken a position by the window; how +he had seen the cross-bow thrust out, and had struck it from the hands +of the man holding it; how the latter had leaned out, and would have +shot him had not Roger Browne from his post above the window shot him +in the shoulder. + +"Here are the cross-bow and pistol," Captain Vere said; "and this is +the bolt as it was picked up by my men. You see, sir, there is a paper +fastened round it. I know not its contents, for I judged it best to +leave it as it was found until I placed it in your hands." + +The governor cut the string, unrolled the paper and examined it. It +contained a statement as to the state of the wall, with remarks where +it was yielding, and where the enemy had best shoot against it. It said +that the defenders had in the night begun to form a half-moon behind +it, and contained a sketch showing the exact position of the new work. + +"Gentlemen, what think you of this?" the governor asked the English +officers. + +"There can be no doubt that it is a foul act of treachery," Williams +said, "and the traitor merits death." + +"We will not decide upon it ourselves," the governor said. "I will +summon six of the leading citizens, who shall sit as a jury with us. +This is a grave matter, and touches the honour of the citizens as well +as the safety of the town." + +In a few minutes the six citizens summoned arrived. The evidence was +again given, and then the prisoner was asked what he had to say in his +defence. + +"It is useless for me to deny it," he replied. "I am caught in the act, +and must suffer for it. I have done my duty to the King of Spain, my +sovereign; and I warn you he will take vengeance for my blood." + +"That we must risk," the governor said. "Now, gentlemen, you citizens +of this town now attacked by the Spaniards, and you, sir, who are in +command of the soldiers of the Queen of England, have heard the +evidence and the answer the prisoner has made. What is your opinion +thereon? Do you, Sir Roger Williams, being highest in rank and +authority, first give your opinion." + +"I find that he is guilty of an act of gross treason and treachery. For +such there is but one punishment--death." And the six citizens all gave +the same decision. + +"You are found guilty of this foul crime," the governor said, "and are +sentenced to death. In half an hour you will be hung in the market- +place, as a punishment to yourself and a warning to other traitors, if +such there be in this town of Sluys. As to you, young sirs, you have +rendered a great service to the town, and have shown a discernment +beyond your years. I thank you in the name of the city and of its +garrison, and also in that of the States, whose servant I am." + +A guard of armed citizens were now called in, the prisoner was handed +to them, and orders given to their officer to carry the sentence into +effect. A statement of the crime of the prisoner, with the names of +those who had acted as his judges, and the sentence, was then drawn +out, signed by the governor, and ordered by him to be affixed to the +door of the town-hall. The two lads, finding that they were no longer +required, hastened back to their quarters, having no wish to be present +at the execution of the unhappy wretch whose crime they had been the +means of detecting. + +A few days later considerable portions of the battered wall fell, and +shortly afterwards a breach of two hundred and fifty paces long was +effected, and a bridge of large boats constructed by the enemy from the +dyke to the foot of the rampart. + +This was not effected without terrible loss. Hundreds of the bravest +Spanish soldiers and sailors were killed, and three officers who +succeeded each other in command of the attack were badly wounded. The +Spanish had laboured under great difficulties owing to the lack of +earth to push their trenches forward to the edge of the moat, arising +from the surrounding country being flooded. They only succeeded at last +by building wooden machines of bullet-proof planks on wheels, behind +each of which four men could work. When all was prepared the Spaniards +advanced to the attack, rushing up the breach with splendid valour, +headed by three of their bravest leaders; but they were met by the +English and Dutch, and again and again hurled back. + +Day and night the fighting continued, the Spaniards occasionally +retiring to allow their artillery to open fire again upon the shattered +ruins. But stoutly as the defenders fought, step by step the Spaniards +won their way forward until they had captured the breach and the west +gate adjoining it, there being nothing now beyond the hastily- +constructed inner work between them and the town. The finest regiment +of the whole of the Spanish infantry now advanced to the assault, but +they were met by the defenders--already sadly diminished in numbers, +but firm and undaunted as ever,--and their pikes and their axes well +supplied the place of the fallen walls. + +Assault after assault was met and repulsed, Sir Roger Williams, Thomas +Baskerville, and Francis Vere being always in the thick of the fight. +Baskerville was distinguished by the white plumes of his helmet, Vere +by his crimson mantle; and the valour of these leaders attracted the +admiration of the Duke of Parma himself, who watched the fight from the +summit of the tower of the western gate. Francis Vere was twice +wounded, but not disabled. Sir Roger Williams urged him to retire, but +he replied that he would rather be killed ten times in a breach than +once in a house. + +Day by day the terrible struggle continued. The Spaniards were able +constantly to bring up fresh troops, but the defenders had no relief. +They were reduced in numbers from 1600 to 700 men, and yet for eighteen +days they maintained the struggle, never once leaving the breach. + +The pages brought their food to them, and when the attacks were +fiercest joined in the defence, fighting as boldly and manfully as the +soldiers themselves. Geoffrey and Lionel kept in close attendance upon +Francis Vere, only leaving him to run back to their quarters and bring +up the meals cooked for him and his two officers by Frau Menyn and her +handmaids. Both kept close to him during the fighting. They knew that +they were no match in strength for the Spanish pikemen; but they had +obtained pistols from the armoury, and with these they did good +service, several times freeing him from some of his assailants when he +was sorely pressed. On one occasion when Francis Vere was smitten down +by a blow from an axe, the boys rushed forward and kept back his +assailants until some of the men of the company came to his aid. + +"You have done me brave service indeed," Captain Vere said to them when +he recovered; for his helmet had defended him from serious injury, +though the force of the blow had felled him. "It was a happy thought of +mine when I decided to bring you with me. This is not the first time +that you have rendered me good service, and I am sure you will turn out +brave and valiant soldiers of the queen." + +When each assault ceased the weary soldiers threw themselves down +behind the earthen embankment, and obtained such sleep as they could +before the Spaniards mustered for fresh attack. When, after eighteen +days' terrible fighting, the Duke of Parma saw that even his best +troops were unable to break through the wall of steel, he desisted from +the assault and began the slower process of mining. The garrison from +their look-out beheld the soldiers crossing the bridge with picks and +shovels, and prepared to meet them in this new style of warfare. +Captain Uvedale was appointed to command the men told off for this +duty, and galleries were run from several of the cellars to meet those +of the enemy. + +As every man was employed either on the rampart or in mining, many of +the pages were told off to act as watchers in the cellars, and to +listen for the faint sounds that told of the approach of the enemy's +miners. As the young Vickars were in attendance on the officers, they +were exempted from this work; but they frequently went down into the +cellars, both to watch the process of mining by their own men and to +listen to the faint sounds made by the enemy's workmen. One day they +were sitting on two wine-kegs, watching four soldiers at work at the +end of a short gallery that had been driven towards the Spaniards. +Suddenly there was an explosion, the miners were blown backwards, the +end of the gallery disappeared, and a crowd of Walloon soldiers almost +immediately afterwards rushed in. + +The boys sprang to their feet and were about to fly, when an idea +occurred to Geoffrey. He seized a torch, and, standing by the side of a +barrel placed on end by a large tier, shouted in Dutch, "Another step +forward and I fire the magazine!" The men in front paused. Through the +fumes of smoke they saw dimly the pile of barrels and a figure standing +with a lighted torch close to one of them. A panic seized them, and +believing they had made their way into a powder-magazine, and that in +another instant there would be a terrible explosion, they turned with +shouts of "A magazine! a magazine! Fly, or we are all dead men!" + +"Run, Lionel, and get help," Geoffrey said, and in two or three minutes +a number of soldiers ran down into the cellar. + +The Walloons were not long before they recovered from their panic. +Their officers knew that the wine-cellars of the city were in front of +them, and reassured them as to the character of the barrels they had +seen. They were, however, too late, and a furious conflict took place +at the entrance into the cellar, but the enemy, able only to advance +two or three abreast, failed to force their way in. + +Captain Uvedale and Francis Vere were soon on the spot, and when at +last the enemy, unable to force an entrance, fell back, the former +said, "This is just as I feared. You see, the Spaniards drove this +gallery, and ceased to work immediately they heard us approaching them. +We had no idea that they were in front of us, and so they only had to +put a barrel of powder there and fire it as soon as there was but a +foot or two of earth between us and them." + +"But how was it," Francis Vere asked, "that when they fired it they did +not at once rush forward? They could have captured the whole building +before we knew what had happened." + +"That I cannot tell," Captain Uvedale replied. "The four men at work +must have been either killed or knocked senseless. We shall know better +another time, and will have a strong guard in each cellar from which +our mines are being driven." + +"If it please you, Captain Uvedale," Lionel said, "it was my brother +Geoffrey who prevented them from advancing; for indeed several of them +had already entered the cellar, and the gallery behind was full of +them." + +"But how did he do that?" Captain Uvedale asked in surprise. + +Lionel related the ruse by which Geoffrey had created a panic in the +minds of the Spaniards. + +"That was well thought of indeed, and promptly carried out!" Captain +Uvedale exclaimed. "Francis, these pages of yours are truly promising +young fellows. They detected that rascally Dutchman who was betraying +us. I noticed them several times in the thick of the fray at the +breach; and now they have saved the city by their quickness and +presence of mind; for had these Spaniards once got possession of this +warehouse they would have speedily broken a way along through the whole +tier, and could then have poured in upon us with all their strength." + +"That is so, indeed," Francis Vere agreed. "They have assuredly saved +the town, and there is the greatest credit due to them. I shall be +glad, Uvedale, if you will report the matter to our leader. You are in +command of the mining works, and it will come better from you than from +me who am their captain." + +Captain Uvedale made his report, and both Sir Roger Williams and the +governor thanked the boys, and especially Geoffrey, for the great +service they had rendered. + +Very shortly the galleries were broken into in several other places, +and the battle became now as fierce and continuous down in the cellars +as it had before been on the breach. By the light of torches, in an +atmosphere heavy with the fumes of gunpowder, surrounded by piled-up +barrels of wine, the defenders and assailants maintained a terrible +conflict, men staggering up exhausted by their exertion and by the +stifling atmosphere while others took their places below, and so, night +and day, the desperate struggle continued. + +All these weeks no serious effort had been made for the relief of the +hardly beleaguered town. Captains Hall and Allen had several times swum +down at night through the bridge of boats with letters from the +governor entreating a speedy succour. The States had sent a fleet which +sailed some distance up the Zwin, but returned without making the +slightest effort to break through the bridge of boats. The Earl of +Leicester had advanced with a considerable force from Ostend against +the fortress of Blankenburg, but had retreated hastily as soon as Parma +despatched a portion of his army against him; and so the town was left +to its fate. + +The last letter that the governor despatched said that longer +resistance was impossible. The garrison were reduced to a mere remnant, +and these utterly worn out by constant fighting and the want of rest. +He should ask for fair and honourable terms, but if these were refused +the garrison and the whole male inhabitants in the city, putting the +women and children in the centre, would sally out and cut their way +through, or die fighting in the midst of the Spaniards. The swimmer who +took the letter was drowned, but his body was washed ashore and the +letter taken to the Duke of Parma. + +Three days afterwards a fresh force of the enemy embarked in forty +large boats, and were about to land on an unprotected wharf by the +river-side when Arnold de Groenvelt hung out the white flag. His powder +was exhausted and his guns disabled, and the garrison so reduced that +the greater portion of the walls were left wholly undefended. The Duke +of Parma, who was full of admiration at the extraordinary gallantry of +the defenders, and was doubtless also influenced by the resolution +expressed in his letter by the governor, granted them most honourable +terms. The garrison were to march out with all their baggage and arms, +with matches lighted and colours displayed. They were to proceed to +Breskans, and there to embark for Flushing. The life and property of +the inhabitants were to be respected, and all who did not choose to +embrace the Catholic faith were to be allowed to leave the town +peaceably, taking with them their belongings, and to go wheresoever +they pleased. + +When the gates were opened the garrison sallied out. The Duke of Parma +had an interview with several of the leaders, and expressed his high +admiration of the valour with which they had fought, and said that the +siege of Sluys had cost him more men than he had lost in the four +principal sieges he had undertaken in the Low Country put together. On +the 4th of August the duke entered Sluys in triumph, and at once began +to make preparations to take part in the great invasion of England for +which Spain was preparing. + +After their arrival at Flushing Captains Vere, Uvedale, and others, who +had brought their companies from Bergen-op-Zoom to aid in the defence +of Sluys, returned to that town. + +The Earl of Leicester shortly afterwards resigned his appointment as +general of the army. He had got on but badly with the States-General, +and there was from the first no cordial cooperation between the two +armies. The force at his disposal was never strong enough to do +anything against the vastly superior armies of the Duke of Parma, who +was one of the most brilliant generals of his age, while he was +hampered and thwarted by the intrigues and duplicity of Elizabeth, who +was constantly engaged in half-hearted negotiations now with France and +now with Spain, and whose capricious temper was continually +overthrowing the best-laid plans of her councillors and paralysing the +actions of her commanders. It was not until she saw her kingdom +threatened by invasion that she placed herself fairly at the head of +the national movement, and inspired her subjects with her energy and +determination. + +Geoffrey Vickars had been somewhat severely wounded upon the last day +of the struggle in the cellar, a Spanish officer having beaten down his +guard and cleft through his morion. Lionel was unwounded, but the +fatigue and excitement had told upon him greatly, and soon after they +arrived at Bergen Captain Vere advised both of them to return home for +a few months. + +"There is nothing likely to be doing here until the spring. Parma has +more serious matter in hand. They talk, you know, of invading England, +and after his experience at Sluys I do not think he will be wasting his +force by knocking their heads against stone walls. I should be glad if +I could return too, but I have my company to look after and must remain +where I am ordered; but as you are but volunteers and giving your +service at your pleasure, and are not regularly upon the list of the +pages of the company, I can undertake to grant you leave, and indeed I +can see that you both greatly need rest. You have begun well and have +both done good service, and have been twice thanked by the governor of +Sluys and Sir Roger Williams. + +"You will do yourselves no good by being shut up through the winter in +this dull town, and as there is a vessel lying by the quay which is to +set sail to-morrow, I think you cannot do better than go in her. I will +give you letters to my cousin and your father saying how well you have +borne yourselves, and how mightily Sir Roger Williams was pleased with +you. In the spring you can rejoin, unless indeed the Spaniards should +land in England, which Heaven forfend, in which case you will probably +prefer to ride under my cousin's banner at home." + +The boys gladly accepted Francis Vere's proposal. It was but three +months since they had set foot in Holland, but they had gone through a +tremendous experience, and the thought of being shut up for eight or +nine months at Bergen-op-Zoom was by no means a pleasant one. Both felt +worn-out and exhausted, and longed for the fresh keen air of the +eastern coast. Therefore the next morning they embarked on board ship. +Captain Vere presented them each with a handsome brace of pistols in +token of his regard, and Captains Uvedale, Baskerville, and other +officers who were intimate friends of Vere's, and had met them at his +quarters, gave them handsome presents in recognition of the services +they had rendered at Sluys. + +The ship was bound for Harwich, which was the nearest English port. +Landing there, they took passage by boat to Manningtree and thence by +horse home, where they astounded their father and mother by their +sudden appearance. + +"And this is what comes of your soldiering," Mrs. Vickars said when the +first greeting was over. "Here is Geoffrey with plasters all over the +side of his head, and you, Lionel, looking as pale and thin as if you +had gone through a long illness. I told your father when we heard of +your going that you ought to be brought back and whipped; but the earl +talked him over into writing to Captain Francis to tell him that he +approved of this mad-brained business, and a nice affair it has turned +out." + +"You will not have to complain of our looks, mother, at the end of a +week or two," Geoffrey said. "My wound is healing fast, and Lionel only +needs an extra amount of sleep for a time. You see, for nearly a month +we were never in bed, but just lay down to sleep by the side of Captain +Vere on the top of the ramparts, where we had been fighting all day." + +"It was a gallant defence," Mr. Vickars said, "and all England is +talking of it. It was wonderful that 800 English and as many Dutchmen +should hold a weak place for two months against full twelve times their +number of Spaniards, led by the Duke of Parma himself, and there is +great honour for all who took part in the defence. The governor and Sir +Roger Williams especially mentioned Francis Vere as among the bravest +and best of their captains, and although you as pages can have had +nought to do with the fighting, you will have credit as serving under +his banner." + +"I think, father," Geoffrey said, touching the plasters on his head, +"this looks somewhat as if we had had something to do with the +fighting, and here is a letter for you from Captain Vere which will +give you some information about it." + +Mr. Vickars adjusted his horn spectacles on his face and opened the +letter. It began: + +"My dear Master and Friend,--I have had no means of writing to you +since your letter came to me, having had other matters in hand, and +being cut off from all communication with England. I was glad to find +that you did not take amiss my carrying off of your sons. Indeed that +action has turned out more happily than might have been expected, for I +own that they were but young for such rough service. + +"However, they have proved themselves valiant young gentlemen. They +fought stoutly by my side during our long tussle with the Spaniards, +and more than once saved my life by ridding me of foes who would have +taken me at a disadvantage. Once, indeed, when I was down from a blow +on the pate from a Spanish axe, they rushed forward and kept my +assailants at bay until rescue came. They discovered a plot between a +traitor in the town and the Spaniards, and succeeded in defeating his +plans and bringing him to justice. + +"They were also the means of preventing the Spaniards from breaking +into the great wine-cellars and capturing the warehouses, and for each +of these services they received the thanks of the Dutch governor and of +Sir Roger Williams, our leader. Thus, you see, although so young they +have distinguished themselves mightily, and should aught befall me, +there are many among my friends who will gladly take them under their +protection and push them forward. I have sent them home for a time to +have quiet and rest, which they need after their exertions, and have +done this the more willingly since there is no chance of fighting for +many months to come. I hope that before the Spaniards again advance +against us I may have them by my side." + +"Well, well, this is wonderful," Mrs. Vickars said when her husband had +finished reading the letter. "If they had told me themselves I should +not have believed them, although they have never been given to the sin +of lying; but since it is writ in Master Vere's own hand it cannot be +doubted. And now tell us all about it, boys." + +"We will tell you when we have had dinner, mother. This brisk Essex air +has given us both an appetite, and until that is satisfied you must +excuse us telling a long story. Is the earl at the castle, father +because we have two letters to him from Captain Francis--one, I +believe, touching our affairs, and the other on private matters. We +have also letters from him to his mother and his brother John, and +those we had better send off at once by a messenger, as also the +private letters to the earl." + +"That I will take myself," Mr. Vickars said. "I was just going up to +him to speak about my parish affairs when you arrived." + +"You had better have your dinner first," Mrs. Vickars said decidedly. +"When you once get with the earl and begin talking you lose all account +of the time, and only last week kept dinner waiting for two hours. It +is half-past eleven now, and I will hurry it on so that it will be +ready a few minutes before noon." + +"Very well, my dear; but I will go out into the village at once and +find a messenger to despatch to Cropping Hall with the letters to Dame +Elizabeth and John Vere." + +The boys' story was not told until after supper, for as soon as dinner +was over Mr. Vickars went up to the castle with the letters for the +earl. The latter, after reading them, told him that his cousin spoke +most highly of his two sons, and said they had been of great service, +even as far as the saving of his life. The earl told Mr. Vickars to +bring the boys up next day to see him in order that he might learn a +full account of the fighting at Sluys, and that he hoped they would +very often come in, and would, while they were at home, practise daily +with his master of arms at the castle. "I know, Mr. Vickars, that you +had hoped that one of them would enter the church; but you see that +their tastes lie not in that direction, and it is evident that, as in +the case of my cousin Francis, they are cut out for soldiers." + +"I am afraid so," Mr. Vickars said; "and I must let them have their own +way, for I hold that none should be forced to follow the ministry save +those whose natural bent lies that way." + +"I don't think they have chosen badly," the earl said. "My cousin +Francis bids fair to make a great soldier, and as they start in life as +his pages they will have every chance of getting on, and I warrant me +that Francis will push their fortunes. Perhaps I may be able to aid +them somewhat myself. If aught comes of this vapouring of the +Spaniards, before the boys return to Holland, they shall ride with me. +I am already arming all the tenantry and having them practised in +warlike exercises, and in the spring I shall fit out two ships at +Harwich to join the fleet that will put to sea should the Spaniards +carry out their threats of invading us." + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE LOSS OF THE "SUSAN." + + +There were few people in Hedingham more pleased to see the two lads on +their return than John Lirriper, to whom they paid a visit on the first +day they went out. + +"I am glad to see you back, young masters; though, to say the truth, +you are not looking nigh so strong and well as you did when I last +parted from you." + +"We shall soon be all right again, John. We have had rather a rough +time of it over there in Sluys." + +"Ah, so I have heard tell, Master Geoffrey. Your father read out from +the pulpit a letter the earl had received from Captain Francis telling +about the fighting, and it mentioned that you were both alive and well +and had done good service; but it was only a short letter sent off in +haste the day after he and the others had got out of the town. I was +right glad when I heard it, I can tell you, for there had been nought +talked of here but the siege; and though your lady mother has not said +much to me, I always held myself ready to slip round the corner or into +a house when I saw her come down the street, for I knew well enough +what was in her mind. She was just saying to herself, 'John Lirriper, +if it hadn't been for you my two boys would not be in peril now. If +aught comes to them, it will be your doing.' And though it was not my +fault, as far as I could see, for Captain Francis took you off my +hands, as it were, and I had no more to say in the matter than a child, +still, there it was, and right glad was I when I heard that the siege +was over and you were both alive. + +"I had a bad time of it, I can tell you, when I first got back, young +sirs, for your mother rated me finely; and though your father said it +was not my fault in any way, she would not listen to him, but said she +had given you into my charge, and that I had no right to hand you over +to any others save with your father's permission--not if it were to the +earl himself,--and for a long time after she would make as if she +didn't see me if she met me in the street. When my wife was ill about +that time she sent down broths and simples to her, but she sent them by +one of the maids, and never came herself save when she knew I was away +in my boat. + +"However, the day after the reading of that letter she came in and said +she was sorry she had treated me hardly, and that she had known at +heart all along that it was not altogether my fault, and asked my +pardon as nice as if I had been the earl. Of course I said there was +nothing to ask pardon for, and indeed that I thought it was only +natural she should have blamed me, for that I had often blamed myself, +though not seeing how I could have done otherwise. However, I was right +glad when the matter was made up, for it is not pleasant for a man when +the parson's wife sets herself against him." + +"It was certainly hard upon you, John," Geoffrey said; "but I am sure +our mother does not in any way blame you now. You see, we brought home +letters from Captain Vere, or rather Sir Francis, for he has been +knighted now, and he was good enough to speak very kindly of what we +were able to do in the siege. Mother did not say much, but I am sure +that at heart she is very grateful, for the earl himself came down to +the Rectory and spoke warmly about us, and said that he should always +be our fast friend, because we had given his cousin some help when he +was roughly pressed by the Spaniards. I hope we shall have another sail +with you in a short time, for we are not going back to the Netherlands +at present, as things are likely to be quiet there now. Although he did +not say so, I think Sir Francis thought that we were over-young for +such rough work, and would be more useful in a year's time; for, you +see, in these sieges even pages have to take their share in the +fighting, and when it comes to push of pike with the Spaniards more +strength and vigour are needed than we possess at present. So we are to +continue our practice at arms at the castle, and to take part in the +drilling of the companies the earl is raising in case the Spaniards +carry out their threat of invading England." + +Mrs. Vickars offered no objection whatever the first time Geoffrey +asked permission to go down to Bricklesey with John Lirriper. + +"I have no objection, Geoffrey; and, indeed, now that you have chosen +your own lives and are pages to Sir Francis Vere, it seems to me that +in matters of this kind you can judge for yourself. Now that you have +taken to soldiering and have borne your part in a great siege, and have +even yourselves fought with the Spaniards, I deem it that you have got +beyond my wing, and must now act in all small matters as it pleases +you; and that since you have already run great danger of your lives, +and may do so again ere long, it would be folly of me to try to keep +you at my apron-strings and to treat you as if you were still +children." + +So the two lads often accompanied John Lirriper to Bricklesey, and +twice sailed up the river to London and back in Joe Chambers' smack, +these jaunts furnishing a pleasant change to their work of practising +with pike and sword with the men-at-arms at the castle, or learning the +words of command and the work of officers in drilling the newly-raised +corps. One day John Lirriper told them that his nephew was this time +going to sail up the Medway to Rochester, and would be glad to take +them with him if they liked it; for they were by this time prime +favourites with the master of the _Susan_. Although their mother +had told them that they were at liberty to go as they pleased, they +nevertheless always made a point of asking permission before they went +away. + +"If the wind is fair we shall not be long away on this trip, mother. +Two days will take us up to Rochester; we shall be a day loading there, +and shall therefore be back on Saturday if the wind serves, and may +even be sooner if the weather is fine and we sail with the night tides, +as likely enough we shall, for the moon is nearly full, and there will +be plenty of light to keep our course free of the sands." + +The permission was readily given. Mrs. Vickars had come to see that it +was useless to worry over small matters, and therefore nodded +cheerfully, and said she would give orders at once for a couple of +chickens to be killed and other provision prepared for their voyage. + +"I doubt you are going to have a rougher voyage than usual this time, +young masters," John Lirriper said when the boat was approaching +Bricklesey, "The sky looks wild, and I think there is going to be a +break in the weather. However, the _Susan_ is a stout boat, and my +nephew a careful navigator." + +"I should like a rough voyage for a change, John," Geoffrey said. "We +have always had still water and light winds on our trips, and I should +like a good blow." + +"Well, I think you will have one; though may be it will only come on +thick and wet. Still I think there is wind in those clouds, and that if +it does come it will be from the south-east, in which case you will +have a sharp buffeting. But you will make good passage enough down to +the Nore once you are fairly round the Whittaker." + +"Glad to see you, young masters," Joe Chambers said as the boat came +alongside his craft. "You often grumbled at the light winds, but unless +I am mistaken we shall be carrying double reefs this journey. What do +you think, Uncle John?" + +"I have been saying the same, lad; still there is no saying. You will +know more about it in a few hours' time." + +It was evening when the boys went on board the _Susan_, and as +soon as supper was over they lay down, as she was to start at daybreak +the next morning. As soon as they were roused by the creaking of the +blocks and the sound of trampling of feet overhead they went up on +deck. Day had just broken; the sky was overspread by dark clouds. + +"There is not much wind after all," Geoffrey said as he looked round. + +"No, it has fallen light during the last two hours," the skipper +replied, "but I expect we shall have plenty before long. However, we +could do with a little more now." + +Tide was half out when they started. Joe Chambers had said the night +before that he intended to drop down to the edge of the sands and there +anchor, and to make across them past the Whittaker Beacon into the +channel as soon as there was sufficient water to enable him to do so. +The wind was light, sometimes scarcely sufficient to belly out the +sails and give the boat steerage way, at others coming in short puffs +which heeled her over and made her spring forward merrily. + +Before long the wind fell lighter and lighter, and at last Joe Chambers +ordered the oars to be got out. + +"We must get down to the edge of the Buxey," he said, "before the tide +turns, or we shall have it against us, and with this wind we should +never be able to stem it, but should be swept up the Crouch. At present +it is helping us, and with a couple of hours' rowing we may save it to +the Buxey." + +The boys helped at the sweeps, and for two hours the creaking of the +oars and the dull flapping of the sail alone broke the silence of the +calm; and the lads were by no means sorry when the skipper gave the +order for the anchor to be dropped. + +"I should like to have got about half a mile further," he said; "but I +can see by the landmarks that we are making no way now. The tide is +beginning to suck in." + +"How long will it be before we have water enough to cross the Spit?" +Lionel asked as they laid in the oars. + +"Well nigh four hours, Master Lionel. Then, even if it keeps a stark +calm like this, we shall be able to get across the sands and a mile or +two up the channel before we meet the tide. There we must anchor again +till the first strength is past, and then if the wind springs up we can +work along at the edge of the sands against it. There is no tide close +in to the sands after the first two hours. But I still think this is +going to turn into wind presently; and if it does it will be sharp and +heavy, I warrant. It's either that or rain." + +The sky grew darker and darker until the water looked almost black +under a leaden canopy. + +"I wish we were back into Bricklesey," Joe Chambers said. "I have been +well-nigh fifteen years going backwards and forwards here, and I do not +know that ever I saw an awkwarder look about the sky. It reminds me of +what I have heard men who have sailed to the Indies say they have seen +there before a hurricane breaks. If it was not that we saw the clouds +flying fast overhead when we started, I should have said it was a thick +sea fog that had rolled in upon us. Ah, there is the first drop. I +don't care how hard it comes down so that there is not wind at the tail +of it. A squall of wind before rain is soon over; but when it follows +rain you will soon have your sails close-reefed. You had best go below +or you will be wet through in a minute." + +The great drops were pattering down on the deck and causing splashes as +of ink on the surface of the oily-looking water. Another half minute it +was pouring with such a mighty roar on the deck that the boys below +needed to shout to make each other heard. It lasted but five minutes, +and then stopped as suddenly as it began. The lads at once returned to +the deck. + +"So it is all over, Master Chambers." + +"Well the first part is over, but that is only a sort of a beginning. +Look at that light under the clouds away to the south of east. That is +where it is coming from, unless I am mistaken. Turn to and get the +mainsail down, lads," for although after dropping anchor the head sails +had been lowered, the main and mizzen were still on her. + +The men set to work, and the boys helped to stow the sail and fasten it +with the tiers. Suddenly there was a sharp puff of wind. It lasted a +few seconds only, then Joe Chambers pointed towards the spot whence a +hazy light seemed to come. + +"Here it comes," he said. "Do you see that line of white water. That is +a squall and no mistake. I am glad we are not under sail." + +There was a sharp, hissing sound as the line of white water approached +them, and then the squall struck them with such force and fury that the +lads instinctively grasped at the shrouds. The mizzen had brought the +craft in a moment head-to-wind, and Joe Chambers and the two sailors at +once lowered it and stowed it away. + +"Only put a couple of tiers on," the skipper shouted. "We may have to +upsail again if this goes on." + +The sea got up with great rapidity, and a few minutes after the squall +had struck them the _Susan_ was beginning to pitch heavily. The +wind increased in force, and seemed to scream rather than whistle in +the rigging. + +"The sea is getting up fast!" Geoffrey shouted in the skipper's ear as +he took his place close to him. + +"It won't be very heavy yet," Joe Chambers replied; "the sands break +its force. But the tide has turned now, and as it makes over the sand +there will be a tremendous sea here in no time; that is if this wind +holds, and it seems to me that it is going to be an unusual gale +altogether." + +"How long will it be before we can cross the Spit?" + +"We are not going to cross to-day, that's certain," the skipper said. +"There will be a sea over those sands that would knock the life out of +the strongest craft that ever floated. No, I shall wait here for +another hour or two if I can, and then slip my cable and run for the +Crouch. It is a narrow channel, and I never care about going into it +after dark until there is water enough for a craft of our draught over +the sands. It ain't night now, but it is well nigh as dark. There is no +making out the bearings of the land, and we have got to trust to the +perches the fishermen put up at the bends of the channel. However, we +have got to try it. Our anchors would never hold here when the sea gets +over the sands, and if they did they would pull her head under water." + +In half an hour a sea had got up that seemed to the boys tremendous. +Dark as it was they could see in various directions tracts of white +water where the waves broke wildly over the sands. The second anchor +had been let go some time before. The two cables were as taut as iron +bars, and the boat was pulling her bows under every sea. Joe Chambers +dropped a lead-line overboard and watched it closely. + +"We are dragging our anchors," he said. "There is nothing for it but to +run." + +He went to the bow, fastened two logs of wood by long lines to the +cables outside the bow, so that he could find and recover the anchors +on his return, then a very small jib was hoisted, and as it filled two +blows with an axe severed the cables inboard. The logs attached to them +were thrown over, and the skipper ran aft and put up the helm as the +boat's head payed off before the wind. As she did so a wave struck her +and threw tons of water on board, filling her deck nearly up to the +rails. It was well Joe had shouted to the boys to hold on, for had they +not done so they would have been swept overboard. + +Another wave struck them before they were fairly round, smashing in the +bulwark and sweeping everything before it, and the boys both thought +that the _Susan_ was sinking under their feet. However she +recovered herself. The water poured out through the broken bulwark, and +the boat rose again on the waves as they swept one after another down +upon her stern. The channel was well marked now, for the sands on +either side were covered with breaking water. Joe Chambers shouted to +the sailors to close-reef the mizzen and hoist it, so that he might +have the boat better under control. The wind was not directly astern +but somewhat on the quarter; and small as was the amount of sail shown, +the boat lay over till her lee-rail was at times under water; the +following waves yawing her about so much that it needed the most +careful steering to prevent her from broaching to. + +"It seems to me as the wind is northering!" one of the men shouted. + +The skipper nodded and slackened out the sheet a bit as the wind came +more astern. He kept his eyes fixed ahead of him, and the men kept +gazing through the gloom. + +"There is the perch," one of them shouted presently, "just on her +weather-bow!" + +The skipper nodded and held on the same course until abreast of the +perch, which was only a forked stick. The men came aft and hauled in +the mizzen sheet. Chambers put up the helm. The mizzen came across with +a jerk, and the sheet was again allowed to run out. The jib came over +with a report like the shot of a cannon, and at the same moment split +into streamers. + +"Hoist the foresail!" the skipper shouted, and the men sprang forward +and seized the halliards; but at this moment the wind seemed to blow +with a double fury, and the moment the sail was set it too split into +ribbons. + +"Get up another jib!" Joe Chambers shouted, and one of the men sprang +below. In half a minute he reappeared with another sail. + +"Up with it quick, Bill. We are drifting bodily down on the sand." + +Bill hurried forward. The other hand had hauled in the traveller, to +which the bolt-rope of the jib was still attached, and hauling on this +had got the block down and in readiness for fastening on the new jib. +The sheets were hooked on, and then while one hand ran the sail out +with the out-haul to the bowsprit end, the other hoisted with the +halliards. By this time the boat was close to the broken water. As the +sail filled her head payed off towards it. The wind lay her right over, +and before she could gather way there was a tremendous crash. The +_Susan_ had struck on the sands. The next wave lifted her, but as +it passed on she came down with a crash that seemed to shake her in +pieces. Joe Chambers relaxed his grasp of the now useless tiller. + +"It is all over," he said to the boys. "Nothing can save her now. If +she had been her own length farther off the sands she would have +gathered way in time. As it is another ten minutes and she will be in +splinters." + +She was now lying over until her masthead was but a few feet above +water. The seas were striking her with tremendous force, pouring a +deluge of water over her. + +"There is but one chance for you," he went on. "The wind is dead on the +shore, and Foulness lies scarce three miles to leeward." + +[Illustration: "THE NEXT FEW MINUTES IT WAS A WILD STRUGGLE FOR LIFE"] + +He went into the cabin and fetched out a small axe fastened in the +companion where it was within reach of the helmsman. Two blows cut the +shrouds of the mizzen, a few vigorous strokes were given to the foot of +the mast, and, as the boat lifted and crashed down again on the sand, +it broke off a few inches above the deck. + +"Now, lads, I will lash you loosely to this. You can both swim, and +with what aid it will give you may well reach the shore. There are +scarce three feet of water here, and except where one or two deeps pass +across it there is no more anywhere between this and the land. It will +not be rough very far. Now, be off at once; the boat will go to pieces +before many minutes. I and the two men will take to the mainmast, but I +want to see you off first." + +Without hesitation the boys pushed off with the mast. As they did so a +cataract of water poured over the smack upon them, knocking them for a +moment under the surface with its force. + +For the next few minutes it was a wild struggle for life. They found at +once that they were powerless to swim in the broken water, which, as it +rushed across the sand, impelled alike by the rising tide behind it and +the force of the wind, hurried them along at a rapid pace, breaking in +short steep waves. They could only cling to the mast and snatch a +breath of air from time to time as it rolled over and over. Had they +not been able to swim they would very speedily have been drowned; but, +accustomed as they were to diving, they kept their presence of mind, +holding their breath when under water and breathing whenever they were +above it with their faces to the land. It was only so that they could +breathe, for the air was thick with spray, which was swept along with +such force by the wind that it would have drowned the best swimmer who +tried to face it as speedily as if he had been under water. + +After what seemed to them an age the waves became somewhat less +violent, though still breaking in a mass of foam. Geoffrey loosed his +hold of the spar and tried to get to his feet. He was knocked down +several times before he succeeded, but when he did so found that the +water was little more than two feet deep, although the waves rose to +his shoulders. The soft mud under his feet rendered it extremely +difficult to stand, and the rope which attached him to the spar, which +was driving before him, added to the difficulty. He could not overtake +the mast, and threw himself down again and swam to it. + +"Get up, Lionel!" he shouted; "we can stand here." But Lionel was too +exhausted to be capable of making the effort. With the greatest +difficulty Geoffrey raised him to his feet and supported him with his +back to the wind. + +"Get your breath again!" he shouted. "We are over the worse now and +shall soon be in calmer water. Get your feet well out in front of you, +if you can, and dig your heels into the mud, then you will act as a +buttress to me and help me to keep my feet." + +It was two or three minutes before Lionel was able to speak. Even +during this short time they had been carried some distance forward, for +the ground on which they stood seemed to be moving, and the force of +the waves carried them constantly forward. + +"Feel better, old fellow?" Geoffrey asked, as he felt Lionel making an +effort to resist the pressure of the water. + +"Yes, I am better now," Lionel said. + +"Well, we will go on as we are as long as we can; let us just try to +keep our feet and give way to the sea as it takes us along. The quicker +we go the sooner we shall be in shallower water; but the tide is rising +fast, and unless we go on it will speedily be as bad here as it was +where we started." + +As soon as Lionel had sufficiently recovered they again took to the +spar; but now, instead of clasping it with their arms and legs, they +lay with their chest upon it, and used their efforts only to keep it +going before the wind and tide. Once they came to a point where the +sand was but a few inches under water. Here they stood up for some +minutes, and then again proceeded on foot until the water deepened to +their waists. + +Their progress was now much more easy, for the high bank had broken the +run of the surf. The water beyond it was much smoother, and they were +able to swim, pushing the spar before them. + +"We are in deep water," Geoffrey said presently, dropping his feet. "It +is out of my depth. Chambers said there was a deep channel across the +sands not far from the island; so in that case the shore cannot be far +away." + +In another quarter of an hour the water was again waist-deep. Geoffrey +stood up. + +"I think I see a dark line ahead, Lionel; we shall soon be there." + +Another ten minutes and the water was not above their knees. They could +see the low shore now at a distance of but a few hundred yards ahead, +and untying the ropes under their arms they let the spar drift on, and +waded forward until they reached the land. There was a long mud bank +yet to cross, and exhausted as they were it took them a long time to do +this; but at last they came to a sandy bank rising sharply some ten +feet above the flat. They threw themselves down on this and lay for +half an hour without a word being spoken. + +"Now, Lionel," Geoffrey said at last, raising himself to a sitting +position, "we must make an effort to get on and find a shelter. There +are people living in the island. I have heard that they are a wild set, +making their living by the wrecks on these sands and by smuggling goods +without paying dues to the queen. Still, they will not refuse us +shelter and food, and assuredly there is nothing on us to tempt them to +plunder us." + +He rose to his feet and helped Lionel up. Once on the top of the bank a +level country stretched before them. The wind aided their footsteps, +sweeping along with such tremendous force that at times they had +difficulty in keeping their feet. As they went on they came upon +patches of cultivated land, with hedgerows and deep ditches. Half a +mile further they perceived a house. On approaching it they saw that it +was a low structure of some size with several out-buildings. They made +their way to it and knocked at the door. They knocked twice before it +was opened, then some bolts were withdrawn. The door was opened a few +inches. A man looked out, and seeing two lads opened it widely. + +"Well, who are you, and what do you want?" he asked roughly. + +"We have been wrecked in a storm on the sands. We were sailing from +Bricklesey for Sheerness when the storm caught us." + +The man looked at them closely. Their pale faces and evidently +exhausted condition vouched for the truth of their story. + +"The house is full," he said gruffly, "and I cannot take in strangers. +You will find some dry hay in that out-house, and I will bring you some +food there. When you have eaten and drunk you had best journey on." + +So saying he shut the door in their faces. + +"This is strange treatment," Geoffrey said. "I should not have thought +a man would have refused shelter to a dog such a day as this. What do +you say, Lionel, shall we go on?" + +"I don't think I can go any further until I have rested, Geoffrey," +Lionel replied faintly. "Let us lie down in shelter if it is only for +half an hour. After that, if the man brings us some food as he says, we +can go on again." + +They went into the shed the man had pointed out. It was half full of +hay. + +"Let us take our things off and wring them, Lionel, and give ourselves +a roll in the hay to dry ourselves. We shall soon get warm after that." + +They stripped, wrung the water from their clothes, rolled themselves in +the hay until they felt a glow of returning warmth, and then put on +their clothes again. Scarcely had they done so when the man came in +with a large tankard and two hunks of bread. + +"Here," he said, "drink this and then be off. We want no strangers +hanging round here." + +At any other time the boys would have refused hospitality so +cheerlessly offered, but they were too weak to resist the temptation. +The tankard contained hot-spiced ale, and a sensation of warmth and +comfort stole over them as soon as they had drunk its contents and +eaten a few mouthfuls of bread. The man stood by them while they ate. + +"Are you the only ones saved from the wreck?" he asked. + +"I trust that we are not," Geoffrey replied. "The master of the boat +tied us to a mast as soon as she struck, and he and the two men with +him were going to try to get to shore in the same way." + +As soon as they had finished they stood up and handed the tankard to +the man. + +"I am sorry I must turn you out," he said, as if somewhat ashamed of +his want of courtesy. "Any other day it would be different, but to-day +I cannot take anyone in." + +"I thank you for what you have given us," Geoffrey said. "Can you tell +us which is the way to the ferry?" + +"Follow the road and it will take you there. About a couple of miles. +You cannot mistake the way." + +Feeling greatly strengthened and refreshed the lads again started. + +"This is a curious affair," Geoffrey said, "and I cannot make out why +they should not let us in. However, it does not matter much. I feel +warm all over now, in spite of my wet clothes." + +"So do I," Lionel agreed. "Perhaps there were smugglers inside, or some +fugitives from justice hiding there. Anyhow, I am thankful for that +warm ale; it seems to have given me new life altogether." + +They had walked a quarter of a mile, when they saw four horsemen coming +on the road. They were closely wrapped up in cloaks, and as they +passed, with their heads bent down to meet the force of the gale and +their broad-brimmed hats pulled low down over their eyes, the boys did +not get even a glimpse of their features. + +"I wonder who they can be," Geoffrey said, looking after them. "They +are very well mounted, and look like persons of some degree. What on +earth can they be doing in such a wretched place as this? They must be +going to that house we left, for I noticed the road stopped there." + +"It is curious, Geoffrey, but it is no business of ours." + +"I don't know that, Lionel. You know there are all sorts of rumours +about of Papist plots, and conspirators could hardly choose a more out- +of-the way spot than this to hold their meetings. I should not be at +all surprised if there is some mischief on foot." + +Half a mile further three men on foot met them, and these, like the +others, were closely wrapped up to the eyes. + +"They have ridden here," Geoffrey said after they had passed. "They +have all high riding-boots on; they must have left their horses on the +other side of the ferry. See, there is a village a short distance +ahead. We will go in there and dry our clothes, and have a substantial +meal if we can get it. Then we will talk this business over." + +The village consisted of a dozen houses only, but among them was a +small public-house. Several men were sitting by the fire with pots of +ale before them. + +"We have been wrecked on the coast, landlord, and have barely escaped +with our lives. We want to dry our clothes and to have what food you +can give us." + +"I have plenty of eggs," the landlord said, "and my wife will fry them +for you; but we have no meat in the house. Fish and eggs are the chief +food here. You are lucky in getting ashore, for it is a terrible gale. +It is years since we have had one like it. As to drying your clothes, +that can be managed easy enough. You can go up into my room and take +them off, and I will lend you a couple of blankets to wrap yourselves +in, and you can sit by the fire here until your things are dry." + +A hearty meal of fried eggs and another drink of hot ale completed the +restoration of the boys. Their clothes were speedily dried, for the +landlady had just finished baking her week's batch of bread, and half +an hour in the oven completely dried the clothes. They were ready +almost as soon as the meal was finished. Many questions were asked them +as to the wreck, and the point at which they had been cast ashore. + +"It was but a short distance from a house at the end of this road," +Geoffrey said. "We went there for shelter, but they would not take us +in, though they gave us some bread and hot ale." + +Exclamations of indignation were heard among the men sitting round. + +"Ralph Hawker has the name of being a surly man," one said, "but I +should not have thought that he would have turned a shipwrecked man +from his door on such a day as this. They say he is a Papist, though +whether he be or not I cannot say; but he has strange ways, and there +is many a stranger passes the ferry and asks for his house. However, +that is no affair of mine, though I hold there is no good in secret +ways." + +"That is so," another said; "but it goes beyond all reason for a man to +refuse shelter to those the sea has cast ashore such a day as this." + +As soon as they had finished their meal and again dressed themselves, +the lads paid their reckoning and went out. Scarcely had they done so +when two horsemen rode up, and, drawing rein, inquired if they were +going right for the house of one Ralph Hawker. + +"It lies about a mile on," Geoffrey said. "You cannot miss the way; the +road ends there." + +As he spoke a gust of wind of extra fury blew off one of the riders' +hats. It was stopped by the wall of a house a few yards away. Geoffrey +caught it and handed it to the horseman. With a word of thanks he +pressed it firmly on his head, and the two men rode on. + +"Did you notice that?" Geoffrey asked his brother. "He has a shaven +spot on the top of his head. The man is a Papist priest in disguise. +There is something afoot, Lionel. I vote that we try and get to the +bottom of it." + +"I am ready if you think so, Geoffrey. But it is a hazardous business, +you know; for we are unarmed, and there are, we know, seven or eight of +them at any rate." + +"We must risk that," Geoffrey said; "besides, we can run if we cannot +fight. Let us have a try whatever comes of it." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +A Popish Plot + + +There was no one about, for the wind was blowing with such fury that +few cared to venture out of doors, and the boys therefore started back +along the road by which they had come, without being observed. + +"We had better strike off from the road," Geoffrey said, "for some more +of these men may be coming along. Like enough someone will be on the +watch at the house, so we had best make a long detour, and when we get +near it come down on it from the other side. You know we saw no windows +there." + +"That is all well enough," Lionel agreed; "but the question is, how are +we to hear what they are saying inside? We are obliged to shout to +catch each others' words now, and there is not the least chance of our +hearing anything through the closed shutters." + +"We must wait till we get there, and then see what is to be done, +Lionel. We managed to detect a plot at Sluys, and we may have the same +luck here." + +After half an hour's brisk walking they again approached the house from +the side at which they had before come upon it, and where, as Geoffrey +observed, there were no windows; they made their way cautiously up to +it, and then moved quietly round to the side. Here there were two +windows on the ground floor. The shutters were closed, for glass was +unknown except in the houses of the comparatively wealthy. Its place +was taken by oiled paper, and this in bad weather was protected by +outer shutters. Geoffrey stole out a few paces to look at the window +above. + +"It is evidently a loft," he said as he rejoined Lionel. "You can see +by the roof that the rooms they live in are entirely upon the ground +floor. If we can get in there we might possibly hear what is going on +below. The rooms are not likely to be ceiled, and there are sure to be +cracks between the planks through which we can see what is going on +below. The noise of the wind is so great there is little chance of +their hearing us. Now, let us look about for something to help us to +climb up." + +Lying by an out-house close by they found a rough ladder, composed of a +single pole with bits of wood nailed on to it a foot apart. This they +placed up against the door of the loft. They could see that this was +fastened only by a hasp, with a piece of wood put through the staple. +It had been arranged that Geoffrey only should go up, Lionel removing +the pole when he entered, and keeping watch behind the out-house lest +anyone should come round the house. Both had cut heavy sticks as they +came along to give them some means of defence. Lionel stood at the +pole, while Geoffrey climbed up, removed the piece of wood from the +staple, and then holding the hasp to prevent the wind blowing in the +door with a crash, entered the loft. A glance showed him that it +extended over the whole of the house, and that it was entirely empty. + +He closed the door behind him, and jammed it with a couple of wedges of +wood he had cut before mounting; then he lay down on the rough planks +and began to crawl along. He saw a gleam of light at the further end, +and felt sure that it proceeded from the room in which the party were +assembled. Although he had little fear of being heard owing to the din +kept up by the wind, he moved along with extreme care until he reached +the spot whence the light proceeded. As he had anticipated, it was +caused by lights in a room below streaming through the cracks between +the rough planking. + +Rising on to his knees he looked round, and then crawled to a crack +that appeared much wider than the rest, the boards being more than half +an inch apart. Lying down over it, he was able to obtain a view of a +portion of the room below. He could see a part of a long table, and +looked down upon the heads of five men sitting on one side of it. He +now applied his ear to the crevice. A man was speaking, and in the +intervals between the gusts of wind which shook the house to its +foundation, he could hear what was said. + +"It is no use hesitating any longer, the time for action has arrived-- +Jezebel must be removed--interests of our holy religion--little danger +in carrying out the plan that has been proposed. Next time--Windsor-- +road passes through wood near Datchet--a weak guard overpowered--two +told off to execute--free England from tyranny--glory and honour +throughout Catholic world. England disorganized and without a head +could offer no resistance--as soon as day fixed--meet at Staines at +house of--final details and share each man is to--done, scatter through +country, readiness for rising--Philip of Spain--" + +This was the last sentence Geoffrey caught, for when the speaker ceased +a confused and general talk took place, and he could only catch a word +here and there without meaning or connection. He therefore drew quietly +back to the door of the loft and opened it. He thought first of jumping +straight down, but in that case he could not have fastened the door +behind him. He therefore made a sign to Lionel, who was anxiously +peering round the corner of the out-house. The pole was placed into +position, and pulling the door after him and refastening the latch he +made his way down to the ground, replaced the pole at the place from +which they had taken it, and then retired in the direction from which +they had come. + +"Well, what have you heard, Geoffrey?" Lionel asked. "Was it worth the +risk you have run?" + +"Well worth it, Lionel. I could only hear a little of what was said, +but that was quite enough to show that a plot is on foot to attack and +kill the queen the next time she journeys to Windsor. The conspirators +are to hide in a wood near Datchet." + +"You don't say so, Geoffrey. That is important news indeed. What are we +to do next?" + +"I have not thought yet," Geoffrey replied. "I should say, though, our +best plan would be to make our way back as quickly as we can by Burnham +and Maldon round to Hedingham. The earl was going up to London one day +this week, we may catch him before he starts; if not, we must, of +course, follow him. But at any rate it is best to go home, for they +will be in a terrible fright, especially if Joe Chambers or one of the +men take the news to Bricklesey of the loss of the _Susan_, for it +would be quickly carried up to Hedingham by John Lirriper or one or +other of the boatmen. No day seems to be fixed, and the queen may not +be going to Windsor for some little time, so the loss of a day will not +make any difference. As we have money in our pockets we can hire horses +at Burnham to take us to Maldon, and get others there to carry us +home." + +An hour's walking took them to the ferry. It was now getting dusk, and +they had come to the conclusion as they walked that it would be too +late to attempt to get on that night beyond Burnham. The storm was as +wild as ever, and although the passage was a narrow one it was as much +as the ferryman could do to row the boat across. + +"How far is it from here to Burnham?" + +"About four miles; but you won't get to Burnham to-night." + +"How is that?" Geoffrey asked. + +"You may get as far as the ferry, but you won't get taken over. There +will be a big sea in the Crouch, for the wind is pretty nigh straight +up it; but you will be able to sleep at the inn this side. In the +morning, if the wind has gone down, you can cross; if not, you will +have to go round by the bridge, nigh ten miles higher up." + +This was unpleasant news. Not that it made any difference to them +whether they slept on one side of the river or the other, but if the +wind was too strong to admit of a passage in the morning, the necessity +for making a detour would cost them many hours of valuable time. There +was, however, no help for it, and they walked to Criksey Ferry. The +little inn was crowded, for the ferry had been stopped all day, and +many like themselves had been compelled to stop for a lull in the wind. + +Scarcely had they entered when their names were joyously shouted out. +"Ah, Masters Vickars, right glad am I to see you. We feared that surf +had put an end to you. We asked at the ferry, but the man declared that +no strange lads had crossed that day, and we were fearing we should +have a sad tale to send to Hedingham by John Lirriper." + +"We are truly glad to see you, Joe," Geoffrey said, as they warmly +shook Joe Chambers and the two sailors by the hand. "How did you get +ashore?" + +"On the mainmast, and pretty nigh drowned we were before we got there. +I suppose the tide must have taken us a bit further up than it did you. +We got here well nigh two hours ago, though we got a good meal and +dried our clothes at a farmhouse." + +"We got a meal, too, soon after we landed," Geoffrey said; "but we did +not dry our clothes till we got to a little village. I did not ask its +name. I am awfully sorry, Joe, about the _Susan_" + +"It is a bad job, but it cannot be helped, Master Geoffrey. I owned a +third of her, and two traders at Bricklesey own the other shares. Still +I have no cause to grumble. I have laid by more than enough in the last +four years to buy a share in another boat as good as she was. You see, +a trader ain't like a smack. A trader's got only hull and sails, while +a smack has got her nets beside, and they cost well nigh as much as the +boat. Thankful enough we are that we have all escaped with our lives; +and now I find you are safe my mind feels at rest over it." + +"Do you think it will be calm enough to cross in the morning, Joe?" + +"Like enough," the sailor replied; "a gale like this is like to blow +itself out in twenty-four hours. It has been the worst I ever saw. It +is not blowing now quite so hard as it did, and by the morning I +reckon, though there may be a fresh wind, the gale will be over." + +The number of travellers were far too great for the accommodation of +the inn; and with the exception of two or three of the first arrivals +all slept on some hay in one of the barns. + +The next morning, although the wind was still strong, the fury of the +gale had abated. The ferryman, however, said the water was so rough he +must wait for a time before they crossed. But when Geoffrey offered him +a reward to put their party on shore at once, he consented to do so, +Joe Chambers and the two sailors assisting with the oars; and as the +ferry-boat was large and strongly built, they crossed without further +inconvenience than the wetting of their jackets. + +Joe Chambers, who knew the town perfectly, at once took them to a place +where they were able to hire a couple of horses, and on these rode to +Maldon, some nine miles away. Here they procured other horses, and it +was not long after midday when they arrived at Hedingham. + +Mrs. Vickars held up her hands in astonishment at their shrunken +garments; but her relief from the anxiety she had felt concerning what +had befallen them during the gale was so great that she was unable to +scold. + +"We will tell you all about it, mother, afterwards," Geoffrey said, as +he released himself from her embrace. "We have had a great adventure, +and the _Susan_ has been wrecked. But this is not the most +important matter. Father, has the earl started yet?" + +"He was to have gone this morning, Geoffrey, but the floods are likely +to be out, and the roads will be in such a state that I have no doubt +he has put off his journey." + +"It is important that we should see him at once, father. We have +overheard some people plotting against the queen's life, and measures +must be taken at once for her safety. We will run up and change our +things if you will go with us to see him. If you are there he will see +you whatever he is doing, while if we go alone there might be delay." + +Without waiting for an answer the boys ran upstairs and quickly +returned in fresh clothes. Mr. Vickars was waiting for them with his +hat on. + +"You are quite sure of what you are saying, Geoffrey?" he observed as +they walked towards the castle. "Remember, that if it should turn out +an error, you are likely to come to sore disgrace instead of receiving +commendation for your interference. Every one has been talking of plots +against the queen for some time, and you may well have mistaken the +purport of what you have heard." + +"There is no mistake, father, it is a real conspiracy, though who are +those concerned in it I know not. Lionel and I are not likely to raise +a false alarm about nothing, as you will say yourself when you hear the +story I have to tell the earl." + +They had by this time entered the gates of the castle. "The earl has +just finished dinner," one of the attendants replied in answer to the +question of Mr. Vickars. + +"Will you tell him that I wish to see him on urgent business?" + +In two or three minutes the servant returned and asked the clergyman to +follow him. The earl received him in his private chamber, for the +castle was full with guests. + +"Well, dominie, what is it?" he asked. "You want some help, I will be +bound, for somebody ill or in distress. I know pretty well by this time +the meaning of your urgent business." + +"It is nothing of that kind to-day," the clergyman replied; "it is, in +fact, my sons who wish to see your lordship. I do not myself know the +full purport of their story, save that it is something which touches +the safety of the queen." + +The earl's expression at once changed. + +"Is that so, young sirs? This is a serious matter, you know; it is a +grave thing to bring an accusation against anyone in matters touching +the state." + +"I am aware that it is, my lord, and assuredly my brother and I would +not lightly meddle with such matters; but I think that you will say +this is a business that should be attended to. It happened thus, sir." +He then briefly told how, that being out in a ketch that traded from +Bricklesey, they were caught in the gale; that the vessel was driven on +the sands, and they were cast ashore on a mast. + +He then related the inhospitable reception they had met with. "It +seemed strange to us, sir, and contrary to nature, that anyone should +refuse to allow two shipwrecked lads to enter the house for shelter on +such a day; and it seemed well-nigh impossible that his tale of the +place being too full to hold us could be true. However, we started to +walk. On our way we met four horsemen going towards the house, closely +muffled up in cloaks." + +"There was nothing very strange in that," the earl observed, "in such +weather as we had yesterday." + +"Nothing at all, sir; we should not have given the matter one thought +had it not been that the four men were very well mounted, and, +apparently, gentlemen; and it was strange that such should have +business in an out-of-the-way house in Foulness Island. A little +further we met three men on foot. They were also wrapped up in cloaks; +but they wore high riding-boots, and had probably left their horses on +the other side of the ferry so as not to attract attention. A short +time afterwards we met two more horsemen, one of whom asked us if he +was going right for the house we had been at. As he was speaking a gust +of wind blew off his hat. I fetched it and gave it to him, and as he +stooped to put it on I saw that a tonsure was shaven on the top of his +head. The matter had already seemed strange to us; but the fact that +one of this number of men, all going to a lonely house, was a priest in +disguise, seemed so suspicious that my brother and myself determined to +try and get to the bottom of it." + +Geoffrey then related how they had gone back to the house and effected +an entrance into the loft extending over it; how he had through the +cracks in the boards seen a party of men gathered in one of the lower +rooms, and then repeated word for word the scraps of conversation that +he had overheard. + +The earl had listened with an expression of amused doubt to the early +portion of the narrative; but when Geoffrey came to the part where +accident had shown to him that one of these men proceeding towards this +house was a disguised priest, his face became serious, and he listened +with deep attention to the rest of the narrative. + +"Faith," he said, "this is a serious matter, and you have done right +well in following up your suspicions, and in risking your lives, for +they would assuredly have killed you had they discovered you. Mr. +Vickars, your sons must ride with me to London at once. The matter is +too grave for a moment's delay. I must lay it before Burleigh at once. +A day's delay might be fatal." + +He rang a bell standing on the table. As soon as an attendant answered +it he said, "Order three horses to be saddled at once; I must ride to +London with these young gentlemen without delay. Order Parsons and +Nichols to be ready in half an hour to set out with us. Have you had +food, young sirs? for it seems you came hither directly you arrived." +Finding that the boys had eaten nothing since they had left Maldon, he +ordered food to be brought them, and begged them eat it while he +explained to the countess and guests that sudden business that could +not be delayed called him away to London. Half an hour later he started +with the boys, the two servants following behind. Late that evening +they arrived in London. It was too late to call on Lord Burleigh that +night; but early the next morning the earl took the boys with him to +the house of the great statesman. Leaving them in the ante-chamber he +went in to the inner apartment, where the minister was at breakfast. +Ten minutes later he came out, and called the boys in. + +"The Earl of Oxford has told me your story," Lord Burleigh said. "Tell +it me again, and omit nothing; for things that seem small are often of +consequence in a matter like this." + +Geoffrey again repeated his story, giving full details of all that had +taken place from the time of their first reaching the house. + +Lord Burleigh then questioned him closely as to whether they had seen +any of the faces of the men, and would recognise them again. + +"I saw none from my spying-place above, my lord," Geoffrey said. "I +could see only the tops of their heads, and most of them still kept +their hats on; nor did we see them as they passed, with the exception +only of the man I supposed to be a priest. His face I saw plainly. It +was smooth shaven; his complexion was dark, his eyebrows were thin and +straight, his face narrow. I should take him for a foreigner--either a +Spaniard or Italian." + +Lord Burleigh made a note of this description. + +"Thanks, young sirs," he said. "I shall, of course, take measures to +prevent this plot being carried out, and shall inform her majesty how +bravely you both risked your lives to discover this conspiracy against +her person. The Earl of Oxford informs me that you are pages of his +cousin, Captain Francis Vere, a very brave and valiant gentleman; and +that you bore your part bravely in the siege of Sluys, but are at +present at home to rest after your labours there, and have permission +of Captain Vere to take part in any trouble that may arise here owing +to the action of the Spaniards. I have now no further occasion for your +services, and you can return with the earl to Hedingham, but your +attendance in London will be needed when we lay hands upon these +conspirators." + +The same day they rode back to Hedingham, but ten days later were again +summoned to London. The queen had the day before journeyed to Windsor. +Half an hour before she arrived at the wood near Datchet a strong party +of her guard had suddenly surrounded it, and had found twelve armed men +lurking there. These had been arrested and lodged in the Tower. Three +of them were foreigners, the rest members of Catholic families known to +be favourable to the Spanish cause. Their trial was conducted +privately, as it was deemed advisable that as little should be made as +possible of this and other similar plots against the queen's life that +were discovered about this time. + +Geoffrey and Lionel gave their evidence before the council. As the only +man they could have identified was not of the party captured, their +evidence only went to show the motive of this gathering in the wood +near Datchet. The prisoners stoutly maintained that Geoffrey had +misunderstood the conversation he had partly overheard, and that their +design was simply to make the queen a prisoner and force her to +abdicate. Three of the prisoners, who had before been banished from the +country and who had secretly returned, were sentenced to death; two of +the others to imprisonment for a long term of years, the rest to +banishment from England. + +After the trial was over Lord Burleigh sent for the boys, and gave them +a very gracious message in the queen's name, together with two rings in +token of her majesty's gratitude. Highly delighted with these honours +they returned to Hedingham, and devoted themselves even more +assiduously than before to exercises in arms, in order that they might +some day prove themselves valiant soldiers of the queen. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +THE SPANISH ARMADA. + + +The struggle that was at hand between Spain and England had long been +foreseen as inevitable. The one power was the champion of Roman +Catholicism, the other of Protestantism; and yet, although so much hung +upon the result of the encounter, and all Europe looked on with the +most intense interest, both parties entered upon the struggle without +allies, and this entirely from the personal fault of the sovereigns of +the two nations. + +Queen Elizabeth, by her constant intrigues, her underhand dealings with +France and Spain, her grasping policy in the Netherlands, her meanness +and parsimony, and the fact that she was ready at any moment to +sacrifice the Netherlands to her own policy, had wholly alienated the +people of the Low Country; for while their own efforts for defence were +paralysed by the constant interference of Elizabeth, no benefit was +obtained from the English army, whose orders were to stand always on +the defensive--the queen's only anxiety appearing to be to keep her +grasp upon the towns that had been handed over to her as the price of +her alliance. + +Her own counsellors were driven to their wits' end by her constant +changes of purpose. Her troops were starving and in rags from her +parsimony, the fleet lay dismantled and useless from want of funds, and +except such arming and drilling as took place at the expense of the +nobles, counties, and cities, no preparation whatever was made to meet +the coming storm. Upon the other hand, Philip of Spain, who might have +been at the head of a great Catholic league against England, had +isolated himself by his personal ambitions, Had he declared himself +ready, in the event of his conquest of England, to place James of +Scotland upon the throne, he would have had Scotland with him, together +with the Catholics of England, still a powerful and important body. + +France, too, would have joined him, and the combination against +Elizabeth and the Protestants of England would have been well-nigh +irresistible. But this he could not bring himself to do. His dream was +the annexation of England to Spain; and smarting as the English +Catholics were under the execution of Mary of Scotland, their English +spirit revolted against the idea of the rule of Spain, and the great +Catholic nobles hastened, when the moment of danger arrived, to join in +the defence of their country, while Scotland, seeing no advantage to be +gained in the struggle, stood sullenly aloof, and France gave no aid to +a project which was to result, if successful, in the aggrandizement of +her already dangerously formidable neighbour. + +Thus England and Spain stood alone--Philip slowly but steadily +preparing for the great expedition for the conquest of England, +Elizabeth hesitating, doubtful; at one moment gathering seamen and +arming her fleet, a month or two later discharging the sailors and +laying up the ships. + +In the spring of 1587 Drake, with six vessels belonging to the crown +and twenty-four equipped by merchants of London and other places, had +seized a moment when Elizabeth's fickle mind had inclined to warlike +measures, and knowing that the mood might last but a day, had slipped +out of Plymouth and sailed for Spain a few hours before a messenger +arrived with a peremptory order from Elizabeth against entering any +Spanish port or offering violence to any Spanish town or ships. +Although caught in a gale in the Channel, Drake held on, and, reaching +Gibraltar on the 16th April, ascertained that Cadiz was crowded with +transports and store-ships. + +Vice-admiral Burroughs, controller of the navy, who had been specially +appointed to thwart Drake's plans, opposed any action being taken; but +Drake insisted upon attack, and on the 19th the fleet stood in to Cadiz +harbour. Passing through the fire of the batteries, they sank the only +great ship of war in the roads, drove off the Spanish galleys, and +seized the vast fleet of store-ships loaded with wine, corn, and +provisions of all sorts for the use of the Armada. Everything of value +that could be conveniently moved was transferred to the English ships, +then the Spanish vessels were set on fire, their cables cut, and they +were left to drift an entangled mass of flame. Drake took a number of +prisoners, and sent a messenger on shore proposing to exchange them for +such English seamen as were prisoners in Spain. The reply was there +were no English prisoners in Spain; and as this was notoriously untrue, +it was agreed in the fleet that all the Spaniards they might take in +the future should be sold to the Moors, and the money reserved for the +redeeming of such Englishmen as might be in captivity there or +elsewhere. + +The English fleet then sailed for Cape St. Vincent, picking up on their +way large convoys of store-ships all bound for the Tagus, where the +Armada was collecting. These were all burned, and Drake brought up at +Cape St. Vincent, hoping to meet there a portion of the Armada expected +from the Mediterranean. As a harbour was necessary, he landed, stormed +the fort at Faro, and took possession of the harbour there. The +expected enemy did not appear, and Drake sailed up to the mouth of the +Tagus, intending to go into Lisbon and attack the great Spanish fleet +lying there under its admiral, Santa Cruz. + +That the force gathered there was enormous Drake well knew, but relying +as much on the goodness of his cause as on the valour of his sailors, +and upon the fact that the enemy would be too crowded together to fight +with advantage, he would have carried out his plan had not a ship +arrived from England with orders forbidding him to enter the Tagus. +However, he lay for some time at the mouth of the river, destroying +every ship that entered its mouth, and sending in a challenge to Santa +Cruz to come out and fight. The Spanish admiral did not accept it, and +Drake then sailed to Corunna, and there, as at Cadiz, destroyed all the +ships collected in the harbour and then returned to England, having in +the course of a few months inflicted an enormous amount of damage upon +Spain, and having taken the first step to prove that England was the +mistress of the sea. + +But while the little band of English had been defending Sluys against +the army of the Duke of Parma, Philip had been continuing his +preparations, filling up the void made by the destruction wrought by +Drake, and preparing an Armada which he might well have considered to +be invincible. Elizabeth was still continuing her negotiations. She was +quite ready to abandon the Netherlands to Spain if she could but keep +the towns she held there, but she could not bring herself to hand these +over either to the Netherlands or to Spain. She urged the States to +make peace, to which they replied that they did not wish for peace on +such terms as Spain would alone grant; they could defend themselves for +ten years longer if left alone; they did not ask for further help, and +only wanted their towns restored to them. + +Had the Armada started as Philip intended in September, it would have +found England entirely unprepared, for Elizabeth still obstinately +refused to believe in danger, and the few ships that had been held in +commission after Drake's return had been so long neglected that they +could hardly keep the sea without repair; the rest lay unrigged in the +Medway. But the delay gave England fresh time for preparation. Parma's +army was lying in readiness for the invasion under canvas at Dunkirk, +and their commander had received no information from Spain that the +sailing of the Armada was delayed. + +The cold, wet, and exposure told terribly upon them, and of the 30,000 +who were ready to embark in September not 18,000 were fit for service +at the commencement of the year. The expenses of this army and of the +Armada were so great that Philip was at last driven to give orders to +the Armada to start. But fortune again favoured England. Had the fleet +sailed as ordered on the 30th of January they would again have found +the Channel undefended, for Elizabeth, in one of her fits of economy, +had again dismantled half the fleet that had been got ready for sea, +and sent the sailors to their homes. + +But the execution of Philip's orders was prevented by the sudden death +of Santa Cruz. The Duke of Medina-Sidonia was appointed his successor, +but as he knew nothing of the state of the Armada fresh delays became +necessary, and the time was occupied by Elizabeth, not in preparing for +the defence of the country, but in fresh negotiations for peace. She +was ready to make any concessions to Spain, but Philip was now only +amusing himself by deceiving her. Everything was now prepared for the +expedition, and just as the fleet was ready to start, the negotiations +were broken off. But though Elizabeth's government had made no +preparations for the defence of the country, England herself had not +been idle. Throughout the whole country men had been mustered, +officered, and armed, and 100,000 were ready to move as soon as the +danger became imminent. + +The musters of the Midland counties, 30,000 strong, were to form a +separate army, and were to march at once to a spot between Windsor and +Harrow. The rest were to gather at the point of danger. The coast +companies were to fall back wherever the enemy landed, burning the corn +and driving off the cattle, and avoiding a battle until the force of +the neighbouring counties joined them. Should the landing take place as +was expected in Suffolk, Kent, or Sussex, it was calculated that +between 30,000 and 40,000 men would bar the way to the invaders before +they reached London, while 20,000 men of the western counties would +remain to encounter the Duke of Guise, who had engaged to bring across +an army of Frenchmen to aid the Spaniards. + +Spain, although well aware of the strength of England on the sea, +believed that she would have no difficulty with the raw English levies; +but Parma, who had met the English at Sluys, had learnt to respect +their fighting qualities, and in a letter to Philip gave the opinion +that even if the Armada brought him a reinforcement of 6000 men he +would still have an insufficient force for the conquest of England. He +said, "When I shall have landed I must fight battle after battle. I +shall lose men by wounds and disease, I must leave detachments behind +me to keep open my communications, and in a short time the body of my +army will become so weak that not only I may be unable to advance in +the face of the enemy, and time may be given to the heretics and your +majesty's other enemies to interfere, but there may fall out some +notable inconvenience, with the loss of everything, and I be unable to +remedy it." + +Unfortunately, the English fleet was far less prepared than the land +forces. The militia had been easily and cheaply extemporized, but a +fleet can only be prepared by long and painful sacrifices. The entire +English navy contained but thirteen ships of over four hundred tons, +and including small cutters and pinnaces there were but thirty-eight +vessels of all sorts and sizes carrying the queen's flag. Fortunately, +Sir John Hawkins was at the head of the naval administration, and in +spite of the parsimony of Elizabeth had kept the fleet in a good state +of repair and equipment. The merchant navy, although numerous, was +equally deficient in vessels of any size. + +Philip had encouraged ship-building in Spain by grants from the crown, +allowing four ducats a ton for every ship built of above three hundred +tons burden, and six ducats a ton for every one above five hundred +tons. Thus he had a large supply of great ships to draw upon in +addition to those of the royal navy, while in England the largest +vessels belonging to private owners did not exceed four hundred tons, +and there were not more than two or three vessels of that size sailing +from any port of the country. The total allowance by the queen for the +repair of the whole of the royal navy, wages of shipwrights, clerks, +carpenters, watchmen, cost of timber, and all other necessary dockyard +expenses, was but L4000 a-year. + +In December the fleet was ready for sea, together with the contingent +furnished by the liberality and patriotism of the merchants and +citizens of the great ports. But as soon as it was got together half +the crews collected and engaged at so great an expense were dismissed, +the merchant ships released, and England open to invasion, and had +Parma started in the vessels he had prepared, Lord Howard, who +commanded the English navy, could not have fired a shot to have +prevented his crossing. + +Well might Sir John Hawkins in his despair at Elizabeth's caprices +exclaim: "We are wasting money, wasting strength, dishonouring and +discrediting ourselves by our uncertain dallying." But though daily +reports came from Spain of the readiness of the Armada to set sail, +Elizabeth, even when she again permitted the navy to be manned, +fettered it by allowing it to be provided with rations for only a month +at a time, and permitting no reserves to be provided in the victualling +stores; while the largest vessels were supplied with ammunition for +only a day and a half's service, and the rest of the fleet with but +enough for one day's service. The council could do nothing, and Lord +Howard's letters prove that the queen, and she only, was responsible +for the miserable state of things that prevailed. + +At last, in May, Lord Howard sailed with the fleet down Channel, +leaving Lord Henry Seymour with three men-of-war and a squadron of +privateers to watch Dunkirk. At Plymouth the admiral found Drake with +forty ships, all except one raised and sent to sea at the expense of +himself and the gentry and merchants of the west counties. The weather +was wild, as it had been all the winter. Howard with the great ships +lay at anchor in the Sound, rolling heavily, while the smaller craft +went for shelter into the mouth of the river. There were but eighteen +days' provisions on board; fresh supplies promised did not arrive, and +the crews were put on half rations, and eked these out by catching +fish. At last, when the supplies were just exhausted, the victualling +ships arrived with one month's fresh rations, and a message that no +more would be sent. So villainous was the quality of the stores that +fever broke out in the fleet. + +It was not until the end of the month that Elizabeth would even permit +any further preparations to be made, and the supplies took some time +collecting. The crews would have been starved had not the officers so +divided the rations as to make them last six weeks. The men died in +scores from dysentery brought on by the sour and poisonous beer issued +to them, and Howard and Drake ordered wine and arrow-root from the town +for the use of the sick, and had to pay for it from their own pockets. + +But at last the Armada was ready for starting. Contingents of Spanish, +Italians, and Portuguese were gathered together with the faithful from +all countries--Jesuits from France; exiled priests, Irish and English; +and many Catholic Scotch, English, and Irish noblemen and gentlemen. +The six squadrons into which the fleet was divided contained sixty-five +large war ships, the smallest of which was seven hundred tons. Seven +were over one thousand, and the largest, an Italian ship, _La +Regazona_, was thirteen hundred. All were built high like castles, +their upper works musket-proof, their main timbers four or five feet +thick, and of a strength it was supposed no English cannon could +pierce. + +Next to the big ships, or galleons as they were called, were four +galleasses, each carrying fifty guns and 450 soldiers and sailors, and +rowed by 300 slaves. Besides these were four galleys, fifty-six great +armed merchant ships, the finest Spain possessed, and twenty caravels +or small vessels. Thus the fighting fleet amounted to 129 vessels, +carrying in all 2430 cannon. On board was stored an enormous quantity +of provisions for the use of the army after it landed in England, there +being sufficient to feed 40,000 men for six months. + +There were on board 8000 sailors, 19,000 soldiers, 1000 gentlemen +volunteers, 600 priests, servants, and miscellaneous officers, and 2000 +galley slaves. This was indeed a tremendous array to meet the fleet +lying off Plymouth, consisting of 29 queen's ships of all sizes, 10 +small vessels belonging to Lord Howard and members of his family, and +43 privateers between 40 and 400 tons under Drake, the united crews +amounting to something over 9000 men. + +The winter had passed pleasantly to Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars; the +earl had taken a great fancy to them, and they had stayed for some time +in London as members of his suite. When the spring came they had spoken +about rejoining Francis Vere in Holland, but the earl had said that +there was little doing there. The enmity excited by the conduct of +Elizabeth prevented any co-operation between the Dutch and English; and +indeed the English force was reduced to such straits by the refusal of +the queen to furnish money for their pay, or to provide funds for even +absolute necessaries, that it was wholly incapable of taking the field, +and large numbers of the men returned to England. + +Had this treatment of her soldiers and sailors at the time when such +peril threatened their country been occasioned by want of funds, some +excuse would have been possible for the conduct of Elizabeth; but at +the time there were large sums lying in the treasury, and it was +parsimony and not incapacity to pay that actuated Elizabeth in the +course she pursued. + +As the boys were still uneasy as to the opinion Francis Vere might form +of their continued stay in England, they wrote to him, their letter +being inclosed in one from the earl; but the reply set their minds at +rest--"By all means stay in England," Captain Vere wrote, "since there +is nothing doing here of any note or consequence, nor likely to be. We +are simply idling out time in Bergen-op-Zoom, and not one of us but is +longing to be at home to bear his part in the events pending there. It +is hard, indeed, to be confined in this miserable Dutch town while +England is in danger. Unfortunately we are soldiers and must obey +orders; but as you are as yet only volunteers, free to act as you +choose, it would be foolish in the extreme for you to come over to this +dull place while there is so much going on in England. I have written +to my cousin, asking him to introduce you to some of the country +gentlemen who have fitted out a ship for service against the Spaniards, +so that you may have a hand in what is going on." + +This the earl had done, and early in May they had journeyed down to +Plymouth on horseback with a, party of other gentlemen who were going +on board the _Active_, a vessel of two hundred and fifty tons +belonging to a gentleman of Devonshire, one Master Audrey Drake, a +relation of Sir Francis Drake. The earl himself was with the party. He +did not intend to go on board, for he was a bad sailor; and though +ready, as he said, to do his share of fighting upon land, would be only +an encumbrance on board a ship. + +He went down principally at the request of Cecil and other members of +the council, who, knowing that he was a favourite of the queen, thought +that his representations as to the state of the fleet might do more +than they could do to influence her to send supplies to the distressed +sailors. The earl visited the ships lying in the mouth of the Tamar, +and three times started in a boat to go out to those in the Sound; but +the sea was so rough, and he was so completely prostrated by sickness, +that he had each time to put back. What he saw, however, on board the +ships he visited, and heard from Lord Howard as to the state of those +at sea, was quite sufficient. He at once expended a considerable amount +of money in buying wine and fresh meat for the sick, and then hurried +away to London to lay before the queen the result of his personal +observations, and to implore her to order provisions to be immediately +despatched to the fleet. + +But even the description given by one of her favourites of the +sufferings of the seamen was insufficient to induce the queen to open +her purse-strings, and the earl left her in great dudgeon; and although +his private finances had been much straitened by his extravagance and +love of display, he at once chartered a ship, filled her with +provisions, and despatched her to Plymouth. + +Mr. Drake and the gentlemen with him took up their abode in the town +until there should be need for them to go on board the _Active_, +where the accommodation was much cramped, and life by no means +agreeable; and the Vickars therefore escaped sharing the sufferings of +those on board ship. + +At the end of May came the news that the Armada had sailed on the 19th, +and high hopes were entertained that the period of waiting had +terminated. A storm, however, scattered the great fleet, and it was not +until the 12th of July that they sailed from the Bay of Ferrol, where +they had collected after the storm. + +Never was there known a season so boisterous as the summer of 1588, and +when off Ushant, in a south-west gale, four galleys were wrecked on the +French coast, and the _Santa Anna_, a galleon of 800 tons, went +down, carrying with her ninety seamen, three hundred soldiers, and +50,000 ducats in gold. + +After two days the storm abated, and the fleet again proceeded. At +daybreak on the 20th the Lizard was in sight, and an English fishing- +boat was seen running along their line. Chase was given, but she soon +out-sailed her pursuers, and carried the news to Plymouth. The Armada +had already been made out from the coast the night before, and beacon +lights had flashed the news all over England. In every village and town +men were arming and saddling and marching away to the rendezvous of the +various corps. + +In Plymouth the news was received with the greatest rejoicing. Thanks +to the care with which the provisions had been husbanded, and to the +manner in which the officers and volunteers had from their private +means supplemented the scanty stores, there was still a week's +provisions on board, and this, it was hoped, would suffice for their +needs. The scanty supply of ammunition was a greater source of anxiety; +but they hoped that fresh supplies would be forthcoming, now that even +the queen could no longer close her eyes to the urgent necessity of the +case. + +As soon as the news arrived all the gentlemen in the town flocked on +board the ships, and on the night of the 19th the queen's ships and +some of the privateers went to moorings behind Ram Head, so that they +could make clear to sea; and on the morning when the Spaniards sighted +the Lizard, forty sail were lying ready for action under the headland. + +At three o'clock in the afternoon the look-out men on the hill reported +a line of sails on the western horizon. Two wings were at first +visible, which were gradually united as the topsails of those in the +centre rose above the line of sea. As they arose it could be seen that +the great fleet was sailing, in the form of a huge crescent, before a +gentle wind. A hundred and fifty ships, large and small, were counted, +as a few store-ships bound for Flanders had joined the Armada for +protection. + +The _Active_ was one of the privateers that had late the evening +before gone out to Earn Head, and just as it was growing dusk the +anchors were got up, and the little fleet sailed out from the shelter +of the land as the Armada swept along. + +The Spanish admiral at once ordered the fleet to lie-to for the night, +and to prepare for a general action at daybreak, as he knew from a +fisherman he had captured that the English fleet were at Plymouth. The +wind was on shore, but all through the night Howard's and Drake's ships +beat out from the Sound until they took their places behind the Spanish +fleet, whose position they could perfectly make out by the light of the +half-moon that rose at two in the morning. + +On board the English fleet all was confidence and hilarity. The +sufferings of the last three months were forgotten. The numbers and +magnitude of the Spanish ships counted as nothing. The sailors of the +west country had met the Spaniards on the Indian seas and proved their +masters, and doubted not for a moment that they should do so again. + +There was scarce a breath of air when day broke, but at eight o'clock a +breeze sprang up from the west, and the Armada made sail and attempted +to close with the English; but the low, sharp English ships sailed two +feet to the one of the floating castles of Spain, and could sail close +to the wind, while the Spanish ships, if they attempted to close-haul +their sails, drifted bodily to leeward. Howard's flagship, the _Ark- +Raleigh_, with three other English ships, opened the engagement by +running down along their rear-line, firing into each galleon as they +passed, then wearing round and repeating the manoeuvre. The great +_San Matteo_ luffed out from the rest of the fleet and challenged +them to board, but they simply poured their second broadside into her +and passed on. + +The excellence of the manoeuvring of the English ships, and the +rapidity and accuracy of their fire, astonished the Spaniards. +Throughout the whole forenoon the action continued; the Spaniards +making efforts to close, but in vain, the English ships keeping the +weather-gage and sailing continually backwards and forwards, pouring in +their broadsides. The height and size of the Spanish ships were against +them; and being to leeward they heeled over directly they came up to +the wind to fire a broadside, and their shots for the most part went +far over their assailants, while they themselves suffered severely from +the English fire. Miquel de Oquendo, who commanded one of the six +Spanish squadrons, distinguished himself by his attempts to close with +the English, and by maintaining his position in the rear of the fleet +engaged in constant conflict with them. + +He was a young nobleman of great promise, distinguished alike for his +bravery and chivalrous disposition; but he could do little while the +wind remained in the west and the English held the weather-gage. So far +only the ships that had been anchored out under Earn Head had taken +part in the fight, those lying higher up in the Sound being unable to +make their way out. At noon the exertions of their crews, who had from +the preceding evening worked incessantly, prevailed, and they were now +seen coming out from behind the headland to take part in the struggle. +Medina-Sidonia signalled to his fleet to make sail up Channel, Martinez +de Ricaldo covering the rear with the squadron of Biscay. He was vice- +admiral of the fleet, and considered to be the best seaman Spain +possessed now that Santa Cruz was dead. + +The wind was now rising. Lord Howard sent off a fast boat with letters +to Lord Henry Seymour, telling him how things had gone so far, and +bidding him be prepared for the arrival of the Spanish fleet in the +Downs. As the afternoon went on the wind rose, and a rolling sea came +in from the west. Howard still hung upon the Spanish rear, firing but +seldom in order to save his powder. As evening fell, the Spanish +vessels, huddled closely together, frequently came into collision with +one another, and in one of these the _Capitana_, the flagship of +the Andalusian division, commanded by Admiral Pedro de Valdez, had her +bowsprit carried away, the foremast fell overboard, and the ship +dropped out of her place. + +Two of the galleasses came to her assistance and tried to take her in +tow, but the waves were running so high that the cable broke. Pedro de +Valdez had been commander of the Spanish fleet on the coast of Holland, +and knew the English Channel and the northern shores of France and +Holland well. The duke therefore despatched boats to bring him off with +his crew, but he refused to leave his charge. Howard, as with his ships +he passed her, believed her to be deserted and went on after the fleet; +but a London vessel kept close to her and exchanged shots with her all +night, until Drake, who had turned aside to chase what he believed to +be a portion of the Spanish fleet that had separated itself from the +rest, but which turned out to be the merchant ships that had joined it +for protection, came up, and the _Capitana_ struck her flag. Drake +took her into Torbay, and there left her in the care of the Brixham +fishermen, and taking with him Valdez and the other officers sailed +away to join Lord Howard. The fishermen, on searching the ship, found +some tons of gunpowder on board her. Knowing the scarcity of ammunition +in the fleet they placed this on board the _Roebuck_, the fastest +trawler in the harbour, and she started at once in pursuit of the +fleet. + +The misfortune to the _Capitana_, was not the only one that befell +the Spaniards. While Oquendo was absent from his galleon a quarrel +arose among the officers, who were furious at the ill result of the +day's fighting. The captain struck the master-gunner with a stick; the +latter, a German, rushed below in a rage, thrust a burning fuse into a +powder barrel, and sprang through a port-hole into the sea. The whole +of the deck was blown up, with two hundred sailors and soldiers; but +the ship was so strongly built that she survived the shock, and her +mast still stood. + +The duke sent boats to learn what had happened. These carried off the +few who remained unhurt, but there was no means of taking off the +wounded. These, however, were treated kindly and sent on shore when the +ship was picked up at daylight by the English, who, on rifling her, +found to their delight that there were still many powder barrels on +board that had escaped the explosion. + +The morning broke calm, and the wind, when it came, was from the east, +which gave the Spaniards the advantage of position. The two fleets lay +idle all day three or four miles apart, and the next morning, as the +wind was still from the east, the Spaniards bore down upon Howard to +offer battle. + +The English, however, headed out to sea. Encouraged by seeing their +assailants avoid a pitched battle the Spaniards gave chase. The _San +Marcos_, the fastest sailer in the fleet, left the rest behind, and +when the breeze headed round at noon she was several miles to windward +of her consorts, and the English at once set upon her. She fought with +extreme courage, and defended herself single-handed for an hour and a +half, when Oquendo came up to the rescue, and as the action off +Plymouth had almost exhausted his stock of powder, and the Brixham +sloop had not yet come up, Howard was obliged to draw off. + +The action of this day was fought off Portland. During the three days +the British fleet had been to sea they had received almost hourly +reinforcements. From every harbour and fishing port along the coast +from Plymouth to the Isle of Wight vessels of all sizes, smacks, and +boats put off, crowded with noblemen and gentlemen anxious to take part +in the action, and their enthusiasm added to that of the weary and ill- +fed sailors. At the end of the third day the English fleet had +increased to a hundred sail, many of which, however, were of very small +burden. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE ROUT OF THE ARMADA. + + +The fight between the fleets had begun on Sunday morning, and at the +end of the third day the strength of the Armada remained unbroken. The +moral effect had no doubt been great, but the loss of two or three +ships was a trifle to so large a force, and the spirit of the Spaniards +had been raised by the gallant and successful defence the _San +Marcos_ had made on the Tuesday afternoon. Wednesday was again calm. +The magazines of the English ships were empty. Though express after +express had been sent off praying that ammunition might be sent, none +had arrived, and the two fleets lay six miles apart without action, +save that the galleasses came out and skirmished for a while with the +English ships. + +That evening, however, a supply of ammunition sufficient for another +day's fighting arrived, and soon after daybreak the English fleet moved +down towards the Armada, and for the first time engaged them at close +quarters. The _Ark-Raleigh_, the _Bear_, the _Elizabeth +Jones_, the _Lion_, and the _Victory_ bore on straight +into the centre of the Spanish galleons, exchanging broadsides with +each as they passed. Oquendo with his vessel was right in the course of +the English flagship, and a collision took place, in which the _Ark- +Raleigh's_ rudder was unshipped, and she became unmanageable. + +The enemy's vessels closed round her, but she lowered her boats, and +these, in spite of the fire of the enemy, brought her head round before +the wind, and she made her way through her antagonists and got clear. +For several hours the battle continued. The Spanish fire was so slow, +and their ships so unwieldy, that it was rarely they succeeded in +firing a shot into their active foes, while the English shot tore their +way through the massive timbers of the Spanish vessels, scattering the +splinters thickly among the soldiers, who had been sent below to be out +of harm's way; but beyond this, and inflicting much damage upon masts +and spars, the day's fighting had no actual results. No captures were +made by the English. + +The Spaniards suffered, but made no sign; nevertheless their confidence +in their powers was shaken. Their ammunition was also running short, +and they had no hope of refilling their magazines until they effected a +junction with Parma. Their admiral that night wrote to him asking that +two shiploads of shot and powder might be sent to him immediately. "The +enemy pursue me," he said; "they fire upon me most days from morning +till nightfall, but they will not close and grapple. I have given them +every opportunity. I have purposely left ships exposed to tempt them to +board, but they decline to do it; and there is no remedy, for they are +swift and we are slow. They have men and ammunition in abundance." The +Spanish admiral was unaware that the English magazines were even more +empty than his own. + +On Friday morning Howard sailed for Dover to take in the supplies that +were so sorely needed. The Earl of Sussex, who was in command of the +castle, gave him all that he had, and the stores taken from the prizes +came up in light vessels and were divided among the fleet, and in the +evening the English fleet again sailed out and took up its place in the +rear of the Armada. + +On Saturday morning the weather changed. After six days of calm and +sunshine it began to blow hard from the west, with driving showers. The +Spaniards, having no pilots who knew the coasts, anchored off Calais. +The English fleet, closely watching their movements, brought up two +miles astern. + +The Spanish admiral sent off another urgent letter to Parma at Dunkirk, +begging him to send immediately thirty or forty fast gunboats to keep +the English at bay. Parma had received the admiral's letters, and was +perfectly ready to embark his troops, but could not do this as the +admiral expected he would, until the fleet came up to protect him. The +lighters and barges he had constructed for the passage were only fit to +keep the sea in calm weather, and would have been wholly at the mercy +of even a single English ship of war. He could not, therefore, embark +his troops until the duke arrived. As to the gunboats asked for, he had +none with him. + +But while the Spanish admiral had grave cause for uneasiness in the +situation in which he found himself, Lord Howard had no greater reason +for satisfaction. In spite of his efforts the enemy's fleet had arrived +at their destination with their strength still unimpaired, and were in +communication with the Duke of Parma's army. Lord Seymour had come up +with a squadron from the mouth of the Thames, but his ships had but one +day's provisions on board, while Drake and Howard's divisions had all +but exhausted their supplies. The previous day's fighting had used up +the ammunition obtained at Dover. Starvation would drive every English +ship from the sea in another week at latest. The Channel would then be +open for the passage of Parma's army. + +At five o'clock on Sunday evening a council of war was held in Lord +Howard's cabin, and it was determined, that as it was impossible to +attack the Spanish fleet where they lay at the edge of shallow water, +an attempt must be made to drive them out into the Channel with fire- +ships. Eight of the private vessels were accordingly taken, and such +combustibles as could be found--pitch, tar, old sails, empty casks, and +other materials--were piled into them. At midnight the tide set +directly from the English fleet towards the Spaniards, and the fire- +ships, manned by their respective crews, hoisted sail and drove down +towards them. + +When near the Armada the crews set fire to the combustibles, and taking +to their boats rowed back to the fleet. At the sight of the flames +bursting up from the eight ships bearing down upon them, the Spaniards +were seized with a panic. The admiral fired a gun as a signal, and all +cut their cables and hoisted sail, and succeeded in getting out to sea +before the fire-ships arrived. They lay-to six miles from shore, +intending to return in the morning and recover their anchors; but Drake +with his division of the fleet, and Seymour with the squadron from the +Thames, weighed their anchors and stood off after them, while Howard +with his division remained off Calais, where, in the morning, the +largest of the four galleasses was seen aground on Calais Bar. Lord +Howard wasted many precious hours in capturing her before he set off to +join Drake and Seymour, who were thundering against the Spanish fleet. +The wind had got up during the night, and the Spaniards had drifted +farther than they expected, and when morning dawned were scattered over +the sea off Gravelines. Signals were made for them to collect, but +before they could do so Drake and Seymour came up and opened fire +within pistol-shot. The English admiral saw at once that, with the wind +rising from the south, if he could drive the unwieldy galleons north +they would be cut off from Dunkirk, and would not be able to beat back +again until there was a change of wind. + +All through the morning the English ships poured a continuous shower of +shot into the Spanish vessels, which, huddled together in a confused +mass, were unable to make any return whatever. The duke and Oquendo, +with some of the best sailors among the fleet, tried to bear out from +the crowd and get room to manoeuvre, but Drake's ships were too +weatherly and too well handled to permit of this, and they were driven +back again into the confused mass, which was being slowly forced +towards the shoals and banks of the coasts. + +Howard came up at noon with his division, and until sunset the fire was +maintained, by which time almost the last cartridge was spent, and the +crews worn out by their incessant labour. They took no prizes, for they +never attempted to board. They saw three great galleons go down, and +three more drift away towards the sands of Ostend, where they were +captured either by the English garrisoned there or by three vessels +sent by Lord Willoughby from Flushing, under the command of Francis +Vere. Had the English ammunition lasted but a few more hours the whole +of the Armada would have been either driven ashore or sunk; but when +the last cartridge had been burned the assailants drew off to take on +board the stores which had, while the fighting was going on, been +brought up by some provision ships from the Thames. + +But the Spaniards were in no condition to benefit by the cessation of +the attack. In spite of the terrible disadvantages under which they +laboured, they had fought with splendid courage. The sides of the +galleons had been riddled with shot, and the splinters caused by the +rending of the massive timbers had done even greater execution than the +iron hail. Being always to leeward, and heeling over with the wind, the +ships had been struck again and again below the water-line, and many +were only kept from sinking by nailing sheets of lead over the shot- +holes. + +Their guns were, for the most part, dismounted or knocked to pieces. +Several had lost masts, the carnage among the crews was frightful, and +yet not a single ship hauled down her colours. The _San Matteo_, +which was one of those that grounded between Ostend and Sluys, fought +to the last, and kept Francis Vere's three ships at bay for two hours, +until she was at last carried by boarding. + +Left to themselves at the end of the day, the Spaniards gathered in +what order they could, and made sail for the north. On counting the +losses they found that four thousand men had been killed or drowned, +and the number of wounded must have been far greater. The crews were +utterly worn-out and exhausted. They had the day before been kept at +work cleaning and refitting, and the fire-ships had disturbed them +early in the night. During the engagement there had been no time to +serve out food, and the labours of the long struggle had completely +exhausted them. Worst of all, they were utterly disheartened by the +day's fighting. They had been pounded by their active foes, who fired +five shots to their one, and whose vessels sailed round and round them, +while they themselves had inflicted no damage that they could perceive +upon their assailants. + +The English admirals had no idea of the extent of the victory they had +won. Howard, who had only come up in the middle of the fight, believed +that they "were still wonderful great and strong," while even Drake, +who saw more clearly how much they had suffered, only ventured to hope +that some days at least would elapse before they could join hands with +Parma. In spite of the small store of ammunition that had arrived the +night before, the English magazines were almost empty; but they +determined to show a good front, and "give chase as though they wanted +nothing." + +When the morning dawned the English fleet were still to windward of the +Armada, while to leeward were lines of white foam, where the sea was +breaking on the shoals of Holland. It seemed that the Armada was lost. +At this critical moment the wind suddenly shifted to the east. This +threw the English fleet to leeward, and enabled the Spaniards to head +out from the coast and make for the North Sea. The Spanish admiral held +a council. The sea had gone down, and they had now a fair wind for +Calais; and the question was put to the sailing-masters and captains +whether they should return into the Channel or sail north round +Scotland and Ireland, and so return to Spain. The former was the +courageous course, but the spirit of the Spaniards was broken, and the +vote was in favour of what appeared a way of escape. Therefore, the +shattered fleet bore on its way north. On board the English fleet a +similar council was being held, and it was determined that Lord +Seymour's squadron should return to guard the Channel, lest Parma +should take advantage of the absence of the fleet to cross from Dunkirk +to England, and that Howard and Drake with their ninety ships should +pursue the Spaniards; for it was not for a moment supposed that the +latter had entirely abandoned their enterprise, and intended to return +to Spain without making another effort to rejoin Parma. + +During the week's fighting Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars had taken such +part as they could in the contest; but as there had been no hand-to- +hand fighting, the position of the volunteers on board the fleet had +been little more than that of spectators. The crews worked the guns and +manoeuvred the sails, and the most the lads could do was to relieve the +ship-boys in carrying up powder and shot, and to take round drink to +men serving the guns. When not otherwise engaged they had watched with +intense excitement the manoeuvres of their own ship and of those near +them, as they swept down towards the great hulls, delivered their +broadsides, and then shot off again before the Spaniards had had time +to discharge more than a gun or two. The sails had been pierced in +several places, but not a single shot had struck the hull of the +vessel. In the last day's fighting, however, the _Active_ became +entangled among several of the Spanish galleons, and being almost +becalmed by their lofty hulls, one of them ran full at her, and rolling +heavily in the sea, seemed as if she would overwhelm her puny +antagonist. + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY CARRIED OVERBOARD BY THE FALLING MAST] + +Geoffrey was standing at the end of the poop when the mizzen rigging +became entangled in the stern gallery of the Spaniard, and a moment +later the mast snapped off, and as it fell carried him overboard. For a +moment he was half-stunned, but caught hold of a piece of timber shot +away from one of the enemy's ships, and clung to it mechanically. When +he recovered and looked round, the _Active_ had drawn out from +between the Spaniards, and the great galleon which had so nearly sunk +her was close beside him. + +The sea was in a turmoil; the waves as they set in from the west being +broken up by the rolling of the great ships, and torn by the hail of +shot. The noise was prodigious, from the incessant cannonade kept up by +the English ships and the return of the artillery on board the Armada, +the rending of timber, the heavy crashes as the great galleons rolled +against one another, the shouting on board the Spanish ships, the +creaking of the masts and yards, and the flapping of the sails. + +On trying to strike out, Geoffrey found that as he had been knocked +overboard he had struck his right knee severely against the rail of the +vessel, and was at present unable to use that leg. Fearful of being run +down by one of the great ships, and still more of being caught between +two of them as they rolled, he looked round to try to get sight of an +English ship in the throng. Then, seeing that he was entirely +surrounded by Spaniards, he left the spar and swam as well as he could +to the bow of a great ship close beside him, and grasping a rope +trailing from the bowsprit, managed by its aid to climb up until he +reached the bobstay, across which he seated himself with his back to +the stem. The position was a precarious one, and after a time he gained +the wooden carved work above, and obtained a seat there just below the +bowsprit, and hidden from the sight of those on deck a few feet above +him. As he knew the vessels were drifting to leeward towards the +shoals, he hoped to remain hidden until the vessel struck, and then to +gain the shore. + +Presently the shifting of the positions of the ships brought the vessel +on which he was into the outside line. The shots now flew thickly +about, and he could from time to time feel a jar as the vessel was +struck. + +So an hour went on. At the end of that time he heard a great shouting +on deck, and the sound of men running to and fro. Happening to look +down he saw that the sea was but a few feet below him, and knew that +the great galleon was sinking. Another quarter of an hour she was so +much lower that he was sure she could not swim many minutes longer; and +to avoid being drawn down with her he dropped into the water and swam +off. He was but a short distance away when he heard a loud cry, and +glancing over his shoulder saw the ship disappearing. He swam +desperately, but was caught in the suck and carried under; but there +was no great depth of water, and he soon came to the surface again. The +sea was dotted with struggling men and pieces of wreckage. He swam to +one of the latter, and held on until he saw some boats, which the next +Spanish ship had lowered when she saw her consort disappearing, rowing +towards them, and was soon afterwards hauled into one of them. He had +closed his eyes as it came up, and assumed the appearance of +insensibility, and he lay in the bottom of the boat immovable, until +after a time he heard voices above, and then felt himself being carried +up the ladder and laid down on the deck. + +He remained quiet for some time, thinking over what he had best do. He +was certain that were it known he was English he would at once be +stabbed and thrown overboard, for there was no hope of quarter; but he +was for some time unable to devise any plan by which, even for a short +time, to conceal his nationality. He only knew a few words of Spanish, +and would be detected the moment he opened his lips. He thought of +leaping up suddenly and jumping overboard; but his chance of reaching +the English ships to windward would be slight indeed. At last an idea +struck him, and sitting up he opened his eyes and looked round. Several +other Spaniards who had been picked up lay exhausted on the deck near +him. A party of soldiers and sailors close by were working a cannon. +The bulwarks were shot away in many places, dead and dying men lay +scattered about, the decks were everywhere stained with blood, and no +one paid any attention to him until presently the fire began to +slacken. Shortly afterwards a Spanish officer came up and spoke to him. + +Geoffrey rose to his feet, rubbed his eyes, yawned, and burst into an +idiotic laugh. The officer spoke again but he paid no attention, and +the Spaniard turned away, believing that the lad had lost his senses +from fear and the horrors of the day. + +As night came on he was several times addressed, but always with the +same result. When after dark food and wine were served out, he seized +the portion offered to him, and hurrying away crouched under the +shelter of a gun, and devoured it as if fearing it would be taken from +him again. + +When he saw that the sailors were beginning to repair some of the most +necessary ropes and stays that had been shot away, he pushed his way +through them and took his share of the work, laughing idiotically from +time to time. He had, when he saw that the galleon was sinking, taken +off his doublet, the better to be able to swim, and in his shirt and +trunks there was nothing to distinguish him from a Spaniard, and none +suspected that he was other than he seemed to be--a ship's boy, who had +lost his senses from fear. When the work was done, he threw himself on +the deck with the weary sailors. His hopes were that the battle would +be renewed in the morning, and that either the ship might be captured, +or that an English vessel might pass so close alongside that he might +leap over and swim to her. + +Great was his disappointment next day when the sudden change of wind +gave the Spanish fleet the weather-gage, and enabled them to steer away +for the north. He joined in the work of the crew, paying no attention +whatever to what was passing around him, or heeding in the slightest +the remarks made to him. Once or twice when an officer spoke to him +sternly he gave a little cry, ran to the side, and crouched down as if +in abject fear. In a very short time no attention was paid to him, and +he was suffered to go about as he chose, being regarded as a harmless +imbecile. He was in hopes that the next day the Spaniards would change +their course and endeavour to beat back to the Channel, and was at once +disappointed and surprised as they sped on before the south-westerly +wind, which was hourly increasing in force. Some miles behind he could +see the English squadron in pursuit; but these made no attempt to close +up, being well contented to see the Armada sailing away, and being too +straitened in ammunition to wish to bring on an engagement so long as +the Spaniards were following their present course. + +The wind blew with ever-increasing force; the lightly ballasted ships +made bad weather, rolling deep in the seas, straining heavily, and +leaking badly through the opening seams and the hastily-stopped shot- +holes. Water was extremely scarce, and at a signal from the admiral all +the horses and mules were thrown overboard in order to husband the +supply. Several of the masts, badly injured by the English shot, went +by the board, and the vessels dropped behind crippled, to be picked up +by the pursuing fleet. + +Lord Howard followed as far as the mouth of the Forth; and seeing that +the Spaniards made no effort to enter the estuary, and his provisions +being now well-nigh exhausted, he hove the fleet about and made back +for the Channel, leaving two small vessels only to follow the Armada +and watch its course, believing that it would make for Denmark, refit +there, and then return to rejoin Parma. + +It was a grievous disappointment to the English to be thus forced by +want of provisions to relinquish the pursuit. Had they been properly +supplied with provisions and ammunition they could have made an end of +the Armada; whereas, they believed that by allowing them now to escape +the whole work would have to be done over again. They had sore trouble +to get back again off the Norfolk coast. The wind became so furious +that the fleet was scattered. A few of the largest ships reached +Margate; others were driven into Harwich, others with difficulty kept +the sea until the storm broke. + +It might have been thought that after such service as the fleet had +rendered even Elizabeth might have been generous; but now that the +danger was over, she became more niggardly than ever. No fresh +provisions were supplied for the sick men, and though in the fight off +the Dutch coast only some fifty or sixty had been killed, in the course +of a very short time the crews were so weakened by deaths and disease +that scarce a ship could have put to sea, however urgent the necessity. +Drake and Howard spent every penny they could raise in buying fresh +meat and vegetables, and in procuring some sort of shelter on shore for +the sick. Had the men received the wages due to them they could have +made a shift to have purchased what they so urgently required; but +though the Treasury was full of money, not a penny was forthcoming +until every item of the accounts had been investigated and squabbled +over. Howard was compelled to pay from his private purse for everything +that had been purchased at Plymouth, Sir John Hawkins was absolutely +ruined by the demands made on him to pay for necessaries supplied to +the fleet, and had the admirals and sailors of the fleet that saved +England behaved like ignominious cowards, their treatment could not +have been worse than that which they received at the hands of their +sovereign. + +But while the English seamen were dying like sheep from disease and +neglect, their conquered foes were faring no better. They had breathed +freely for the first time when they saw the English fleet bear up; an +examination was made of the provisions that were left, and the crews +were placed on rations of eight ounces of bread, half a pint of wine, +and a pint of water a day. The fleet was still a great one, for of the +hundred and fifty ships which had sailed from Corunna, a hundred and +twenty still held together. The weather now turned bitterly cold, with +fog and mist, squalls and driving showers; and the vessels, when they +reached the north coast of Scotland, lost sight of each other, and each +struggled for herself in the tempestuous sea. + +A week later the weather cleared, and on the 9th of August Geoffrey +looking round at daybreak saw fifteen other ships in sight. Among these +were the galleons of Calderon and Ricaldo, the _Rita, San Marcos_, +and eleven other vessels. Signals were flying from all of them, but the +sea was so high that it was scarce possible to lower a boat. That night +it again blew hard and the fog closed in, and in the morning Geoffrey +found that the ship he was on, and all the others, with the exception +of that of Calderon, were steering north; the intention of Ricaldo and +De Leyva being to make for the Orkneys and refit there. Calderon had +stood south, and had come upon Sidonia with fifty ships; and these, +bearing well away to the west of Ireland, finally succeeded for the +most part in reaching Spain, their crews reduced by sickness and want +to a mere shadow of their original strength. + +The cold became bitter as De Leyva's ships made their way towards the +Orkneys. The storm was furious, and the sailors, unaccustomed to the +cold and weakened by disease and famine, could no longer work their +ships, and De Leyva was obliged at last to abandon his intention and +make south. One galleon was driven on the Faroe Islands, a second on +the Orkneys, and a third on the Isle of Mull, where it was attacked by +the natives and burned with almost every one on board. The rest managed +to make the west coast of Ireland, and the hope that they would find +shelter in Galway Bay, or the mouth of the Shannon, began to spring up +in the breasts of the exhausted crews. + +The Irish were their co-religionists and allies, and had only been +waiting for news of the success of the Armada to rise in arms against +the English, who had but few troops there. Rumours of disaster had +arrived, and a small frigate had been driven into Tralee Bay. The fears +of the garrison at Tralee Castle overcame their feelings of humanity, +and all on board were put to death. Two galleons put into Dingle, and +landing begged for water; but the natives, deciding that the Spanish +cause was a lost one, refused to give them a drop, seized the men who +had landed in the boats, and the galleons had to put to sea again. + +Another ship of a thousand tons, _Our Lady of the Rosary_, was +driven into the furious straits between the Blasket Islands and the +coast of Kerry. Of her crew of seven hundred, five hundred had died. +Before she got half-way through she struck among the breakers, and all +the survivors perished save the son of the pilot, who was washed ashore +lashed to a plank. Six others who had reached the mouth of the Shannon +sent their boats ashore for water; but although there were no English +there the Irish feared to supply them, even though the Spaniards +offered any sum of money for a few casks. One of the ships was +abandoned and the others put to sea, only to be dashed ashore in the +same gale that wrecked _Our Lady of the Rosary_, and of all their +crews only one hundred and fifty men were cast ashore alive. Along the +coast of Connemara, Mayo, and Sligo many other ships were wrecked. In +almost every case the crews who reached the shore were at once murdered +by the native savages for the sake of their clothes and jewellery. + +Geoffrey had suffered as much as the rest of the crew on board the +galleon in which he sailed. All were so absorbed by their own suffering +and misery that none paid any attention to the idiot boy in their +midst. He worked at such work as there was to do: assisted to haul on +the ropes, to throw the dead overboard, and to do what could be done +for the sick and wounded. Like all on board he was reduced almost to a +skeleton, and was scarce able to stand. + +As the surviving ships passed Galway Bay, one of them, which was +leaking so badly that she could only have been kept afloat a few hours +in any case, entered it, and brought up opposite the town. Don Lewis of +Cordova, who commanded, sent a party on shore, believing that in +Galway, between which town and Spain there had always been close +connections, they would be well received. They were, however, at once +taken prisoners. An attempt was made to get up the anchors again, but +the crew were too feeble to be able to do so, and the natives coming +out in their boats, all were taken prisoners and sent on shore. Sir +Richard Bingham, the governor of Connaught, arrived in a few hours, and +at once despatched search parties through Clare and Connemara to bring +all Spaniards cast ashore alive to the town, and sent his son to Mayo +to fetch down all who landed there. But young Bingham's mission proved +useless; every Spaniard who had landed had been murdered by the +natives, well-nigh three thousand having been slain by the axes and +knives of the savages who professed to be their co-religionists. + +Sir Richard Bingham was regarded as a humane man, but he feared the +consequences should the eleven hundred prisoners collected at Galway be +restored to health and strength. He had but a handful of troops under +him, and had had the greatest difficulty in keeping down the Irish +alone. With eleven hundred Spanish soldiers to aid them the task would +be impossible, and accordingly he gave orders that all, with the +exception of Don Lewis himself, and three or four other nobles, should +be executed. The order was carried out; Don Lewis, with those spared, +was sent under an escort to Dublin, but the others being too feeble to +walk were killed or died on the way, and Don Lewis himself was the sole +survivor out of the crews of a dozen ships. + +De Leyva, the most popular officer in the Armada, had with him in his +ship two hundred and fifty young nobles of the oldest families in +Spain. He was twice wrecked. The first time all reached the shore in +safety, and were protected by O'Niel, who was virtually the sovereign +of the north of Ulster. He treated them kindly for a time. They then +took to sea again, but were finally wrecked off Dunluce, and all on +board save five perished miserably. Over eight thousand Spaniards died +on the Irish coast. Eleven hundred were put to death by Bingham, three +thousand murdered by the Irish, the rest drowned; and of the whole +Armada but fifty-four vessels, carrying between nine and ten thousand +worn-out men, reached Spain, and of the survivors a large proportion +afterwards died from the effects of the sufferings they had endured. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +THE WAR IN HOLLAND. + + +In the confusion caused by the collision of the _Active_ with the +Spanish galleon no one had noticed the accident which had befallen +Geoffrey Vickars, and his brother's distress was great when, on the +ship getting free from among the Spaniards, he discovered that Geoffrey +was missing. He had been by his side on the poop but a minute before +the mast fell, and had no doubt that he had been carried overboard by +its wreck. That he had survived he had not the least hope, and when a +week later the _Active_ on her way back towards the Thames was +driven into Harwich, he at once landed and carried the sad news to his +parents. England was wild with joy at its deliverance, but the +household at Hedingham was plunged into deep sorrow. + +Weeks passed and then Lionel received a letter from Francis Vere saying +that Parma's army was advancing into Holland, and that as active work +was at hand he had best, if his intentions remained unchanged, join him +without delay. + +He started two days later for Harwich, and thence took ship for Bergen- +op-Zoom. Anchoring at Flushing, he learned that the Duke of Parma had +already sat down in front of Bergen-op-Zoom, and had on the 7th +attempted to capture Tholen on the opposite side of the channel, but +had been repulsed by the regiment of Count Solms, with a loss of 400 +men. He had then thrown up works against the water forts, and hot +fighting had gone on, the garrison making frequent sallies upon the +besiegers. The water forts still held out, and the captain therefore +determined to continue his voyage into the town. The ship was fired at +by the Spanish batteries, but passed safely between the water forts and +dropped anchor in the port on the last day of September, Lionel having +been absent from Holland just a year. He landed at once and made his +way to the lodgings of Francis Vere, by whom he was received with great +cordiality. + +"I was greatly grieved," he said after the first greetings, "to hear of +your brother's death. I felt it as if he had been a near relative of my +own. I had hoped to see you both; and that affair concerning which my +cousin wrote to me, telling me how cleverly you had discovered a plot +against the queen's life, showed me that you would both be sure to make +your way. Your father and mother must have felt the blow terribly?" + +"They have indeed," Lionel said. "I do not think, however, that they +altogether give up hope. They cling to the idea that he may have been +picked up by some Spanish ship and may now be a prisoner in Spain." + +Francis Vere shook his head. + +"Of course, I know," Lionel went on, "their hope is altogether without +foundation; for even had Geoffrey gained one of their ships, he would +at once have been thrown overboard. Still I rather encouraged the idea, +for it is better that hope should die out gradually than be +extinguished at a blow; and slight though it was it enabled my father +and mother to bear up better than they otherwise would have done. Had +it not been for that I believe that my mother would have well nigh sunk +beneath it. I was very glad when I got your letter, for active service +will be a distraction to my sorrow. We have ever been together, +Geoffrey and I, and I feel like one lost without him. You have not had +much fighting here, I think, since I have been away?" + +"No, indeed; you have been far more lucky than I have," Francis Vere +said. "With the exception of the fight with the _San Matteo_ I +have been idle ever since I saw you, for not a shot has been fired +here, while you have been taking part in the great fight for the very +existence of our country. It is well that Parma has been wasting nine +months at Dunkirk, for it would have gone hard with us had he marched +hither instead of waiting there for the arrival of the Armada. Our +force here has fallen away to well-nigh nothing. The soldiers could get +no pay, and were almost starved; their clothes were so ragged that it +was pitiful to see them. Great numbers have died, and more gone back to +England. As to the Dutch, they are more occupied in quarrelling with us +than in preparing for defence, and they would right willingly see us go +so that we did but deliver Flushing and Brill and this town back again +to them. I was truly glad when I heard that Parma had broken up his +camp at Dunkirk when the Armada sailed away, and was marching hither. +Now that he has come, it may be that these wretched disputes will come +to an end, and that something like peace and harmony will prevail in +our councils. He could not have done better, as far as we are +concerned, than in coming to knock his head against these walls; for +Bergen is far too strong for him to take, and he will assuredly meet +with no success here such as would counterbalance in any way the blow +that Spanish pride has suffered in the defeat of the Armada. I think, +Lionel, that you have outgrown your pageship, and since you have been +fighting as a gentleman volunteer in Drake's fleet you had best take +the same rank here." + +The siege went on but slowly. Vigorous sorties were made, and the +cavalry sometimes sallied out from the gates and made excursions as far +as Wouw, a village three miles away, and took many prisoners. Among +these were two commissaries of ordnance, who were intrusted to the safe +keeping of the Deputy-Provost Redhead. They were not strictly kept, and +were allowed to converse with the provost's friends. One of these, +William Grimeston, suspected that one of the commissaries, who +pretended to be an Italian, was really an English deserter who had gone +over with the traitor Stanley; and in order to see if his suspicions +were correct, pretended that he was dissatisfied with his position and +would far rather be fighting on the other side. The man at once fell +into the trap, acknowledged that he was an Englishman, and said that if +Grimeston and Redhead would but follow his advice they would soon +become rich men, for that if they could arrange to give up one of the +forts to Parma they would be magnificently rewarded. + +Redhead and Grimeston pretended to agree, but at once informed Lord +Willoughby, who was in command, of the offer that had been made to +them. They were ordered to continue their negotiations with the +traitor. The latter furnished them with letters to Stanley and Parma, +and with these they made their way out of the town at night to the +Spanish camp. They had an interview with the duke, and promised to +deliver the north water fort over to him, for which service Redhead was +to receive 1200 crowns and Grimeston 700 crowns, and a commission in +Stanley's regiment of traitors. + +Stanley himself entertained them in his tent, and Parma presented them +with two gold chains. They then returned to Bergen and related all that +had taken place to Lord Willoughby. The matter was kept a profound +secret in the town, Francis Vere, who was in command of the north fort, +and a few others only being made acquainted with what was going on. + +On the appointed night, 22d of October, Grimeston went out alone, +Redhead's supposed share of the business being to open the gates of the +fort. When Grimeston arrived at Parma's camp he found that the +Spaniards had become suspicious. He was bound and placed in charge of a +Spanish captain, who was ordered to stab him at once if there was any +sign of treachery. It was a dark night; the tide was out, for the land +over which the Spaniards had to advance was flooded at other times. The +attacking column consisted of three thousand men, including Stanley's +regiment; and a number of knights and nobles accompanied it as +volunteers. + +As they approached the forts--Grimeston in front closely guarded by the +Spanish captain--it was seen by the assailants that Redhead had kept +his word: the drawbridge across the moat was down and the portcullis +was up. Within the fort Lord Willoughby, Vere, and two thousand men +were waiting them. When about fifty had crossed the drawbridge the +portcullis was suddenly let fall and the drawbridge hauled up. As the +portcullis thundered down Grimeston tripped up the surprised Spaniard, +and, leaping into the water, managed to make his way to the foot of the +walls. A discharge of musketry and artillery from the fort killed a +hundred and fifty of the attacking party, while those who had crossed +the drawbridge were all either killed or taken prisoners. But the water +in the moat was low. The Spaniards gallantly waded across and attacked +the palisades, but were repulsed in their endeavour to climb them. +While the fight was going on the water in the moat was rising, and +scores were washed away and drowned as they attempted to return. + +Parma continued the siege for some little time, but made no real +attempt to take the place after having been repulsed at the north fort; +and on the 12th of November broke up his camp and returned to Brussels. + +After the siege was over Lord Willoughby knighted twelve of his +principal officers, foremost among whom was Francis Vere, who was now +sent home with despatches by his general, and remained in England until +the end of January, when he was appointed sergeant-major-general of the +forces, a post of great responsibility and much honour, by Lord +Willoughby, with the full approval of the queen's government. He was +accompanied on his return by his brother Robert. + +A month after Sir Francis Vere's return Lord Willoughby left for +England, and the whole burden of operations in the field fell upon +Vere. His first trouble arose from the mutinous conduct of the garrison +of Gertruydenberg. This was an important town on the banks of the old +Maas, and was strongly fortified, one side being protected by the Maas +while the river Douge swept round two other sides of its walls. Its +governor, Count Hohenlohe, had been unpopular, the troops had received +no pay, and there had been a partial mutiny before the siege of Bergen- +op-Zoom began. This was appeased by the appointment of Sir John +Wingfield, Lord Willoughby's brother-in-law, as its governor. + +In the winter the discontent broke out again. The soldiers had been +most unjustly treated by the States, and there were long arrears of +pay, and at first Sir John Wingfield espoused the cause of the men. Sir +Francis Vere tried in vain to arrange matters. The Dutch authorities +would not pay up the arrears, the men would not return to their duty +until they did so, and at last became so exasperated that they ceased +to obey their governor and opened communications with the enemy. Prince +Maurice, who was now three and twenty years old, and devoted to martial +pursuits and the cause of his countrymen, after consultation with Sir +Francis Vere, laid siege to the town and made a furious assault upon it +on the water side. But the Dutch troops, although led by Count Solms +and Count Philip of Nassau, were repulsed with great loss. The prince +then promised not only a pardon, but that the demands of the garrison +should be complied with; but it was too late, and four days later +Gertruydenberg was delivered up by the mutineers to the Duke of Parma, +the soldiers being received into the Spanish service, while Wingfield +and the officers were permitted to retire. + +The States were furious, as this was the third city commanded by +Englishmen that had been handed over to the enemy. The bad feeling +excited by the treachery of Sir William Stanley and Roland Yorke at +Deventer and Zutphen had died out after the gallant defence of the +English at Sluys, but now broke out again afresh, and charges of +treachery were brought not only against Wingfield but against many +other English officers, including Sir Francis Vere. The queen, however, +wrote so indignantly to the States that they had to withdraw their +charges against most of the English officers. + +In May Lord Willoughby, who was still in London, resigned his command. +A number of old officers of distinction who might have laid claims to +succeed him, among them Sir John Norris, Sir Roger Williams, Sir Thomas +Wilford, Sir William Drury, Sir Thomas Baskerville, and Sir John +Burrough, were withdrawn from the Netherlands to serve in France or +Ireland, and no general-in-chief or lieutenant-general was appointed, +Sir Francis Vere as sergeant-major receiving authority to command all +soldiers already in the field or to be sent out during the absence of +the general and lieutenant-general. His official title was Her +Majesty's Sergeant-major in the Field. The garrisons in the towns were +under the command of their own governors, and those could supply troops +for service in the field according to their discretion. + +The appointment of so young a man as Sir Francis Vere to a post +demanding not only military ability but great tact and diplomatic +power, was abundant proof of the high estimate formed of him by the +queen and her counsellors. The position was one of extreme difficulty. +He had to keep on good terms with the queen and her government, with +the government of the States, the English agent at the Hague, Prince +Maurice in command of the army of the Netherlands, the English +governors of the towns, and the officers or men of the force under his +own command. Fortunately Barneveldt, who at that time was the most +prominent man in the States, had a high opinion of Vere. Sir Thomas +Bodley, the queen's agent, had much confidence in him, and acted with +him most cordially, and Prince Maurice entertained a great respect for +him, consulted him habitually in all military matters, and placed him +in the position of marshal of the camp of the army of the Netherlands, +in addition to his own command of the English portion of that army. + +Vere's first undertaking was to lead a force of 12,000 men, of whom +half were English, to prevent Count Mansfeldt from crossing the Maas +with an army of equal strength. Prince Maurice was present in person as +general-in-chief. Intrenchments were thrown up and artillery planted; +but just as Mansfeldt was preparing to cross his troops mutinied, and +he was obliged to fall back. + +In October, with 900 of his own troops and twelve companies of Dutch +horse, Sir Francis Vere succeeded in throwing a convoy of provisions +into the town of Rheinberg, which was besieged by a large force of the +enemy. As soon as he returned the States requested him to endeavour to +throw in another convoy, as Count Mansfeldt was marching to swell the +force of the besiegers, and after his arrival it would be well-nigh +impossible to send further aid into the town. Vere took with him 900 +English and 900 Dutch infantry, and 800 Dutch cavalry. The enemy had +possession of a fortified country house called Loo, close to which lay +a thick wood traversed only by a narrow path, with close undergrowth +and swampy ground on either side. The enemy were in great force around +Loo, and came out to attack the expedition as it passed through the +wood. Sending the Dutch troops on first, Vere attacked the enemy +vigorously with his infantry and drove them back to the inclosure of +Loo. As soon as his whole force had crossed the wood, he halted them +and ordered them to form in line of battle facing the wood through +which they had just passed, and from which the enemy were now pouring +out in great force. + +In order to give time to his troops to prepare for the action Vere took +half his English infantry and advanced against them. They moved +forward, and a stubborn fight took place between the pikemen. Vere's +horse was killed, and fell on him so that he could not rise; but the +English closed round him, and he was rescued with no other harm than a +bruised leg and several pike-thrusts through his clothes. While the +conflict between the pikemen was going on the English arquebusiers +opened fire on the flank of the enemy, and they began to fall back. +Four times they rallied and charged the English, but were at last +broken and scattered through the wood. The cavalry stationed there left +their horses and fled through the undergrowth. Pressing forward the +little English force next fell upon twenty-four companies of Neapolitan +infantry, who were defeated without difficulty. The four hundred and +fifty Englishmen then joined the main force, which marched triumphantly +with their convoy of provisions into Rheinberg, and the next morning +fortunately turning thick and foggy the force made its way back without +interruption by the enemy. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +IN SPAIN. + + +Alone among the survivors of the great Spanish Armada, Geoffrey Vickars +saw the coast of Ireland fade away from sight without a feeling of +satisfaction or relief. His hope had been that the ship would be +wrecked on her progress down the coast. He knew not that the wild Irish +were slaying all whom the sea spared, and that ignorant as they were of +the English tongue, he would undoubtedly have shared the fate of his +Spanish companions. He thought only of the risk of being drowned, and +would have preferred taking this to the certainty of a captivity +perhaps for life in the Spanish prisons. The part that he had played +since he had been picked up off Gravelines could not be sustained +indefinitely. He might as well spend his life in prison, where at least +there would be some faint hope of being exchanged, as wander about +Spain all his life as an imbecile beggar. + +As soon, therefore, as he saw that the perils of the coast of Ireland +were passed, and that the vessel was likely to reach Spain in safety, +he determined that he would on reaching a port disclose his real +identity. There were on board several Scotch and Irish volunteers, and +he decided to throw himself upon the pity of one of these rather than +on that of the Spaniards. He did not think that in any case his life +was in danger. Had he been detected when first picked up, or during the +early part of the voyage, he would doubtless have been thrown overboard +without mercy; but now that the passions of the combatants had +subsided, and that he had been so long among them, and had, as he +believed, won the good-will of many by the assistance he had rendered +to the sick and wounded, he thought that there was little fear of his +life being taken in cold blood. + +One of the Irish volunteers, Gerald Burke by name, had for a long time +been seriously ill, and Geoffrey had in many small ways shown him +kindness as he lay helpless on the deck, and he determined finally to +confide in him. Although still very weak, Burke was now convalescent, +and was sitting alone by the poop-rail gazing upon the coast of Spain +with eager eyes, when Geoffrey, under the pretext of coiling down a +rope, approached him. The young man nodded kindly to him. + +"Our voyage is nearly over, my poor lad," he said in Spanish, "and your +troubles now will be worse than mine. You have given me many a drink of +water from your scanty supply, and I wish that I could do something for +you in return; but I know that you do not even understand what I say to +you." + +"Would you give me an opportunity of speaking to you after nightfall, +Mr. Burke," Geoffrey said in English, "when no one will notice us +speaking?" + +The Irishman gave a start of astonishment at hearing himself addressed +in English. + +"My life is in your hands, sir; pray, do not betray me," Geoffrey said +rapidly as he went on coiling down the rope. + +"I will be at this place an hour after nightfall," the young Irishman +replied when he recovered from his surprise. "Your secret will be safe +with me." + +At the appointed time Geoffrey returned to the spot. The decks were now +deserted, for a drizzling rain was falling, and all save those on duty +had retired below, happy in the thought that on the following morning +they would be in port. + +"Now, tell me who you are," the young Irishman began. "I thought you +were a Spanish sailor, one of those we picked up when the Spanish +galleon next to us foundered." + +Geoffrey then told him how he had been knocked off an English ship by +the fall of a mast, had swum to the galleon and taken refuge beneath +her bowsprit until she sank, and how, when picked up and carried on to +the Spanish ship, he feigned to have lost his senses in order to +conceal his ignorance of Spanish. + +"I knew," he said, "that were I recognized as English at the time I +should at once be killed, but I thought that if I could conceal who I +was for a time I should simply be sent to the galleys, where I have +heard that there are many English prisoners working." + +"I think death would have been preferable to that lot," Mr. Burke said. + +"Yes, sir; but there is always the hope of escape or of exchange. When +you spoke kindly to me this afternoon I partly understood what you +said, for in this long time I have been on board I have come to +understand a little Spanish, and I thought that maybe you would assist +me in some way." + +"I would gladly do so, though I regard Englishmen as the enemies of my +country; but in what way can I help you? I could furnish you with a +disguise, but your ignorance of Spanish would lead to your detection +immediately." + +"I have been thinking it over, sir, and it seemed to me that as there +will be no objection to my landing to-morrow, thinking as they do that +I have lost my senses, I might join you after you once got out of the +town. I have some money in my waistbelt, and if you would purchase some +clothes for me I might then join you as your servant as you ride along. +At the next town you come to none would know but that I had been in +your service during the voyage, and there would be nothing strange in +you, an Irish gentleman, being accompanied by an Irish servant who +spoke but little Spanish. I would serve you faithfully, sir, until +perhaps some opportunity might occur for my making my escape to +England." + +"Yes, I think that might be managed," the young Irishman said. "When I +land to-morrow I will buy some clothes suitable for a serving-man. I do +not know the names of the hotels on shore, so you must watch me when I +land and see where I put up. Come there in the evening at nine o'clock. +I will issue out and give you the bundle of clothes, and tell you at +what hour in the morning I have arranged to start. I will hire two +horses; when they come round to the door, join me in front of the hotel +and busy yourself in packing my trunks on the baggage mules. When you +have done that, mount the second horse and ride after me; the people +who will go with us with the horses will naturally suppose that you +have landed with me. Should any of our shipmates here see us start, it +is not likely that they will recognize you. If they do so, I need +simply say that as you had shown me such kindness on board ship I had +resolved to take you with me to Madrid in order to see if anything +could be done to restore you to reason. However, it is better that you +should keep in the background as much as possible. I will arrange to +start at so early an hour in the morning that none of those who may +land with me from the ship, and may put up at the same inn, are likely +to be about." + +The next morning the vessel entered port. They were soon surrounded by +boats full of people inquiring anxiously for news of other ships, and +for friends and acquaintances on board. Presently large boats were sent +off by the authorities, and the disembarkation of the sick and the +helpless began. + +This indeed included the greater portion of the survivors, for there +were but two or three score on board who were capable of dragging +themselves about, the rest being completely prostrate by disease, +exhaustion, hunger, and thirst. Geoffrey was about to descend into one +of the boats, when the officer in command said roughly: "Remain on +board and do your work, there is no need for your going into the +hospital." One of the ship's officers, however, explained that the lad +had altogether lost his senses, and was unable either to understand +when spoken to or to reply to questions. Consequently he was permitted +to take his place in the boat. + +As soon as he stepped ashore he wandered away among the crowd of +spectators. A woman, observing his wan face and feeble walk, called him +into her house, and set food and wine before him. He made a hearty +meal, but only shook his head when she addressed him, and laughed +childishly and muttered his thanks in Spanish when she bestowed a +dollar upon him as he left. He watched at the port while boat-load +after boat-load of sick came ashore, until at last one containing the +surviving officers and gentlemen with their baggage reached the land. +Then he kept Gerald Burke in sight until he entered an inn, followed by +two men carrying his baggage. Several times during the day food and +money were offered him, the inhabitants being full of horror and pity +at the sight of the famishing survivors of the crew of the galleon. + +At nine o'clock in the evening Geoffrey took up his station near the +door of the inn. A few minutes later Gerald Burke came out with a +bundle. "Here are the clothes," he said. "I have hired horses for our +journey to Madrid. They will be at the door at six o'clock in the +morning. I have arranged to travel by very short stages, for at first +neither you nor I could sit very long upon a horse; however, I hope we +shall soon gain strength as we go." + +Taking the bundle, Geoffrey walked a short distance from the town and +lay down upon the ground under some trees. The night was a warm one, +and after the bitter cold they had suffered during the greater part of +the voyage, it felt almost sultry to him. At daybreak in the morning he +rose, put on the suit of clothes Gerald Burke had provided, washed his +face in a little stream, and proceeded to the inn. He arrived there +just as the clocks were striking six. A few minutes later two men with +two horses and four mules came up to the door, and shortly afterwards +Gerald Burke came out. Geoffrey at once joined him; the servants of the +inn brought out the baggage, which was fastened by the muleteers on to +two of the animals. Gerald Burke mounted one of the horses and Geoffrey +the other, and at once rode on, the muleteers mounting the other two +mules and following with those carrying the baggage. + +"That was well managed," Gerald Burke said as they rode out of the +town. "The muleteers can have no idea that you have but just joined me, +and there is little chance of any of my comrades on board ship +overtaking us, as all intend to stop for a few days to recruit +themselves before going on. If they did they would not be likely to +recognize you in your present attire, or to suspect that my Irish +servant is the crazy boy of the ship." + +After riding at an easy pace for two hours, they halted under the shade +of some trees. Fruit, bread, and wine were produced from a wallet on +one of the mules, and they sat down and breakfasted. After a halt of an +hour they rode on until noon, when they again halted until four in the +afternoon, for the sun was extremely hot, and both Gerald Burke and +Geoffrey were so weak they scarce could sit their horses. Two hours +further riding took them to a large village, where they put up at the +inn. Geoffrey now fell into his place as Mr. Burke's servant--saw to +the baggage being taken inside, and began for the first time to try his +tongue at Spanish. He got on better than he had expected; and as Mr. +Burke spoke with a good deal of foreign accent, it did not seem in any +way singular to the people of the inn that his servant should speak but +little of the language. + +Quietly they journeyed on, doing but short distances for the first +three or four days, but as they gained strength pushing on faster, and +by the time they reached Madrid both were completely recovered from the +effects of their voyage. Madrid was in mourning, for there was scarce a +family but had lost relations in the Armada. Mr. Burke at once took +lodgings and installed Geoffrey as his servant. He had many friends and +acquaintances in the city, where he had been residing for upwards of a +year previous to the sailing of the Armada. + +For some weeks Geoffrey went out but little, spending his time in +reading Spanish books and mastering the language as much as possible. +He always conversed in that language with Mr. Burke, and at the end of +six weeks was able to talk Spanish with some fluency. He now generally +accompanied Mr. Burke if he went out, following him in the streets and +standing behind his chair when he dined abroad. He was much amused at +all he saw, making many acquaintances among the lackeys of Mr. Burke's +friends, dining with them downstairs after the banquets were over, and +often meeting them of an evening when he had nothing to do, and going +with them to places of entertainment. + +In this way his knowledge of Spanish improved rapidly, and although he +still spoke with an accent he could pass well as one who had been for +some years in the country. He was now perfectly at ease with the +Spanish gentlemen of Mr. Burke's acquaintance. It was only when Irish +and Scotch friends called upon his master that he feared awkward +questions, and upon these occasions he showed himself as little as +possible. + +When alone with Gerald Burke the latter always addressed Geoffrey as a +friend rather than as a servant, and made no secret with him as to his +position and means. He had been concerned in a rising in Ireland, and +had fled the country, bringing with him a fair amount of resources. +Believing that the Armada was certain to be crowned with success, and +that he should ere long be restored to his estates in Ireland, he had, +upon his first coming to Spain, spent his money freely. His outfit for +the expedition had made a large inroad upon his store, and his +resources were now nearly at an end. + +"What is one to do, Geoffrey? I don't want to take a commission in +Philip's army, though my friends could obtain one for me at once; but I +have no desire to spend the rest of my life in the Netherlands storming +the towns of the Dutch burghers." + +"Or rather trying to storm them," Geoffrey said, smiling; "there have +not been many towns taken of late years." + +"Nor should I greatly prefer to be campaigning in France," Gerald went +on, paying no attention to the interruption. "I have no love either for +Dutch Calvinists or French Huguenots; but I have no desire either to be +cutting their throats or for them to be cutting mine. I should like a +snug berth under the crown here or at Cadiz, or at Seville; but I see +no chance whatever of my obtaining one. I cannot take up the trade of a +footpad, though disbanded soldiers turned robbers are common enough in +Spain. What is to be done?" + +"If I am not mistaken," Geoffrey said with a smile, "your mind is +already made up. It is not quite by accident that you are in the +gardens of the Retiro every evening, and that a few words are always +exchanged with a certain young lady as she passes with her duenna." + +"Oh! you have observed that," Gerald Burke replied with a laugh. "Your +eyes are sharper than I gave you credit for, Master Geoffrey. Yes, that +would set me on my legs without doubt, for Donna Inez is the only +daughter and heiress of the Marquis of Ribaldo; but you see there is a +father in the case, and if that father had the slightest idea that +plain Gerald Burke was lifting his eyes to his daughter it would not be +many hours before Gerald Burke had several inches of steel in his +body." + +"That I can imagine," Geoffrey said, "since it is, as I learn from my +acquaintances among the lackeys, a matter of common talk that the +marquis intends to marry her to the son of the Duke of Sottomayor." + +"Inez hates him," Gerald Burke said. "It is just like my ill-luck, that +instead of being drowned as most of the others were, he has had the +luck to get safely back again. However, he is still ill, and likely to +be so for some time. He was not so accustomed to starving as some of +us, and he suffered accordingly. He is down at his estates near +Seville." + +"But what do you think of doing?" Geoffrey asked. + +"That is just what I am asking you." + +"It seems to me, certainly," Geoffrey went on, "that unless you really +mean to run off with the young lady--for I suppose there is no chance +in the world of your marrying her in any other way--it will be better +both for you and her that you should avoid for the future these +meetings in the gardens or elsewhere, and cast your thoughts in some +other direction for the bettering of your fortunes." + +"That is most sage advice, Geoffrey," the young Irishman laughed, "and +worthy of my father-confessor; but it is not so easy to follow. In the +first place, I must tell you that I do not regard Inez as in any way a +step to fortune, but rather as a step towards a dungeon. It would be +vastly better for us both if she were the daughter of some poor hidalgo +like myself. I could settle down then with her, and plant vines and +make wine, and sell what I don't drink myself. As it is, I have the +chance of being put out of the way if it is discovered that Inez and I +are fond of each other; and in the next place, if we do marry I shall +have to get her safely out of the kingdom, or else she will have to +pass the rest of her life in a convent, and I the rest of mine in a +prison or in the galleys; that is if I am not killed as soon as caught, +which is by far the most likely result. Obnoxious sons-in-law do not +live long in Spain. So you see, Geoffrey, the prospect is a bad one +altogether; and if it were not that I dearly love Inez, and that I am +sure she will be unhappy with Philip of Sottomayor, I would give the +whole thing up, and make love to the daughter of some comfortable +citizen who would give me a corner of his house and a seat at his table +for the rest of my days." + +"But, seriously--" Geoffrey began. + +"Well, seriously, Geoffrey, my intention is to run away with Inez if it +can be managed; but how it is to be managed at present I have not the +faintest idea. To begin with, the daughter of a Spanish grandee is +always kept in a very strong cage closely guarded, and it needs a very +large golden key to open it. Now, as you are aware, gold is a very +scarce commodity with me. Then, after getting her out, a lavish +expenditure would be needed for our flight. We should have to make our +way to the sea-coast, to do all sorts of things to throw dust into the +eyes of our pursuers, and to get a passage to some place beyond the +domains of Philip, which means either to France, England, or the +Netherlands. Beyond all this will be the question of future subsistence +until, if ever, the marquis makes up his mind to forgive his daughter +and take her to his heart again, a contingency, in my opinion, likely +to be extremely remote." + +"And what does the Lady Inez say to it all?" Geoffrey asked. + +"The Lady Inez has had small opportunity of saying anything on the +subject, Geoffrey. Here in Spain there are mighty few opportunities for +courtship. With us at home these matters are easy enough, and there is +no lack of opportunity for pleading your suit and winning a girl's +heart if it is to be won; but here in Spain matters are altogether +different, and an unmarried girl is looked after as sharply as if she +was certain to get into some mischief or other the instant she had an +opportunity. She is never suffered to be for a moment alone with a man; +out of doors or in she has always a duenna by her side; and as to a +private chat, the thing is simply impossible." + +"Then how do you manage to make love?" Geoffrey asked. + +"Well, a very little goes a long way in Spain. The manner of a bow, the +wave of a fan, the dropping of a glove or flower, the touch of a hand +in a crowded room-each of these things go as far as a month's open +love-making in Ireland." + +"Then how did you manage with the duenna so as to be able to speak to +her in the gardens'!" + +"Well, in the first place, I made myself very attentive to the duenna; +in the second place, the old lady is devout, and you know Ireland is +the land of saints, and I presented her with an amulet containing a +paring of the nail of St. Patrick." + +Geoffrey burst into a laugh, in which the Irishman joined. + +"Well, if it was not really St. Patrick's," the latter went on, "it +came from Ireland anyhow, which is the next best thing. Then in the +third place, the old lady is very fond of Inez; and although she is as +strict as a dragon, Inez coaxed her into the belief that there could +not be any harm in our exchanging a few words when she was close by all +the time to hear what was said. Now, I think you know as much as I do +about the matter, Geoffrey. You will understand that a few notes have +been exchanged, and that Inez loves me. Beyond that everything is vague +and uncertain, and I have not the slightest idea what will come of it." + +Some weeks passed and nothing was done. The meetings between Gerald +Burke and Inez in the Gardens of the Retiro had ceased a day or two +afterwards, the duenna having positively refused to allow them to +continue, threatening Inez to inform her father of them unless she gave +them up. + +Gerald Burke's funds dwindled rapidly, although he and Geoffrey lived +in the very closest way. + +"What in the world is to be done, Geoffrey? I have only got twenty +dollars left, which at the outside will pay for our lodgings and food +for another month. For the life of me I cannot see what is to be done +when that is gone, unless we take to the road." + +Geoffrey shook his head. "As far as I am concerned," he said, "as we +are at war with Spain, it would be fair if I met a Spanish ship at sea +to capture and plunder it, but I am afraid the laws of war do not +justify private plunder. I should be perfectly ready to go out and take +service in a vineyard, or to earn my living in any way if it could be +managed." + +"I would rob a cardinal if I had the chance," Gerald Burke said, "and +if I ever got rich would restore his money four-fold and so obtain +absolution; only, unfortunately, I do not see my way to robbing a +cardinal. As to digging in the fields, Geoffrey, I would rather hang +myself at once. I am constitutionally averse to labour, and if one once +took to that sort of thing there would be an end to everything." + +"It is still open to you," Geoffrey said, "to get your friends to +obtain a commission for you." + +"I could do that," Gerald said moodily, "but of all things that is what +I should most hate." + +"You might make your peace with the English government and get some of +your estates back again." + +"That I will not do to feed myself," Gerald Burke said firmly. "I have +thought that if I ever carry off Inez I might for her sake do so, for I +own that now all hope of help from Spain is at an end, our cause in +Ireland is lost, and it is no use going on struggling against the +inevitable; but I am not going to sue the English government as a +beggar for myself. No doubt I could borrow small sums from Irishmen and +Scotchmen here, and hold on for a few months; but most of them are +well-nigh as poor as I am myself, and I would not ask them. Besides, +there would be no chance of my repaying them; and, if I am to rob +anyone, I would rather plunder these rich dons than my own countrymen." + +"Of one thing I am resolved," Geoffrey said, "I will not live at your +expense any longer, Gerald. I can speak Spanish very fairly now, and +can either take service in some Spanish family or, as I said, get work +in the field." + +Gerald laughed. "My dear Geoffrey, the extra expenses caused by you +last week were, as far as I can calculate, one penny for bread and as +much for fruit; the rest of your living was obtained at the expense of +my friends." + +"At any rate," Geoffrey said smiling, "I insist that my money be now +thrown into the common fund. I have offered it several times before, +but you always said we had best keep it for emergency. I think the +emergency has come now, and these ten English pounds in my belt will +enable us to take some step or other. The question is, what step? They +might last us, living as we do, for some three or four months, but at +the end of that time we should be absolutely penniless; therefore now +is the time, while we have still a small stock in hand, to decide upon +something." + +"But what are we to decide upon?" Gerald Burke asked helplessly. + +"I have been thinking it over a great deal," Geoffrey said, "and my +idea is that we had best go to Cadiz or some other large port. Although +Spain is at war both with England and the Netherlands, trade still goes +on in private ships, and both Dutch and English vessels carry on +commerce with Spain; therefore it seems to me that there must be +merchants in Cadiz who would be ready to give employment to men capable +of speaking and writing both in Spanish and English, and in my case to +a certain extent in Dutch. From there, too, there might be a chance of +getting a passage to England or Holland. If we found that impossible +owing to the vessels being too carefully searched before sailing, we +might at the worst take passage as sailors on board a Spanish ship +bound for the Indies, and take our chance of escape or capture there or +on the voyage. That, at least, is what I planned for myself." + +"I think your idea is a good one, Geoffrey. At any rate to Cadiz we +will go. I don't know about the mercantile business or going as a +sailor, but I could get a commission from the governor there as well as +here in Madrid; but at any rate I will go. Donna Inez was taken last +week by her father to some estates he has somewhere between Seville and +Cadiz, in order, I suppose, that he may be nearer Don Philip, who is, I +hear, at last recovering from his long illness. I do not know that +there is the slightest use in seeing her again, but I will do so if it +be possible; and if by a miracle I could succeed in carrying her off, +Cadiz would be a more likely place to escape from than anywhere. + +"Yes, I know. You think the idea is a mad one, but you have never been +in love yet. When you are you will know that lovers do not believe in +the word 'impossible.' At any rate, I mean to give Inez the chance of +determining her own fate. If she is ready to risk everything rather +than marry Don Philip, I am ready to share the risk whatever it may +be." + +Accordingly on the following day Gerald Burke disposed of the greater +part of his wardrobe and belongings, purchased two ponies for a few +crowns, and he and Geoffrey, with a solitary suit of clothes in a +wallet fastened behind the saddle, started for their journey to Cadiz. +They mounted outside the city, for Gerald shrank from meeting any +acquaintances upon such a sorry steed as he had purchased; but once on +their way his spirits rose. He laughed and chatted gaily, and spoke of +the future as if all difficulties were cleared away. The ponies, +although rough animals, were strong and sturdy, and carried their +riders at a good pace. Sometimes they travelled alone, sometimes jogged +along with parties whom they overtook by the way, or who had slept in +the same posadas or inns at which they had put up for the night. + +Most of these inns were very rough, and, to Geoffrey, astonishingly +dirty. The food consisted generally of bread and a miscellaneous olio +or stew from a great pot constantly simmering over the fire, the +flavour, whatever it might be, being entirely overpowered by that of +the oil and garlic that were the most marked of its constituents. Beds +were wholly unknown at these places, the guests simply wrapping +themselves in their cloaks and lying down on the floor, although in a +few exceptional cases bundles of rushes were strewn about to form a +common bed. + +But the travelling was delightful. It was now late in the autumn, and +when they were once past the dreary district of La Mancha, and had +descended to the rich plains of Cordova, the vintage was in full +progress and the harvest everywhere being garnered in. Their mid-day +meal consisted of bread and fruit, costing but the smallest coin, and +eaten by the wayside in the shade of a clump of trees. They heard many +tales on their way down of the bands of robbers who infested the road, +but having taken the precaution of having the doubloons for which they +had exchanged Geoffrey's English gold sewn up in their boots, they had +no fear of encountering these gentry, having nothing to lose save their +wallets and the few dollars they had kept out for the expenses of their +journey. The few jewels that Gerald Burke retained were sewn up in the +stuffing of his saddle. + +After ten days' travel they reached Seville, where they stayed a couple +of days, and where the wealth and splendour of the buildings surprised +Geoffrey, who had not visited Antwerp or any of the great commercial +centres of the Netherlands. + +"It is a strange taste of the Spanish kings," he observed to Gerald +Burke, "to plant their capital at Madrid in the centre of a barren +country, when they might make such a splendid city as this their +capital. I could see no charms whatever in Madrid. The climate was +detestable, with its hot sun and bitter cold winds. Here the +temperature is delightful; the air is soft and balmy, the country round +is a garden, and there is a cathedral worthy of a capital." + +"It seems a strange taste," Gerald agreed; "but I believe that when +Madrid was first planted it stood in the midst of extensive forests, +and that it was merely a hunting residence for the king." + +"Then, when the forests went I would have gone too," Geoffrey said. +"Madrid has not even a river worthy of the name, and has no single +point to recommend it, as far as I can see, for the capital of a great +empire. If I were a Spaniard I should certainly take up my residence in +Seville." + +Upon the following morning they again started, joining, before they had +ridden many miles, a party of three merchants travelling with their +servants to Cadiz. The merchants looked a little suspiciously at first +at the two young men upon their rough steeds; but as soon as they +discovered from their first salutations that they were foreigners, they +became more cordial, and welcomed this accession of strength to their +party, for the carrying of weapons was universal, and the portion of +the road between Seville and Cadiz particularly unsafe, as it was +traversed by so many merchants and wealthy people. The conversation +speedily turned to the disturbed state of the roads. + +"I do not think," one of the merchants said, "that any ordinary band of +robbers would dare attack us," and he looked round with satisfaction at +the six armed servants who rode behind them. + +"It all depends," Gerald Burke said, with a sly wink at Geoffrey, "upon +what value the robbers may place upon the valour of your servants. As a +rule serving-men are very chary of their skins, and I should imagine +that the robbers must be pretty well aware of that fact. Most of them +are disbanded soldiers or deserters, and I should say that four of them +are more than a match for your six servants. I would wager that your +men would make but a very poor show of it if it came to fighting." + +"But there are our three selves and you two gentlemen," the merchant +said in a tone of disquiet. + +"Well," Gerald rejoined, "I own that from your appearance I should not +think, worshipful sir, that fighting was altogether in your line. Now, +my servant, young as he is, has taken part in much fighting in the +Netherlands, and I myself have had some experience with my sword; but +if we were attacked by robbers we should naturally stand neutral. +Having nothing to defend, and having no inclination whatever to get our +throats cut in protecting the property of others, I think that you will +see for yourselves that that is reasonable. We are soldiers of fortune, +ready to venture our lives in a good service, and for good pay, but +mightily disinclined to throw them away for the mere love of fighting." + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +RECRUITING THEIR FUNDS. + + +As soon as Gerald Burke began conversing with the merchants, Geoffrey +fell back and took his place among their servants, with whom he at once +entered into conversation. To amuse himself he continued in the same +strain that he had heard Gerald adopt towards the merchants, and spoke +in terms of apprehension of the dangers of the journey, and of the +rough treatment that had befallen those who had ventured to offer +opposition to the robbers. He was not long in discovering, by the +anxious glances they cast round them, and by the manner of their +questions, that some at least of the party were not to be relied upon +in case of an encounter. + +He was rather surprised at Gerald remaining so long in company with the +merchants, for their pace was a slow one, as they were followed by +eight heavily-laden mules, driven by two muleteers, and it would have +been much pleasanter, he thought, to have trotted on at their usual +pace. About midday, as they were passing along the edge of a thick +wood, a party of men suddenly sprang out and ordered them to halt. +Geoffrey shouted to the men with him to come on, and drawing his sword +dashed forward. + +Two of the men only followed him. The others hesitated, until a shot +from a musket knocked off one of their hats, whereupon the man and his +comrades turned their horses' heads and rode off at full speed. The +merchants had drawn their swords, and stood on the defensive, and +Geoffrey on reaching them was surprised to find that Gerald Burke was +sitting quietly on his horse without any apparent intention of taking +part in the fight. + +"Put up your sword, Geoffrey," he said calmly; "this affair is no +business of ours. We have nothing to lose, and it is no business of +ours to defend the money-bags of these gentlemen." + +The robbers, eight in number, now rushed up. One of the merchants, +glancing round, saw that two of their men only had come up to their +assistance. The muleteers, who were probably in league with the +robbers, had fled, leaving their animals standing in the road. The +prospect seemed desperate. One of the merchants was an elderly man, the +others were well on middle age. The mules were laden with valuable +goods, and they had with them a considerable sum of money for making +purchases at Cadiz. It was no time for hesitation. + +"We will give you five hundred crowns if you will both aid us to beat +off these robbers." + +"It is a bargain," Gerald replied. "Now, Geoffrey, have at these +fellows!" + +Leaping from their ponies they ranged themselves by the merchants just +as the robbers attacked them. Had it not been for their aid the combat +would have been a short one; for although determined to defend their +property to the last, the traders had neither strength nor skill at +arms. One was unhorsed at the first blow, and another wounded; but the +two servants, who had also dismounted, fought sturdily, and Gerald and +Geoffrey each disposed of a man before the robbers, who had not +reckoned upon their interference, were prepared to resist their attack. +The fight did not last many minutes. The traders did their best, and +although by no means formidable opponents, distracted the attention of +the robbers, who were startled by the fall of two of their party. +Geoffrey received a sharp cut on the head, but at the same moment ran +his opponent through the body, while Gerald Burke cut down the man +opposed to him. The other four robbers, seeing they were now +outnumbered, at once took to their heels. + +"By St. Jago!" one of the traders said, "you are stout fighters, young +men, and have won your fee well. Methought we should have lost our +lives as well as our goods, and I doubt not we should have done so had +you not ranged yourselves with us. Now, let us bandage up our wounds, +for we have all received more or less hurt." + +When the wounds, some of which were serious, were attended to, the +fallen robbers were examined. Three of them were dead; but the man last +cut down by Gerald Burke seemed likely to recover. + +"Shall we hang him upon a tree as a warning to these knaves, or shall +we take him with us to the next town and give him in charge of the +authorities there?" one of the traders asked. + +"If I were you I would do neither," Gerald said, "but would let him go +free if he will tell you the truth about this attack. It will be just +as well for you to get to the bottom of this affair, and find out +whether it is a chance meeting, or whether any of your own people have +been in league with him." + +"That is a good idea," the trader agreed, "and I will carry it out," +and going up to the man, who had now recovered his senses, he said to +him sternly: "We have made up our minds to hang you; but you may save +your life if you will tell us how you came to set upon us. Speak the +truth and you shall go free, otherwise we will finish with you without +delay." + +The robber, seeing an unexpected chance of escape from punishment, at +once said that the captain of their band, who was the man Geoffrey had +last run through, came out from Seville the evening before, and told +him that one Juan Campos, with whom he had long had intimate relations, +and who was clerk to a rich trader, had, upon promise that he should +receive one-fifth of the booty taken, informed him that his master with +two other merchants was starting on the following morning for Cadiz +with a very valuable lot of goods, and twenty-five thousand crowns, +which they intended to lay out in the purchase of goods brought by some +galleons that had just arrived from the Indies. He had arranged to +bribe his master's two servants to ride away when they attacked the +gang, and also to settle with the muleteers so that they should take no +part in the affair. They had reckoned that the flight of two of the +servants would probably affect the others, and had therefore expected +the rich booty to fall into their hands without the trouble of striking +a blow for it. + +"It is well we followed your suggestion," one of the traders said to +Gerald. "I had no suspicion of the honesty of my clerk, and had we not +made this discovery he would doubtless have played me a similar trick +upon some other occasion. I will ride back at once, friends, for if he +hears of the failure of the attack he may take the alarm and make off +with all he can lay his hands upon. Our venture was to be in common. I +will leave it to you to carry it out, and return and dismiss Campos and +the two rascally servants." The three traders went apart and consulted +together. Presently the eldest of the party returned to the young men. + +"We have another five days' journey before us," he said, "and but two +servants upon whom we can place any reliance. We have evidence of the +unsafety of the roads, and, as you have heard, we have a large sum of +money with us. You have already more than earned the reward I offered +you, and my friends have agreed with me that if you will continue to +journey with us as far as Cadiz, and to give us the aid of your valour +should we be again attacked, we will make the five hundred crowns a +thousand. It is a large sum, but we have well-nigh all our fortunes at +stake, and we feel that we owe you our lives as well as the saving of +our money." + +"We could desire nothing better," Gerald replied, "and will answer with +our lives that your goods and money shall arrive safely at Cadiz." + +The traders then called up their two serving-men, and told them that on +their arrival at Cadiz they would present them each with a hundred +crowns for having so stoutly done their duty. The employer of the +treacherous clerk then turned his horse's head and rode back towards +Seville, while the others prepared to proceed on their way. The two +muleteers had now come out from among the bushes, and were busy +refastening the bales on the mules, the ropes having become loosened in +the struggles of the animals while the fight was going on. The +merchants had decided to say nothing to the men as to the discovery +that they were in league with the robbers. + +"Half these fellows are in alliance with these bands, which are a +scourge to the country," one of the traders said. "If we were to inform +the authorities at the next town, we should, in the first place, be +blamed for letting the wounded man escape, and secondly we might be +detained for days while investigations are going on. In this country +the next worse thing to being a prisoner is to be a complainant. Law is +a luxury in which the wealthy and idle can alone afford to indulge." + +As soon, therefore, as the baggage was readjusted the party proceeded +on their way. + +"What do you think of that, Geoffrey?" Gerald Burke asked as he rode +for a short distance by the side of his supposed servant. + +"It is magnificent," Geoffrey replied; "and it seems to me that the +real road to wealth in Spain is to hire yourself out as a guard to +travellers." + +"Ah, you would not get much if you made your bargain beforehand. It is +only at a moment of urgent danger that fear will open purse-strings +widely. Had we bargained beforehand with these traders we might have +thought ourselves lucky if we had got ten crowns apiece as the price of +our escort to Cadiz, and indeed we should have been only too glad if +last night such an offer had been made to us; but when a man sees that +his property and life are really in danger he does not stop to haggle, +but is content to give a handsome percentage of what is risked for aid +to save the rest." + +"Well, thank goodness, our money trouble is at an end," Geoffrey said; +"and it will be a long time before we need have any anxiety on that +score." + +"Things certainly look better," Gerald said laughing; "and if Inez +consents to make a runaway match of it with me I sha'n't have to ask +her to pay the expenses." + +Cadiz was reached without further adventure. The merchants kept their +agreement honourably, and handed over a heavy bag containing a thousand +crowns to Gerald on their arrival at that city. They had upon the road +inquired of him the nature of his business there. He had told them that +he was at present undecided whether to enter the army, in which some +friends of his had offered to obtain him a commission, or to join in an +adventure to the Indies. They had told him they were acquainted with +several merchants at Cadiz who traded both with the east and west, and +that they would introduce him to them as a gentleman of spirit and +courage, whom they might employ with advantage upon such ventures; and +this promise after their arrival there they carried out. + +"Now, Geoffrey," Gerald said as they sat together that evening at a +comfortable inn, "we must talk over matters here. We have five hundred +crowns apiece, and need not trouble any longer as to how we are to +support life. Your great object, of course, is to get out of this +country somehow, and to make your way back to England. My first is to +see Inez and find out whether she will follow my fortunes or remain to +become some day Marchesa of Sottomayor. If she adopts the former +alternative I have to arrange some plan to carry her off and to get out +of the country, an operation in which I foresee no little difficulty. +Of course if we are caught my life is forfeited, there is no question +about that. The question for us to consider is how we are to set about +to carry out our respective plans." + +"We need only consider your plan as far as I can see," Geoffrey said. +"Of course I shall do what I can to assist you, and if you manage to +get off safely with the young lady I shall escape at the same time." + +"Not at all," Burke said; "you have only to wait here quietly until you +see an opportunity. I will go with you to-morrow to the merchants I was +introduced to to-day, and say that I am going away for a time and shall +be obliged if they will make you useful in any way until I return. In +that way you will have a sort of established position here, and can +wait until you see a chance of smuggling yourself on board some English +or Dutch vessel. Mine is a very different affair. I may talk lightly of +it, but I am perfectly aware that I run a tremendous risk, and that the +chances are very strongly against me." + +"Whatever the chances are," Geoffrey said quietly, "I shall share them +with you. Your kindness has saved me from what at best might have been +imprisonment for life, and not improbably would have been torture and +death at the hands of the Inquisition, and I am certainly not going to +withdraw myself from you now when you are entering upon what is +undoubtedly a very dangerous adventure. If we escape from Spain we +escape together; if not, whatever fate befalls you I am ready to risk." + +"Very well; so be it, Geoffrey," Gerald Burke said, holding out his +hand to him. "If your mind is made up I will not argue the question +with you, and indeed I value your companionship and aid too highly to +try to shake your determination. Let us then at once talk over what is +now our joint enterprise. Ribaldo estate lies about half-way between +this and Seville, and we passed within a few miles of it as we came +hither. The first thing, of course, will be to procure some sort of +disguise in which I can see Inez and have a talk with her. Now, it +seems to me, for I have been thinking the matter over in every way as +we rode, that the only disguise in which this would be possible would +be that of a priest or monk." + +Geoffrey laughed aloud. "You would in the first place have to shave off +your moustachios, Gerald, and I fear that even after you had done so +there would be nothing venerable in your appearance; and whatever the +mission with which you might pretend to charge yourself, your chances +of obtaining a private interview with the lady would be slight." + +"I am afraid that I should lack the odour of sanctity, Geoffrey; but +what else can one do? Think it over, man. The way in which you played +the idiot when you were picked out of the water shows that you are +quick at contriving a plan." + +"That was a simple business in comparison to this," Geoffrey replied. +"However, you are not pressed for time, and I will think it over to- +night and may light upon some possible scheme, for I own that at +present I have not the least idea how the matter is to be managed." + +As in the morning there were several other travellers taking breakfast +in the same room, the conversation was not renewed until Gerald Burke +strolled out, followed at a respectful distance by Geoffrey, who still +passed as his servant, and reached a quiet spot on the ramparts. Here +Geoffrey joined him, and they stood for some minutes looking over the +sea. + +"What a magnificent position for a city!" Geoffrey said at last. +"Standing on this rocky tongue of land jutting out at the entrance to +this splendid bay it ought to be impregnable, since it can only be +attacked on the side facing that sandy isthmus. What a number of ships +are lying up the bay, and what a busy scene it is with the boats +passing and repassing! Though they must be two miles away I fancy I can +hear the shouts of the sailors." + +"Yes, it is all very fine," Gerald said; "but I have seen it several +times before. Still, I can make allowances for you. Do you see that +group of small ships a mile beyond the others? Those are the English +and Dutchmen. They are allowed to trade, but as you see they are kept +apart, and there are three war galleys lying close to them. No one is +allowed to land, and every boat going off is strictly examined, and all +those who go on board have to show their permits from the governor to +trade; so, you see, the chance of getting on board one of them is +slight indeed. Higher up the bay lies Puerto de Santa Maria, where a +great trade is carried on, and much wine shipped; though more comes +from Jeres, which lies up the river. You know we passed through it on +our way here. + +"Yes, this is a splendid position for trade, and I suppose the commerce +carried on here is larger than in any port in Europe; though Antwerp +ranked as first until the troubles began in the Netherlands. But this +ought to be first. It has all the trade of the Atlantic sea-board, and +standing at the mouth of the Mediterranean commands that also; while +all the wealth of the New World pours in here. That is great already; +there is no saying what it will be in the future, while some day the +trade from the far East should flow in here also by vessels trading +round the south of Africa. + +"Cadiz has but one fault: the space on which it stands is too small for +a great city. You see how close the houses stand together, and how +narrow are the streets. It cannot spread without extending beyond the +rock over the sands, and then its strength would be gone, and it would +be open to capture by an enterprising enemy having command of the sea. +There now, having indulged your humour, let us return to more important +matters. Have you thought over what we were talking about last night?" + +"I have certainly thought it over," Geoffrey said; "but I do not know +that thinking has resulted in much. The only plan that occurs to me as +being at all possible is this. You were talking in joke at Madrid of +turning robber. Would it be possible, think you, to get together a +small band of men to aid you in carrying off the young lady, either +from the grounds of her father's house or while journeying on the road? +You could then have your talk with her. If you find her willing to fly +with you, you could leave the men you have engaged and journey across +the country in some sort of disguise to a port. If she objected, you +could conduct her back to the neighbourhood of the house and allow her +to return. There is one difficulty: you must, of course, be prepared +with a priest, so that you can be married at once if she consents to +accompany you." + +Gerald Burke was silent for some time. "The scheme seems a possible +one," he said at last; "it is the question of the priest that bothers +me. You know, both in Seville and Cadiz there are Irish colleges, and +at both places there are several priests whom I knew before they +entered the Church, and who would, I am sure, perform the service for +me on any ordinary occasion; but it is a different thing asking them to +take a share in such a business as this, for they would render +themselves liable to all sorts of penalties and punishments from their +superiors. However, the difficulty must be got over somehow, and at any +rate the plan seems to promise better than anything I had thought of. +The first difficulty is how to get the ruffians for such a business. I +cannot go up to the first beetle-browed knave I meet in the street and +say to him, Are you disposed to aid me in the abduction of a lady?" + +"No," Geoffrey laughed; "but fortunately you have an intermediary ready +at hand." + +"How so?" Gerald exclaimed in surprise. "Why, how on earth can you have +an acquaintance with any ruffians in Cadiz?" + +"Not a very intimate acquaintance, Gerald; but if you take the trouble +to go into the court-yard of the inn when we get back you will see one +of those rascally muleteers who were in league with the robbers who +attacked us on the way. He was in conversation when we came out with a +man who breakfasted with us, and was probably bargaining for a load for +his mules back to Seville. I have no doubt that through him you might +put yourself into communication with half the cutthroats of the town." + +"That is a capital idea, Geoffrey, and I will have a talk with the man +as soon as we get back; for if he is not still there, I am sure to be +able to learn from some of the men about the stables where to find +him." + +"You must go very carefully to work, Gerald," Geoffrey said. "It would +never do to let any of the fellows know the exact object for which you +engaged them, for they might be sure of getting a far larger sum from +the marquis for divulging your plans to carry off his daughter than you +could afford to pay them for their services." + +"I quite see that, and will be careful." + +On their return to the inn Gerald Burke at once made inquiries as to +the muleteer, and learned that he would probably return in an hour to +see if a bargain could be made with a trader for the hire of his mules +back to Seville. + +Gerald waited about until the man came. "I want to have a talk with +you, my friend," he said. + +The muleteer looked at him with a suspicious eye. "I am busy," he said +in a surly tone; "I have no time to waste." + +"But it would not be wasting it if it were to lead to your putting a +dozen crowns in your pocket." + +"Oh, if it is to lead to that, senor, I can spare an hour, for I don't +think that anything is likely to come out of the job I came here to try +to arrange." + +"We will walk away to a quieter place," Gerald said. "There are too +many people about here for us to talk comfortably. The ramparts are but +two or three minutes' walk; we can talk there without interruption." + +When they arrived upon the ramparts Gerald commenced the conversation. +"I think you were foolish, my friend, not to have taken us into your +confidence the other day before that little affair. You could have made +an opportunity well enough. We stopped to luncheon; if you had drawn me +aside, and told me frankly that some friends of yours were about to +make an attack upon the traders, and that you would guarantee that they +would make it worth my while-" + +"What do you mean by saying my friends, or that I had any knowledge of +the affair beforehand?" the man asked furiously. + +"I say so," Gerald replied, "because I had it on excellent authority. +The wounded robber made a clean breast of the whole affair, and of your +share in it, as well as that of the rascally clerk of one of the +traders. If it had not been for me the merchants would have handed you +over to the magistrates at the place where we stopped that night; but I +dissuaded them, upon the ground that they would have to attend as +witnesses against you, and that it was not worth their while to lose +valuable time merely for the pleasure of seeing you hung. However, all +this is beside the question. What I was saying was, it is a pity you +did not say to me frankly: Your presence here is inopportune; but if +you will stand apart if any unexpected affair takes place, you will get +say two thousand crowns out of the twenty-five thousand my friends are +going to capture. Had you done that, you see, things might have turned +out differently." + +"I did not know," the muleteer stammered. + +"No, you did not know for certain, of course, that I was a soldier of +fortune; but if you had been sharp you might have guessed it. However, +it is too late for that now. Now, what I wanted to ask you was if you +could get me half a dozen of your friends to take service under me in a +little adventure I have to carry out. They will be well paid, and I do +not suppose they will have much trouble over it." + +"And what would you pay me, cabbalero?" the muleteer asked humbly; for +he had been greatly impressed with the valour displayed by the young +Irishman and his servant in the fray, and thought that he intended to +get together a company for adventures on the road, in which case he +might be able to have some profitable dealings with him in the future. + +"I will give you twenty crowns," Gerald replied; "and considering that +you owe your life to my interposition, I think that you ought not to +haggle about terms." + +"The party who attacked us," the muleteer said, "lost their captain and +several of their comrades in that fray, and would I doubt not gladly +enter into your service, seeing that they have received such proof of +your worship's valour." + +"Where could I see them?" Gerald asked. + +"I think that they will be now in Jeres, if that would suit you, senor; +but if not I could doubtless find a party of men in this town equally +ready for your business." + +"Jeres will do very well for me," Gerald said; "I shall be travelling +that way and will put up at the Fonda where we stopped as we came +through. When are you starting?" + +"It depends whether I make my bargain with a man at your hotel," the +muleteer replied; "and this I doubt not I shall do, for with the twenty +crowns your honour is going to give me I shall not stand out for terms. +He is travelling with clothes from Flanders, and if your worship +thought--" + +"No," Gerald said. "I do not wish to undertake any adventures of that +sort until I have a band properly organized, and have arranged hiding- +places and methods of getting rid of the booty. I will go back with you +to the inn, and if you strike your bargain you can tell me as you pass +out of the gate what evening you will meet me at Jeres." + +On arriving at the inn Gerald lounged at the gate of the court-yard +until the muleteer came out. + +"I will meet your worship on the fifth night from this at Jeres." + +"Very well; here are five crowns as an earnest on our bargain. If you +carry it out well I shall very likely forget to deduct them from the +twenty I promised you. Do not be surprised if you find me somewhat +changed in appearance when you meet me there." + +At the appointed time the muleteer with his train of animals entered +the court-yards of the Fonda at Jeres. Gerald was standing on the steps +of the inn. He had altered the fashion of his hair, had fastened on +large bushy eyebrows which he had obtained from a skilful perruquier in +Cadiz, and a moustache of imposing size turned up at the tips; he wore +high buff leather boots, and there was an air of military swagger about +him, and he was altogether so changed that at the first glance the +muleteer failed to recognize him. As soon as the mules were unburdened, +Gerald found an opportunity of speaking with him. + +"I will go round at once," the man said, "to the place where I shall +certainly obtain news of my friends if they are here. I told your +honour that they might be here, but they may have gone away on some +affair of business, and may be on the road or at Seville. They always +work between this town and Seville." + +"I understand that you may not meet them to-night; if not, I will meet +you again in Seville. How long will you be finding out about them?" + +"I shall know in half an hour, senor; if they are not here I shall be +back here in less than an hour, but if I find them I shall be detained +longer in order to talk over with them the offer your worship makes." + +"Very well; in an hour you will find me in the street opposite the inn. +I shall wait there until you come. If all is well make a sign and I +will follow you. Do not mention to them that I have in any way +disguised myself. Our acquaintance was so short that I don't fancy they +had time to examine me very closely; and I have my own reasons for +wishing that they should not be acquainted with my ordinary appearance, +and have therefore to some extent disguised myself." + +"I will say nothing about it," the muleteer replied. "Your worship can +depend upon my discretion." + +"That is right," Gerald said. "We may have future dealings together, +and I can reward handsomely those I find trustworthy and punish those +who in the slightest degree disobey my orders." + +In an hour and a half the muleteer returned, made a signal to Gerald +and passed on. The latter joined him at a short distance from the +hotel. + +"It is all settled, senor. I found the men much dispirited at the loss +of their captain and comrades; and when I proposed to them to take +service under the cabbalero who wrought them such mischief the other +day, they jumped at the idea, saying that under such a valiant leader +there was no fear of the failure of any enterprise they might +undertake." + +A quarter of an hour's walking took them to a small inn of villainous +appearance in one of the smallest lanes of the town. Gerald was wrapped +from head to foot in his cloak, and only his face was visible. He had a +brace of pistols in his belt, and was followed at a short distance, +unnoticed by the muleteer, by Geoffrey, who had arranged to keep close +to the door of any house he entered, and was to be in readiness to rush +in and take part in the fray if he heard the sound of firearms within. + +Gerald himself had not at first entertained any idea of treachery; but +Geoffrey had pointed out that it was quite possible that the robbers +and the muleteer had but feigned acquiescence in his proposals in order +to get him into their power, and take revenge for the loss of their +captain and comrades, and of the valuable booty which had so +unexpectedly slipped through their fingers owing to his intervention. + +The appearance of the six ruffians gathered in the low room, lighted by +a wretched lamp, was not very assuring, and Gerald kept his hand on the +butt of one of his pistols. + +The four robbers who had been engaged in the fray, however, saluted him +respectfully, and the other two members of the band, who had been +absent on other business, followed their example. They had heard from +those present of the extraordinary valour with which the two travelling +companions of the trader had thrown themselves into the fray, and had +alone disposed of their four comrades, and being without a leader, and +greatly disheartened by their ill-luck, they were quite ready to +forgive the misfortunes Gerald had brought upon them, and to accept +such a redoubtable swordsman as their leader. + +Gerald began the conversation. "You have heard," he said, "from our +friend here of the offer I make you. I desire a band of six men on whom +I can rely for an adventure which promises large profit. Don't suppose +that I am going to lead you to petty robberies on the road, in which, +as you learned to your cost the other day, one sometimes gets more hard +knocks than profit. Such adventures may do for petty knaves, but they +are not suited to me. The way to get wealthy is to strike at the rich. +My idea is to establish some place in an out-of-the-way quarter where +there is no fear of prying neighbours, and to carry off and hide there +the sons and daughters of wealthy men and put them to ransom. In the +first instance I am going to undertake a private affair of my own; and +as you will really run no risk in the matter, for I shall separate +myself from you after making my capture, I shall pay you only an +earnest-money of twenty crowns each. In future affairs we shall act +upon the principle of shares. I shall take three shares, a friend who +works with me will take two shares, and you shall take one share +apiece. The risk will really be entirely mine, for I shall take charge +of the captives we make at our rendezvous. You, after lending a hand in +the capture, will return here and hold yourself in readiness to join +me, and carry out another capture as soon as I have made all the +necessary arrangements. Thus, if by any chance we are tracked, I alone +and my friend will run the risk of capture and punishment. In that way +we may, in the course of a few months, amass a much larger booty than +we should in a lifetime spent in these wretched adventures upon +travellers. + +"Now, it is for you to say whether these terms will suit you, and +whether you are ready to follow my orders and obey me implicitly. The +whole task of making the necessary arrangements, or finding out the +habits of the families one of whose members we intend carrying off, of +bribing nurses or duennas, will be all my business. You will simply +have to meet when you are summoned to aid in the actual enterprise, and +then, when our captive is safely housed, to return here or scatter +where you will and live at ease until again summoned. The utmost +fidelity will be necessary. Large rewards will in many cases +be offered for the discovery of the missing persons, and one traitor +would bring ruin upon us all; therefore it will be absolutely necessary +that you take an oath of fidelity to me, and swear one and all to +punish the traitor with death. Do you agree to my proposal?" + +There was a unanimous exclamation of assent. The plan seemed to offer +probabilities of large booty with a minimum of trouble and risk. One +or two suggested that they should like to join in the first capture on +the same terms as the others, but Gerald at once pronounced this to be +impossible. + +"This is my own affair," he said, "and money is not now my object. As +you will only be required to meet at a given hour some evening, and to +carry off a captive who will not be altogether unwilling to come, there +will be little or no risk in the matter, and twenty crowns will not be +bad pay for an evening's work. After that you will, as I have said, +share in the profits of all future captures we may undertake." + +The band all agreed, and at once took solemn oaths of fidelity to their +new leader, and swore to punish by death any one of their number who +should betray the secrets of the body. + +"That is well," Gerald said when the oaths had been taken. "It may be a +week before you receive your first summons. Here are five crowns apiece +for your expenses up to that time. Let one of you be in front of the +great church as the clock strikes eight morning and evening. Do not +wait above five minutes; if I am coming I shall be punctual. In the +meantime take counsel among yourselves as to the best hiding-place that +can be selected. Between you you no doubt know every corner and hole in +the country. I want a place which will be at once lonely and far +removed from other habitations, but it must be at the same time +moderately comfortable, as the captives we take must have no reason to +complain of their treatment while in my hands. Think this matter over +before I again see you." + +Gerald then joined Geoffrey outside, and found that the latter was +beginning to be anxious at his long absence. After a few words saying +that everything had been successfully arranged, the two friends +returned together to their inn. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +THE FESTA AT SEVILLE. + + +And now, Gerald, that you have made your arrangements for the second +half of the plan, how are you going to set about the first? because you +said that you intended to give Donna Inez the option of flying with you +or remaining with her father." + +"So I do still. Before I make any attempt to carry her off I shall +first learn whether she is willing to run the risks." + +"But how are you going to set about it? You may be quite sure that she +never goes outside the garden without having her duenna with her. If +there is a chapel close by, doubtless she will go there once a day; and +it seems to me that this would be the best chance of speaking to her, +for I do not see how you can possibly introduce yourself into the +grounds." + +"That would be quite out of the question, in daylight at any rate, +Geoffrey. I do not suppose she ever goes beyond the terrace by the +house. But if I could communicate with her she might slip out for a few +minutes after dark, when the old lady happened to be taking a nap. The +question is how to get a letter into her hands." + +"I think I might manage that, Gerald. It is not likely that the duenna +ever happened to notice me. I might therefore put on any sort of +disguise as a beggar and take my place on the road as she goes to +chapel, and somehow or other get your note into her hand. I have hoard +Spanish girls are very quick at acting upon the smallest sign, and if I +can manage to catch her eye for a moment she may probably be ingenious +enough to afford me an opportunity of passing the note to her." + +"That might be done," Gerald agreed. "We will at once get disguises. I +will dress myself as an old soldier, with one arm in a sling and a +patch over my eye; you dress up in somewhat the same fashion as a +sailor boy. It is about twelve miles from here to Ribaldo's place. We +can walk that easily enough, dress ourselves up within a mile or two of +the place, and then go on and reconnoitre the ground." + +"I should advise you to write your note before you start; it may be +that some unexpected opportunity for handing it to her may present +itself." + +"I will do that; but let us sally out first and pick up two suits at +some dealer in old clothes. There will be sure to be two or three of +these in the poorer quarter." + +The disguises were procured without difficulty, and putting them in a +small wallet they started before noon on their walk. In four hours they +reached the boundary of the Marquis of Ribaldo's estate. Going into a +wood they assumed the disguises, packed their own clothes in a wallet, +and hid this away in a clump of bushes. Then they again started-Gerald +Burke with his arm in a sling and Geoffrey limping along with the aid +of a thick stick he had cut in the wood. + +On arriving at the village, a quarter of a mile from the gates of the +mansion, they went into a small wine-shop and called for two measures +of the cheapest wine and a loaf of bread. Here they sat for some time, +listening to the conversation of the peasants who frequented the wine- +shop. Sometimes a question was asked of the wayfarers. Gerald replied, +for his companion's Spanish although fluent was not good enough to pass +as that of a native. He replied to the question as to where they had +received their hurts that they were survivors of the Armada, and +grumbled that it was hard indeed that men who had fought in the +Netherlands and had done their duty to their country should be turned +adrift to starve. + +"We have enough to pay for our supper and a night's lodging," he said, +"but where we are going to take our meal tomorrow is more than I can +say, unless we can meet with some charitable people." + +"If you take your place by the roadside to-morrow morning," one of the +peasants said, "you may obtain charity from Donna Inez de Ribaldo. She +comes every morning to mass here; and they say she has a kind heart, +which is more than men give her father the marquis the credit of +possessing. We have not many poor round here, for at this time of year +all hands are employed in the vineyards, therefore there is the more +chance of your obtaining a little help." + +"Thank you; I will take your advice," Gerald said. "I suppose she is +sure to come?" + +"She is sure enough; she never misses when she is staying here." + +That night the friends slept on a bundle of straw in an outhouse behind +the wine-shop, and arranged everything; and upon the following morning +took their seats by the roadside near the village. The bell of the +chapel was already sounding, and in a few minutes they saw two ladies +approaching, followed at a very short distance by a serving-man. They +had agreed that the great patch over Gerald's eye, aided by the false +moustachios, so completely disguised his appearance that they need have +no fear of his being recognized; and it was therefore decided he should +do the talking. As Donna Inez came up he commenced calling out: "Have +pity, gracious ladies, upon two broken-down soldiers. We have gone +through all the dangers and hardships of the terrible voyage of the +great Armada. We served in the ship _San Josef_ and are now +broken-down, and have no means of earning our living." + +Gerald had somewhat altered his natural voice while speaking, but +Geoffrey was watching Donna Inez closely, and saw her start when he +began to speak; and when he said they had been on board the _San +Josef_ a flush of colour came across her face. + +"We must relieve these poor men," she said to the duenna; "it is +pitiful to see them in such a state." + +"We know not that their tale is true," the duenna replied sharply. +"Every beggar in our days pretends to be a broken-down soldier." + +At this moment Donna Inez happened to glance at Geoffrey, who raised +his hand to his face and permitted a corner of a letter to be +momentarily seen. + +"An impostor!" Gerald cried in a loud voice. "To think that I, +suffering from my terrible wounds, should be taken as an impostor," and +with a hideous yell he tumbled down as if in a fit, and rolled over and +over on the ground towards the duenna. + +Seized with alarm at his approach, she turned and ran a few paces +backward. As she did so Geoffrey stepped up to Inez and held out the +note, which she took and concealed instantly in her dress. + +"There is nothing to be alarmed at," she cried to the duenna. "The poor +man is doubtless in a fit. Here, my poor fellow, get aid for your +comrade," and taking out her purse she handed a dollar to Geoffrey, and +then joining the duenna proceeded on her way. + +Geoffrey knelt beside his prostrate companion and appeared to be +endeavouring to restore him, until the ladies and their servant were +out of sight. + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY GIVES INEZ HER LOVER'S NOTE] + +"That was well managed," Gerald Burke said, sitting up as soon as a +turn of the road hid them from view. "Now we shall have our answer to- +morrow. Thank goodness there is no occasion for us to remain any longer +in these garments!" + +They went to the wood and resumed their usual attire, and then walked +to a large village some four miles away, and putting up at the +principal inn remained there until early the next morning; then they +walked back to the village they had left on the previous day and posted +themselves in a thicket by the roadside, so that they could see +passers-by without being themselves observed. + +"My fate will soon be decided now," Gerald said. "Will she wear a white +flower or not?" + +"I am pretty sure that she will," Geoffrey said. "She would not have +started and coloured when she recognized your voice if she did not love +you. I do not think you need be under much uneasiness on that score." + +In half an hour the ladies again came along, followed as before by +their servants. Donna Inez wore a bunch of white flowers in her dress. + +"There is my answer," Gerald said. "Thank heaven! she loves me, and is +ready to fly with me, and will steal out some time after dark to meet +me in the garden." + +As there was no occasion for him to stay longer, Geoffrey returned to +the village where they slept the night before, and accounted for his +companion's absence by saying that he had been detained on business and +would probably not return until late at night, as he would not be able +to see the person with whom he had affairs to transact until late. It +was past ten o'clock when Gerald Burke returned. + +"It is all arranged, Geoffrey. I hid in the garden close by the terrace +as soon as it became dark. An hour later she came out and sauntered +along the terrace until I softly called her name; then she came to me. +She loves me with all her heart, and is ready to share my fate whatever +it may be. Her father only two days ago had ordered her to prepare for +her marriage with Don Philip, and she was in despair until she +recognized my voice yesterday morning. She is going with her father to +a grand festa at Seville next Wednesday. They will stop there two +nights--the one before the festa and the one after. I told her that I +could not say yet whether I should make the attempt to carry her off on +her journey or after her return here, as that must depend upon +circumstances. At any rate, that gives us plenty of time to prepare our +plans. To-morrow we will hire horses and ride to Seville, and I will +there arrange with one of my friends at the Irish College to perform +the ceremony. However, we will talk it all over to-morrow as we ride. I +feel as sleepy as a dog now after the day's excitement." + +Upon the road next day they agreed that if possible they would manage +to get Inez away in Seville itself. Owing to the large number of people +who would be attracted there to witness the grand procession and high +mass at the cathedral, the streets would be crowded, and it might be +possible for Inez to slip away from those with her. If this could be +managed it would be greatly preferable to the employment of the men to +carry her off by force. Therefore they agreed that the band should be +posted so that the party could be intercepted on its way back; but that +this should be a last resource, and that if possible Inez should be +carried off in Seville itself. + +On reaching Seville they put up at an inn. Gerald at once proceeded to +the Irish College. Here he inquired for a young priest, who had been a +near neighbour of his in Ireland and a great friend of his boyhood. He +was, he knew, about to return home. He found that he was at the moment +away from Seville, having gone to supply the place of a village cure +who had been taken suddenly ill. This village was situated, he was +told, some six miles south-east of the town. It was already late in the +afternoon, but time was precious; and Gerald, hiring a fresh horse, +rode out at once to the village. His friend was delighted to see him, +for they had not met since Gerald passed through Seville on his way to +join the Armada at Cadiz, and the young priest had not heard whether he +had escaped the perils of the voyage. + +"It is lucky you have come, Gerald," he said when the first greetings +were over, "for I am going to return to Ireland in a fortnight's time. +I am already appointed to a charge near Cork, and am to sail in a +Bristol ship which is expected in Cadiz about that time. Is there any +chance of my meeting you there?" + +"An excellent chance, Denis, though my route is not as clearly marked +out as yours is. I wish to heaven that I could go by the same ship. And +that leads to what I have come to see you about," and he then told his +friend the service he wished him to render. + +"It is rather a serious business, Gerald; and a nice scrape I should +get in if it were found out that I had solemnized the marriage of a +young lady under age without the consent of her father, and that father +a powerful nobleman. However, I am not the man to fail you at a pinch, +and if matters are well managed there is not much risk of its being +found out that I had a hand in it until I am well away, and once in +Ireland no one is likely to make any great fuss over my having united a +runaway pair in Spain. Besides, if you and the young lady have made up +your minds to run away, it is evidently necessary that you should be +married at once; so my conscience is perfectly clear in the business. +And now, what is your plan?" + +"The only part of my plan that is settled is to bring her here and +marry her. After that I shall have horses ready, and we will ride by +unfrequented roads to Malaga or some other port and take a passage in a +ship sailing say to Italy, for there is no chance of getting a vessel +hence to England. Once in Italy there will be no difficulty in getting +a passage to England. I have with me a young Englishman, as staunch a +friend as one can need. I need not tell you all about how I became +acquainted with him; but he is as anxious to get out of Spain as I am, +and that is saying no little." + +"It seems rather a vague plan, Gerald. There is sure to be a great hue +and cry as soon as the young lady is found to be missing. The marquis +is a man of great influence, and the authorities will use every effort +to enable him to discover her." + +"You see, Denis, they will have no reason for supposing that I have had +any hand in the matter, and therefore no special watch will be set at +the ports. The duenna for her own sake is not likely to say a word +about any passages she may have observed between us at Madrid, and she +is unaware that there have been any communications with her since." + +"I suppose you will at once put on disguises, Gerald." + +"Yes, that will of course be the first thing." + +"If you dress her as a young peasant woman of the better class and +yourself as a small cultivator, I will mention to my servant that I am +expecting my newly-married niece and her husband to stay with me for a +few days. The old woman will have no idea that I, an Irishman, would +not have a Spanish niece, and indeed I do not suppose that she has any +idea that I am not a Spaniard. I will open the church myself and +perform the service late in the evening, so that no one will be aware +of what is going on. Of course I can put up your friend too. Then you +can stay quietly here as long as you like." + +"That will do admirably, Denis; but I think we had best go on the next +morning," Gerald said, "although it will be a day or two before there +is anything like an organized pursuit. It will be supposed that she is +in Seville, and inquiries will at first be confined to that town. If +she leaves a note behind saying that she is determined even to take the +veil rather than marry the man her father has chosen for her, that will +cause additional delay. It will be supposed that she is concealed in +the house of some friend, or that she has sought a refuge in a nunnery, +and at any rate there is not likely to be any search over the country +for some days, especially as her father will naturally be anxious that +what he will consider an act of rebellion on the part of his daughter +shall not become publicly known." + +"All this, of course, is if we succeed in getting her clear away during +the fete. If we have to fall back on the other plan I was talking of +and carry her off by force on the way home, the search will be +immediate and general. In that case nothing could be better than your +plan that we should stop here quietly for a few days with you. They +will be searching for a band of robbers and will not dream of making +inquiry for the missing girl in a quiet village like this." + +"Well, we will leave that open, Gerald. I shall let it be known that +you are expected, and whenever you arrive you will be welcome." + +As soon as the point was arranged Gerald again mounted his horse and +returned to Seville. There upon the following morning he engaged a +lodging for the three days of the festa in a quiet house in the +outskirts of the town, and they then proceeded to purchase the various +articles necessary for their disguise and that of Inez. The next +morning they started on their return to Jeres. Here Gerald made +arrangements with the band to meet him in a wood on the road to Cadiz +at eight in the morning on the day following the termination of the +festa at Seville. One of the party was to proceed on that day to the +house among the hills they had fixed upon as their hiding-place, and to +get provisions and everything requisite for the reception of their +captive. They received another five crowns each, the remaining fifteen +was to be paid them as soon as they arrived with their captive at the +house. + +The party remained in ignorance as to the age and sex of the person +they were to carry off, and had little curiosity as to the point, as +they regarded this but a small adventure in comparison to the lucrative +schemes in which they were afterwards to be sharers. + +These arrangements made, Gerald and Geoffrey returned to Seville, and +reached that city on the eve of the commencement of the festa, and took +up their abode at the lodging they had hired. On the following morning +they posted themselves in the street by which the party they expected +would arrive. Both were attired in quiet citizen dress, and Gerald +retained his formidable moustachios and bushy eyebrows. + +In two or three hours a coach accompanied by four lackeys on horseback +came up the street, and they saw that it contained the Marquis of +Ribaldo, his daughter, and her duenna. They followed a short distance +behind it until it entered the courtyard of a stately mansion, which +they learnt on inquiry from a passer-by belonged to the Duke of +Sottomayor. The streets were already crowded with people in holiday +attire, the church bells were ringing, and flags and decorations of all +kinds waved along the route that was to be followed by the great +procession. The house did not stand on this line, and it was necessary +therefore for its inmates to pass through the crowd either to the +cathedral or to the balcony of the house from which they might intend +to view the procession pass. + +Half an hour after the arrival of the coach, the marquis and his +daughter, accompanied by Don Philip de Sottomayor, sallied out, +escorted by six armed lackeys, and took their way towards the +cathedral. They had, however, arrived very late, and the crowd had +already gathered so densely that even the efforts of the lackeys and +the angry commands of the marquis and Don Philip failed to enable them +to make a passage. Very slowly indeed they advanced some distance into +the crowd, but each moment their progress became slower. Gerald and +Geoffrey had fallen in behind them and advanced with them as they +worked themselves in the crowd. + +Angry at what they considered the impertinence of the people for +refusing to make way for them, the nobles pressed forward and engaged +in an angry controversy with those in front, who urged, and truly, that +it was simply impossible for them to make a way, so wedged in were they +by the people on all sides. The crowd, neither knowing nor caring who +were those who thus wished to take precedence of the first comers, +began to jeer and laugh at the angry nobles, and when these threatened +to use force threatened in return. + +As soon as her father had left her side, Gerald, who was immediately +behind Inez, whispered in her ear, "Now is the time, Inez. Go with my +friend; I will occupy the old woman." + +"Keep close to me, senora, and pretend that you are ill," Geoffrey said +to her, and without hesitation Inez turned and followed him, drawing +her mantilla more closely over her face. + +"Let us pass, friends," Geoffrey said as he elbowed his way through +those standing behind them, "the lady needs air," and by vigorous +efforts he presently arrived at the outskirts of the crowd, and struck +off with his charge in the direction of their lodging. "Gerald Burke +will follow us as soon as he can get out," he said. "Everything is +prepared for you, senora, and all arrangements made." + +"Who are you, sir?" the girl asked. "I do not recall your face, and yet +I seem to have seen it before." + +"I am English, senora, and am a friend of Gerald Burke's. When in +Madrid I was disguised as his servant; for as an Englishman and a +heretic it would have gone hard with me had I been detected." + +There wore but few people in the streets through which they passed, the +whole population having flocked either to the streets through which the +procession was to pass, or to the cathedral or churches it was to visit +on its way. Gerald had told Inez at their interview that, although he +had made arrangements for carrying her off by force on the journey to +or from Seville, he should, if possible, take advantage of the crowd at +the function to draw her away from her companions. She had, therefore, +put on her thickest lace mantilla, and this now completely covered her +face from the view of passers-by. Several times she glanced back. + +"Do not be uneasy about him, senora," Geoffrey said. "He will not try +to extricate himself from the crowd until you are discovered to be +missing, as to do so would be to attract attention. As soon as your +loss is discovered he will make his way out, and will then come on at +the top of his speed to the place whither I am conducting you, and I +expect that we shall find him at the door awaiting us." + +A quarter of an hour's walk took them to the lodging, and Inez gave a +little cry of joy as the door was opened to them by Gerald himself. + +"The people of the house are all out," he said, after their first +greeting. "In that room you will find a peasant girl's dress. Dress +yourself as quickly as you can; we shall be ready for you in attire to +match. You had best do up your own things into a bundle, which I will +carry. If they were left here they might, when the news of your being +missing gets abroad, afford a clue to the manner of your escape. I will +tell you all about the arrangements we have made as we go along." + +"Have you arranged--" and she hesitated. + +"Yes, an Irish priest, who is an old friend of mine, will perform the +ceremony this evening." + +A few minutes later two seeming peasants and a peasant girl issued out +from the lodging. The two men carried stout sticks with bundles slung +over them. + +"Be careful of that bundle," Inez said, "for there are all my jewels in +it. After what you had said I concealed them all about me. They are my +fortune, you know. Now, tell me how you got on in the crowd." + +"I first pushed rather roughly against the duenna, and then made the +most profuse apologies, saying that it was shameful people should crowd +so, and that they ought at once to make way for a lady who was +evidently of high rank. This mollified her, and we talked for three or +four minutes; and in the meantime the row in front, caused by your +father and the lackeys quarrelling with the people, grew louder and +louder. The old lady became much alarmed, and indeed the crowd swayed +about so that she clung to my arm. Suddenly she thought of you, and +turning round gave a scream when she found you were missing. 'What is +the matter?' I asked anxiously. 'The young lady with me! She was here +but an instant ago!' (She had forgotten you for fully five minutes.) +'What can have become of her?' + +"I suggested that no doubt you were close by, but had got separated +from her by the pressure of the crowd. However, she began to squall so +loudly that the marquis looked round. He was already in a towering +rage, and he asked angrily,' What are you making all this noise about?' +and then looking round exclaimed, 'Where is Inez?' 'She was here a +moment since!' the old lady exclaimed, 'and now she has got separated +from me.' Your father looked in vain among the crowd, and demanded +whether anyone had seen you. Someone said that a lady who was fainting +had made her way out five minutes before. The marquis used some strong +language to the old lady, and then informed Don Philip what had +happened, and made his way back out of the crowd with the aid of the +lackeys, and is no doubt inquiring for you in all the houses near; but, +as you may imagine, I did not wait. I followed close behind them until +they were out of the crowd, and then slipped away, and once round the +corner took to my heels and made my way back, and got in two or three +minutes before you arrived." + +The two young men talked almost continuously during their walk to the +village in order to keep up the spirits of Donna Inez, and to prevent +her from thinking of the strangeness of her position and the perils +that lay before them before safety could be obtained. Only once she +spoke of the future. + +"Is it true, Gerald, that there are always storms and rain in your +country, and that you never see the sun, for so some of those who were +in the Armada have told me?" + +"It rains there sometimes, Inez, I am bound to admit; but it is often +fine, and the sun never burns one up as it does here. I promise you you +will like it, dear, when you once become accustomed to it." + +"I do not think I shall," she said, shaking her head; "I am accustomed +to the sun, you know. But I would rather be with you even in such an +island as they told me of than in Spain with Don Philip." + +The village seemed absolutely deserted when they arrived there, the +whole population having gone over to Seville to take part in the great +fete. Father Denis received his fair visitor with the greatest +kindness. "Here, Catherine," he cried to his old servant, "here are the +visitors I told you I expected. It is well that we have the chambers +prepared, and that we killed that capon this morning." + +That evening Gerald Burke and Inez de Ribaldo were married in the +little church, Geoffrey Vickars being the only witness. The next +morning there was a long consultation over their plans. "I could buy +you a cart in the village and a pair of oxen, and you could drive to +Malaga," the priest said, "but there would be a difficulty about +changing your disguises after you had entered the town. I think that +the boldest plan will be the safest one. I should propose that you +should ride as a well-to-do trader to Malaga, with your wife behind you +on a pillion, and your friend here as your servant. Lost as your wife +was in the crowd at the fete, it will be a long time before the fact +that she has fled will be realized. For a day or two the search will be +conducted secretly, and only when the house of every friend whom she +might have visited has been searched will the aid of the authorities be +called in, and the poorer quarters, where she might have been carried +by two or three ruffians who may have met her as she emerged in a +fainting condition, as is supposed, from the crowd, be ransacked. I do +not imagine that any search will be made throughout the country round +for a week at least, by which time you will have reached Malaga, and, +if you have good fortune, be on board a ship." + +This plan was finally agreed to. Gerald and his friend at once went +over to Seville and purchased the necessary dresses, together with two +strong horses and equipments. It was evening before their return to the +village. Instead of entering it at once they rode on a mile further, +and fastened the horses up in a wood. Gerald would have left them there +alone, but Geoffrey insisted on staying with them for the night. "I +care nothing about sleeping in the open air, Gerald, and it would be +folly to risk the success of our enterprise upon the chance of no one +happening to come through the wood, and finding the animals before you +return in the morning. We had a hearty meal at Seville, and I shall do +very well until morning." + +Gerald and his wife took leave of the friendly priest at daybreak the +next morning, with the hope that they would very shortly meet in +Ireland. They left the village before anyone was stirring. + +The peasant clothes had been left behind them. Gerald carried two +valises, the one containing the garments in which Inez had fled, the +other his own attire-Geoffrey having resumed the dress he had formerly +worn as his servant. + +On arriving at the wood the party mounted, and at once proceeded on +their journey. Four days' travel took them to Malaga, where they +arrived without any adventure whatever. Once or twice they met parties +of rough-looking men; but travelling as they did without baggage +animals, they did not appear promising subjects for robbery, and the +determined appearance of master and man, each armed with sword and +pistols, deterred the fellows from an attempt which promised more hard +knocks than plunder. + +After putting up at an inn in Malaga, Gerald went down at once to the +port to inquire for a vessel bound for Italy. There were three or four +such vessels in the harbour, and he had no difficulty in arranging for +a passage to Naples for himself, his wife, and servant. The vessel was +to sail on the following morning, and it was with a deep feeling of +satisfaction and relief that they went on board her, and an hour later +were outside the port. + +"It seems marvellous to me," Gerald said, as he looked back upon the +slowly-receding town, "that I have managed to carry off my prize with +so little difficulty. I had expected to meet with all sorts of dangers, +and had I been the peaceful trader I looked, our journey could not be +more uneventful." + +"Perhaps you are beginning to think that the prize is not so very +valuable after all," Inez said, "since you have won it so easily." + +"I have not begun to think so yet," Gerald laughed happily. "At any +rate I shall wait until I get you home before such ideas begin to occur +to me." + +"Directly I get to Ireland," Inez said, "I shall write to my father and +tell him that I am married to you, and that I should never have run +away had he not insisted on my marrying a man I hated. I shall, of +course, beg him to forgive me; but I fear he never will." + +"We must hope that he will, Inez, and that he will ask you to come back +to Spain sometimes. I do not care for myself, you know, for as I have +told you my estate in Ireland is amply large enough for my wants; but I +shall be glad, for your sake, that you should be reconciled to him." + +Inez shook her head. + +"You do not know my father, Gerald. I would never go back to Spain +again--not if he promised to give me his whole fortune. My father never +forgives; and were he to entice me back to Spain, it would be only to +shut me up and to obtain a dispensation from Rome annulling the +marriage, which he would have no difficulty in doing. No, you have got +me, and will have to keep me for good. I shall never return to Spain, +never. Possibly when my father hears from me he may send me over money +to make me think he has forgiven me, and to induce me some day or other +to come back to visit him, and so get me into his power again; but +that, Gerald, he shall never do." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE SURPRISE OF BREDA. + + +Lionel Vickars had, by the beginning of 1590, come to speak the Dutch +language well and fluently. Including his first stay in Holland he had +now been there eighteen months, and as he was in constant communication +with the Dutch officers and with the population, he had constant +occasion for speaking Dutch, a language much more akin to English than +any other continental tongue, and indeed so closely allied to the +dialect of the eastern counties of England, that the fishermen of our +eastern ports had in those days little difficulty in conversing with +the Hollanders. + +He was one day supping with Sir Francis Vere when Prince Maurice and +several of his officers were also there. The conversation turned upon +the prospects of the campaign of the ensuing spring. Lionel, of course, +took no part in it, but listened attentively to what was being said, +and was very pleased to find that the period of inactivity was drawing +to an end, and that their commanders considered that they had now +gathered a force of sufficient strength to assume the offensive. + +[Illustration: BREDA 1590.] + +"I would," Prince Maurice said, "that we could gain Breda. The city +stands like a great sentinel against every movement towards Flanders, +and enables the Spaniards to penetrate at all times towards the heart +of our country; but I fear that it is altogether beyond our means. It +is one of the strongest cities in the Netherlands, and my ancestors, +who were its lords, little thought that they were fortifying and +strengthening it in order that it might be a thorn in the side of their +country. I would give much, indeed, to be able to wrest it from the +enemy; but I fear it will be long before we can even hope for that. It +could withstand a regular siege by a well-provided army for months; and +as to surprise, it is out of the question, for I hear that the utmost +vigilance is unceasingly maintained." + +A few days after this Lionel was talking with Captain de Heraugiere, +who had also been at the supper. He had taken part in the defence of +Sluys, and was one of the officers with whom Lionel was most intimate. + +"It would be a rare enterprise to surprise Breda," Captain de +Heraugiere said; "but I fear it is hopeless to think of such a thing." + +"I do not see why it should be," Lionel said. "I was reading when I was +last at home about our wars with the Scotch, and there were several +cases in which very strong places that could not have been carried by +assault were captured suddenly by small parties of men who disguised +themselves as waggoners, and hiding a score or two of their comrades in +a waggon covered with firewood, or sacks of grain, boldly went up to +the gates. When there they cut the traces of their horses so that the +gates could not be closed, or the portcullis lowered, and then falling +upon the guards, kept them at bay until a force, hidden near the gates, +ran up and entered the town. I see not why a similar enterprise should +not be attempted at Breda." + +"Nor do I," Captain Heraugiere said; "the question is how to set about +such a scheme." + +"That one could not say without seeing the place," Lionel remarked. "I +should say that a plan of this sort could only be successful after +those who attempted it had made themselves masters of all particulars +of the place and its ways. Everything would depend upon all going +smoothly and without hitches of any kind. If you really think of +undertaking such an adventure, Captain Heraugiere, I should be very +glad to act under you if Sir Francis Vere will give me leave to do so; +but I would suggest that the first step should be for us to go into +Breda in disguise. We might take in a waggon-load of grain for sale, or +merely carry on our backs baskets with country produce, or we could row +up in a boat with fish." + +"The plan is certainly worth thinking of," Captain Heraugiere said. "I +will turn it over in my mind for a day, and will then talk to you +again. It would be a grand stroke, and there would be great honour to +be obtained; but it will not do for me to go to Prince Maurice and lay +it before him until we have a plan completely worked out, otherwise we +are more likely to meet with ridicule than praise." + +The following day Captain Heraugiere called at Lionel's lodgings. "I +have lain awake all night thinking of our scheme," he said, "and have +resolved to carry out at least the first part of it--to enter Breda and +see what are the prospects of success, and the manner in which the +matter had best be set about. I propose that we two disguise ourselves +as fishermen, and going down to the river between Breda and Willemstad +bargain with some fishermen going up to Breda with their catch for the +use of their boat. While they are selling the fish we can survey the +town and see what is the best method of introducing a force into it. +When our plan is completed we will go to Voorne, whither Prince Maurice +starts to-morrow, and lay the matter before him." + +"I will gladly go with you to Breda," Lionel said, "and, as far as I +can, aid you there; but I think that it would be best that you only +should appear in the matter afterwards. I am but a young volunteer, and +it would be well that I did not appear at all in the matter, which you +had best make entirely your own. But I hope, Captain Heraugiere, that +should the prince decide to adopt any plan you may form, and intrust +the matter to you, that you will take me with you in your following." + +"That I will assuredly," Captain Heraugiere said, "and will take care +that if it should turn out successful your share in the enterprise +shall be known." + +"When do you think of setting about it?" Lionel asked. + +"Instantly. My company is at Voorne, and I should return thither with +the prince to-day. I will at once go to him and ask for leave to be +absent on urgent affairs for a week. Do you go to Sir Francis Vere and +ask for a similar time. Do not tell him, if you can help it, the exact +nature of your enterprise. But if you cannot obtain leave otherwise, of +course you must do so. I will be back here in two hours' time. We can +then at once get our disguises, and hire a craft to take us to +Willemstad." + +Lionel at once went across to the quarters of Sir Francis Vere. + +"I have come, Sir Francis, to ask for a week's leave of absence." + +"That you can have, Lionel. What, are you going shooting ducks on the +frozen meres?" + +"No, Sir Francis. I am going on a little expedition with Captain +Heraugiere, who has invited me to accompany him. We have an idea in our +heads that may perhaps be altogether useless, but may possibly bear +fruit. In the first case we would say nothing about it, in the second +we will lay it before you on our return." + +"Very well," Sir Francis said with a smile. "You showed that you could +think at Sluys, and I hope something may come of this idea of yours, +whatever it may be." + +At the appointed time Captain Heraugiere returned, having obtained +leave of absence from the prince. They at once went out into the town +and bought the clothes necessary for their disguise. They returned with +these to their lodgings, and having put them on went down to the wharf, +where they had no difficulty in bargaining with the master of a small +craft to take them to Willemstad, as the Spaniards had no ships +whatever on the water between Rotterdam and Bergen-op-Zoom. The boat +was to wait three days for them at that town, and to bring them back to +Rotterdam. As there was no reason for delay they at once went on board +and cast off. The distance was but thirty miles, and just at nightfall +they stepped ashore at the town of Willemstad. + +The next morning they had no difficulty in arranging with a fisherman +who was going up to Breda with a cargo of fish to take the place of two +of his boatmen at the oars. + +"We want to spend a few hours there," Captain Heraugiere said, "and +will give you five crowns if you will leave two of your men here and +let us take their places." + +"That is a bargain," the man said at once; "that is, if you can row, +for we shall scarce take the tide up to the town, and must keep on +rowing to get there before the ebb begins." + +"We can row, though perhaps not so well as your own men. You are, I +suppose, in the habit of going there, and are known to the guards at +the port? They are not likely, I should think, to notice that you +haven't got the same crew as usual?" + +"There is no fear of that, and if they did I could easily say that two +of my men were unable to accompany me to-day, and that I have hired +fresh hands in their places." + +Two of the men got out. Captain Heraugiere and Lionel Vickars took +their places, and the boat proceeded up the river. The oars were heavy +and clumsy, and the new-comers were by no means sorry when, after a row +of twelve miles, they neared Breda. + +"What are the regulations for entering Breda?" Captain Heraugiere asked +as they approached the town. + +"There are no particular regulations," the master of the boat said, +"save that on entering the port the boat is searched to see that it +contains nothing but fish. None are allowed to enter the gates of the +town without giving their names, and satisfying the officer on guard +that they have business in the place." + +An officer came on board as the boat ran up alongside the quay and +asked a few questions. After assisting in getting the basket of fish on +shore Captain Heraugiere and Lionel sauntered away along the quay, +leaving the fishermen to dispose of their catch to the townspeople, who +had already begun to bargain for them. + +The river Mark flowed through the town, supplying its moats with water. +Where it left the town on the western side was the old castle, with a +moat of its own and strong fortified lines. Within was the quay, with +an open place called the fish-market leading to the gates of the new +castle. There were 600 Spanish infantry in the town and 100 in the +castle, and 100 cavalry. The governor of Breda, Edward Lanzavecchia, +was absent superintending the erection of new fortifications at +Gertruydenberg, and in his absence the town was under the command of +his son Paolo. + +Great vigilance was exercised. All vessels entering port were strictly +examined, and there was a guard-house on the quay. Lying by one of the +wharves was a large boat laden with peat, which was being rapidly +unloaded, the peat being sold as soon as landed, as fuel was very short +in the city. + +"It seems to me," Lionel said as they stood for a minute looking on, +"that this would be just the thing for us. If we could make an +arrangement with the captain of one of these peat-boats we might hide a +number of men in the hold and cover them with peat. A place might be +built large enough, I should think, to hold seventy or eighty men, and +yet be room for a quantity of peat to be stowed over them." + +"A capital idea," Captain Heraugiere said. "The peat comes from above +the town. We must find out where the barges are loaded, and try to get +at one of the captains." + +After a short walk through the town they returned to the boat. The +fisherman had already sold out his stock, and was glad at seeing his +passengers return earlier than he expected; but as the guard was +standing by he rated them severely for keeping him waiting so long, and +with a muttered excuse they took their places in the boat and rowed +down the river. + +"I want you to put us ashore on the left bank as soon as we are out of +sight of the town," Captain Heraugiere said. "As it will be heavy work +getting your boat back with only two of you, I will give you a couple +of crowns beyond the amount I bargained with you for." + +"That will do well enough," the man said. "We have got the tide with +us, and can drop down at our leisure." + +As soon as they were landed they made a wide detour to avoid the town, +and coming down again upon the river above it, followed its banks for +three miles, when they put up at a little inn in the small village of +Leur on its bank. They had scarcely sat down to a meal when a man came +in and called for supper. The landlord placed another plate at the +table near them, and the man at once got into conversation with them, +and they learnt that he was master of a peat-boat that had that morning +left Breda empty. + +"We were in Breda ourselves this morning," Captain Heraugiere said, +"and saw a peat-boat unloading there. There seemed to be a brisk demand +for the fuel." + +"Yes; it is a good trade at present," the man said. "There are only six +of us who have permits to enter the port, and it is as much as we can +do to keep the town supplied with fuel; for, you see, at any moment the +river may be frozen up, so the citizens need to keep a good stock in +hand. I ought not to grumble, since I reap the benefit of the Spanish +regulations; but all these restrictions on trade come mighty hard upon +the people of Breda. It was not so in the old time." + +After supper was over Captain Heraugiere ordered a couple of flasks of +spirits, and presently learned from the boatman that his name was +Adrian Van de Berg, and that he had been at one time a servant in the +household of William of Orange. Little by little Captain Heraugiere +felt his way, and soon found that the boatman was an enthusiastic +patriot. He then confided to him that he himself was an officer in the +State's service, and had come to Breda to ascertain whether there was +any possibility of capturing the town by surprise. + +"We hit on a plan to-day," he said, "which promises a chance of +success; but it needs the assistance of one ready to risk his life." + +"I am ready to risk my life in any enterprise that has a fair chance of +success," the boatman said, "but I do not see how I can be of much +assistance." + +"You can be of the greatest assistance if you will, and will render the +greatest service to your country if you will join in our plan. What we +propose is, that we should construct a shelter of boards four feet high +in the bottom of your boat, leading from your little cabin aft right up +to the bow. In this I calculate we could stow seventy men; then the +peat could be piled over it, and if you entered the port somewhat late +in the afternoon you could manage that it was not unladen so as to +uncover the roof of our shelter before work ceased for the night. Then +we could sally out, overpower the guard on the quay, make for one of +the gates, master the guard there, and open it to our friends without." + +"It is a bold plan and a good one," Van de Berg said, "and I am ready +to run my share of the risk with you. I am so well known in Breda that +they do not search the cargo very closely when I arrive, and I see no +reason why the party hidden below should not escape observation. I will +undertake my share of the business if you decide to carry it out. I +served the prince for fifteen years, and am ready to serve his son. +There are plenty of planks to be obtained at a place three miles above +here, and it would not take many hours to construct the false deck. If +you send a messenger here giving me two days' notice, it shall be built +and the peat stowed on it by the time you arrive." + +It was late at night before the conversation was concluded, and the +next morning Captain Heraugiere and Lionel started on their return, +struck the river some miles below Breda, obtained a passage over the +river in a passing boat late in the afternoon, and, sleeping at +Willemstad, went on board their boat next morning and returned to +Rotterdam. It was arranged that Lionel should say nothing about their +journey until Captain Heraugiere had opened the subject to Prince +Maurice. + +"You are back before your time," Sir Francis Vere said when Lionel +reported himself for duty. "Has anything come of this project of yours, +whatever it may be?" + +"We hope so, sir. Captain Heraugiere will make his report to Prince +Maurice. He is the leader of the party, and therefore we thought it +best that he should report to Prince Maurice, who, if he thinks well of +it, will of course communicate with you." + +The next day a message arrived from Voorne requesting Sir Francis Vere +to proceed thither to discuss with the prince a matter of importance. +He returned after two days' absence, and presently sent for Lionel. + +"This is a rare enterprise that Captain Heraugiere has proposed to the +prince," he said, "and promises well for success. It is to be kept a +profound secret, and a few only will know aught of it until it is +executed. Heraugiere is of course to have command of the party which is +to be hidden in the barge, and is to pick out eighty men from the +garrisons of Gorcum and Lowesteyn. He has begged that you shall be of +the party, as he says that the whole matter was in the first case +suggested to him by you. The rest of the men and officers will be +Dutch." + +A fortnight later, on the 22nd of February, Sir Francis Vere on his +return from the Hague, where Prince Maurice now was, told Lionel that +all was arranged. The message had come down from Van de Berg that the +hiding place was constructed. They were to join Heraugiere the next +day. + +On the 24th of February the little party started. Heraugiere had chosen +young, active, and daring men. With him were Captains Logier and +Fervet, and Lieutenant Held. They embarked on board a vessel, and were +landed near the mouth of the Mark, as De Berg was this time going to +carry the peat up the river instead of down, fearing that the passage +of seventy men through the country would attract attention. The same +night Prince Maurice, Sir Francis Vere, Count Hohenlohe, and other +officers sailed to Willemstad, their destination having been kept a +strict secret from all but those engaged in the enterprise. Six hundred +English troops, eight hundred Dutch, and three hundred cavalry had been +drawn from different garrisons, and were also to land at Willemstad. + +When Heraugiere's party arrived at the point agreed on at eleven +o'clock at night, Van de Berg was not there, nor was the barge; and +angry and alarmed at his absence they searched about for him for hours, +and at last found him in the village of Terheyde. He made the excuse +that he had overslept himself, and that he was afraid the plot had been +discovered. As everything depended upon his co-operation, Heraugiere +abstained from the angry reproaches which the strange conduct of the +man had excited; and as it was now too late to do anything that night, +a meeting was arranged for the following evening, and a message was +despatched to the prince telling him that the expedition was postponed +for a day. On their return, the men all gave free vent to their +indignation. + +"I have no doubt," Heraugiere said, "that the fellow has turned coward +now that the time has come to face the danger. It is one thing to talk +about a matter as long as it is far distant, but another to look it in +the face when it is close at hand. I do not believe that he will come +to-morrow." + +"If he does not he will deserve hanging," Captain Logier said; "after +all the trouble he has given in getting the troops together, and after +bringing the prince himself over." + +"It will go very near hanging if not quite," Heraugiere muttered. "If +he thinks that he is going to fool us with impunity, he is mightily +mistaken. If he is a wise man he will start at daybreak, and get as far +away as he can before night-fall if he does not mean to come." + +The next day the party remained in hiding in a barn, and in the evening +again went down to the river. There was a barge lying there laden high +with turf. A general exclamation of satisfaction broke from all when +they saw it. There were two men on it. One landed and came to meet +them. + +"Where is Van de Berg?" Captain Heraugiere asked as he came up. + +"He is ill and unable to come, but has sent you this letter. My brother +and myself have undertaken the business." + +The letter merely said that the writer was too ill to come, but had +sent in his place his two nephews, one or other of whom always +accompanied him, and who could be trusted thoroughly to carry out the +plan. The party at once went on board the vessel, descended into the +little cabin aft, and then passed through a hole made by the removal of +two planks into the hold that had been prepared for them. Heraugiere +remained on deck, and from time to time descended to inform those below +of the progress being made. It was slow indeed, for a strong wind laden +with sleet blew directly down the river. Huge blocks of ice floated +down, and the two boatmen with their poles had the greatest difficulty +in keeping the boat's head up the stream. + +At last the wind so increased that navigation became impossible, and +the barge was made fast against the bank. From Monday night until +Thursday morning the gale continued. Progress was impossible, and the +party cramped up in the hold suffered greatly from hunger and thirst. +On Thursday evening they could sustain it no longer and landed. They +were for a time scarce able to walk, so cramped were their limbs by +their long confinement, and made their way up painfully to a fortified +building called Nordand, standing far from any other habitations. Here +they obtained food and drink, and remained until at eleven at night one +of the boatmen came to them with news that the wind had changed, and +was now blowing in from the sea. They again took their places on board, +but the water was low in the river, and it was difficult work passing +the shallows, and it was not until Saturday afternoon that they passed +the boom below the town and entered the inner harbour. + +An officer of the guard came off in a boat and boarded the barge. The +weather was so bitterly cold that he at once went into the little cabin +and there chatted with the two boatmen. Those in the hold could hear +every word that was said, and they almost held their breath, for the +slightest noise would betray them. After a while the officer got into +his boat again, saying he would send some men off to warp the vessel +into the castle dock, as the fuel was required by the garrison there. +As the barge was making its way towards the water-gate, it struck upon +a hidden obstruction in the river and began to leak rapidly. The +situation of those in the hold was now terrible, for in a few minutes +the water rose to their knees, and the choice seemed to be presented to +them of being drowned like rats there, or leaping overboard, in which +case they would be captured and hung without mercy. The boatmen plied +the pumps vigorously, and in a short time a party of Italian soldiers +arrived from the shore and towed the vessel into the inner harbour, and +made her fast close to the guard-house of the castle. A party of +labourers at once came on board and began to unload the turf; the need +of fuel both in the town and castle being great, for the weather had +been for some time bitterly cold. + +A fresh danger now arose. The sudden immersion in the icy water in the +close cabin brought on a sudden inclination to sneeze and cough. +Lieutenant Held, finding himself unable to repress his cough, handed +his dagger to Lionel Vickars, who happened to be sitting next to him, +and implored him to stab him to the heart lest his cough might betray +the whole party; but one of the boatmen who was standing close to the +cabin heard the sounds, and bade his companion go on pumping with as +much noise and clatter as possible, while he himself did the same, +telling those standing on the wharf alongside that the boat was almost +full of water. The boatmen behaved with admirable calmness and +coolness, exchanging jokes with acquaintances on the quay, keeping up a +lively talk, asking high prices for their peat, and engaging in long +and animated bargains so as to prevent the turf from being taken too +rapidly ashore. + +At last, when but a few layers of turf remained over the roof of the +hold, the elder brother told the men unloading that it was getting too +dark, and he himself was too tired and worn-out to attend to things +any longer. He therefore gave the men some money and told them to go to +the nearest public-house to drink his health, and to return the first +thing in the morning to finish unloading. The younger of the two +brothers had already left the boat. He made his way through the town, +and started at full speed to carry the news to Prince Maurice that the +barge had arrived safely in the town, and the attempt would be made at +midnight; also of the fact they had learned from those on the wharf, +that the governor had heard a rumour that a force had landed somewhere +on the coast, and had gone off again to Gertruydenberg in all haste, +believing that some design was on foot against that town. His son Paolo +was again in command of the garrison. + +A little before midnight Captain Heraugiere told his comrades that the +hour had arrived, and that only by the most desperate bravery could +they hope to succeed, while death was the certain consequence of +failure. The band were divided into two companies. He himself with one +was to attack the main guardhouse; the other, under Fervet, was to +seize the arsenal of the fortress. Noiselessly they stole out from +their hiding-place, and formed upon the wharf within the inclosure of +the castle. Heraugiere moved straight upon the guard-house. The sentry +was secured instantly; but the slight noise was heard, and the captain +of the watch ran out but was instantly cut down. + +Others came out with torches, but after a brief fight were driven into +the guard-house; when all were shot down through the doors and windows. +Captain Fervet and his band had done equally well. The magazine of the +castle was seized, and its defenders slain. Paolo Lanzavecchia made a +sally from the palace with a few of his adherents, but was wounded and +driven back; and the rest of the garrison of the castle, ignorant of +the strength of the force that had thus risen as it were from the earth +upon them, fled panic-stricken, not even pausing to destroy the bridge +between the castle and the town. + +Young Paolo Lanzavecchia now began a parley with the assailants; but +while the negotiations were going on Hohenlohe with his cavalry came +up--having been apprised by the boatman that the attempt was about to +be made--battered down the palisade near the water-gate, and entered +the castle. A short time afterwards Prince Maurice, Sir Francis Vere, +and other officers arrived with the main body of the troops. But the +fight was over before even Hohenlohe arrived; forty of the garrison +being killed, and not a single man of the seventy assailants. The +burgomaster, finding that the castle had fallen, and that a strong +force had arrived, then sent a trumpeter to the castle to arrange for +the capitulation of the town, which was settled on the following +terms:--All plundering was commuted for the payment of two months' pay +to every soldier engaged in the affair. All who chose might leave the +city, with full protection to life and property. Those who were willing +to remain were not to be molested in their consciences or households +with regard to religion. + +The news of the capture of Breda was received with immense enthusiasm +throughout Holland. It was the first offensive operation that had been +successfully undertaken, and gave new hope to the patriots. + +Parma was furious at the cowardice with which five companies of foot +and one of horse--all picked troops--had fled before the attack of +seventy Hollanders. Three captains were publicly beheaded in Brussels +and a fourth degraded to the ranks, while Lanzavecchia was deprived of +the command of Gertruydenberg. + +For some months before the assault upon Breda the army of Holland had +been gaining vastly in strength and organization. Prince Maurice, aided +by his cousin Lewis William, stadholder of Friesland, had been hard at +work getting it into a state of efficiency. Lewis William, a man of +great energy and military talent, saw that the use of solid masses of +men in the field was no longer fitted to a state of things when the +improvements in firearms of all sorts had entirely changed the +condition of war. He therefore reverted to the old Roman methods, and +drilled his soldiers in small bodies; teaching them to turn and wheel, +advance or retreat, and perform all sorts of manoeuvres with regularity +and order. Prince Maurice adopted the same plan in Holland, and the +tactics so introduced proved so efficient that they were sooner or +later adopted by all civilized nations. + +At the time when William of Orange tried to relieve the hard-pressed +city of Haarlem, he could with the greatest difficulty muster three or +four thousand men for the purpose. The army of the Netherlands was now +22,000 strong, of whom 2000 were cavalry. It was well disciplined, well +equipped, and regularly paid, and was soon to prove that the pains +bestowed upon it had not been thrown away. In the course of the +eighteen years that had followed the capture of Brill and the +commencement of the struggle with Spain, the wealth and prosperity of +Holland had enormously increased. The Dutch were masters of the sea- +coast, the ships of the Zeelanders closed every avenue to the interior, +and while the commerce of Antwerp, Ghent, Bruges, and the other cities +of the provinces that remained in the hands of the Spaniards was for +the time destroyed, and their population fell off by a half, Holland +benefited in proportion. + +From all the Spanish provinces men of energy and wealth passed over in +immense numbers to Holland, where they could pursue their commerce and +industries--free from the exactions and cruelty under which they had +for so many years groaned. The result was that the cities of Holland +increased vastly in wealth and population, and the resources at the +disposal of Prince Maurice enormously exceeded those with which his +father had for so many years sustained the struggle. + +For a while after the capture of Breda there was breathing time in +Holland, and Maurice was busy in increasing and improving his army. +Parma was fettered by the imperious commands of Philip, who had +completely crippled him by withdrawing a considerable number of his +troops for service in the war which he was waging with France. But +above all, the destruction of the Armada, and with it of the naval +supremacy of Spain, had changed the situation. + +Holland was free to carry on her enterprises by sea, and had free +communication and commerce with her English ally, while communication +between Spain and the Netherlands was difficult. Reinforcements could +no longer be sent by sea, and had to be sent across Europe from Italy. +Parma was worn out by exertions, disappointment, and annoyance, and his +health was seriously failing; while opposed to him were three young +commanders--Maurice, Lewis William, and Francis Vere--all men of +military genius and full of confidence and energy. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A SLAVE IN BARBARY. + + +The _Tarifa_ had left port but a few hours when a strong wind rose +from the north, and rapidly increased in violence until it was blowing +a gale. + +"Inez is terribly ill," Gerald said when he met Geoffrey on deck the +following morning. "I believe at the present moment she would face her +father and risk everything if she could but be put on shore." + +"I can well imagine that. However, she will think otherwise to-morrow +or next day. I believe these Mediterranean storms do not last long. +There is no fear of six weeks of bad weather such as we had when we +were last afloat together." + +"No. I have just been speaking to the captain. He says they generally +blow themselves out in two or three days; but still, even that is not a +pleasant look-out. These vessels are not like your English craft, which +seem to be able to sail almost in the eye of the wind. They are +lubberly craft, and badly handled; and if this gale lasts for three +days we shall be down on the Barbary coast, and I would rather risk +another journey through Spain than get down so near the country of the +Moors." + +"I can understand that," Geoffrey agreed. "However, I see there are +some thirty soldiers forward on their way to join one of the regiments +in Naples, so we ought to be able to beat off any corsair that might +come near us. + +"Yes; but if we got down on their coast we might be attacked by half a +dozen of them," Gerald said. "However, one need not begin to worry +one's self at present; the gale may abate within a few hours." + +At the end of the second day the wind went down suddenly; and through +the night the vessel rolled heavily, for the sea was still high, and +there was not a breath of wind to fill her sails and steady her. By the +morning the sea had gone down, but there was still an absence of wind. + +"We have had a horrible night," Gerald remarked, "but we may think +ourselves fortunate indeed," and he pointed to the south, where the +land was plainly visible at a distance of nine or ten miles. "If the +gale had continued to blow until now we should have been on shore long +before this." + +"We are too near to be pleasant," Geoffrey said, "for they can see us +as plainly as we can see the land. It is to be hoped that a breeze may +spring up from the south before long and enable us to creep off the +land. Unless I am greatly mistaken I can see the masts of some craft or +other in a line with those white houses over there." + +"I don't see them," Gerald replied, gazing intently in the direction in +which Geoffrey pointed. + +"Let us go up to the top, Gerald; we shall see her hull from there +plainly enough." + +On reaching the top Gerald saw at once that his friend's eyes had not +deceived him. + +"Yes, there is a vessel there sure enough, Geoffrey. I cannot see +whether she has one or two masts, for her head is in this direction." + +"That is not the worst of it," Geoffrey said, shading his eyes and +gazing intently on the distant object. "She is rowing; I can see the +light flash on her oars every stroke. That is a Moorish galley, and she +is coming out towards us." + +"I believe you are right," Gerald replied after gazing earnestly for +some time. "Yes, I saw the flash of the oars then distinctly." + +They at once descended to the deck and informed the captain of what +they had seen. He hastily mounted to the top. + +"There is no mistake about it," he said after looking intently for a +short time; "it is one of the Barbary corsairs, and she is making out +towards us. The holy saints preserve us from these bloodthirsty +infidels." + +"The saints will do their work if we do ours," Gerald remarked; "and we +had best do as large a share as possible. What is the number of your +crew, captain?" + +"Nineteen men altogether." + +"And there are thirty soldiers, and six male passengers in the cabin," +Gerald said; "so we muster fifty-four. That ought to be enough to beat +off the corsair." + +On returning to the deck the captain informed the officer in charge of +the troops on board that a Moorish pirate was putting off towards them, +and that unless the wind came to their aid there was no chance of +escaping a conflict with her. + +"Then we must fight her, captain," the officer, who was still a youth, +said cheerfully. "I have thirty men, of whom at least half are +veterans. You have four cannon on board, and there are the crew and +passengers." + +"Fifty-four in all," Gerald said. "We ought to be able to make a good +fight of it." + +Orders were at once given, soldiers and crew were mustered and informed +of the approaching danger. + +"We have got to fight, men, and to fight hard," the young officer said; +"for if we are beaten you know the result--either our throats will be +cut or we shall have to row in their galleys for the rest of our lives. +So there is not much choice." + +In an hour the corsair was half-way between the coast and the vessel. +By this time every preparation had been made for her reception. Arms +had been distributed among the crew and such of the passengers as were +not already provided, the guns had been cast loose and ammunition +brought up, cauldrons of pitch were ranged along the bulwarks and fires +lighted on slabs of stone placed beneath them. The coppers in the +galley were already boiling. + +"Now, captain," the young officer said, "do you and your sailors work +the guns and ladle out the pitch and boiling water, and be in readiness +to catch up their pikes and axes and aid in the defence if the villains +gain a footing on the deck. I and my men and the passengers will do our +best to keep them from climbing up." + +The vessel was provided with sweeps, and the captain had in the first +place proposed to man them; but Gerald pointed out that the corsair +would row three feet to their one, and that it was important that all +should be fresh and vigorous when the pirates came alongside. The idea +had consequently been abandoned, and the vessel lay motionless in the +water while the corsair was approaching. + +Inez, who felt better now that the motion had subsided, came on deck as +the preparations were being made. Gerald told her of the danger that +was approaching. She turned pale. + +"This is dreadful, Gerald. I would rather face death a thousand times +than be captured by the Moors." + +"We shall beat them off, dear, never fear. They will not reckon upon +the soldiers we have on board, and will expect an easy prize. I do not +suppose that, apart from the galley-slaves, they have more men on board +than we have, and fighting as we do for liberty, each of us ought to be +equal to a couple of these Moorish dogs. When the conflict begins you +must go below." + +"I shall not do that," Inez said firmly. "We will share the same fate +whatever it may be, Gerald; and remember that whatever happens I will +not live to be carried captive among them. I will stab myself to the +heart if I see that all is lost." + +"You shall come on deck if you will, Inez, when they get close +alongside. I do not suppose there will be many shots fired--they will +be in too great a hurry to board; but as long as they are shooting you +must keep below. After that come up if you will. It would make a coward +of me did I know that a chance shot might strike you." + +"Very well, then, Gerald, to please you I will go down until they come +alongside, then come what will I shall be on deck." + +As the general opinion on board was that the corsairs would not greatly +outnumber them, while they would be at a great disadvantage from the +lowness of their vessel in the water, there was a general feeling of +confidence, and the approach of the enemy was watched with calmness. +When half a mile distant two puffs of smoke burst out from the +corsair's bows. A moment later a shot struck the ship, and another +threw up the water close to her stern. The four guns of the +_Tarifa_ had been brought over to the side on which the enemy was +approaching, and these were now discharged. One of the shots carried +away some oars on the starboard side of the galley, another struck her +in the bow. There was a slight confusion on board; two or three oars +were shifted over from the port to the starboard side, and she +continued her way. + +The guns were loaded again, bags of bullets being this time inserted +instead of balls. The corsairs fired once more, but their shots were +unanswered; and with wild yells and shouts they approached the +motionless Spanish vessel. + +"She is crowded with men," Gerald remarked to Geoffrey. "She has far +more on board than we reckoned on." + +"We have not given them a close volley yet," Geoffrey replied. "If the +guns are well aimed they will make matters equal." + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY FALLS INTO THE HANDS OF THE CORSAIRS] + +The corsair was little more than her own length away when the captain +gave the order, and the four guns poured their contents upon her +crowded decks. The effect was terrible. The mass of men gathered in her +bow in readiness to board as soon as she touched the _Tarifa_ were +literally swept away. Another half minute she was alongside the +Spaniard, and the Moors with wild shouts of vengeance tried to clamber +on board. + +But they had not reckoned upon meeting with more than the ordinary crew +of a merchant ship. The soldiers discharged their arquebuses, and then +with pike and sword opposed an impenetrable barrier to the assailants, +while the sailors from behind ladled over the boiling pitch and water +through intervals purposely left in the line of the defenders. The +conflict lasted but a few minutes. Well-nigh half the Moors had been +swept away by the discharge of the cannon, and the rest, but little +superior in numbers to the Spaniards, were not long before they lost +heart, their efforts relaxed, and shouts arose to the galley-slaves to +row astern. + +"Now, it is our turn!" the young officer cried. "Follow me, my men; we +will teach the dogs a lesson." As he spoke he sprang from the bulwark +down upon the deck of the corsair. + +Geoffrey, who was standing next to him, followed his example, as did +five or six soldiers. They were instantly engaged in a hand-to-hand +fight with the Moors. In the din and confusion they heard not the +shouts of their comrades. After a minute's fierce fighting, Geoffrey, +finding that he and his companions were being pressed back, glanced +round to see why support did not arrive, and saw that there were +already thirty feet of water between the two vessels. He was about to +spring overboard, when the Moors made a desperate rush, his guard was +beaten down, a blow from a Moorish scimitar fell on his head, and he +lost consciousness. + +It was a long time before he recovered. The first sound he was aware of +was the creaking of the oars. He lay dreamily listening to this, and +wondering what it meant, until the truth suddenly flashed across him. +He opened his eyes and looked round. A heavy weight lay across his +legs, and he saw the young Spanish officer lying dead there. Several +other Spaniards lay close by, while the deck was strewn with the +corpses of the Moors. He understood at once what had happened. The +vessels had drifted apart just as he sprang on board, cutting off those +who had boarded the corsair from all assistance from their friends, and +as soon as they had been overpowered the galley had started on her +return to the port from which she had come out. + +"At any rate," he said to himself, "Gerald and Inez are safe; that is a +comfort, whatever comes of it." + +It was not until the corsair dropped anchor near the shore that the +dispirited Moors paid any attention to those by whom their deck was +cumbered. Then the Spaniards were first examined. Four, who were dead, +were at once tossed overboard. Geoffrey and two others who showed signs +of life were left for the present, a bucket of water being thrown over +each to revive them. The Moorish wounded and the dead were then lowered +into boats and taken on shore for care or burial. Then Geoffrey and the +two Spaniards were ordered to rise. + +All three were able to do so with some difficulty, and were rowed +ashore. They were received when they landed by the curses and +execrations of the people of the little town, who would have torn them +to pieces had not their captors marched them to the prison occupied by +the galley-slaves when on shore, and left them there. Most of the +galley-slaves were far too exhausted by their long row, and too +indifferent to aught but their own sufferings, to pay any attention to +the new-comers. Two or three, however, came up to them and offered to +assist in bandaging their wounds. Their doublets had already been taken +by their captors; but they now tore strips off their shirts, and with +these staunched the bleeding of their wounds. + +"It was lucky for you that five or six of our number were killed by +that discharge of grape you gave us," one of them said, "or they would +have thrown you overboard at once. Although, after all, death is almost +preferable to such a life as ours." + +"How long have you been here?" Geoffrey asked. + +"I hardly know," the other replied; "one almost loses count of time +here. But it is somewhere about ten years. I am sturdy, you see. Three +years at most is the average of our life in the galleys, though there +are plenty die before as many months have passed. I come of a hardy +race. I am not a Spaniard. I was captured in an attack on a town in the +West Indies, and had three years on board one of your galleys at Cadiz. +Then she was captured by the Moors, and here I have been ever since." + +"Then you must be an Englishman!" Geoffrey exclaimed in that language. + +The man stared at him stupidly for a minute, and then burst into tears. +"I have never thought to hear my own tongue again, lad," he said, +holding out his hand. "Aye, I am English, and was one of Hawkins' men. +But how come you to be in a Spanish ship? I have heard our masters say, +when talking together, that there is war now between the English and +Spaniards; that is, war at home. There has always been war out on the +Spanish Main, but they know nothing of that." + +"I was made prisoner in a fight we had with the great Spanish Armada +off Gravelines," Geoffrey said. + +"We heard a year ago from some Spaniards they captured that a great +fleet was being prepared to conquer England; but no news has come to us +since. We are the only galley here, and as our benches were full, the +prisoners they have taken since were sent off at once to Algiers or +other ports, so we have heard nothing. But I told the Spaniards that if +Drake and Hawkins were in England when their great fleet got there, +they were not likely to have it all their own way. Tell me all about +it, lad. You do not know how hungry I am for news from home." + +Geoffrey related to the sailor the tale of the overthrow and +destruction of the Armada, which threw him into an ecstasy of +satisfaction. + +"These fellows," he said, pointing to the other galley-slaves, "have +for the last year been telling me that I need not call myself an +Englishman any more, for that England was only a part of Spain now. I +will open their eyes a bit in the morning. But I won't ask you any more +questions now; it is a shame to have made you talk so much after such a +clip as you have had on the head." + +Geoffrey turned round on the sand that formed their only bed, and was +soon asleep, the last sound he heard being the chuckling of his +companion over the discomfiture of the Armada. + +In the morning the guard came in with a great dish filled with a sort +of porridge of coarsely-ground grain, boiled with water. In a corner of +the yard were a number of calabashes, each composed of half a gourd. +The slaves each dipped one of these into the vessel, and so eat their +breakfast. Before beginning Geoffrey went to a trough, into which a jet +of water was constantly falling from a small pipe, bathed his head and +face, and took a long drink. + +"We may be thankful," the sailor, who had already told him that his +name was Stephen Boldero, said, "that someone in the old times laid on +that water. If it had not been for that I do not know what we should +have done, and a drink of muddy stuff once or twice a day is all we +should have got. That there pure water is just the saving of us." + +"What are we going to do now?" Geoffrey asked. "Does the galley go out +every day?" + +"Bless you, no; sometimes not once a month; only when a sail is made +out in sight, and the wind is light enough to give us the chance of +capturing her. Sometimes we go out on a cruise for a month at a time; +but that is not often. At other times we do the work of the town, mend +the roads, sweep up the filth, repair the quays; do anything, in fact, +that wants doing. The work, except in the galleys, is not above a man's +strength. Some men die under it, because the Spaniards lose heart and +turn sullen, and then down comes the whip on their backs, and they +break their hearts over it; but a man as does his best, and is cheerful +and willing, gets on well enough except in the galleys. + +"That is work; that is. There is a chap walks up and down with a whip, +and when they are chasing he lets it fall promiscuous, and even if you +are rowing fit to kill yourself you do not escape it; but on shore here +if you keep up your spirits things ain't altogether so bad. Now I have +got you here to talk to in my own lingo I feel quite a different man. +For although I have been here ten years, and can jabber in Spanish, I +have never got on with these fellows; as is only natural, seeing that I +am an Englishman and know all about their doings in the Spanish Main, +and hate them worse than poison. Well, our time is up, so I am off. I +do not expect they will make you work till your wounds are healed a +bit." + +This supposition turned out correct, and for the next week Geoffrey was +allowed to remain quietly in the yard when the gang went out to their +work. At the end of that time his wound had closed, and being heartily +sick of the monotony of his life, he voluntarily fell in by the side of +Boldero when the gang was called to work. The overseer was apparently +pleased at this evidence of willingness on the part of the young +captive, and said something to him in his own tongue. This his +companion translated as being an order that he was not to work too hard +for the present. + +"I am bound to say, mate, that these Moors are, as a rule, much better +masters than the Spaniards. I have tried them both, and I would rather +be in a Moorish galley than a Spanish one by a long way, except just +when they are chasing a ship, and are half wild with excitement. These +Moors are not half bad fellows, while it don't seem to me that a +Spaniard has got a heart in him. Then again, I do not think they are +quite so hard on Englishmen as they are on Spaniards; for they hate the +Spaniards because they drove them out of their country. Once or twice I +have had a talk with the overseer when he has been in a special good +humour, and he knows we hate the Spaniards as much as they do, and that +though they call us all Christian dogs, our Christianity ain't a bit +like that of the Spaniards. I shall let him know the first chance I +have that you are English too, and I shall ask him to let you always +work by the side of me." + +As Stephen Boldero had foretold, Geoffrey did not find his work on +shore oppressively hard. He did his best, and as he and his companion +always performed a far larger share of work than that done by any two +of the Spaniards, they gained the good-will of their overlooker, who, +when a fortnight later the principal bey of the place sent down a +request for two slaves to do some rough work in his garden, selected +them for the work. + +"Now we will just buckle to, lad," Stephen Boldero said. "This bey is +the captain of the corsair, and he can make things a deal easier for us +if he chooses; so we will not spare ourselves. He had one of the men up +there two years ago, and kept him for some months, and the fellow found +it so hard when he came back here again that he pined and died off in +no time." + +A guard took them to the bey's house, which stood on high ground behind +the town. The bey came out to examine the men chosen for his work. + +"I hear," he said, "that you are both English, and hate the Spaniards +as much as we do. Well, if I find you work well, you will be well +treated; if not, you will be sent back at once. Now, come with me, and +I shall show you what you have to do." + +The high wall at the back of the garden had been pulled down, and the +bey intended to enlarge the inclosure considerably. + +"You are first," he said, "to dig a foundation for the new wall along +that line marked out by stakes. When that is done you will supply the +masons with stone and mortar. When the wall is finished the new ground +will all have to be dug deeply and planted with shrubs, under the +superintendence of my gardener. While you are working here you will not +return to the prison, but will sleep in that out-house in the garden." + +"You shall have no reason to complain of our work," Boldero said. "We +Englishmen are no sluggards, and we do not want a man always looking +after us as those lazy Spaniards do." + +As soon as they were supplied with tools Geoffrey and his companion set +to work. The trench for the foundations had to be dug three feet deep; +and though the sun blazed fiercely down upon them, they worked +unflinchingly. From time to time the bey's head servant came down to +examine their progress, and occasionally watched them from among the +trees. At noon he bade them lay aside their tools and come into the +shed, and a slave boy brought them out a large dish of vegetables, with +small pieces of meat in it. + +"This is something like food," Stephen said as he sat down to it. "It +is ten years since such a mess as this has passed my lips. I do not +wonder that chap fell ill when he got back to prison if this is the +sort of way they fed him here." + +That evening the Moorish overseer reported to the bey that the two +slaves had done in the course of the day as much work as six of the +best native labourers could have performed, and that without his +standing over them or paying them any attention whatever. Moved by the +report, the bey himself went down to the end of the garden. + +"It is wonderful," he said, stroking his beard. "Truly these Englishmen +are men of sinews. Never have I seen so much work done by two men in a +day. Take care of them, Mahmoud, and see that they are well fed; the +willing servant should be well cared for." + +The work went steadily on until the wall was raised, the ground dug, +and the shrubs planted. It was some months before all this was done, +and the two slaves continued to attract the observation and good-will +of the bey by their steady and cheerful labour. Their work began soon +after sunrise, and continued until noon. Then they had three hours to +themselves to eat their mid-day meal and dose in the shed, and then +worked again until sunset. The bey often strolled down to the edge of +the trees to watch them, and sometimes even took guests to admire the +way in which these two Englishmen, although ignorant that any eyes were +upon them, performed their work. + +His satisfaction was evinced by the abundance of food supplied them, +their meal being frequently supplemented by fruit and other little +luxuries. Severely as they laboured, Geoffrey and his companion were +comparatively happy. Short as was the time that the former had worked +with the gang, he appreciated the liberty he now enjoyed, and +especially congratulated himself upon being spared the painful life of +a galley-slave at sea. As to Boldero, the change from the prison with +the companions he hated, its degrading work, and coarse and scanty +food, made a new man of him. + +He had been but two-and-twenty when captured by the Spaniards, and was +now in the prime of life and strength. The work, which had seemed very +hard to Geoffrey at first, was to him but as play, while the +companionship of his countryman, his freedom from constant +surveillance, the absence of all care, and the abundance and excellence +of his food, filled him with new life; and the ladies of the boy's +household often sat and listened to the strange songs that rose from +the slaves toiling in the garden. + +As the work approached its conclusion Geoffrey and his companion had +many a talk over what would next befall them. There was one reason only +that weighed in favour of the life with the slave-gang. In their +present position there was no possibility whatever, so far as they +could discern, of effecting their escape; whereas, as slaves, should +the galley in which they rowed be overpowered by any ship it attacked, +they would obtain their freedom. The chance of this, however, was +remote, as the fast-rowing galleys could almost always make their +escape should the vessel they attacked prove too strong to be captured. + +When the last bed had been levelled and the last shrub planted the +superintendent told them to follow him into the house, as the bey was +desirous of speaking with them. They found him seated on a divan. + +"Christians," he said, "I have watched you while you have been at work, +and truly you have not spared yourselves in my service, but have +laboured for me with all your strength, well and willingly. I see now +that it is true that the people of your nation differ much from the +Spaniards, who are dogs. + +"I see that trust is to be placed in you, and were you but true +believers I would appoint you to a position where you could win credit +and honour. As it is, I cannot place you over believers in the prophet; +but neither am I willing that you should return to the gang from which +I took you. I will, therefore, leave you free to work for yourselves. +There are many of my friends who have seen you labouring, and will give +you employment. It will be known in the place that you are under my +protection, and that any who insult or ill-treat you will be severely +punished. Should you have any complaint to make, come freely to me and +I will see that justice is done you. + +"This evening a crier will go through the place proclaiming that the +two English galley-slaves have been given their freedom by me, and will +henceforth live in the town without molestation from anyone, carrying +on their work and selling their labour like true believers. The crier +will inform the people that the nation to which you belong is at war +with our enemies the Spaniards, and that, save as to the matter of your +religion, you are worthy of being regarded as friends by all good +Moslems. My superintendent will go down with you in the morning. I have +ordered him to hire a little house for you and furnish it with what is +needful, to recommend you to your neighbours, and to give you a purse +of piastres with which to maintain yourselves until work comes to you." + +Stephen Boldero expressed the warmest gratitude, on the part of his +companion and himself, to the bey for his kindness. + +"I have done but simple justice," the bey said, "and no thanks are +necessary. Faithful work should have its reward, and as you have done +to me so I do to you." + +The next morning as they were leaving, a female slave presented them +with a purse of silver, the gift of the bey's wife and daughters, who +had often derived much pleasure from the songs of the two captives. The +superintendent conducted them to a small hut facing the sea. It was +furnished with the few articles that were, according to native ideas, +necessary for comfort. There were cushions on the divan of baked clay +raised about a foot above the floor, which served as a sofa during the +day and as a bed at night. There was a small piece of carpet on the +floor and a few cooking utensils on a shelf, and some dishes of burnt +clay; and nothing more was required. There was, however, a small chest, +in which, after the superintendent had left, they found two sets of +garments as worn by the natives. + +"This is a comfort indeed," Geoffrey said. "My clothes are all in rags, +and as for yours the less we say about them the better. I shall feel +like a new man in these things." + +"I shall be glad myself," Stephen agreed, "for the clothes they give +the galley-slaves are scarce decent for a Christian man to wear. My +consolation has been that if they had been shocked by our appearance +they would have given us more clothes; but as they did not mind it +there was no reason why I should. Still it would be a comfort to be +cleanly and decent again." + +For the first few days the natives of the place looked askance at these +Christians in their midst, but the bey's orders had been peremptory +that no insults should be offered to them. Two days after their +liberation one of the principal men of the place sent for them and +employed them in digging the foundations for a fountain, and a deep +trench of some hundred yards in length for the pipe for bringing water +to it. After that they had many similar jobs, receiving always the +wages paid to regular workmen, and giving great satisfaction by their +steady toil. Sometimes when not otherwise engaged they went out in +boats with fishermen, receiving a portion of the catch in payment of +their labours. + +So some months passed away. Very frequently they talked over methods of +Escape. The only plan that seemed at all possible was to take a boat +and make out to sea; but they knew that they would be pursued, and if +overtaken would revert to their former life at the galleys, a change +which would be a terrible one indeed after the present life of freedom +and independence. They knew, too, that they might be days before +meeting with a ship, for all traders in the Mediterranean hugged the +northern shores as much as possible in order to avoid the dreaded +corsairs, and there would be a far greater chance of their being +recaptured by one of the Moorish cruisers than of lighting upon a +Christian trader. + +"It is a question of chance," Stephen said, "and when the chance comes +we will seize it; but it is no use our giving up a life against which +there is not much to be said, unless some fair prospect of escape +offers itself to us." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +THE ESCAPE. + + +"In one respect," Geoffrey said, as they were talking over their chance +of escape, "I am sorry that the bey has behaved so kindly to us." + +"What is that?" Stephen Boldero asked in surprise. + +"Well, I was thinking that were it not for that we might manage to +contrive some plan of escape in concert with the galley-slaves, get +them down to the shore here, row off to the galley, overpower the three +or four men who live on board her, and make off with her. Of course we +should have had to accumulate beforehand a quantity of food and some +barrels of water, for I have noticed that when they go out they always +take their stores on board with them, and bring on shore on their +return what has not been consumed. Still, I suppose that could be +managed. However, it seems to me that our hands are tied in that +direction by the kindness of the bey. After his conduct to us it would +be ungrateful in the extreme for us to carry off his galley." + +"So it would, Geoffrey. Besides I doubt whether the plan would succeed. +You may be sure the Spaniards are as jealous as can be of the good +fortune that we have met with, and were we to propose such a scheme to +them the chances are strongly in favour of one of them trying to better +his own position by denouncing us. I would only trust them as far as I +can see them. No, if we ever do anything it must be done by ourselves. +There is no doubt that if some night when there is a strong wind +blowing from the south-east we were to get on board one of these +fishing-boats, hoist a sail, and run before it, we should not be far +off from the coast of Spain before they started to look for us. But +what better should we be there? We can both talk Spanish well enough, +but we could not pass as Spaniards. Besides, they would find out soon +enough that we were not Catholics, and where should we be then? Either +sent to row in their galleys or clapped into the dungeons of the +Inquisition, and like enough burnt alive at the stake. That would be +out of the frying-pan into the fire with vengeance." + +"I think we might pass as Spaniards," Geoffrey said; "for there is a +great deal of difference between the dialects of the different +provinces, and confined as you have been for the last ten years with +Spanish sailors you must have caught their way of talking. Still, I +agree with you it will be better to wait for a bit longer for any +chance that may occur rather than risk landing in Spain again, where +even if we passed as natives we should have as hard work to get our +living as we have here, and with no greater chance of making our way +home again." + +During the time that they had been captives some three or four vessels +had been brought in by the corsair. The men composing the crews had +been either sold as slaves to Moors or Arabs in the interior or sent to +Algiers, which town lay over a hundred miles to the east. They were of +various nationalities, Spanish, French, and Italian, as the two friends +learned from the talk of the natives, for they always abstained from +going near the point where the prisoners were landed, as they were +powerless to assist the unfortunate captives in any way, and the sight +of their distress was very painful to them. + +One day, however, they learned from the people who were running down to +the shore to see the captives landed from a ship that had been brought +in by the corsair during the night, that there were two or three women +among the captives. This was the first time that any females had been +captured since their arrival at the place, for women seldom travelled +far from their homes in those days except the wives of high officials +journeying in great ships that were safe from the attack of the Moorish +corsairs. + +"Let us go down and see them," Boldero said. "I have not seen the face +of a white woman for nine years." + +"I will go if you like," Geoffrey said. "They will not guess that we +are Europeans, for we are burnt as dark as the Moors." + +They went down to the landing-place. Eight men and two women were +landed from the boat. These were the sole survivors of the crew. + +"They are Spaniards," Boldero said. "I pity that poor girl. I suppose +the other woman is her servant." + +The girl, who was about sixteen years of age, was very pale, and had +evidently been crying terribly. She did not seem to heed the cries and +threats with which the townspeople as usual assailed the newly-arrived +captives, but kept her eyes fixed upon one of the captives who walked +before her. + +"That is her father, no doubt," Geoffrey said. "It is probably her last +look at him. Come away, Stephen; I am awfully sorry we came here. I +shall not be able to get that girl's face out of my mind for I don't +know how long." + +Without a word they went back to their hut. They had no particular work +that day. Geoffrey went restlessly in and out, sometimes pacing along +the strand, sometimes coming in and throwing himself on the divan. +Stephen Boldero went on quietly mending a net that had been damaged the +night before, saying nothing, but glancing occasionally with an amused +look at his companion's restless movements, Late in the afternoon +Geoffrey burst out suddenly: "Stephen, we must try and rescue that girl +somehow from her fate." + +"I supposed that was what it was coming to," Boldero said quietly. +"Well, let me hear all about it. I know you have been thinking it over +ever since morning. What are your ideas?" + +"I do not know that I have any ideas beyond getting her and her father +down to a boat and making off." + +"Well, you certainly have not done much if you haven't got farther than +that," Stephen said drily. "Now, if you had spent the day talking it +over with me instead of wandering about like one out of his mind, we +should have got a great deal further than that by this time. However, I +have been thinking for you. I know what you young fellows are. As soon +as I saw that girl's face and looked at you I was dead certain there +was an end of peace and quietness, and that you would be bent upon some +plan of getting her off. It did not need five minutes to show that I +was right; and I have been spending my time thinking, while you have +thrown yours away in fidgeting. + +"Well, I think it is worth trying. Of course it will be a vastly more +difficult job getting the girl and her father away than just taking a +boat and sailing off as we have often talked of doing. Then, on the +other hand, it would altogether alter our position afterwards. By his +appearance and hers I have no doubt he is a well-to-do trader, perhaps +a wealthy one. He walked with his head upright when the crowd were +yelling and cursing, and is evidently a man of courage and +determination. Now, if we had reached the Spanish coast by ourselves we +should have been questioned right and left, and, as I have said all +along, they would soon have found that we were not Spaniards, for we +could not have said where we came from, or given our past history, or +said where our families lived. But it would be altogether different if +we landed with them. Every one would be interested about them. We +should only be two poor devils of sailors who had escaped with them, +and he would help to pass it off and get us employment; so that the +difficulty that has hitherto prevented us from trying to escape is very +greatly diminished. Now, as to getting them away. Of course she has +been taken up to the bey's, and no doubt he will send her as a present +to the bey of Algiers. I know that is what has been done several times +before when young women have been captured. + +"I have been thinking it over, and I do not see a possibility of +getting to speak to her as long as she is at the bey's. I do not see +that it can be done anyhow. She will be indoors most of the time, and +if she should go into the garden there would be other women with her. +Our only plan, as far as I can see at present, would be to carry her +off from her escort on the journey. I do not suppose she will have more +than two, or at most three, mounted men with her, and we ought to be +able to dispose of them. As to her father, the matter is comparatively +easy. We know the ways of the prison, and I have no doubt we can get +him out somehow; only there is the trouble of the question of time. She +has got to be rescued and brought back and hidden somewhere till +nightfall, he has got to be set free the same evening, and we have to +embark early enough to be well out of sight before daylight; and maybe +there will not be a breath of wind stirring. It is a tough job, +Geoffrey, look at it which way you will." + +"It is a tough job," Geoffrey agreed. "I am afraid the escort would be +stronger than you think. A present of this kind to the bey is regarded +as important, and I should say half a dozen horsemen at least will be +sent with her. In that case an attempt at rescue would be hopeless. We +have no arms, and if we had we could not kill six mounted men; and if +even one escaped, our plans would be all defeated. The question is, +would they send her by land? It seems to me quite as likely that they +might send her by water." + +"Yes, that is likely enough, Geoffrey. In that case everything would +depend upon the vessel he sent her in. If it is the great galley there +is an end of it; if it is one of their little coasters it might be +managed. We are sure to learn that before long. The bey might keep her +for a fortnight or so, perhaps longer, for her to recover somewhat from +her trouble and get up her good looks again, so as to add to the value +of the present. If she were well and bright she would be pretty enough +for anything. In the meantime we can arrange our plans for getting her +father away. Of course if she goes with a big escort on horseback, or +if she goes in the galley, there is an end of our plans. I am ready to +help you, Geoffrey, if there is a chance of success; but I am not going +to throw away my life if there is not, and unless she goes down in a +coaster there is an end of the scheme." + +"I quite agree to that," Geoffrey replied; "we cannot accomplish +impossibilities." + +They learned upon the following day that three of the newly-arrived +captives were to take the places of the galley-slaves who had been +killed in the capture of the Spanish ship, which had defended itself +stoutly, and that the others were to be sold for work in the interior. + +"It is pretty certain," Boldero said, "that the trader will not be one +of the three chosen for the galley. The work would break him down in a +month. That makes that part of the business easier, for we can get him +away on the journey inland, and hide him up here until his daughter is +sent off." + +Geoffrey looked round the bare room. + +"Well, I do not say as how we could hide him here," Boldero said in +answer to the look, "but we might hide him somewhere among the sand- +hills outside the place, and take him food at night." + +"Yes, we might do that," Geoffrey agreed. "That could be managed easily +enough, I should think, for there are clumps of bushes scattered all +over the sand-hills half a mile back from the sea. The trouble will be +if we get him here, and find after all that we cannot rescue his +daughter." + +"That will make no difference," Boldero said. "In that case we will +make off with him alone. Everything else will go on just the same. Of +course, I should be very sorry not to save the girl; but, as far as we +are concerned, if we save the father it will answer our purpose." + +Geoffrey made no reply. Just at that moment his own future was a very +secondary matter, in comparison, to the rescue of this unhappy Spanish +girl. + +Geoffrey and his companion had been in the habit of going up +occasionally to the prison. They had won over the guard by small +presents, and were permitted to go in and out with fruit and other +little luxuries for the galley-slaves. They now abstained from going +near the place, in order that no suspicion might fall upon them after +his escape of having had any communication with the Spanish trader. + +Shortly after the arrival of the captives two merchants from the +interior came down, and Geoffrey learned that they had visited the +prison, and had made a bargain with the bey for all the captives except +those transferred to the galley. The two companions had talked the +matter over frequently, and had concluded it was best that only one of +them should be engaged in the adventure, for the absence of both might +be noticed. After some discussion it was agreed that Geoffrey should +undertake the task, and that Boldero should go alone to the house where +they were now at work, and should mention that his friend was unwell, +and was obliged to remain at home for the day. + +As they knew the direction in which the captives would be taken +Geoffrey started before daybreak, and kept steadily along until he +reached a spot where it was probable they would halt for the night. It +was twenty miles away, and there was here a well of water and a grove +of trees. Late in the afternoon he saw the party approaching. It +consisted of the merchants, two armed Arabs, and the five captives, all +of whom were carrying burdens. They were crawling painfully along, +overpowered by the heat of the sun, by the length of the journey, and +by the weight they carried. Several times the Arabs struck them heavily +with their sticks to force them to keep up. + +Geoffrey retired from the other side of the clump of trees, and lay +down in a depression of the sand-hills until darkness came on, when he +again entered the grove, and crawling cautiously forward made his way +close up to the party. A fire was blazing, and a meal had been already +cooked and eaten. The traders and the two Arabs were sitting by the +fire; the captives were lying extended on the ground. Presently, at the +command of one of the Arabs, they rose to their feet and proceeded to +collect some more pieces of wood for the fire. As they returned the +light fell on the gray hair of the man upon whom Geoffrey had noticed +that the girl's eyes were fixed. + +He noted the place where he lay down, and had nothing to do now but to +wait until the party were asleep. He felt sure that no guard would be +set, for any attempt on the part of the captives to escape would be +nothing short of madness. There was nowhere for them to go, and they +would simply wander about until they died of hunger and exhaustion, or +until they were recaptured, in which case they would be almost beaten +to death. In an hour's time the traders and their men lay down by the +fire, and all was quiet. Geoffrey crawled round until he was close to +the Spaniard. He waited until he felt sure that the Arabs were asleep, +and then crawled up to him. The man started as he touched him. + +"Silence, senor," Geoffrey whispered in Spanish; "I am a friend, and +have come to rescue you." + +"I care not for life; a few days of this work will kill me, and the +sooner the better. I have nothing to live for. They killed my wife the +other day, and my daughter is a captive in their hands. I thank you, +whoever you are, but I will not go." + +"We are going to try to save your daughter too," Geoffrey whispered; +"we have a plan for carrying you both off." + +The words gave new life to the Spaniard. + +"In that case, sir, I am ready. Whoever you are whom God has sent to my +aid I will follow you blindly, whatever comes of it." + +Geoffrey crawled away a short distance, followed by the Spaniard. As +soon as they were well beyond the faint light now given out by the +expiring fire they rose to their feet, and gaining the track took their +way on the backward road. As soon as they were fairly away, Geoffrey +explained to the Spaniard who he was, and how he had undertaken to +endeavour to rescue him. The joy and gratitude of the Spaniard were too +deep for words, and he uttered his thanks in broken tones. When they +had walked about a mile Geoffrey halted. + +"Sit down here," he said. "I have some meat and fruit here and a small +skin of water. We have a long journey before us, for we must get near +the town you left this morning before daybreak, and you must eat to +keep up your strength." + +"I did not think," the Spaniard said, "when we arrived at the well, +that I could have walked another mile had my life depended upon it. Now +I feel a new man, after the fresh hope you have given me. I no longer +feel the pain of my bare feet or the blisters the sun has raised on my +naked back. I am struggling now for more than life--for my daughter. +You shall not find me fail, sir." + +All night they toiled on. The Spaniard kept his promise, and utterly +exhausted as he was, and great as was the pain in his limbs, held on +bravely. With the first dawn of morning they saw the line of the sea +before them. They now turned off from the track, and in another half +hour the Spaniard took shelter in a clump of bushes in a hollow, while +Geoffrey, having left with him the remainder of the supply of +provisions and water, pursued his way and reached the hut just as the +sun was shining in the east, and without having encountered a single +person. + +"Well, have you succeeded?" Boldero asked eagerly, as he entered. + +"Yes; I have got him away. He is in hiding within a mile of this place. +He kept on like a hero. I was utterly tired myself, and how he managed +to walk the distance after what he had gone through in the day is more +than I can tell. His name is Mendez. He is a trader in Cadiz, and owns +many vessels. He was on his way to Italy, with his wife and daughter, +in one of his own ships, in order to gratify the desire of his wife to +visit the holy places at Rome. She was killed by a cannon-shot during +the fight, and his whole heart is now wrapped up in his daughter. And +now, Stephen, I must lie down and sleep. You will have to go to work +alone to-day again, and can truly say that I am still unfit for +labour." + +Four days later it became known in the little town that a messenger had +arrived from the merchant who bought the slaves from the bey, saying +that one of them had made his escape from their first halting-place. + +"The dog will doubtless die in the desert," the merchant wrote; "but if +he should find his way down, or you should hear of him as arriving at +any of the villages, I pray you to send him up to me with a guard. I +will so treat him that it will be a lesson to my other slaves not to +follow his example." + +Every evening after dark Geoffrey went out with a supply of food and +water to the fugitive. For a week he had no news to give him as to his +daughter; but on the eighth night he said that he and his companion had +that morning been sent by the bey on board the largest of the coasting +vessels in the port, with orders to paint the cabins and put them in a +fit state for the reception of a personage of importance. + +"This is fortunate, indeed," Geoffrey went on. "No doubt she is +intended for the transport of your daughter. Her crew consists of a +captain and five men, but at present they are living ashore; and as we +shall be going backwards and forwards to her, we ought to have little +difficulty in getting on board and hiding away in the hold before she +starts. I think everything promises well for the success of our +scheme." + +The bey's superintendent came down the next day to see how matters were +going on on board the vessel. The painting was finished that evening, +and the next day two slaves brought down a quantity of hangings and +cushions, which Geoffrey and his companion assisted the superintendent +to hang up and place in order. Provisions and water had already been +taken on board, and they learnt that the party who were to sail in her +would come off early the next morning. + +At midnight Geoffrey, Boldero, and the Spaniard came down to the little +port, embarked in a fisherman's boat moored at the stairs, and +noiselessly rowed off to the vessel. They mounted on to her deck +barefooted. Boldero was the last to leave the boat, giving her a +vigorous push with his foot in the direction of the shore, from which +the vessel was but some forty yards away. They descended into the hold, +where they remained perfectly quiet until the first light of dawn +enabled them to see what they were doing, and then moved some baskets +full of vegetables, and concealed themselves behind them. + +A quarter of an hour later they heard a boat come alongside, and the +voices of the sailors. Then they heard the creaking of cordage as the +sails were let fall in readiness for a start. Half an hour later +another boat came alongside. There was a trampling of feet on the deck +above them, and the bey's voice giving orders. A few minutes later the +anchor was raised, there was more talking on deck, and then they heard +a boat push off, and knew by the rustle of water against the planks +beside them that the vessel was under way. + +The wind was light and the sea perfectly calm, and beyond the slight +murmur of the water, those below would not have known that the ship was +in motion. It was very hot down in the hold, but fortunately the crew +had not taken the trouble to put on the hatches, and at times a faint +breath of air could be felt below. Geoffrey and his companion talked +occasionally in low tones; but the Spaniard was so absorbed by his +anxiety as to the approaching struggle, and the thought that he might +soon clasp his daughter to his arms, that he seldom spoke. + +No plans could be formed as to the course they were to take, for they +could not tell whether those of the crew off duty would retire to sleep +in the little forecastle or would lie down on deck. Then, too, they +were ignorant as to the number of men who had come on board with the +captive. The overseer had mentioned the day before that he was going, +and it was probable that three or four others would accompany him. +Therefore they had to reckon upon ten opponents. Their only weapons +were three heavy iron bolts, some two feet long. These Boldero had +purchased in exchange for a few fish, when a prize brought in was +broken up as being useless for the purposes of the Moors. + +"What I reckon is," he said, "that you and I ought to be able to settle +two apiece of these fellows before they fairly know what is happening. +The Don ought very well to account for another. So that only leaves +five of them; and five against three are no odds worth speaking of, +especially when the five are woke up by a sudden attack, and ain't sure +how many there are against them. I don't expect much trouble over the +affair." + +"I don't want to kill more of the poor fellows than I can help," +Geoffrey said. + +"No more do I; but you see it's got to be either killing or being +killed, and I am perfectly certain which I prefer. Still, as you say, +if the beggars are at all reasonable I ain't for hurting them, but the +first few we have got to hit hard. When we get matters a little even, +we can speak them fair." + +The day passed slowly, and in spite of their bent and cramped position +Geoffrey and Stephen Boldero dozed frequently. The Spaniard never +closed an eye. He was quite prepared to take his part in the struggle; +and as he was not yet fifty years of age, his assistance was not to be +despised. But the light-hearted carelessness of his companions, who +joked under their breath, and laughed and eat unconcernedly with a +life-and-death struggle against heavy odds before them, surprised him +much. + +As darkness came on the party below became wakeful. Their time was +coming now, and they had no doubt whatever as to the result. Their most +formidable opponents would be the men who had come on board with the +bey's superintendent, as these, no doubt, would be fully armed. As for +the sailors, they might have arms on board, but these would not be +ready to hand, and it was really only with the guards they would have +to deal. + +"I tell you what I think would be a good plan, Stephen," Geoffrey said +suddenly. "You see, there is plenty of spare line down here; if we wait +until they are all asleep we can go round and tie their legs together, +or put ropes round their ankles and fasten them to ring-bolts. If we +could manage that without waking them, we might capture the craft +without shedding any blood, and might get them down into the hold one +after the other." + +"I think that is a very good plan," Stephen agreed. "I do not like the +thought of knocking sleeping men on the head any more than you do; and +if we are careful, we might get them all tied up before an alarm is +given. There, the anchor has gone down. I thought very likely they +would not sail at night. That is capital. You may be sure that they +will be pretty close inshore, and they probably will have only one man +on watch; and as likely as not not even one, for they will not dream of +any possible danger." + +For another two hours the sound of talk on deck went on, but at last +all became perfectly quiet. The party below waited for another half +hour, and then noiselessly ascended the ladder to the deck, holding in +one hand a cudgel, in the other a number of lengths of line cut about +six feet long. Each as he reached the deck lay down flat. The Spaniard +had been told to remain perfectly quiet while the other two went about +their task. + +First they crawled aft, for the bey's guards would, they knew, be +sleeping at that end, and working together they tied the legs of these +men without rousing them. The ropes could not be tightly pulled, as +this would at once have disturbed them. They were therefore fastened +somewhat in the fashion of manacles, so that although the men might +rise to their feet they would fall headlong the moment they tried to +walk. In addition other ropes were fastened to these and taken from one +man to another. Then their swords were drawn from the sheaths and their +knives from their sashes. + +The operation was a long one, as it had to be conducted with the +greatest care and caution. They then crept back to the hatchway and +told the Spaniard that the most formidable enemies had been made safe. + +"Here are a sword and a knife for you, senor; and now as we are all +armed I consider the ship as good as won, for the sailors are not +likely to make much resistance by themselves. However, we will secure +some of them. The moon will be up in half an hour, and that will be an +advantage to us." + +The captain and three of the sailors were soon tied up like the others. +Two men were standing in the bow of the vessel leaning against the +bulwarks, and when the moon rose it could be seen by their attitude +that both were asleep. + +"Now, we may as well begin," Geoffrey said. "Let us take those two +fellows in the bow by surprise. Hold a knife to their throats, and tell +them if they utter the least sound we will kill them. Then we will make +them go down into the forecastle and fasten them there." + +"I am ready," Stephen said, and they stole forward to the two sleeping +men. They grasped them suddenly by the throat and held a knife before +their eyes, Boldero telling them in a stern whisper that if they +uttered a cry they would be stabbed to the heart. Paralysed by the +sudden attack they did not make the slightest struggle, but accompanied +their unknown assailants to the forecastle and were there fastened in. +Joined now by the Spaniard, Geoffrey and his companion went aft and +roused one of the sleepers there with a threat similar to that which +had silenced the sailors. + +He was, however, a man of different stuff. He gave a loud shout and +grappled with Boldero, who struck him a heavy blow with his fist in the +face, and this for a moment silenced him; but the alarm being given, +the superintendent and the two men struggled to their feet, only +however to fall prostrate as soon as they tried to walk. + +"Lie quiet and keep silence!" Boldero shouted in a threatening voice. +"You are unarmed and at our mercy. Your feet are bound and you are +perfectly helpless. We do not wish to take your lives, but unless you +are quiet we shall be compelled to do so." + +The men had discovered by this time that their arms had gone, and were +utterly disconcerted by the heavy and unexpected fall they had just +had. Feeling that they were indeed at the mercy of their captors, they +lay quiet. + +"Now then," Boldero went on, "one at a time. Keep quiet, you rascals +there!" he broke off, shouting to the sailors who were rolling and +tumbling on the deck forward, "or I will cut all your throats for you. +Now then, Geoffrey, do you and the senor cut the rope that fastens that +man on the port side to his comrades. March him to the hatchway and +make him go down into the hold. Keep your knives ready and kill him at +once if he offers the slightest resistance." + +One by one the superintendent, the three guards, the captain and +sailors were all made to descend into the hold, and the hatches were +put over it and fastened down. + +"Now, senor," Geoffrey said, "we can spare you." + +The Spaniard hurried to the cabin, opened the door, and called out his +daughter's name. There was a scream of delight within as Dolores +Mendez, who had been awakened by the tumult, recognized her father's +voice, and leaping up from her couch threw herself into his arms. +Geoffrey and his companion now opened the door of the forecastle and +called the two sailors out. + +"Now," Boldero said, "if you want to save your lives you have got to +obey our orders. First of all fall to work and get up the anchor, and +then shake out the sails again. I will take the helm, Geoffrey, and do +you keep your eye on these two fellows. There is no fear of their +playing any tricks now that they see they are alone on deck, but they +might, if your back were turned, unfasten the hatches. However, I do +not think we need fear trouble that way, as for ought they know we may +have cut the throats of all the others." + +A few minutes later the vessel was moving slowly through the water with +her head to the north-west. + +"We must be out of sight of land if we can by the morning," Stephen +said, when Geoffrey two hours later came to take his place at the helm; +"at any rate until we have passed the place we started from. Once +beyond that it does not matter much; but it will be best either to keep +out of sight of land altogether, or else to sail pretty close to it, so +that they can see the boat is one of their own craft. We can choose +which we will do when we see which way the breeze sets in in the +morning." + +It came strongly from the south, and they therefore determined to sail +direct for Carthagena. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +A SPANISH MERCHANT. + + +As soon as the sails had been set, and the vessel was under way, the +Spaniard came out from the cabin. "My daughter is attiring herself, +senor," he said to Stephen Boldero, for Geoffrey was at the time at the +helm. "She is longing to see you, and to thank you for the inestimable +services you have rendered to us both. But for you I should now be +dying or dead, my daughter a slave for life in the palace of the bey. +What astonishes us both is, that such noble service should have been +rendered to us by two absolute strangers, and not strangers only, but +by Englishmen--a people with whom Spain is at war--and who assuredly +can have no reason to love us. How came you first to think of +interesting yourself on our behalf?" + +"To tell you the truth, senor," Stephen Boldero said bluntly, "it was +the sight of your daughter and not of yourself that made us resolve to +save you if possible, or rather, I should say, made my friend Geoffrey +do so. After ten years in the galleys one's heart gets pretty tough, +and although even I felt a deep pity for your daughter, I own it would +never have entered my mind to risk my neck in order to save her. But +Geoffrey is younger and more easily touched, and when he saw her as she +landed pale and white and grief-stricken, and yet looking as if her own +fate touched her less than the parting from you, my good friend +Geoffrey Vickars was well-nigh mad, and declared that in some way or +other, and at whatever risk to ourselves, you must both be saved. In +this matter I have been but a passive instrument in his hands; as +indeed it was only right that I should be, seeing that he is of gentle +blood and an esquire serving under Captain Vere in the army of the +queen, while I am but a rough sailor. What I have done I have done +partly because his heart was in the matter, partly because the +adventure promised, if successful, to restore me to freedom, and partly +also, senor, for the sake of your brave young daughter." + +"Ah, you are modest, sir," the Spaniard said. "You are one of those who +belittle your own good deeds. I feel indeed more grateful than I can +express to you as well as to your friend." + +The merchant's daughter now appeared at the door of the cabin. Her +father took her hand and led her up to Boldero. "This, Dolores, is one +of the two Englishmen who have at the risk of their lives saved me from +death and you from worse than death. Thank him, my child, and to the +end of your life never cease to remember him in your prayers." + +"I am glad to have been of assistance, senora," Boldero said as the +girl began to speak; "but as I have just been telling your father, I +have played but a small part in the business, it is my friend Don +Geoffrey Vickars who has been the leader in the matter. He saw you as +you landed at the boat, and then and there swore to save you, and all +that has been done has been under his direction. It was he who followed +and rescued your father, and I have really had nothing to do with the +affair beyond hiding myself in the hole and helping to tie up your +Moors." + +"Ah, sir," the girl said, laying her hands earnestly upon the sailor's +shoulder, "it is useless for you to try to lessen the services you have +rendered us. Think of what I was but an hour since--a captive with the +most horrible of all fates before me, and with the belief that my +father was dying by inches in the hands of some cruel task-master, and +now he is beside me and I am free. This has been done by two strangers, +men of a nation which I have been taught to regard as an enemy. It +seems to me that no words that I can speak could tell you even faintly +what I feel, and it is God alone who can reward you for what you have +done." + +Leaving Boldero the Spaniard and his daughter went to the stern, where +Geoffrey was standing at the helm. + +"My daughter and I have come to thank you, senor, for having saved us +from the worst of fates and restored us to each other. Your friend +tells me that it is to you it is chiefly due that this has come about, +for that you were so moved to pity at the sight of my daughter when we +first landed, that you declared at once that you would save her from +her fate at whatever risk to yourself, and that since then he has been +but following your directions." + +"Then if he says that, senor, he belies himself. I was, it is true, the +first to declare that we must save your daughter at any cost if it were +possible to do so; but had I not said so, I doubt not he would have +announced the same resolution. Since then we have planned every thing +together; and as he is older and more experienced than I am, it was +upon his opinion that we principally acted. We had long made up our +minds to escape when the opportunity came. Had it not been that we were +stirred into action by seeing your daughter in the hands of the Moors, +it might have been years before we decided to run the risks. Therefore +if you owe your freedom to us, to some extent we owe ours to you; and +if we have been your protectors so far, we hope that when we arrive in +Spain you will be our protectors there, for to us Spain is as much an +enemy's country as Barbary." + +"That you can assuredly rely upon," the trader replied. "All that I +have is at your disposal." + +For an hour they stood talking. Dolores said but little. She had felt +no shyness with the stalwart sailor, but to this youth who had done her +such signal service she felt unable so frankly to express her feelings +of thankfulness. + +By morning the coast of Africa was but a faint line on the horizon, and +the ship was headed west. Except when any alteration of the sails was +required, the two Moors who acted as the crew were made to retire into +the forecastle, and were there fastened in, Geoffrey and Boldero +sleeping by turns. + +After breakfast the little party gathered round the helm, and at the +request of Juan Mendez, Geoffrey and Stephen both related how it befell +that they had become slaves to the Moors. + +"Your adventures are both singular," the trader said when they had +finished. "Yours, Don Geoffrey, are extraordinary. It is marvellous +that you should have been picked up in that terrible fight, and should +have shared in all the perils of that awful voyage back to Spain +without its being ever suspected that you were English. Once landed in +the service as you say of Senor Burke, it is not so surprising that you +should have gone freely about Spain. But your other adventures are +wonderful, and you and your friend were fortunate indeed in succeeding +as you did in carrying off the lady he loved; and deeply they must have +mourned your supposed death on the deck of the Moorish galley. And now +tell me what are your plans when you arrive in Spain?" + +"We have no fixed plans, save that we hope some day to be able to +return home," Geoffrey said. "Stephen here could pass well enough as a +Spaniard when once ashore without being questioned, and his idea is, if +there is no possibility of getting on board an English or Dutch ship at +Cadiz, to ship on board a Spaniard, and to take his chance of leaving +her at some port at which she may touch. As for myself, although I +speak Spanish fluently, my accent would at once betray me to be a +foreigner. But if you will take me into your house for a time until I +can see a chance of escaping, my past need not be inquired into. You +could of course mention, were it asked, that I was English by birth, +but had sailed in the Armada with my patron, Mr. Burke, and it would be +naturally supposed that I was an exile from England." + +"That can certainly be managed," the trader said. "I fear that it will +be difficult to get you on board a ship either of your countrymen or of +the Hollanders; these are most closely watched lest fugitives from the +law or from the Inquisition should escape on board them. Still, some +opportunity may sooner or later occur; and the later the better pleased +shall I be, for it will indeed be a pleasure to me to have you with +me." + +In the afternoon Geoffrey said to Stephen, "I have been thinking, +Stephen, about the men in the hold, and I should be glad for them to +return to their homes. If they go with us to Spain they will be made +galley-slaves, and this I should not like, especially in the case of +the bey's superintendent. The bey was most kind to us, and this man +himself always spoke in our favour to him, and behaved well to us. I +think, therefore, that out of gratitude to the bey we should let them +go. The wind is fair, and there are, so far as I can see, no signs of +any change of weather. By to-morrow night the coast of Spain will be in +sight. I see no reason, therefore, why we should not be able to +navigate her until we get near the land, when Mendez can engage the +crew of some fishing-boat to take us into a port. If we put them into +the boat with plenty of water and provisions, they will make the coast +by morning; and as I should guess that we must at present be somewhere +abreast of the port from which we started, they will not be very far +from home when they land." + +"I have no objection whatever, Geoffrey. As you say we were not treated +badly, at any rate from the day when the bey had us up to his house; +and after ten years in the galleys, I do not wish my worst enemies such +a fate. We must, of course, be careful how we get them into the boat." + +"There will be three of us with swords and pistols, and they will be +unarmed," Geoffrey said. "We will put the two men now in the forecastle +into the boat first, and let the others come up one by one and take +their places. We will have a talk with the superintendent first, and +give him a message to the bey, saying that we are not ungrateful for +his kindness to us, but that of course we seized the opportunity that +presented itself of making our escape, as he would himself have done in +similar circumstances; nevertheless that as a proof of our gratitude to +him, we for his sake release the whole party on board, and give them +the means of safely returning." + +An hour later the boat, pulled by four oars, left the side of the ship +with the crew, the superintendent and guards, and the two women who had +come on board to attend upon Dolores upon the voyage. + +The next morning the vessel was within a few miles of the Spanish +coast. An hour later a fishing-boat was hailed, and an arrangement made +with the crew to take the vessel down to Carthagena, which was, they +learned, some fifty miles distant. The wind was now very light, and it +was not until the following day that they entered the port. As it was +at once perceived that the little vessel was Moorish in rigging and +appearance, a boat immediately came alongside to inquire whence she +came. + +Juan Mendez had no difficulty in satisfying the officer as to his +identity, he being well known to several traders in the town. His story +of the attack upon his ship by Barbary pirates, its capture, and his +own escape and that of his daughter by the aid of two Christian +captives, excited great interest as soon as it became known in the +town; for it was rare, indeed, that a captive ever succeeded in making +his escape from the hands of the Moors. It had already been arranged +that, in telling his story, the trader should make as little as +possible of his companions' share in the business, so that public +attention should not be attracted towards them. He himself with Dolores +at once disembarked, but his companions did not come ashore until after +nightfall. + +Stephen Boldero took a Spanish name, but Geoffrey retained his own, as +the story that he was travelling as a servant with Mr. Burke, a well- +known Irish gentleman who had accompanied the Armada, was sufficient to +account for his nationality. Under the plea that he was anxious to +return to Cadiz as soon as possible, Senor Mendez arranged for horses +and mules to start the next morning. He had sent off two trunks of +clothes to the ship an hour after he landed, and the two Englishmen +therefore escaped all observation, as they wandered about for an hour +or two after landing, and did not go to the inn where Mendez was +staying until it was time to retire to bed. + +The next morning the party started. The clothes that Geoffrey was +wearing were those suited to an employe in a house of business, while +those of Boldero were such as would be worn by the captain or mate of a +merchant vessel on shore. Both were supplied with arms, for although +the party had nothing to attract the cupidity of robbers beyond the +trunks containing the clothes purchased on the preceding day, and the +small amount of money necessary for their travel on the road, the +country was so infested by bands of robbers that no one travelled +unarmed. The journey to Cadiz was, however, accomplished without +adventure. + +The house of Senor Mendez was a large and comfortable one. Upon the +ground floor were his offices and store-rooms. He himself and his +family occupied the two next floors, while in those above his clerks +and employes lived. His unexpected return caused great surprise, and in +a few hours a number of acquaintances called to hear the story of the +adventures through which he had passed, and to condole with him on the +loss of his wife. At his own request Stephen Boldero had been given in +charge of the principal clerk, and a room assigned to him in the upper +story. + +"I shall be much more comfortable," he said, "among your people, Don +Mendez. I am a rough sailor, and ten years in the galleys don't improve +any manners a man may have had. If I were among your friends I would be +out of place and uncomfortable, and should always have to be bowing and +scraping and exchanging compliments, and besides they would soon find +out that my Spanish was doubtful. I talk a sailor's slang, but I doubt +if I should understand pure Spanish. Altogether, I should be very +uncomfortable, and should make you uncomfortable, and I would very much +rather take my place among the men that work for you until I can get on +board a ship again." + +Geoffrey was installed in the portion of the house occupied by the +merchant, and was introduced by him to his friends simply as the +English gentleman who had rescued him and his daughter from the hands +of the Moors, it being incidentally mentioned that he had sailed in the +Armada, and that he had fallen into the hands of the corsairs in the +course of a voyage made with his friend Mr. Burke to Italy. He at once +took his place as a friend and assistant of the merchant; and as the +latter had many dealings with Dutch and English merchants, Geoffrey was +able to be of considerable use to him in his written communications to +the captains of the various vessels of those nationalities in the port. + +"I think," the merchant said to him a fortnight after his arrival in +Cadiz, "that, if it would not go against your conscience, it would be +most advisable that you should accompany me sometimes to church. Unless +you do this, sooner or later suspicion is sure to be roused, and you +know that if you were once suspected of being a heretic, the +Inquisition would lay its hands upon you in no time." + +"I have no objection whatever," Geoffrey said. "Were I questioned I +should at once acknowledge that I was a Protestant; but I see no harm +in going to a house of God to say my prayers there, while others are +saying theirs in a different manner. There is no church of my own +religion here, and I can see no harm whatever in doing as you suggest." + +"I am glad to hear that that is your opinion," Senor Mendez said, "for +it is the one point concerning which I was uneasy. I have ordered a +special mass at the church of St. Dominic to-morrow, in thanksgiving +for our safe escape from the hands of the Moors, and it would be well +that you should accompany us there." + +"I will do so most willingly," Geoffrey said. "I have returned thanks +many times, but shall be glad to do so again in a house dedicated to +God's service." + +Accordingly the next day Geoffrey accompanied Don Mendez and his +daughter to the church of St. Dominic, and as he knelt by them wondered +why men should hate each other because they differed as to the ways and +methods in which they should worship God. From that time on he +occasionally accompanied Senor Mendez to the church, saying his prayers +earnestly in his own fashion, and praying that he might some day be +restored to his home and friends. + +He and the merchant had frequently talked over all possible plans for +his escape, but the extreme vigilance of the Spanish authorities with +reference to the English and Dutch trading ships seemed to preclude any +possibility of his being smuggled on board. Every bale and package was +closely examined on the quay before being sent off. Spanish officials +were on board from the arrival to the departure of each ship, and no +communication whatever was allowed between the shore and these vessels, +except in boats belonging to the authorities, every paper and document +passing first through their hands for examination before being sent on +board. The trade carried on between England, Holland, and Spain at the +time when these nations were engaged in war was a singular one; but it +was permitted by all three countries, because the products of each were +urgently required by the others. It was kept within narrow limits, and +there were frequent angry complaints exchanged between the English +government and that of Holland, when either considered the other to be +going beyond that limit. + +Geoffrey admitted to himself that he might again make the attempt to +return to England, by taking passage as before in a ship bound for +Italy, but he knew that Elizabeth was negotiating with Philip for +peace, and thought that he might as well await the result. He was, +indeed, very happy at Cadiz, and shrank from the thought of leaving it. + +Stephen Boldero soon became restless, and at his urgent request Juan +Mendez appointed him second mate on board one of his ships sailing for +the West Indies, his intention being to make his escape if an +opportunity offered; but if not, he preferred a life of activity to +wandering aimlessly about the streets of Cadiz. He was greatly grieved +to part from Geoffrey, and promised that, should he ever reach England, +he would at once journey down to Hedingham, and report his safety to +his father and mother. + +"You will do very well here, Master Geoffrey," he said. "You are quite +at home with all the Spaniards, and it will not be very long before you +speak the language so well that, except for your name, none would take +you for a foreigner. You have found work to do, and are really better +off here than you would be starving and fighting in Holland. Besides," +he said with a sly wink, "there are other attractions for you. Juan +Mendez treats you as a son, and the senorita knows that she owes +everything to you. You might do worse than settle here for life. Like +enough you will see me back again in six months' time, for if I see no +chance of slipping off and reaching one of the islands held by the +bucaneers, I shall perforce return in the ship I go out in." + +At parting Senor Mendez bestowed a bag containing five hundred gold +pieces upon Stephen Boldero as a reward for the service he had rendered +him. + +Geoffrey missed him greatly. For eighteen months they had been +constantly together, and it was the sailor's companionship and +cheerfulness that had lightened the first days of his captivity; and +had it not been for his advice and support he might now have been +tugging at an oar in the bey's corsair galley. Ever since they had been +at Cadiz he had daily spent an hour or two in his society; for when +work was done they generally went for a walk together on the +fortifications, and talked of England and discussed the possibility of +escape. After his departure he was thrown more than before into the +society of the merchant and his daughter. The feeling that Dolores had, +when he first saw her, excited within him had changed its character. +She was very pretty now that she had recovered her life and spirits, +and she made no secret of the deep feeling of gratitude she entertained +towards him. One day, three months after Stephen's departure, Senor +Mendez, when they were alone together, broached the subject on which +his thoughts had been turned so much of late. + +"Friend Geoffrey," he said, "I think that I am not mistaken in +supposing that you have an affection for Dolores. I have marked its +growth, and although I would naturally have rather bestowed her upon a +countryman, yet I feel that you have a right to her as having saved her +from the horrible fate that would have undoubtedly befallen her, and +that it is not for me, to whom you have restored her, besides saving my +own life, to offer any objection. As to her feelings, I have no doubt +whatever. Were you of my religion and race, such a match would afford +me the greatest happiness. As it is I regret it only because I feel +that some day or other it will lead to a separation from me. It is +natural that you should wish to return to your own country, and as this +war cannot go on for ever, doubtless in time some opportunity for doing +so will arrive. This I foresee and must submit to, but if there is +peace I shall be able occasionally to visit her in her home in England. +I naturally hope that it will be long before I shall thus lose her. She +is my only child, and I shall give as her dower the half of my +business, and you will join me as an equal partner. When the war is +over you can, if you wish, establish yourself in London, and thence +carry on and enlarge the English and Dutch trade of our house. I may +even myself settle there. I have not thought this over at present, nor +is there any occasion to do so. I am a wealthy man and there is no need +for me to continue in business, and I am not sure when the time comes I +shall not prefer to abandon my country rather than be separated from my +daughter. At any rate for the present I offer you her hand and a share +in my business." + +Geoffrey expressed in suitable terms the gratitude and delight he felt +at the offer. It was contrary to Spanish notions that he should receive +from Dolores in private any assurance that the proposal in which she +was so largely concerned was one to which she assented willingly, but +her father at once fetched her in and formally presented her to +Geoffrey as his promised wife, and a month later the marriage was +solemnized at the church of St. Dominic. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +IVRY. + + +The day after the capture of Breda Sir Francis Vere sent for Lionel +Vickars to his quarters. Prince Maurice and several of his principal +officers were there, and the prince thanked him warmly for the share he +had taken in the capture of the town. + +"Captain Heraugiere has told me," he said, "that the invention of the +scheme that has ended so well is due as much to you as to him, that you +accompanied him on the reconnoitring expedition and shared in the +dangers of the party in the barge. I trust Sir Francis Vere will +appoint you to the first ensigncy vacant in his companies, but should +there be likely to be any delay in this I will gladly give you a +commission in one of my own regiments." + +"I have forestalled your wish, prince," Sir Francis said, "and have +this morning given orders that his appointment shall be made out as +ensign in one of my companies, but at present I do not intend him to +join. I have been ordered by the queen to send further aid to help the +King of France against the League. I have already despatched several +companies to Brittany, and will now send two others. I would that my +duties permitted me personally to take part in the enterprise, for the +battle of the Netherlands is at present being fought on the soil of +France; but this is impossible. Several of my friends, however, +volunteers and others, will journey with the two companies, being +desirous of fighting under the banner of Henry of Navarre. Sir Ralph +Pimpernel, who is married to a French Huguenot lady and has connections +at the French court, will lead them. I have spoken to him this morning, +and he will gladly allow my young friend here to accompany him, I think +that it is the highest reward I can give him, to afford him thus an +opportunity of seeing stirring service; for I doubt not that in a very +short time a great battle will be fought. We know that Alva has sent +eighteen hundred of the best cavalry of Flanders to aid the League, and +he is sure to have given orders that they are to be back again as soon +as possible. How do you like the prospect, Lionel?" + +Lionel warmly expressed his thanks to Sir Francis Vere for his +kindness, and said that nothing could delight him more than to take +part in such an enterprise. + +"I must do something at any rate to prove my gratitude for your share +in the capture of this city," Prince Maurice said; "and will send you +presently two of the best horses of those we have found in the +governor's stables, together with arms and armour suitable to your rank +as an officer of Sir Francis Vere." + +Upon the following morning a party of ten knights and gentlemen, +including Lionel Vickars, rode to Bergen-op-Zoom. The two companies, +which were drawn from the garrison of that town, had embarked the +evening before in ships that had come from England to transport them to +France. Sir Ralph Pimpernel and his party at once went on board, and as +soon as their horses were embarked the sails were hoisted. Four days' +voyage took them to the mouth of the Seine, and they landed at Honfleur +on the south bank of the river. There was a large number of ships in +port, for the Protestant princes of Germany were, as well as England, +sending aid to Henry of Navarre, and numbers of gentlemen and +volunteers were flocking to his banners. + +For the moment Henry IV. represented in the eyes of Europe the +Protestant cause. He was supported by the Huguenots of France and by +some of the Catholic noblemen and gentry. Against him were arrayed the +greater portion of the Catholic nobles, the whole faction of the Guises +and the Holy League, supported by Philip of Spain. + +The party from Holland disembarked at mid-day on the 9th of March. +Hearing rumours that a battle was expected very shortly to take place, +Sir Ralph Pimpernel started at once with his mounted party for Dreux, +which town was being besieged by Henry, leaving the two companies of +foot to press on at their best speed behind him. The distance to be +ridden was about sixty miles, and late at night on the 10th they rode +into a village eight miles from Dreux. Here they heard that the Duke of +Mayenne, who commanded the force of the League, was approaching the +Seine at Mantes with an army of ten thousand foot and four thousand +horse. + +"We must mount at daybreak, gentlemen," Sir Ralph Pimpernel said, "or +the forces of the League will get between us and the king. It is +evident that we have but just arrived in time, and it is well we did +not wait for our foot-men." + +The next morning they mounted early and rode on to the royal camp near +Dreux. Here Sir Ralph Pimpernel found Marshal Biron, a relation of his +wife, who at once took him to the king. + +"You have just arrived in time, Sir Ralph," the king said when Marshal +Biron introduced him, "for to-morrow, or at latest the day after, we +are likely to try our strength with Mayenne. You will find many of your +compatriots here. I can offer you but poor hospitality at present, but +hope to entertain you rarely some day when the good city of Paris opens +its gates to us." + +"Thanks, sire," Sir Ralph replied; "but we have come to fight and not +to feast." + +"I think I can promise you plenty of that at any rate," the king said. +"You have ten gentlemen with you, I hear, and also that there are two +companies of foot from Holland now on their way up from Honfleur." + +"They landed at noon the day before yesterday, sire, and will probably +be up to-morrow." + +"They will be heartily welcome, Sir Ralph. Since Parma has sent so +large a force to help Mayenne it is but right that Holland, which is +relieved of the presence of these troops, should lend me a helping +hand." + +Quarters were found for the party in a village near the camp; for the +force was badly provided with tents, the king's resources being at a +very low ebb; he maintained the war, indeed, chiefly by the loans he +received from England and Germany. The next day several bodies of +troops were seen approaching the camp. A quarter of an hour later the +trumpets blew; officers rode about, ordering the tents to be levelled +and the troops to prepare to march. A messenger from Marshal Biron rode +at full speed into the village, where many of the volunteers from +England and Germany, besides the party of Sir Ralph Pimpernel, were +lodged. + +"The marshal bids me tell you, gentlemen, that the army moves at once. +Marshal D'Aumont has fallen back from Ivry; Mayenne is advancing. The +siege will be abandoned at present, and we march towards Nonancourt, +where we shall give battle to-morrow if Mayenne is disposed for it." + +The camps were struck and the waggons loaded, and the army marched to +St. Andre, a village situated on an elevated plain commanding a view of +all the approaches from the country between the Seine and Eure. + +"This is a fine field for a battle," Sir Ralph said, as the troops +halted on the ground indicated by the camp-marshals. "It is splendid +ground for cavalry to act, and it is upon them the brunt of the +fighting will fall We are a little stronger in foot; for several +companies from Honfleur, our own among them, have come up this morning, +and I hear we muster twelve thousand, which is a thousand more than +they say Mayenne has with him. But then he has four thousand cavalry to +our three thousand; and Parma's regiments of Spaniards, Walloons, and +Italian veterans are far superior troops to Henry's bands of riders, +who are mostly Huguenot noblemen and gentlemen, with their armed +retainers, tough and hardy men to fight, as they have shown themselves +on many a field, but without any of the discipline of Parma's troopers. + +"If Parma himself commanded yonder army I should not feel confident of +the result; but Mayenne, though a skilful general, is slow and +cautious, while Henry of Navarre is full of fire and energy, and brave +almost to rashness. We are to muster under the command of the king +himself. He will have eight hundred horse, formed into six squadrons, +behind him, and upon these will, I fancy, come the chief shock of the +battle. He will be covered on each side by the English and Swiss +infantry; in all four thousand strong. + +"Marshal Biron will be on the right with five troops of horse and four +regiments of French infantry; while on the left will be the troops of +D'Aumont, Montpensier, Biron the younger, D'Angouleme, and De Givry, +supported in all by two regiments of French infantry, one of Swiss, and +one of German. The marshal showed us the plan of battle last night in +his tent. It is well balanced and devised." + +It was late in the evening before the whole of the force had reached +the position and the tents were erected. One of these had been placed +at the disposal of Sir Ralph's party. Sir Ralph and four of his +companions had been followed by their mounted squires, and these +collected firewood, and supplied the horses with forage from the sacks +they carried slung from their saddles, while the knights and gentlemen +themselves polished up their arms and armour, so as to make as brave a +show as possible in the ranks of the king's cavalry. + +When they had eaten their supper Lionel Vickars strolled through the +camp, and was amused at the contrast presented by the various groups. +The troops of cavalry of the French nobles were gaily attired; the +tents of the officers large and commodious, with rich hangings and +appointments. The sound of light-hearted laughter came from the groups +round the camp-fires, squires and pages moved about thickly, and it was +evident that comfort, and indeed luxury, were considered by the +commanders as essential even upon a campaign. The encampments of the +German, Swiss, and English infantry were of far humbler design. The +tents of the officers were few in number, and of the simplest form and +make. A considerable portion of the English infantry had been drawn +from Holland, for the little army there was still the only body of +trained troops at Elizabeth's disposal. + +The Swiss and Germans were for the most part mercenaries. Some had been +raised at the expense of the Protestant princes, others were paid from +the sums supplied from England. The great proportion of the men were +hardy veterans who had fought under many banners, and cared but little +for the cause in which they were fighting, provided they obtained their +pay regularly and that the rations were abundant and of good quality. + +The French infantry regiments contained men influenced by a variety of +motives. Some were professional soldiers who had fought in many a field +during the long wars that had for so many years agitated France, others +were the retainers of the nobles who had thrown in their cause with +Henry, while others again were Huguenot peasants who were fighting, not +for pay, but in the cause of their religion. + +The cavalry were for the most part composed of men of good family, +relations, connections, or the superior vassals of the nobles who +commanded or officered them. The king's own squadrons were chiefly +composed of Huguenot gentlemen and their mounted retainers; but with +these rode many foreign volunteers like Sir Ralph Pimpernel's party, +attracted to Henry's banner either from a desire to aid the Protestant +cause or to gain military knowledge and fame under so brave and able a +monarch, or simply from the love of excitement and military ardour. + +The camp of this main body of cavalry or "battalia," as the body on +whom the commander of our army chiefly relied for victory was called, +was comparatively still and silent. The Huguenot gentlemen, after the +long years of persecution to which those of their religion had been +exposed, were for the most part poor. Their appointments were simple, +and they fought for conscience' sake, and went into battle with the +stern enthusiasm that afterwards animated Cromwell's Ironsides. + +It was not long before the camp quieted down; for the march had been a +long one, and they would be on their feet by daybreak The king himself, +attended by Marshals D'Aumont and Biron, had gone through the whole +extent of the camp, seen that all was in order, that the troops had +everywhere received their rations, and that the officers were +acquainted with the orders for the morrow. He stayed a short time in +the camp of each regiment and troop, saying a few words of +encouragement to the soldiers, and laughing and joking with the +officers. He paused a short time and chatted with Sir Ralph Pimpernel, +who, at his request, introduced each of his companions to him. + +Lionel looked with interest and admiration at the man who was regarded +as the champion of Protestantism against Popery, and who combined in +himself a remarkable mixture of qualities seldom found existing in one +person. He was brave to excess and apparently reckless in action, and +yet astute, prudent, and calculating in council. With a manner frank, +open, and winning, he was yet able to match the craftiest of opponents +at their own weapons of scheming and duplicity. The idol of the +Huguenots of France, he was ready to purchase the crown of France at +the price of accepting the Catholic doctrines, for he saw that it was +hopeless for him in the long run to maintain himself against the +hostility of almost all the great nobles of France, backed by the great +proportion of the people and aided by the pope and the Catholic powers, +so long as he remained a Protestant. But this change of creed was +scarcely even foreseen by those who followed him, and it was the +apparent hopelessness of his cause, and the gallantry with which he +maintained it, that attracted the admiration of Europe. + +Henry's capital was at the time garrisoned by the troops of the pope +and Spain. The great nobles of France, who had long maintained a sort +of semi-independence of the crown, were all against him, and were +calculating on founding independent kingdoms. He himself was +excommunicated. The League were masters of almost the whole of France, +and were well supplied with funds by the pope and the Catholic powers, +while Henry was entirely dependent for money upon what he could borrow +from Queen Elizabeth and the States of Holland. But no one who listened +to the merry laugh of the king as he chatted with the little group of +English gentlemen would have thought that he was engaged in a desperate +and well-nigh hopeless struggle, and that the following day was to be a +decisive one as to his future fortunes. + +"Well, gentlemen," he said as he turned his horse to ride away, "I must +ask you to lie down as soon as possible. As long as the officers are +awake and talking the men cannot sleep; and I want all to have a good +night's rest. The enemy's camp is close at hand, and the battle is sure +to take place at early dawn." + +As the same orders were given everywhere, the camp was quiet early, and +before daylight the troops were called under arms and ranged in the +order appointed for them to fight in. + +The army of the League was astir in equally good time. In its centre +was the battalia, composed of six hundred splendid cavalry, all +noblemen of France, supported by a column of three hundred Swiss and +two thousand French infantry. On the left were six hundred French +cuirassiers and the eighteen hundred troops of Parma, commanded by +Count Egmont. They were supported by six regiments of French and +Lorrainers, and two thousand Germans. The right wing was composed of +three regiments of Spanish lancers, two troops of Germans, four hundred +cuirassiers, and four regiments of infantry. + +When the sun rose and lighted up the contending armies, the difference +between their appearance was very marked. That of the League was gay +with the gilded armour, waving plumes, and silken scarfs of the French +nobles, whose banners fluttered brightly in the air, while the Walloons +and Flemish rivalled their French comrades in the splendour of their +appointments. In the opposite ranks there was neither gaiety nor show. +The Huguenot nobles and gentlemen, who had for so many years been +fighting for life and religion, were clad in armour dinted in a hundred +battle-fields; and while the nobles of the League were confident of +victory, and loud in demanding to be led against the foe, Henry of +Navarre and his soldiers were kneeling, praying to the God of battles +to enable them to bear themselves well in the coming fight. Henry of +Navarre wore in his helmet a snow-white plume, which he ordered his +troops to keep in view, and to follow wherever they should see it +waving, in case his banner went down. + +Artillery still played but a small part in battles on the field, and +there were but twelve pieces on the ground, equally divided between the +two armies. These opened the battle, and Count Egmont, whose cavalry +had suffered from the fire of the Huguenot cannon, ordered a charge, +and the splendid cavalry of Parma swept down upon the right wing of +Henry. The cavalry under Marshal Biron were unable to withstand the +shock and were swept before them, and Egmont rode on right up to the +guns and sabred the artillerymen. Almost at the same moment the German +riders under Eric of Brunswick, the Spanish and French lancers, charged +down upon the centre of the Royal Army. The rout of the right wing +shook the cavalry in the centre. They wavered, and the infantry on +their flanks fell back, but the king and his officers rode among them, +shouting and entreating them to stand firm. The ground in their front +was soft and checked the impetuosity of the charge of the Leaguers, and +by the time they reached the ranks of the Huguenots they were broken +and disordered, and could make no impression whatever upon them. + +As soon as the charge was repulsed, Henry set his troops in motion, and +the battalia charged down upon the disordered cavalry of the League. +The lancers and cuirassiers were borne down by the impetuosity of the +charge, and Marshal Biron, rallying his troops, followed the king's +white plume into the heart of the battle. Egmont brought up the cavalry +of Flanders to the scene, and was charging at their head when he fell +dead with a musket-ball through the heart. Brunswick went down in the +fight, and the shattered German and Walloon horse were completely +overthrown and cut to pieces by the furious charges of the Huguenot +cavalry. + +At one time the victorious onset was checked by the disappearance of +the king's snow-white plumes, and a report ran through the army that +the king was killed. They wavered irresolutely. The enemy, regaining +courage from the cessation of their attacks, were again advancing, when +the king reappeared bareheaded and covered with dust and blood, but +entirely unhurt. He addressed a few cheerful words to his soldiers, and +again led a charge. It was irresistible; the enemy broke and fled in +the wildest confusion hotly pursued by the royalist cavalry, while the +infantry of the League, who had so far taken no part whatever in the +battle, were seized with a panic, threw away their arms, and sought +refuge in the woods in their rear. + +Thus the battle was decided only by the cavalry, the infantry taking no +part in the fight on either side. Eight hundred of the Leaguers either +fell on the battle-field or were drowned in crossing the river in their +rear. The loss of the royalists was but one-fourth that number. Had the +king pushed forward upon Paris immediately after the battle, the city +would probably have surrendered without a blow; and the Huguenot +leaders urged this course upon him. Biron and the other Catholics, +however, argued that it was better to undertake a regular siege, and +the king yielded to this advice, although the bolder course would have +been far more in accordance with his own disposition. + +He was probably influenced by a variety of motives. In the first place +his Swiss mercenaries were in a mutinous condition, and refused to +advance a single foot unless they received their arrears of pay, and +this Henry, whose chests were entirely empty, had no means of +providing. In the second place he was at the time secretly in +negotiation with the pope for his conversion, and may have feared to +give so heavy a blow to the Catholic cause as would have been effected +by the capture of Paris following closely after the victory of Ivry. At +any rate he determined upon a regular siege. Moving forward he seized +the towns of Lagny on the Marne, and Corbeil on the Seine, thus +entirely cutting off the food supply of Paris. + +Lionel Vickars had borne his part in the charges of the Huguenot +cavalry, but as the company to which he belonged was in the rear of the +battalia, he had no personal encounters with the enemy. + +After the advance towards Paris the duties of the cavalry consisted +entirely in scouting the country, sweeping in provisions for their own +army, and preventing supplies from entering Paris. No siege operations +were undertaken, the king relying upon famine alone to reduce the city. +Its population at the time the siege commenced was estimated at +400,000, and the supply of provisions to be sufficient for a month. It +was calculated therefore that before the League could bring up another +army to its relief, it must fall by famine. + +But no allowance had been made for the religious enthusiasm and +devotion to the cause of the League that animated the population of +Paris. Its governor, the Duke of Nemours, brother of Mayenne, aided by +the three Spanish delegates, the Cardinal Gaetano, and by an army of +priests and monks, sustained the spirits of the population; and though +the people starved by thousands, the city resisted until towards the +end of August. In that month the army of the League, united with twelve +thousand foot and three thousand horse from the Netherlands under Parma +himself, advanced to its assistance; while Maurice of Holland, with a +small body of Dutch troops and reinforcements from England, had +strengthened the army of the king. + +The numbers of the two armies were not unequal. Many of the French +nobles had rallied round Henry after his victory, and of his cavalry +four thousand were nobles and their retainers who served at their own +expense, and were eager for a battle. Parma himself had doubts as to +the result of the conflict. He could rely upon the troops he himself +had brought, but had no confidence in those of the League; and when +Henry sent him a formal challenge to a general engagement, Parma +replied that it was his custom to refuse a combat when a refusal seemed +advantageous for himself, and to offer battle whenever it suited his +purpose to fight. + +For seven days the two armies, each some twenty-five thousand strong, +lay within a mile or two of each other. Then the splendid cavalry of +Parma moved out in order of battle, with banners flying, and the +pennons of the lances fluttering in the wind. The king was delighted +when he saw that the enemy were at last advancing to the fight. He put +his troops at once under arms, but waited until the plan of the enemy's +battle developed itself before making his dispositions. But while the +imposing array of cavalry was attracting the king's attention, Parma +moved off with the main body of his army, threw a division across the +river on a pontoon bridge, and attacked Lagny on both sides. + +When Lagny was first occupied some of Sir Ralph Pimpernel's party were +appointed to take up their quarters there, half a company of the +English, who had come with them from Holland, were also stationed in +the town, the garrison being altogether 1200 strong. Lionel's horse had +received a bullet wound at Ivry, and although it carried him for the +next day or two, it was evident that it needed rest and attention, and +would be unfit to carry his rider for some time. Lionel had no liking +for the work of driving off the cattle of the unfortunate landowners +and peasants, however necessary it might be to keep the army supplied +with food, and was glad of the excuse that his wounded horse afforded +him for remaining quietly in the town when his comrades rode out with +the troop of cavalry stationed there. + +It happened that the officer in command of the little body of English +infantry was taken ill with fever, and Sir Ralph Pimpernel requested +Lionel to take his place. This he was glad to do, as he was more at +home at infantry work than with cavalry. The time went slowly, but +Lionel, who had comfortable quarters in the house of a citizen, did not +find it long. The burgher's family consisted of his wife and two +daughters, and these congratulated themselves greatly upon having an +officer quartered upon them who not only acted as a protection to them +against the insolence of the rough soldiery, but was courteous and +pleasant in his manner, and tried in every way to show that he regarded +himself as a guest and not a master. + +After the first week's stay he requested that instead of having his +meals served to him in a room apart he might take them with the family. +The girls were about Lionel's age, and after the first constraint wore +off he became great friends with them; and although at first he had +difficulty in making himself understood, he rapidly picked up a little +French, the girls acting as his teachers. + +"What do you English do here?" the eldest of them asked him when six +weeks after his arrival they were able to converse fairly in a mixture +of French and Spanish. "Why do you not leave us French people to fight +out our quarrels by ourselves?" + +"I should put it the other way," Lionel laughed. "Why don't you French +people fight out your quarrels among yourselves instead of calling in +foreigners to help you? It is because the Guises and the League have +called in the Spaniards to fight on the Catholic side that the English +and Dutch have come to help the Huguenots. We are fighting the battle +of our own religion here, not the battle of Henry of Navarre." + +"I hate these wars of religion," the girl said. "Why can we not all +worship in our own way?" + +"Ah, that is what we Protestants want to know, Mademoiselle Claire; +that is just what your people won't allow. Did you not massacre the +Protestants In France on the eve of St. Bartholomew? and have not the +Spaniards been for the last twenty years trying to stamp out with fire +and sword the new religion in the Low Countries? We only want to be +left alone." + +"But your queen of England kills the Catholics." + +"Not at all," Lionel said warmly; "that is only one of the stories they +spread to excuse their own doings. It is true that Catholics in England +have been put to death, and so have people of the sect that call +themselves Anabaptists; but this has been because they had been engaged +in plots against the queen, and not because of their religion. The +Catholics of England for the most part joined as heartily as the +Protestants in the preparations for the defence of England in the time +of the Armada. For my part, I cannot understand why people should +quarrel with each other because they worship God in different ways." + +"It is all very bad, I am sure," the girl said; "France has been torn +to pieces by these religious wars for years and years. It is dreadful +to think what they must be suffering in Paris now." + +"Then why don't they open their gates to King Henry instead of starving +themselves at the orders of the legate of the pope and the agent of +Philip of Spain? I could understand if there was another French prince +whom they wanted as king instead of Henry of Navarre. We fought for +years in England as to whether we would have a king from the house of +York or the house of Lancaster, but when it comes to choosing between a +king of your own race and a king named for you by Philip of Spain, I +can't understand it." + +"Never mind, Master Vickars. You know what you are fighting for, don't +you?" + +"I do; I am fighting here to aid Holland. Parma is bringing all his +troops to aid the Guises here, and while they are away the Dutch will +take town after town, and will make themselves so strong that when +Parma goes back he will find the nut harder than ever to crack." + +"How long will Paris hold out, think you, Master Vickars? They say that +provisions are well-nigh spent." + +"Judging from the way in which the Dutch towns held on for weeks and +weeks after, as it seemed, all supplies were exhausted, I should say +that if the people of Paris are as ready to suffer rather than yield as +were the Dutch burghers, they may hold on for a long time yet It is +certain that no provisions can come to them as long as we hold +possession of this town, and so block the river." + +"But if the armies of Parma and the League come they may drive you +away, Master Vickars." + +"It is quite possible, mademoiselle; we do not pretend to be +invincible, but I think there will be some tough fighting first." + +As the weeks went on Lionel Vickars came to be on very intimate terms +with the family. The two maid-servants shared in the general liking for +the young officer. He gave no more trouble than if he were one of the +family, and on one or two occasions when disturbances were caused by +the ill-conduct of the miscellaneous bands which constituted the +garrison, he brought his half company of English soldiers at once into +the house, and by his resolute attitude prevented the marauders from +entering. + +When Parma's army approached Sir Ralph Pimpernel with the cavalry +joined the king, but Lionel shared in the disappointment felt by all +the infantry of the garrison of Lagny that they could take no share in +the great battle that was expected. Their excitement rose high while +the armies lay watching each other. From the position of the town down +by the river neither army was visible from its walls, and they only +learned when occasional messengers rode in how matters were going on. + +One morning Lionel was awoke by a loud knocking at his door. "What is +it?" he shouted, as he sat up in bed. + +"It is I--Timothy Short, Master Vickars. The sergeant has sent me to +wake you in all haste. The Spaniards have stolen a march upon us. They +have thrown a bridge across the river somewhere in the night, and most +all their army stands between us and the king, while a division are +preparing to besiege the town on the other side." Lionel was hastily +throwing on his clothes and arming himself while the man was speaking. + +"Tell the sergeant," he said, "to get the men under arms. I will be +with him in a few minutes." + +When Lionel went out he found that the household was already astir. + +"Go not out fasting," his host said. "Take a cup of wine and some food +before you start. You may be some time before you get an opportunity of +eating again if what they say is true." + +"Thank you heartily," Lionel replied as he sat down to the table, on +which some food had already been placed; "it is always better to fight +full than fasting." + +"Hark you!" the bourgeois said in his ear; "if things go badly with you +make your way here. I have a snug hiding-place, and I shall take refuge +there with my family if the Spaniards capture the town. I have heard of +their doings in Holland, and that when they capture a town they spare +neither age nor sex, and slay Catholics as well as Protestants; +therefore I shall take refuge till matters have quieted down and order +is restored. I shall set to work at once to carry my valuables there, +and a goodly store of provisions. My warehouseman will remain in charge +above. He is faithful and can be trusted, and he will tell the +Spaniards that I am a good Catholic, and lead them to believe that I +fled with my family before the Huguenots entered the town." + +"Thank you greatly," Lionel replied; "should the need arise I will take +advantage of your kind offer. But it should not do so. We have twelve +hundred men here, and half that number of citizens have kept the +Spaniards at bay for months before towns no stronger than this in +Holland. We ought to be able to defend ourselves here for weeks, and +the king will assuredly come to our relief in two or three days at the +outside." + +Upon Lionel sallying out he found the utmost confusion and disorder +reigning. The commandant was hurriedly assigning to the various +companies composing the garrison their places upon the walls. Many of +the soldiers were exclaiming that they had been betrayed, and that it +were best to make terms with the Spaniards at once. The difference +between the air of quiet resolution that marked the conduct of the +people and troops at Sluys and the excitement manifested here struck +Lionel unpleasantly. The citizens all remained in their houses, afraid +lest the exultation they felt at the prospect of deliverance would be +so marked as to enrage the soldiery. Lionel's own company was standing +quietly and in good order in the market-place, and as soon as he +received orders as to the point that he should occupy on the walls +Lionel marched them away. + +In half an hour the Spanish batteries, which had been erected during +the night, opened fire upon several points of the walls. The town was +ill provided with artillery, and the answer was feeble, and before +evening several breaches had been effected, two of the gates blown in, +and the Spaniards advanced to the assault. Lionel and his company, with +one composed of Huguenot gentlemen and their retainers and another of +Germans, defended the gate at which they were posted with great +bravery, and succeeded in repulsing the attacks of the Spaniards time +after time. The latter pressed forward in heavy column, only to recoil +broken and shattered from the archway, which was filled high with their +dead. The defenders had just succeeded in repulsing the last of these +attacks, when some soldiers ran by shouting "All is lost, the Spaniards +have entered the town at three points!" + +The German company at once disbanded and scattered. The Huguenot noble +said to Lionel: "I fear that the news is true; listen to the shouts and +cries in the town behind us. I will march with my men and see if there +is any chance of beating back the Spaniards; if not it were best to lay +down our arms and ask for quarter. Will you try to hold this gate until +I return?" + +"I will do so," Lionel said; "but I have only about thirty men left, +and if the Spaniards come on again we cannot hope to repulse them." + +"If I am not back in ten minutes it will be because all is lost," the +Huguenot said; "and you had then best save yourself as you can." + +But long before the ten minutes passed crowds of fugitives ran past, +and Lionel learned that great numbers of the enemy had entered, and +that they were refusing quarter and slaying all they met. + +"It is useless to stay here longer to be massacred," he said to his +men. "I should advise you to take refuge in the churches, leaving your +arms behind you as you enter. It is evident that further resistance is +useless, and would only cost us our lives. The Spaniards are twenty to +one, and it is evident that all hope of resistance is at an end." The +men were only too glad to accept the advice, and, throwing down their +arms, hurried away. Lionel sheathed his sword, and with the greatest +difficulty made his way through the scene of wild confusion to the +house where he had lodged. The doors of most of the houses were fast +closed, and the inhabitants wore hurling down missiles of all kinds +from the upper windows upon their late masters. The triumphant shouts +of the Spaniards rose loud in the air, mingled with despairing cries +and the crack of firearms. Lionel had several narrow escapes from the +missiles thrown from the windows and roofs, but reached the house of +the merchant safely. The door was half opened. + +"Thanks be to heaven that you have come. I had well-nigh given you up, +and in another minute should have closed the door. The women are all +below, but I waited until the last minute for you." + +Barring the door Lionel's host led the way downstairs into a great +cellar, which served as a warehouse, and extended under the whole +house. He made his way through the boxes and bales to the darkest +corner of the great cellar. Here he pulled up a flag and showed another +narrow stair, at the bottom of which a torch was burning. Bidding +Lionel descend he followed him, lowered the flag behind him, and then +led the way along a narrow passage, at the end of which was a door. +Opening it Lionel found himself in an arched chamber. Two torches were +burning, and the merchant's wife and daughters and the two female +domestics were assembled. There was a general exclamation of gladness +as Lionel entered. + +"We have been greatly alarmed," the mercer's wife said, "lest you +should not be able to gain the house, Master Vickars; for we heard that +the Spaniards are broken in at several points." + +"It was fortunately at the other end of the town to that at which I was +stationed," Lionel said; "and I was just in time. You have a grand +hiding-place here. It looks like the crypt of a church." + +"That is just what it is," the mercer said. "It was the church of a +monastery that stood here a hundred years ago. The monks then moved +into a grander place in Paris, and the monastery and church which +adjoined our house were pulled down and houses erected upon the site. +My grandfather, knowing of the existence of the crypt, thought that it +might afford a rare hiding-place in case of danger, and had the passage +driven from his cellar into it. Its existence could never be suspected; +for as our cellar extends over the whole of our house, as can easily be +seen, none would suspect that there was a hiding-place without our +walls. There are three or four chambers as large as this. One of them +is stored with all my choicest silks and velvets, another will serve as +a chamber for you and me. I have enough provisions for a couple of +months, and even should they burn the house down we are safe enough +here." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +STEENWYK. + + +Three days passed, and then a slight noise was heard as of the trap- +door being raised. Lionel drew his sword. + +"It is my servant, no doubt," the merchant said, "he promised to come +and tell me how things went as soon as he could get an opportunity to +come down unobserved. We should hear more noise if it were the +Spaniards." Taking a light he went along the passage, and returned +immediately afterwards followed by his man; the latter had his head +bound up, and carried his arm in a sling. An exclamation of pity broke +from the ladies. + +"You are badly hurt, Jacques. What has happened?" + +"It is well it is no worse, mistress," he replied. "The Spaniards are +fiends, and behaved as if they were sacking a city of Dutch Huguenots +instead of entering a town inhabited by friends. For an hour or two +they cut and slashed, pillaged and robbed. They came rushing into the +shop, and before I could say a word one run me through the shoulder and +another laid my head open. It was an hour or two before I came to my +senses. I found the house turned topsy-turvy; everything worth taking +had gone, and what was not taken was damaged. I tied up my head and arm +as best I could, and then sat quiet in a corner till the din outside +began to subside. The officers did their best, I hear, and at last got +the men into order. Numbers of the townsfolk have been killed, and +every one of the garrison was butchered. I tell you, mistress, it is +better to have ten Huguenot armies in possession one after another than +one Spanish force, though the latter come as friends and co- +religionists. Well, as soon as things quieted down the soldiers were +divided among the houses of the townsfolk, and we have a sergeant and +ten men quartered above; but half an hour ago they were called away on +some duty, and I took the opportunity to steal down here." + +"Have you told them that we were away, Jacques?" + +"No, monsieur; no one has asked me about it. They saw by the pictures +and shrines that you were good Catholics, and after the first outburst +they have left things alone. But if it is not too dreary for the ladies +here, I should advise you to wait for a time and see how things go +before you show yourselves." + +"That is my opinion too, Jacques. We can wait here for another two +months if need be. Doubtless, unless the Huguenots show signs of an +intention to attack the town, only a small garrison will be left here, +and it may be that those in our house will be withdrawn." + +"Do you think it will be possible for me to make my escape, Jacques?" +Lionel asked. + +"I should think so, sir. Ever since the Spaniards entered the town +boats with provisions for Paris have been coming along in great +numbers. From what I hear the soldiers say there is no chance of a +battle at present, for the Huguenot army have drawn off to a distance, +seeing that Paris is revictualled and that there is no chance of taking +it. They say that numbers of the French lords with the Huguenot army +have drawn off and are making for their homes. At any rate there is no +fear of an attack here, and the gates stand open all day. Numbers of +the townsfolk have been to Paris to see friends there, and I should say +that if you had a disguise you could pass out easily enough." + +The question was discussed for some time. Lionel was very anxious to +rejoin the army, and it was finally settled that Jacques should the +next night bring him down a suit of his own clothes, and the first time +the soldiers were all away should fetch him out, accompany him through +the gates of the town, and act as his guide as far as he could. + +The next night Lionel received the clothes. Two days later Jacques came +down early in the morning to say that the soldiers above had just gone +out on duty. Lionel at once assumed his disguise, and with the +heartiest thanks for the great service they had rendered him took his +leave of the kind merchant and his family. Jacques was charged to +accompany him as far as possible, and to set him well on his way +towards the Huguenot army, for Lionel's small knowledge of French would +be detected by the first person who accosted him. On going out into the +street Lionel found that there were many peasants who had come in to +sell fowls, eggs, and vegetables in the town, and he and Jacques passed +without a question through the gates. + +Jacques had, the evening before, ascertained from the soldiers the +position of Parma's army. A long detour had to be made, and it was two +days before they came in sight of the tents of Henry's camp. They had +observed the greatest precautions on their way, and had only once +fallen in with a troop of Parma's cavalry. These had asked no +questions, supposing that Jacques and his companion were making their +way from Paris to visit their friends after the siege, there being +nothing in their attire to attract attention, still less suspicion. The +peasants they met on their way eagerly demanded news from Paris, but +Jacques easily satisfied them by saying that they had had a terrible +time, and that many had died of hunger, but that now that the river was +open again better times had come. When within a couple of miles of the +army Jacques said goodbye to Lionel, who would have rewarded him +handsomely for his guidance, but Jacques would not accept money. + +"You are the master's guest," he said, "and you saved his house from +plunder when your people were in possession. He and my mistress would +never forgive me if I took money from you. I am well content in having +been able to assist so kind a young gentleman." + +When Lionel arrived at the camp he soon found his way to Sir Ralph +Pimpernel's tent, where he was received as one from the dead. There was +no difficulty in providing himself again with armour and arms, for of +these there were abundance--the spoils of Ivry--in the camp. When he +was reclothed and rearmed Sir Ralph took him to the king's tent, and +from him Henry learned for the first time the circumstances that had +attended the capture of Lagny. + +"And so they put the whole garrison to the sword," the king said with +indignation. "I will make any Spaniards that fall in my hands pay +dearly for it!" + +Henry had indeed been completely out-generalled by his opponent. While +he had been waiting with his army for a pitched battle Parma had +invested Lagny, and there were no means of relieving it except by +crossing the river in the face of the whole army of the enemy, an +enterprise impossible of execution. As soon as Lagny had fallen +provisions and ammunition were at once poured into Paris, two thousand +boat-loads arriving in a single day. + +King Henry's army immediately fell to pieces. The cavalry having +neither food nor forage rode off by hundreds every day, and in a week +but two thousand out of his six thousand horse remained with him. The +infantry also, seeing now no hope of receiving their arrears of pay, +disbanded in large numbers, and after an unsuccessful attempt to carry +Paris by a night attack, the king fell back with the remnant of his +force. Corbeil was assaulted and captured by Parma, and the two great +rivers of Paris were now open. + +If Parma could have remained with his army in France, the cause of +Henry of Navarre would have been lost. But sickness was making ravages +among his troops. Dissensions broke out between the Spaniards, +Italians, and Netherlanders of his army and their French allies, who +hated the foreigners, though they had come to their assistance. Lastly, +his presence was urgently required in the Netherlands, where his work +was as far from being done as ever. Therefore to the dismay of the +Leaguers he started early in November on his march back. + +No sooner did he retire than the king took the field again, recaptured +Lagny and Corbeil, and recommenced the siege of Paris, while his +cavalry hung upon the rear and flanks of Parma's army and harassed them +continually, until they crossed the frontier, where the duke found that +affairs had not improved during his absence. + +Lionel had obtained permission to accompany the force which captured +Lagny, and as soon as they entered the town hurried to the mercer's +house. He found Jacques in possession, and learned that the family had +weeks before left the crypt and reoccupied the house, but had again +taken refuge there when the Huguenots attacked the town. Lionel at once +went below, and was received with delight. He was now able to repay to +some extent the obligations he had received from them, by protecting +them from all interference by the new captors of the town, from whom +the majority of the citizens received harsh treatment for the part they +had taken in attacking the garrison when the Spaniards first entered. + +Prince Maurice's visit to the camp of Henry had been but a short one; +and as soon as Parma had effected the relief of Paris, and there was no +longer a chance of a great battle being fought, he returned to Holland, +followed after the recapture of Lagny by Sir Ralph Pimpernel and the +few survivors of his party, who were all heartily weary of the long +period of inaction that had followed the victory at Ivry. + +They found that during their absence there had been little doing in the +Netherlands, save that Sir Francis Vere, with a small body of English +infantry and cavalry, had stormed some formidable works the Spaniards +had thrown up to prevent relief being given to Recklinghausen, which +they were besieging. He effected the relief of the town and drove off +the besiegers. He then attacked and captured a fort on the bank of the +Rhine, opposite the town of Wesel. + +At the end of the year 1590 there were, including the garrisons, some +eight thousand English infantry and cavalry in Holland, and the year +that followed was to see a great change in the nature of the war. The +efforts of Prince Maurice to improve his army were to bear effect, and +with the assistance of his English allies he was to commence an active +offensive war, to astonish his foes by the rapidity with which he +manoeuvred the new fighting machine he had created, and to commence a +new departure in the tactics of war. + +In May he took the field, requesting Vere to co-operate with him in the +siege of Zutphen. But Sir Francis determined in the first place to +capture on his own account the Zutphen forts on the opposite side of +the river, since these had been lost by the treachery of Roland Yorke. +He dressed up a score of soldiers, some as peasants, others as +countrywomen, and provided them with baskets of eggs and other +provisions. At daybreak these went down by twos and threes to the +Zutphen ferry, as if waiting to be taken across to the town; and while +waiting for the boat to come across for them, they sat down near the +gate of the fort. + +[Illustration: CROSSING THE BRIDGE OF BOATS OVER THE HAVEN.] + +A few minutes later a party of English cavalry were seen riding rapidly +towards the fort. The pretended country people sprang to their feet, +and with cries of alarm ran towards it for shelter. The gates were +thrown open to allow them to enter. As they ran in they drew out the +arms concealed under their clothes and overpowered the guard. The +cavalry dashed up and entered the gate before the garrison could +assemble, and the fort was captured. + +Vere at once began to throw up his batteries for the attack upon the +town across the river, and the prince invested the city on the other +side. So diligently did the besiegers work that before a week had +passed after the surprise of the fort the batteries were completed, +thirty-two guns placed in position, and the garrison, seeing there was +no hope of relief, surrendered. + +On the very day of taking possession of the town, the allies, leaving a +garrison there, marched against Deventer, seven miles down the river, +and within five days had invested the place, and opened their batteries +upon the weakest part of the town. A breach was effected, and a storm +was ordered. A dispute arose between the English, Scotch, and Dutch +troops as to who should have the honour of leading the assault. Prince +Maurice decided in favour of the English, in order that they might have +an opportunity of wiping out the stigma on the national honour caused +by the betrayal of Deventer by the traitor Sir William Stanley. + +To reach the breach it was necessary to cross a piece of water called +the Haven. Sir Francis Vere led the English across the bridge of boats +which had been thrown over the water; but the bridge was too short. +Some of the troops sprang over and pushed boldly for the breach, others +were pushed over and drowned. Many of those behind stripped off their +armour and swam across the Haven, supported by some Dutch troops who +had been told off to follow the assaulting party. But at the breach +they were met by Van der Berg, the governor, with seven companies of +soldiers, and these fought so courageously that the assailants were +unable to win their way up the breach, and fell back at last with a +loss of two hundred and twenty-five men killed and wounded. + +While the assault was going on, the artillery of the besiegers +continued to play upon other parts of the town, and effected great +damage. On the following night the garrison endeavoured to capture the +bridge across the Haven, but were repulsed with loss, and in the +morning the place surrendered. The success of the patriots was due in +no slight degree to the fact that Parma with the greatest part of his +army was again absent in France, and the besieged towns had therefore +no hope of assistance from without. The States now determined to seize +the opportunity of capturing the towns held by the Spaniards in +Friesland. + +The three principal towns in the possession of the Spaniards were +Groningen, Steenwyk, and Coevorden. After capturing several less +important places and forts Prince Maurice advanced against Steenwyk. +But just as he was about to commence the siege he received pressing +letters from the States to hurry south, as Parma was marching with his +whole army to capture the fort of Knodsenburg, which had been raised in +the previous autumn as a preparation for the siege of the important +city of Nymegen. + +The Duke of Parma considered that he had ample time to reduce +Knodsenburg before Prince Maurice could return to its assistance. Two +great rivers barred the prince's return, and he would have to traverse +the dangerous district called the Foul Meadow, and the great quagmire +known as the Rouvenian Morass. But Prince Maurice had now an +opportunity of showing the excellence of the army he had raised and +trained. + +He received the news of Parma's advance on the 15th of July; two days +later he was on the march south, and in five days had thrown bridges of +boats across the two rivers, had crossed morass and swamp, and appeared +in front of the Spanish army. + +One assault had already been delivered by the Spaniards against +Knodsenburg, but this had been repulsed with heavy loss. As soon as the +patriot army approached the neighbourhood, Parma's cavalry went out to +drive in its skirmishers. Vere at once proposed to Prince Maurice to +inflict a sharp blow upon the enemy, and with the approval of the +prince marched with 1200 foot and 500 horse along the dyke which ran +across the low country. Marching to a spot where a bridge crossed a +narrow river he placed half his infantry in ambush there; the other +half a quarter of a mile further back. + +Two hundred light cavalry were sent forward to beat up the enemy's +outposts, and then retreat; the rest of the cavalry were posted in the +rear of the infantry. Another dyke ran nearly parallel with the first, +falling into it at some distance in the rear of Vere's position, and +here Prince Maurice stationed himself with a body of horse and foot to +cover Vere's retreat should he be obliged to fall back. About noon the +light cavalry skirmished with the enemy and fell back, but were not +followed. About half an hour later the scouts brought word that the +Spaniards were at hand. + +Suddenly and without orders 800 of Maurice's cavalry galloped off to +meet the enemy; but they soon came back again at full speed, with a +strong force of Spanish cavalry in pursuit. Vere's infantry at once +sallied out from their ambush among the trees, poured their fire into +the enemy, and charged them with their pikes. The Spaniards turned to +fly, when Vere's cavalry charged them furiously and drove them back in +headlong rout to their own camp, taking a great number of prisoners, +among them many officers of rank, and 500 horses. Parma finding himself +thus suddenly in face of a superior army, with a rapid river in his +rear, fell back across the Waal, and then proceeded to Spa to recruit +his shattered health, leaving Verdugo, an experienced officer, in +command. + +Instead of proceeding to besiege Nymegen, Maurice marched away as +suddenly and quickly as before, and captured Hulst, on the borders of +Zeeland and Brabant, a dozen miles only from Antwerp, and then turning +again was, in three days, back at Nymegen, and had placed sixty-eight +pieces of artillery in position. He opened fire on the 20th of October, +and the next day the important city of Nymegen surrendered. This series +of brilliant successes greatly raised the spirits of the Netherlanders, +and proportionately depressed those of the Spaniards and their +adherents. + +Parma himself was ill from annoyance and disappointment. The army with +which he might have completed the conquest of the Netherlands had, in +opposition to his entreaties and prayers, been frittered away by +Philip's orders in useless expeditions in France, while the young and +active generals of the Dutch and English armies were snatching town +after town from his grasp, and consolidating the Netherlands, so +recently broken up by Spanish strongholds, into a compact body, whose +increasing wealth and importance rendered it every day a more +formidable opponent. It is true that Parma had saved first Paris and +afterwards Rouen for the League, but it was at the cost of loosening +Philip's hold over the most important outpost of the Spanish dominions. + +In the following spring Parma was again forced to march into France +with 20,000 men, and Maurice, as soon as the force started, prepared to +take advantage of its absence. With 6000 foot and 2000 horse he again +appeared at the end of May before Steenwyk. This town was the key to +the province of Drenthe, and one of the safeguards of Friesland; it was +considered one of the strongest fortresses of the time. Its garrison +consisted of sixteen companies of foot and some cavalry, and 1200 +Walloon infantry, commanded by Lewis, the youngest of the Counts de +Berg, a brave lad of eighteen years of age. + +In this siege, for the first time, the spade was used by soldiers in +the field. Hitherto the work had been considered derogatory to troops, +and peasants and miners had been engaged for the work; but Prince +Maurice had taught his soldiers that their duty was to work as well as +fight, and they now proved the value of his teaching. + +The besieged made several successful sorties, and Sir Francis Vere had +been severely wounded in the leg. The cannonade effected but little +damage on the strong walls; but the soldiers, working night and day, +drove mines under two of the principal bastions, and constructed two +great chambers there; these were charged, one with five thousand pounds +of powder, the other with half that quantity. On the 3d of July the +mines were sprung. The bastion of the east gate was blown to pieces and +the other bastion greatly injured, but many of the Dutch troops +standing ready for the assault were also killed by the explosion. + +The storming parties, however, rushed forward, and the two bastions +were captured. This left the town at the mercy of the besiegers. The +next day the garrison surrendered, and were permitted to march away. +Three hundred and fifty had been killed, among them young Count Lewis +Van der Berg, and two hundred had been left behind, severely wounded, +in the town. Between five and six hundred of the besiegers were killed +during the course of the siege. The very day after the surrender of +Steenwyk Maurice marched away and laid siege to Coevorden. This city, +which was most strongly fortified, lay between two great swamps, +between which there was a passage of about half a mile in width. + +Another of the Van der Bergs, Count Frederick, commanded the garrison +of a thousand veterans. Verdugo sent to Parma and Mondragon for aid, +but none could be sent to him, and the prince worked at his +fortifications undisturbed. His force was weakened by the withdrawal of +Sir Francis Vere with three of the English regiments, Elizabeth having +sent peremptory orders that this force should follow those already +withdrawn to aid Henry of Navarre in Brittany. Very unwillingly Vere +obeyed, and marched to Doesburg on the Yssel. But a fortnight after he +arrived there, while he was waiting for ships to transport him to +Brittany the news came to him that Verdugo, having gathered a large +force together, was about to attack Prince Maurice in his camp, and +Vere at once started to the prince's aid. + +On the night of the 6th of September, Verdugo, with 4000 foot and 1800 +cavalry, wearing their shirts outside their armour to enable them to +distinguish each other in the dark, fell upon Maurice's camp. +Fortunately the prince was prepared, having intercepted a letter from +Verdugo to the governor of the town. A desperate battle took place, but +at break of day, while its issue was still uncertain, Vere, who had +marched all night, came up and threw himself into the battle. His +arrival was decisive. Verdugo drew off with a loss of 300 killed, and +five days later Coevorden surrendered, and Prince Maurice's army went +into winter quarters. + +A few weeks later Parma died, killed by the burden Philip threw upon +him, broken down by the constant disappointment of his hopes of +carrying his work to a successful end, by the incessant interference of +Philip with his plans, and by the anxiety caused by the mutinies +arising from his inability to pay his troops, although he had borrowed +to the utmost on his own possessions, and pawned even his jewels to +keep them from starvation. He was undoubtedly the greatest commander of +his age, and had he been left to carry out his own plans would have +crushed out the last ember of resistance in the Netherlands and +consolidated the power of Spain there. + +He was succeeded in his post by the Archduke Albert, but for a time +Ernest Mansfeldt continued to command the army, and to manage the +affairs in the Netherlands. In March, 1593, Prince Maurice appeared +with his army in front of Gertruydenberg. The city itself was an +important one, and its position on the Maas rendered it of the greatest +use to the Spaniards, as through it they were at any moment enabled to +penetrate into the heart of Holland. Gertruydenberg and Groningen, the +capital of Friesland, were now, indeed, the only important places in +the republic that remained in possession of the Spaniards. Hohenlohe +with a portion of the army established himself to the east of the city, +Maurice with its main body to the west. + +Two bridges constructed across the river Douge afforded a means of +communication between two armies, and plank roads were laid across the +swamps for the passage of baggage waggons. Three thousand soldiers +laboured incessantly at the works, which were intended not only to +isolate the city, but to defend the besiegers from any attack that +might be made upon them by a relieving army. The better to protect +themselves, miles of country were laid under water, and palisade work +erected to render the country impregnable by cavalry. + +Ernest Mansfeldt did his best to relieve the town. His son, Count +Charles, with five thousand troops, had been sent into France, but by +sweeping up all the garrisons, he moved with a considerable army +towards Gertruydenberg and challenged Maurice to issue out from his +lines to fight him. But the prince had no idea of risking a certain +success upon the issue of a battle. + +A hundred pieces of artillery on the batteries played incessantly on +the town, while a blockading squadron of Zeeland ships assisted in the +bombardment, and so terrible was the fire, that when the town was +finally taken only four houses were found to have escaped injury. + +Two commandants of the place were killed one after the other, and the +garrison of a thousand veterans, besides the burgher militia, was +greatly reduced in strength. At last, after ninety days' siege, the +town suddenly fell. Upon the 24th of June three Dutch captains were +relieving guard in the trenches near the great north bastion of the +town, when it occurred to them to scale the wall of the fort and see +what was going on inside. They threw some planks across the ditch, and +taking half a company of soldiers, climbed cautiously up. They obtained +a foothold before the alarm was given. There was a fierce hand-to-hand +struggle, and sixteen of the party fell, and nine of the garrison. The +rest fled into the city. The Governor Gysant, rushing to the rescue +without staying to put on his armour, was killed. + +Count Solms came from the besieging camp to investigate the sudden +uproar, and to his profound astonishment was met by a deputation from +the city asking for terms of surrender. Prince Maurice soon afterwards +came up, and the terms of capitulation were agreed upon. The garrison +were allowed to retire with side-arms and baggage, and fifty waggons +were lent to them to carry off their wounded. + +In the following spring Coevorden, which had been invested by Verdugo, +was relieved, and Groningen, the last great city of the Netherlands in +the hands of the Spaniards, was besieged. Mines were driven under its +principal bastion, and when these were sprung, after sixty-five days' +siege, the city was forced to surrender. Thus for the first time, after +years of warfare, Holland, Zeeland, and Friesland became truly united, +and free from the grasp of the hated invader. + +Throughout the last three years of warfare Sir Francis Vere had proved +an able assistant to the prince, and the English troops had fought +bravely side by side with the Dutch; but their contingent had been but +a small one, for the majority of Vere's force had, like that of the +Spaniards, been withdrawn for service in France. The struggle in that +country was nearly at an end. The conversion of Henry of Navarre for +the second time to the Catholic religion had ranged many Catholics, who +had hitherto been opposed to him, under his banner, while many had +fallen away from the ranks of the League in disgust, when Philip of +Spain at last threw off the mask of disinterestedness, and proposed his +nephew the Archduke Ernest as king of France. + +In July, 1595, a serious misfortune befell the allied army. They had +laid siege to Crolle, and had made considerable progress with the +siege, when the Spanish army, under command of Mondragon, the aged +governor of Antwerp, marched to its relief. As the army of Maurice was +inferior in numbers, the States would not consent to a general action. +The siege was consequently raised; and Mondragon having attained his +object, fell back to a position on the Rhine at Orsoy, above Rheinberg, +whence he could watch the movements of the allied army encamped on the +opposite bank at Bislich, a few miles below Wesel. + +The Spanish army occupied both sides of the river, the wing on the +right bank being protected from attack by the river Lippe, which falls +into the Rhine at Wesel, and by a range of moorland hills called the +Testerburg. The Dutch cavalry saw that the slopes of this hill were +occupied by the Spaniards, but believed that their force consisted only +of a few troops of horse. + +Young Count Philip of Nassau proposed that a body of cavalry should +swim the Lippe, and attack and cut them off. Prince Maurice and Sir +Francis Vere gave a very reluctant consent to the enterprise, but +finally allowed him to take a force of five hundred men. + +With him were his brothers Ernest and Louis, his nephew Ernest de +Solms, and many other nobles of Holland. Sir Marcellus Bacx was in +command of them. The English contingent was commanded by Sir Nicholas +Parker and Robert Vere. On August 22d they swam the Lippe and galloped +in the direction where they expected to find two or three troops of +Spanish horse; but Mondragon had received news of their intentions, and +they suddenly saw before them half the Spanish army. Without hesitation +the five hundred English and Dutch horsemen charged desperately into +the enemy's ranks, and fought with extraordinary valour, until, +altogether overpowered by numbers, Philip of Nassau and his nephew +Ernest were both mortally wounded and taken prisoners. + +Robert Vere was slain by a lance-thrust in the face, and many other +nobles and gentlemen fell. Thus died one of the three brave brothers, +for the youngest, Horace, had also joined the army in 1590. The +survivors of the band under Sir Nicholas Parker and Marcellus Bacx +managed to effect their retreat, covered by a reserve Prince Maurice +had posted on the opposite side of the river. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +CADIZ. + + +In March, 1596, Sir Francis Vere returned to Holland. He had during his +absence in England been largely taken into the counsels of Queen +Elizabeth, and it had been decided that the war should be carried into +the enemy's country, and a heavy blow struck at the power of Spain. +Vere had been appointed to an important command in the proposed +expedition, and had now come out charged with the mission of persuading +the States-general to co-operate heartily with England, and to +contribute both money and men. There was much discussion in the States; +but they finally agreed to comply with the queen's wishes, considering +that there was no surer way of bringing the war to a termination than +to transport it nearer to the heart of the enemy. + +As soon as the matter was arranged, Sir Francis Vere left the Hague and +went to Middleburg, where the preparations for the Dutch portion of the +expedition were carried out. It consisted of twenty-two Dutch ships, +under Count William of Nassau, and a thousand of the English troops in +the pay of the States. The company commanded by Lionel Vickars was one +of those chosen to accompany the expedition; and on the 22d of April it +started from Flushing and joined the British fleet assembled at Dover. +This was under the command of Lord Howard as lord-admiral, the Earl of +Essex as general, Lord Thomas Howard as vice-admiral, and Sir Walter +Raleigh as rear-admiral. + +Sir Francis Vere was lieutenant-general and lord-marshal. He was to be +the chief adviser of the Earl of Essex, and to have the command of +operations on shore. The ships of war consisted of the _Ark- +Royal_, the _Repulse, Mere-Honour, War-Sprite, Rainbow, Mary, +Rose, Dreadnought, Vanguard, Nonpareil, Lion, Swiftsure, Quittance_, +and _Tremontaine_. There were also twelve ships belonging to +London, and the twenty-two Dutch vessels. The fleet, which was largely +fitted out at the private expense of Lord Howard and the Earl of Essex, +sailed from Dover to Plymouth. Sir Francis Vere went by land, and set +to work at the organization of the army. + +A month was thus spent, and on the 1st of June the fleet set sail. It +carried 6360 soldiers and 1000 volunteers, and was manned by nearly +7000 sailors. There had been some dispute as to the relative ranks of +Sir Francis Vere and Sir Walter Raleigh, and it was settled that Sir +Francis should have precedence on shore, and Sir Walter Raleigh at sea. + +All on board the fleet were full of enthusiasm at the enterprise upon +which they were embarked. It was eight years since the Spanish Armada +had sailed to invade England; now an English fleet was sailing to +attack Spain on her own ground. Things had changed indeed in that time. +Spain, which had been deemed invincible, had suffered many reverses; +while England had made great strides in power, and was now mistress of +the seas, on which Spain had formerly considered herself to be supreme. + +A favourable wind from the north-east carried the fleet rapidly across +the Bay of Biscay, and it proceeded on its way, keeping well out of +sight of the coast of Portugal. The three fastest sailers of the fleet +were sent on ahead as soon as they rounded Cape St. Vincent, with +orders to capture all small vessels which might carry to Cadiz the +tidings of the approach of the fleet. + +[Illustration] + +Early on the morning of the 20th June the fleet anchored off the spit +of San Sebastian on the southern side of the city. + +Cadiz was defended by the fort of San Sebastian on one side and that of +San Felipe on the other; while the fort of Pun tales, on the long spit +of sand connecting the city with the mainland, defended the channel +leading up to Puerto Real, and covered by its guns the Spanish galleys +and ships of war anchored there. Lying off the town when the English +fleet came in sight were forty richly-laden merchant ships about to +sail for Mexico, under the convoy of four great men-of-war, two Lisbon +galleons, two argosies, and three frigates. + +As soon as the English were seen, the merchant ships were ordered up +the channel to Puerto Real, and the men-of-war and the fleet of +seventeen war galleys were ranged under the guns of Fort Puntales to +prevent the English passing up. It had first been decided to attempt a +landing in the harbour of Galeta, on the south side of the city; but a +heavy sea was setting in, and although the troops had been got into the +boats they were re-embarked, and the fleet sailed round and anchored at +the mouth of the channel leading up the bay. A council of war was held +that night, and it was decided that the fleet should move up the bay +with the tide next morning, and attack the Spanish fleet. + +The next morning at daybreak the ships got up their anchors and sailed +up the channel, each commander vieing with the rest in his eagerness to +be first in the fray. They were soon hotly engaged with the enemy; the +fort, men-of-war, and galleys opening a heavy fire upon them, to which, +anchoring as close as they could get to the foe, the English ships +hotly responded. The galleys were driven closer in under the shelter of +the fire of the fort, and the fire was kept up without intermission +from six o'clock in the morning until four in the afternoon. + +By that time the Spaniards had had enough of it. The galleys slipped +their cables and made sail for a narrow channel across the spit, +covered by the guns of the fort. Three of them were captured by Sir +John Wingfield in the _Vanguard_, but the rest got through the +channel and escaped. The men-of-war endeavoured to run ashore, but +boarding parties in boats from the _Ark-Royal_ and _Repulse_ +captured two of them. The Spaniards set fire to the other two. The +argosies and galleons were also captured. Sir Francis Vere at once took +the command of the land operations. The boats were all lowered, and the +regiments of Essex, Vere, Blount, Gerard, and Clifford told off as a +landing party. They were formed in line. The Earl of Essex and Sir +Francis Vere took their places in a boat in advance of the line, and +were followed by smaller boats crowded with gentlemen volunteers. + +They landed between the fort of Puntales and the town. The regiments of +Blount, Gerard, and Clifford were sent to the narrowest part of the +spit to prevent reinforcements being thrown into the place; while those +of Essex and Vere and the gentlemen volunteers turned towards Cadiz. +Each of these parties consisted of about a thousand men. + +The walls of Cadiz were so strong that it had been intended to land +guns from the fleet, raise batteries, and make a breach in the walls. +Vere, however, perceiving some Spanish cavalry and infantry drawn up +outside the walls, suggested to Essex that an attempt should be made to +take the place by surprise. The earl at once agreed to the plan. + +Vere marched the force across to the west side of the spit, his +movements being concealed by the sand-hills from the Spanish. Sir John +Wingfield with two hundred men was ordered to march rapidly on against +the enemy, driving in their skirmishers, and then to retreat hastily +when the main body advanced against him. Three hundred men under Sir +Matthew Morgan were posted as supports to Wingfield, and as soon as the +latter's flying force joined them the whole were to fall upon the +Spaniards and in turn chase them back to the walls, against which the +main body under Essex and Vere were to advance. + +The orders were ably carried out. The Spaniards in hot chase of +Wingfield found themselves suddenly confronted by Morgan's force, who +fell upon them so furiously that they fled back to the town closely +followed by the English. Some of the fugitives made their way in at the +gates, which were hurriedly closed, while others climbed up at the +bastions, which sloped sufficiently to afford foothold. Vere's troops +from the Netherlands, led by Essex, also scaled the bastions and then +an inner wall behind it. As soon as they had captured this they rushed +through the streets, shooting and cutting down any who opposed them. + +Sir Francis Vere, who had also scaled the ramparts, knew that cities +captured by assaults had often been lost again by the soldiers +scattering. He therefore directed the rest of the troops to burst open +the gate. This was with some difficulty effected, and he then marched +them in good order to the market-place, where the Spaniards had rallied +and were hotly engaged with Essex. The opposition was soon beaten down, +and those defending the town-hall were forced to surrender. The troops +were then marched through the town, and the garrison driven either into +the convent of San Francisco or into the castle of Felipe. The convent +surrendered on the same evening and the castle on the following day. +The loss upon the part of the assailants was very small, but Sir John +Wingfield was mortally wounded. + +The English behaved with the greatest courtesy to their captives, their +conduct presenting an extraordinary contrast to that of the Spaniards +under similar circumstance in the Netherlands. The women were treated +with the greatest courtesy, and five thousand inhabitants, including +women and priests, were allowed to leave the town with their clothes. +The terms were that the city should pay a ransom of 520,000 ducats, and +that some of the chief citizens should remain as hostages for payment. + +As soon as the fighting ceased, Lionel Vickars accompanied Sir Francis +Vere through the streets to set guards, and see that no insult was +offered to any of the inhabitants. As they passed along, the door of +one of the mansions was thrown open. A gentleman hurried out; he paused +for a moment, exclaiming, "Sir Francis Vere!" and then looking at +Lionel rushed forward towards him with a cry of delight. Sir Francis +Vere and Lionel stared in astonishment as the former's name was called; +but at the sound of his own name Lionel fell back a step as if +stupefied, and then with a cry of "Geoffrey!" fell into his brother's +arms. + +"It is indeed Geoffrey Vickars!" Sir Francis Vere exclaimed. "Why, +Geoffrey, what miracle is this? We have thought you dead these six +years, and now we find you transmuted into a Spanish don." + +"I may look like one, Sir Francis," Geoffrey said as he shook his old +commander's hand, "but I am English to the backbone still. But my story +is too long to tell now. You will be doubtless too busy to-night to +spare time to listen to it, but I pray you to breakfast with me in the +morning, when I will briefly relate to you the outline of my +adventures. Can you spare my brother for to-night, Sir Francis?" + +"I would do so were there ten times the work to be got through," Sir +Francis replied. "Assuredly I would not keep asunder for a minute two +brothers who have so long been separated. I will breakfast with you in +the morning and hear this strange story of yours; for strange it must +assuredly be, since it has changed my young page of the Netherlands +into a Spanish hidalgo." + +"I am no hidalgo, Sir Francis, but a trader of Cadiz, and I own that +although I have been in some way a prisoner, seeing that I could not +effect my escape, I have not fared badly. Now, Lionel, come in. I have +another surprise for you." + +Lionel, still confused and wonder-stricken at this apparent +resurrection of his brother from the dead, followed him upstairs. +Geoffrey led the way into a handsomely furnished apartment, where a +young lady was sitting with a boy two years old in her lap. + +"Dolores, this is my brother Lionel, of whom you have so often heard me +speak. Lionel, this is my wife and my eldest boy, who is named after +you." + +It was some time before Lionel could completely realize the position, +and it was not until Dolores in somewhat broken English bade him +welcome that he found his tongue. + +"But I cannot understand it all!" he exclaimed, after responding to the +words of Dolores. "I saw my brother in the middle of the battle with +the Armada. We came into collision with a great galleon, we lost one of +our masts, and I never saw Geoffrey afterwards; and we all thought that +he had either been shot by the musketeers on the galleon, or had been +knocked overboard and killed by the falling mast." + +"I had hoped that long before this you would have heard of my safety, +Lionel, for a sailor friend of mine promised if he reached England to +go down at once to Hedingham to tell them there. He left the ship he +was in out in the West Indies, and I hoped had reached home safely." + +"We have heard nothing, Geoffrey. The man has never come with your +message. But now tell me how you were saved." + +"I was knocked over by the mast, Lionel, but as you see I was not +killed. I climbed up into a passing Spanish ship, and concealed myself +in the chains until she was sunk, when I was, with many of the crew, +picked up by the boats of other ships. I pretended to have lost my +senses and my speech, and none suspected that I was English. The ship I +was on board of was one of those which succeeded after terrible +hardships in returning to Spain. An Irish gentleman on board her, to +whom I confided my secret, took me as a servant. After many adventures +I sailed with him for Italy, where we hoped to get a ship for England. +On the way we were attacked by Barbary pirates. We beat them off, but I +was taken prisoner. I remained a captive among them for nearly two +years, and then with a fellow-prisoner escaped, together with Dolores +and her father, who had also been captured by the pirates We reached +Spain in safety, and I have since passed as one of the many exiles from +England and Ireland who have taken refuge here; and Senor Mendez, my +wife's father, was good enough to bestow her hand upon me, partly in +gratitude for the services I had rendered him in his escape, partly +because he saw she would break her heart if he refused." + +"You know that is not true, Geoffrey," Dolores interrupted. + +"Never mind, Dolores, it is near enough. And with his daughter," he +continued, "he gave me a share in his business. I have been a fortunate +man indeed, Lionel; but I have always longed for a chance to return +home; until now none has ever offered itself, and I have grieved +continually at the thought that my father and mother and you were +mourning for me as dead. Now you have the outline of my story; tell me +about all at home." + +"Our father and mother are both well, Geoffrey, though your supposed +loss was a great blow for them. But is it still home for you, Geoffrey? +Do you really mean to return with us." + +"Of course I do, Lionel. At the time I married I arranged with Senor +Mendez that whenever an opportunity occurred I was to return home, +taking, of course, Dolores with me. She has been learning English ever +since, and although naturally she would rather that we remained here +she is quite prepared to make her home in England. We have two boys, +this youngster, and a baby three months old; so, you see, you have all +at once acquired nephews as well as a brother and sister. Here is Senor +Mendez. This is my brother, senor, the Lionel after whom I named my +boy, though I never dreamed that our next meeting would take place +within the walls of Cadiz." + +"You have astounded us, senor," the merchant said courteously. "We +thought that Cadiz was safe from an attack; and though we were aware +you had defeated our fleet we were astonished indeed when two hours +since we heard by the din and firing in the streets that you had +captured the city. Truly you English do not suffer the grass to grow +under your feet. When we woke this morning no one dreamed of danger, +and now in the course of one day you have destroyed our fleet, captured +our town, and have our lives and properties at your disposal." + +"Your lives are in no danger, senor, and all who choose are free to +depart without harm or hindrance. But as to your property--I don't mean +yours, of course, because as Geoffrey's father-in-law I am sure that +Sir Francis Vere will inflict no fine upon you--but the city generally +will have to pay, I hear, some half million ducats as ransom." + +"That is as nothing," the Spaniard said, "to the loss the city will +suffer in the loss of the forty merchant ships which you will doubtless +capture or burn. Right glad am I that no cargo of mine is on board any +of them, for I do not trade with Mexico; but I am sure the value of the +ships with their cargoes cannot be less than twenty millions of ducats. +This will fall upon the traders of this town and of Seville. Still, I +own that the ransom of half-a-million for a city like Cadiz seems to me +to be very moderate, and the tranquillity that already prevails in the +town is beyond all praise. Would that such had been the behaviour of my +countrymen in the Netherlands!" + +Don Mendez spoke in a tone of deep depression. Geoffrey made a sign to +his brother to come out on to the balcony, while the merchant took a +seat beside his daughter. + +"'Tis best to leave them alone," he said as they looked down into the +street, where the English and their Dutch allies, many of whom had now +landed, were wandering about examining the public buildings and +churches, while the inhabitants looked with timid curiosity from their +windows and balconies at the men who had, as if by magic, suddenly +become their masters. "I can see that the old gentleman is terribly cut +up. Of course, nothing has been said between us yet, for it was not +until we heard the sound of firing in the streets that anyone thought +there was the smallest risk of your capturing the city. Nevertheless, +he must be sure that I shall take this opportunity of returning home. + +"It has always been understood between us that I should do so as soon +as any safe method of making a passage could be discovered; but after +being here with him more than three years he had doubtless come to +believe that such a chance would never come during his lifetime, and +the thought of an early separation from his daughter, and the break up +of our household here, must be painful to him in the extreme. It has +been settled that I should still remain partner in the firm, and should +manage our affairs in England and Holland; but this will, of course, be +a comparatively small business until peace is restored, and ships are +free to come and go on both sides as they please. But I think it is +likely he will himself come to live with us in England, and that we +shall make that the headquarters of the firm, employing our ships in +traffic with Holland, France, and the Mediterranean until peace is +restored with Spain, and having only an agent here to conduct such +business as we may be able to carry on under the present stringent +regulations. + +"In point of fact, even if we wound up our affairs and disposed of our +ships, it would matter little to us, for Mendez is a very rich man, and +as Dolores is his only child he has no great motive beyond the +occupation it gives him for continuing in business. So you are a +captain now, Lionel! Have you had a great deal of fighting?" + +"Not a great deal. The Spaniards have been too much occupied with their +affairs in France to give us much work to do. In Holland I took part in +the adventure that led to the capture of Breda, did some fighting in +France with the army of Henry of Navarre, and have been concerned in a +good many sieges and skirmishes. I do not know whether you heard of the +death of Robert Vere. He came out just after the business of the +Armada, and fell in the fight the other day near Wesel--a mad business +of Count Philip of Nassau. Horace is serving with his troop. We have +recovered all the cities in the three provinces, and Holland is now +virtually rid of the Spaniards. + +"Things have greatly changed since the days of Sluys and Bergen-op- +Zoom. Holland has increased marvellously in strength and wealth. We +have now a splendidly-organized army, and should not fear meeting the +Spaniards in the open field if they would but give the chance to do so +in anything like equal numbers. Sir Francis is marshal of our army +here, and is now considered the ablest of our generals; and he and +Prince Maurice have never yet met with a serious disaster. But how have +you escaped the Inquisition here, Geoffrey? I thought they laid hands +on every heretic?" + +"So they do," Geoffrey replied; "but you see they have never dreamed +that I was a heretic. The English, Irish, and Scotchmen here, either +serving in the army or living quietly as exiles, are, of course, all +Catholics, and as they suppose me to be one of them, it does not seem +to have entered their minds that I was a Protestant. Since I have been +here I have gone with my wife and father-in-law to church, and have +said my prayers in my own way while they have said theirs. I cannot say +I have liked it, but as there was no church of my own it did not go +against my conscience to kneel in theirs. I can tell you that, after +being for nearly a couple of years a slave among the Moors, one thinks +less of these distinctions than one used to do. Had the Inquisition +laid hands on me and questioned me, I should at once have declared +myself a Protestant; but as long as I was not questioned I thought it +no harm to go quietly and pay my devotions in a church, even though +there were many things in that church with which I wholly disagreed. + +"Dolores and I have talked the matter over often, and have arrived at +the conclusion long since that there is no such great difference +between us as would lead us to hate each other." + +Lionel laughed. + +"I suppose we generally see matters as we want to, Geoffrey; but it +will be rather a shock to our good father and mother when you bring +them home a Catholic daughter." + +"I daresay when she has once settled in England among us, Lionel, she +will turn round to our views on the subject; not that I should ever try +to convert her, but it will likely enough come of itself. Of course, +she has been brought up with the belief that heretics are very terrible +people. She has naturally grown out of that belief now, and is ready to +admit that there may be good heretics as well as good Catholics, which +is a long step for a Spanish woman to take. I have no fear but that the +rest will come in time. At present I have most carefully abstained from +talking with her on the subject. When she is once in England I shall be +able to talk to her freely without endangering her life by doing so." + +Upon the following morning Sir Francis Vere breakfasted with Geoffrey, +and then he and Lionel heard the full account of his adventures, and +the manner in which it came about that he was found established as a +merchant in Cadiz. + +They then talked over the situation. Sir Francis was much vexed that +the lord-admiral had not complied with the earnest request the Earl of +Essex had sent him, as soon as he landed, to take prompt measures for +the pursuit and capture of the merchant ships. Instead of doing this, +the admiral, considering the force that had landed to be dangerously +weak, had sent large reinforcements on shore as soon as the boats came +off, and the consequence was that at dawn that morning masses of smoke +rising from the Puerto Real showed that the Duke of Medina-Sidonia had +set the merchant ships on fire rather than that they should fall into +the hands of the English. + +For a fortnight the captors of Cadiz remained in possession. Senor +Mendez had, upon the day after their entry, discussed the future with +Geoffrey. To the latter's great satisfaction he took it for granted +that his son-in-law would sail with Dolores and the children in the +English fleet, and he at once entered into arrangements with him for +his undertaking the management of the business of the firm in England +and Holland. + +"Had I wound up my affairs I should accompany you at once, for Dolores +is everything to me, and you, Geoffrey, have also a large share of my +affection; but this is impossible. We have at present all our fifteen +ships at sea, and these on their return to port would be confiscated at +once were I to leave. Besides, there are large transactions open with +the merchants at Seville and elsewhere. Therefore I must, for the +present at any rate, remain here. I shall incur no odium by your +departure. It will be supposed that you have reconciled yourself with +your government, and your going home will therefore seem only natural; +and it will be seen that I could not, however much I were inclined, +interfere to prevent the departure of Dolores and the children with +you. + +"I propose to send on board your ships the greater portion of my goods +here suitable for your market. This, again, will not excite bad +feelings, as I shall say that you as my partner insisted upon your +right to take your share of our merchandise back to England with you, +leaving me as my portion our fleet of vessels. Therefore all will go on +here as before. I shall gradually reduce my business and dispose of the +ships, transmitting my fortune to a banker in Brussels, who will be +able to send it to England through merchants in Antwerp, and you can +purchase vessels to replace those I sell. + +"I calculate that it will take me a year to complete all my +arrangements. After that I shall again sail for Italy, and shall come +to England either by sea or by travelling through Germany, as +circumstances may dictate. On arriving in London I shall know where to +find you, for by that time you will be well known there; and at any +rate the bankers to whom my money is sent will be able to inform me of +your address." + +These arrangements were carried out, and at the departure of the fleet, +Geoffrey, with Dolores and the children, sailed in Sir Francis Vere's +ship the _Rainbow_, Sir Francis having insisted on giving up his +own cabin for the use of Dolores. On leaving Cadiz the town was fired, +and the cathedral, the church of the Jesuits, the nunneries of Santa +Maria and Candelaria, two hundred and ninety houses, and, greatest loss +of all, the library of the Jesuits, containing invaluable manuscripts +respecting the Incas of Peru, were destroyed. + +The destruction of the Spanish fleet, and the enormous loss caused by +the burning of Cadiz and the loss of the rich merchant fleet, struck a +terrible blow at the power and resources of Spain. Her trade never +recovered from its effects, and her prestige suffered very greatly in +the eyes of Europe. Philip never rallied from the blow to his pride +inflicted by this humiliation. + +Lionel had at first been almost shocked to find that Geoffrey had +married a Spanish woman and a Catholic; but the charming manner of +Dolores, her evident desire to please, and the deep affection with +which she regarded her husband, soon won his heart. He, Sir Francis +Vere, and the other officers and volunteers on board, vied with each +other in attention to her during the voyage; and Dolores, who had +hitherto been convinced that Geoffrey was a strange exception to the +rule that all Englishmen were rough and savage animals, and who looked +forward with much secret dread to taking up her residence among them, +was quite delighted, and assured Geoffrey she was at last convinced +that all she had heard to the disadvantage of his countrymen was wholly +untrue. + +The fleet touched at Plymouth, where the news of the immense success +they had gained was received with great rejoicings; and after taking in +fresh water and stores, they proceeded along the coast and anchored in +the mouth of the Thames. Here the greater part of the fleet was +disbanded, the _Rainbow_ and a few other vessels sailing up to +Greenwich, where the captains and officers were received with great +honour by the queen, and were feasted and made much of by the city. + +The brothers, the day after the ship cast anchor, proceeded to town, +and there hired horses for their journey down into Essex. This was +accomplished in two days, Geoffrey riding with Dolores on a pillion +behind him with her baby in her lap, while young Lionel was on the +saddle before his uncle. + +When they approached Hedingham Lionel said, "I had best ride forward +Geoffrey to break the news to them of your coming. Although our mother +has always declared that she would not give up hope that you would some +day be restored to us, they have now really mourned you as dead." + +"Very well, Lionel. It is but a mile or so; I will dismount and put the +boy up in the saddle and walk beside him, and we shall be in a quarter +of an hour after you." + +The delight of Mr. and Mrs. Vickars on hearing Geoffrey was alive and +close at hand was so great that the fact he brought home a Spanish +wife, which would under other circumstances have been a great shock to +them, was now scarcely felt, and when the rapturous greeting with which +he was received on his arrival was over, they welcomed his pretty young +wife with a degree of warmth which fully satisfied him. Her welcome +was, of course, in the first place as Geoffrey's wife, but in a very +short time his father and mother both came to love her for herself, and +Dolores very quickly found herself far happier at Hedingham Rectory +than she had thought she could be away from her native Spain. + +The announcement Geoffrey made shortly after his arrival, that he had +altogether abandoned the trade of soldiering, and should in future make +his home in London, trading in conjunction with his father-in-law, +assisted to reconcile them to his marriage. After a fortnight's stay at +Hedingham Geoffrey went up to London, and there took a house in the +city, purchased several vessels, and entered upon business, being +enabled to take at once a good position among the merchants of London, +thanks to the ample funds with which he was provided. + +Two months later he went down to Essex and brought up Dolores and the +children, and established them in his new abode. + +The apprenticeship he had served in trade at Cadiz enabled Geoffrey to +start with confidence in his business. He at once notified all the +correspondents of the firm in the different ports of Europe, that in +future the business carried on by Signor Juan Mendez at Cadiz would +have its headquarters in London, and that the firm would trade with all +ports with the exception of those of Spain. The result was that before +many months had elapsed there were few houses in London doing a larger +trade with the Continent than that of Mendez and Vickars, under which +title they had traded from the time of Geoffrey's marriage with +Dolores. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE BATTLE OF NIEUPORT. + + +The year after the capture of Cadiz, Lionel Vickars sailed under Sir +Francis Vere with the expedition designed to attack the fleet which +Philip of Spain had gathered in Ferrol, with the intention, it was +believed, of invading Ireland in retaliation for the disaster at Cadiz. +The expedition met with terrible weather in the Bay of Biscay, and put +back scattered and disabled to Plymouth and Falmouth. In August they +again sailed, but were so battered by another storm that the expedition +against Ferrol was abandoned, and they sailed to the Azores. There, +after a skirmish with the Spaniards, they scattered among the islands, +but missed the great Spanish fleet laden with silver from the west, and +finally returned to England without having accomplished anything, while +they suffered from another tempest on their way home, and reached +Plymouth with difficulty. + +Fortunately the same storm scattered and destroyed the great Spanish +fleet at Ferrol, and the weather thus for the second time saved England +from invasion. Late in the autumn, after his return from the +expedition, Sir Francis Vere went over to Holland, and by his advice +Prince Maurice prepared in December to attack a force of 4000 Spanish +infantry and 600 cavalry, which, under the command of the Count of +Varras, had gathered at the village of Turnhout, twenty miles from +Breda. + +A force of 5000 foot and 800 horse were secretly assembled at +Gertruydenberg. Sir Francis Vere brought an English regiment, and +personally commanded one of the two troops into which the English +cavalry was divided. Sir Robert Sidney came with 300 of the English +garrison at Flushing, and Sir Alexander Murray with a Scotch regiment. +The expedition started on the 23d of January, 1598, and after marching +twenty-four miles reached the village of Rivels, three miles from +Turnhout, two hours after dark. + +The night was bitter cold, and after cooking supper the men wrapt +themselves up in their cloaks, and lay down on the frozen ground until +daybreak The delay, although necessary, enabled the enemy to make their +escape. The news that the allies had arrived close at hand reached +Count Varras at midnight, and a retreat was at once ordered. Baggage +waggons were packed and despatched, escorted by the cavalry, and before +dawn the whole force was well on its road. Prince Maurice had set off +an hour before daybreak, and on reaching Turnhout found that the rear- +guard of the enemy had just left the village. They had broken down the +wooden bridge across the River Aa, only one plank being left standing, +and had stationed a party to defend it. + +Maurice held a hasty council of war. All, with the exception of Sir +Francis Vere and Sir Marcellus Bacx, were against pursuit, but Maurice +took the advice of the minority. Vere with two hundred Dutch musketeers +advanced against the bridge; his musketry fire drove off the guard, and +with a few mounted officers and the two hundred musketeers he set out +in pursuit. He saw that the enemy's infantry were marching but slowly, +and guessed that they were delayed by the baggage waggons in front. + +The country was wooded, and he threw the musketeers among the trees +with orders to keep up a dropping fire, while he himself with sixteen +horsemen followed closely upon the enemy along the road. Their rear- +guard kept up a skirmishing fire, slightly wounding Vere in the leg; +but all this caused delay, and it was three hours before they emerged +on an open heath, three miles from the bridge. Vere placed his +musketeers among some woods and inclosed fields on the left of the +heath, and ordered them to keep up a brisk fire and to show themselves +as if advancing to the attack. He himself, reinforced by some more +horsemen who had come up, continued to follow in the open. + +The heath was three miles across, and Vere, constantly skirmishing with +the Spanish infantry, who were formed in four solid squares, kept +watching for the appearance of Maurice and the cavalry. At length these +came in sight. Vere galloped up to the prince, and urged that a charge +should be made at once. The prince assented. Vere, with the English +cavalry, charged down upon the rear of the squares, while Hohenlohe +swept down with the Dutch cavalry upon their flanks. The Spanish +musketeers fired and at once fled, and the cavalry dashed in among the +squares of pikemen and broke them. + +Several of the companies of horse galloped on in pursuit of the enemy's +horse and baggage. Vere saw that these would be repulsed, and formed up +the English cavalry to cover their retreat. In a short time the +disordered horse came back at full gallop, pursued by the Spanish +cavalry, but these, seeing Vere's troops ready to receive them, +retreated at once. Count Varras was slain, together with three hundred +of the Spanish infantry. Six hundred prisoners were taken, and thirty- +eight colours fell into the victor's hands. + +The success was gained entirely by the eight hundred allied horse, the +infantry never arriving upon the field. The brilliant little victory, +which was one of the first gained by the allies in the open field, was +the cause of great rejoicings. Not only were the Spaniards no longer +invincible, but they had been routed by a force but one-sixth of their +own number, and the battle showed how greatly the individual prowess of +the two peoples had changed during the progress of the war. + +The Archduke Ernest had died in 1595, and had been succeeded by the +Archduke Albert in the government of the Netherlands. He had with him +no generals comparable with Parma, or even with Alva. His troops had +lost their faith in themselves and their contempt for their foes. +Holland was grown rich and prosperous, while the enormous expenses of +carrying on the war both in the Netherlands and in France, together +with the loss of the Armada, the destruction of the great fleet at +Ferrol, and the capture of Cadiz and the ships there, had exhausted the +resources of Spain, and Philip was driven to make advances for peace to +France and England. Henry IV., knowing that peace with Spain meant an +end of the civil war that had so long exhausted France, at once +accepted the terms of Philip, and made a separate peace, in spite of +the remonstrances of the ambassadors of England and Holland, to both of +which countries he owed it in no small degree that he had been enabled +to support himself against the faction of the Guises backed by the +power of Spain. + +A fresh treaty was made between England and the Netherlands, Sir +Francis Vere being sent out as special ambassador to negotiate. England +was anxious for peace, but would not desert the Netherlands if they on +their part would relieve her to some extent of the heavy expenses +caused by the war. This the States consented to do, and the treaty was +duly signed on both sides. A few days before its conclusion Lord +Burleigh, who had been Queen Elizabeth's chief adviser for forty years, +died, and within a month of its signature Philip of Spain, whose +schemes he had so long opposed, followed him to the grave. + +On the 6th of the previous May Philip had formally ceded the +Netherlands to his daughter Isabella, between whom and the Archduke +Albert a marriage had been arranged. This took place on the 18th of +April following, shortly after his death. It was celebrated at +Valencia, and at the same time King Philip III. was united to Margaret +of Austria. + +In the course of 1599 there was severe fighting on the swampy island +between the rivers Waal and Maas, known as the Bommel-Waat, and a fresh +attempt at invasion by the Spaniards was repulsed with heavy loss, Sir +Francis Vere and the English troops taking a leading part in the +operations. + +The success thus gained decided the States-general to undertake an +offensive campaign in the following year. The plan they decided upon +was opposed both by Prince Maurice and Sir Francis Vere as being +altogether too hazardous; but the States, who upon most occasions were +averse to anything like bold action, upon the present occasion stood +firm to their decision. Their plan was to land an army near Ostend, +which was held by the English, and to besiege the town of Nieuport, +west of Ostend, and after that to attack Dunkirk. In the opinion of the +two generals an offensive operation direct from Holland would have been +far preferable, as in case of disaster the army could fall back upon +one of their fortified towns, whereas, if beaten upon the coast, they +might be cut off from Ostend and entirely destroyed. However, their +opinions were overruled, and the expedition prepared. + +It consisted of 12,000 infantry, 1600 cavalry, and 10 guns. It was +formed into three divisions. The van, 4500 strong, including 1600 +English veterans, was commanded by Sir Francis Vere; the second +division by Count Everard Solms; the rear division by Count Ernest of +Nassau; while Count Louis Gunther of Nassau was in command of the +cavalry. The army embarked at Flushing, and landed at Philippine, a +town at the head of the Braakeman inlet. + +There was at the time only a small body of Spaniards in the +neighbourhood, but as soon as the news reached the Archduke Albert at +Brussels he concentrated his army round Ghent. + +The troops had for some time been in a mutinous state, but, as was +always the case with them, they returned to their habits of military +obedience the moment danger threatened. + +The Dutch army advanced by rapid marches to the neighbourhood of +Ostend, and captured the fort and redoubts which the Spaniards had +raised to prevent its garrison from undertaking offensive operations. + +Two thousand men were left to garrison these important positions, which +lay on the line of march which the Spaniards must take coming from +Bruges to Nieuport. The rest of the army then made their way across the +country, intersected with ditches, and upon the following day arrived +before Nieuport and prepared to besiege it. The Dutch fleet had arrived +off the town, and co-operated with the army in building a bridge across +the little river, and preparing for the siege. + +Towards the evening, however, the news arrived from Ostend, nine miles +away, that a large force of the enemy had appeared before one of the +forts just captured. Most of the officers were of opinion that the +Spanish force was not a large one, and that it was a mere feint to +induce the Dutch to abandon the siege of Nieuport and return to Ostend. +Sir Francis Vere maintained that it was the main body of the archduke's +army, and advised Maurice to march back at once with his whole force to +attack the enemy before they had time to take the forts. + +Later on in the evening, however, two of the messengers arrived with +the news that the forts had surrendered. Prince Maurice then, in +opposition to Vere's advice, sent off 2500 infantry, 500 horse, and 2 +guns, under the command of Ernest of Nassau, to prevent the enemy from +crossing the low ground between Ostend and the sand-hills, Vere +insisting that the whole army ought to move. It fell out exactly as he +predicted; the detachment met the whole Spanish army, and broke and +fled at the first fire, and thus 2500 men were lost in addition to the +2000 who had been left to garrison the forts. + +At break of day the army marched down to the creek, and as soon as the +water had ebbed sufficiently waded across and took up their position +among the sand-hills on the sea-shore. The enemy's army was already in +sight, marching along on the narrow strip of land between the foot of +the dunes and the sea. A few hundred yards towards Ostend the sand- +hills narrowed, and here Sir Francis Vere took up his position with his +division. He placed a thousand picked men, consisting of 250 English, +250 of Prince Maurice's guard, and 500 musketeers, partly upon two +sand-hills called the East and West Hill, and partly in the bottom +between them, where they were covered by a low ridge connecting the two +hills. + +The five hundred musketeers were placed so that their fire swept the +ground on the south, by which alone the enemy's cavalry could pass on +that side. On the other ridge, facing the sea, were seven hundred +English pikemen and musketeers; two hundred and fifty English and fifty +of the guard held the position of East Hill, which was most exposed to +the attack. The rest of the division, which consisted of six hundred +and fifty English and two thousand Dutch, were placed in readiness to +reinforce the advanced party. Half the cavalry, under Count Louis, were +on the right of the dunes, and the other half, under Marcellus Bacx, on +the left by the sea. + +The divisions of Count Solms and Count Ernest of Nassau were also on +the sea-shore in the rear of West Hill. A council of war was held to +decide whether the army should advance to the attack or await it. Vere +advised the latter course, and his advice was adopted. + +The archduke's army consisted of ten thousand infantry, sixteen hundred +horse, and six guns. Marshal Zapena was in command, while the cavalry +were led by the Admiral of Arragon. They rested for two hours before +advancing--waiting until the rise of the tide should render the sands +unserviceable for cavalry, their main reliance being upon their +infantry. Their cavalry led the advance, but the two guns Vere had +placed on West Hill plied them so hotly with shot that they fell back +in confusion. + +It was now high tide, and there were but thirty yards between the sea +and the sand-hills. The Spaniards therefore marched their infantry into +the dunes, while the cavalry prepared to advance between the sand-hills +and the cultivated fields inland. The second and third divisions of +Maurice's army also moved away from the shore inland. They now numbered +but three thousand men, as the four thousand five hundred who had been +lost belonged entirely to these divisions, Sir Francis Vere's division +having been left intact. It was upon the first division that the whole +brunt of the battle fell, they receiving some assistance from the +thousand men remaining under Count Solms that were posted next to them; +while the rear division was never engaged at all. + +At half-past two o'clock on the afternoon of the 2d of June, 1600, the +battle began. Vere's plan was to hold his advanced position as long as +possible, bring the reserves up as required until he had worn out the +Spaniards, then to send for the other two divisions and to fall upon +them. The company of Lionel Vickars formed part of the three hundred +men stationed on the East Hill, where Vere also had taken up his +position. After an exchange of fire for some time five hundred picked +Spanish infantry rushed across the hollow between the two armies, and +charged the hill. For half-an-hour a desperate struggle took place; the +Spaniards were then obliged to fall back behind some low ridges at its +foot. + +In the meantime the enemy's cavalry had advanced along the grass-grown +tract, a hundred and fifty yards wide, between the foot of the dunes +and the cultivated country inland. They were received, however, by so +hot a fire by the five hundred musketeers posted by Vere in the sand- +hills on their flank, and by the two cannon on West Hill, that they +fell back upon their infantry just as the Dutch horse, under Count +Louis, advanced to charge them. + +Vere sent orders to a hundred Englishmen to move round from the ridge +and to attack the Spaniards who had fallen back from the attack of East +Hill, on their flank, while sixty men charged down the hill and engaged +them in front. The Spaniards broke and fled back to their main body. +Then, being largely reinforced, they advanced and seized a sandy knoll +near West Hill. Here they were attacked by the English, and after a +long and obstinate fight forced to retire. The whole of the Spanish +force now advanced, and tried to drive the English back from their +position on the low ridge across the bottom connecting the two hills. +The seven hundred men were drawn from the north ridge, and as the fight +grew hotter the whole of the sixteen hundred English were brought up. + +Vere sent for reinforcements, but none came up, and for hours the +sixteen hundred Englishmen alone checked the advance of the whole of +the Spanish army. Sir Francis Vere was fighting like a private soldier +in the midst of his troops. He received two balls in the leg, but still +kept his seat and encouraged his men. At last the little band, +receiving no aid or reinforcements from the Dutch, were forced to fall +back. As they did so, Vere's horse fell dead under him and partly upon +him, and it was with great difficulty that those around him extricated +him. On reaching the battery on the sands Vere found the thousand Dutch +of his division, who asserted that they had received no orders to +advance. There were also three hundred foot under Sir Horace Vere and +some cavalry under Captain Ball. These and Horace's infantry at once +charged the Spaniards, who were pouring out from the sand-hills near to +the beach, and drove them back. + +[Illustration: Vere's horse shot under him at the fight before Ostend.] + +The Spaniards had now captured East Hill, and two thousand of their +infantry advanced into the valley beyond, and drove back the musketeers +from the south ridge, and a large force advanced along the green way; +but their movements were slow, for they were worn out by their long +struggle, and the English officers had time to rally their men again. +Horace Vere returned from his charge on the beach, and other companies +rallied and joined him, and charged furiously down upon the two +thousand Spaniards. The whole of the Dutch and English cavalry also +advanced. Solms's thousand men came up and took part in the action, and +the batteries plied the Spaniards with their shot. The latter had done +all they could, and were confounded by this fresh attack when they had +considered the victory as won. In spite of the efforts of their +officers they broke and fled in all directions. The archduke headed +their flight, and never drew rein until he reached Brussels. + +Zapena and the Admiral of Arragon were both taken prisoners, and about +a third of the Spanish army killed and wounded. Of the sixteen hundred +English half were killed or wounded; while the rest of the Dutch army +suffered scarcely any loss--a fact that shows clearly to whom the +honour of the victory belongs. Prince Maurice, in his letter to the +queen, attributed his success entirely to the good order and directions +of Sir Francis Vere. Thus, in a pitched battle the English troops met +and defeated an army of six times their strength of the veterans of +Spain, and showed conclusively that the English fighting man had in no +way deteriorated since the days of Agincourt, the last great battle +they had fought upon the Continent. + +The battle at Nieuport may be considered to have set the final seal +upon the independence of Holland. The lesson first taught at Turnhout +had now been impressed with crushing force. The Spaniards were no +longer invincible; they had been twice signally defeated in an open +field by greatly inferior forces. Their prestige was annihilated; and +although a war continued, there was no longer the slightest chance that +the result of the long and bloody struggle would be reversed, or that +Spain would ever again recover her grip of the lost provinces. + +Sir Francis Vere was laid up for some months with his wounds. Among the +officers who fought under him at Nieuport were several whose names were +to become famous for the part they afterwards bore in the civil +struggle in England. Among others were Fairfax, Ogle, Lambart, and +Parker. Among those who received the honour of knighthood for their +behaviour at the battle was Lionel Vickars. He had been severely +wounded in the fight at East Hill, and was sent home to be cured there. +It was some months before he again took the field, which he did upon +the receipt of a letter from Sir Francis Vere, telling him that the +Spaniards were closing in in great force round Ostend, and that his +company was one of those that had been sent off to aid in the defence +of that town. + +During his stay in England he had spent some time with Geoffrey in +London. Juan Mendez had now arrived there, and the business carried on +by him and Geoffrey was flourishing greatly. Dolores had much missed +the outdoor life to which she was accustomed, and her father had bought +a large house with a fine garden in Chelsea; and she and Geoffrey were +now installed there with him, Geoffrey going to and fro from the city +by boat. They had now replaced the Spanish trading vessels by an equal +number of English craft; and at the suggestion of Juan Mendez himself +his name now stood second to that of Geoffrey, for the prejudice +against foreigners was still strong in England. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +OLD FRIENDS. + + +The succession of blows that had been given to the power and commerce +of Spain had immensely benefited the trade of England and Holland. +France, devastated by civil war, had been in no position to take +advantage of the falling off in Spanish commerce, and had indeed +herself suffered enormously by the emigration of tens of thousands of +the most intelligent of her population owing to her persecution of the +Protestants. Her traders and manufacturers largely belonged to the new +religion, and these had carried their industry and knowledge to England +and Holland. Thus the religious bigotry of the kings of Spain and +France had resulted in enormous loss to the trade and commerce of those +countries, and in corresponding advantage to their Protestant rivals. + +Geoffrey Vickars and his partner reaped the full benefit of the change, +and the extensive acquaintance of the Spanish trader with merchants in +all the Mediterranean ports enabled him to turn a large share of the +new current of trade into the hands of Geoffrey and himself. The +capital which he transferred from Spain to England was very much larger +than that employed by the majority of English merchants, whose wealth +had been small indeed in comparison to that of the merchant princes of +the great centres of trade such as Antwerp, Amsterdam, Genoa, and +Cadiz, and Geoffrey Vickars soon came to be looked upon as one of the +leading merchants in the city of London. + +"There can be no doubt, Geoffrey," his brother said as he lay on a +couch in the garden in the early days of his convalescence, and looked +at the river dotted with boats that flowed past it, "the falling of +that mast was a fortunate thing for you. One never can tell how things +will turn out. It would have seemed as if, were you not drowned at +once, your lot would have been either a life's work in the Spanish +galleys, or death in the dungeons of the Inquisition. Instead of this, +here you are a wealthy merchant in the city, with a charming wife, and +a father-in-law who is, although a Spaniard, one of the kindest and +best men I ever met. All this time I, who was not knocked over by that +mast, have been drilling recruits, making long marches, and +occasionally fighting battles, and am no richer now than the day when +we started together as Francis Vere's pages. It is true I have received +the honour of knighthood, and that of course I prize much; but I have +only my captain's pay to support my dignity, and as I hardly think +Spain will continue this useless struggle much longer, in which case +our army in Holland will be speedily disbanded, the prospect before me +is not altogether an advantageous one." + +"You must marry an heiress, Lionel," Geoffrey laughed. "Surely Sir +Lionel Vickars, one of the heroes of Nieuport, and many another field, +should be able to win the heart of some fair English damsel, with broad +acres as her dower. But seriously, Lionel," he went on, changing his +tone, "if peace come, and with it lack of employment, the best thing +for you will be to join me. Mendez is getting on in years; and although +he is working hard at present, in order, as he says, to set everything +going smoothly and well here, he is looking forward to taking matters +more easily, and to spending his time in tranquil pleasure with Dolores +and her children. Therefore, whensoever it pleases you, there is a +place for you here. We always contemplated our lines running in the +same groove, and I should be glad that they should do so still. When +the time comes we can discuss what share you shall have of the +business; but at any rate I can promise you that it shall be sufficient +to make you a rich man." + +"Thank you, with all my heart, Geoffrey. It may be that some day I will +accept your offer, though I fear you will find me but a sorry +assistant. It seems to me that after twelve years of campaigning I am +little fitted for life as a city merchant." + +"I went through plenty of adventure for six years, Lionel, but my +father-in-law has from the first been well satisfied with my capacity +for business. You are not seven-and-twenty yet. You have had enough +rough campaigning to satisfy anyone, and should be glad now of an +easier and more sober method of life. Well, there is no occasion to +settle anything at present, and I can well understand that you should +prefer remaining in the army until the war comes to an end. When it +does so, we can talk the matter over again; only be well assured that +the offer will be always open to you, and that I shall be glad indeed +to have you with me." + +A few days after Lionel left him Geoffrey was passing along Chepe, when +he stopped suddenly, stared hard at a gentleman who was approaching +him, and then rushed towards him with outstretched hand. + +"My dear Gerald!" he exclaimed, "I am glad to see you." + +The gentleman started back with an expression of the profoundest +astonishment. + +"Is it possible?" he cried. "Is it really Geoffrey Vickars?" + +"Myself, and no other, Gerald." + +"The saints be praised! Why, I have been thinking of you all these +years as either dead or labouring at an oar in the Moorish galleys. By +what good fortune did you escape? and how is it I find you here, +looking for all the world like a merchant of the city?" + +"It is too long a story to tell now, Gerald. Where are you staying?" + +"I have lodgings at Westminster, being at present a suitor at court." + +"Is your wife with you?" + +"She is. I have left my four children at home in Ireland." + +"Then bring her to sup with me this evening. I have a wife to introduce +to yours, and as she is also a Spaniard it will doubtless be a pleasure +to them both." + +"You astound me, Geoffrey. However, you shall tell me all about it this +evening, for be assured that we shall come. Inez has so often talked +about you, and lamented the ill-fortune that befell you owing to your +ardour." + +"At six o'clock, then," Geoffrey said. "I generally dwell with my +father-in-law at Chelsea, but am just at present at home. My house is +in St. Mary Axe; anyone there will tell you which it is." + +That evening the two friends had a long talk together Geoffrey learnt +that Gerald Burke reached Italy without further adventure, and thence +took ship to Bristol, and so crossed over to Ireland. On his petition, +and solemn promise of good behaviour in future, he was pardoned and a +small portion of his estate restored to him. He was now in London +endeavouring to obtain a remission of the forfeiture of the rest. + +"I may be able to help you in that," Geoffrey said. "Sir Francis Vere +is high in favour at court, and he will, at my prayer, I feel sure, use +his influence in your favour when I tell him how you acted my friend on +my landing in Spain from the Armada." + +Geoffrey then gave an account of his various adventures from the time +when he was struck down from the deck of the Barbary corsair until the +present time. + +"How was it," he asked when he concluded, "that you did not write to my +parents, Gerald, on your return home? You knew where they lived." + +"I talked the matter over with Inez," Gerald replied, "and we agreed +that it was kinder to them to be silent. Of course they had mourned you +as killed in the fight with the Armada. A year had passed, and the +wound must have somewhat healed. Had I told them that you had escaped +death at that time, had been months with me in Spain, and had, on your +way home, been either killed by the Moors or were a prisoner in their +galleys, it would have opened the wound afresh, and caused them renewed +pain and sorrow." + +"No doubt you were right, Gerald, and that it was, as you say, the +kindest thing to leave them in ignorance of my fate." + +Upon the next visit Sir Francis Vere paid to England, Geoffrey spoke to +him with regard to Gerald Burke's affairs. Sir Francis took the matter +up warmly, and his influence sufficed in a very short time to obtain an +order for the restoration to Gerald of all his estates. Inez and +Dolores became as fast friends as were their husbands; and when the +Burkes came to England Geoffrey's house was their home. + +The meeting with Gerald was followed by a still greater surprise, for +not many days after, when Geoffrey was sitting with his wife and Don +Mendez under the shade of a broad cypress in the garden of the +merchant's house at Chelsea, they saw a servant coming across towards +them, followed by a man in seafaring attire. "Here is a person who +would speak to you, Master Vickars," the servant said. "I told him it +was not your custom to see any here, and that if he had aught to say he +should call at your house in St. Mary Axe; but he said that he had but +just arrived from Hedingham, and that your honour would excuse his +intrusion when you saw him." + +"Bring him up; he may be the bearer of a message from my father," +Geoffrey said; and the servant went back to the man, whom he had left a +short distance off. + +"Master Vickars will speak with you." + +The sailor approached the party. He stood for a minute before Geoffrey +without speaking. Geoffrey looked at him with some surprise, and saw +that the muscles of his face were twitching, and that he was much +agitated. As he looked at him remembrance suddenly flashed upon him, +and he sprang to his feet. "Stephen Boldero!" he exclaimed. + +"Ay, ay, Geoffrey, it is me." + +For a time the men stood with their right hands clasped and the left on +each other's shoulders. Tears fell down the sailor's weather-beaten +cheeks, and Geoffrey himself was too moved to speak. For two years they +had lived as brothers, had shared each other's toils and dangers, had +talked over their plans and hopes together; and it was to Stephen that +Geoffrey owed it that he was not now a galley-slave in Barbary. + +"Old friend, where have you been all this time?" he said at last. "I +had thought you dead, and have grieved sorely for you." + +"I have had some narrow escapes," Stephen said; "but you know I am +tough. I am worth a good many dead men yet." + +"Inez, Senor Mendez, you both remember Stephen Boldero?" Geoffrey said, +turning to them. + +"We have never forgotten you," the Spaniard said, shaking hands with +the sailor, "nor how much we owe to you. I sent out instructions by +every ship that sailed to the Indies that inquiries should be made for +you; and moreover had letters sent by influential friends to the +governors of most of the islands saying that you had done great service +to me and mine, and praying that if you were in any need or trouble you +might be sent back to Cadiz, and that any moneys you required might be +given to you at my charge. But we have heard nought of you from the day +when the news came that you had left the ship in which you went out." + +"I have had a rough time of it these five years," Stephen said. "But I +care not now that I am home again and have found my friend Geoffrey. I +arrived in Bristol but last week, and started for London on the day I +landed, mindful of my promise to let his people know that he was safe +and well, and with some faint hope that the capture of Cadiz had set +him at liberty. I got to Hedingham last night, and if I had been a +prince Mr. Vickars and his dame and Sir Lionel could not have made more +of me. They were fain that I should stop with them a day or two; but +when I heard that you were in London and had married Senora Dolores, +and that Senor Mendez was with you--all of which in no way surprised +me, for methought I saw it coming before I left Cadiz--I could not +rest, but was up at daylight this morning. Your brother offered to +procure me a horse, but I should have made bad weather on the craft, +and after walking from Bristol the tramp up to London was nothing. I +got to your house in the city at four; and, finding that you were here, +took a boat at once, for I could not rest until I saw my friend again." + +Geoffrey at once took him into the house and set him down to a meal; +and when the party were gathered later on in the sitting-room, and the +candles were lighted, Stephen told his story. + +"As you will have heard, we made a good voyage to the Indies. We +discharged our cargo, and took in another. I learned that there were +two English ships cruising near San Domingo, and the Dons were in great +fear of them. I thought that my chance lay in joining them, so when we +were at our nearest port to that island I one night borrowed one of the +ship's boats without asking leave, and made off. I knew the direction +in which San Domingo lay, but no more. My hope was that I should either +fall in with our ships at sea, or, when I made the island, should be +able to gather such information as might guide me to them. When I made +the land, after being four days out, I cruised about till the +provisions and water I had put on board were exhausted, and I could +hold out no longer. Then I made for the island and landed. + +"You may be sure I did not make for a port, where I should be +questioned, but ran ashore in a wooded bay that looked as if no one had +ever set foot there before. I dragged the boat up beyond, as I thought, +the reach of the sea, and started to hunt for food and water. I found +enough berries and things to keep me alive, but not enough to stock my +boat for another cruise. A week after I landed there was a tornado, and +when it cleared off and I had recovered from my fright--for the trees +were blown down like rushes, and I thought my last day was come--I +found that the boat was washed away. I was mightily disheartened at +this, and after much thinking made up my mind that there was nought +for it but to keep along the shore until I arrived at a port, and then to +give out that I was a shipwrecked sailor, and either try to get hold of +another boat, or take passage back to Spain and make a fresh start. +However, the next morning, just as I was starting, a number of natives +ran out of the bush and seized me, and carried me away up into the hills. + +"It was not pleasant at first, for they lit a big fire and were going +to set me on the top of it, taking me for a Spaniard. Seeing their +intentions, I took to arguing with them, and told them in Spanish that +I was no Spaniard, but an Englishman, and that I had been a slave to +the Spaniards and had escaped. Most of them understood some Spanish, +having themselves been made to work as slaves in their plantations, and +being all runaways from the tyranny of their masters. They knew, of +course, that we were the enemies of the Spaniards, and had heard of +places being sacked and ships taken by us. But they doubted my story +for a long time, till at last one of them brought a crucifix that had +somehow fallen into their hands, and held it up before me. When I +struck it down, as a good Protestant should do, they saw that I was not +of the Spanish religion, and so loosed my bonds and made much of me. + +"They could tell me nothing of the whereabouts of our ships, for though +they had seen vessels at times sail by, the poor creatures knew nothing +of the difference of rig between an English craft and a Spaniard. I +abode with them for two years, and aided them in their fights whenever +the Spaniards sent out parties, which they did many times, to capture +them. They were poor, timorous creatures, their spirits being +altogether broken by the tyranny of the Dons; but when they saw that I +feared them not, and was ready at any time to match myself against two +or, if need be, three of the Spaniards, they plucked up heart, and in +time came to fight so stoutly that the Spaniards thought it best to +leave them alone, seeing that we had the advantage of knowing every +foot of the woods, and were able to pounce down upon them when they +were in straitened places and forced to fight at great disadvantage. + +"I was regarded as a great chief by the natives, and could have gone on +living with them comfortably enough had not my thoughts been always +turning homeward, and a great desire to be among my own people, from +whom I had been so long separated, devoured me. At last a Spanish ship +was driven ashore in a gale; she went to pieces, and every soul was +drowned. When the gale abated the natives went down to collect the +stores driven ashore, and I found on the beach one of her boats washed +up almost uninjured, so nothing would do but I must sail away in her. +The natives tried their hardest to persuade me to stay with them, but +finding that my mind was fixed beyond recall they gave way and did +their best to aid me. The boat was well stored with provisions; we made +a sail for her out of one belonging to the ship, and I set off, +promising them that if I could not alight upon an English ship I would +return to them. + +"I had intended to keep my promise, but things turned out otherwise. I +had not been two days at sea when there was another storm, for at one +time of the year they have tornadoes very frequently. I had nothing to +do but to run for it, casting much of my provisions overboard to +lighten the boat, and baling without ceasing to keep out the water she +took in. After running for many hours I was, somewhere about midnight, +cast on shore. I made a shift to save myself, and in the morning found +that I was on a low key. Here I lived for three weeks. Fortunately +there was water in some of the hollows of the rocks, and as turtles +came ashore to lay their eggs I managed pretty well for a time; but the +water dried up, and for the last week I had nought to drink but the +blood of the turtles. One morning I saw a ship passing not far off, and +making a signal with the mast of the boat that had been washed ashore +with me I attracted their attention. I saw that she was a Spaniard, but +I could not help that, for I had no choice but to hail her. They took me +to Porto Rico and there reported me as a shipwrecked sailor they had +picked up. The governor questioned me closely as to what vessel I +had been lost from, and although I made up a good story he had his +doubts. Fortunately it did not enter his mind that I was not a Spaniard; +but he said he believed I was some bad character who had been +marooned by my comrades for murder or some other crime, and so +put me in prison until he could learn something that would verify my story. + +"After three months I was taken out of prison, but was set to work on +the fortifications, and there for another two years I had to stop. Then +I managed to slip away one day, and, hiding till nightfall, made my way +down through the town to the quays and swam out to a vessel at anchor. +I climbed on board without notice, and hid myself below, where I lay +for two days until she got up sail. When I judged she was well away +from the land I went on deck and told my story, that I was a +shipwrecked sailor who had been forced by the governor to work at the +fortifications. They did not believe me, saying that I must be some +criminal who had escaped from justice, and the captain said he should +give me up at the next port the ship touched. Fortunately four days +afterwards a sail hove in sight and gave chase, and before it was dark +was near enough to fire a gun and make us heave to, and a quarter of an +hour later a boat came alongside, and I again heard English spoken for +the first time since I had left you at Cadiz. + +"It was an English bucaneer, who, being short of water and fresh +vegetables, had chased us, though seeing we were but a petty trader and +not likely to have aught else worth taking on board. They wondered much +when I discovered myself to them and told them who I was and how I had +come there; and when, on their rowing me on board their ship, I told +the captain my story he told me that he thought I was the greatest liar +he had ever met. To be a galley-slave among the Spaniards, a galley- +slave among the Moors, a consorter with Indians for two years, and +again a prisoner with the Spaniards for as much more, was more than +fell to the lot of any one man, and he, like the Spanish governor, +believed that I was some rascal who had been marooned, only he thought +that it was from an English ship. However, he said that as I was a +stout fellow he would give me another chance; and when, a fortnight +later, we fell in with a great Spanish galleon and captured her with a +great store of prize-money after a hard fight for six hours, the last +of which was passed on the deck of the Spaniard cutting and slashing-- +for, being laden with silver, she had a company of troops on board in +addition to her crew--the captain said, that though an astonishing liar +there was no better fellow on board a ship, and, putting it to the +crew, they agreed I had well earned my share of the prize-money. When +we had got the silver on board, which was a heavy job I can tell you, +though not an unpleasant one, we put what Spaniards remained alive into +the boats, fired the galleon, and set sail for England, where we +arrived without adventure. The silver was divided on the day before +we cast anchor, the owner's share being first set aside, every man his +share, and the officers theirs in proportion. Mine came to over a thousand +pounds, and it needed two strong men to carry the chest up to the +office of the owners, who gave me a receipt for it, which, as soon as +I got, I started for London; and here, as you see, I am." + +"And now, what do you propose to do with yourself. Stephen?" Geoffrey +asked. + +"I shall first travel down again to Devonshire and see what friends I +have remaining there. I do not expect to find many alive, for fifteen +years make many changes. My father and mother were both dead before I +started, and my uncle, with whom I lived for a time, is scarce like to +be alive now. Still I may find some cousins and friends I knew as a +boy." + +"I should think you have had enough of the sea, Stephen, and you have +now ample to live ashore in comfort for the rest of your life." + +"Yes, I shall go no more to sea," Stephen said. "Except for this last +stroke of luck fortune has always been against me. What I should like, +Master Geoffrey, most of all, would be to come up and work under you. I +could be of advantage in seeing to the loading and unloading vessels +and the storage of cargo. As for pay, I should not want it, having, as +you say, enough to live comfortably upon. Still I should like to be +with you." + +"And I should like to have you with me, Stephen. Nothing would give me +greater pleasure. If you are still of that mind when you return from +Devonshire we can again talk the matter over, and as our wishes are +both the same way we can have no difficulty in coming to an agreement." + +Stephen Boldero remained for a week in London and then journeyed down +to Devonshire. His idea of entering Geoffrey's service was never +carried out, for after he had been gone two months Geoffrey received a +letter from him saying that one of his cousins, who had been but a +little girl when he went away, had laid her orders upon him to buy a +small estate and settle down there, and that as she was willing to +marry him on no other terms he had nothing to do but to assent. + +Once a year, however, regularly to the end of his life Stephen Boldero +came up to London to stay for a fortnight with Geoffrey, always coming +by road, for he declared that he was convinced if he set foot on board +a ship again she would infallibly be wrecked on her voyage to London. + + + + +Chapter XXIII. + +The Siege of Ostend. + + +On the 5th of July, 1601, the Archduke Albert began the siege of Ostend +with 20,000 men and 50 siege-guns. Ostend had been completely rebuilt +and fortified eighteen years previously, and was defended by ramparts, +counterscarps, and two broad ditches. The sand-hills between it and the +sea were cut through, and the water filled the ditches and surrounded +the town. To the south the country was intersected by a network of +canals. The river Yper-Leet came in at the back of the town, and after +mingling with the salt water in the ditches found its way to the sea +through the channels known as the Old Haven and the Geule, the first on +the west, the second on the east of the town. + +On either side of these channels the land rose slightly, enabling the +besiegers to plant their batteries in very advantageous positions. The +garrison at first consisted of but 2000 men under Governor Vander Nood. +The States-general considered the defence of Ostend to be of extreme +importance to the cause, and appointed Sir Francis Vere general of the +army in and about Ostend, and sent with him 600 Dutch troops and eight +companies of English under the command of his brother, Sir Horace. This +raised the garrison to the strength of 3600 men. Sir Francis landed +with these reinforcements on the sands opposite the old town, which +stood near the sea-shore between the Old Haven and the Geule, and was +separated from the new town by a broad channel. He was forced to land +here, as the Spanish guns on the sand-hills commanded the entrances of +the two channels. + +[Illustration: OSTEND 1601.] + +Sixteen thousand of the Spanish troops under the order of the archduke +were encamped to the west of the town, and had 30 of their siege-guns +in position there, while 4000 men were stationed on the east of the +town under Count Bucquoy. Ten guns were in position on that side. +Ostend had no natural advantages for defence beyond the facility of +letting the sea into the numerous channels and ditches which +intersected the city, and protected it from any operations on the south +side. On the east the Geule was broad and deep, and an assault from +this side was very difficult. The Old Haven, on the west side, was fast +filling up, and was fordable for four hours every tide. + +This, therefore, was the weak side of the town. The portion especially +exposed to attack was the low sandy flat on which the old town stood, +to the north of Ostend. It was against this point, separated only from +the enemy's position by the shallow Old Haven, that the Spaniards +concentrated their efforts. The defence here consisted of a work called +the Porc-Espic, and a bastion in its rear called the Helmond. These +works lay to the north of the ditch dividing the old from the new town, +while on the opposite side of this ditch was a fort called the Sand- +hill, from which along the sea face of the town ran strong palisades +and bastions. + +The three principal bastions were named the Schottenburg, Moses' Table, +and the Flamenburg, the last-named defending the entrance to the Geule +on the eastern side. There was a strong wall with three bastions, the +North Bulwark, the East Bulwark or Pekell, and the Spanish Bulwark at +the south-east angle, with an outwork called the Spanish Half-moon on +the other side of the Geule. The south side was similarly defended by a +wall with four strong bastions, while beyond these at the south-west +corner lay a field called the Polder, extending to the point where the +Yper-Leet ran into the ditches. + +Sir Francis Vere's first step after his arrival was to throw up three +redoubts to strengthen the wall round this field, as had the enemy +taken possession of it they might have set the windmills upon it to +work and have drained out many of the ditches. Having secured this +point he cut a passage to the sea between the North-west Bulwark and +the Flamenburg Fort, so that shipping might enter the port without +having to ascend the Geule, exposed to the fire of the Spanish guns. To +annoy the enemy and draw them away from the vital point near the sea, +he then stationed 200 men on some rising ground surrounded by swamps +and ditches at some distance to the south of the city, and from here +they were able to open fire on the enemy's boats coming with supplies +from Bruges. + +The operation was successful. The Spaniards, finding their line of +communication threatened, advanced in force from their position by the +sea, and their forts opened a heavy fire on the little work thrown up. +Other similar attempts would have been made to harass the Spaniards and +divert them from their main work, had not Sir Francis Vere been +severely wounded in the head on the 4th of August by a shot from the +Spanish batteries, which continued to keep up a tremendous fire upon +the town. So serious was the wound that the surgeons were of opinion +that the only chance of saving his life was to send him away from the +din and turmoil of the siege; and on the 10th he was taken to +Middelburg, where he remained for a month, returning to Ostend long +before his wound was properly healed. + +On the 1st of August a batch of recruits had arrived from England, and +on the 8th 1200 more were landed. The fire of the besiegers was now so +heavy that the soldiers were forced to dig underground quarters to +shelter themselves. Sir Horace Vere led out several sorties; but the +besiegers, no longer distracted by the feints contrived by Sir Francis, +succeeded in erecting a battery on the margin of the Old Haven, and +opened fire on the Sand-hill Fort. + +On the 19th of September Sir Francis Vere returned to the town, to the +great joy of the garrison. Reinforcements continued to arrive, and at +this time the garrison numbered 4480. There were, too, a large number +of noblemen and gentlemen from England, France, and Holland, who had +come to learn the art of war under the man who was regarded as the +greatest general of the time. All who were willing to work and learn +were heartily welcomed; those who were unwilling to do so were soon +made to feel that a besieged city was no place for them. + +While the fighting was going on the archduke had attempted to capture +the place by treason. He engaged a traitor named Coningsby; who crossed +to England, obtained letters of introduction to Vere, and then went to +Ostend. Thence he sent intelligence to the besiegers of all that took +place in the town, placing his letters at night in an old boat sunk in +the mud on the bank of the Old Haven, a Spaniard wading across at low +tide and fetching them away. He then attempted to bribe a sergeant to +blow up the powder magazine. The sergeant revealed the plot. Coningsby +was seized and confessed everything, and by an act of extraordinary +clemency was only sentenced to be whipped out of town. + +This act of treachery on the part of the archduke justified the +otherwise dishonourable stratagem afterwards played by Vere upon him. +All through October and November the Spaniards were hard at work +advancing their batteries, sinking great baskets filled with sand in +the Old Haven to facilitate the passage of the troops, and building +floating batteries in the Geule. On the night of the 4th of December +they advanced suddenly to the attack. Vere and his officers leapt from +their beds and rushed to the walls, and after a fierce struggle the +besiegers were driven back. Straw was lighted to enable the musketeers +and gunners to fire upon them as they retreated, and the assault cost +them five hundred lives. + +On the 12th a hard frost set in, and until Christmas a strong gale from +the south-east blew. No succour could reach the town. The garrison were +dwindling fast, and ammunition falling short. It required fully 4000 +men to guard the walls and forts, while but 2500 remained capable of +bearing arms. It was known that the archduke soon intended to make an +assault with his whole force, and Vere knew that he could scarcely hope +to repel it. He called a council of his chief officers, and asked their +opinion whether with the present numbers all parts of the works could +be manned in case of assault, and if not whether it was advisable to +withdraw the guards from all the outlying positions and to hold only +the town. + +They were unanimously of opinion that the force was too small to defend +the whole, but Sir Horace Vere and Sir John Ogle alone gave their +advice to abandon the outlying forts rather than endanger the loss of +the town. The other officers were of opinion that all the works should +be held, although they acknowledged that the disposable force was +incapable of doing so. Some days elapsed, and Vere learned that the +Spanish preparations were all complete, and that they were only waiting +for a low tide to attack. Time was everything, for a change of wind +would bring speedy succour, so without taking council with anyone he +sent Sir John Ogle with a drummer to the side of the Old Haven. + +Don Mateo Serrano came forward, and Ogle gave his message, which was +that General Vere wished to have some qualified person to speak to him. +This was reported to the archduke, who agreed that Serrano and another +Spanish officer should go into the town, and that Ogle and a comrade +should come as hostages into the Spanish camp. Sir John Ogle took his +friend Sir Charles Fairfax with him, and Serrano and Colonel Antonio +crossed into Ostend. The two Englishmen were conducted to the archduke, +who asked Sir John Ogle to tell him if there was any deceit in the +matter. Ogle answered if there were it was more than he knew, for Vere +had simply charged him to carry the message, and that he and Fairfax +had merely come as hostages for the safe return of the Spanish +officers. + +Ogle was next asked whether he thought the general intended sincerely +or not, and could only reply that he was altogether unacquainted with +the general's purpose. + +The next morning Serrano and Antonio returned without having seen Vere. +The pretext on which they had been sent back was that there was some +irregularity in their coming across; but instead of their being sent +back across the Old Haven they were sent across the Geule, and had to +make a long round to regain the archduke's camp. + +Thus a day and a night were gained. The next day, towards evening, the +two Spanish officers were admitted into Ostend, and received very +hospitably by Sir Francis. After supper many healths were drunk, and +then Sir Francis informed them to their astonishment that his proposal +was not that he should surrender Ostend, but that the archduke should +raise the siege. But it was now far too late for them to return, and +they went to bed in the general's quarters. During the two nights thus +gained the defenders had worked incessantly in repairing the palisades +facing the point at which the attack would take place, a work that they +had hitherto been unable to perform owing to the tremendous fire that +the Spaniards kept up night and day upon it. + +At break of day five men-of-war from Zeeland came to anchor off the +town. They brought four hundred men, and provisions and materials of +war of all kinds. They were immediately landed under a heavy fire from +the enemy's batteries on both sides. The firing awoke the two Spanish +envoys, who inquired what was taking place. They were politely informed +by Sir Francis Vere that succour had arrived, and the negotiations were +of course broken off; and they were accordingly sent back, while Ogle +and Fairfax returned to Ostend. + +Vere's account of the transaction was that he had simply asked for two +Spanish officers to speak with him. He had offered no terms, and there +was therefore no breach of faith. The commander of a besieged town, he +insisted, is always at liberty to propose a parley, which the enemy can +accept or not as he chooses. At any rate, it was not for the archduke, +who had hired a traitor to corrupt the garrison, to make a complaint of +treachery. + +Twelve hundred men were employed for the next eight days in +strengthening the works, Sir Francis being always with them at night, +when the water was low, encouraging them by his presence and example. + +Early in January he learned that the enemy were preparing for the +assault, and on the 7th a crushing fire was kept up on the Porc-Espic, +Helmond, and Sand-hill forts. The Spaniards had by this time fired +163,200 cannon-shot into the town, and scarcely a whole house was left +standing. Towards evening they were seen bringing scaling-ladders to +the opposite bank of the Haven. Two thousand Italian and Spanish troops +had been told off to attack the sand-hill, two thousand were to assault +Helmond and the Porc-Espic, two parties of five hundred men each were +to attack other works, while on the east side Count Bucquoy was to +deliver a general assault. + +The English general watched all these preparations with the greatest +vigilance. At high water he closed the west sluice, which let the water +into the town ditch from the Old Haven, in the rear of Helmond, in +order to retain as much water as possible, and stationed his troops at +the various points most threatened. Sir Horace Vere and Sir Charles +Fairfax, with twelve weak companies, some of them reduced to ten or +twelve men, were stationed on the sand-hill. + +Four of the strongest companies garrisoned the Porc-Espic; ten weak +companies and nine cannon loaded with musket bullets defended the +Helmond. These posts were commanded by Sergeant-major Carpenter and +Captain Meetkerk; the rest of the force were disposed at the other +threatened points. Sir Francis himself, with Sir Lionel Vickars as his +right hand, took his post on the wall of the old town, between the +sand-hill and the Schottenburg, which had been much damaged by the +action of the waves during the gales and by the enemy's shot. Barrels +of ashes, heaps of stones and bricks, hoops bound with squibs and +fireworks, ropes of pitch, hand-grenades, and barrels of nails were +collected in readiness to hurl down upon the assailants. + +At dusk the besiegers ceased firing, to allow the guns to cool. Two +engineer officers with fifty stout sappers, who each had a rose-noble +for every quarter of an hour's work, got on to the breach in front of +the sand-hill, and threw up a small breastwork, strengthened by +palisades, across it. An officer crept down towards the Old Haven, and +presently returned with the news that two thousand of the enemy were +wading across, and forming up in battalions on the Ostend side. + +Suddenly a gun boomed out from the archduke's camp as a signal to +Bucquoy, and just as the night had fairly set in the besiegers rushed +to the assault from all points. They were received by a tremendous fire +from the guns of the forts and the muskets of the soldiers; but, +although the effect was serious, they did not hesitate a moment, but +dashed forwards towards the foot of the sand-hill and the wall of the +old town, halted for a moment, poured in a volley, and then rushed into +the breach and against the walls. The volley had been harmless, for +Vere had ordered the men to lie flat until it was given. As the +Spaniards climbed up barrels of ashes were emptied upon them, stones +and heavy timbers hurled down, and flaming hoops cast over their necks. +Three times they climbed to the crest of the sand-hill, and as many +times gained a footing on the Schottenburg; but each time they were +beaten back with great slaughter. As fiercely did they attack at the +other points, but were everywhere repulsed. + +On the east side three strong battalions of the enemy attacked the +outwork across the Geule, known as the Spanish Half-moon. Vere, who was +everywhere supervising the defence, ordered the weak garrison there to +withdraw, and sent a soldier out to give himself up, and to tell them +that the Half-moon was slenderly manned, and to offer to lead them in. +The offer was accepted, and the Spaniards took possession of the work. + +The general's object was to occupy them, and prevent their supporting +their comrades in the western attack. The Half-moon, indeed, was quite +open towards the town. Tide was rising, and a heavy fire was opened +upon the captors of the work from the batteries across the Geule, and +they were driven out with the loss of three hundred men. At length the +assault was repulsed at all points, and the assailants began to retire +across the Old Haven. No sooner did they begin to ford it than Vere +opened the west sluice, and the water in the town ditch rushed down in +a torrent, carrying numbers of the Spaniards away into the sea. + +Altogether, the assault cost the Spaniards two thousand men. An +enormous amount of plunder in arms, gold chains, jewels, and rich +garments were obtained by the defenders from the bodies of the fallen. +The loss of the garrison was only thirty killed and a hundred wounded. + +The repulse of the grand attack upon Ostend by no means put an end to +the siege. Sir Francis Vere, his brother Horace, Sir John Ogle, and Sir +Lionel Vickars left, the general being summoned to assume command in +the field; but the siege continued for two years and a half longer. +Many assaults were repulsed during that time, and the town only +surrendered on the 20th September, 1604, when the sand-hill, which was +the key of the whole position, was at last captured by the Spaniards. + +It was but a heap of ruins that they had become possessed of after +their three years' siege, and its capture had not only cost them an +immense number of men and a vast amount of money, but the long and +gallant defence had secured upon a firm basis the independence of +Holland. While the whole available force of Spain had been so occupied +Prince Maurice and his English allies had captured town after town, and +had beaten the enemy whenever they attempted to show themselves in the +open field. They had more than counterbalanced the loss of Ostend by +the recapture of Sluys, and had so lowered the Spanish pride that not +long afterwards a twelve years' truce was concluded, which virtually +brought the war to an end, and secured for ever the independence of +Holland. + +During the last year or two of the war Sir Francis Vere, worn out by +his fatigues and the countless wounds he had received in the service of +the Netherlands, had resigned his command and retired to England, being +succeeded in his position by Sir Horace. Lionel Vickars fought no more +after he had borne his part in the repulse of the great assault against +Ostend. He had barely recovered from the effect of the wound he had +received at the battle of Nieuport, and the fatigues and anxiety of the +siege, together with the damp air from the marshes, brought on a +serious attack of fever, which completely prostrated him as soon as the +necessity for exertion had passed. He remained some weeks at the Hague, +and then, being somewhat recovered, returned home. + +While throughout all England the greatest enthusiasm had been aroused +by the victory of Nieuport and the repulse of the Spaniards at Ostend, +the feeling was naturally higher in the Vere's county of Essex than +elsewhere. As soon as Lionel Vickars was well enough to take any share +in gaieties he received many invitations to stay at the great houses of +the county, where most of the gentry were more or less closely +connected with the Veres; and before he had been home many months he +married Dorothy Windhurst, one of the richest heiresses in the county, +and a cousin of the Veres. Thus Geoffrey had, after Juan Mendez retired +from taking any active part in the business, to work alone until his +sons were old enough to join him in the business. As soon as they were +able to undertake its active management, Geoffrey bought an estate near +Hedingham, and there settled down, journeying occasionally to London to +see how the affairs of the house went on, and to give advice to his +sons. Dolores had, two or three years after her arrival in England, +embraced the faith of her husband; and although she complained a little +at times of the English climate, she never once regretted the step she +had taken in leaving her native Spain. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY ENGLAND'S AID *** + +This file should be named 7beng10.txt or 7beng10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 7beng11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 7beng10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext05 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext05 + +Or /etext04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, +91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + + PROJECT GUTENBERG LITERARY ARCHIVE FOUNDATION + 809 North 1500 West + Salt Lake City, UT 84116 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/7beng10.zip b/old/7beng10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..137ebc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/7beng10.zip diff --git a/old/8beng10.txt b/old/8beng10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4fab2a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/8beng10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12607 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of By England's Aid, by G. A. Henty + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: By England's Aid + +Author: G. A. Henty + +Release Date: August, 2005 [EBook #8679] +[This file was first posted on July 31, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY ENGLAND'S AID *** + + + + +E-text prepared by Charles Franks, Michelle Shephard, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team + + + +By England's Aid + +Or, +Or, the Freeing of the Netherlands, 1585-1604 + +BY + +G. A. HENTY + + + + + + + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY AND LIONEL SAVE FRANCIS VERE'S LIFE] + + + + +PREFACE. + + +In my preface to _By Pike and Dyke_ I promised in a future story +to deal with the closing events of the War of Independence in Holland. +The period over which that war extended was so long, and the incidents +were so numerous and varied, that it was impossible to include the +whole within the limit of a single book. The former volume brought the +story of the struggle down to the death of the Prince of Orange and the +capture of Antwerp; the present gives the second phase of the war, when +England, who had long unofficially assisted Holland, threw herself +openly into the struggle, and by her aid mainly contributed to the +successful issue of the war. In the first part of the struggle the +scene lay wholly among the low lands and cities of Holland and Zeeland, +and the war was strictly a defensive one, waged against overpowering +odds. After England threw herself into the strife it assumed far wider +proportions, and the independence of the Netherlands was mainly secured +by the defeat and destruction of the great Armada, by the capture of +Cadiz and the fatal blow thereby struck at the mercantile prosperity of +Spain, and by the defeat of the Holy League by Henry of Navarre, aided +by English soldiers and English gold. For the facts connected with the +doings of Sir Francis Vere and the British contingent in Holland, I +have depended much upon the excellent work by Mr. Clement Markham +entitled the _Fighting Veres_. In this full justice is done to the +great English general and his followers, and it is conclusively shown +that some statements to the disparagement of Sir Francis Vere by Mr. +Motley are founded upon a misconception of the facts. Sir Francis Vere +was, in the general opinion of the time, one of the greatest commanders +of the age, and more, perhaps, than any other man--with the exception +of the Prince of Orange--contributed to the successful issue of the +struggle of Holland to throw off the yoke of Spain. + + G. A. HENTY. + + + + +CONTENTS + + +CHAP. + + I. AN EXCURSION + II. A MEETING IN CHEPE + III. IN THE LOW COUNTRY + IV. THE SIEGE OP SLUYS + V. AN HEROIC DEFENCE + VI. THE LOSS OF THE "SUSAN" + VII. A POPISH PLOT + VIII. THE SPANISH ARMADA + IX. THE ROUT OF THE ARMADA + X. THE WAR IN HOLLAND + XI. IN SPAIN + XII. RECRUITING THEIR FUNDS + XIII. THE FESTA AT SEVILLE + XIV. THE SURPRISE OF BREDA + XV. A SLAVE IN BARBARY + XVI. THE ESCAPE + XVII. A SPANISH MERCHANT +XVIII. IVRY + XIX. STEENWYK + XX. CADIZ + XXI. THE BATTLE OF NIEUPORT + XXII. OLD FRIENDS +XXIII. THE SIEGE OF OSTEND + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + +Geoffrey And Lionel Save Francis Vere's Life +The Four Pages Carry Down The Wounded Soldier +The Next Few Minutes It Was A Wild Struggle For Life +Geoffrey Carried Overboard By The Falling Mast +Geoffrey Gives Inez Her Lover's Note +Geoffrey Falls Into The Hands Of The Corsairs +Crossing The Bridge Of Boats Over The Haven +Vere's Horse Shot Under Him At The Fight Before Ostend + + * * * * * + +Plan of Sluys and the Castle, to illustrate the Siege of 1587 + +Plan of Breda and its Defences, illustrating its surprise and capture +in 1590 + +Map of Cadiz and Harbour at the time of its capture in 1596, showing +the position of the English and Spanish Ships + +Plan of Ostend and its Defences, showing the lines of the attacking +forces during the siege of 1601-4 + + + + +BY ENGLAND'S AID + +CHAPTER I + +AN EXCURSION + + +"And we beseech Thee, O Lord, to give help and succour to Thy servants +the people of Holland, and to deliver them from the cruelties and +persecutions of their wicked oppressors; and grant Thy blessing, we +pray Thee, upon the arms of our soldiers now embarking to aid them in +their extremity." These were the words with which the Rev. John +Vickars, rector of Hedingham, concluded the family prayers on the +morning of 6th December, 1585. + +For twenty years the first portion of this prayer had been repeated +daily by him, as it had been in tens of thousands of English +households; for since the people of the Netherlands first rose against +the Spanish yoke the hearts of the Protestants of England had beat +warmly in their cause, and they had by turns been moved to admiration +at the indomitable courage with which the Dutch struggled for +independence against the might of the greatest power in Europe, and to +horror and indignation at the pitiless cruelty and wholesale massacres +by which the Spaniards had striven to stamp out resistance. + +From the first the people of England would gladly have joined in the +fray, and made common cause with their co-religionists; but the queen +and her counsellors had been restrained by weighty considerations from +embarking in such a struggle. At the commencement of the war the power +of Spain overshadowed all Europe. Her infantry were regarded as +irresistible. Italy and Germany were virtually her dependencies, and +England was but a petty power beside her. Since Agincourt was fought we +had taken but little part in wars on the Continent. The feudal system +was extinct; we had neither army nor military system; and the only +Englishmen with the slightest experience of war were those who had gone +abroad to seek their fortunes, and had fought in the armies of one or +other of the continental powers. Nor were we yet aware of our naval +strength. Drake and Hawkins and the other bucaneers had not yet +commenced their private war with Spain, on what was known as the +Spanish main--the waters of the West Indian Islands--and no one dreamed +that the time was approaching when England would be able to hold her +own against the strength of Spain on the seas. + +Thus, then, whatever the private sentiments of Elizabeth and her +counsellors, they shrank from engaging England in a life and death +struggle with the greatest power of the time; though as the struggle +went on the queen's sympathy with the people of the Netherlands was +more and more openly shown. In 1572 she was present at a parade of +three hundred volunteers who mustered at Greenwich under Thomas Morgan +and Roger Williams for service in the Netherlands. Sir Humphrey +Gilbert, half-brother of Sir Walter Raleigh, went out a few months +later with 1500 men, and from that time numbers of English volunteers +continued to cross the seas and join in the struggle against the +Spaniards. Nor were the sympathies of the queen confined to allowing +her subjects to take part in the fighting; for she sent out large sums +of money to the Dutch, and as far as she could, without openly joining +them, gave them her aid. + +Spain remonstrated continually against these breaches of neutrality, +while the Dutch on their part constantly implored her to join them +openly; but she continued to give evasive answers to both parties until +the assassination of William of Orange on 10th July, 1584, sent a +thrill of horror through England, and determined the queen and her +advisers to take a more decisive part in the struggle. In the following +June envoys from the States arrived in London, and were received with +great honour, and a treaty between the two countries was agreed upon. +Three months later the queen published a declaration to her people and +to Europe at large, setting forth the terrible persecutions and +cruelties to which "our next neighbours, the people of the Low +Countries," the special allies and friends of England, had been +exposed, and stating her determination to aid them to recover their +liberty. The proclamation concluded: "We mean not hereby to make +particular profit to ourself and our people, only desiring to obtain, +by God's favour, for the Countries, a deliverance of them from war by +the Spaniards and foreigners, with a restitution of their ancient +liberties and government." + +Sir Thomas Cecil was sent out at once as governor of Brill, and Sir +Philip Sidney as governor of Flushing, these towns being handed over to +England as guarantees by the Dutch. These two officers, with bodies of +troops to serve as garrisons, took charge of their respective +fortresses in November. Orders were issued for the raising of an army +for service in the Low Countries, and Dudley, Earl of Leicester, was +appointed by the queen to its command. The decision of the queen was +received with enthusiasm in England as well as in Holland, and although +the Earl of Leicester was not personally popular, volunteers flocked to +his standard. + +Breakfast at Hedingham Rectory had been set at an earlier hour than +usual on the 6th of December, 1585. There was an unusual stir and +excitement in the village, for young Mr. Francis Vere, cousin of the +Earl of Oxford, lord of Hedingham and of all the surrounding country, +was to start that morning to ride to Colchester, there to join the Earl +of Leicester and his following as a volunteer. As soon as breakfast was +over young Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars, boys of fourteen and thirteen +years old, proceeded to the castle close by, and there mounted the +horses provided for them, and rode with Francis Vere to Colchester. + +Francis, who was at this time twenty-five years old, was accompanied by +his elder brother, John, and his two younger brothers, Robert and +Horace, and by many other friends; and it was a gay train that cantered +down the valley of the Colne to Colchester. That ancient town was all +astir. Gentlemen had ridden in from all the country seats and manors +for many miles round, and the quiet streets were alive with people. At +two o'clock in the afternoon news arrived that the earl was +approaching, and, headed by the bailiffs of the town in scarlet gowns, +the multitude moved out to meet the earl on the Lexden road. Presently +a long train was seen approaching; for with Leicester were the Earl of +Essex, Lords North and Audley, Sir William Russell, Sir Thomas Shirley, +and other volunteers, to the number of five hundred horse. All were +gaily attired and caparisoned, and the cortčge presented a most +brilliant appearance. The multitude cheered lustily, the bailiffs +presented an address, and followed by his own train and by the +gentlemen who had assembled to meet him, the earl rode into the town. +He himself took up his abode at the house of Sir Thomas Lucas, while +his followers were distributed among the houses of the townsfolk. Two +hours after the arrival of the earl, the party from Hedingham took +leave of Mr. Francis Vere. + +"Good-bye, lads," he said to the young Vickars. "I will keep my +promise, never fear; and if the struggle goes on till you are old +enough to carry arms, I will, if I am still alive, take you under my +leading and teach you the art of war." + +Upon the following day the Earl of Leicester and his following rode to +Manningtree, and took boat down the Stour to Harwich, where the fleet, +under Admiral William Borough, was lying. Here they embarked, and on +the 9th of December sailed for Flushing, where they were joined by +another fleet of sixty ships from the Thames. + +More than a year passed. The English had fought sturdily in Holland. +Mr. Francis Vere had been with his cousin, Lord Willoughby, who was in +command of Bergen-op-Zoom, and had taken part in the first brush with +the enemy, when a party of the garrison marched out and attacked a +great convoy of four hundred and fifty waggons going to Antwerp, killed +three hundred of the enemy, took eighty prisoners, and destroyed all +their waggons except twenty-seven, which they carried into the town. +Leicester provisioned the town of Grave, which was besieged by the Duke +of Parma, the Spanish commander-in-chief. Axel was captured by +surprise, the volunteers swimming across the moat at night, and +throwing open the gates. Doesburg was captured, and Zutphen besieged. + +Parma marched to its relief, and, under cover of a thick fog, succeeded +in getting close at hand before it was known that he was near. Then the +English knights and volunteers, 200 in number, mounted in hot haste and +charged a great Spanish column of 5000 horse and foot. They were led by +Sir William Russell, under whom were Lords Essex, North, Audley, and +Willoughby, behind the last of whom rode Francis Vere. For two hours +this little band of horse fought desperately in the midst of the +Spanish cavalry, and forced them at last to fall back, but were +themselves obliged to retreat when the Spanish infantry came up and +opened fire upon them. The English loss was 34 killed and wounded, +while 250 of the Spaniards were slain, and three of their colours +captured. Among the wounded on the English side was the very noble +knight Sir Philip Sidney, who was shot by a musket-ball, and died three +weeks afterwards. + +The successes of the English during these two years were +counterbalanced by the cowardly surrender of Grave by its governor, and +by the treachery of Sir William Stanley, governor of Deventer, and of +Roland Yorke, who commanded the garrisons of the two forts known as the +Zutphen Sconces. Both these officers turned traitors and delivered up +the posts they commanded to the Spaniards. Their conduct not only +caused great material loss to the allies, but it gave rise to much bad +feeling between the English and Dutch, the latter complaining that they +received but half-hearted assistance from the English. + +It was not surprising, however, that Leicester was unable to effect +more with the little force under his command, for it was necessary not +only to raise soldiers, but to invent regulations and discipline. The +Spanish system was adopted, and this, the first English regular army, +was trained and appointed precisely upon the system of the foe with +whom they were fighting. It was no easy task to convert a body of brave +knights and gentlemen and sturdy country men into regular troops, and +to give them the advantages conferred by discipline and order. But the +work was rendered the less difficult by the admixture of the volunteers +who had been bravely fighting for ten years under Morgan, Rowland +Williams, John Norris, and others. These had had a similar experience +on their first arrival in Holland. Several times in their early +encounters with the Spaniards the undisciplined young troops had +behaved badly; but they had gained experience from their reverses, and +had proved themselves fully capable of standing in line even against +the splendid pikemen of Spain. + +While the English had been drilling and fighting in Holland things had +gone on quietly at Hedingham. The village stands near the head waters +of the Colne and Stour, in a rich and beautiful country. On a rising +ground behind it stood the castle of the Veres, which was approached +from the village by a drawbridge across the moat. There were few more +stately piles in England than the seat of the Earl of Oxford. On one +side of the great quadrangle was the gate-house and a lofty tower, on +another the great hall and chapel and the kitchens, on a third the +suites of apartments of the officials and retinue. In rear were the +stables and granaries, the butts and tennis-court, beyond which was the +court of the tournaments. + +In the centre of the quadrangle rose the great keep, which still +stands, the finest relic of Norman civil architecture in England. It +possessed great strength, and at the same time was richly ornamented +with carving. The windows, arches, and fireplaces were decorated with +chevron carvings. A beautiful spiral pattern enriched the doorway and +pillars of the staircase leading to galleries cut in the thickness of +the wall, with arched openings looking into the hall below. The outlook +from the keep extended over the parishes of Castle Hedingham, Sybil +Hedingham, Kirby, and Tilbury, all belonging to the Veres--whose +property extended far down the pretty valley of the Stour--with the +stately Hall of Long Melford, the Priory of Clare, and the little town +of Lavenham; indeed the whole country was dotted with the farmhouses +and manors of the Veres. Seven miles down the valley of the Colne lies +the village of Earl's Colne, with the priory, where ten of the earls of +Oxford lie buried with their wives. + +The parish church of Castle Hedingham stood at the end of the little +village street, and the rectory of Mr. Vickars was close by. The party +gathered at morning prayers consisted of Mr. Vickars and his wife, +their two sons, Geoffrey and Lionel, and the maid-servants, Ruth and +Alice. The boys, now fourteen and fifteen years old respectively, were +strong-grown and sturdy lads, and their father had long since owned +with a sigh that neither of them was likely to follow his profession +and fill the pulpit at Hedingham Church when he was gone. Nor was this +to be wondered at, for lying as it did at the entrance to the great +castle of the Veres, the street of the little village was constantly +full of armed men, and resounded with the tramp of the horses of +richly-dressed knights and gay ladies. + +Here came great politicians, who sought the friendship and support of +the powerful earls of Oxford, nobles and knights, their kinsmen and +allies, gentlemen from the wide-spreading manors of the family, stout +fighting-men who wished to enlist under their banner. At night the +sound of music from the castle told of gay entertainments and festive +dances, while by day parties of knights and ladies with dogs and +falcons sallied out to seek sport over the wide domains. It could +hardly be expected, then, that lads of spirit, brought up in the midst +of sights and sounds like these, should entertain a thought of settling +down to the tranquil life of the church. As long as they could +remember, their minds had been fixed upon being soldiers, and fighting +some day under the banner of the Veres. They had been a good deal in +the castle; for Mr. Vickars had assisted Arthur Golding, the learned +instructor to young Edward Vere, the 17th earl, who was born in 1550, +and had succeeded to the title at the age of twelve, and he had +afterwards been tutor to the earl's cousins, John, Francis, Robert, and +Horace, the sons of Geoffrey, fourth son of the 15th earl. These boys +were born in 1558, 1560, 1562, and 1565, and lived with their mother at +Kirby Hall, a mile from the Castle of Hedingham. + +The earl was much attached to his old instructor, and when he was at +the castle there was scarce a day but an invitation came down for Mr. +Vickars and his wife to be present either at banquet or entertainment. +The boys were free to come and go as they chose, and the earl's men-at- +arms had orders to afford them all necessary teaching in the use of +weapons. + +Mr. Vickars considered it his duty to accept the invitations of his +friend and patron, but he sorely grudged the time so abstracted from +his favourite books. It was, indeed, a relief to him when the earl, +whose love of profusion and luxury made serious inroads even into the +splendid possessions of the Veres, went up to court, and peace and +quietness reigned in the castle. The rector was fonder of going to +Kirby, where John, Geoffrey's eldest son, lived quietly and soberly, +his three younger brothers having, when mere boys, embraced the +profession of arms, placing themselves under the care of the good +soldier Sir William Browne, who had served for many years in the Low +Countries. They occasionally returned home for a time, and were pleased +to take notice of the sons of their old tutor, although Geoffrey was +six years junior to Horace, the youngest of the brothers. + +The young Vickars had much time to themselves, much more indeed than +their mother considered to be good for them. After their breakfast, +which was finished by eight o'clock, their father took them for an hour +and heard the lessons they had prepared the day before, and gave them +instruction in the Latin tongue. Then they were supposed to study till +the bell rang for dinner at twelve; but there was no one to see that +they did so, for their father seldom came outside his library door, and +their mother was busy with her domestic duties and in dispensing +simples to the poor people, who, now that the monasteries were closed, +had no medical aid save that which they got from the wives of the +gentry or ministers, or from the wise women, of whom there was +generally one in every village. + +Therefore, after half an hour, or at most an hour, spent in getting up +their tasks, the books would be thrown aside, and the boys be off, +either to the river or up to the castle to practise sword-play with the +men-at-arms, or to the butts with their bows, or to the rabbit-warren, +where they had leave from the earl to go with their dogs whenever they +pleased. Their long excursions were, however, generally deferred until +after dinner, as they were then free until supper-time, and even if +they did not return after that hour Mrs. Vickars did not chide them +unduly, being an easy-going woman, and always ready to make excuses for +them. + +There were plenty of fish in the river; and the boys knew the pools +they loved best, and often returned with their baskets well filled. +There were otters on its banks, too; but, though they sometimes chased +these pretty creatures, Tan and Turk, their two dogs, knew as well as +their masters that they had but small chance of catching them. +Sometimes they would take a boat at the bridge and drop down the stream +for miles, and once or twice had even gone down to Bricklesey +[Footnote: Now Brightlingsea.] at the mouth of the river. This, +however, was an expedition that they never performed alone, making it +each time in charge of Master Lirriper, who owned a flat barge, and +took produce down to Bricklesey, there to be transhipped into coasters +bound for London. He had a married daughter there, and it was at her +house the boys had slept when they went there; for the journey down and +up again was too long to be performed in a single day. + +But this was not the only distant expedition they had made, for they +had once gone down the Stour as far as Harwich with their father when +he was called thither on business. To them Harwich with its old walls +and the houses crowded up within them, and its busy port with vessels +coming in and going out, was most delightful, and they always talked +about that expedition as one of the most pleasant recollections of +their lives. + +After breakfast was over on 1st of May, 1587, and they had done their +lessons with their father, and had worked for an hour by themselves, +the boys put by their books and strolled down the village to the +bridge. There as usual stood their friend Master Lirriper with his +hands deep in his pockets, a place and position in which he was sure to +be found when not away in his barge. + +"Good-morning, Master Lirriper." + +"Good-morning, Master Geoffrey and Master Lionel." + +"So you are not down the river to-day?" + +"No, sir. I am going to-morrow, and this time I shall be away four or +five days--maybe even a week." + +"Shall you?" the boys exclaimed in surprise. "Why, what are you going +to do?" + +"I am going round to London in my nephew Joe Chambers' craft." + +"Are you really?" Geoffrey exclaimed. "I wish we were going with you. +Don't you think you could take us, Master Lirriper?" + +The bargeman looked down into the water and frowned. He was slow of +speech, but as the minutes went on and he did not absolutely refuse the +boys exchanged glances of excitement and hope. + +"I dunno how that might be, young sirs," John Lirriper said slowly, +after long cogitation. "I dus-say my nephew would have no objection, +but what would parson say about it?" + +"Oh, I don't think he would object," Geoffrey said. "If you go up and +ask him, Master Lirriper, and say that you will take care of us, you +know, I don't see why he should say no." + +"Like enough you would be ill," John Lirriper said after another long +pause. "It's pretty rough sometimes." + +"Oh, we shouldn't mind that," Lionel protested. "We should like to see +the waves and to be in a real ship." + +"It's nothing much of a ship," the boatman said. "She is a ketch of +about ten tons and carries three hands." + +"Oh, we don't care how small she is if we can only go in her; and you +would be able to show us London, and we might even see the queen. Oh, +do come up with us and ask father, Master Lirriper." + +"Perhaps parson wouldn't be pleased, young sirs, and might say I was +putting wandering thoughts into your heads; and Mistress Vickars might +think it a great liberty on my part." + +"Oh, no, she wouldn't, Master Lirriper. Besides, we will say we asked +you." + +"But suppose any harm comes to you, what would they say to me then?" + +"Oh, there's no fear of any harm coming to us. Besides, in another year +or two we mean to go over to the Low Countries and fight the Spaniards, +and what's a voyage to London to that?" + +"Well, I will think about it," John Lirriper said cautiously. + +"No no, Master Lirriper; if you get thinking about it it will never be +done. Do come up with us at once," and each of them got hold of one of +the boatman's arms. + +"Well, the parson can but say no," he said, as he suffered himself to +be dragged away. "And I don't say as it isn't reasonable that you +should like to see something of the world, young sirs; but I don't know +how the parson will take it." + +Mr. Vickars looked up irritably from his books when the servant came in +and said that Master Lirriper wished to see him. + +"What does he want at this hour?" he said. "You know, Ruth, I never see +people before dinner. Any time between that and supper I am at their +service, but it's too bad being disturbed now." + +"I told him so, sir; but Master Geoffrey and Master Lionel were with +him, and they said he wanted particular to see you, and they wanted +particular too." + +The clergyman sighed as he put his book down. + +"If Geoffrey and Lionel have concerned themselves in the matter, Ruth, +I suppose I must see the man; but it's very hard being disturbed like +this. Well, Master Lirriper, what is it?" he asked, as the boatman +accompanied by Geoffrey and Lionel entered the room. Master Lirriper +twirled his hat in his hand. Words did not come easily to him at the +best of times, and this was a business that demanded thought and care. +Long before he had time to fix upon an appropriate form of words +Geoffrey broke in: + +"This is what it is, father. Master Lirriper is going down the river to +Bricklesey to-morrow, and then he is going on board his nephew's ship. +She is a ketch, and she carries ten tons, though I don't know what it +is she carries; and she's going to London, and he is going in her, and +he says if you will let him he will take us with him, and will show us +London, and take great care of us. It will be glorious, father, if you +will only let us go." + +Mr. Vickars looked blankly as Geoffrey poured out his torrent of words. +His mind was still full of the book he had been reading, and he hardly +took in the meaning of Geoffrey's words. + +"Going in a ketch!" he repeated. "Going to catch something, I suppose +you mean? Do you mean he is going fishing?" + +"No, father,--going in a ketch. A ketch is a sort of ship, father, +though I don't quite know what sort of ship. What sort of ship is a +ketch, Master Lirriper?" + +"A ketch is a two-masted craft, Master Geoffrey," John Lirriper said. +"She carries a big mizzen sail." + +"There, you see, father," Geoffrey said triumphantly; "she carries a +big mizzen sail. That's what she is, you see; and he is going to show +us London, and will take great care of us if you will let us go with +him." + +"Do you mean, Master Lirriper," Mr. Vickars asked slowly, "that you are +going to London in some sort of ship, and want to take my sons with +you?" + +"Well, sir, I am going to London, and the young masters seemed to think +that they would like to go with me, if so be you would have no +objection." + +"I don't know," Mr. Vicars said. "It is a long passage, Master +Lirriper; and, as I have heard, often a stormy one. I don't think my +wife--" + +"Oh, yes, father," Lionel broke in. "If you say yes, mother is sure to +say yes; she always does, you know. And, you see, it will be a great +thing for us to see London. Every one else seems to have seen London, +and I am sure that it would do us good. And we might even see the +queen." + +"I think that they would be comfortable, sir," John Lirriper put in. +"You see, my nephew's wife is daughter of a citizen, one Master +Swindon, a ship's chandler, and he said there would be a room there for +me, and they would make me heartily welcome. Now, you see, sir, the +young masters could have that room, and I could very well sleep on +board the ketch; and they would be out of all sort of mischief there." + +"That would be a very good plan certainly, Master Lirriper. Well, well, +I don't know what to say." + +"Say yes, father," Geoffrey said as he saw Mr. Vickars glance anxiously +at the book he had left open. "If you say yes, you see it will be a +grand thing for you, our being away for a week with nothing to disturb +you." + +"Well, well," Mr. Vickars said, "you must ask your mother. If she makes +no objection, then I suppose you can go," and Mr. Vickars hastily took +up his book again. + +The boys ran off to the kitchen, where their mother was superintending +the brewing of some broth for a sick woman down the village. + +"Mother!" Geoffrey exclaimed, "Master Lirriper's going to London in a +ketch--a ship with a big mizzen sail, you know--and he has offered to +take us with him and show us London. And father has said yes, and it's +all settled if you have no objection; and of course you haven't." + +"Going to London, Geoffrey!" Mrs. Vicars exclaimed aghast. "I never +heard of such a thing. Why, like enough you will be drowned on the way +and never come back again. Your father must be mad to think of such a +thing." + +"Oh, no, mother; I am sure it will do us a lot of good. And we may see +the queen, mother. And as for drowning, why, we can both swim ever so +far. Besides, people don't get drowned going to London. Do they Master +Lirriper?" + +John was standing bashfully at the door of the kitchen. "Well, not as a +rule, Master Geoffrey," he replied. "They comes and they goes, them +that are used to it, maybe a hundred times without anything happening +to them." + +"There! You hear that, mother? They come and go hundreds of times. Oh, +I am sure you are not going to say no. That would be too bad when +father has agreed to it. Now, mother, please tell Ruth to run away at +once and get a wallet packed with our things. Of course we shall want +our best clothes; because people dress finely in London, and it would +never do if we saw the queen and we hadn't our best doublets on, for +she would think that we didn't know what was seemly down at Hedingham." + +"Well, my dears, of course if it is all settled--" + +"Oh, yes, mother, it is quite all settled." + +"Then it's no use my saying anything more about it, but I think your +father might have consulted me before he gave his consent to your going +on such a hazardous journey as this. + +"He did want to consult you, mother. But then, you see, he wanted to +consult his books even more, and he knew very well that you would agree +with him; and you know you would too. So please don't say anything more +about it, but let Ruth run upstairs and see to our things at once. +There, you see, Master Lirriper, it is all settled. And what time do +you start to-morrow? We will be there half an hour before, anyhow." + +"I shall go at seven from the bridge. Then I shall just catch the turn +of the tide and get to Bricklesey in good time." + +"I never did see such boys," Mrs. Vickars said when John Lirriper had +gone on his way. "As for your father, I am surprised at him in +countenancing you. You will be running all sorts of risks. You may be +drowned on the way, or killed in a street brawl, or get mixed up in a +plot. There is no saying what may not happen. And here it is all +settled before I have even time to think about it, which is most +inconsiderate of your father." + +"Oh, we shall get back again without any harm, mother. And as to +getting killed in a street brawl, Lionel and I can use our hangers as +well as most of them. Besides, nothing of that sort is going to happen +to us. Now, mother, please let Ruth go at once, and tell her to put up +our puce doublets that we had for the jousting at the castle, and our +red hose and our dark green cloth slashed trunks." + +"There is plenty of time for that, Geoffrey, as you are not going until +to-morrow. Besides, I can't spare Ruth now, but she shall see about it +after dinner." + +There was little sleep for the boys that night. A visit to London had +long been one of their wildest ambitions, and they could scarcely +believe that thus suddenly and without preparation it was about to take +place. Their father had some time before promised that he would some +day make request to one or other of the young Veres to allow them to +ride to London in his suite, but the present seemed to them an even +more delightful plan. There would be the pleasure of the voyage, and +moreover it would be much more lively for them to be able to see London +under the charge of John Lirriper than to be subject to the ceremonial +and restraint that would be enforced in the household of the Veres. +They were then at the appointed place a full hour before the time +named, with wallets containing their clothes, and a basket of +provisions that their mother had prepared for them. Having stowed these +away in the little cabin, they walked up and down impatiently until +Master Lirriper himself appeared. + +"You are up betimes, my young masters," the boatman said. "The church +has not yet struck seven o'clock." + +"We have been here ever so long, Master Lirriper. We could not sleep +much last night, and got up when it chimed five, being afraid that we +might drop off to sleep and be late." + +"Well, we shall not be long before we are off. Here comes my man Dick, +and the tide is just on the turn. The sky looks bright, and the weather +promises well. I will just go round to the cottage and fetch up my +things, and then we shall be ready." + +In ten minutes they pushed off from the shore. John and his man got out +long poles shod with iron, and with these set to work to punt the barge +along. Now that they were fairly on their way the boys quieted down, +and took their seats on the sacks of flour with which the boat was +laden, and watched the objects on the bank as the boat made her way +quietly along. + +Halstead was the first place passed. This was the largest town near +Hedingham, and was a place of much importance in their eyes. Then they +passed Stanstead Hall and Earl's Colne on their right, Colne Wake on +their left, and Chapel Parish on their right. Then there was a long +stretch without any large villages, until they came in sight of the +bridge above Colchester. A few miles below the town the river began to +widen. The banks were low and flat, and they were now entering an arm +of the sea. Half an hour later the houses and church of Bricklesey came +in sight. Tide was almost low when they ran on to the mud abreast of +the village, but John put on a pair of high boots and carried the boys +ashore one after the other on his back, and then went up with them to +the house where they were to stop for the night. + +Here, although not expected, they were heartily welcomed by John's +daughter. + +"If father had told me that you had been coming, Masters Vickars, I +would have had a proper dinner for you; but though he sent word +yesterday morning that he should be over today, he did not say a word +about your coming with them." + +"He did not know himself," Geoffrey said; "it was only settled at ten +o'clock yesterday. But do not trouble yourself about the dinner. In the +first place, we are so pleased at going that we don't care a bit what +we eat, and in the second place we had breakfast on board the boat, and +we were both so hungry that I am sure we could go till supper-time +without eating if necessary." + +"Where are you going, father?" the young woman asked. + +"I am going to set about unloading the flour." + +"Why, it's only a quarter to twelve, and dinner just ready. The fish +went into the frying-pan as you came up from the boat. You know we +generally dine at half-past eleven, but we saw you coming at a distance +and put it off. It's no use your starting now." + +"Well, I suppose it isn't. And I don't know what the young masters' +appetite may be, but mine is pretty good, I can tell you." + +"I never knew it otherwise, father," the woman laughed, "Ah, here is my +Sam. Sam, here's father brought these two young gentlemen. They are the +sons of Mr. Vickars, the parson at Hedingham. They are going to stop +here to-night, and are going with him in the _Susan_ to-morrow to +London." + +"Glad to see you, young masters," Sam said. "I have often heard Ann +talk of your good father. I have just been on board the _Susan_, +for I am sending up a couple of score sides of bacon in her, and have +been giving Joe Chambers, her master, a list of things he is to get +there and bring down for me. Now then, girl, bustle about and get +dinner on as soon as you can. We are half an hour late. I am sure the +young gentlemen here must be hungry. There's nothing like being on the +water for getting an appetite." + +A few minutes later a great dish of fish, a loaf of bread and some +wooden platters, were placed on the table, and all set to at once. +Forks had not yet come into use, and table-cloths were unknown, except +among the upper classes. The boys found that in spite of their hearty +breakfast their appetites were excellent. The fish were delicious, the +bread was home-baked, and the beer from Colchester, which was already +famous for its brewing. When they had finished, John Lirriper asked +them if they would rather see what there was to be seen in the village, +or go off to the ketch. They at once chose the latter alternative. On +going down to the water's edge they found that the tide had risen +sufficiently to enable Dick to bring the barge alongside the jetty. +They were soon on board. + +"Which is the _Susan_, Master Lirriper?" + +"That's her lying out there with two others. She is the one lowest down +the stream. We shall just fetch her comfortably." + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +A MEETING IN CHEPE. + + +A row of ten minutes took the boat with Master Lirriper and the two +boys alongside the ketch. + +"How are you, Joe Chambers?" Master Lirriper hailed the skipper as he +appeared on the deck of the _Susan_. "I have brought you two more +passengers for London. They are going there under my charge." + +"The more the merrier, Uncle John," the young skipper replied. "There +are none others going this journey, so though our accommodation is not +very extensive, we can put them up comfortably enough if they don't +mind roughing it." + +"Oh, we don't mind that," Geoffrey said, as they climbed on board; +"besides, there seems lots of room." + +"Not so much as you think," the skipper replied. "She is a roomy craft +is the _Susan_; but she is pretty nigh all hold, and we are +cramped a little in the fo'castle. Still we can sleep six, and that's +just the number we shall have, for we carry a man and a boy besides +myself. I think your flour will about fill her up, Master Lirriper. We +have a pretty full cargo this time." + +"Well, we shall soon see," John Lirriper said. "Are you ready to take +the flour on board at once? Because, if so, we will begin to +discharge." + +"Yes, I am quite ready. You told me you were going to bring forty +sacks, and I have left the middle part of the hold empty for them. Sam +Hunter's bacon will stow in on the top of your sacks, and just fill her +up to the beams there, as I reckon. I'll go below and stow them away as +you hand them across." + +In an hour the sacks of flour were transferred from the barge to the +hold of the _Susan_, and the sides of bacon then placed upon them. + +"It's a pity we haven't all the rest of the things on board," the +skipper said, "and then we could have started by this evening's tide +instead of waiting till the morning. The wind is fair, and I hate +throwing away a fair wind. There is no saying where it may blow to- +morrow, but I shouldn't be at all surprised if it isn't round to the +south, and that will be foul for us till we get pretty nigh up into the +mouth of the river. However, I gave them till to-night for getting all +their things on board, and must therefore wait." + +To the boys the _Susan_ appeared quite a large craft, for there +was not water up at Hedingham for vessels of her size; and though they +had seen ships at Harwich, they had never before put foot on anything +larger than Master Lirriper's barge. The _Susan_ was about forty +feet long by twelve feet beam, and drew, as her skipper informed them, +near five feet of water. She was entirely decked. The cabin in the bows +occupied some fourteen feet in length. The rest was devoted to cargo. +They descended into the cabin, which seemed to them very dark, there +being no light save what came down through the small hatchway. Still it +looked snug and comfortable. There was a fireplace on one side of the +ladder by which they had descended, and on this side there were two +bunks, one above the other. On the other side there were lockers +running along the entire length of the cabin. Two could sleep on these +and two on the bunks above them. + +"Now, young masters, you will take those two bunks on the top there. +John Lirriper and I will sleep on the lockers underneath you. The man +and the boy have the two on the other side. I put you on the top +because there is a side board, and you can't fall out if she rolls, and +besides the bunks are rather wider than the lockers below. If the wind +is fair you won't have much of our company, because we shall hold on +till we moor alongside the wharves of London; but if it's foul, or +there is not enough of it to take us against tide, we have to anchor on +the ebb, and then of course we turn in." + +"How long do you take getting from here to London?" + +"Ah, that I can tell you more about when I see what the weather is like +in the morning. With a strong fair wind I have done it in twenty-four +hours, and again with the wind foul it has taken me nigh a week. Taking +one trip with another I should put it at three days." + +"Well, now, we will be going ashore," John Lirriper said. "I will leave +my barge alongside till tide turns, for I could not get her back again +to the jetty so long as it is running in strong, so I will be off again +in a couple of hours." + +So saying he hauled up the dingy that was towing behind the barge, and +he and Dick rowed the two boys ashore. Then he walked along with them +to a spot where several craft were hauled up, pointing out to them the +differences in their rig and build, and explained their purpose, and +gave them the names of the principal ropes and stays. + +"Now," he said, "it's getting on for supper-time, and it won't do to +keep them waiting, for Ann is sure to have got some cakes made, and +there's nothing puts a woman out more than people not being in to meals +when they have got something special ready. After that I shall go out +with Dick and bring the barge ashore. He will load her up to-morrow, +and take her back single-handed; which can be done easy enough in such +weather as this, but it is too much for one man if there is a strong +wind blowing and driving her over to the one side or other of the +river." + +As John Lirriper had expected, his daughter had prepared a pile of hot +cakes for supper, and her face brightened up when she saw the party +return punctually. The boys had been up early, and had slept but little +the night before, and were not sorry at eight o'clock to lie down on +the bed of freshly-cut rushes covered with home-spun sheets, for +regular beds of feathers were still but little used in England. At five +o'clock they were astir again, and their hostess insisted on their +eating a manchet of bread with some cheese, washed down by a stoup of +ale before starting. Dick had the boat at the jetty ready to row them +off, and as soon as they were on board the _Susan_ preparations +were made for a start. + +The mainsail was first hoisted, its size greatly surprising the boys; +then the foresail and jib were got up, and lastly the mizzen. Then the +capstan was manned, and the anchor slowly brought on board, and the +sails being sheeted home, the craft began to steal through the water. +The tide was still draining up, and she had not as yet swung. The wind +was light, and, as the skipper had predicted, was nearly due south. As +the ketch made its way out from the mouth of the river, and the wide +expanse of water opened before them, the boys were filled with delight. +They had taken their seats, one on each side of the skipper, who was at +the tiller. + +"I suppose you steer by the compass, Master Chambers?" Geoffrey said. +"Which is the compass? I have heard about it, always pointing to the +north." + +"It's down below, young sir; I will show it you presently. We steer by +that at night, or when it's foggy; but on a fine day like this there is +no need for it. There are marks put up on all the sands, and we steer +by them. You see, the way the wind is now we can lay our course for the +Whittaker. That's a cruel sand, that is, and stretches out a long way +from a point lying away on the right there. Once past that we bear away +to the south-west, for we are then, so to speak, fairly in the course +of the river. There is many a ship has been cast away on the Whittaker. +Not that it is worse than other sands. There are scores of them lying +in the mouth of the river, and if it wasn't for the marks there would +be no sailing in or out." + +"Who put up the marks?" Lionel asked. + +"They are put up by men who make a business of it. There is one boat of +them sails backwards and forwards where the river begins to narrow +above Sheerness, and every ship that goes up or down pays them +something according to her size. Others cruise about with long poles, +putting them in the sands wherever one gets washed away. They have got +different marks on them. A single cross-piece, or two cross-pieces, or +a circle, or a diamond; so that each sand has got its own particular +mark. These are known to the masters of all ships that go up and down +the river, and so they can tell exactly where they are, and what course +to take. At night they anchor, for there would be no possibility of +finding the way up or down in the dark. I have heard tell from mariners +who have sailed abroad that there ain't a place anywhere with such +dangerous sands as those we have got here at the mouth of the Thames." + +In the first three or four hours' sail Geoffrey and Lionel acquired +much nautical knowledge. They learned the difference between the +mainmast and the mizzen, found that all the strong ropes that kept the +masts erect and stiff were called stays, that the ropes that hoist +sails are called halliards, and that sheets is the name given to the +ropes that restrain the sails at the lower corner, and are used to haul +them in more tightly when sailing close to the wind, or to ease them +off when the wind is favourable. They also learned that the yards at +the head of the main and mizzen sails are called gaffs, and those at +the bottom, booms. + +"I think that's about enough for you to remember in one day, young +masters," John Lirriper said. "You bear all that in your mind, and +remember that each halliard and sheet has the name of the sail to which +it is attached, and you will have learnt enough to make yourself +useful, and can lend a hand when the skipper calls out, 'Haul in the +jib-sheet,' or 'Let go the fore-halliards.' Now sit yourselves down +again and see what is doing. That beacon you can just see right ahead +marks the end of the Whittaker Spit. When we get there we shall drop +anchor till the tide turns. You see we are going across it now; but +when we round that beacon we shall have it dead against us, and the +wind would be too light to take us against it even if it were not from +the quarter it is. You see there are two or three other craft brought +up there." + +"Where have they come from do you think, Master Lirriper?" + +"Well, they may have come out from Burnham, or they may have come down +from London and be going up to Burnham or to Bricklesey when the tide +turns. There is a large ship anchored in the channel beyond the +Whittaker. Of course she is going up when tide begins to flow. And +there are the masts of two vessels right over there. They are in +another channel. Between us and them there is a line of sands that you +will see will show above the water when it gets a bit lower. That is +the main channel, that is; and vessels coming from the south with a +large draught of water generally use that, while this is the one that +is handiest for ships from the north. Small vessels from the south come +in by a channel a good bit beyond those ships. That is the narrowest of +the three; and even light draught vessels don't use it much unless the +wind is favourable, for there is not much room for them to beat up if +the wind is against them." + +"What is to beat up, Master Lirriper?" + +"Well, you will see about that presently. I don't think we shall be +able to lay our course beyond the Whittaker. To lay our course means to +steer the way we want to go; and if we can't do that we shall have to +beat, and that is tedious work with a light wind like this." + +They dropped anchor off the beacon, and the captain said that this was +the time to take breakfast. The lads already smelt an agreeable odour +arising from the cabin forward, where the boy had been for some time +busily engaged, and soon the whole party were seated on the lockers in +the cabin devouring fried fish. + +"Master Chambers," Geoffrey said, "we have got two boiled pullets in +our basket. Had we not better have them for dinner? They were cooked +the evening before we came away, and I should think they had better be +eaten now." + +"You had better keep them for yourselves, Master Geoffrey," the skipper +said. "We are accustomed to living on fish, but like enough you would +get tired of it before we got to London." + +But this the boys would not hear of, and it was accordingly arranged +that the dinner should be furnished from the contents of the basket. + +As soon as tide turned the anchor was hove up and the _Susan_ got +under way again. The boys soon learnt the meaning of the word beating, +and found that it meant sailing backwards and forwards across the +channel, with the wind sometimes on one side of the boat and sometimes +on the other. Geoffrey wanted very much to learn why, when the wind was +so nearly ahead, the boat advanced instead of drifting backwards or +sideways. But this was altogether beyond the power of either Master +Lirriper or Joe Chambers to explain. They said every one knew that when +the sails were full a vessel went in the direction in which her head +pointed. "It's just the same way with yourself, Master Geoffrey. You +see, when you look one way that's the way you go. When you turn your +head and point another way, of course you go off that way; and it's +just the same thing with the ship." + +"I don't think it's the same thing, Master Lirriper," Geoffrey said +puzzled. "In one case the power that makes one go comes from the +inside, and so one can go in any direction one likes; in the other it +comes from outside, and you would think the ship would have to go any +way the wind pushes her. If you stand up and I give you a push, I push +you straight away from me. You don't go sideways or come forward in the +direction of my shoulder, which is what the ship does." + +John Lirriper took off his cap and scratched his head. + +"I suppose it is as you say, Master Geoffrey, though I never thought of +it before. There is some reason, no doubt, why the craft moves up +against the wind so long as the sails are full, instead of drifting +away to leeward; though I never heard tell of it, and never heard +anyone ask before. I daresay a learned man could tell why it is; and if +you ask your good father when you go back I would wager he can explain +it. It always seems to me as if a boat have got some sort of sense, +just like a human being or a horse, and when she knows which way you +wants her to go she goes. That's how it seems to me--ain't it, Joe?" + +"Something like that, uncle. Every one knows that a boat's got her +humours, and sometimes she sails better than she does others; and each +boat's got her own fancies. Some does their best when they are beating, +and some are lively in a heavy sea, and seem as if they enjoy it; and +others get sulky, and don't seem to take the trouble to lift their bows +up when a wave meets them; and they groans and complains if the wind is +too hard for them, just like a human being. When you goes to a new +vessel you have got to learn her tricks and her ways and what she will +do, and what she won't do, and just to humour her as you would a child, +I don't say as I think she is actually alive; but every sailor will +tell you that there is something about her that her builders never put +there." + +"That's so," John Lirriper agreed. "Look at a boat that is hove up when +her work's done and going to be broken up. Why, anyone can tell her +with half an eye. She looks that forlorn and melancholy that one's +inclined to blubber at the sight of her. She don't look like that at +any other time. When she is hove up she is going to die, and she knows +it." + +"But perhaps that's because the paint's off her sides and the ropes all +worn and loose," Geoffrey suggested. + +But Master Lirriper waved the suggestion aside as unworthy even of an +answer, and repeated, "She knows it. Anyone can see that with half an +eye." + +Geoffrey and Lionel talked the matter over when they were sitting +together on deck apart from the others. It was an age when there were +still many superstitions current in the land. Even the upper classes +believed in witches and warlocks, in charms and spells, in lucky and +unlucky days, in the arts of magic, in the power of the evil eye; and +although to the boys it seemed absurd that a vessel should have life, +they were not prepared altogether to discredit an idea that was +evidently thoroughly believed by those who had been on board ships all +their lives. After talking it over for some time they determined to +submit the question to their father on their return. + +It took them two more tides before they were off Sheerness. The wind +was now more favourable, and having increased somewhat in strength, the +_Susan_ made her way briskly along, heeling over till the water +ran along her scuppers. There was plenty to see now, for there were +many fishing-boats at work, some belonging, as Master Chambers told +them, to the Medway, others to the little village of Leigh, whose +church they saw at the top of the hill to their right. They met, too, +several large craft coming down the river, and passed more than one, +for the _Susan_ was a fast boat. + +"They would beat us," the skipper said when the boys expressed their +surprise at their passing such large vessels, "if the wind were +stronger or the water rough. We are doing our best, and if the wind +rises I shall have to take in sail; while they could carry all theirs +if it blew twice as hard. Then in a sea, weight and power tell; a wave +that would knock the way almost out of us would hardly affect them at +all." + +So well did the _Susan_ go along, that before the tide was much +more than half done they passed the little village of Gravesend on +their left, with the strong fort of Tilbury on the opposite shore, with +its guns pointing on the river, and ready to give a good account of any +Spaniard who should venture to sail up the Thames. Then at the end of +the next reach the hamlet of Grays was passed on the right; a mile +further Greenhithe on the left. Tide was getting slack now, but the +_Susan_ managed to get as far as Purfleet, and then dropped her +anchor. + +"This is our last stopping-place," Joe Chambers said. "The morning tide +will carry us up to London Bridge." + +"Then you will not go on with to-night's tide?" Geoffrey asked. + +"No; the river gets narrower every mile, and I do not care to take the +risk of navigating it after dark, especially as there is always a great +deal of shipping moored above Greenwich. Tide will begin to run up at +about five o'clock, and by ten we ought to be safely moored alongside +near London Bridge. So we should not gain a great deal by going on this +evening instead of to-morrow morning, and I don't suppose you are in a +particular hurry." + +"Oh, no," Lionel said. "We would much rather go on in the morning, +otherwise we should miss everything by the way; and there is the +Queen's Palace at Greenwich that I want to see above all things." + +Within a few minutes of the hour the skipper had named for their +arrival, the _Susan_ was moored alongside some vessels lying off +one of the wharves above the Tower. The boys' astonishment had risen +with every mile of their approach to the city, and they were perfectly +astounded at the amount of shipping that they now beheld. The great +proportion were of course coasters, like themselves, but there were +many large vessels among them, and of these fully half were flying +foreign colours. Here were traders from the Netherlands, with the flag +that the Spaniards had in vain endeavoured to lower, flying at their +mast-heads. Here were caravels from Venice and Genoa, laden with goods +from the East. Among the rest Master Chambers pointed out to the lads +the ship in which Sir Francis Drake had circumnavigated the world, and +that in which Captain Stevens had sailed to India, round the Cape of +Good Hope. There were many French vessels also in the Pool, and indeed +almost every flag save that of Spain was represented. Innumerable +wherries darted about among the shipping, and heavier cargo boats +dropped along in more leisurely fashion. Across the river, a quarter of +a mile above the point at which they were lying, stretched London +Bridge, with its narrow arches and the houses projecting beyond it on +their supports of stout timbers. Beyond, on the right, rising high +above the crowded roofs, was the lofty spire of St. Paul's. The boys +were almost awed by this vast assemblage of buildings. That London was +a great city they had known, but they were not prepared for so immense +a difference between it and the place where they had lived all their +lives. Only with the Tower were they somewhat disappointed. It was very +grand and very extensive, but not so much grander than the stately +abode of the Veres as they had looked for. + +"I wouldn't change, if I were the earl, with the queen's majesty," +Geoffrey said. "Of course it is larger than Hedingham, but not so +beautiful, and it is crowded in by the houses, and has not like our +castle a fair look-out on all sides. Why, there can be no hunting or +hawking near here, and I can't think what the nobles can find to do all +day." + +"Now, young sirs," Master Lirriper said, "if you will get your wallets +we will go ashore at once." + +The boys were quite bewildered as they stepped ashore by the bustle and +confusion. Brawny porters carrying heavy packages on their backs pushed +along unceremoniously, saying from time to time in a mechanical sort of +way, "By your leave, sir!" but pushing on and shouldering passers-by +into the gutter without the smallest compunction. The narrowness and +dinginess of the streets greatly surprised and disappointed the boys, +who found that in these respects even Harwich compared favourably with +the region they were traversing. Presently, however, after passing +through several lanes and alleys, they emerged into a much broader +street, alive with shops. The people who were walking here were for the +most part well dressed and of quiet demeanour, and there was none of +the rough bustle that had prevailed in the river-side lanes. + +"This is Eastchepe," their conductor said; "we have not far to go now. +The street in which my friend dwells lies to the right, between this +and Tower Street. I could have taken you a shorter way there, but I +thought that your impressions of London would not be favourable did I +take you all the way through those ill-smelling lanes." + +In a quarter of an hour they arrived at their destination, and entered +the shop, which smelt strongly of tar; coils of rope of all sizes were +piled up one upon another by the walls, while on shelves above them +were blocks, lanterns, compasses, and a great variety of gear of whose +use the boys were ignorant. The chandler was standing at his door. + +"I am right glad to see you, Master Lirriper," he said, "and have been +expecting you for the last two or three days. My wife would have it +that some evil must have befallen you; but you know what women are. +They make little allowance for time or tide or distance, but expect +that every one can so arrange his journeys as to arrive at the very +moment when they begin to expect him. But who have you here with you?" + +"These are the sons of the worshipful Mr. Vickars, the rector of our +parish, and tutor to the Earl of Oxford and several of the young Veres, +his cousins--a wise gentleman and a kind one, and much loved among us. +He has entrusted his two sons to me that I might show them somewhat of +this city of yours. I said that I was right sure that you and your good +dame would let them occupy the chamber you intended for me, while I can +make good shift on board the _Susan_." + +"Nay, nay, Master Lirriper; our house is big enough to take in you and +these two young masters, and Dorothy would deem it a slight indeed upon +her hospitality were you not to take up your abode here too. You will +be heartily welcome, young sirs, and though such accommodation as we +can give you will not be equal to that which you are accustomed to, I +warrant me that you will find it a pleasant change after that poky +little cabin on board the _Susan_. I know it well, for I supply +her with stores, and have often wondered how men could accustom +themselves to pass their lives in places where there is scarce room to +turn, to say nothing of the smell of fish that always hangs about it. +But if you will follow me I will take you up to my good dame, to whose +care I must commit you for the present, as my foreman, John Watkins, is +down by the riverside seeing to the proper delivery of divers stores on +board a ship which sails with the next tide for Holland. My +apprentices, too, are both out, as I must own is their wont. They +always make excuses to slip down to the river-side when there is aught +doing, and I am far too easy with the varlets. So at present, you see, +I cannot long leave my shop." + +So saying the chandler preceded them up a wide staircase that led from +a passage behind the shop, and the boys perceived that the house was +far more roomy and comfortable than they had judged from its outward +appearance. Turning to the left when he reached the top of the stairs +the chandler opened a door. + +"Dorothy," he said, "here is your kinsman, Master Lirriper, who has +suffered none of the misadventures you have been picturing to yourself +for the last two days, and he has brought with him these young +gentlemen, sons of the rector of Hedingham, to show them something of +London." + +"You are welcome, young gentlemen," Dame Dorothy said, "though why +anyone should come to London when he can stay away from it I know not." + +"Why, Dorothy, you are always running down our city, though I know +right well that were I to move down with you to your native Essex again +you would very soon cry out for the pleasures of the town." + +"That would I not," she said. "I would be well contented to live in +fresh country air all the rest of my life, though I do not say that +London has not its share of pleasures also, though I care but little +for them." + +"Ah, Master Lirriper," her husband said laughing, "you would not think, +to hear her talk, that there is not a feast or a show that Dorothy +would stay away from. She never misses an opportunity, I warrant you, +of showing herself off in her last new kirtle and gown. But I must be +going down; there is no one below, and if a customer comes and finds +the shop empty he will have but a poor idea of me, and will think that +I am away gossiping instead of attending to my business." + +"Are you hungry, young sirs?" the dame asked. "Because if so the maid +shall bring up a manchet of bread and a cup of sack; if not, our +evening meal will be served in the course of an hour." + +The boys both said that they were perfectly able to wait until the meal +came; and Geoffrey added, "If you will allow us, mistress, as doubtless +you have private matters to talk of with Master Lirriper, my brother +and I will walk out for an hour to see something of the town." + +"Mind that you lose not your way," Master Lirriper said. "Do not go +beyond Eastchepe, I beg you. There are the shops to look at there, and +the fashions of dress and other matters that will occupy your attention +well enough for that short time. To-morrow morning I will myself go +with you, and we can then wander further abroad. I have promised your +good father to look after you, you know; and it will be but a bad +beginning if you meet with any untoward adventure upon this the first +day of your arrival here." + +"We will not go beyond the limits of Eastchepe; and as to adventures, I +can't see very well how any can befall us." + +"Oh, there are plenty of adventures to be met with in London, young +sir; and I shall be well content if on the day when we again embark on +board the _Susan_ none of them have fallen to your share." + +The two lads accordingly sallied out and amused themselves greatly by +staring at the goods exhibited in the open shops. They were less +surprised at the richness and variety of the silver work, at the silks +from the East, the costly satins, and other stuffs, than most boys from +the country would have been, for they were accustomed to the splendour +and magnificence displayed by the various noble guests at the castle, +and saw nothing here that surpassed the brilliant shows made at the +jousting and entertainments at Hedingham. + +It was the scene that was novel to them: the shouts of the apprentices +inviting attention to their employers' wares, the crowd that filled the +street, consisting for the most part of the citizens themselves, but +varied by nobles and knights of the court, by foreigners from many +lands, by soldiers and men-at-arms from the Tower, by countrymen and +sailors. Their amusement was sometimes turned into anger by the +flippant remarks of the apprentices; these varlets, perceiving easily +enough by the manner of their attire that they were from the country, +were not slow, if their master happened for the moment to be absent, in +indulging in remarks that set Geoffrey and Lionel into a fever to +commit a breach of the peace. The "What do you lack, masters?" with +which they generally addressed passers-by would be exchanged for +remarks such as, "Do not trouble the young gentlemen, Nat. Do you not +see they are up in the town looking for some of their master's calves?" +or, "Look you, Philip, here are two rustics who have come up to town to +learn manners." + +"I quite see, Geoffrey," Lionel said, taking his brother by the arm and +half dragging him away as he saw that he was clenching his fist and +preparing to avenge summarily one of these insults even more pointed +than usual, "that Master Lirriper was not very far out, and there is no +difficulty in meeting with adventures in the streets of London. +However, we must not give him occasion on this our first stroll in the +streets to say that we cannot be trusted out of his sight. If we were +to try to punish these insolent varlets we should have them upon us +like a swarm of bees, and should doubtless get worsted in the +encounter, and might even find ourselves hauled off to the lock-up, and +that would be a nice tale for Master Lirriper to carry back to +Hedingham." + +"That is true enough, Lionel; but it is not easy to keep one's temper +when one is thus tried. I know not how it is they see so readily that +we are strangers, for surely we have mixed enough with the earl's +family and friends to have rubbed off the awkwardness that they say is +common to country folk; and as to our dress, I do not see much +difference between its fashion and that of other people. I suppose it +is because we look interested in what is going on, instead of strolling +along like those two youths opposite with our noses in the air, as if +we regarded the city and its belongings as infinitely below our regard. +Well, I think we had best be turning back to Master Swindon's; it will +not do to be late for our meal." + +"Well, young sirs, what do you think of our shops?" Dame Swindon asked +as they entered. + +"The shops are well enough," Geoffrey replied; "but your apprentices +seem to me to be an insolent set of jackanapes, who take strange +liberties with passers-by, and who would be all the better for +chastisement. If it hadn't been that Lionel and I did not wish to +become engaged in a brawl, we should have given some of them lessons in +manners." + +"They are free in speech," Dame Swindon said, "and are an impudent set +of varlets. They have quick eyes and ready tongues, and are no +respecters of persons save of their masters and of citizens in a +position to lay complaints against them and to secure them punishment. +They hold together greatly, and it is as well that you should not +become engaged in a quarrel with them. At times they have raised +serious tumults, and have even set not only the watch but the citizens +at large at defiance. Strong measures have been several times taken +against them; but they are a powerful body, seeing that in every shop +there are one or more of them, and they can turn out with their clubs +many thousand strong. They have what they call their privileges, and +are as ready to defend them as are the citizens of London to uphold +their liberties. Ordinances have been passed many times by the fathers +of the city, regulating their conduct and the hours at which they may +be abroad and the carrying of clubs and matters of this kind, but the +apprentices seldom regard them, and if the watch arrest one for a +breach of regulations, he raises a cry, and in two or three minutes a +swarm of them collect and rescue the offender from his hands. Therefore +it is seldom that the watch interferes with them." + +"It would almost seem then that the apprentices are in fact the +masters," Geoffrey said. + +"Not quite as bad as that," Master Swindon replied. "There are the +rules which they have to obey when at home, and if not they get a +whipping; but it is difficult to keep a hand over them when they are +abroad. After the shops are closed and the supper over they have from +time immemorial the right to go out for two hours' exercise. They are +supposed to go and shoot at the butts; but archery, I grieve to say, is +falling into disrepute, and although many still go to the butts the +practice is no longer universal. But here is supper." + +Few words were spoken during the meal. The foreman and the two +apprentices came up and sat down with the family, and it was not until +these had retired that the conversation was again resumed. + +"Where are you going to take them to-morrow, Master Lirriper?" + +"To-morrow we will see the city, the shops in Chepe, the Guildhall, and +St. Paul's, then we shall issue out from Temple Bar and walk along the +Strand through the country to Westminster and see the great abbey, then +perhaps take a boat back. The next day, if the weather be fine, we will +row up to Richmond and see the palace there, and I hope you will go +with us, Mistress Dorothy; it is a pleasant promenade and a +fashionable, and methinks the river with its boats is after all the +prettiest sight in London." + +"Ah, you think there can be nothing pretty without water. That is all +very well for one who is ever afloat, Master Lirriper; but give me +Chepe at high noon with all its bravery of dress, and the bright shops, +and the gallants of the court, and our own citizens too, who if not +quite so gay in colour are proper men, better looking to my mind than +some of the fops with their silver and satins." + +"That's right, Dorothy," her husband said; "spoken like the wife of a +citizen." + +All these plans were destined to be frustrated. As soon as breakfast +was over the next morning Master Lirriper started with the two boys, +and they had but just entered Chepe-side when they saw two young men +approaching. + +"Why, Lionel, here is Francis Vere!" Geoffrey exclaimed. "I thought he +was across in Holland with the Earl of Leicester." They doffed their +caps. Captain Vere, for such was now his rank, looked at them in +surprise. + +"Why!" he exclaimed, "here are Mr. Vickars' two sons. How came you +here, lads? Have you run away from home to see the wonders of London, +or to list as volunteers for the campaigns against the Dons?" + +"I wish we were, Mr. Francis," Geoffrey said. "You promised when you +were at Hedingham a year and a half since that you would some day take +us to the wars with you, and our father, seeing that neither of us have +a mind to enter the church, has quite consented that we shall become +soldiers, the more so as there is a prospect of fighting for the +persecuted Protestants of Holland. And oh, Mr. Francis, could it be +now? You know we daily exercise with arms at the castle, and we are +both strong and sturdy for our age, and believe me you should not see +us flinch before the Spaniards however many of them there were." + +"Tut, tut!" Captain Vere laughed. "Here are young cockerels, Allen; +what think you of these for soldiers to stand against the Spanish +pikemen?" + +"There are many of the volunteers who are not very much older than they +are," Captain Allen replied. "There are two in my company who must be +between seventeen and eighteen." + +"Ah! but these boys are three years younger than that." + +"Would you not take us as your pages, Mr. Francis?" Lionel urged. "We +would do faithful service, and then when we come to the age that you +could enter us as volunteers we should already have learnt a little of +war." + +"Well, well, I cannot stop to talk to you now, for I am on my way to +the Tower on business. I am only over from Holland for a day or two +with despatches from the Earl to Her Majesty's Council, and am lodging +at Westminster in a house that faces the abbey. It is one of my cousin +Edward's houses, and you will see the Vere cognizance over the door. +Call there at one hour after noon, and I will have a talk with you; but +do not buoy yourselves up with hopes as to your going with me." So +saying, with a friendly nod of his head Francis Vere continued his way +eastward. + +"What think you, Allen?" he asked his comrade as they went along. "I +should like to take the lads with me if I could. Their father, who is +the rector of Hedingham, taught my cousin Edward as well as my brothers +and myself. I saw a good deal of the boys when I was at home. They are +sturdy young fellows, and used to practise daily, as we did at their +age, with the men-at-arms at the castle, and can use their weapons. A +couple of years of apprenticeship would be good schooling for them. One +cannot begin to learn the art of war too young, and it is because we +have all been so ignorant of it that our volunteers in Holland have not +done better." + +"I think, Vere, that they are too young yet to be enlisted as +volunteers, although in another two years, perhaps, you might admit the +elder of the two. But I see no reason why, if you are so inclined, you +should not take them with you as pages. Each company has its pages and +boys, and you might take these two for the special service of yourself +and your officers. They would then be on pretty well the same footing +as the five gentlemen volunteers you have already with you, and would +be distinct from the lads who have entered as pages to the company. I +suppose that you have not yet your full number of boys?" + +"No; there are fifteen boys allowed, one to each ten men, and I am +several short of this number, and have already written my brother John +to get six sturdy lads from among our own tenantry and to send them +over in the first ship from Harwich. Yes, I will take these lads with +me. I like their spirit, and we are all fond of their father, who is a +very kindly as well as learned man." + +"I don't suppose he will thank you greatly, Francis," Captain Allen +laughed. + +"His goodwife is more likely to be vexed than he is," Captain Vere +said, "for it will give him all the more time for the studies in which +he is wrapped up. Besides, it will be a real service to the boys. It +will shorten their probation as volunteers, and they may get +commissions much earlier than they otherwise would do. We are all mere +children in the art of war; for truly before Roger Morgan first took +out his volunteers to fight for the Dutch there was scarce a man in +England who knew how to range a company in order. You and I learned +somewhat of our business in Poland, and some of our leaders have also +had a few lessons in the art of war in foreign countries, but most of +our officers are altogether new to the work. However, we have good +masters, and I trust these Spaniards may teach us how to beat them in +time; but at present, as I said, we are all going to school, and the +earlier one begins at school the sooner one learns its lessons. +Besides, we must have pages, and it will be more pleasant for me having +lads who belong in a sort of way to our family, and to whom, if I am +disposed, I can talk of people at home. They are high-spirited and full +of fun, and I should like to have them about me. But here we are at the +Tower. We shall not be long, I hope, over the list of arms and +munitions that the earl has sent for. When we have done we will take +boat back to Westminster. Half an hour will take us there, as the tide +will be with us." + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +IN THE LOW COUNTRY. + + +Master Lirriper had stood apart while the boys were conversing with +Francis Vere. + +"What do you think, Master Lirriper?" Geoffrey exclaimed as they joined +him. "We have asked Mr. Vere to take us with him as pages to the war in +the Low Country, and though he said we were not to be hopeful about his +reply, I do think he will take us. We are to go round to Westminster at +one o'clock to see him again. What do you think of that?" + +"I don't know what to think, Master Geoffrey. It takes me all by +surprise, and I don't know how I stand in the matter. You see, your +father gave you into my charge, and what could I say to him if I went +back empty-handed?" + +"But, you see, it is with Francis Vere," Geoffrey said. "If it had been +with anyone else it would be different. But the Veres are his patrons, +and he looks upon the earl, and Mr. Francis and his brothers, almost as +he does on us; and, you know, he has already consented to our entering +the army some day. Besides, he can't blame you; because, of course, Mr. +Vere will write to him himself and say that he has taken us, and so you +can't be blamed in the matter. My father would know well enough that +you could not withstand the wishes of one of the Veres, who are lords +of Hedingham and all the country round." + +"I should withstand them if I thought they were wrong," the boatman +said sturdily, "and if I were sure that your father would object to +your going; but that is what I am not sure. He may think it the best +thing for you to begin early under the protection of Master Francis, +and again he may think you a great deal too young for such wild work. +He has certainly always let you have pretty much your own way, and has +allowed you to come and go as you like, but this is a different +business altogether. I am sorely bested as to what I ought to do." + +"Well, nothing is settled yet, Master Lirriper; and, besides, I don't +see that you can help yourself in the matter, and if Mr. Vere says he +will take us I suppose you can't carry us off by force." + +"It is Mistress Vickars that I am thinking of more than your father. +The vicar is an easy-going gentleman, but Mistress Vickars speaks her +mind, and I expect she will be in a terrible taking over it, and will +rate me soundly; though, as you say, I do not see how I can help myself +in the matter. Well now, let us look at the shops and at the Guildhall, +and then we will make our way down to Westminster as we had proposed to +do and see the abbey; by that time it will be near the hour at which +you are to call upon Mr. Vere." + +But the sights that the boys had been so longing to see had for the +time lost their interest in their eyes. The idea that it was possible +that Mr. Vere would take them with him to fight against the cruel +oppressors of the Low Country was so absorbing that they could think of +nothing else. Even the wonders of the Guildhall and St. Paul's received +but scant attention, and the armourers' shops, in which they had a new +and lively interest, alone sufficed to detain them. Even the gibes of +the apprentices fell dead upon their ears. These varlets might laugh, +but what would they say if they knew that they were going to fight the +Spaniards. The thought so altered them that they felt almost a feeling +of pity for these lads, condemned to stay at home and mind their +masters' shops. + +As to John Lirriper, he was sorely troubled in his mind, and divided +between what he considered his duty to the vicar and his life-long +respect and reverence towards the lords of Hedingham. The feudal system +was extinct, but feudal ideas still lingered among the people. Their +lords could no longer summon them to take the field, had no longer +power almost of life and death over them, but they were still their +lords, and regarded with the highest respect and reverence. The earls +of Oxford were, in the eyes of the people of those parts of Essex where +their estates lay, personages of greater importance than the queen +herself, of whose power and attributes they had but a very dim notion. +It was not so very long since people had risen in rebellion against the +queen, but such an idea as that of rising against their lords had never +entered the mind of a single inhabitant of Hedingham. + +However, Master Lirriper came to the conclusion that he was, as +Geoffrey had said, powerless to interfere. If Mr. Francis Vere decided +to take the boys with him, what could he do to prevent it? He could +hardly take them forcibly down to the boat against their will, and even +could he do so their father might not approve, and doubtless the earl, +when he came to hear of it, would be seriously angry at this act of +defiance of his kinsman. Still, he was sure that he should have a very +unpleasant time with Mistress Vickars. But, as he reassured himself, it +was, after all, better to put up with a woman's scolding than to bear +the displeasure of the Earl of Oxford, who could turn him out of his +house, ruin his business, and drive him from Hedingham. After all, it +was natural that these lads should like to embark on this adventure +with Mr. Francis Vere, and it would doubtless be to their interest to +be thus closely connected with him. At any rate, if it was to be it +was, and he, John Lirriper, could do nothing to prevent it. Having +arrived at this conclusion he decided to make the best of it, and began +to chat cheerfully with the boys. + +Precisely at the appointed hour John Lirriper arrived with the two lads +at the entrance to the house facing the abbey. Two or three servitors, +whose doublets were embroidered with the cognizance of the Veres, were +standing in front of the door. + +"Why, it is Master Lirriper!" one of them said. "Why, what has brought +you here? I did not know that your trips often extended to London." + +"Nor do they," John Lirriper said. "It was the wind and my nephew's +craft the _Susan_ that brought me to London, and it is the will of +Mr. Francis that these two young gentlemen should meet him here at one +o'clock that has brought me to this door." + +"Captain Francis is in; for, you know, he is a captain now, having been +lately appointed to a company in the Earl of Leicester's army. He +returned an hour since, and has but now finished his meal. Do you wish +to go up with these young masters, or shall I conduct them to him?" + +"You had best do that," John Lirriper answered. "I will remain here +below if Captain Francis desires to see me or has any missive to +intrust to me." + +The boys followed the servant upstairs, and were shown into a room +where Francis Vere, his cousin the Earl of Oxford, and Captain Allen +were seated at table. + +"Well, lads," the earl said, "so you want to follow my cousin Francis +to the wars?" + +"That is our wish, my lord, if Captain Francis will be so good as to +take us with him." + +"And what will my good tutor your father say to it?" the earl asked +smiling. + +"I think, my lord," Geoffrey said boldly, "that if you yourself will +tell my father you think it is for our good, he will say naught against +it." + +"Oh, you want to throw the responsibility upon me, and to embroil me +with your father and Mistress Vickars as an abettor of my cousin +Francis in the kidnapping of children? Well, Francis, you had better +explain to them what their duties will be if they go with you." + +"You will be my pages," Francis Vere said, "and will perform the usual +duties of pages in good families when in the field. It is the duty of +pages to aid in collecting firewood and forage, and in all other ways +to make themselves useful. You will bear the same sort of relation to +the gentlemen volunteers as they do towards the officers. They are +aspirants for commissions as officers as you will be to become +gentlemen volunteers. You must not think that your duties will be +light, for they will not, and you will have to bear many discomforts +and hardships. But you will be in an altogether different position from +that of the boys who are the pages of the company. You will, apart from +your duties, and bearing in mind the difference of your age, associate +with the officers and the gentlemen volunteers on terms of equality +when not engaged upon duty. On duty you will have to render the same +strict and unquestionable obedience that all soldiers pay to those of +superior rank. What say you? Are you still anxious to go? Because, if +so, I have decided to take you." + +Geoffrey and Lionel both expressed their thanks in proper terms, and +their earnest desire to accompany Captain Vere, and to behave in all +ways conformably to his orders and instructions. + +"Very well, that is settled," Francis Vere said. "The earl is +journeying down to Hedingham to-morrow, and has kindly promised to take +charge of a letter from me to your father, and personally to assure him +that this early embarkation upon military life would prove greatly to +your advantage." + +"Supposing that you are not killed by the Spaniards or carried off by +fever," the earl put in; "for although possibly that might be an +advantage to humanity in general, it could scarcely be considered one +to you personally." + +"We are ready to take our risk of that, my lord," Geoffrey said; "and +are indeed greatly beholden both to Captain Francis for his goodness in +taking us with him, and to yourself in kindly undertaking the mission +of reconciling our father to our departure." + +"You have not told me yet how it is that I find you in London?" Francis +Vere said. + +"We only came up for a week, sir, to see the town. We are in charge of +Master Lirriper, who owns a barge on the river, and plies between +Hedingham and Bricklesey, but who was coming up to London in a craft +belonging to his nephew, and who took charge of us. We are staying at +the house of Master Swindon, a citizen and ship-chandler." + +"Is Master Lirriper below?" + +"He is, sir." + +"Then in that case he had better go back to the house and bring your +mails here. I shall sail from Deptford the day after to-morrow with the +turn of tide. You had best remain here now. There will be many things +necessary for you to get before you start. I will give instructions to +one of my men-at-arms to go with you to purchase them." + +"I will take their outfit upon myself, Francis," the earl said. "My +steward shall go out with them and see to it. It is the least I can do +when I am abetting you in depriving my old tutor of his sons." He +touched a bell and a servitor entered. "See that these young gentlemen +are fed and attended to. They will remain here for the night. Tell +Master Dotterell to come hither to me." + +The boys bowed deeply and retired. + +"It is all settled, Master Lirriper," they said when they reached the +hall below. "We are to sail with Captain Francis the day after to- +morrow, and you will be pleased to hear that the earl himself has taken +charge of the matter, and will see our father and communicate the news +to him." + +"That is a comfort indeed," John Lirriper said fervently; "for I would +most as soon have had to tell him that the _Susan_ had gone down +and that you were both drowned, as that I had let you both slip away to +the wars when he had given you into my charge. But if the earl takes +the matter in hand I do not think that even your lady mother can bear +very heavily on me. And now, what is going to be done?" + +"We are to remain here in order that suitable clothes may be obtained +for us by the time we sail. Will you bring down to-morrow morning our +wallets from Master Swindon's, and thank him and his good dame for +their hospitality, and say that we are sorry to leave them thus +suddenly without having an opportunity of thanking them ourselves? We +will write letters to-night to our father and mother, and give them to +you to take with you when you return." + +John Lirriper at once took his departure, greatly relieved in mind to +find that the earl himself had taken the responsibility upon his +shoulders, and would break the news long before he himself reached +Hedingham. A few minutes later a servitor conducted the boys to an +apartment where a meal was laid for them; and as soon as this was over +they were joined by the steward, who requested them to set out with him +at once, as there were many things to be done and but short time for +doing them. No difficulty in the way of time was, however, thrown in +the way by the various tradesmen they visited, these being all +perfectly ready to put themselves to inconvenience to do pleasure to so +valuable a patron as the powerful Earl of Oxford. + +Three suits of clothes were ordered for each of them: the one such as +that worn by pages in noble families upon ordinary occasions, another +of a much richer kind for special ceremonies and gaieties, the third a +strong, serviceable suit for use when actually in the field. Then they +were taken to an armourer's where each was provided with a light morion +or headpiece, breast-plate and backpiece, sword and dagger. A +sufficient supply of under garments, boots, and other necessaries were +also purchased; and when all was complete they returned highly +delighted to the house. It was still scarce five o'clock, and they went +across to the abbey and wandered for some time through its aisles, +greatly impressed with its dignity and beauty now that their own +affairs were off their mind. + +They returned to the house again, and after supper wrote their letters +to their father and mother, saying that they hoped they would not be +displeased at the step they had taken, and which they would not have +ventured upon had they not already obtained their father's consent to +their entering the army. They knew, of course, that he had not +contemplated their doing so for some little time; but as so excellent +an opportunity had offered, and above all, as they were going out to +fight against the Spaniards for the oppressed people of the Low +Countries, they hoped their parents would approve of the steps they had +taken, not having had time or opportunity to consult them. + +At noon two days later Francis Vere with Captain Allen and the two boys +took their seats in the stern of a skiff manned by six rowers. In the +bow were the servitors of the two officers, and the luggage was stowed +in the extreme stern. + +"The tide is getting slack, is it not?" Captain Vere asked the boatmen. + +"Yes, sir; it will not run up much longer. It will be pretty well +slack-water by the time we get to the bridge." + +Keeping close to the bank the boat proceeded at a rapid pace. Several +times the two young officers stood up and exchanged salutations with +ladies or gentlemen of their acquaintance. As the boatman had +anticipated, tide was slack by the time they arrived at London Bridge, +and they now steered out into the middle of the river. + +"Give way, lads," Captain Allen said. "We told the captain we would not +keep him waiting long after high-water, and he will be getting +impatient if he does not see us before long." + +As they shot past the _Susan_ the boys waved their hands to Master +Lirriper, who, after coming down in the morning and receiving their +letters for their parents, had returned at once to the city and had +taken his place on board the _Susan_, so as to be able to tell +their father that he had seen the last of them. The distance between +London Bridge and Deptford was traversed in a very short time. A vessel +with her flags flying and her canvas already loosened was hanging to a +buoy some distance out in the stream, and as the boat came near enough +for the captain to distinguish those on board, the mooring-rope was +slipped, the head sails flattened in, and the vessel began to swing +round. Before her head was down stream the boat was alongside. The two +officers followed by the boys ascended the ladder by the side. The +luggage was quickly handed up, and the servitors followed. The sails +were sheeted home, and the vessel began to move rapidly through the +water. + +The boys had thought the _Susan_ an imposing craft, but they were +surprised, indeed, at the space on board the _Dover Castle_. In +the stern there was a lofty poop with spacious cabins. Six guns were +ranged along on each side of the deck, and when the sails were got up +they seemed so vast to the boys that they felt a sense of littleness on +board the great craft. They had been relieved to find that Captain Vere +had his own servitor with him; for in talking it over they had mutually +expressed their doubt as to their ability to render such service as +Captain Vere would be accustomed to. + +The wind was from the south-west, and the vessel was off Sheerness +before the tide turned. There was, however, no occasion to anchor, for +the wind was strong enough to take them against the flood. + +During the voyage they had no duties to perform. The ship's cook +prepared the meals, and the officers' servants waited on them, the lads +taking their meals with the two officers. Their destination was Bergen- +op-Zoom, a town at the mouth of the Scheldt, of the garrison of which +the companies of both Francis Vere and Captain Allen formed part. + +As soon as the low coasts of Holland came in sight the boys watched +them with the most lively interest. + +"We are passing Sluys now," Captain Vere said. "The land almost ahead +of us is Walcheren; and that spire belongs to Flushing. We could go +outside and up the channel between the island and Beveland, and then up +the Eastern Scheldt to Bergen-op-Zoom; but instead of that we shall +follow the western channel, which is more direct." + +"It is as flat as our Essex coast," Geoffrey remarked. + +"Aye, and flatter; for the greater part of the land lies below the +level of the sea, which is only kept out by great dams and dykes. At +times when the rivers are high and the wind keeps back their waters +they burst the dams and spread over a vast extent of country. The +Zuider-Zee was so formed in 1170 and 1395, and covers a tract as large +as the whole county of Essex. Twenty-six years later the river Maas +broke its banks and flooded a wide district. Seventy-two villages were +destroyed and 100,000 people lost their life. The lands have never been +recovered; and where a fertile country once stood is now a mere swamp." + +"I shouldn't like living there," Lionel said. "It would be terrible, +every time the rivers are full and the wind blows, to think that at +any moment the banks may burst and the Hood come rushing over you." + +"It is all habit," Captain Vere replied; "I don't suppose they trouble +themselves about it. But they are very particular in keeping their +dykes in good repair. The water is one of the great defences of their +country. In the first place there are innumerable streams to be crossed +by an invader, and in the second, they can as a last resource cut the +dykes and flood the country. These Dutchmen, as far as I have seen of +them, are hard-working and industrious people, steady and patient, and +resolved to defend their independence to the last. This they have +indeed proved by the wonderful resistance they have made against the +power of Spain. There, you see the ship's head has been turned and we +shall before long be in the channel. Sluys lies up that channel on the +right. It is an important place. Large vessels can go no further, but +are unloaded there and the cargoes taken to Bruges and thence +distributed to many other towns. They say that in 1468 as many as a +hundred and fifty ships a day arrived at Sluys. That gives you an idea +of the trade that the Netherlands carry on. The commerce of this one +town was as great as is that of London at the present time. But since +the troubles the trade of Sluys has fallen off a good deal." + +The ship had to anchor here for two or three hours until the tide +turned, for the wind had fallen very light and they could not make head +against the ebb. As soon as it turned they again proceeded on their +way, dropping quietly up with the tide. The boys climbed up into the +tops, and thence could see a wide extent of country dotted with +villages stretching beyond the banks, which restricted their view from +the decks. In five hours Bergen-op-Zoom came in sight, and they +presently dropped anchor opposite the town. The boat was lowered, and +the two officers with the lads were rowed ashore. They were met as they +landed by several young officers. + +"Welcome back, Vere; welcome, Allen. You have been lucky indeed in +having a few days in England, and getting a view of something besides +this dreary flat country and its sluggish rivers. What is the last news +from London?" + +"There is little news enough," Vere replied. "We were only four days in +London, and were busy all the time. And how are things here? Now that +summer is at hand and the country drying the Dons ought to be +bestirring themselves." + +"They say that they are doing so," the officer replied. "We have news +that the Duke of Parma is assembling his army at Bruges, where he is +collecting the pick of the Spanish infantry with a number of Italian +regiments which have joined him. He sent off the Marquess Del Vasto +with the Sieur De Hautepenne towards Bois-le-Duc. General Count +Hohenlohe, who, as you know, we English always call Count Holland, went +off with a large force to meet him, and we heard only this morning that +a battle has been fought, Hautepenne killed, and the fort of Crevecoeur +on the Maas captured. From what I hear, some of our leaders think that +it was a mistake so to scatter our forces, and if Parma moves forward +from Bruges against Sluys, which is likely enough, we shall be sorely +put to it to save the place." + +As they were talking they proceeded into the town, and presently +reached the house where Francis Vere had his quarters. The officers and +gentlemen volunteers of his company soon assembled, and Captain Vere +introduced the two boys to them. + +"They are young gentlemen of good family," he said, "who will act as my +pages until they are old enough to be enrolled as gentlemen volunteers. +I commend them to your good offices. Their father is a learned and +reverend gentleman who was my tutor, and also tutor to my cousin, the +Earl of Oxford, by whom he is greatly valued. They are lads of spirit, +and have been instructed in the use of arms at Hedingham as if they had +been members of our family, I am sure, gentlemen volunteers, that you +will receive them as friends. I propose that they shall take their +meals with you, but of course they will lodge here with me and my +officers; but as you are in the next house this will cause no +inconvenience. I trust that we shall not remain here long, but shall +soon be on the move. We have now been here seven months, and it is high +time we were doing something. We didn't bargain to come over here and +settle down for life in a dull Dutch town." + +In a few hours the boys found themselves quite at home in their new +quarters. The gentlemen volunteers received them cordially, and they +found that for the present their duties would be extremely light, +consisting chiefly in carrying messages and orders; for as the officers +had all servants of their own, Captain Vere dispensed with their +attendance at meals. There was much to amuse and interest them in +Bergen-op-Zoom. It reminded them to some extent of Harwich, with its +narrow streets and quaint houses; but the fortifications were far +stronger, and the number of churches struck them as prodigious. The +population differed in no very large degree in dress from that of +England, but the people struck them as being slower and more deliberate +in their motions. The women's costumes differed much more widely from +those to which they were accustomed, and their strange and varied head- +dresses, their bright-coloured handkerchiefs, and the amount of gold +necklaces and bracelets that they wore, struck them with surprise. + +Their stay in Bergen-op-Zoom was even shorter than they had +anticipated, for three days after their arrival a boat came with a +letter from Sir William Russell, the governor at Flushing. He said that +he had just received an urgent letter from the Dutch governor of Sluys, +saying that Parma's army was advancing from Bruges towards the city, +and had seized and garrisoned the fort of Blankenburg on the sea-coast +to prevent reinforcements arriving from Ostend; he therefore prayed the +governor of Flushing to send off troops and provisions with all haste +to enable him to resist the attack. Sir William requested that the +governor of Bergen-op-Zoom would at once embark the greater portion of +his force on board ship and send them to Sluys. He himself was having a +vessel filled with grain for the use of the inhabitants, and was also +sending every man he could spare from Flushing. + +In a few minutes all was bustle in the town. The trumpets of the +various companies called the soldiers to arms, and in a very short time +the troops were on their way towards the river. Here several ships had +been requisitioned for the service; and as the companies marched down +they were conducted to the ships to which they were allotted by the +quarter-masters. Geoffrey and Lionel felt no small pride as they +marched down with their troop. They had for the first time donned their +steel-caps, breast and back pieces; but this was rather for convenience +of carriage than for any present utility. They had at Captain Vere's +orders left their ordinary clothes behind them, and were now attired in +thick serviceable jerkins, with skirts coming down nearly to the knee, +like those worn by the troops. They marched at the rear of the company, +the other pages, similarly attired, following them. + +As soon as the troops were on board ship, sail was made, and the +vessels dropped down the stream. The wind was very light, and it was +not until thirty hours after starting that the little fleet arrived off +Sluys. The town, which was nearly egg-shaped, lay close to the river, +which was called the Zwin. At the eastern end, in the centre of a +detached piece of water, stood the castle, connected with the town by a +bridge of boats. + +The Zwin formed the defence on the north side, while the south and west +were covered by a very wide moat along the centre of which ran a dyke, +dividing it into two channels. On the west side this moat extended to +the Zwin, and was crossed at the point of junction by the bridge +leading to the west gate. The walls inclosed a considerable space, +containing fields and gardens. Seven windmills stood on the ramparts. +The tower of the town-hall, and those of the churches of Our Lady, St. +John, and the Grey Friars rose high above the town. + +The ships from Flushing and Bergen-op-Zoom sailed up together, and the +800 men who landed were received with immense enthusiasm by the +inhabitants, who were Protestants, and devoted to the cause of +independence. The English were under the command of Sir Roger Williams, +who had already seen so many years of service in the Low Countries; and +under him were Morgan, Thomas Baskerville, and Huntley, who had long +served with him. + +Roger Williams was an admirable man for service of this kind. He had +distinguished himself by many deeds of reckless bravery. He possessed +an inexhaustible fund of confidence and high spirits, and in his +company it was impossible to feel despondent, however desperate the +situation. + +The citizens placed their houses at the disposal of their new allies, +handsome quarters were allotted to the officers, and the soldiers were +all housed in private dwellings or the warehouses of the merchants. The +inhabitants had already for some days been working hard at their +defences, and the English at once joined them in their labours, +strengthening the weak portions of the walls, mounting cannon upon the +towers, and preparing in all ways to give a warm reception to the +Spaniards. + +Captain Vere, his lieutenant and ensign and his two pages, were +quartered in the house of a wealthy merchant, whose family did all in +their power to make them comfortable. It was a grand old house, and the +boys, accustomed as they were to the splendours of Hedingham Castle, +agreed that the simple merchants of the Low Countries were far in +advance of English nobles in the comforts and conveniences of their +dwellings. The walls of the rooms were all heavily panelled; rich +curtains hung before the casements. The furniture was not only richly +carved, but comfortable. Heavy hangings before the doors excluded +draughts, and in the principal apartments Eastern carpets covered the +floors. The meals were served on spotless white linen. Rich plate stood +on the sideboard, and gold and silver vessels of rare carved work from +Italy glittered in the armoires. + +Above all, from top to bottom, the house was scrupulously clean. Not a +particle of dust dimmed the brightness of the furniture, and even now, +when the city was threatened with siege, the merchant's wife never +relaxed her vigilance over the doings of her maids, who seemed to the +boys to be perpetually engaged in scrubbing, dusting, and polishing. + +"Our mother prides herself on the neatness of her house," Geoffrey +said; "but what would she say, I wonder, were she to see one of these +Dutch households? I fear that the maids would have a hard time of it +afterwards, and our father would be fairly driven out of his library." + +"It is all very well to be clean," Lionel said; "but I think they carry +it too far here. Peace and quietness count for something, and it +doesn't seem to me that Dutchmen, fond of it as they say they are, know +even the meaning of the words as far as their homes are concerned. Why, +it always seems to be cleaning day, and they must be afraid of going +into their own houses with their boots on!" + +"Yes, I felt quite like a criminal to-day," Geoffrey laughed, "when I +came in muddy up to the waist, after working down there by the sluices. +I believe when the Spaniards open fire these people will be more +distracted by the dust caused by falling tiles and chimneys than by any +danger of their lives." + +Great difficulties beset the Duke of Parma at the commencement of the +siege. Sluys was built upon the only piece of solid ground in the +district, and it was surrounded by such a labyrinth of canals, ditches, +and swamps, that it was said that it was almost as difficult to find +Sluys as it was to capture it. Consequently, it was impossible to find +ground solid enough for a camp to be pitched upon, and the first labour +was the erection of wooden huts for the troops upon piles driven into +the ground. These huts were protected from the fire of the defenders by +bags of earth brought in boats from a long distance. The main point +selected for the attack was the western gate; but batteries were also +placed to play upon the castle and the bridge of boats connecting it +with the town. + +"There is one advantage in their determining to attack us at the +western extremity of the town," John Menyn, the merchant at whose house +Captain Vere and his party were lodging, remarked when his guest +informed him there was no longer any doubt as to the point at which the +Spaniards intended to attack, "for they will not be able to blow up our +walls with mines in that quarter." + +"How is that?" Francis Vere asked. + +"If you can spare half an hour of your time I will show you," the +merchant said. + +"I can spare it now, Von Menyn," Vere replied; "for the information is +important, whatever it may be." + +"I will conduct you there at once. There is no time like the present." + +"Shall we follow you, sir?" Geoffrey asked his captain. + +"Yes, come along," Vere replied. "The matter is of interest, and for +the life of me I cannot make out what this obstacle can be of which our +host speaks." + +They at once set out. + +John Menyn led them to a warehouse close to the western wall, and spoke +a few words to its owner, who at once took three lanterns from the wall +and lighted them, handing one to Vere, another to John Menyn, and +taking the other himself; he then unlocked a massive door. A flight of +steps leading apparently to a cellar were visible. He led the way down, +the two men following, and the boys bringing up the rear. The descent +was far deeper than they had expected, and when they reached the bottom +they found themselves in a vast arched cellar filled with barrels. From +this they proceeded into another, and again into a third. + +"What are these great magazines?" Francis Vere asked in surprise. + +"They are wine-cellars, and there are scores similar to those you see. +Sluys is the centre of the wine trade of Flanders and Holland, and +cellars like these extend right under the wall. All the warehouses +along here have similar cellars. This end of the town was the driest, +and the soil most easily excavated. That is why the magazines for wines +are all clustered here. There is not a foot of ground behind and under +the walls at this end that is not similarly occupied, and if the +Spaniards try to drive mines to blow up the walls, they will simply +break their way into these cellars, where we can meet them and drive +them back again." + +"Excellent!" Francis Vere said. "This will relieve us of the work of +countermining, which is always tiresome and dangerous, and would be +specially so here, where we should have to dive under that deep moat +outside your walls. Now we shall only have to keep a few men on watch +in these cellars. They would hear the sound of the Spanish approaching, +and we shall be ready to give them a warm reception by the time they +break in. Are there communications between these cellars?" + +"Yes, for the most part," the wine merchant said. "The cellars are not +entirely the property of us dealers in wine. They are constructed by +men who let them, just as they would let houses. A merchant in a small +way would need but one cellar, while some of us occupy twenty or more; +therefore, there are for the most part communications, with doors, +between the various cellars, so that they can be let off in accordance +with the needs of the hirers." + +"Well, I am much obliged to you for telling me of this," Captain Vere +said. "Williams and Morgan will be glad enough to hear that there is no +fear of their being blown suddenly into the air while defending the +walls, and they will see the importance of keeping a few trusty men on +watch in the cellars nearest to the Spaniards. I shall report the +matter to them at once. The difficulty," he added smiling, "will be to +keep the men wakeful, for it seems to me that the very air is heavy +with the fumes of wine." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +THE SIEGE OF SLUYS. + + +Until the Spaniards had established their camp, and planted some of +their batteries, there was but little firing. Occasionally the wall- +pieces opened upon parties of officers reconnoitring, and a few shots +were fired from time to time to harass the workmen in the enemy's +batteries; but this was done rather to animate the townsmen, and as a +signal to distant friends that so far matters were going on quietly, +than with any hopes of arresting the progress of the enemy's works. +Many sorties were made by the garrison, and fierce fighting took place, +but only a score or two of men from each company were taken upon these +occasions, and the boys were compelled to remain inactive spectators of +the fight. + +In these sorties the Spanish works were frequently held for a few +minutes, gabions thrown down, and guns overturned, but after doing as +much damage as they could the assailants had to fall back again to the +town, being unable to resist the masses of pikemen brought up against +them. The boldness of these sorties, and the bravery displayed by their +English allies, greatly raised the spirits of the townsfolk, who now +organized themselves into companies, and undertook the work of guarding +the less exposed portion of the wall, thus enabling the garrison to +keep their whole strength at the points attacked. + +The townsmen also laboured steadily in adding to the defences; and two +companies of women were formed, under female captains, who took the +names of May in the Heart and Catherine the Rose. These did good +service by building a strong fort at one of the threatened points, and +this work was in their honour christened Fort Venus. + +"It is scarcely a compliment to Venus," Geoffrey laughed to his +brother. "These square-shouldered and heavily-built women do not at all +correspond with my idea of the goddess of love." + +"They are strong enough for men," Lionel said. "I shouldn't like one of +those big fat arms to come down upon my head. No, they are not pretty; +but they look jolly and good-tempered, and if they were to fight as +hard as they work they ought to do good service." + +"There is a good deal of difference between them," Geoffrey said. "Look +at those three dark-haired women with neat trim figures. They do not +look as if they belonged to the same race as the others." + +"They are not of the same race, lad," Captain Vere, who was standing +close by, said. "The big heavy women are Flemish, the others come, no +doubt, from the Walloon provinces bordering on France. The Walloons +broke off from the rest of the states and joined the Spanish almost +from the first. They were for the most part Catholics, and had little +in common with the people of the Low Country; but there were, of +course, many Protestants among them, and these were forced to emigrate, +for the Spanish allow no Protestants in the country under their rule. +Alva adopted the short and easy plan of murdering all the Protestants +in the towns he took; but the war is now conducted on rather more +humane principles, and the Protestants have the option given them of +changing their faith or leaving the country. + +"In this way, without intending it, the Spaniards have done good +service to Holland, for hundreds of thousands of industrious people +have flocked there for shelter from Antwerp, Ghent, Bruges, and other +cities that have fallen into the hands of the Spaniards, thus greatly +raising the population of Holland, and adding to its power of defence. +Besides this, the presence of these exiles, and the knowledge that a +similar fate awaits themselves if they fall again under the yoke of +Spain, nerves the people to resist to the utmost. Had it not been for +the bigotry of the Spanish, and the abominable cruelties practised by +the Inquisition, the States would never have rebelled; and even after +they did so, terms might easily have been made with them had they not +been maddened by the wholesale massacres perpetrated by Alva. There, do +you hear those women speaking? Their language is French rather than +Flemish." + +Just as they were speaking a heavy roar of cannon broke out from the +eastern end of the town. + +"They have opened fire on the castle!" Vere exclaimed. "Run, lads, +quick! and summon the company to form in the market-place in front of +our house. We are told off to reinforce the garrison of the castle in +case of attack." + +The boys hurried away at the top of their speed. They had the list of +all the houses in which the men of the company were quartered; and as +the heavy roar of cannon had brought every one to their doors to hear +what was going on, the company were in a very short time assembled. + +Francis Vere placed himself at their head, and marched them through the +long streets of the town and out through the wall on to the bridge of +boats. It was the first time the boys had been under fire; and although +they kept a good countenance, they acknowledged to each other +afterwards that they had felt extremely uncomfortable as they traversed +the bridge with the balls whistling over their heads, and sometimes +striking the water close by and sending a shower of spray over the +troops. + +[Illustration: THE FOUR PAGES CARRY DOWN THE WOUNDED SOLDIER] + +They felt easier when they entered the castle and were protected by its +walls. Upon these the men took their station. Those with guns +discharged their pieces against the Spanish artillerymen, the pikemen +assisted the bombardiers to work the cannon, and the officers went to +and fro encouraging the men. The pages of the company had little to do +beyond from time to time carrying cans of wine and water to the men +engaged. Geoffrey and Lionel, finding that their services were not +required by Captain Vere, mounted on to the wall, and sheltering +themselves as well as they could behind the battlements, looked out at +what was going on. + +"It doesn't seem to me," Geoffrey said, "that these walls will long +withstand the balls of the Spanish. The battlements are already knocked +down in several places, and I can hear after each shot strikes the +walls the splashing of the brickwork as it falls into the water. See! +there is Tom Carroll struck down with a ball. It's our duty to carry +him away." + +They ran along the wall to the fallen soldier. Two other pages came up, +and the four carried him to the top of the steps and then down into the +court-yard, where a Dutch surgeon took charge of him. His shoulder had +been struck by the ball, and the arm hung only by a shred of flesh. The +surgeon shook his head. + +"I can do nothing for him," he said. "He cannot live many hours." + +Lionel had done his share in carrying the man down, but he now turned +sick and faint. + +Geoffrey caught him by the arm. "Steady, old boy," he said; "it is +trying at first, but we shall soon get accustomed to it. Here, take a +draught of wine from this flask." + +"I am better now," Lionel said, after taking a draught of wine. "I felt +as if I was going to faint, Geoffrey. I don't know why I should, for I +did not feel frightened when we were on the wall." + +"Oh, it has nothing to do with fear; it is just the sight of that poor +fellow's blood. There is nothing to be ashamed of in that. Why, I saw +Will Atkins, who was one of the best fighters and single-stick players +in Hedingham, go off in a dead swoon because a man he was working with +crushed his thumb between two heavy stones. Look, Lionel, what cracks +there are in the wall here. I don't think it will stand long. We had +better run up and tell Captain Vere, for it may come toppling down with +some of the men on it." + +Captain Vere on hearing the news ran down and examined the wall. + +"Yes," he said, "it is evidently going. A good earthwork is worth a +dozen of these walls. They will soon have the castle about our ears. +However, it is of no great importance to us. I saw you lads just now on +the wall; I did not care about ordering you down at the time; but don't +go up again except to help to carry down the wounded. Make it a rule, +my boys, never to shirk your duty, however great the risk to life may +be; but, on the other hand, never risk your lives unless it is your +duty to do so. What is gallantry in the one case is foolishness in the +other. Although you are but pages, yet it may well be that in such a +siege as this you will have many opportunities of showing that you are +of good English stock; but while I would have you shrink from no danger +when there is a need for you to expose yourselves, I say also that you +should in no way run into danger wantonly." + +Several times in the course of the afternoon the boys took their turn +in going up and helping to bring down wounded men. As the time went on +several yawning gaps appeared in the walls. The court-yard was strewn +with fragments of masonry, and the pages were ordered to keep under +shelter of the wall of the castle unless summoned on duty. Indeed, the +court-yard had now become a more dangerous station than the wall +itself; for not only did the cannon-shot fly through the breaches, but +fragments of bricks, mortar, and rubbish flew along with a force that +would have been fatal to anything struck. + +Some of the pages were big fellows of seventeen or eighteen years old, +who had been serving for some years under Morgan and Williams, and +would soon be transferred into the ranks. + +"I like not this sort of fighting," one of them said. "It is all very +well when it comes to push of pike with the Spaniards, but to remain +here like chickens in a coop while they batter away at us is a game for +which I have no fancy. What say you, Master Vickars?" + +"Well, it is my first experience, Somers, and I cannot say that it is +agreeable. I do not know whether I should like hand-to-hand fighting +better; but it seems to me at present that it would be certainly more +agreeable to be doing something than to be sitting here and listening +to the falls of the pieces of masonry and the whistling of the balls. I +don't see that they will be any nearer when they have knocked this +place to pieces. They have no boats, and if they had, the guns on the +city wall would prevent their using them; besides, when the bridge of +boats is removed they could do nothing if they got here." + +Towards evening a council was held, all the principal officers being +present, and it was decided to evacuate the castle. It could indeed +have been held for some days longer, but it was plain it would at +length become untenable; the bridge of boats had already been struck in +several places, and some of the barges composing it had sunk level with +the water. Were it destroyed, the garrison of the castle would be +completely cut off, and as no great advantage was to be gained by +holding the position, for it was evident that it was upon the other end +of the town the main attack was to be made, it was decided to evacuate +it under cover of night. As soon as it became dark this decision was +carried into effect, and for hours the troops worked steadily, +transporting the guns, ammunition, and stores of all kinds across from +the castle to the town. + +Already communication with their friends outside had almost ceased, for +the first operation of the enemy had been to block the approach to +Sluys from the sea. Boats had been moored head and stern right across +Zwin, and a battery erected upon each shore to protect them; but +Captains Hart and Allen twice swam down to communicate with friendly +vessels below the obstacle, carrying despatches with them from the +governor to the States-General, and from Roger Williams to the English +commanders, urging that no time should be lost in assembling an army to +march to the relief of the town. + +Both contained assurances that the garrison would defend the place to +the last extremity, but pointed out that it was only a question of +time, and that the town must fall unless relieved. The Dutch garrison +were 800 strong, and had been joined by as many English. Parma had at +first marched with but 6000 men against the city, but had very speedily +drawn much larger bodies of men towards him, and had, as Roger Williams +states in a letter to the queen sent from Sluys at an early period of +the siege, four regiments of Walloons, four of Germans, one of +Italians, one of Burgundians, fifty-two companies of Spaniards, twenty- +four troops of horse, and forty-eight guns. This would give a total of +at least 17,000 men, and further reinforcements afterwards arrived. + +Against so overwhelming a force as this, it could not be hoped that the +garrison, outnumbered by more than ten to one, could long maintain +themselves, and the Duke of Parma looked for an easy conquest of the +place. By both parties the possession of Sluys was regarded as a matter +of importance out of all proportion to the size and population of the +town; for at that time it was known in England that the King of Spain +was preparing a vast fleet for the invasion of Britain, and Sluys was +the nearest point to our shores at which a fleet could gather and the +forces of Parma embark to join those coming direct from, Spain. The +English, therefore, were determined to maintain the place to the last +extremity, and while Parma had considered its capture as an affair of a +few days only, the little garrison were determined that for weeks at +any rate they would be able to prolong the resistance, feeling sure +that before that time could elapse both the States and England, knowing +the importance of the struggle, would send forces to their relief. + +The view taken as to the uselessness of defending the castle was fully +justified, as the Spaniards on the following day removed the guns that +they had employed in battering it, to their works facing the western +gate, and fire was opened next morning. Under cover of this the Spanish +engineers pushed their trenches up to the very edge of the moat, in +spite of several desperate sorties by the garrison. The boys had been +forbidden by Captain Vere to take their place with the company on the +walls. + +"In time," he said, "as our force decreases, we shall want every one +capable of handling arms to man the breaches, but at present we are not +in any extremity; and none save those whom duty compels to be there +must come under the fire of the Spaniards, for to do so would be +risking life without gain." + +They had, however, made friends with the wine merchant whose cellars +they had visited, and obtained permission from him to visit the upper +storey of his warehouse whenever they chose. From a window here they +were enabled to watch all that was taking place, for the warehouse was +much higher than the walls. It was not in the direct line of fire of +the Spanish batteries, for these were chiefly concentrated against the +wall a little to their right. After heavy fighting the Spaniards one +night, by means of boats from the Zwin, landed upon the dyke which +divided the moat into two channels, and thus established themselves so +close under the ramparts that the guns could not be brought to bear +upon them. They proceeded to intrench themselves at once upon the dyke. + +The governor, Arnold Groenvelt, consulted with the English leaders, and +decided that the enemy must be driven off this dyke immediately, or +that the safety of the city would be gravely imperilled. They therefore +assembled a force of four hundred men, sallied out of the south gate, +where two bastions were erected on the dyke itself, and then advanced +along it to the assault of the Spaniards. The battle was a desperate +one, the English and Dutch were aided by their comrades on the wall, +who shot with guns and arquebuses against the Spaniards, while the +latter were similarly assisted by their friends along the outer edge of +the moat, and received constant reinforcements by boats from their +ships. + +The odds were too great for the assailants, who were forced at last to +fall back along the dyke to the south gate and to re-enter the town. It +was already five weeks since the English had arrived to take part in +the defence, and the struggle now began upon a great scale--thirty +cannon and eight culverins opening fire upon the walls. The heaviest +fire was on St. James' day, the 25th of July, when 4000 shots were +fired between three in the morning and five in the afternoon. While +this tremendous cannonade was going on, the boys could not but admire +the calmness shown by the population. Many of the shots, flying over +the top of the walls, struck the houses in the city, and the chimneys, +tiles, and masses of masonry fell in the streets. Nevertheless the +people continued their usual avocations. The shops were all open, +though the men employed served their customers with breast and back +pieces buckled on, and their arms close at hand, so that they could run +to the walls at once to take part in their defence did the Spaniards +attempt an assault upon them. The women stood knitting at their doors, +Frau Menyn looked as sharply after her maids as ever, and washing and +scouring went on without interruption. + +"I believe that woman will keep those girls at work after the Spaniards +have entered the city, and until they are thundering at the door," +Lionel said. "Who but a Dutch woman would give a thought to a few +particles of dust on her furniture when an enemy was cannonading the +town?" + +"I think she acts wisely after all, Lionel. The fact that everything +goes on as usual here and in other houses takes people's thoughts off +the dangers of the position, and prevents anything like panic being +felt." + +The lads spent the greater part of the day at their look-out, and could +see that the wall against which the Spanish fire was directed was fast +crumbling. Looking down upon it, it seemed deserted of troops, for it +would be needlessly exposing the soldiers to death to place them there +while the cannonade continued; but behind the wall, and in the street +leading to it, companies of English and Dutch soldiers could be seen +seated or lying on the ground. + +They were leaning out of the dormer-window in the high roof watching +the Spanish soldiers in the batteries working their guns, when, +happening to look round, they saw a crossbow protruded from a window of +the warehouse to their right, and a moment afterwards the sharp twang +of the bow was heard. There was nothing unusual in this; for although +firearms were now generally in use the long-bow and the cross-bow had +not been entirely abandoned, and there were still archers in the +English army, and many still held that the bow was a far better weapon +than the arquebus, sending its shafts well nigh as far and with a truer +aim. + +"If that fellow is noticed," Geoffrey said, "we shall have the Spanish +musketeers sending their balls in this direction. The governor has, I +heard Captain Vere say, forbidden shooting from the warehouses, because +he does not wish to attract the Spanish fire against them. Of course +when the wall yields and the breach has to be defended the warehouses +will be held, and as the windows will command the breach they will be +great aids to us then, and it would be a great disadvantage to us if +the Spaniards now were to throw shells and fire-balls into these +houses, and so to destroy them before they make their attack. Nor can +much good be gained, for at this distance a cross-bow would scarce +carry its bolts beyond the moat." + +"Most likely the man is using the cross-bow on purpose to avoid +attracting the attention of the Spaniards, Geoffrey. At this distance +they could not see the cross-bow, while a puff of smoke would be sure +to catch their eye." + +"There, he has shot again. I did not see the quarrell fall in the moat. +See, one of the Spanish soldiers from that battery is coming forward. +There, he has stooped and picked something up. Hallo! do you see that? +He has just raised his arm; that is a signal, surely." + +"It certainly looked like it," Lionel agreed. "It was a sort of half +wave of the hand. That is very strange!" + +"Very, Lionel; it looks to me very suspicious. It is quite possible +that a piece of paper may have been tied round the bolt, and that +someone is sending information to the enemy. This ought to be looked +to." + +"But what are we to do, Geoffrey? Merely seeing a Spanish soldier wave +his arm is scarcely reason enough for bringing an accusation against +anyone. We are not even sure that he picked up the bolt; and even if he +did, the action might have been a sort of mocking wave of the hand at +the failure of the shooter to send it as far as the battery." + +"It might be, of course, Lionel. No, we have certainly nothing to go +upon that would justify our making a report on the subject, but quite +enough to induce us to keep a watch on this fellow, whoever he may be. +Let us see, to begin with, if he shoots again." + +They waited for an hour, but the head of the cross-bow was not again +thrust out of the window. + +"He may have ceased shooting for either of two reasons," Geoffrey said. +"If he is a true man, because he sees that his bolts do not carry far +enough to be of any use. If he is a traitor, because he has gained his +object, and knows that his communication has reached his friends +outside. We will go down now and inquire who is the occupier of the +next warehouse." + +The merchant himself was not below, for as he did business with other +towns he had had nothing to do since Sluys was cut off from the +surrounded country; but one of his clerks was at work, making out bills +and accounts in his office as if the thunder of the guns outside was +unheard by him. The boys had often spoken to him as they passed in and +out. + +"Who occupies the warehouse on the right?" Geoffrey asked him +carelessly. + +"William Arnig," he replied. "He is a leading citizen, and one of the +greatest merchants in our trade. His cellars are the most extensive we +have, and he does a great trade in times of peace with Bruges, Ghent, +Antwerp, and other towns." + +"I suppose he is a Protestant like most of the towns-people?" Geoffrey +remarked. + +"No, he is a Catholic; but he is not one who pushes his opinions +strongly, and he is well disposed to the cause, and a captain in one of +the city bands. The Catholics and Protestants always dwell quietly +together throughout the Low Countries, and would have no animosities +against each other were it not for the Spaniards. Formerly, at least, +this was the case; but since the persecutions we have Protestant towns +and Catholic towns, the one holding to the States cause, the other +siding with the Spaniards. Why do you ask?" + +"Oh, I hadn't heard the name of your next neighbour, and was wondering +who he might be." + +The boys had now been nearly two months in Holland, and were beginning +to understand the language, which is not difficult to acquire, and +differed then even less than now from the dialect spoken in the eastern +counties of England, between whom and Holland there had been for many +generations much trade and intimate relations. + +"What had we better do next, Geoffrey?" Lionel asked as they left the +warehouse. + +"I think that in the first place, Lionel, we will take our post at the +window to-morrow, and keep a close watch all day to see whether this +shooting is repeated. If it is, we had better report the matter to +Captain Vere, and leave him to decide what should be done. I do not see +that we could undertake anything alone, and in any case, you see, it +would be a serious matter to lay an accusation against a prominent +citizen who is actually a captain of one of the bands." + +Upon the following day they took their post again at the window, and +after some hours watching saw three bolts fired from the next window. +Watching intently, they saw the two first fall into the moat. They +could not see where the other fell; but as there was no splash in the +water, they concluded that it had fallen beyond it, and in a minute +they saw a soldier again advance from the battery, pick up something at +the edge of the water, raise his arm, and retire. That evening when +Captain Vere returned from the ramparts they informed him of what they +had observed. + +"Doubtless it is an act of treachery," he said, "and this merchant is +communicating with the enemy. At the same time what you have seen, +although convincing evidence to me, is scarce enough for me to denounce +him. Doubtless he does not write these letters until he is ready to +fire them off, and were he arrested in his house or on his way to the +warehouse we might fail to find proofs of his guilt, and naught but +ill-feeling would be caused among his friends. No, whatever we do we +must do cautiously. Have you thought of any plan by which we might +catch him in the act?" + +"If two or three men could be introduced into his warehouse, and +concealed in the room from which he fires, they might succeed in +catching him in the act, Captain Vere; but the room may be an empty one +without any place whatever where they could be hidden, and unless they +were actually in the room they would be of little good, for he would +have time, if he heard footsteps, to thrust any letter he may have +written into his mouth, and so destroy it before it could be seized." + +"That is so," Captain Vere agreed. "The matter seems a difficult one, +and yet it is of the greatest importance to hinder communications with +the Spaniards. To-night all the soldiers who can be spared, aided by +all the citizens able to use matlock and pick, are to set to work to +begin to raise a half-moon round the windmill behind the point they are +attacking, so as to have a second line to fall back upon when the wall +gives way, which it will do ere long, for it is sorely shaken and +battered. It is most important to keep this from the knowledge of the +Spaniards. Now, lads, you have shown your keenness by taking notice of +what is going on, see if you cannot go further, and hit upon some plan +of catching this traitor at his work. If before night we can think of +no scheme, I must go to the governor and tell him frankly that we have +suspicions of treachery, though we cannot prove them, and ask him, in +order to prevent the possibility of our plans being communicated to the +enemy, to place some troops in all the warehouses along that line, so +that none can shoot therefrom any message to the Spaniards." + +Just as Captain Vere finished his supper, the boys came into the room +again. + +"We have thought of a plan, sir, that might succeed, although it would +be somewhat difficult. The dormer-window from which these bolts have +been fired lies thirty or forty feet away from that from which we were +looking. The roof is so steep that no one could hold a footing upon it +for a moment, nor could a plank be placed upon which he could walk. The +window is about twelve feet from the top of the roof. We think that one +standing on the ledge of our window might climb on to its top, and once +there swing a rope with a stout grapnel attached to catch on the ridge +of the roof; then two or three men might climb up there and work +themselves along, and then lower themselves down with a rope on to the +top of the next window. They would need to have ropes fastened round +their bodies, for the height is great, and a slip would mean death. + +"The one farthest out on the window could lean over when he hears a +noise below him, and when he saw the cross-bow thrust from the window, +could by a sudden blow knock it from the fellow's hand, when it would +slide down the roof and fall into the narrow yard between the warehouse +and the walls. Of course some men would be placed there in readiness to +seize it, and others at the door of the warehouse to arrest the traitor +if he ran down." + +"I think the plan is a good one, though somewhat difficult of +execution," Captain Vere said. "But this enterprise on the roof would +be a difficult one and dangerous, since as you say a slip would mean +death." + +"Lionel and myself, sir, would undertake that with the aid of two +active men to hold the ropes for us. We have both done plenty of bird- +nesting in the woods of Hedingham, and are not likely to turn giddy." + +"I don't think it is necessary for more than one to get down on to that +window," Captain Vere said. "Only one could so place himself as to look +down upon the cross-bow. However, you shall divide the honour of the +enterprise between you. You, as the eldest and strongest, Geoffrey, +shall carry out your plan on the roof, while you, Lionel, shall take +post at the door with four men to arrest the traitor when he leaves. I +will select two strong and active men to accompany you, Geoffrey, and +aid you in your attempt; but mind, before you try to get out of the +window and to climb on to its roof, have a strong rope fastened round +your body and held by the others; then in case of a slip, they can haul +you in again. I will see that the ropes and grapnels are in readiness." + +The next morning early Geoffrey proceeded with the two men who had been +selected to accompany him to his usual look-out. Both were active, wiry +men, and entered fully into the spirit of the undertaking when Geoffrey +explained its nature to them. They looked out of the dormer-window at +the sharp roof slanting away in front of them and up to the ridge +above. + +"I think, Master Vickars," one of them, Roger Browne by name, said, +"that I had best go up first. I served for some years at sea, and am +used to climbing about in dizzy places. It is no easy matter to get +from this window-sill astride the roof above us, and moreover I am more +like to heave the grapnel so that it will hook firmly on to the ridge +than you are." + +"Very well, Roger. I should be willing to try, but doubtless you would +manage it far better than I should. But before you start we will fasten +the other rope round your body, as Captain Vere directed me to do. Then +in case you slip, or anything gives way with your weight, we can check +you before you slide far down below us." + +A rope was accordingly tied round the man's body under his arms. Taking +the grapnel, to which the other rope was attached, he got out on to the +sill. It was not an easy task to climb up on to the ridge of the +dormer-window, and it needed all his strength and activity to +accomplish the feat. Once astride of the ridge the rest was easy. At +the first cast he threw the grapnel so that it caught securely on the +top of the roof. After testing it with two or three pulls he clambered +up, leaving the lower end of the rope hanging by the side of the +window. As soon as he had gained this position Geoffrey, who was to +follow him, prepared to start. + +According to the instructions Browne had given him he fastened the end +of the rope which was round Browne's body under his own shoulders, then +leaning over and taking a firm hold of the rope to which the grapnel +was attached, he let himself out of the window. Browne hauled from +above at the rope round his body, and he pulled himself with his hands +by that attached to the grapnel, and presently reached the top. + +"I am glad you came first, Roger," he said. "I do not think I could +have ever pulled myself up if you had not assisted me." + +He unfastened the rope, and the end was thrown down to the window, and +Job Tredgold, the other man, fastened it round him and was hauled up as +Geoffrey had been. + +"We will move along now to that stack of chimneys coming through the +roof four feet below the ridge on the town side," Geoffrey said. "We +can stand down there out of sight of the Spaniards. We shall be sure to +attract attention sitting up here, and might have some bullets flying +round our ears, besides which this fellow's friends might suspect our +object and signal to him in some way. It is two hours yet to the time +when we have twice seen him send his bolts across the moat." + +This was accordingly done, and for an hour and a half they sat down on +the roof with their feet against the stack of chimneys. + +"It is time to be moving now," Geoffrey said at last. "I think the best +way will be for me to get by the side of the dormer-window instead of +above it. It would be very awkward leaning over there, and I should not +have strength to strike a blow; whereas with the rope under my arms and +my foot on the edge of the sill, which projects a few inches beyond the +side of the window, I could stand upright and strike a downright blow +on the cross-bow." + +"That would be the best way, I think," Roger Browne agreed; "and I will +come down on to the top of the window and lean over. In the first place +your foot might slip, and as you dangle there by the rope he might cut +it and let you shoot over, or he might lean out and shoot you as you +climb up the roof again; but if I am above with my pistol in readiness +there will be no fear of accidents." + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +AN HEROIC DEFENCE. + + +The plan Roger Browne suggested was carried out. Geoffrey was first +lowered to his place by the side of the window, and bracing himself +against its side with a foot on the sill he managed to stand upright, +leaning against the rope that Job Tredgold held from above. Job had +instructions when Geoffrey lifted his arm to ease the rope a few inches +so as to enable the lad to lean forward. After two or three attempts +Geoffrey got the rope to the exact length which would enable him to +look round the corner and to strike a blow with his right hand, in +which he held a stout club. Roger Browne then descended by the aid of +the other rope, and fastening it round his body lay down astride of the +roof of the window with his head and shoulders over the end, and his +pistol held in readiness. + +It seemed an age to Geoffrey before he heard the sound of a footstep in +the loft beside him. He grasped his cudgel firmly and leaned slightly +forward. For ten minutes there was quiet within, and Geoffrey guessed +that the traitor was writing the missive he was about to send to the +enemy; then the footstep approached the window, and a moment later a +cross-bow was thrust out. A glance at it sufficed to show that the bolt +was enveloped in a piece of paper wound round it and secured with a +string. Steadying himself as well as he could Geoffrey struck with all +his force down upon the cross-bow. The weapon, loosely held, went +clattering down the tiles. There was an exclamation of surprise and +fury from within the window, and at the same moment Job Tredgold, +seeing that Geoffrey's attempt had been successful, hauled away at the +rope and began to drag him backward up the tiles. + +The lad saw a man lean out of the window and look up at him, then a +pistol was levelled; but the report came from above the window, and not +from the threatening weapon. A sharp cry of pain was heard, as the +pistol fell from the man's hand and followed the cross-bow down the +roof. A few seconds later Geoffrey was hauled up to the ridge, where he +was at once joined by Roger Browne. Shifting the ropes they moved along +till above the window from which they had issued. Geoffrey was first +lowered down. As soon as he had got in at the window he undid the rope +and Job Tredgold followed him, while Roger Browne slid down by the rope +attached to the grapnel; then they ran downstairs. + +As soon as they sallied out below they saw that Lionel and the men with +him had captured a prisoner; and just as they joined the party the +guard came round from the other side of the warehouse, bringing with +them the cross-bow, its bolt, and the pistol. The prisoner, whose +shoulder was broken by Roger Browne's shot, was at once taken to +Captain Vere's quarters. That officer had just arrived from the walls, +knowing the time at which the capture would probably be made. + +"So you have succeeded," he said. "Well done, lads; you have earned the +thanks of all. We will take this man at once to the governor, who is at +present at the town-hall." + +By the time they issued out quite a crowd had assembled, for the news +that William von Arnig had been brought a prisoner and wounded to +Captain Vere's quarters had spread rapidly. The crowd increased as they +went along, and Captain Vere and his party had difficulty in making +their way to the town-hall, many of the people exclaiming loudly +against this treatment of one of the leading citizens. The governor +was, when they entered, holding council with the English leader, Sir +Roger Williams. + +"Why, what is this, Captain Vere?" he asked in surprise as that +officer, accompanied by the two boys and followed by Roger Browne and +Job Tredgold guarding the prisoner, entered. + +"I have to accuse this man of treacherously communicating with the +enemy," Francis Vere said. + +"What?" Arnold de Groenvelt exclaimed in surprise. "Why, this is +Mynheer von Arnig, one of our most worshipful citizens! Surely, Captain +Vere, there must be some error here?" + +"I will place my evidence before you," Captain Vere said; "and it will +be for you to decide upon it. Master Geoffrey Vickars, please to inform +the governor what you know about this matter." + +Geoffrey then stated how he and his brother, being at the upper window +of the warehouse, had on two days in succession seen a cross-bow +discharged from a neighbouring window, and had noticed a Spanish +soldier come out of a battery and pick up something which they believed +to be the bolt, and how he and his brother had reported the +circumstances to Captain Vere. That officer then took up the story, and +stated that seeing the evidence was not conclusive, and it was probable +that if an attempt was made to arrest the person, whomsoever he might +be, who had used the cross-bow, any evidence of treasonable design +might be destroyed before he was seized, he had accepted the offer of +Master Vickars to climb the roof, lower himself to the window from +which the bolt would be shot, and, if possible, strike it from the +man's hands, so that it would fall down the roof to the court-yard +below, where men were placed to seize it. + +Geoffrey then related how he, with the two soldiers guarding the +prisoner, had scaled the roof and taken a position by the window; how +he had seen the cross-bow thrust out, and had struck it from the hands +of the man holding it; how the latter had leaned out, and would have +shot him had not Roger Browne from his post above the window shot him +in the shoulder. + +"Here are the cross-bow and pistol," Captain Vere said; "and this is +the bolt as it was picked up by my men. You see, sir, there is a paper +fastened round it. I know not its contents, for I judged it best to +leave it as it was found until I placed it in your hands." + +The governor cut the string, unrolled the paper and examined it. It +contained a statement as to the state of the wall, with remarks where +it was yielding, and where the enemy had best shoot against it. It said +that the defenders had in the night begun to form a half-moon behind +it, and contained a sketch showing the exact position of the new work. + +"Gentlemen, what think you of this?" the governor asked the English +officers. + +"There can be no doubt that it is a foul act of treachery," Williams +said, "and the traitor merits death." + +"We will not decide upon it ourselves," the governor said. "I will +summon six of the leading citizens, who shall sit as a jury with us. +This is a grave matter, and touches the honour of the citizens as well +as the safety of the town." + +In a few minutes the six citizens summoned arrived. The evidence was +again given, and then the prisoner was asked what he had to say in his +defence. + +"It is useless for me to deny it," he replied. "I am caught in the act, +and must suffer for it. I have done my duty to the King of Spain, my +sovereign; and I warn you he will take vengeance for my blood." + +"That we must risk," the governor said. "Now, gentlemen, you citizens +of this town now attacked by the Spaniards, and you, sir, who are in +command of the soldiers of the Queen of England, have heard the +evidence and the answer the prisoner has made. What is your opinion +thereon? Do you, Sir Roger Williams, being highest in rank and +authority, first give your opinion." + +"I find that he is guilty of an act of gross treason and treachery. For +such there is but one punishment--death." And the six citizens all gave +the same decision. + +"You are found guilty of this foul crime," the governor said, "and are +sentenced to death. In half an hour you will be hung in the market- +place, as a punishment to yourself and a warning to other traitors, if +such there be in this town of Sluys. As to you, young sirs, you have +rendered a great service to the town, and have shown a discernment +beyond your years. I thank you in the name of the city and of its +garrison, and also in that of the States, whose servant I am." + +A guard of armed citizens were now called in, the prisoner was handed +to them, and orders given to their officer to carry the sentence into +effect. A statement of the crime of the prisoner, with the names of +those who had acted as his judges, and the sentence, was then drawn +out, signed by the governor, and ordered by him to be affixed to the +door of the town-hall. The two lads, finding that they were no longer +required, hastened back to their quarters, having no wish to be present +at the execution of the unhappy wretch whose crime they had been the +means of detecting. + +A few days later considerable portions of the battered wall fell, and +shortly afterwards a breach of two hundred and fifty paces long was +effected, and a bridge of large boats constructed by the enemy from the +dyke to the foot of the rampart. + +This was not effected without terrible loss. Hundreds of the bravest +Spanish soldiers and sailors were killed, and three officers who +succeeded each other in command of the attack were badly wounded. The +Spanish had laboured under great difficulties owing to the lack of +earth to push their trenches forward to the edge of the moat, arising +from the surrounding country being flooded. They only succeeded at last +by building wooden machines of bullet-proof planks on wheels, behind +each of which four men could work. When all was prepared the Spaniards +advanced to the attack, rushing up the breach with splendid valour, +headed by three of their bravest leaders; but they were met by the +English and Dutch, and again and again hurled back. + +Day and night the fighting continued, the Spaniards occasionally +retiring to allow their artillery to open fire again upon the shattered +ruins. But stoutly as the defenders fought, step by step the Spaniards +won their way forward until they had captured the breach and the west +gate adjoining it, there being nothing now beyond the hastily- +constructed inner work between them and the town. The finest regiment +of the whole of the Spanish infantry now advanced to the assault, but +they were met by the defenders--already sadly diminished in numbers, +but firm and undaunted as ever,--and their pikes and their axes well +supplied the place of the fallen walls. + +Assault after assault was met and repulsed, Sir Roger Williams, Thomas +Baskerville, and Francis Vere being always in the thick of the fight. +Baskerville was distinguished by the white plumes of his helmet, Vere +by his crimson mantle; and the valour of these leaders attracted the +admiration of the Duke of Parma himself, who watched the fight from the +summit of the tower of the western gate. Francis Vere was twice +wounded, but not disabled. Sir Roger Williams urged him to retire, but +he replied that he would rather be killed ten times in a breach than +once in a house. + +Day by day the terrible struggle continued. The Spaniards were able +constantly to bring up fresh troops, but the defenders had no relief. +They were reduced in numbers from 1600 to 700 men, and yet for eighteen +days they maintained the struggle, never once leaving the breach. + +The pages brought their food to them, and when the attacks were +fiercest joined in the defence, fighting as boldly and manfully as the +soldiers themselves. Geoffrey and Lionel kept in close attendance upon +Francis Vere, only leaving him to run back to their quarters and bring +up the meals cooked for him and his two officers by Frau Menyn and her +handmaids. Both kept close to him during the fighting. They knew that +they were no match in strength for the Spanish pikemen; but they had +obtained pistols from the armoury, and with these they did good +service, several times freeing him from some of his assailants when he +was sorely pressed. On one occasion when Francis Vere was smitten down +by a blow from an axe, the boys rushed forward and kept back his +assailants until some of the men of the company came to his aid. + +"You have done me brave service indeed," Captain Vere said to them when +he recovered; for his helmet had defended him from serious injury, +though the force of the blow had felled him. "It was a happy thought of +mine when I decided to bring you with me. This is not the first time +that you have rendered me good service, and I am sure you will turn out +brave and valiant soldiers of the queen." + +When each assault ceased the weary soldiers threw themselves down +behind the earthen embankment, and obtained such sleep as they could +before the Spaniards mustered for fresh attack. When, after eighteen +days' terrible fighting, the Duke of Parma saw that even his best +troops were unable to break through the wall of steel, he desisted from +the assault and began the slower process of mining. The garrison from +their look-out beheld the soldiers crossing the bridge with picks and +shovels, and prepared to meet them in this new style of warfare. +Captain Uvedale was appointed to command the men told off for this +duty, and galleries were run from several of the cellars to meet those +of the enemy. + +As every man was employed either on the rampart or in mining, many of +the pages were told off to act as watchers in the cellars, and to +listen for the faint sounds that told of the approach of the enemy's +miners. As the young Vickars were in attendance on the officers, they +were exempted from this work; but they frequently went down into the +cellars, both to watch the process of mining by their own men and to +listen to the faint sounds made by the enemy's workmen. One day they +were sitting on two wine-kegs, watching four soldiers at work at the +end of a short gallery that had been driven towards the Spaniards. +Suddenly there was an explosion, the miners were blown backwards, the +end of the gallery disappeared, and a crowd of Walloon soldiers almost +immediately afterwards rushed in. + +The boys sprang to their feet and were about to fly, when an idea +occurred to Geoffrey. He seized a torch, and, standing by the side of a +barrel placed on end by a large tier, shouted in Dutch, "Another step +forward and I fire the magazine!" The men in front paused. Through the +fumes of smoke they saw dimly the pile of barrels and a figure standing +with a lighted torch close to one of them. A panic seized them, and +believing they had made their way into a powder-magazine, and that in +another instant there would be a terrible explosion, they turned with +shouts of "A magazine! a magazine! Fly, or we are all dead men!" + +"Run, Lionel, and get help," Geoffrey said, and in two or three minutes +a number of soldiers ran down into the cellar. + +The Walloons were not long before they recovered from their panic. +Their officers knew that the wine-cellars of the city were in front of +them, and reassured them as to the character of the barrels they had +seen. They were, however, too late, and a furious conflict took place +at the entrance into the cellar, but the enemy, able only to advance +two or three abreast, failed to force their way in. + +Captain Uvedale and Francis Vere were soon on the spot, and when at +last the enemy, unable to force an entrance, fell back, the former +said, "This is just as I feared. You see, the Spaniards drove this +gallery, and ceased to work immediately they heard us approaching them. +We had no idea that they were in front of us, and so they only had to +put a barrel of powder there and fire it as soon as there was but a +foot or two of earth between us and them." + +"But how was it," Francis Vere asked, "that when they fired it they did +not at once rush forward? They could have captured the whole building +before we knew what had happened." + +"That I cannot tell," Captain Uvedale replied. "The four men at work +must have been either killed or knocked senseless. We shall know better +another time, and will have a strong guard in each cellar from which +our mines are being driven." + +"If it please you, Captain Uvedale," Lionel said, "it was my brother +Geoffrey who prevented them from advancing; for indeed several of them +had already entered the cellar, and the gallery behind was full of +them." + +"But how did he do that?" Captain Uvedale asked in surprise. + +Lionel related the ruse by which Geoffrey had created a panic in the +minds of the Spaniards. + +"That was well thought of indeed, and promptly carried out!" Captain +Uvedale exclaimed. "Francis, these pages of yours are truly promising +young fellows. They detected that rascally Dutchman who was betraying +us. I noticed them several times in the thick of the fray at the +breach; and now they have saved the city by their quickness and +presence of mind; for had these Spaniards once got possession of this +warehouse they would have speedily broken a way along through the whole +tier, and could then have poured in upon us with all their strength." + +"That is so, indeed," Francis Vere agreed. "They have assuredly saved +the town, and there is the greatest credit due to them. I shall be +glad, Uvedale, if you will report the matter to our leader. You are in +command of the mining works, and it will come better from you than from +me who am their captain." + +Captain Uvedale made his report, and both Sir Roger Williams and the +governor thanked the boys, and especially Geoffrey, for the great +service they had rendered. + +Very shortly the galleries were broken into in several other places, +and the battle became now as fierce and continuous down in the cellars +as it had before been on the breach. By the light of torches, in an +atmosphere heavy with the fumes of gunpowder, surrounded by piled-up +barrels of wine, the defenders and assailants maintained a terrible +conflict, men staggering up exhausted by their exertion and by the +stifling atmosphere while others took their places below, and so, night +and day, the desperate struggle continued. + +All these weeks no serious effort had been made for the relief of the +hardly beleaguered town. Captains Hall and Allen had several times swum +down at night through the bridge of boats with letters from the +governor entreating a speedy succour. The States had sent a fleet which +sailed some distance up the Zwin, but returned without making the +slightest effort to break through the bridge of boats. The Earl of +Leicester had advanced with a considerable force from Ostend against +the fortress of Blankenburg, but had retreated hastily as soon as Parma +despatched a portion of his army against him; and so the town was left +to its fate. + +The last letter that the governor despatched said that longer +resistance was impossible. The garrison were reduced to a mere remnant, +and these utterly worn out by constant fighting and the want of rest. +He should ask for fair and honourable terms, but if these were refused +the garrison and the whole male inhabitants in the city, putting the +women and children in the centre, would sally out and cut their way +through, or die fighting in the midst of the Spaniards. The swimmer who +took the letter was drowned, but his body was washed ashore and the +letter taken to the Duke of Parma. + +Three days afterwards a fresh force of the enemy embarked in forty +large boats, and were about to land on an unprotected wharf by the +river-side when Arnold de Groenvelt hung out the white flag. His powder +was exhausted and his guns disabled, and the garrison so reduced that +the greater portion of the walls were left wholly undefended. The Duke +of Parma, who was full of admiration at the extraordinary gallantry of +the defenders, and was doubtless also influenced by the resolution +expressed in his letter by the governor, granted them most honourable +terms. The garrison were to march out with all their baggage and arms, +with matches lighted and colours displayed. They were to proceed to +Breskans, and there to embark for Flushing. The life and property of +the inhabitants were to be respected, and all who did not choose to +embrace the Catholic faith were to be allowed to leave the town +peaceably, taking with them their belongings, and to go wheresoever +they pleased. + +When the gates were opened the garrison sallied out. The Duke of Parma +had an interview with several of the leaders, and expressed his high +admiration of the valour with which they had fought, and said that the +siege of Sluys had cost him more men than he had lost in the four +principal sieges he had undertaken in the Low Country put together. On +the 4th of August the duke entered Sluys in triumph, and at once began +to make preparations to take part in the great invasion of England for +which Spain was preparing. + +After their arrival at Flushing Captains Vere, Uvedale, and others, who +had brought their companies from Bergen-op-Zoom to aid in the defence +of Sluys, returned to that town. + +The Earl of Leicester shortly afterwards resigned his appointment as +general of the army. He had got on but badly with the States-General, +and there was from the first no cordial cooperation between the two +armies. The force at his disposal was never strong enough to do +anything against the vastly superior armies of the Duke of Parma, who +was one of the most brilliant generals of his age, while he was +hampered and thwarted by the intrigues and duplicity of Elizabeth, who +was constantly engaged in half-hearted negotiations now with France and +now with Spain, and whose capricious temper was continually +overthrowing the best-laid plans of her councillors and paralysing the +actions of her commanders. It was not until she saw her kingdom +threatened by invasion that she placed herself fairly at the head of +the national movement, and inspired her subjects with her energy and +determination. + +Geoffrey Vickars had been somewhat severely wounded upon the last day +of the struggle in the cellar, a Spanish officer having beaten down his +guard and cleft through his morion. Lionel was unwounded, but the +fatigue and excitement had told upon him greatly, and soon after they +arrived at Bergen Captain Vere advised both of them to return home for +a few months. + +"There is nothing likely to be doing here until the spring. Parma has +more serious matter in hand. They talk, you know, of invading England, +and after his experience at Sluys I do not think he will be wasting his +force by knocking their heads against stone walls. I should be glad if +I could return too, but I have my company to look after and must remain +where I am ordered; but as you are but volunteers and giving your +service at your pleasure, and are not regularly upon the list of the +pages of the company, I can undertake to grant you leave, and indeed I +can see that you both greatly need rest. You have begun well and have +both done good service, and have been twice thanked by the governor of +Sluys and Sir Roger Williams. + +"You will do yourselves no good by being shut up through the winter in +this dull town, and as there is a vessel lying by the quay which is to +set sail to-morrow, I think you cannot do better than go in her. I will +give you letters to my cousin and your father saying how well you have +borne yourselves, and how mightily Sir Roger Williams was pleased with +you. In the spring you can rejoin, unless indeed the Spaniards should +land in England, which Heaven forfend, in which case you will probably +prefer to ride under my cousin's banner at home." + +The boys gladly accepted Francis Vere's proposal. It was but three +months since they had set foot in Holland, but they had gone through a +tremendous experience, and the thought of being shut up for eight or +nine months at Bergen-op-Zoom was by no means a pleasant one. Both felt +worn-out and exhausted, and longed for the fresh keen air of the +eastern coast. Therefore the next morning they embarked on board ship. +Captain Vere presented them each with a handsome brace of pistols in +token of his regard, and Captains Uvedale, Baskerville, and other +officers who were intimate friends of Vere's, and had met them at his +quarters, gave them handsome presents in recognition of the services +they had rendered at Sluys. + +The ship was bound for Harwich, which was the nearest English port. +Landing there, they took passage by boat to Manningtree and thence by +horse home, where they astounded their father and mother by their +sudden appearance. + +"And this is what comes of your soldiering," Mrs. Vickars said when the +first greeting was over. "Here is Geoffrey with plasters all over the +side of his head, and you, Lionel, looking as pale and thin as if you +had gone through a long illness. I told your father when we heard of +your going that you ought to be brought back and whipped; but the earl +talked him over into writing to Captain Francis to tell him that he +approved of this mad-brained business, and a nice affair it has turned +out." + +"You will not have to complain of our looks, mother, at the end of a +week or two," Geoffrey said. "My wound is healing fast, and Lionel only +needs an extra amount of sleep for a time. You see, for nearly a month +we were never in bed, but just lay down to sleep by the side of Captain +Vere on the top of the ramparts, where we had been fighting all day." + +"It was a gallant defence," Mr. Vickars said, "and all England is +talking of it. It was wonderful that 800 English and as many Dutchmen +should hold a weak place for two months against full twelve times their +number of Spaniards, led by the Duke of Parma himself, and there is +great honour for all who took part in the defence. The governor and Sir +Roger Williams especially mentioned Francis Vere as among the bravest +and best of their captains, and although you as pages can have had +nought to do with the fighting, you will have credit as serving under +his banner." + +"I think, father," Geoffrey said, touching the plasters on his head, +"this looks somewhat as if we had had something to do with the +fighting, and here is a letter for you from Captain Vere which will +give you some information about it." + +Mr. Vickars adjusted his horn spectacles on his face and opened the +letter. It began: + +"My dear Master and Friend,--I have had no means of writing to you +since your letter came to me, having had other matters in hand, and +being cut off from all communication with England. I was glad to find +that you did not take amiss my carrying off of your sons. Indeed that +action has turned out more happily than might have been expected, for I +own that they were but young for such rough service. + +"However, they have proved themselves valiant young gentlemen. They +fought stoutly by my side during our long tussle with the Spaniards, +and more than once saved my life by ridding me of foes who would have +taken me at a disadvantage. Once, indeed, when I was down from a blow +on the pate from a Spanish axe, they rushed forward and kept my +assailants at bay until rescue came. They discovered a plot between a +traitor in the town and the Spaniards, and succeeded in defeating his +plans and bringing him to justice. + +"They were also the means of preventing the Spaniards from breaking +into the great wine-cellars and capturing the warehouses, and for each +of these services they received the thanks of the Dutch governor and of +Sir Roger Williams, our leader. Thus, you see, although so young they +have distinguished themselves mightily, and should aught befall me, +there are many among my friends who will gladly take them under their +protection and push them forward. I have sent them home for a time to +have quiet and rest, which they need after their exertions, and have +done this the more willingly since there is no chance of fighting for +many months to come. I hope that before the Spaniards again advance +against us I may have them by my side." + +"Well, well, this is wonderful," Mrs. Vickars said when her husband had +finished reading the letter. "If they had told me themselves I should +not have believed them, although they have never been given to the sin +of lying; but since it is writ in Master Vere's own hand it cannot be +doubted. And now tell us all about it, boys." + +"We will tell you when we have had dinner, mother. This brisk Essex air +has given us both an appetite, and until that is satisfied you must +excuse us telling a long story. Is the earl at the castle, father +because we have two letters to him from Captain Francis--one, I +believe, touching our affairs, and the other on private matters. We +have also letters from him to his mother and his brother John, and +those we had better send off at once by a messenger, as also the +private letters to the earl." + +"That I will take myself," Mr. Vickars said. "I was just going up to +him to speak about my parish affairs when you arrived." + +"You had better have your dinner first," Mrs. Vickars said decidedly. +"When you once get with the earl and begin talking you lose all account +of the time, and only last week kept dinner waiting for two hours. It +is half-past eleven now, and I will hurry it on so that it will be +ready a few minutes before noon." + +"Very well, my dear; but I will go out into the village at once and +find a messenger to despatch to Cropping Hall with the letters to Dame +Elizabeth and John Vere." + +The boys' story was not told until after supper, for as soon as dinner +was over Mr. Vickars went up to the castle with the letters for the +earl. The latter, after reading them, told him that his cousin spoke +most highly of his two sons, and said they had been of great service, +even as far as the saving of his life. The earl told Mr. Vickars to +bring the boys up next day to see him in order that he might learn a +full account of the fighting at Sluys, and that he hoped they would +very often come in, and would, while they were at home, practise daily +with his master of arms at the castle. "I know, Mr. Vickars, that you +had hoped that one of them would enter the church; but you see that +their tastes lie not in that direction, and it is evident that, as in +the case of my cousin Francis, they are cut out for soldiers." + +"I am afraid so," Mr. Vickars said; "and I must let them have their own +way, for I hold that none should be forced to follow the ministry save +those whose natural bent lies that way." + +"I don't think they have chosen badly," the earl said. "My cousin +Francis bids fair to make a great soldier, and as they start in life as +his pages they will have every chance of getting on, and I warrant me +that Francis will push their fortunes. Perhaps I may be able to aid +them somewhat myself. If aught comes of this vapouring of the +Spaniards, before the boys return to Holland, they shall ride with me. +I am already arming all the tenantry and having them practised in +warlike exercises, and in the spring I shall fit out two ships at +Harwich to join the fleet that will put to sea should the Spaniards +carry out their threats of invading us." + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE LOSS OF THE "SUSAN." + + +There were few people in Hedingham more pleased to see the two lads on +their return than John Lirriper, to whom they paid a visit on the first +day they went out. + +"I am glad to see you back, young masters; though, to say the truth, +you are not looking nigh so strong and well as you did when I last +parted from you." + +"We shall soon be all right again, John. We have had rather a rough +time of it over there in Sluys." + +"Ah, so I have heard tell, Master Geoffrey. Your father read out from +the pulpit a letter the earl had received from Captain Francis telling +about the fighting, and it mentioned that you were both alive and well +and had done good service; but it was only a short letter sent off in +haste the day after he and the others had got out of the town. I was +right glad when I heard it, I can tell you, for there had been nought +talked of here but the siege; and though your lady mother has not said +much to me, I always held myself ready to slip round the corner or into +a house when I saw her come down the street, for I knew well enough +what was in her mind. She was just saying to herself, 'John Lirriper, +if it hadn't been for you my two boys would not be in peril now. If +aught comes to them, it will be your doing.' And though it was not my +fault, as far as I could see, for Captain Francis took you off my +hands, as it were, and I had no more to say in the matter than a child, +still, there it was, and right glad was I when I heard that the siege +was over and you were both alive. + +"I had a bad time of it, I can tell you, when I first got back, young +sirs, for your mother rated me finely; and though your father said it +was not my fault in any way, she would not listen to him, but said she +had given you into my charge, and that I had no right to hand you over +to any others save with your father's permission--not if it were to the +earl himself,--and for a long time after she would make as if she +didn't see me if she met me in the street. When my wife was ill about +that time she sent down broths and simples to her, but she sent them by +one of the maids, and never came herself save when she knew I was away +in my boat. + +"However, the day after the reading of that letter she came in and said +she was sorry she had treated me hardly, and that she had known at +heart all along that it was not altogether my fault, and asked my +pardon as nice as if I had been the earl. Of course I said there was +nothing to ask pardon for, and indeed that I thought it was only +natural she should have blamed me, for that I had often blamed myself, +though not seeing how I could have done otherwise. However, I was right +glad when the matter was made up, for it is not pleasant for a man when +the parson's wife sets herself against him." + +"It was certainly hard upon you, John," Geoffrey said; "but I am sure +our mother does not in any way blame you now. You see, we brought home +letters from Captain Vere, or rather Sir Francis, for he has been +knighted now, and he was good enough to speak very kindly of what we +were able to do in the siege. Mother did not say much, but I am sure +that at heart she is very grateful, for the earl himself came down to +the Rectory and spoke warmly about us, and said that he should always +be our fast friend, because we had given his cousin some help when he +was roughly pressed by the Spaniards. I hope we shall have another sail +with you in a short time, for we are not going back to the Netherlands +at present, as things are likely to be quiet there now. Although he did +not say so, I think Sir Francis thought that we were over-young for +such rough work, and would be more useful in a year's time; for, you +see, in these sieges even pages have to take their share in the +fighting, and when it comes to push of pike with the Spaniards more +strength and vigour are needed than we possess at present. So we are to +continue our practice at arms at the castle, and to take part in the +drilling of the companies the earl is raising in case the Spaniards +carry out their threat of invading England." + +Mrs. Vickars offered no objection whatever the first time Geoffrey +asked permission to go down to Bricklesey with John Lirriper. + +"I have no objection, Geoffrey; and, indeed, now that you have chosen +your own lives and are pages to Sir Francis Vere, it seems to me that +in matters of this kind you can judge for yourself. Now that you have +taken to soldiering and have borne your part in a great siege, and have +even yourselves fought with the Spaniards, I deem it that you have got +beyond my wing, and must now act in all small matters as it pleases +you; and that since you have already run great danger of your lives, +and may do so again ere long, it would be folly of me to try to keep +you at my apron-strings and to treat you as if you were still +children." + +So the two lads often accompanied John Lirriper to Bricklesey, and +twice sailed up the river to London and back in Joe Chambers' smack, +these jaunts furnishing a pleasant change to their work of practising +with pike and sword with the men-at-arms at the castle, or learning the +words of command and the work of officers in drilling the newly-raised +corps. One day John Lirriper told them that his nephew was this time +going to sail up the Medway to Rochester, and would be glad to take +them with him if they liked it; for they were by this time prime +favourites with the master of the _Susan_. Although their mother +had told them that they were at liberty to go as they pleased, they +nevertheless always made a point of asking permission before they went +away. + +"If the wind is fair we shall not be long away on this trip, mother. +Two days will take us up to Rochester; we shall be a day loading there, +and shall therefore be back on Saturday if the wind serves, and may +even be sooner if the weather is fine and we sail with the night tides, +as likely enough we shall, for the moon is nearly full, and there will +be plenty of light to keep our course free of the sands." + +The permission was readily given. Mrs. Vickars had come to see that it +was useless to worry over small matters, and therefore nodded +cheerfully, and said she would give orders at once for a couple of +chickens to be killed and other provision prepared for their voyage. + +"I doubt you are going to have a rougher voyage than usual this time, +young masters," John Lirriper said when the boat was approaching +Bricklesey, "The sky looks wild, and I think there is going to be a +break in the weather. However, the _Susan_ is a stout boat, and my +nephew a careful navigator." + +"I should like a rough voyage for a change, John," Geoffrey said. "We +have always had still water and light winds on our trips, and I should +like a good blow." + +"Well, I think you will have one; though may be it will only come on +thick and wet. Still I think there is wind in those clouds, and that if +it does come it will be from the south-east, in which case you will +have a sharp buffeting. But you will make good passage enough down to +the Nore once you are fairly round the Whittaker." + +"Glad to see you, young masters," Joe Chambers said as the boat came +alongside his craft. "You often grumbled at the light winds, but unless +I am mistaken we shall be carrying double reefs this journey. What do +you think, Uncle John?" + +"I have been saying the same, lad; still there is no saying. You will +know more about it in a few hours' time." + +It was evening when the boys went on board the _Susan_, and as +soon as supper was over they lay down, as she was to start at daybreak +the next morning. As soon as they were roused by the creaking of the +blocks and the sound of trampling of feet overhead they went up on +deck. Day had just broken; the sky was overspread by dark clouds. + +"There is not much wind after all," Geoffrey said as he looked round. + +"No, it has fallen light during the last two hours," the skipper +replied, "but I expect we shall have plenty before long. However, we +could do with a little more now." + +Tide was half out when they started. Joe Chambers had said the night +before that he intended to drop down to the edge of the sands and there +anchor, and to make across them past the Whittaker Beacon into the +channel as soon as there was sufficient water to enable him to do so. +The wind was light, sometimes scarcely sufficient to belly out the +sails and give the boat steerage way, at others coming in short puffs +which heeled her over and made her spring forward merrily. + +Before long the wind fell lighter and lighter, and at last Joe Chambers +ordered the oars to be got out. + +"We must get down to the edge of the Buxey," he said, "before the tide +turns, or we shall have it against us, and with this wind we should +never be able to stem it, but should be swept up the Crouch. At present +it is helping us, and with a couple of hours' rowing we may save it to +the Buxey." + +The boys helped at the sweeps, and for two hours the creaking of the +oars and the dull flapping of the sail alone broke the silence of the +calm; and the lads were by no means sorry when the skipper gave the +order for the anchor to be dropped. + +"I should like to have got about half a mile further," he said; "but I +can see by the landmarks that we are making no way now. The tide is +beginning to suck in." + +"How long will it be before we have water enough to cross the Spit?" +Lionel asked as they laid in the oars. + +"Well nigh four hours, Master Lionel. Then, even if it keeps a stark +calm like this, we shall be able to get across the sands and a mile or +two up the channel before we meet the tide. There we must anchor again +till the first strength is past, and then if the wind springs up we can +work along at the edge of the sands against it. There is no tide close +in to the sands after the first two hours. But I still think this is +going to turn into wind presently; and if it does it will be sharp and +heavy, I warrant. It's either that or rain." + +The sky grew darker and darker until the water looked almost black +under a leaden canopy. + +"I wish we were back into Bricklesey," Joe Chambers said. "I have been +well-nigh fifteen years going backwards and forwards here, and I do not +know that ever I saw an awkwarder look about the sky. It reminds me of +what I have heard men who have sailed to the Indies say they have seen +there before a hurricane breaks. If it was not that we saw the clouds +flying fast overhead when we started, I should have said it was a thick +sea fog that had rolled in upon us. Ah, there is the first drop. I +don't care how hard it comes down so that there is not wind at the tail +of it. A squall of wind before rain is soon over; but when it follows +rain you will soon have your sails close-reefed. You had best go below +or you will be wet through in a minute." + +The great drops were pattering down on the deck and causing splashes as +of ink on the surface of the oily-looking water. Another half minute it +was pouring with such a mighty roar on the deck that the boys below +needed to shout to make each other heard. It lasted but five minutes, +and then stopped as suddenly as it began. The lads at once returned to +the deck. + +"So it is all over, Master Chambers." + +"Well the first part is over, but that is only a sort of a beginning. +Look at that light under the clouds away to the south of east. That is +where it is coming from, unless I am mistaken. Turn to and get the +mainsail down, lads," for although after dropping anchor the head sails +had been lowered, the main and mizzen were still on her. + +The men set to work, and the boys helped to stow the sail and fasten it +with the tiers. Suddenly there was a sharp puff of wind. It lasted a +few seconds only, then Joe Chambers pointed towards the spot whence a +hazy light seemed to come. + +"Here it comes," he said. "Do you see that line of white water. That is +a squall and no mistake. I am glad we are not under sail." + +There was a sharp, hissing sound as the line of white water approached +them, and then the squall struck them with such force and fury that the +lads instinctively grasped at the shrouds. The mizzen had brought the +craft in a moment head-to-wind, and Joe Chambers and the two sailors at +once lowered it and stowed it away. + +"Only put a couple of tiers on," the skipper shouted. "We may have to +upsail again if this goes on." + +The sea got up with great rapidity, and a few minutes after the squall +had struck them the _Susan_ was beginning to pitch heavily. The +wind increased in force, and seemed to scream rather than whistle in +the rigging. + +"The sea is getting up fast!" Geoffrey shouted in the skipper's ear as +he took his place close to him. + +"It won't be very heavy yet," Joe Chambers replied; "the sands break +its force. But the tide has turned now, and as it makes over the sand +there will be a tremendous sea here in no time; that is if this wind +holds, and it seems to me that it is going to be an unusual gale +altogether." + +"How long will it be before we can cross the Spit?" + +"We are not going to cross to-day, that's certain," the skipper said. +"There will be a sea over those sands that would knock the life out of +the strongest craft that ever floated. No, I shall wait here for +another hour or two if I can, and then slip my cable and run for the +Crouch. It is a narrow channel, and I never care about going into it +after dark until there is water enough for a craft of our draught over +the sands. It ain't night now, but it is well nigh as dark. There is no +making out the bearings of the land, and we have got to trust to the +perches the fishermen put up at the bends of the channel. However, we +have got to try it. Our anchors would never hold here when the sea gets +over the sands, and if they did they would pull her head under water." + +In half an hour a sea had got up that seemed to the boys tremendous. +Dark as it was they could see in various directions tracts of white +water where the waves broke wildly over the sands. The second anchor +had been let go some time before. The two cables were as taut as iron +bars, and the boat was pulling her bows under every sea. Joe Chambers +dropped a lead-line overboard and watched it closely. + +"We are dragging our anchors," he said. "There is nothing for it but to +run." + +He went to the bow, fastened two logs of wood by long lines to the +cables outside the bow, so that he could find and recover the anchors +on his return, then a very small jib was hoisted, and as it filled two +blows with an axe severed the cables inboard. The logs attached to them +were thrown over, and the skipper ran aft and put up the helm as the +boat's head payed off before the wind. As she did so a wave struck her +and threw tons of water on board, filling her deck nearly up to the +rails. It was well Joe had shouted to the boys to hold on, for had they +not done so they would have been swept overboard. + +Another wave struck them before they were fairly round, smashing in the +bulwark and sweeping everything before it, and the boys both thought +that the _Susan_ was sinking under their feet. However she +recovered herself. The water poured out through the broken bulwark, and +the boat rose again on the waves as they swept one after another down +upon her stern. The channel was well marked now, for the sands on +either side were covered with breaking water. Joe Chambers shouted to +the sailors to close-reef the mizzen and hoist it, so that he might +have the boat better under control. The wind was not directly astern +but somewhat on the quarter; and small as was the amount of sail shown, +the boat lay over till her lee-rail was at times under water; the +following waves yawing her about so much that it needed the most +careful steering to prevent her from broaching to. + +"It seems to me as the wind is northering!" one of the men shouted. + +The skipper nodded and slackened out the sheet a bit as the wind came +more astern. He kept his eyes fixed ahead of him, and the men kept +gazing through the gloom. + +"There is the perch," one of them shouted presently, "just on her +weather-bow!" + +The skipper nodded and held on the same course until abreast of the +perch, which was only a forked stick. The men came aft and hauled in +the mizzen sheet. Chambers put up the helm. The mizzen came across with +a jerk, and the sheet was again allowed to run out. The jib came over +with a report like the shot of a cannon, and at the same moment split +into streamers. + +"Hoist the foresail!" the skipper shouted, and the men sprang forward +and seized the halliards; but at this moment the wind seemed to blow +with a double fury, and the moment the sail was set it too split into +ribbons. + +"Get up another jib!" Joe Chambers shouted, and one of the men sprang +below. In half a minute he reappeared with another sail. + +"Up with it quick, Bill. We are drifting bodily down on the sand." + +Bill hurried forward. The other hand had hauled in the traveller, to +which the bolt-rope of the jib was still attached, and hauling on this +had got the block down and in readiness for fastening on the new jib. +The sheets were hooked on, and then while one hand ran the sail out +with the out-haul to the bowsprit end, the other hoisted with the +halliards. By this time the boat was close to the broken water. As the +sail filled her head payed off towards it. The wind lay her right over, +and before she could gather way there was a tremendous crash. The +_Susan_ had struck on the sands. The next wave lifted her, but as +it passed on she came down with a crash that seemed to shake her in +pieces. Joe Chambers relaxed his grasp of the now useless tiller. + +"It is all over," he said to the boys. "Nothing can save her now. If +she had been her own length farther off the sands she would have +gathered way in time. As it is another ten minutes and she will be in +splinters." + +She was now lying over until her masthead was but a few feet above +water. The seas were striking her with tremendous force, pouring a +deluge of water over her. + +"There is but one chance for you," he went on. "The wind is dead on the +shore, and Foulness lies scarce three miles to leeward." + +[Illustration: "THE NEXT FEW MINUTES IT WAS A WILD STRUGGLE FOR LIFE"] + +He went into the cabin and fetched out a small axe fastened in the +companion where it was within reach of the helmsman. Two blows cut the +shrouds of the mizzen, a few vigorous strokes were given to the foot of +the mast, and, as the boat lifted and crashed down again on the sand, +it broke off a few inches above the deck. + +"Now, lads, I will lash you loosely to this. You can both swim, and +with what aid it will give you may well reach the shore. There are +scarce three feet of water here, and except where one or two deeps pass +across it there is no more anywhere between this and the land. It will +not be rough very far. Now, be off at once; the boat will go to pieces +before many minutes. I and the two men will take to the mainmast, but I +want to see you off first." + +Without hesitation the boys pushed off with the mast. As they did so a +cataract of water poured over the smack upon them, knocking them for a +moment under the surface with its force. + +For the next few minutes it was a wild struggle for life. They found at +once that they were powerless to swim in the broken water, which, as it +rushed across the sand, impelled alike by the rising tide behind it and +the force of the wind, hurried them along at a rapid pace, breaking in +short steep waves. They could only cling to the mast and snatch a +breath of air from time to time as it rolled over and over. Had they +not been able to swim they would very speedily have been drowned; but, +accustomed as they were to diving, they kept their presence of mind, +holding their breath when under water and breathing whenever they were +above it with their faces to the land. It was only so that they could +breathe, for the air was thick with spray, which was swept along with +such force by the wind that it would have drowned the best swimmer who +tried to face it as speedily as if he had been under water. + +After what seemed to them an age the waves became somewhat less +violent, though still breaking in a mass of foam. Geoffrey loosed his +hold of the spar and tried to get to his feet. He was knocked down +several times before he succeeded, but when he did so found that the +water was little more than two feet deep, although the waves rose to +his shoulders. The soft mud under his feet rendered it extremely +difficult to stand, and the rope which attached him to the spar, which +was driving before him, added to the difficulty. He could not overtake +the mast, and threw himself down again and swam to it. + +"Get up, Lionel!" he shouted; "we can stand here." But Lionel was too +exhausted to be capable of making the effort. With the greatest +difficulty Geoffrey raised him to his feet and supported him with his +back to the wind. + +"Get your breath again!" he shouted. "We are over the worse now and +shall soon be in calmer water. Get your feet well out in front of you, +if you can, and dig your heels into the mud, then you will act as a +buttress to me and help me to keep my feet." + +It was two or three minutes before Lionel was able to speak. Even +during this short time they had been carried some distance forward, for +the ground on which they stood seemed to be moving, and the force of +the waves carried them constantly forward. + +"Feel better, old fellow?" Geoffrey asked, as he felt Lionel making an +effort to resist the pressure of the water. + +"Yes, I am better now," Lionel said. + +"Well, we will go on as we are as long as we can; let us just try to +keep our feet and give way to the sea as it takes us along. The quicker +we go the sooner we shall be in shallower water; but the tide is rising +fast, and unless we go on it will speedily be as bad here as it was +where we started." + +As soon as Lionel had sufficiently recovered they again took to the +spar; but now, instead of clasping it with their arms and legs, they +lay with their chest upon it, and used their efforts only to keep it +going before the wind and tide. Once they came to a point where the +sand was but a few inches under water. Here they stood up for some +minutes, and then again proceeded on foot until the water deepened to +their waists. + +Their progress was now much more easy, for the high bank had broken the +run of the surf. The water beyond it was much smoother, and they were +able to swim, pushing the spar before them. + +"We are in deep water," Geoffrey said presently, dropping his feet. "It +is out of my depth. Chambers said there was a deep channel across the +sands not far from the island; so in that case the shore cannot be far +away." + +In another quarter of an hour the water was again waist-deep. Geoffrey +stood up. + +"I think I see a dark line ahead, Lionel; we shall soon be there." + +Another ten minutes and the water was not above their knees. They could +see the low shore now at a distance of but a few hundred yards ahead, +and untying the ropes under their arms they let the spar drift on, and +waded forward until they reached the land. There was a long mud bank +yet to cross, and exhausted as they were it took them a long time to do +this; but at last they came to a sandy bank rising sharply some ten +feet above the flat. They threw themselves down on this and lay for +half an hour without a word being spoken. + +"Now, Lionel," Geoffrey said at last, raising himself to a sitting +position, "we must make an effort to get on and find a shelter. There +are people living in the island. I have heard that they are a wild set, +making their living by the wrecks on these sands and by smuggling goods +without paying dues to the queen. Still, they will not refuse us +shelter and food, and assuredly there is nothing on us to tempt them to +plunder us." + +He rose to his feet and helped Lionel up. Once on the top of the bank a +level country stretched before them. The wind aided their footsteps, +sweeping along with such tremendous force that at times they had +difficulty in keeping their feet. As they went on they came upon +patches of cultivated land, with hedgerows and deep ditches. Half a +mile further they perceived a house. On approaching it they saw that it +was a low structure of some size with several out-buildings. They made +their way to it and knocked at the door. They knocked twice before it +was opened, then some bolts were withdrawn. The door was opened a few +inches. A man looked out, and seeing two lads opened it widely. + +"Well, who are you, and what do you want?" he asked roughly. + +"We have been wrecked in a storm on the sands. We were sailing from +Bricklesey for Sheerness when the storm caught us." + +The man looked at them closely. Their pale faces and evidently +exhausted condition vouched for the truth of their story. + +"The house is full," he said gruffly, "and I cannot take in strangers. +You will find some dry hay in that out-house, and I will bring you some +food there. When you have eaten and drunk you had best journey on." + +So saying he shut the door in their faces. + +"This is strange treatment," Geoffrey said. "I should not have thought +a man would have refused shelter to a dog such a day as this. What do +you say, Lionel, shall we go on?" + +"I don't think I can go any further until I have rested, Geoffrey," +Lionel replied faintly. "Let us lie down in shelter if it is only for +half an hour. After that, if the man brings us some food as he says, we +can go on again." + +They went into the shed the man had pointed out. It was half full of +hay. + +"Let us take our things off and wring them, Lionel, and give ourselves +a roll in the hay to dry ourselves. We shall soon get warm after that." + +They stripped, wrung the water from their clothes, rolled themselves in +the hay until they felt a glow of returning warmth, and then put on +their clothes again. Scarcely had they done so when the man came in +with a large tankard and two hunks of bread. + +"Here," he said, "drink this and then be off. We want no strangers +hanging round here." + +At any other time the boys would have refused hospitality so +cheerlessly offered, but they were too weak to resist the temptation. +The tankard contained hot-spiced ale, and a sensation of warmth and +comfort stole over them as soon as they had drunk its contents and +eaten a few mouthfuls of bread. The man stood by them while they ate. + +"Are you the only ones saved from the wreck?" he asked. + +"I trust that we are not," Geoffrey replied. "The master of the boat +tied us to a mast as soon as she struck, and he and the two men with +him were going to try to get to shore in the same way." + +As soon as they had finished they stood up and handed the tankard to +the man. + +"I am sorry I must turn you out," he said, as if somewhat ashamed of +his want of courtesy. "Any other day it would be different, but to-day +I cannot take anyone in." + +"I thank you for what you have given us," Geoffrey said. "Can you tell +us which is the way to the ferry?" + +"Follow the road and it will take you there. About a couple of miles. +You cannot mistake the way." + +Feeling greatly strengthened and refreshed the lads again started. + +"This is a curious affair," Geoffrey said, "and I cannot make out why +they should not let us in. However, it does not matter much. I feel +warm all over now, in spite of my wet clothes." + +"So do I," Lionel agreed. "Perhaps there were smugglers inside, or some +fugitives from justice hiding there. Anyhow, I am thankful for that +warm ale; it seems to have given me new life altogether." + +They had walked a quarter of a mile, when they saw four horsemen coming +on the road. They were closely wrapped up in cloaks, and as they +passed, with their heads bent down to meet the force of the gale and +their broad-brimmed hats pulled low down over their eyes, the boys did +not get even a glimpse of their features. + +"I wonder who they can be," Geoffrey said, looking after them. "They +are very well mounted, and look like persons of some degree. What on +earth can they be doing in such a wretched place as this? They must be +going to that house we left, for I noticed the road stopped there." + +"It is curious, Geoffrey, but it is no business of ours." + +"I don't know that, Lionel. You know there are all sorts of rumours +about of Papist plots, and conspirators could hardly choose a more out- +of-the way spot than this to hold their meetings. I should not be at +all surprised if there is some mischief on foot." + +Half a mile further three men on foot met them, and these, like the +others, were closely wrapped up to the eyes. + +"They have ridden here," Geoffrey said after they had passed. "They +have all high riding-boots on; they must have left their horses on the +other side of the ferry. See, there is a village a short distance +ahead. We will go in there and dry our clothes, and have a substantial +meal if we can get it. Then we will talk this business over." + +The village consisted of a dozen houses only, but among them was a +small public-house. Several men were sitting by the fire with pots of +ale before them. + +"We have been wrecked on the coast, landlord, and have barely escaped +with our lives. We want to dry our clothes and to have what food you +can give us." + +"I have plenty of eggs," the landlord said, "and my wife will fry them +for you; but we have no meat in the house. Fish and eggs are the chief +food here. You are lucky in getting ashore, for it is a terrible gale. +It is years since we have had one like it. As to drying your clothes, +that can be managed easy enough. You can go up into my room and take +them off, and I will lend you a couple of blankets to wrap yourselves +in, and you can sit by the fire here until your things are dry." + +A hearty meal of fried eggs and another drink of hot ale completed the +restoration of the boys. Their clothes were speedily dried, for the +landlady had just finished baking her week's batch of bread, and half +an hour in the oven completely dried the clothes. They were ready +almost as soon as the meal was finished. Many questions were asked them +as to the wreck, and the point at which they had been cast ashore. + +"It was but a short distance from a house at the end of this road," +Geoffrey said. "We went there for shelter, but they would not take us +in, though they gave us some bread and hot ale." + +Exclamations of indignation were heard among the men sitting round. + +"Ralph Hawker has the name of being a surly man," one said, "but I +should not have thought that he would have turned a shipwrecked man +from his door on such a day as this. They say he is a Papist, though +whether he be or not I cannot say; but he has strange ways, and there +is many a stranger passes the ferry and asks for his house. However, +that is no affair of mine, though I hold there is no good in secret +ways." + +"That is so," another said; "but it goes beyond all reason for a man to +refuse shelter to those the sea has cast ashore such a day as this." + +As soon as they had finished their meal and again dressed themselves, +the lads paid their reckoning and went out. Scarcely had they done so +when two horsemen rode up, and, drawing rein, inquired if they were +going right for the house of one Ralph Hawker. + +"It lies about a mile on," Geoffrey said. "You cannot miss the way; the +road ends there." + +As he spoke a gust of wind of extra fury blew off one of the riders' +hats. It was stopped by the wall of a house a few yards away. Geoffrey +caught it and handed it to the horseman. With a word of thanks he +pressed it firmly on his head, and the two men rode on. + +"Did you notice that?" Geoffrey asked his brother. "He has a shaven +spot on the top of his head. The man is a Papist priest in disguise. +There is something afoot, Lionel. I vote that we try and get to the +bottom of it." + +"I am ready if you think so, Geoffrey. But it is a hazardous business, +you know; for we are unarmed, and there are, we know, seven or eight of +them at any rate." + +"We must risk that," Geoffrey said; "besides, we can run if we cannot +fight. Let us have a try whatever comes of it." + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +A Popish Plot + + +There was no one about, for the wind was blowing with such fury that +few cared to venture out of doors, and the boys therefore started back +along the road by which they had come, without being observed. + +"We had better strike off from the road," Geoffrey said, "for some more +of these men may be coming along. Like enough someone will be on the +watch at the house, so we had best make a long detour, and when we get +near it come down on it from the other side. You know we saw no windows +there." + +"That is all well enough," Lionel agreed; "but the question is, how are +we to hear what they are saying inside? We are obliged to shout to +catch each others' words now, and there is not the least chance of our +hearing anything through the closed shutters." + +"We must wait till we get there, and then see what is to be done, +Lionel. We managed to detect a plot at Sluys, and we may have the same +luck here." + +After half an hour's brisk walking they again approached the house from +the side at which they had before come upon it, and where, as Geoffrey +observed, there were no windows; they made their way cautiously up to +it, and then moved quietly round to the side. Here there were two +windows on the ground floor. The shutters were closed, for glass was +unknown except in the houses of the comparatively wealthy. Its place +was taken by oiled paper, and this in bad weather was protected by +outer shutters. Geoffrey stole out a few paces to look at the window +above. + +"It is evidently a loft," he said as he rejoined Lionel. "You can see +by the roof that the rooms they live in are entirely upon the ground +floor. If we can get in there we might possibly hear what is going on +below. The rooms are not likely to be ceiled, and there are sure to be +cracks between the planks through which we can see what is going on +below. The noise of the wind is so great there is little chance of +their hearing us. Now, let us look about for something to help us to +climb up." + +Lying by an out-house close by they found a rough ladder, composed of a +single pole with bits of wood nailed on to it a foot apart. This they +placed up against the door of the loft. They could see that this was +fastened only by a hasp, with a piece of wood put through the staple. +It had been arranged that Geoffrey only should go up, Lionel removing +the pole when he entered, and keeping watch behind the out-house lest +anyone should come round the house. Both had cut heavy sticks as they +came along to give them some means of defence. Lionel stood at the +pole, while Geoffrey climbed up, removed the piece of wood from the +staple, and then holding the hasp to prevent the wind blowing in the +door with a crash, entered the loft. A glance showed him that it +extended over the whole of the house, and that it was entirely empty. + +He closed the door behind him, and jammed it with a couple of wedges of +wood he had cut before mounting; then he lay down on the rough planks +and began to crawl along. He saw a gleam of light at the further end, +and felt sure that it proceeded from the room in which the party were +assembled. Although he had little fear of being heard owing to the din +kept up by the wind, he moved along with extreme care until he reached +the spot whence the light proceeded. As he had anticipated, it was +caused by lights in a room below streaming through the cracks between +the rough planking. + +Rising on to his knees he looked round, and then crawled to a crack +that appeared much wider than the rest, the boards being more than half +an inch apart. Lying down over it, he was able to obtain a view of a +portion of the room below. He could see a part of a long table, and +looked down upon the heads of five men sitting on one side of it. He +now applied his ear to the crevice. A man was speaking, and in the +intervals between the gusts of wind which shook the house to its +foundation, he could hear what was said. + +"It is no use hesitating any longer, the time for action has arrived-- +Jezebel must be removed--interests of our holy religion--little danger +in carrying out the plan that has been proposed. Next time--Windsor-- +road passes through wood near Datchet--a weak guard overpowered--two +told off to execute--free England from tyranny--glory and honour +throughout Catholic world. England disorganized and without a head +could offer no resistance--as soon as day fixed--meet at Staines at +house of--final details and share each man is to--done, scatter through +country, readiness for rising--Philip of Spain--" + +This was the last sentence Geoffrey caught, for when the speaker ceased +a confused and general talk took place, and he could only catch a word +here and there without meaning or connection. He therefore drew quietly +back to the door of the loft and opened it. He thought first of jumping +straight down, but in that case he could not have fastened the door +behind him. He therefore made a sign to Lionel, who was anxiously +peering round the corner of the out-house. The pole was placed into +position, and pulling the door after him and refastening the latch he +made his way down to the ground, replaced the pole at the place from +which they had taken it, and then retired in the direction from which +they had come. + +"Well, what have you heard, Geoffrey?" Lionel asked. "Was it worth the +risk you have run?" + +"Well worth it, Lionel. I could only hear a little of what was said, +but that was quite enough to show that a plot is on foot to attack and +kill the queen the next time she journeys to Windsor. The conspirators +are to hide in a wood near Datchet." + +"You don't say so, Geoffrey. That is important news indeed. What are we +to do next?" + +"I have not thought yet," Geoffrey replied. "I should say, though, our +best plan would be to make our way back as quickly as we can by Burnham +and Maldon round to Hedingham. The earl was going up to London one day +this week, we may catch him before he starts; if not, we must, of +course, follow him. But at any rate it is best to go home, for they +will be in a terrible fright, especially if Joe Chambers or one of the +men take the news to Bricklesey of the loss of the _Susan_, for it +would be quickly carried up to Hedingham by John Lirriper or one or +other of the boatmen. No day seems to be fixed, and the queen may not +be going to Windsor for some little time, so the loss of a day will not +make any difference. As we have money in our pockets we can hire horses +at Burnham to take us to Maldon, and get others there to carry us +home." + +An hour's walking took them to the ferry. It was now getting dusk, and +they had come to the conclusion as they walked that it would be too +late to attempt to get on that night beyond Burnham. The storm was as +wild as ever, and although the passage was a narrow one it was as much +as the ferryman could do to row the boat across. + +"How far is it from here to Burnham?" + +"About four miles; but you won't get to Burnham to-night." + +"How is that?" Geoffrey asked. + +"You may get as far as the ferry, but you won't get taken over. There +will be a big sea in the Crouch, for the wind is pretty nigh straight +up it; but you will be able to sleep at the inn this side. In the +morning, if the wind has gone down, you can cross; if not, you will +have to go round by the bridge, nigh ten miles higher up." + +This was unpleasant news. Not that it made any difference to them +whether they slept on one side of the river or the other, but if the +wind was too strong to admit of a passage in the morning, the necessity +for making a detour would cost them many hours of valuable time. There +was, however, no help for it, and they walked to Criksey Ferry. The +little inn was crowded, for the ferry had been stopped all day, and +many like themselves had been compelled to stop for a lull in the wind. + +Scarcely had they entered when their names were joyously shouted out. +"Ah, Masters Vickars, right glad am I to see you. We feared that surf +had put an end to you. We asked at the ferry, but the man declared that +no strange lads had crossed that day, and we were fearing we should +have a sad tale to send to Hedingham by John Lirriper." + +"We are truly glad to see you, Joe," Geoffrey said, as they warmly +shook Joe Chambers and the two sailors by the hand. "How did you get +ashore?" + +"On the mainmast, and pretty nigh drowned we were before we got there. +I suppose the tide must have taken us a bit further up than it did you. +We got here well nigh two hours ago, though we got a good meal and +dried our clothes at a farmhouse." + +"We got a meal, too, soon after we landed," Geoffrey said; "but we did +not dry our clothes till we got to a little village. I did not ask its +name. I am awfully sorry, Joe, about the _Susan_" + +"It is a bad job, but it cannot be helped, Master Geoffrey. I owned a +third of her, and two traders at Bricklesey own the other shares. Still +I have no cause to grumble. I have laid by more than enough in the last +four years to buy a share in another boat as good as she was. You see, +a trader ain't like a smack. A trader's got only hull and sails, while +a smack has got her nets beside, and they cost well nigh as much as the +boat. Thankful enough we are that we have all escaped with our lives; +and now I find you are safe my mind feels at rest over it." + +"Do you think it will be calm enough to cross in the morning, Joe?" + +"Like enough," the sailor replied; "a gale like this is like to blow +itself out in twenty-four hours. It has been the worst I ever saw. It +is not blowing now quite so hard as it did, and by the morning I +reckon, though there may be a fresh wind, the gale will be over." + +The number of travellers were far too great for the accommodation of +the inn; and with the exception of two or three of the first arrivals +all slept on some hay in one of the barns. + +The next morning, although the wind was still strong, the fury of the +gale had abated. The ferryman, however, said the water was so rough he +must wait for a time before they crossed. But when Geoffrey offered him +a reward to put their party on shore at once, he consented to do so, +Joe Chambers and the two sailors assisting with the oars; and as the +ferry-boat was large and strongly built, they crossed without further +inconvenience than the wetting of their jackets. + +Joe Chambers, who knew the town perfectly, at once took them to a place +where they were able to hire a couple of horses, and on these rode to +Maldon, some nine miles away. Here they procured other horses, and it +was not long after midday when they arrived at Hedingham. + +Mrs. Vickars held up her hands in astonishment at their shrunken +garments; but her relief from the anxiety she had felt concerning what +had befallen them during the gale was so great that she was unable to +scold. + +"We will tell you all about it, mother, afterwards," Geoffrey said, as +he released himself from her embrace. "We have had a great adventure, +and the _Susan_ has been wrecked. But this is not the most +important matter. Father, has the earl started yet?" + +"He was to have gone this morning, Geoffrey, but the floods are likely +to be out, and the roads will be in such a state that I have no doubt +he has put off his journey." + +"It is important that we should see him at once, father. We have +overheard some people plotting against the queen's life, and measures +must be taken at once for her safety. We will run up and change our +things if you will go with us to see him. If you are there he will see +you whatever he is doing, while if we go alone there might be delay." + +Without waiting for an answer the boys ran upstairs and quickly +returned in fresh clothes. Mr. Vickars was waiting for them with his +hat on. + +"You are quite sure of what you are saying, Geoffrey?" he observed as +they walked towards the castle. "Remember, that if it should turn out +an error, you are likely to come to sore disgrace instead of receiving +commendation for your interference. Every one has been talking of plots +against the queen for some time, and you may well have mistaken the +purport of what you have heard." + +"There is no mistake, father, it is a real conspiracy, though who are +those concerned in it I know not. Lionel and I are not likely to raise +a false alarm about nothing, as you will say yourself when you hear the +story I have to tell the earl." + +They had by this time entered the gates of the castle. "The earl has +just finished dinner," one of the attendants replied in answer to the +question of Mr. Vickars. + +"Will you tell him that I wish to see him on urgent business?" + +In two or three minutes the servant returned and asked the clergyman to +follow him. The earl received him in his private chamber, for the +castle was full with guests. + +"Well, dominie, what is it?" he asked. "You want some help, I will be +bound, for somebody ill or in distress. I know pretty well by this time +the meaning of your urgent business." + +"It is nothing of that kind to-day," the clergyman replied; "it is, in +fact, my sons who wish to see your lordship. I do not myself know the +full purport of their story, save that it is something which touches +the safety of the queen." + +The earl's expression at once changed. + +"Is that so, young sirs? This is a serious matter, you know; it is a +grave thing to bring an accusation against anyone in matters touching +the state." + +"I am aware that it is, my lord, and assuredly my brother and I would +not lightly meddle with such matters; but I think that you will say +this is a business that should be attended to. It happened thus, sir." +He then briefly told how, that being out in a ketch that traded from +Bricklesey, they were caught in the gale; that the vessel was driven on +the sands, and they were cast ashore on a mast. + +He then related the inhospitable reception they had met with. "It +seemed strange to us, sir, and contrary to nature, that anyone should +refuse to allow two shipwrecked lads to enter the house for shelter on +such a day; and it seemed well-nigh impossible that his tale of the +place being too full to hold us could be true. However, we started to +walk. On our way we met four horsemen going towards the house, closely +muffled up in cloaks." + +"There was nothing very strange in that," the earl observed, "in such +weather as we had yesterday." + +"Nothing at all, sir; we should not have given the matter one thought +had it not been that the four men were very well mounted, and, +apparently, gentlemen; and it was strange that such should have +business in an out-of-the-way house in Foulness Island. A little +further we met three men on foot. They were also wrapped up in cloaks; +but they wore high riding-boots, and had probably left their horses on +the other side of the ferry so as not to attract attention. A short +time afterwards we met two more horsemen, one of whom asked us if he +was going right for the house we had been at. As he was speaking a gust +of wind blew off his hat. I fetched it and gave it to him, and as he +stooped to put it on I saw that a tonsure was shaven on the top of his +head. The matter had already seemed strange to us; but the fact that +one of this number of men, all going to a lonely house, was a priest in +disguise, seemed so suspicious that my brother and myself determined to +try and get to the bottom of it." + +Geoffrey then related how they had gone back to the house and effected +an entrance into the loft extending over it; how he had through the +cracks in the boards seen a party of men gathered in one of the lower +rooms, and then repeated word for word the scraps of conversation that +he had overheard. + +The earl had listened with an expression of amused doubt to the early +portion of the narrative; but when Geoffrey came to the part where +accident had shown to him that one of these men proceeding towards this +house was a disguised priest, his face became serious, and he listened +with deep attention to the rest of the narrative. + +"Faith," he said, "this is a serious matter, and you have done right +well in following up your suspicions, and in risking your lives, for +they would assuredly have killed you had they discovered you. Mr. +Vickars, your sons must ride with me to London at once. The matter is +too grave for a moment's delay. I must lay it before Burleigh at once. +A day's delay might be fatal." + +He rang a bell standing on the table. As soon as an attendant answered +it he said, "Order three horses to be saddled at once; I must ride to +London with these young gentlemen without delay. Order Parsons and +Nichols to be ready in half an hour to set out with us. Have you had +food, young sirs? for it seems you came hither directly you arrived." +Finding that the boys had eaten nothing since they had left Maldon, he +ordered food to be brought them, and begged them eat it while he +explained to the countess and guests that sudden business that could +not be delayed called him away to London. Half an hour later he started +with the boys, the two servants following behind. Late that evening +they arrived in London. It was too late to call on Lord Burleigh that +night; but early the next morning the earl took the boys with him to +the house of the great statesman. Leaving them in the ante-chamber he +went in to the inner apartment, where the minister was at breakfast. +Ten minutes later he came out, and called the boys in. + +"The Earl of Oxford has told me your story," Lord Burleigh said. "Tell +it me again, and omit nothing; for things that seem small are often of +consequence in a matter like this." + +Geoffrey again repeated his story, giving full details of all that had +taken place from the time of their first reaching the house. + +Lord Burleigh then questioned him closely as to whether they had seen +any of the faces of the men, and would recognise them again. + +"I saw none from my spying-place above, my lord," Geoffrey said. "I +could see only the tops of their heads, and most of them still kept +their hats on; nor did we see them as they passed, with the exception +only of the man I supposed to be a priest. His face I saw plainly. It +was smooth shaven; his complexion was dark, his eyebrows were thin and +straight, his face narrow. I should take him for a foreigner--either a +Spaniard or Italian." + +Lord Burleigh made a note of this description. + +"Thanks, young sirs," he said. "I shall, of course, take measures to +prevent this plot being carried out, and shall inform her majesty how +bravely you both risked your lives to discover this conspiracy against +her person. The Earl of Oxford informs me that you are pages of his +cousin, Captain Francis Vere, a very brave and valiant gentleman; and +that you bore your part bravely in the siege of Sluys, but are at +present at home to rest after your labours there, and have permission +of Captain Vere to take part in any trouble that may arise here owing +to the action of the Spaniards. I have now no further occasion for your +services, and you can return with the earl to Hedingham, but your +attendance in London will be needed when we lay hands upon these +conspirators." + +The same day they rode back to Hedingham, but ten days later were again +summoned to London. The queen had the day before journeyed to Windsor. +Half an hour before she arrived at the wood near Datchet a strong party +of her guard had suddenly surrounded it, and had found twelve armed men +lurking there. These had been arrested and lodged in the Tower. Three +of them were foreigners, the rest members of Catholic families known to +be favourable to the Spanish cause. Their trial was conducted +privately, as it was deemed advisable that as little should be made as +possible of this and other similar plots against the queen's life that +were discovered about this time. + +Geoffrey and Lionel gave their evidence before the council. As the only +man they could have identified was not of the party captured, their +evidence only went to show the motive of this gathering in the wood +near Datchet. The prisoners stoutly maintained that Geoffrey had +misunderstood the conversation he had partly overheard, and that their +design was simply to make the queen a prisoner and force her to +abdicate. Three of the prisoners, who had before been banished from the +country and who had secretly returned, were sentenced to death; two of +the others to imprisonment for a long term of years, the rest to +banishment from England. + +After the trial was over Lord Burleigh sent for the boys, and gave them +a very gracious message in the queen's name, together with two rings in +token of her majesty's gratitude. Highly delighted with these honours +they returned to Hedingham, and devoted themselves even more +assiduously than before to exercises in arms, in order that they might +some day prove themselves valiant soldiers of the queen. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +THE SPANISH ARMADA. + + +The struggle that was at hand between Spain and England had long been +foreseen as inevitable. The one power was the champion of Roman +Catholicism, the other of Protestantism; and yet, although so much hung +upon the result of the encounter, and all Europe looked on with the +most intense interest, both parties entered upon the struggle without +allies, and this entirely from the personal fault of the sovereigns of +the two nations. + +Queen Elizabeth, by her constant intrigues, her underhand dealings with +France and Spain, her grasping policy in the Netherlands, her meanness +and parsimony, and the fact that she was ready at any moment to +sacrifice the Netherlands to her own policy, had wholly alienated the +people of the Low Country; for while their own efforts for defence were +paralysed by the constant interference of Elizabeth, no benefit was +obtained from the English army, whose orders were to stand always on +the defensive--the queen's only anxiety appearing to be to keep her +grasp upon the towns that had been handed over to her as the price of +her alliance. + +Her own counsellors were driven to their wits' end by her constant +changes of purpose. Her troops were starving and in rags from her +parsimony, the fleet lay dismantled and useless from want of funds, and +except such arming and drilling as took place at the expense of the +nobles, counties, and cities, no preparation whatever was made to meet +the coming storm. Upon the other hand, Philip of Spain, who might have +been at the head of a great Catholic league against England, had +isolated himself by his personal ambitions, Had he declared himself +ready, in the event of his conquest of England, to place James of +Scotland upon the throne, he would have had Scotland with him, together +with the Catholics of England, still a powerful and important body. + +France, too, would have joined him, and the combination against +Elizabeth and the Protestants of England would have been well-nigh +irresistible. But this he could not bring himself to do. His dream was +the annexation of England to Spain; and smarting as the English +Catholics were under the execution of Mary of Scotland, their English +spirit revolted against the idea of the rule of Spain, and the great +Catholic nobles hastened, when the moment of danger arrived, to join in +the defence of their country, while Scotland, seeing no advantage to be +gained in the struggle, stood sullenly aloof, and France gave no aid to +a project which was to result, if successful, in the aggrandizement of +her already dangerously formidable neighbour. + +Thus England and Spain stood alone--Philip slowly but steadily +preparing for the great expedition for the conquest of England, +Elizabeth hesitating, doubtful; at one moment gathering seamen and +arming her fleet, a month or two later discharging the sailors and +laying up the ships. + +In the spring of 1587 Drake, with six vessels belonging to the crown +and twenty-four equipped by merchants of London and other places, had +seized a moment when Elizabeth's fickle mind had inclined to warlike +measures, and knowing that the mood might last but a day, had slipped +out of Plymouth and sailed for Spain a few hours before a messenger +arrived with a peremptory order from Elizabeth against entering any +Spanish port or offering violence to any Spanish town or ships. +Although caught in a gale in the Channel, Drake held on, and, reaching +Gibraltar on the 16th April, ascertained that Cadiz was crowded with +transports and store-ships. + +Vice-admiral Burroughs, controller of the navy, who had been specially +appointed to thwart Drake's plans, opposed any action being taken; but +Drake insisted upon attack, and on the 19th the fleet stood in to Cadiz +harbour. Passing through the fire of the batteries, they sank the only +great ship of war in the roads, drove off the Spanish galleys, and +seized the vast fleet of store-ships loaded with wine, corn, and +provisions of all sorts for the use of the Armada. Everything of value +that could be conveniently moved was transferred to the English ships, +then the Spanish vessels were set on fire, their cables cut, and they +were left to drift an entangled mass of flame. Drake took a number of +prisoners, and sent a messenger on shore proposing to exchange them for +such English seamen as were prisoners in Spain. The reply was there +were no English prisoners in Spain; and as this was notoriously untrue, +it was agreed in the fleet that all the Spaniards they might take in +the future should be sold to the Moors, and the money reserved for the +redeeming of such Englishmen as might be in captivity there or +elsewhere. + +The English fleet then sailed for Cape St. Vincent, picking up on their +way large convoys of store-ships all bound for the Tagus, where the +Armada was collecting. These were all burned, and Drake brought up at +Cape St. Vincent, hoping to meet there a portion of the Armada expected +from the Mediterranean. As a harbour was necessary, he landed, stormed +the fort at Faro, and took possession of the harbour there. The +expected enemy did not appear, and Drake sailed up to the mouth of the +Tagus, intending to go into Lisbon and attack the great Spanish fleet +lying there under its admiral, Santa Cruz. + +That the force gathered there was enormous Drake well knew, but relying +as much on the goodness of his cause as on the valour of his sailors, +and upon the fact that the enemy would be too crowded together to fight +with advantage, he would have carried out his plan had not a ship +arrived from England with orders forbidding him to enter the Tagus. +However, he lay for some time at the mouth of the river, destroying +every ship that entered its mouth, and sending in a challenge to Santa +Cruz to come out and fight. The Spanish admiral did not accept it, and +Drake then sailed to Corunna, and there, as at Cadiz, destroyed all the +ships collected in the harbour and then returned to England, having in +the course of a few months inflicted an enormous amount of damage upon +Spain, and having taken the first step to prove that England was the +mistress of the sea. + +But while the little band of English had been defending Sluys against +the army of the Duke of Parma, Philip had been continuing his +preparations, filling up the void made by the destruction wrought by +Drake, and preparing an Armada which he might well have considered to +be invincible. Elizabeth was still continuing her negotiations. She was +quite ready to abandon the Netherlands to Spain if she could but keep +the towns she held there, but she could not bring herself to hand these +over either to the Netherlands or to Spain. She urged the States to +make peace, to which they replied that they did not wish for peace on +such terms as Spain would alone grant; they could defend themselves for +ten years longer if left alone; they did not ask for further help, and +only wanted their towns restored to them. + +Had the Armada started as Philip intended in September, it would have +found England entirely unprepared, for Elizabeth still obstinately +refused to believe in danger, and the few ships that had been held in +commission after Drake's return had been so long neglected that they +could hardly keep the sea without repair; the rest lay unrigged in the +Medway. But the delay gave England fresh time for preparation. Parma's +army was lying in readiness for the invasion under canvas at Dunkirk, +and their commander had received no information from Spain that the +sailing of the Armada was delayed. + +The cold, wet, and exposure told terribly upon them, and of the 30,000 +who were ready to embark in September not 18,000 were fit for service +at the commencement of the year. The expenses of this army and of the +Armada were so great that Philip was at last driven to give orders to +the Armada to start. But fortune again favoured England. Had the fleet +sailed as ordered on the 30th of January they would again have found +the Channel undefended, for Elizabeth, in one of her fits of economy, +had again dismantled half the fleet that had been got ready for sea, +and sent the sailors to their homes. + +But the execution of Philip's orders was prevented by the sudden death +of Santa Cruz. The Duke of Medina-Sidonia was appointed his successor, +but as he knew nothing of the state of the Armada fresh delays became +necessary, and the time was occupied by Elizabeth, not in preparing for +the defence of the country, but in fresh negotiations for peace. She +was ready to make any concessions to Spain, but Philip was now only +amusing himself by deceiving her. Everything was now prepared for the +expedition, and just as the fleet was ready to start, the negotiations +were broken off. But though Elizabeth's government had made no +preparations for the defence of the country, England herself had not +been idle. Throughout the whole country men had been mustered, +officered, and armed, and 100,000 were ready to move as soon as the +danger became imminent. + +The musters of the Midland counties, 30,000 strong, were to form a +separate army, and were to march at once to a spot between Windsor and +Harrow. The rest were to gather at the point of danger. The coast +companies were to fall back wherever the enemy landed, burning the corn +and driving off the cattle, and avoiding a battle until the force of +the neighbouring counties joined them. Should the landing take place as +was expected in Suffolk, Kent, or Sussex, it was calculated that +between 30,000 and 40,000 men would bar the way to the invaders before +they reached London, while 20,000 men of the western counties would +remain to encounter the Duke of Guise, who had engaged to bring across +an army of Frenchmen to aid the Spaniards. + +Spain, although well aware of the strength of England on the sea, +believed that she would have no difficulty with the raw English levies; +but Parma, who had met the English at Sluys, had learnt to respect +their fighting qualities, and in a letter to Philip gave the opinion +that even if the Armada brought him a reinforcement of 6000 men he +would still have an insufficient force for the conquest of England. He +said, "When I shall have landed I must fight battle after battle. I +shall lose men by wounds and disease, I must leave detachments behind +me to keep open my communications, and in a short time the body of my +army will become so weak that not only I may be unable to advance in +the face of the enemy, and time may be given to the heretics and your +majesty's other enemies to interfere, but there may fall out some +notable inconvenience, with the loss of everything, and I be unable to +remedy it." + +Unfortunately, the English fleet was far less prepared than the land +forces. The militia had been easily and cheaply extemporized, but a +fleet can only be prepared by long and painful sacrifices. The entire +English navy contained but thirteen ships of over four hundred tons, +and including small cutters and pinnaces there were but thirty-eight +vessels of all sorts and sizes carrying the queen's flag. Fortunately, +Sir John Hawkins was at the head of the naval administration, and in +spite of the parsimony of Elizabeth had kept the fleet in a good state +of repair and equipment. The merchant navy, although numerous, was +equally deficient in vessels of any size. + +Philip had encouraged ship-building in Spain by grants from the crown, +allowing four ducats a ton for every ship built of above three hundred +tons burden, and six ducats a ton for every one above five hundred +tons. Thus he had a large supply of great ships to draw upon in +addition to those of the royal navy, while in England the largest +vessels belonging to private owners did not exceed four hundred tons, +and there were not more than two or three vessels of that size sailing +from any port of the country. The total allowance by the queen for the +repair of the whole of the royal navy, wages of shipwrights, clerks, +carpenters, watchmen, cost of timber, and all other necessary dockyard +expenses, was but Ģ4000 a-year. + +In December the fleet was ready for sea, together with the contingent +furnished by the liberality and patriotism of the merchants and +citizens of the great ports. But as soon as it was got together half +the crews collected and engaged at so great an expense were dismissed, +the merchant ships released, and England open to invasion, and had +Parma started in the vessels he had prepared, Lord Howard, who +commanded the English navy, could not have fired a shot to have +prevented his crossing. + +Well might Sir John Hawkins in his despair at Elizabeth's caprices +exclaim: "We are wasting money, wasting strength, dishonouring and +discrediting ourselves by our uncertain dallying." But though daily +reports came from Spain of the readiness of the Armada to set sail, +Elizabeth, even when she again permitted the navy to be manned, +fettered it by allowing it to be provided with rations for only a month +at a time, and permitting no reserves to be provided in the victualling +stores; while the largest vessels were supplied with ammunition for +only a day and a half's service, and the rest of the fleet with but +enough for one day's service. The council could do nothing, and Lord +Howard's letters prove that the queen, and she only, was responsible +for the miserable state of things that prevailed. + +At last, in May, Lord Howard sailed with the fleet down Channel, +leaving Lord Henry Seymour with three men-of-war and a squadron of +privateers to watch Dunkirk. At Plymouth the admiral found Drake with +forty ships, all except one raised and sent to sea at the expense of +himself and the gentry and merchants of the west counties. The weather +was wild, as it had been all the winter. Howard with the great ships +lay at anchor in the Sound, rolling heavily, while the smaller craft +went for shelter into the mouth of the river. There were but eighteen +days' provisions on board; fresh supplies promised did not arrive, and +the crews were put on half rations, and eked these out by catching +fish. At last, when the supplies were just exhausted, the victualling +ships arrived with one month's fresh rations, and a message that no +more would be sent. So villainous was the quality of the stores that +fever broke out in the fleet. + +It was not until the end of the month that Elizabeth would even permit +any further preparations to be made, and the supplies took some time +collecting. The crews would have been starved had not the officers so +divided the rations as to make them last six weeks. The men died in +scores from dysentery brought on by the sour and poisonous beer issued +to them, and Howard and Drake ordered wine and arrow-root from the town +for the use of the sick, and had to pay for it from their own pockets. + +But at last the Armada was ready for starting. Contingents of Spanish, +Italians, and Portuguese were gathered together with the faithful from +all countries--Jesuits from France; exiled priests, Irish and English; +and many Catholic Scotch, English, and Irish noblemen and gentlemen. +The six squadrons into which the fleet was divided contained sixty-five +large war ships, the smallest of which was seven hundred tons. Seven +were over one thousand, and the largest, an Italian ship, _La +Regazona_, was thirteen hundred. All were built high like castles, +their upper works musket-proof, their main timbers four or five feet +thick, and of a strength it was supposed no English cannon could +pierce. + +Next to the big ships, or galleons as they were called, were four +galleasses, each carrying fifty guns and 450 soldiers and sailors, and +rowed by 300 slaves. Besides these were four galleys, fifty-six great +armed merchant ships, the finest Spain possessed, and twenty caravels +or small vessels. Thus the fighting fleet amounted to 129 vessels, +carrying in all 2430 cannon. On board was stored an enormous quantity +of provisions for the use of the army after it landed in England, there +being sufficient to feed 40,000 men for six months. + +There were on board 8000 sailors, 19,000 soldiers, 1000 gentlemen +volunteers, 600 priests, servants, and miscellaneous officers, and 2000 +galley slaves. This was indeed a tremendous array to meet the fleet +lying off Plymouth, consisting of 29 queen's ships of all sizes, 10 +small vessels belonging to Lord Howard and members of his family, and +43 privateers between 40 and 400 tons under Drake, the united crews +amounting to something over 9000 men. + +The winter had passed pleasantly to Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars; the +earl had taken a great fancy to them, and they had stayed for some time +in London as members of his suite. When the spring came they had spoken +about rejoining Francis Vere in Holland, but the earl had said that +there was little doing there. The enmity excited by the conduct of +Elizabeth prevented any co-operation between the Dutch and English; and +indeed the English force was reduced to such straits by the refusal of +the queen to furnish money for their pay, or to provide funds for even +absolute necessaries, that it was wholly incapable of taking the field, +and large numbers of the men returned to England. + +Had this treatment of her soldiers and sailors at the time when such +peril threatened their country been occasioned by want of funds, some +excuse would have been possible for the conduct of Elizabeth; but at +the time there were large sums lying in the treasury, and it was +parsimony and not incapacity to pay that actuated Elizabeth in the +course she pursued. + +As the boys were still uneasy as to the opinion Francis Vere might form +of their continued stay in England, they wrote to him, their letter +being inclosed in one from the earl; but the reply set their minds at +rest--"By all means stay in England," Captain Vere wrote, "since there +is nothing doing here of any note or consequence, nor likely to be. We +are simply idling out time in Bergen-op-Zoom, and not one of us but is +longing to be at home to bear his part in the events pending there. It +is hard, indeed, to be confined in this miserable Dutch town while +England is in danger. Unfortunately we are soldiers and must obey +orders; but as you are as yet only volunteers, free to act as you +choose, it would be foolish in the extreme for you to come over to this +dull place while there is so much going on in England. I have written +to my cousin, asking him to introduce you to some of the country +gentlemen who have fitted out a ship for service against the Spaniards, +so that you may have a hand in what is going on." + +This the earl had done, and early in May they had journeyed down to +Plymouth on horseback with a, party of other gentlemen who were going +on board the _Active_, a vessel of two hundred and fifty tons +belonging to a gentleman of Devonshire, one Master Audrey Drake, a +relation of Sir Francis Drake. The earl himself was with the party. He +did not intend to go on board, for he was a bad sailor; and though +ready, as he said, to do his share of fighting upon land, would be only +an encumbrance on board a ship. + +He went down principally at the request of Cecil and other members of +the council, who, knowing that he was a favourite of the queen, thought +that his representations as to the state of the fleet might do more +than they could do to influence her to send supplies to the distressed +sailors. The earl visited the ships lying in the mouth of the Tamar, +and three times started in a boat to go out to those in the Sound; but +the sea was so rough, and he was so completely prostrated by sickness, +that he had each time to put back. What he saw, however, on board the +ships he visited, and heard from Lord Howard as to the state of those +at sea, was quite sufficient. He at once expended a considerable amount +of money in buying wine and fresh meat for the sick, and then hurried +away to London to lay before the queen the result of his personal +observations, and to implore her to order provisions to be immediately +despatched to the fleet. + +But even the description given by one of her favourites of the +sufferings of the seamen was insufficient to induce the queen to open +her purse-strings, and the earl left her in great dudgeon; and although +his private finances had been much straitened by his extravagance and +love of display, he at once chartered a ship, filled her with +provisions, and despatched her to Plymouth. + +Mr. Drake and the gentlemen with him took up their abode in the town +until there should be need for them to go on board the _Active_, +where the accommodation was much cramped, and life by no means +agreeable; and the Vickars therefore escaped sharing the sufferings of +those on board ship. + +At the end of May came the news that the Armada had sailed on the 19th, +and high hopes were entertained that the period of waiting had +terminated. A storm, however, scattered the great fleet, and it was not +until the 12th of July that they sailed from the Bay of Ferrol, where +they had collected after the storm. + +Never was there known a season so boisterous as the summer of 1588, and +when off Ushant, in a south-west gale, four galleys were wrecked on the +French coast, and the _Santa Anna_, a galleon of 800 tons, went +down, carrying with her ninety seamen, three hundred soldiers, and +50,000 ducats in gold. + +After two days the storm abated, and the fleet again proceeded. At +daybreak on the 20th the Lizard was in sight, and an English fishing- +boat was seen running along their line. Chase was given, but she soon +out-sailed her pursuers, and carried the news to Plymouth. The Armada +had already been made out from the coast the night before, and beacon +lights had flashed the news all over England. In every village and town +men were arming and saddling and marching away to the rendezvous of the +various corps. + +In Plymouth the news was received with the greatest rejoicing. Thanks +to the care with which the provisions had been husbanded, and to the +manner in which the officers and volunteers had from their private +means supplemented the scanty stores, there was still a week's +provisions on board, and this, it was hoped, would suffice for their +needs. The scanty supply of ammunition was a greater source of anxiety; +but they hoped that fresh supplies would be forthcoming, now that even +the queen could no longer close her eyes to the urgent necessity of the +case. + +As soon as the news arrived all the gentlemen in the town flocked on +board the ships, and on the night of the 19th the queen's ships and +some of the privateers went to moorings behind Ram Head, so that they +could make clear to sea; and on the morning when the Spaniards sighted +the Lizard, forty sail were lying ready for action under the headland. + +At three o'clock in the afternoon the look-out men on the hill reported +a line of sails on the western horizon. Two wings were at first +visible, which were gradually united as the topsails of those in the +centre rose above the line of sea. As they arose it could be seen that +the great fleet was sailing, in the form of a huge crescent, before a +gentle wind. A hundred and fifty ships, large and small, were counted, +as a few store-ships bound for Flanders had joined the Armada for +protection. + +The _Active_ was one of the privateers that had late the evening +before gone out to Earn Head, and just as it was growing dusk the +anchors were got up, and the little fleet sailed out from the shelter +of the land as the Armada swept along. + +The Spanish admiral at once ordered the fleet to lie-to for the night, +and to prepare for a general action at daybreak, as he knew from a +fisherman he had captured that the English fleet were at Plymouth. The +wind was on shore, but all through the night Howard's and Drake's ships +beat out from the Sound until they took their places behind the Spanish +fleet, whose position they could perfectly make out by the light of the +half-moon that rose at two in the morning. + +On board the English fleet all was confidence and hilarity. The +sufferings of the last three months were forgotten. The numbers and +magnitude of the Spanish ships counted as nothing. The sailors of the +west country had met the Spaniards on the Indian seas and proved their +masters, and doubted not for a moment that they should do so again. + +There was scarce a breath of air when day broke, but at eight o'clock a +breeze sprang up from the west, and the Armada made sail and attempted +to close with the English; but the low, sharp English ships sailed two +feet to the one of the floating castles of Spain, and could sail close +to the wind, while the Spanish ships, if they attempted to close-haul +their sails, drifted bodily to leeward. Howard's flagship, the _Ark- +Raleigh_, with three other English ships, opened the engagement by +running down along their rear-line, firing into each galleon as they +passed, then wearing round and repeating the manoeuvre. The great +_San Matteo_ luffed out from the rest of the fleet and challenged +them to board, but they simply poured their second broadside into her +and passed on. + +The excellence of the manoeuvring of the English ships, and the +rapidity and accuracy of their fire, astonished the Spaniards. +Throughout the whole forenoon the action continued; the Spaniards +making efforts to close, but in vain, the English ships keeping the +weather-gage and sailing continually backwards and forwards, pouring in +their broadsides. The height and size of the Spanish ships were against +them; and being to leeward they heeled over directly they came up to +the wind to fire a broadside, and their shots for the most part went +far over their assailants, while they themselves suffered severely from +the English fire. Miquel de Oquendo, who commanded one of the six +Spanish squadrons, distinguished himself by his attempts to close with +the English, and by maintaining his position in the rear of the fleet +engaged in constant conflict with them. + +He was a young nobleman of great promise, distinguished alike for his +bravery and chivalrous disposition; but he could do little while the +wind remained in the west and the English held the weather-gage. So far +only the ships that had been anchored out under Earn Head had taken +part in the fight, those lying higher up in the Sound being unable to +make their way out. At noon the exertions of their crews, who had from +the preceding evening worked incessantly, prevailed, and they were now +seen coming out from behind the headland to take part in the struggle. +Medina-Sidonia signalled to his fleet to make sail up Channel, Martinez +de Ricaldo covering the rear with the squadron of Biscay. He was vice- +admiral of the fleet, and considered to be the best seaman Spain +possessed now that Santa Cruz was dead. + +The wind was now rising. Lord Howard sent off a fast boat with letters +to Lord Henry Seymour, telling him how things had gone so far, and +bidding him be prepared for the arrival of the Spanish fleet in the +Downs. As the afternoon went on the wind rose, and a rolling sea came +in from the west. Howard still hung upon the Spanish rear, firing but +seldom in order to save his powder. As evening fell, the Spanish +vessels, huddled closely together, frequently came into collision with +one another, and in one of these the _Capitana_, the flagship of +the Andalusian division, commanded by Admiral Pedro de Valdez, had her +bowsprit carried away, the foremast fell overboard, and the ship +dropped out of her place. + +Two of the galleasses came to her assistance and tried to take her in +tow, but the waves were running so high that the cable broke. Pedro de +Valdez had been commander of the Spanish fleet on the coast of Holland, +and knew the English Channel and the northern shores of France and +Holland well. The duke therefore despatched boats to bring him off with +his crew, but he refused to leave his charge. Howard, as with his ships +he passed her, believed her to be deserted and went on after the fleet; +but a London vessel kept close to her and exchanged shots with her all +night, until Drake, who had turned aside to chase what he believed to +be a portion of the Spanish fleet that had separated itself from the +rest, but which turned out to be the merchant ships that had joined it +for protection, came up, and the _Capitana_ struck her flag. Drake +took her into Torbay, and there left her in the care of the Brixham +fishermen, and taking with him Valdez and the other officers sailed +away to join Lord Howard. The fishermen, on searching the ship, found +some tons of gunpowder on board her. Knowing the scarcity of ammunition +in the fleet they placed this on board the _Roebuck_, the fastest +trawler in the harbour, and she started at once in pursuit of the +fleet. + +The misfortune to the _Capitana_, was not the only one that befell +the Spaniards. While Oquendo was absent from his galleon a quarrel +arose among the officers, who were furious at the ill result of the +day's fighting. The captain struck the master-gunner with a stick; the +latter, a German, rushed below in a rage, thrust a burning fuse into a +powder barrel, and sprang through a port-hole into the sea. The whole +of the deck was blown up, with two hundred sailors and soldiers; but +the ship was so strongly built that she survived the shock, and her +mast still stood. + +The duke sent boats to learn what had happened. These carried off the +few who remained unhurt, but there was no means of taking off the +wounded. These, however, were treated kindly and sent on shore when the +ship was picked up at daylight by the English, who, on rifling her, +found to their delight that there were still many powder barrels on +board that had escaped the explosion. + +The morning broke calm, and the wind, when it came, was from the east, +which gave the Spaniards the advantage of position. The two fleets lay +idle all day three or four miles apart, and the next morning, as the +wind was still from the east, the Spaniards bore down upon Howard to +offer battle. + +The English, however, headed out to sea. Encouraged by seeing their +assailants avoid a pitched battle the Spaniards gave chase. The _San +Marcos_, the fastest sailer in the fleet, left the rest behind, and +when the breeze headed round at noon she was several miles to windward +of her consorts, and the English at once set upon her. She fought with +extreme courage, and defended herself single-handed for an hour and a +half, when Oquendo came up to the rescue, and as the action off +Plymouth had almost exhausted his stock of powder, and the Brixham +sloop had not yet come up, Howard was obliged to draw off. + +The action of this day was fought off Portland. During the three days +the British fleet had been to sea they had received almost hourly +reinforcements. From every harbour and fishing port along the coast +from Plymouth to the Isle of Wight vessels of all sizes, smacks, and +boats put off, crowded with noblemen and gentlemen anxious to take part +in the action, and their enthusiasm added to that of the weary and ill- +fed sailors. At the end of the third day the English fleet had +increased to a hundred sail, many of which, however, were of very small +burden. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +THE ROUT OF THE ARMADA. + + +The fight between the fleets had begun on Sunday morning, and at the +end of the third day the strength of the Armada remained unbroken. The +moral effect had no doubt been great, but the loss of two or three +ships was a trifle to so large a force, and the spirit of the Spaniards +had been raised by the gallant and successful defence the _San +Marcos_ had made on the Tuesday afternoon. Wednesday was again calm. +The magazines of the English ships were empty. Though express after +express had been sent off praying that ammunition might be sent, none +had arrived, and the two fleets lay six miles apart without action, +save that the galleasses came out and skirmished for a while with the +English ships. + +That evening, however, a supply of ammunition sufficient for another +day's fighting arrived, and soon after daybreak the English fleet moved +down towards the Armada, and for the first time engaged them at close +quarters. The _Ark-Raleigh_, the _Bear_, the _Elizabeth +Jones_, the _Lion_, and the _Victory_ bore on straight +into the centre of the Spanish galleons, exchanging broadsides with +each as they passed. Oquendo with his vessel was right in the course of +the English flagship, and a collision took place, in which the _Ark- +Raleigh's_ rudder was unshipped, and she became unmanageable. + +The enemy's vessels closed round her, but she lowered her boats, and +these, in spite of the fire of the enemy, brought her head round before +the wind, and she made her way through her antagonists and got clear. +For several hours the battle continued. The Spanish fire was so slow, +and their ships so unwieldy, that it was rarely they succeeded in +firing a shot into their active foes, while the English shot tore their +way through the massive timbers of the Spanish vessels, scattering the +splinters thickly among the soldiers, who had been sent below to be out +of harm's way; but beyond this, and inflicting much damage upon masts +and spars, the day's fighting had no actual results. No captures were +made by the English. + +The Spaniards suffered, but made no sign; nevertheless their confidence +in their powers was shaken. Their ammunition was also running short, +and they had no hope of refilling their magazines until they effected a +junction with Parma. Their admiral that night wrote to him asking that +two shiploads of shot and powder might be sent to him immediately. "The +enemy pursue me," he said; "they fire upon me most days from morning +till nightfall, but they will not close and grapple. I have given them +every opportunity. I have purposely left ships exposed to tempt them to +board, but they decline to do it; and there is no remedy, for they are +swift and we are slow. They have men and ammunition in abundance." The +Spanish admiral was unaware that the English magazines were even more +empty than his own. + +On Friday morning Howard sailed for Dover to take in the supplies that +were so sorely needed. The Earl of Sussex, who was in command of the +castle, gave him all that he had, and the stores taken from the prizes +came up in light vessels and were divided among the fleet, and in the +evening the English fleet again sailed out and took up its place in the +rear of the Armada. + +On Saturday morning the weather changed. After six days of calm and +sunshine it began to blow hard from the west, with driving showers. The +Spaniards, having no pilots who knew the coasts, anchored off Calais. +The English fleet, closely watching their movements, brought up two +miles astern. + +The Spanish admiral sent off another urgent letter to Parma at Dunkirk, +begging him to send immediately thirty or forty fast gunboats to keep +the English at bay. Parma had received the admiral's letters, and was +perfectly ready to embark his troops, but could not do this as the +admiral expected he would, until the fleet came up to protect him. The +lighters and barges he had constructed for the passage were only fit to +keep the sea in calm weather, and would have been wholly at the mercy +of even a single English ship of war. He could not, therefore, embark +his troops until the duke arrived. As to the gunboats asked for, he had +none with him. + +But while the Spanish admiral had grave cause for uneasiness in the +situation in which he found himself, Lord Howard had no greater reason +for satisfaction. In spite of his efforts the enemy's fleet had arrived +at their destination with their strength still unimpaired, and were in +communication with the Duke of Parma's army. Lord Seymour had come up +with a squadron from the mouth of the Thames, but his ships had but one +day's provisions on board, while Drake and Howard's divisions had all +but exhausted their supplies. The previous day's fighting had used up +the ammunition obtained at Dover. Starvation would drive every English +ship from the sea in another week at latest. The Channel would then be +open for the passage of Parma's army. + +At five o'clock on Sunday evening a council of war was held in Lord +Howard's cabin, and it was determined, that as it was impossible to +attack the Spanish fleet where they lay at the edge of shallow water, +an attempt must be made to drive them out into the Channel with fire- +ships. Eight of the private vessels were accordingly taken, and such +combustibles as could be found--pitch, tar, old sails, empty casks, and +other materials--were piled into them. At midnight the tide set +directly from the English fleet towards the Spaniards, and the fire- +ships, manned by their respective crews, hoisted sail and drove down +towards them. + +When near the Armada the crews set fire to the combustibles, and taking +to their boats rowed back to the fleet. At the sight of the flames +bursting up from the eight ships bearing down upon them, the Spaniards +were seized with a panic. The admiral fired a gun as a signal, and all +cut their cables and hoisted sail, and succeeded in getting out to sea +before the fire-ships arrived. They lay-to six miles from shore, +intending to return in the morning and recover their anchors; but Drake +with his division of the fleet, and Seymour with the squadron from the +Thames, weighed their anchors and stood off after them, while Howard +with his division remained off Calais, where, in the morning, the +largest of the four galleasses was seen aground on Calais Bar. Lord +Howard wasted many precious hours in capturing her before he set off to +join Drake and Seymour, who were thundering against the Spanish fleet. +The wind had got up during the night, and the Spaniards had drifted +farther than they expected, and when morning dawned were scattered over +the sea off Gravelines. Signals were made for them to collect, but +before they could do so Drake and Seymour came up and opened fire +within pistol-shot. The English admiral saw at once that, with the wind +rising from the south, if he could drive the unwieldy galleons north +they would be cut off from Dunkirk, and would not be able to beat back +again until there was a change of wind. + +All through the morning the English ships poured a continuous shower of +shot into the Spanish vessels, which, huddled together in a confused +mass, were unable to make any return whatever. The duke and Oquendo, +with some of the best sailors among the fleet, tried to bear out from +the crowd and get room to manoeuvre, but Drake's ships were too +weatherly and too well handled to permit of this, and they were driven +back again into the confused mass, which was being slowly forced +towards the shoals and banks of the coasts. + +Howard came up at noon with his division, and until sunset the fire was +maintained, by which time almost the last cartridge was spent, and the +crews worn out by their incessant labour. They took no prizes, for they +never attempted to board. They saw three great galleons go down, and +three more drift away towards the sands of Ostend, where they were +captured either by the English garrisoned there or by three vessels +sent by Lord Willoughby from Flushing, under the command of Francis +Vere. Had the English ammunition lasted but a few more hours the whole +of the Armada would have been either driven ashore or sunk; but when +the last cartridge had been burned the assailants drew off to take on +board the stores which had, while the fighting was going on, been +brought up by some provision ships from the Thames. + +But the Spaniards were in no condition to benefit by the cessation of +the attack. In spite of the terrible disadvantages under which they +laboured, they had fought with splendid courage. The sides of the +galleons had been riddled with shot, and the splinters caused by the +rending of the massive timbers had done even greater execution than the +iron hail. Being always to leeward, and heeling over with the wind, the +ships had been struck again and again below the water-line, and many +were only kept from sinking by nailing sheets of lead over the shot- +holes. + +Their guns were, for the most part, dismounted or knocked to pieces. +Several had lost masts, the carnage among the crews was frightful, and +yet not a single ship hauled down her colours. The _San Matteo_, +which was one of those that grounded between Ostend and Sluys, fought +to the last, and kept Francis Vere's three ships at bay for two hours, +until she was at last carried by boarding. + +Left to themselves at the end of the day, the Spaniards gathered in +what order they could, and made sail for the north. On counting the +losses they found that four thousand men had been killed or drowned, +and the number of wounded must have been far greater. The crews were +utterly worn-out and exhausted. They had the day before been kept at +work cleaning and refitting, and the fire-ships had disturbed them +early in the night. During the engagement there had been no time to +serve out food, and the labours of the long struggle had completely +exhausted them. Worst of all, they were utterly disheartened by the +day's fighting. They had been pounded by their active foes, who fired +five shots to their one, and whose vessels sailed round and round them, +while they themselves had inflicted no damage that they could perceive +upon their assailants. + +The English admirals had no idea of the extent of the victory they had +won. Howard, who had only come up in the middle of the fight, believed +that they "were still wonderful great and strong," while even Drake, +who saw more clearly how much they had suffered, only ventured to hope +that some days at least would elapse before they could join hands with +Parma. In spite of the small store of ammunition that had arrived the +night before, the English magazines were almost empty; but they +determined to show a good front, and "give chase as though they wanted +nothing." + +When the morning dawned the English fleet were still to windward of the +Armada, while to leeward were lines of white foam, where the sea was +breaking on the shoals of Holland. It seemed that the Armada was lost. +At this critical moment the wind suddenly shifted to the east. This +threw the English fleet to leeward, and enabled the Spaniards to head +out from the coast and make for the North Sea. The Spanish admiral held +a council. The sea had gone down, and they had now a fair wind for +Calais; and the question was put to the sailing-masters and captains +whether they should return into the Channel or sail north round +Scotland and Ireland, and so return to Spain. The former was the +courageous course, but the spirit of the Spaniards was broken, and the +vote was in favour of what appeared a way of escape. Therefore, the +shattered fleet bore on its way north. On board the English fleet a +similar council was being held, and it was determined that Lord +Seymour's squadron should return to guard the Channel, lest Parma +should take advantage of the absence of the fleet to cross from Dunkirk +to England, and that Howard and Drake with their ninety ships should +pursue the Spaniards; for it was not for a moment supposed that the +latter had entirely abandoned their enterprise, and intended to return +to Spain without making another effort to rejoin Parma. + +During the week's fighting Geoffrey and Lionel Vickars had taken such +part as they could in the contest; but as there had been no hand-to- +hand fighting, the position of the volunteers on board the fleet had +been little more than that of spectators. The crews worked the guns and +manoeuvred the sails, and the most the lads could do was to relieve the +ship-boys in carrying up powder and shot, and to take round drink to +men serving the guns. When not otherwise engaged they had watched with +intense excitement the manoeuvres of their own ship and of those near +them, as they swept down towards the great hulls, delivered their +broadsides, and then shot off again before the Spaniards had had time +to discharge more than a gun or two. The sails had been pierced in +several places, but not a single shot had struck the hull of the +vessel. In the last day's fighting, however, the _Active_ became +entangled among several of the Spanish galleons, and being almost +becalmed by their lofty hulls, one of them ran full at her, and rolling +heavily in the sea, seemed as if she would overwhelm her puny +antagonist. + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY CARRIED OVERBOARD BY THE FALLING MAST] + +Geoffrey was standing at the end of the poop when the mizzen rigging +became entangled in the stern gallery of the Spaniard, and a moment +later the mast snapped off, and as it fell carried him overboard. For a +moment he was half-stunned, but caught hold of a piece of timber shot +away from one of the enemy's ships, and clung to it mechanically. When +he recovered and looked round, the _Active_ had drawn out from +between the Spaniards, and the great galleon which had so nearly sunk +her was close beside him. + +The sea was in a turmoil; the waves as they set in from the west being +broken up by the rolling of the great ships, and torn by the hail of +shot. The noise was prodigious, from the incessant cannonade kept up by +the English ships and the return of the artillery on board the Armada, +the rending of timber, the heavy crashes as the great galleons rolled +against one another, the shouting on board the Spanish ships, the +creaking of the masts and yards, and the flapping of the sails. + +On trying to strike out, Geoffrey found that as he had been knocked +overboard he had struck his right knee severely against the rail of the +vessel, and was at present unable to use that leg. Fearful of being run +down by one of the great ships, and still more of being caught between +two of them as they rolled, he looked round to try to get sight of an +English ship in the throng. Then, seeing that he was entirely +surrounded by Spaniards, he left the spar and swam as well as he could +to the bow of a great ship close beside him, and grasping a rope +trailing from the bowsprit, managed by its aid to climb up until he +reached the bobstay, across which he seated himself with his back to +the stem. The position was a precarious one, and after a time he gained +the wooden carved work above, and obtained a seat there just below the +bowsprit, and hidden from the sight of those on deck a few feet above +him. As he knew the vessels were drifting to leeward towards the +shoals, he hoped to remain hidden until the vessel struck, and then to +gain the shore. + +Presently the shifting of the positions of the ships brought the vessel +on which he was into the outside line. The shots now flew thickly +about, and he could from time to time feel a jar as the vessel was +struck. + +So an hour went on. At the end of that time he heard a great shouting +on deck, and the sound of men running to and fro. Happening to look +down he saw that the sea was but a few feet below him, and knew that +the great galleon was sinking. Another quarter of an hour she was so +much lower that he was sure she could not swim many minutes longer; and +to avoid being drawn down with her he dropped into the water and swam +off. He was but a short distance away when he heard a loud cry, and +glancing over his shoulder saw the ship disappearing. He swam +desperately, but was caught in the suck and carried under; but there +was no great depth of water, and he soon came to the surface again. The +sea was dotted with struggling men and pieces of wreckage. He swam to +one of the latter, and held on until he saw some boats, which the next +Spanish ship had lowered when she saw her consort disappearing, rowing +towards them, and was soon afterwards hauled into one of them. He had +closed his eyes as it came up, and assumed the appearance of +insensibility, and he lay in the bottom of the boat immovable, until +after a time he heard voices above, and then felt himself being carried +up the ladder and laid down on the deck. + +He remained quiet for some time, thinking over what he had best do. He +was certain that were it known he was English he would at once be +stabbed and thrown overboard, for there was no hope of quarter; but he +was for some time unable to devise any plan by which, even for a short +time, to conceal his nationality. He only knew a few words of Spanish, +and would be detected the moment he opened his lips. He thought of +leaping up suddenly and jumping overboard; but his chance of reaching +the English ships to windward would be slight indeed. At last an idea +struck him, and sitting up he opened his eyes and looked round. Several +other Spaniards who had been picked up lay exhausted on the deck near +him. A party of soldiers and sailors close by were working a cannon. +The bulwarks were shot away in many places, dead and dying men lay +scattered about, the decks were everywhere stained with blood, and no +one paid any attention to him until presently the fire began to +slacken. Shortly afterwards a Spanish officer came up and spoke to him. + +Geoffrey rose to his feet, rubbed his eyes, yawned, and burst into an +idiotic laugh. The officer spoke again but he paid no attention, and +the Spaniard turned away, believing that the lad had lost his senses +from fear and the horrors of the day. + +As night came on he was several times addressed, but always with the +same result. When after dark food and wine were served out, he seized +the portion offered to him, and hurrying away crouched under the +shelter of a gun, and devoured it as if fearing it would be taken from +him again. + +When he saw that the sailors were beginning to repair some of the most +necessary ropes and stays that had been shot away, he pushed his way +through them and took his share of the work, laughing idiotically from +time to time. He had, when he saw that the galleon was sinking, taken +off his doublet, the better to be able to swim, and in his shirt and +trunks there was nothing to distinguish him from a Spaniard, and none +suspected that he was other than he seemed to be--a ship's boy, who had +lost his senses from fear. When the work was done, he threw himself on +the deck with the weary sailors. His hopes were that the battle would +be renewed in the morning, and that either the ship might be captured, +or that an English vessel might pass so close alongside that he might +leap over and swim to her. + +Great was his disappointment next day when the sudden change of wind +gave the Spanish fleet the weather-gage, and enabled them to steer away +for the north. He joined in the work of the crew, paying no attention +whatever to what was passing around him, or heeding in the slightest +the remarks made to him. Once or twice when an officer spoke to him +sternly he gave a little cry, ran to the side, and crouched down as if +in abject fear. In a very short time no attention was paid to him, and +he was suffered to go about as he chose, being regarded as a harmless +imbecile. He was in hopes that the next day the Spaniards would change +their course and endeavour to beat back to the Channel, and was at once +disappointed and surprised as they sped on before the south-westerly +wind, which was hourly increasing in force. Some miles behind he could +see the English squadron in pursuit; but these made no attempt to close +up, being well contented to see the Armada sailing away, and being too +straitened in ammunition to wish to bring on an engagement so long as +the Spaniards were following their present course. + +The wind blew with ever-increasing force; the lightly ballasted ships +made bad weather, rolling deep in the seas, straining heavily, and +leaking badly through the opening seams and the hastily-stopped shot- +holes. Water was extremely scarce, and at a signal from the admiral all +the horses and mules were thrown overboard in order to husband the +supply. Several of the masts, badly injured by the English shot, went +by the board, and the vessels dropped behind crippled, to be picked up +by the pursuing fleet. + +Lord Howard followed as far as the mouth of the Forth; and seeing that +the Spaniards made no effort to enter the estuary, and his provisions +being now well-nigh exhausted, he hove the fleet about and made back +for the Channel, leaving two small vessels only to follow the Armada +and watch its course, believing that it would make for Denmark, refit +there, and then return to rejoin Parma. + +It was a grievous disappointment to the English to be thus forced by +want of provisions to relinquish the pursuit. Had they been properly +supplied with provisions and ammunition they could have made an end of +the Armada; whereas, they believed that by allowing them now to escape +the whole work would have to be done over again. They had sore trouble +to get back again off the Norfolk coast. The wind became so furious +that the fleet was scattered. A few of the largest ships reached +Margate; others were driven into Harwich, others with difficulty kept +the sea until the storm broke. + +It might have been thought that after such service as the fleet had +rendered even Elizabeth might have been generous; but now that the +danger was over, she became more niggardly than ever. No fresh +provisions were supplied for the sick men, and though in the fight off +the Dutch coast only some fifty or sixty had been killed, in the course +of a very short time the crews were so weakened by deaths and disease +that scarce a ship could have put to sea, however urgent the necessity. +Drake and Howard spent every penny they could raise in buying fresh +meat and vegetables, and in procuring some sort of shelter on shore for +the sick. Had the men received the wages due to them they could have +made a shift to have purchased what they so urgently required; but +though the Treasury was full of money, not a penny was forthcoming +until every item of the accounts had been investigated and squabbled +over. Howard was compelled to pay from his private purse for everything +that had been purchased at Plymouth, Sir John Hawkins was absolutely +ruined by the demands made on him to pay for necessaries supplied to +the fleet, and had the admirals and sailors of the fleet that saved +England behaved like ignominious cowards, their treatment could not +have been worse than that which they received at the hands of their +sovereign. + +But while the English seamen were dying like sheep from disease and +neglect, their conquered foes were faring no better. They had breathed +freely for the first time when they saw the English fleet bear up; an +examination was made of the provisions that were left, and the crews +were placed on rations of eight ounces of bread, half a pint of wine, +and a pint of water a day. The fleet was still a great one, for of the +hundred and fifty ships which had sailed from Corunna, a hundred and +twenty still held together. The weather now turned bitterly cold, with +fog and mist, squalls and driving showers; and the vessels, when they +reached the north coast of Scotland, lost sight of each other, and each +struggled for herself in the tempestuous sea. + +A week later the weather cleared, and on the 9th of August Geoffrey +looking round at daybreak saw fifteen other ships in sight. Among these +were the galleons of Calderon and Ricaldo, the _Rita, San Marcos_, +and eleven other vessels. Signals were flying from all of them, but the +sea was so high that it was scarce possible to lower a boat. That night +it again blew hard and the fog closed in, and in the morning Geoffrey +found that the ship he was on, and all the others, with the exception +of that of Calderon, were steering north; the intention of Ricaldo and +De Leyva being to make for the Orkneys and refit there. Calderon had +stood south, and had come upon Sidonia with fifty ships; and these, +bearing well away to the west of Ireland, finally succeeded for the +most part in reaching Spain, their crews reduced by sickness and want +to a mere shadow of their original strength. + +The cold became bitter as De Leyva's ships made their way towards the +Orkneys. The storm was furious, and the sailors, unaccustomed to the +cold and weakened by disease and famine, could no longer work their +ships, and De Leyva was obliged at last to abandon his intention and +make south. One galleon was driven on the Faroe Islands, a second on +the Orkneys, and a third on the Isle of Mull, where it was attacked by +the natives and burned with almost every one on board. The rest managed +to make the west coast of Ireland, and the hope that they would find +shelter in Galway Bay, or the mouth of the Shannon, began to spring up +in the breasts of the exhausted crews. + +The Irish were their co-religionists and allies, and had only been +waiting for news of the success of the Armada to rise in arms against +the English, who had but few troops there. Rumours of disaster had +arrived, and a small frigate had been driven into Tralee Bay. The fears +of the garrison at Tralee Castle overcame their feelings of humanity, +and all on board were put to death. Two galleons put into Dingle, and +landing begged for water; but the natives, deciding that the Spanish +cause was a lost one, refused to give them a drop, seized the men who +had landed in the boats, and the galleons had to put to sea again. + +Another ship of a thousand tons, _Our Lady of the Rosary_, was +driven into the furious straits between the Blasket Islands and the +coast of Kerry. Of her crew of seven hundred, five hundred had died. +Before she got half-way through she struck among the breakers, and all +the survivors perished save the son of the pilot, who was washed ashore +lashed to a plank. Six others who had reached the mouth of the Shannon +sent their boats ashore for water; but although there were no English +there the Irish feared to supply them, even though the Spaniards +offered any sum of money for a few casks. One of the ships was +abandoned and the others put to sea, only to be dashed ashore in the +same gale that wrecked _Our Lady of the Rosary_, and of all their +crews only one hundred and fifty men were cast ashore alive. Along the +coast of Connemara, Mayo, and Sligo many other ships were wrecked. In +almost every case the crews who reached the shore were at once murdered +by the native savages for the sake of their clothes and jewellery. + +Geoffrey had suffered as much as the rest of the crew on board the +galleon in which he sailed. All were so absorbed by their own suffering +and misery that none paid any attention to the idiot boy in their +midst. He worked at such work as there was to do: assisted to haul on +the ropes, to throw the dead overboard, and to do what could be done +for the sick and wounded. Like all on board he was reduced almost to a +skeleton, and was scarce able to stand. + +As the surviving ships passed Galway Bay, one of them, which was +leaking so badly that she could only have been kept afloat a few hours +in any case, entered it, and brought up opposite the town. Don Lewis of +Cordova, who commanded, sent a party on shore, believing that in +Galway, between which town and Spain there had always been close +connections, they would be well received. They were, however, at once +taken prisoners. An attempt was made to get up the anchors again, but +the crew were too feeble to be able to do so, and the natives coming +out in their boats, all were taken prisoners and sent on shore. Sir +Richard Bingham, the governor of Connaught, arrived in a few hours, and +at once despatched search parties through Clare and Connemara to bring +all Spaniards cast ashore alive to the town, and sent his son to Mayo +to fetch down all who landed there. But young Bingham's mission proved +useless; every Spaniard who had landed had been murdered by the +natives, well-nigh three thousand having been slain by the axes and +knives of the savages who professed to be their co-religionists. + +Sir Richard Bingham was regarded as a humane man, but he feared the +consequences should the eleven hundred prisoners collected at Galway be +restored to health and strength. He had but a handful of troops under +him, and had had the greatest difficulty in keeping down the Irish +alone. With eleven hundred Spanish soldiers to aid them the task would +be impossible, and accordingly he gave orders that all, with the +exception of Don Lewis himself, and three or four other nobles, should +be executed. The order was carried out; Don Lewis, with those spared, +was sent under an escort to Dublin, but the others being too feeble to +walk were killed or died on the way, and Don Lewis himself was the sole +survivor out of the crews of a dozen ships. + +De Leyva, the most popular officer in the Armada, had with him in his +ship two hundred and fifty young nobles of the oldest families in +Spain. He was twice wrecked. The first time all reached the shore in +safety, and were protected by O'Niel, who was virtually the sovereign +of the north of Ulster. He treated them kindly for a time. They then +took to sea again, but were finally wrecked off Dunluce, and all on +board save five perished miserably. Over eight thousand Spaniards died +on the Irish coast. Eleven hundred were put to death by Bingham, three +thousand murdered by the Irish, the rest drowned; and of the whole +Armada but fifty-four vessels, carrying between nine and ten thousand +worn-out men, reached Spain, and of the survivors a large proportion +afterwards died from the effects of the sufferings they had endured. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +THE WAR IN HOLLAND. + + +In the confusion caused by the collision of the _Active_ with the +Spanish galleon no one had noticed the accident which had befallen +Geoffrey Vickars, and his brother's distress was great when, on the +ship getting free from among the Spaniards, he discovered that Geoffrey +was missing. He had been by his side on the poop but a minute before +the mast fell, and had no doubt that he had been carried overboard by +its wreck. That he had survived he had not the least hope, and when a +week later the _Active_ on her way back towards the Thames was +driven into Harwich, he at once landed and carried the sad news to his +parents. England was wild with joy at its deliverance, but the +household at Hedingham was plunged into deep sorrow. + +Weeks passed and then Lionel received a letter from Francis Vere saying +that Parma's army was advancing into Holland, and that as active work +was at hand he had best, if his intentions remained unchanged, join him +without delay. + +He started two days later for Harwich, and thence took ship for Bergen- +op-Zoom. Anchoring at Flushing, he learned that the Duke of Parma had +already sat down in front of Bergen-op-Zoom, and had on the 7th +attempted to capture Tholen on the opposite side of the channel, but +had been repulsed by the regiment of Count Solms, with a loss of 400 +men. He had then thrown up works against the water forts, and hot +fighting had gone on, the garrison making frequent sallies upon the +besiegers. The water forts still held out, and the captain therefore +determined to continue his voyage into the town. The ship was fired at +by the Spanish batteries, but passed safely between the water forts and +dropped anchor in the port on the last day of September, Lionel having +been absent from Holland just a year. He landed at once and made his +way to the lodgings of Francis Vere, by whom he was received with great +cordiality. + +"I was greatly grieved," he said after the first greetings, "to hear of +your brother's death. I felt it as if he had been a near relative of my +own. I had hoped to see you both; and that affair concerning which my +cousin wrote to me, telling me how cleverly you had discovered a plot +against the queen's life, showed me that you would both be sure to make +your way. Your father and mother must have felt the blow terribly?" + +"They have indeed," Lionel said. "I do not think, however, that they +altogether give up hope. They cling to the idea that he may have been +picked up by some Spanish ship and may now be a prisoner in Spain." + +Francis Vere shook his head. + +"Of course, I know," Lionel went on, "their hope is altogether without +foundation; for even had Geoffrey gained one of their ships, he would +at once have been thrown overboard. Still I rather encouraged the idea, +for it is better that hope should die out gradually than be +extinguished at a blow; and slight though it was it enabled my father +and mother to bear up better than they otherwise would have done. Had +it not been for that I believe that my mother would have well nigh sunk +beneath it. I was very glad when I got your letter, for active service +will be a distraction to my sorrow. We have ever been together, +Geoffrey and I, and I feel like one lost without him. You have not had +much fighting here, I think, since I have been away?" + +"No, indeed; you have been far more lucky than I have," Francis Vere +said. "With the exception of the fight with the _San Matteo_ I +have been idle ever since I saw you, for not a shot has been fired +here, while you have been taking part in the great fight for the very +existence of our country. It is well that Parma has been wasting nine +months at Dunkirk, for it would have gone hard with us had he marched +hither instead of waiting there for the arrival of the Armada. Our +force here has fallen away to well-nigh nothing. The soldiers could get +no pay, and were almost starved; their clothes were so ragged that it +was pitiful to see them. Great numbers have died, and more gone back to +England. As to the Dutch, they are more occupied in quarrelling with us +than in preparing for defence, and they would right willingly see us go +so that we did but deliver Flushing and Brill and this town back again +to them. I was truly glad when I heard that Parma had broken up his +camp at Dunkirk when the Armada sailed away, and was marching hither. +Now that he has come, it may be that these wretched disputes will come +to an end, and that something like peace and harmony will prevail in +our councils. He could not have done better, as far as we are +concerned, than in coming to knock his head against these walls; for +Bergen is far too strong for him to take, and he will assuredly meet +with no success here such as would counterbalance in any way the blow +that Spanish pride has suffered in the defeat of the Armada. I think, +Lionel, that you have outgrown your pageship, and since you have been +fighting as a gentleman volunteer in Drake's fleet you had best take +the same rank here." + +The siege went on but slowly. Vigorous sorties were made, and the +cavalry sometimes sallied out from the gates and made excursions as far +as Wouw, a village three miles away, and took many prisoners. Among +these were two commissaries of ordnance, who were intrusted to the safe +keeping of the Deputy-Provost Redhead. They were not strictly kept, and +were allowed to converse with the provost's friends. One of these, +William Grimeston, suspected that one of the commissaries, who +pretended to be an Italian, was really an English deserter who had gone +over with the traitor Stanley; and in order to see if his suspicions +were correct, pretended that he was dissatisfied with his position and +would far rather be fighting on the other side. The man at once fell +into the trap, acknowledged that he was an Englishman, and said that if +Grimeston and Redhead would but follow his advice they would soon +become rich men, for that if they could arrange to give up one of the +forts to Parma they would be magnificently rewarded. + +Redhead and Grimeston pretended to agree, but at once informed Lord +Willoughby, who was in command, of the offer that had been made to +them. They were ordered to continue their negotiations with the +traitor. The latter furnished them with letters to Stanley and Parma, +and with these they made their way out of the town at night to the +Spanish camp. They had an interview with the duke, and promised to +deliver the north water fort over to him, for which service Redhead was +to receive 1200 crowns and Grimeston 700 crowns, and a commission in +Stanley's regiment of traitors. + +Stanley himself entertained them in his tent, and Parma presented them +with two gold chains. They then returned to Bergen and related all that +had taken place to Lord Willoughby. The matter was kept a profound +secret in the town, Francis Vere, who was in command of the north fort, +and a few others only being made acquainted with what was going on. + +On the appointed night, 22d of October, Grimeston went out alone, +Redhead's supposed share of the business being to open the gates of the +fort. When Grimeston arrived at Parma's camp he found that the +Spaniards had become suspicious. He was bound and placed in charge of a +Spanish captain, who was ordered to stab him at once if there was any +sign of treachery. It was a dark night; the tide was out, for the land +over which the Spaniards had to advance was flooded at other times. The +attacking column consisted of three thousand men, including Stanley's +regiment; and a number of knights and nobles accompanied it as +volunteers. + +As they approached the forts--Grimeston in front closely guarded by the +Spanish captain--it was seen by the assailants that Redhead had kept +his word: the drawbridge across the moat was down and the portcullis +was up. Within the fort Lord Willoughby, Vere, and two thousand men +were waiting them. When about fifty had crossed the drawbridge the +portcullis was suddenly let fall and the drawbridge hauled up. As the +portcullis thundered down Grimeston tripped up the surprised Spaniard, +and, leaping into the water, managed to make his way to the foot of the +walls. A discharge of musketry and artillery from the fort killed a +hundred and fifty of the attacking party, while those who had crossed +the drawbridge were all either killed or taken prisoners. But the water +in the moat was low. The Spaniards gallantly waded across and attacked +the palisades, but were repulsed in their endeavour to climb them. +While the fight was going on the water in the moat was rising, and +scores were washed away and drowned as they attempted to return. + +Parma continued the siege for some little time, but made no real +attempt to take the place after having been repulsed at the north fort; +and on the 12th of November broke up his camp and returned to Brussels. + +After the siege was over Lord Willoughby knighted twelve of his +principal officers, foremost among whom was Francis Vere, who was now +sent home with despatches by his general, and remained in England until +the end of January, when he was appointed sergeant-major-general of the +forces, a post of great responsibility and much honour, by Lord +Willoughby, with the full approval of the queen's government. He was +accompanied on his return by his brother Robert. + +A month after Sir Francis Vere's return Lord Willoughby left for +England, and the whole burden of operations in the field fell upon +Vere. His first trouble arose from the mutinous conduct of the garrison +of Gertruydenberg. This was an important town on the banks of the old +Maas, and was strongly fortified, one side being protected by the Maas +while the river Douge swept round two other sides of its walls. Its +governor, Count Hohenlohe, had been unpopular, the troops had received +no pay, and there had been a partial mutiny before the siege of Bergen- +op-Zoom began. This was appeased by the appointment of Sir John +Wingfield, Lord Willoughby's brother-in-law, as its governor. + +In the winter the discontent broke out again. The soldiers had been +most unjustly treated by the States, and there were long arrears of +pay, and at first Sir John Wingfield espoused the cause of the men. Sir +Francis Vere tried in vain to arrange matters. The Dutch authorities +would not pay up the arrears, the men would not return to their duty +until they did so, and at last became so exasperated that they ceased +to obey their governor and opened communications with the enemy. Prince +Maurice, who was now three and twenty years old, and devoted to martial +pursuits and the cause of his countrymen, after consultation with Sir +Francis Vere, laid siege to the town and made a furious assault upon it +on the water side. But the Dutch troops, although led by Count Solms +and Count Philip of Nassau, were repulsed with great loss. The prince +then promised not only a pardon, but that the demands of the garrison +should be complied with; but it was too late, and four days later +Gertruydenberg was delivered up by the mutineers to the Duke of Parma, +the soldiers being received into the Spanish service, while Wingfield +and the officers were permitted to retire. + +The States were furious, as this was the third city commanded by +Englishmen that had been handed over to the enemy. The bad feeling +excited by the treachery of Sir William Stanley and Roland Yorke at +Deventer and Zutphen had died out after the gallant defence of the +English at Sluys, but now broke out again afresh, and charges of +treachery were brought not only against Wingfield but against many +other English officers, including Sir Francis Vere. The queen, however, +wrote so indignantly to the States that they had to withdraw their +charges against most of the English officers. + +In May Lord Willoughby, who was still in London, resigned his command. +A number of old officers of distinction who might have laid claims to +succeed him, among them Sir John Norris, Sir Roger Williams, Sir Thomas +Wilford, Sir William Drury, Sir Thomas Baskerville, and Sir John +Burrough, were withdrawn from the Netherlands to serve in France or +Ireland, and no general-in-chief or lieutenant-general was appointed, +Sir Francis Vere as sergeant-major receiving authority to command all +soldiers already in the field or to be sent out during the absence of +the general and lieutenant-general. His official title was Her +Majesty's Sergeant-major in the Field. The garrisons in the towns were +under the command of their own governors, and those could supply troops +for service in the field according to their discretion. + +The appointment of so young a man as Sir Francis Vere to a post +demanding not only military ability but great tact and diplomatic +power, was abundant proof of the high estimate formed of him by the +queen and her counsellors. The position was one of extreme difficulty. +He had to keep on good terms with the queen and her government, with +the government of the States, the English agent at the Hague, Prince +Maurice in command of the army of the Netherlands, the English +governors of the towns, and the officers or men of the force under his +own command. Fortunately Barneveldt, who at that time was the most +prominent man in the States, had a high opinion of Vere. Sir Thomas +Bodley, the queen's agent, had much confidence in him, and acted with +him most cordially, and Prince Maurice entertained a great respect for +him, consulted him habitually in all military matters, and placed him +in the position of marshal of the camp of the army of the Netherlands, +in addition to his own command of the English portion of that army. + +Vere's first undertaking was to lead a force of 12,000 men, of whom +half were English, to prevent Count Mansfeldt from crossing the Maas +with an army of equal strength. Prince Maurice was present in person as +general-in-chief. Intrenchments were thrown up and artillery planted; +but just as Mansfeldt was preparing to cross his troops mutinied, and +he was obliged to fall back. + +In October, with 900 of his own troops and twelve companies of Dutch +horse, Sir Francis Vere succeeded in throwing a convoy of provisions +into the town of Rheinberg, which was besieged by a large force of the +enemy. As soon as he returned the States requested him to endeavour to +throw in another convoy, as Count Mansfeldt was marching to swell the +force of the besiegers, and after his arrival it would be well-nigh +impossible to send further aid into the town. Vere took with him 900 +English and 900 Dutch infantry, and 800 Dutch cavalry. The enemy had +possession of a fortified country house called Loo, close to which lay +a thick wood traversed only by a narrow path, with close undergrowth +and swampy ground on either side. The enemy were in great force around +Loo, and came out to attack the expedition as it passed through the +wood. Sending the Dutch troops on first, Vere attacked the enemy +vigorously with his infantry and drove them back to the inclosure of +Loo. As soon as his whole force had crossed the wood, he halted them +and ordered them to form in line of battle facing the wood through +which they had just passed, and from which the enemy were now pouring +out in great force. + +In order to give time to his troops to prepare for the action Vere took +half his English infantry and advanced against them. They moved +forward, and a stubborn fight took place between the pikemen. Vere's +horse was killed, and fell on him so that he could not rise; but the +English closed round him, and he was rescued with no other harm than a +bruised leg and several pike-thrusts through his clothes. While the +conflict between the pikemen was going on the English arquebusiers +opened fire on the flank of the enemy, and they began to fall back. +Four times they rallied and charged the English, but were at last +broken and scattered through the wood. The cavalry stationed there left +their horses and fled through the undergrowth. Pressing forward the +little English force next fell upon twenty-four companies of Neapolitan +infantry, who were defeated without difficulty. The four hundred and +fifty Englishmen then joined the main force, which marched triumphantly +with their convoy of provisions into Rheinberg, and the next morning +fortunately turning thick and foggy the force made its way back without +interruption by the enemy. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +IN SPAIN. + + +Alone among the survivors of the great Spanish Armada, Geoffrey Vickars +saw the coast of Ireland fade away from sight without a feeling of +satisfaction or relief. His hope had been that the ship would be +wrecked on her progress down the coast. He knew not that the wild Irish +were slaying all whom the sea spared, and that ignorant as they were of +the English tongue, he would undoubtedly have shared the fate of his +Spanish companions. He thought only of the risk of being drowned, and +would have preferred taking this to the certainty of a captivity +perhaps for life in the Spanish prisons. The part that he had played +since he had been picked up off Gravelines could not be sustained +indefinitely. He might as well spend his life in prison, where at least +there would be some faint hope of being exchanged, as wander about +Spain all his life as an imbecile beggar. + +As soon, therefore, as he saw that the perils of the coast of Ireland +were passed, and that the vessel was likely to reach Spain in safety, +he determined that he would on reaching a port disclose his real +identity. There were on board several Scotch and Irish volunteers, and +he decided to throw himself upon the pity of one of these rather than +on that of the Spaniards. He did not think that in any case his life +was in danger. Had he been detected when first picked up, or during the +early part of the voyage, he would doubtless have been thrown overboard +without mercy; but now that the passions of the combatants had +subsided, and that he had been so long among them, and had, as he +believed, won the good-will of many by the assistance he had rendered +to the sick and wounded, he thought that there was little fear of his +life being taken in cold blood. + +One of the Irish volunteers, Gerald Burke by name, had for a long time +been seriously ill, and Geoffrey had in many small ways shown him +kindness as he lay helpless on the deck, and he determined finally to +confide in him. Although still very weak, Burke was now convalescent, +and was sitting alone by the poop-rail gazing upon the coast of Spain +with eager eyes, when Geoffrey, under the pretext of coiling down a +rope, approached him. The young man nodded kindly to him. + +"Our voyage is nearly over, my poor lad," he said in Spanish, "and your +troubles now will be worse than mine. You have given me many a drink of +water from your scanty supply, and I wish that I could do something for +you in return; but I know that you do not even understand what I say to +you." + +"Would you give me an opportunity of speaking to you after nightfall, +Mr. Burke," Geoffrey said in English, "when no one will notice us +speaking?" + +The Irishman gave a start of astonishment at hearing himself addressed +in English. + +"My life is in your hands, sir; pray, do not betray me," Geoffrey said +rapidly as he went on coiling down the rope. + +"I will be at this place an hour after nightfall," the young Irishman +replied when he recovered from his surprise. "Your secret will be safe +with me." + +At the appointed time Geoffrey returned to the spot. The decks were now +deserted, for a drizzling rain was falling, and all save those on duty +had retired below, happy in the thought that on the following morning +they would be in port. + +"Now, tell me who you are," the young Irishman began. "I thought you +were a Spanish sailor, one of those we picked up when the Spanish +galleon next to us foundered." + +Geoffrey then told him how he had been knocked off an English ship by +the fall of a mast, had swum to the galleon and taken refuge beneath +her bowsprit until she sank, and how, when picked up and carried on to +the Spanish ship, he feigned to have lost his senses in order to +conceal his ignorance of Spanish. + +"I knew," he said, "that were I recognized as English at the time I +should at once be killed, but I thought that if I could conceal who I +was for a time I should simply be sent to the galleys, where I have +heard that there are many English prisoners working." + +"I think death would have been preferable to that lot," Mr. Burke said. + +"Yes, sir; but there is always the hope of escape or of exchange. When +you spoke kindly to me this afternoon I partly understood what you +said, for in this long time I have been on board I have come to +understand a little Spanish, and I thought that maybe you would assist +me in some way." + +"I would gladly do so, though I regard Englishmen as the enemies of my +country; but in what way can I help you? I could furnish you with a +disguise, but your ignorance of Spanish would lead to your detection +immediately." + +"I have been thinking it over, sir, and it seemed to me that as there +will be no objection to my landing to-morrow, thinking as they do that +I have lost my senses, I might join you after you once got out of the +town. I have some money in my waistbelt, and if you would purchase some +clothes for me I might then join you as your servant as you ride along. +At the next town you come to none would know but that I had been in +your service during the voyage, and there would be nothing strange in +you, an Irish gentleman, being accompanied by an Irish servant who +spoke but little Spanish. I would serve you faithfully, sir, until +perhaps some opportunity might occur for my making my escape to +England." + +"Yes, I think that might be managed," the young Irishman said. "When I +land to-morrow I will buy some clothes suitable for a serving-man. I do +not know the names of the hotels on shore, so you must watch me when I +land and see where I put up. Come there in the evening at nine o'clock. +I will issue out and give you the bundle of clothes, and tell you at +what hour in the morning I have arranged to start. I will hire two +horses; when they come round to the door, join me in front of the hotel +and busy yourself in packing my trunks on the baggage mules. When you +have done that, mount the second horse and ride after me; the people +who will go with us with the horses will naturally suppose that you +have landed with me. Should any of our shipmates here see us start, it +is not likely that they will recognize you. If they do so, I need +simply say that as you had shown me such kindness on board ship I had +resolved to take you with me to Madrid in order to see if anything +could be done to restore you to reason. However, it is better that you +should keep in the background as much as possible. I will arrange to +start at so early an hour in the morning that none of those who may +land with me from the ship, and may put up at the same inn, are likely +to be about." + +The next morning the vessel entered port. They were soon surrounded by +boats full of people inquiring anxiously for news of other ships, and +for friends and acquaintances on board. Presently large boats were sent +off by the authorities, and the disembarkation of the sick and the +helpless began. + +This indeed included the greater portion of the survivors, for there +were but two or three score on board who were capable of dragging +themselves about, the rest being completely prostrate by disease, +exhaustion, hunger, and thirst. Geoffrey was about to descend into one +of the boats, when the officer in command said roughly: "Remain on +board and do your work, there is no need for your going into the +hospital." One of the ship's officers, however, explained that the lad +had altogether lost his senses, and was unable either to understand +when spoken to or to reply to questions. Consequently he was permitted +to take his place in the boat. + +As soon as he stepped ashore he wandered away among the crowd of +spectators. A woman, observing his wan face and feeble walk, called him +into her house, and set food and wine before him. He made a hearty +meal, but only shook his head when she addressed him, and laughed +childishly and muttered his thanks in Spanish when she bestowed a +dollar upon him as he left. He watched at the port while boat-load +after boat-load of sick came ashore, until at last one containing the +surviving officers and gentlemen with their baggage reached the land. +Then he kept Gerald Burke in sight until he entered an inn, followed by +two men carrying his baggage. Several times during the day food and +money were offered him, the inhabitants being full of horror and pity +at the sight of the famishing survivors of the crew of the galleon. + +At nine o'clock in the evening Geoffrey took up his station near the +door of the inn. A few minutes later Gerald Burke came out with a +bundle. "Here are the clothes," he said. "I have hired horses for our +journey to Madrid. They will be at the door at six o'clock in the +morning. I have arranged to travel by very short stages, for at first +neither you nor I could sit very long upon a horse; however, I hope we +shall soon gain strength as we go." + +Taking the bundle, Geoffrey walked a short distance from the town and +lay down upon the ground under some trees. The night was a warm one, +and after the bitter cold they had suffered during the greater part of +the voyage, it felt almost sultry to him. At daybreak in the morning he +rose, put on the suit of clothes Gerald Burke had provided, washed his +face in a little stream, and proceeded to the inn. He arrived there +just as the clocks were striking six. A few minutes later two men with +two horses and four mules came up to the door, and shortly afterwards +Gerald Burke came out. Geoffrey at once joined him; the servants of the +inn brought out the baggage, which was fastened by the muleteers on to +two of the animals. Gerald Burke mounted one of the horses and Geoffrey +the other, and at once rode on, the muleteers mounting the other two +mules and following with those carrying the baggage. + +"That was well managed," Gerald Burke said as they rode out of the +town. "The muleteers can have no idea that you have but just joined me, +and there is little chance of any of my comrades on board ship +overtaking us, as all intend to stop for a few days to recruit +themselves before going on. If they did they would not be likely to +recognize you in your present attire, or to suspect that my Irish +servant is the crazy boy of the ship." + +After riding at an easy pace for two hours, they halted under the shade +of some trees. Fruit, bread, and wine were produced from a wallet on +one of the mules, and they sat down and breakfasted. After a halt of an +hour they rode on until noon, when they again halted until four in the +afternoon, for the sun was extremely hot, and both Gerald Burke and +Geoffrey were so weak they scarce could sit their horses. Two hours +further riding took them to a large village, where they put up at the +inn. Geoffrey now fell into his place as Mr. Burke's servant--saw to +the baggage being taken inside, and began for the first time to try his +tongue at Spanish. He got on better than he had expected; and as Mr. +Burke spoke with a good deal of foreign accent, it did not seem in any +way singular to the people of the inn that his servant should speak but +little of the language. + +Quietly they journeyed on, doing but short distances for the first +three or four days, but as they gained strength pushing on faster, and +by the time they reached Madrid both were completely recovered from the +effects of their voyage. Madrid was in mourning, for there was scarce a +family but had lost relations in the Armada. Mr. Burke at once took +lodgings and installed Geoffrey as his servant. He had many friends and +acquaintances in the city, where he had been residing for upwards of a +year previous to the sailing of the Armada. + +For some weeks Geoffrey went out but little, spending his time in +reading Spanish books and mastering the language as much as possible. +He always conversed in that language with Mr. Burke, and at the end of +six weeks was able to talk Spanish with some fluency. He now generally +accompanied Mr. Burke if he went out, following him in the streets and +standing behind his chair when he dined abroad. He was much amused at +all he saw, making many acquaintances among the lackeys of Mr. Burke's +friends, dining with them downstairs after the banquets were over, and +often meeting them of an evening when he had nothing to do, and going +with them to places of entertainment. + +In this way his knowledge of Spanish improved rapidly, and although he +still spoke with an accent he could pass well as one who had been for +some years in the country. He was now perfectly at ease with the +Spanish gentlemen of Mr. Burke's acquaintance. It was only when Irish +and Scotch friends called upon his master that he feared awkward +questions, and upon these occasions he showed himself as little as +possible. + +When alone with Gerald Burke the latter always addressed Geoffrey as a +friend rather than as a servant, and made no secret with him as to his +position and means. He had been concerned in a rising in Ireland, and +had fled the country, bringing with him a fair amount of resources. +Believing that the Armada was certain to be crowned with success, and +that he should ere long be restored to his estates in Ireland, he had, +upon his first coming to Spain, spent his money freely. His outfit for +the expedition had made a large inroad upon his store, and his +resources were now nearly at an end. + +"What is one to do, Geoffrey? I don't want to take a commission in +Philip's army, though my friends could obtain one for me at once; but I +have no desire to spend the rest of my life in the Netherlands storming +the towns of the Dutch burghers." + +"Or rather trying to storm them," Geoffrey said, smiling; "there have +not been many towns taken of late years." + +"Nor should I greatly prefer to be campaigning in France," Gerald went +on, paying no attention to the interruption. "I have no love either for +Dutch Calvinists or French Huguenots; but I have no desire either to be +cutting their throats or for them to be cutting mine. I should like a +snug berth under the crown here or at Cadiz, or at Seville; but I see +no chance whatever of my obtaining one. I cannot take up the trade of a +footpad, though disbanded soldiers turned robbers are common enough in +Spain. What is to be done?" + +"If I am not mistaken," Geoffrey said with a smile, "your mind is +already made up. It is not quite by accident that you are in the +gardens of the Retiro every evening, and that a few words are always +exchanged with a certain young lady as she passes with her duenna." + +"Oh! you have observed that," Gerald Burke replied with a laugh. "Your +eyes are sharper than I gave you credit for, Master Geoffrey. Yes, that +would set me on my legs without doubt, for Donna Inez is the only +daughter and heiress of the Marquis of Ribaldo; but you see there is a +father in the case, and if that father had the slightest idea that +plain Gerald Burke was lifting his eyes to his daughter it would not be +many hours before Gerald Burke had several inches of steel in his +body." + +"That I can imagine," Geoffrey said, "since it is, as I learn from my +acquaintances among the lackeys, a matter of common talk that the +marquis intends to marry her to the son of the Duke of Sottomayor." + +"Inez hates him," Gerald Burke said. "It is just like my ill-luck, that +instead of being drowned as most of the others were, he has had the +luck to get safely back again. However, he is still ill, and likely to +be so for some time. He was not so accustomed to starving as some of +us, and he suffered accordingly. He is down at his estates near +Seville." + +"But what do you think of doing?" Geoffrey asked. + +"That is just what I am asking you." + +"It seems to me, certainly," Geoffrey went on, "that unless you really +mean to run off with the young lady--for I suppose there is no chance +in the world of your marrying her in any other way--it will be better +both for you and her that you should avoid for the future these +meetings in the gardens or elsewhere, and cast your thoughts in some +other direction for the bettering of your fortunes." + +"That is most sage advice, Geoffrey," the young Irishman laughed, "and +worthy of my father-confessor; but it is not so easy to follow. In the +first place, I must tell you that I do not regard Inez as in any way a +step to fortune, but rather as a step towards a dungeon. It would be +vastly better for us both if she were the daughter of some poor hidalgo +like myself. I could settle down then with her, and plant vines and +make wine, and sell what I don't drink myself. As it is, I have the +chance of being put out of the way if it is discovered that Inez and I +are fond of each other; and in the next place, if we do marry I shall +have to get her safely out of the kingdom, or else she will have to +pass the rest of her life in a convent, and I the rest of mine in a +prison or in the galleys; that is if I am not killed as soon as caught, +which is by far the most likely result. Obnoxious sons-in-law do not +live long in Spain. So you see, Geoffrey, the prospect is a bad one +altogether; and if it were not that I dearly love Inez, and that I am +sure she will be unhappy with Philip of Sottomayor, I would give the +whole thing up, and make love to the daughter of some comfortable +citizen who would give me a corner of his house and a seat at his table +for the rest of my days." + +"But, seriously--" Geoffrey began. + +"Well, seriously, Geoffrey, my intention is to run away with Inez if it +can be managed; but how it is to be managed at present I have not the +faintest idea. To begin with, the daughter of a Spanish grandee is +always kept in a very strong cage closely guarded, and it needs a very +large golden key to open it. Now, as you are aware, gold is a very +scarce commodity with me. Then, after getting her out, a lavish +expenditure would be needed for our flight. We should have to make our +way to the sea-coast, to do all sorts of things to throw dust into the +eyes of our pursuers, and to get a passage to some place beyond the +domains of Philip, which means either to France, England, or the +Netherlands. Beyond all this will be the question of future subsistence +until, if ever, the marquis makes up his mind to forgive his daughter +and take her to his heart again, a contingency, in my opinion, likely +to be extremely remote." + +"And what does the Lady Inez say to it all?" Geoffrey asked. + +"The Lady Inez has had small opportunity of saying anything on the +subject, Geoffrey. Here in Spain there are mighty few opportunities for +courtship. With us at home these matters are easy enough, and there is +no lack of opportunity for pleading your suit and winning a girl's +heart if it is to be won; but here in Spain matters are altogether +different, and an unmarried girl is looked after as sharply as if she +was certain to get into some mischief or other the instant she had an +opportunity. She is never suffered to be for a moment alone with a man; +out of doors or in she has always a duenna by her side; and as to a +private chat, the thing is simply impossible." + +"Then how do you manage to make love?" Geoffrey asked. + +"Well, a very little goes a long way in Spain. The manner of a bow, the +wave of a fan, the dropping of a glove or flower, the touch of a hand +in a crowded room-each of these things go as far as a month's open +love-making in Ireland." + +"Then how did you manage with the duenna so as to be able to speak to +her in the gardens'!" + +"Well, in the first place, I made myself very attentive to the duenna; +in the second place, the old lady is devout, and you know Ireland is +the land of saints, and I presented her with an amulet containing a +paring of the nail of St. Patrick." + +Geoffrey burst into a laugh, in which the Irishman joined. + +"Well, if it was not really St. Patrick's," the latter went on, "it +came from Ireland anyhow, which is the next best thing. Then in the +third place, the old lady is very fond of Inez; and although she is as +strict as a dragon, Inez coaxed her into the belief that there could +not be any harm in our exchanging a few words when she was close by all +the time to hear what was said. Now, I think you know as much as I do +about the matter, Geoffrey. You will understand that a few notes have +been exchanged, and that Inez loves me. Beyond that everything is vague +and uncertain, and I have not the slightest idea what will come of it." + +Some weeks passed and nothing was done. The meetings between Gerald +Burke and Inez in the Gardens of the Retiro had ceased a day or two +afterwards, the duenna having positively refused to allow them to +continue, threatening Inez to inform her father of them unless she gave +them up. + +Gerald Burke's funds dwindled rapidly, although he and Geoffrey lived +in the very closest way. + +"What in the world is to be done, Geoffrey? I have only got twenty +dollars left, which at the outside will pay for our lodgings and food +for another month. For the life of me I cannot see what is to be done +when that is gone, unless we take to the road." + +Geoffrey shook his head. "As far as I am concerned," he said, "as we +are at war with Spain, it would be fair if I met a Spanish ship at sea +to capture and plunder it, but I am afraid the laws of war do not +justify private plunder. I should be perfectly ready to go out and take +service in a vineyard, or to earn my living in any way if it could be +managed." + +"I would rob a cardinal if I had the chance," Gerald Burke said, "and +if I ever got rich would restore his money four-fold and so obtain +absolution; only, unfortunately, I do not see my way to robbing a +cardinal. As to digging in the fields, Geoffrey, I would rather hang +myself at once. I am constitutionally averse to labour, and if one once +took to that sort of thing there would be an end to everything." + +"It is still open to you," Geoffrey said, "to get your friends to +obtain a commission for you." + +"I could do that," Gerald said moodily, "but of all things that is what +I should most hate." + +"You might make your peace with the English government and get some of +your estates back again." + +"That I will not do to feed myself," Gerald Burke said firmly. "I have +thought that if I ever carry off Inez I might for her sake do so, for I +own that now all hope of help from Spain is at an end, our cause in +Ireland is lost, and it is no use going on struggling against the +inevitable; but I am not going to sue the English government as a +beggar for myself. No doubt I could borrow small sums from Irishmen and +Scotchmen here, and hold on for a few months; but most of them are +well-nigh as poor as I am myself, and I would not ask them. Besides, +there would be no chance of my repaying them; and, if I am to rob +anyone, I would rather plunder these rich dons than my own countrymen." + +"Of one thing I am resolved," Geoffrey said, "I will not live at your +expense any longer, Gerald. I can speak Spanish very fairly now, and +can either take service in some Spanish family or, as I said, get work +in the field." + +Gerald laughed. "My dear Geoffrey, the extra expenses caused by you +last week were, as far as I can calculate, one penny for bread and as +much for fruit; the rest of your living was obtained at the expense of +my friends." + +"At any rate," Geoffrey said smiling, "I insist that my money be now +thrown into the common fund. I have offered it several times before, +but you always said we had best keep it for emergency. I think the +emergency has come now, and these ten English pounds in my belt will +enable us to take some step or other. The question is, what step? They +might last us, living as we do, for some three or four months, but at +the end of that time we should be absolutely penniless; therefore now +is the time, while we have still a small stock in hand, to decide upon +something." + +"But what are we to decide upon?" Gerald Burke asked helplessly. + +"I have been thinking it over a great deal," Geoffrey said, "and my +idea is that we had best go to Cadiz or some other large port. Although +Spain is at war both with England and the Netherlands, trade still goes +on in private ships, and both Dutch and English vessels carry on +commerce with Spain; therefore it seems to me that there must be +merchants in Cadiz who would be ready to give employment to men capable +of speaking and writing both in Spanish and English, and in my case to +a certain extent in Dutch. From there, too, there might be a chance of +getting a passage to England or Holland. If we found that impossible +owing to the vessels being too carefully searched before sailing, we +might at the worst take passage as sailors on board a Spanish ship +bound for the Indies, and take our chance of escape or capture there or +on the voyage. That, at least, is what I planned for myself." + +"I think your idea is a good one, Geoffrey. At any rate to Cadiz we +will go. I don't know about the mercantile business or going as a +sailor, but I could get a commission from the governor there as well as +here in Madrid; but at any rate I will go. Donna Inez was taken last +week by her father to some estates he has somewhere between Seville and +Cadiz, in order, I suppose, that he may be nearer Don Philip, who is, I +hear, at last recovering from his long illness. I do not know that +there is the slightest use in seeing her again, but I will do so if it +be possible; and if by a miracle I could succeed in carrying her off, +Cadiz would be a more likely place to escape from than anywhere. + +"Yes, I know. You think the idea is a mad one, but you have never been +in love yet. When you are you will know that lovers do not believe in +the word 'impossible.' At any rate, I mean to give Inez the chance of +determining her own fate. If she is ready to risk everything rather +than marry Don Philip, I am ready to share the risk whatever it may +be." + +Accordingly on the following day Gerald Burke disposed of the greater +part of his wardrobe and belongings, purchased two ponies for a few +crowns, and he and Geoffrey, with a solitary suit of clothes in a +wallet fastened behind the saddle, started for their journey to Cadiz. +They mounted outside the city, for Gerald shrank from meeting any +acquaintances upon such a sorry steed as he had purchased; but once on +their way his spirits rose. He laughed and chatted gaily, and spoke of +the future as if all difficulties were cleared away. The ponies, +although rough animals, were strong and sturdy, and carried their +riders at a good pace. Sometimes they travelled alone, sometimes jogged +along with parties whom they overtook by the way, or who had slept in +the same posadas or inns at which they had put up for the night. + +Most of these inns were very rough, and, to Geoffrey, astonishingly +dirty. The food consisted generally of bread and a miscellaneous olio +or stew from a great pot constantly simmering over the fire, the +flavour, whatever it might be, being entirely overpowered by that of +the oil and garlic that were the most marked of its constituents. Beds +were wholly unknown at these places, the guests simply wrapping +themselves in their cloaks and lying down on the floor, although in a +few exceptional cases bundles of rushes were strewn about to form a +common bed. + +But the travelling was delightful. It was now late in the autumn, and +when they were once past the dreary district of La Mancha, and had +descended to the rich plains of Cordova, the vintage was in full +progress and the harvest everywhere being garnered in. Their mid-day +meal consisted of bread and fruit, costing but the smallest coin, and +eaten by the wayside in the shade of a clump of trees. They heard many +tales on their way down of the bands of robbers who infested the road, +but having taken the precaution of having the doubloons for which they +had exchanged Geoffrey's English gold sewn up in their boots, they had +no fear of encountering these gentry, having nothing to lose save their +wallets and the few dollars they had kept out for the expenses of their +journey. The few jewels that Gerald Burke retained were sewn up in the +stuffing of his saddle. + +After ten days' travel they reached Seville, where they stayed a couple +of days, and where the wealth and splendour of the buildings surprised +Geoffrey, who had not visited Antwerp or any of the great commercial +centres of the Netherlands. + +"It is a strange taste of the Spanish kings," he observed to Gerald +Burke, "to plant their capital at Madrid in the centre of a barren +country, when they might make such a splendid city as this their +capital. I could see no charms whatever in Madrid. The climate was +detestable, with its hot sun and bitter cold winds. Here the +temperature is delightful; the air is soft and balmy, the country round +is a garden, and there is a cathedral worthy of a capital." + +"It seems a strange taste," Gerald agreed; "but I believe that when +Madrid was first planted it stood in the midst of extensive forests, +and that it was merely a hunting residence for the king." + +"Then, when the forests went I would have gone too," Geoffrey said. +"Madrid has not even a river worthy of the name, and has no single +point to recommend it, as far as I can see, for the capital of a great +empire. If I were a Spaniard I should certainly take up my residence in +Seville." + +Upon the following morning they again started, joining, before they had +ridden many miles, a party of three merchants travelling with their +servants to Cadiz. The merchants looked a little suspiciously at first +at the two young men upon their rough steeds; but as soon as they +discovered from their first salutations that they were foreigners, they +became more cordial, and welcomed this accession of strength to their +party, for the carrying of weapons was universal, and the portion of +the road between Seville and Cadiz particularly unsafe, as it was +traversed by so many merchants and wealthy people. The conversation +speedily turned to the disturbed state of the roads. + +"I do not think," one of the merchants said, "that any ordinary band of +robbers would dare attack us," and he looked round with satisfaction at +the six armed servants who rode behind them. + +"It all depends," Gerald Burke said, with a sly wink at Geoffrey, "upon +what value the robbers may place upon the valour of your servants. As a +rule serving-men are very chary of their skins, and I should imagine +that the robbers must be pretty well aware of that fact. Most of them +are disbanded soldiers or deserters, and I should say that four of them +are more than a match for your six servants. I would wager that your +men would make but a very poor show of it if it came to fighting." + +"But there are our three selves and you two gentlemen," the merchant +said in a tone of disquiet. + +"Well," Gerald rejoined, "I own that from your appearance I should not +think, worshipful sir, that fighting was altogether in your line. Now, +my servant, young as he is, has taken part in much fighting in the +Netherlands, and I myself have had some experience with my sword; but +if we were attacked by robbers we should naturally stand neutral. +Having nothing to defend, and having no inclination whatever to get our +throats cut in protecting the property of others, I think that you will +see for yourselves that that is reasonable. We are soldiers of fortune, +ready to venture our lives in a good service, and for good pay, but +mightily disinclined to throw them away for the mere love of fighting." + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +RECRUITING THEIR FUNDS. + + +As soon as Gerald Burke began conversing with the merchants, Geoffrey +fell back and took his place among their servants, with whom he at once +entered into conversation. To amuse himself he continued in the same +strain that he had heard Gerald adopt towards the merchants, and spoke +in terms of apprehension of the dangers of the journey, and of the +rough treatment that had befallen those who had ventured to offer +opposition to the robbers. He was not long in discovering, by the +anxious glances they cast round them, and by the manner of their +questions, that some at least of the party were not to be relied upon +in case of an encounter. + +He was rather surprised at Gerald remaining so long in company with the +merchants, for their pace was a slow one, as they were followed by +eight heavily-laden mules, driven by two muleteers, and it would have +been much pleasanter, he thought, to have trotted on at their usual +pace. About midday, as they were passing along the edge of a thick +wood, a party of men suddenly sprang out and ordered them to halt. +Geoffrey shouted to the men with him to come on, and drawing his sword +dashed forward. + +Two of the men only followed him. The others hesitated, until a shot +from a musket knocked off one of their hats, whereupon the man and his +comrades turned their horses' heads and rode off at full speed. The +merchants had drawn their swords, and stood on the defensive, and +Geoffrey on reaching them was surprised to find that Gerald Burke was +sitting quietly on his horse without any apparent intention of taking +part in the fight. + +"Put up your sword, Geoffrey," he said calmly; "this affair is no +business of ours. We have nothing to lose, and it is no business of +ours to defend the money-bags of these gentlemen." + +The robbers, eight in number, now rushed up. One of the merchants, +glancing round, saw that two of their men only had come up to their +assistance. The muleteers, who were probably in league with the +robbers, had fled, leaving their animals standing in the road. The +prospect seemed desperate. One of the merchants was an elderly man, the +others were well on middle age. The mules were laden with valuable +goods, and they had with them a considerable sum of money for making +purchases at Cadiz. It was no time for hesitation. + +"We will give you five hundred crowns if you will both aid us to beat +off these robbers." + +"It is a bargain," Gerald replied. "Now, Geoffrey, have at these +fellows!" + +Leaping from their ponies they ranged themselves by the merchants just +as the robbers attacked them. Had it not been for their aid the combat +would have been a short one; for although determined to defend their +property to the last, the traders had neither strength nor skill at +arms. One was unhorsed at the first blow, and another wounded; but the +two servants, who had also dismounted, fought sturdily, and Gerald and +Geoffrey each disposed of a man before the robbers, who had not +reckoned upon their interference, were prepared to resist their attack. +The fight did not last many minutes. The traders did their best, and +although by no means formidable opponents, distracted the attention of +the robbers, who were startled by the fall of two of their party. +Geoffrey received a sharp cut on the head, but at the same moment ran +his opponent through the body, while Gerald Burke cut down the man +opposed to him. The other four robbers, seeing they were now +outnumbered, at once took to their heels. + +"By St. Jago!" one of the traders said, "you are stout fighters, young +men, and have won your fee well. Methought we should have lost our +lives as well as our goods, and I doubt not we should have done so had +you not ranged yourselves with us. Now, let us bandage up our wounds, +for we have all received more or less hurt." + +When the wounds, some of which were serious, were attended to, the +fallen robbers were examined. Three of them were dead; but the man last +cut down by Gerald Burke seemed likely to recover. + +"Shall we hang him upon a tree as a warning to these knaves, or shall +we take him with us to the next town and give him in charge of the +authorities there?" one of the traders asked. + +"If I were you I would do neither," Gerald said, "but would let him go +free if he will tell you the truth about this attack. It will be just +as well for you to get to the bottom of this affair, and find out +whether it is a chance meeting, or whether any of your own people have +been in league with him." + +"That is a good idea," the trader agreed, "and I will carry it out," +and going up to the man, who had now recovered his senses, he said to +him sternly: "We have made up our minds to hang you; but you may save +your life if you will tell us how you came to set upon us. Speak the +truth and you shall go free, otherwise we will finish with you without +delay." + +The robber, seeing an unexpected chance of escape from punishment, at +once said that the captain of their band, who was the man Geoffrey had +last run through, came out from Seville the evening before, and told +him that one Juan Campos, with whom he had long had intimate relations, +and who was clerk to a rich trader, had, upon promise that he should +receive one-fifth of the booty taken, informed him that his master with +two other merchants was starting on the following morning for Cadiz +with a very valuable lot of goods, and twenty-five thousand crowns, +which they intended to lay out in the purchase of goods brought by some +galleons that had just arrived from the Indies. He had arranged to +bribe his master's two servants to ride away when they attacked the +gang, and also to settle with the muleteers so that they should take no +part in the affair. They had reckoned that the flight of two of the +servants would probably affect the others, and had therefore expected +the rich booty to fall into their hands without the trouble of striking +a blow for it. + +"It is well we followed your suggestion," one of the traders said to +Gerald. "I had no suspicion of the honesty of my clerk, and had we not +made this discovery he would doubtless have played me a similar trick +upon some other occasion. I will ride back at once, friends, for if he +hears of the failure of the attack he may take the alarm and make off +with all he can lay his hands upon. Our venture was to be in common. I +will leave it to you to carry it out, and return and dismiss Campos and +the two rascally servants." The three traders went apart and consulted +together. Presently the eldest of the party returned to the young men. + +"We have another five days' journey before us," he said, "and but two +servants upon whom we can place any reliance. We have evidence of the +unsafety of the roads, and, as you have heard, we have a large sum of +money with us. You have already more than earned the reward I offered +you, and my friends have agreed with me that if you will continue to +journey with us as far as Cadiz, and to give us the aid of your valour +should we be again attacked, we will make the five hundred crowns a +thousand. It is a large sum, but we have well-nigh all our fortunes at +stake, and we feel that we owe you our lives as well as the saving of +our money." + +"We could desire nothing better," Gerald replied, "and will answer with +our lives that your goods and money shall arrive safely at Cadiz." + +The traders then called up their two serving-men, and told them that on +their arrival at Cadiz they would present them each with a hundred +crowns for having so stoutly done their duty. The employer of the +treacherous clerk then turned his horse's head and rode back towards +Seville, while the others prepared to proceed on their way. The two +muleteers had now come out from among the bushes, and were busy +refastening the bales on the mules, the ropes having become loosened in +the struggles of the animals while the fight was going on. The +merchants had decided to say nothing to the men as to the discovery +that they were in league with the robbers. + +"Half these fellows are in alliance with these bands, which are a +scourge to the country," one of the traders said. "If we were to inform +the authorities at the next town, we should, in the first place, be +blamed for letting the wounded man escape, and secondly we might be +detained for days while investigations are going on. In this country +the next worse thing to being a prisoner is to be a complainant. Law is +a luxury in which the wealthy and idle can alone afford to indulge." + +As soon, therefore, as the baggage was readjusted the party proceeded +on their way. + +"What do you think of that, Geoffrey?" Gerald Burke asked as he rode +for a short distance by the side of his supposed servant. + +"It is magnificent," Geoffrey replied; "and it seems to me that the +real road to wealth in Spain is to hire yourself out as a guard to +travellers." + +"Ah, you would not get much if you made your bargain beforehand. It is +only at a moment of urgent danger that fear will open purse-strings +widely. Had we bargained beforehand with these traders we might have +thought ourselves lucky if we had got ten crowns apiece as the price of +our escort to Cadiz, and indeed we should have been only too glad if +last night such an offer had been made to us; but when a man sees that +his property and life are really in danger he does not stop to haggle, +but is content to give a handsome percentage of what is risked for aid +to save the rest." + +"Well, thank goodness, our money trouble is at an end," Geoffrey said; +"and it will be a long time before we need have any anxiety on that +score." + +"Things certainly look better," Gerald said laughing; "and if Inez +consents to make a runaway match of it with me I sha'n't have to ask +her to pay the expenses." + +Cadiz was reached without further adventure. The merchants kept their +agreement honourably, and handed over a heavy bag containing a thousand +crowns to Gerald on their arrival at that city. They had upon the road +inquired of him the nature of his business there. He had told them that +he was at present undecided whether to enter the army, in which some +friends of his had offered to obtain him a commission, or to join in an +adventure to the Indies. They had told him they were acquainted with +several merchants at Cadiz who traded both with the east and west, and +that they would introduce him to them as a gentleman of spirit and +courage, whom they might employ with advantage upon such ventures; and +this promise after their arrival there they carried out. + +"Now, Geoffrey," Gerald said as they sat together that evening at a +comfortable inn, "we must talk over matters here. We have five hundred +crowns apiece, and need not trouble any longer as to how we are to +support life. Your great object, of course, is to get out of this +country somehow, and to make your way back to England. My first is to +see Inez and find out whether she will follow my fortunes or remain to +become some day Marchesa of Sottomayor. If she adopts the former +alternative I have to arrange some plan to carry her off and to get out +of the country, an operation in which I foresee no little difficulty. +Of course if we are caught my life is forfeited, there is no question +about that. The question for us to consider is how we are to set about +to carry out our respective plans." + +"We need only consider your plan as far as I can see," Geoffrey said. +"Of course I shall do what I can to assist you, and if you manage to +get off safely with the young lady I shall escape at the same time." + +"Not at all," Burke said; "you have only to wait here quietly until you +see an opportunity. I will go with you to-morrow to the merchants I was +introduced to to-day, and say that I am going away for a time and shall +be obliged if they will make you useful in any way until I return. In +that way you will have a sort of established position here, and can +wait until you see a chance of smuggling yourself on board some English +or Dutch vessel. Mine is a very different affair. I may talk lightly of +it, but I am perfectly aware that I run a tremendous risk, and that the +chances are very strongly against me." + +"Whatever the chances are," Geoffrey said quietly, "I shall share them +with you. Your kindness has saved me from what at best might have been +imprisonment for life, and not improbably would have been torture and +death at the hands of the Inquisition, and I am certainly not going to +withdraw myself from you now when you are entering upon what is +undoubtedly a very dangerous adventure. If we escape from Spain we +escape together; if not, whatever fate befalls you I am ready to risk." + +"Very well; so be it, Geoffrey," Gerald Burke said, holding out his +hand to him. "If your mind is made up I will not argue the question +with you, and indeed I value your companionship and aid too highly to +try to shake your determination. Let us then at once talk over what is +now our joint enterprise. Ribaldo estate lies about half-way between +this and Seville, and we passed within a few miles of it as we came +hither. The first thing, of course, will be to procure some sort of +disguise in which I can see Inez and have a talk with her. Now, it +seems to me, for I have been thinking the matter over in every way as +we rode, that the only disguise in which this would be possible would +be that of a priest or monk." + +Geoffrey laughed aloud. "You would in the first place have to shave off +your moustachios, Gerald, and I fear that even after you had done so +there would be nothing venerable in your appearance; and whatever the +mission with which you might pretend to charge yourself, your chances +of obtaining a private interview with the lady would be slight." + +"I am afraid that I should lack the odour of sanctity, Geoffrey; but +what else can one do? Think it over, man. The way in which you played +the idiot when you were picked out of the water shows that you are +quick at contriving a plan." + +"That was a simple business in comparison to this," Geoffrey replied. +"However, you are not pressed for time, and I will think it over to- +night and may light upon some possible scheme, for I own that at +present I have not the least idea how the matter is to be managed." + +As in the morning there were several other travellers taking breakfast +in the same room, the conversation was not renewed until Gerald Burke +strolled out, followed at a respectful distance by Geoffrey, who still +passed as his servant, and reached a quiet spot on the ramparts. Here +Geoffrey joined him, and they stood for some minutes looking over the +sea. + +"What a magnificent position for a city!" Geoffrey said at last. +"Standing on this rocky tongue of land jutting out at the entrance to +this splendid bay it ought to be impregnable, since it can only be +attacked on the side facing that sandy isthmus. What a number of ships +are lying up the bay, and what a busy scene it is with the boats +passing and repassing! Though they must be two miles away I fancy I can +hear the shouts of the sailors." + +"Yes, it is all very fine," Gerald said; "but I have seen it several +times before. Still, I can make allowances for you. Do you see that +group of small ships a mile beyond the others? Those are the English +and Dutchmen. They are allowed to trade, but as you see they are kept +apart, and there are three war galleys lying close to them. No one is +allowed to land, and every boat going off is strictly examined, and all +those who go on board have to show their permits from the governor to +trade; so, you see, the chance of getting on board one of them is +slight indeed. Higher up the bay lies Puerto de Santa Maria, where a +great trade is carried on, and much wine shipped; though more comes +from Jeres, which lies up the river. You know we passed through it on +our way here. + +"Yes, this is a splendid position for trade, and I suppose the commerce +carried on here is larger than in any port in Europe; though Antwerp +ranked as first until the troubles began in the Netherlands. But this +ought to be first. It has all the trade of the Atlantic sea-board, and +standing at the mouth of the Mediterranean commands that also; while +all the wealth of the New World pours in here. That is great already; +there is no saying what it will be in the future, while some day the +trade from the far East should flow in here also by vessels trading +round the south of Africa. + +"Cadiz has but one fault: the space on which it stands is too small for +a great city. You see how close the houses stand together, and how +narrow are the streets. It cannot spread without extending beyond the +rock over the sands, and then its strength would be gone, and it would +be open to capture by an enterprising enemy having command of the sea. +There now, having indulged your humour, let us return to more important +matters. Have you thought over what we were talking about last night?" + +"I have certainly thought it over," Geoffrey said; "but I do not know +that thinking has resulted in much. The only plan that occurs to me as +being at all possible is this. You were talking in joke at Madrid of +turning robber. Would it be possible, think you, to get together a +small band of men to aid you in carrying off the young lady, either +from the grounds of her father's house or while journeying on the road? +You could then have your talk with her. If you find her willing to fly +with you, you could leave the men you have engaged and journey across +the country in some sort of disguise to a port. If she objected, you +could conduct her back to the neighbourhood of the house and allow her +to return. There is one difficulty: you must, of course, be prepared +with a priest, so that you can be married at once if she consents to +accompany you." + +Gerald Burke was silent for some time. "The scheme seems a possible +one," he said at last; "it is the question of the priest that bothers +me. You know, both in Seville and Cadiz there are Irish colleges, and +at both places there are several priests whom I knew before they +entered the Church, and who would, I am sure, perform the service for +me on any ordinary occasion; but it is a different thing asking them to +take a share in such a business as this, for they would render +themselves liable to all sorts of penalties and punishments from their +superiors. However, the difficulty must be got over somehow, and at any +rate the plan seems to promise better than anything I had thought of. +The first difficulty is how to get the ruffians for such a business. I +cannot go up to the first beetle-browed knave I meet in the street and +say to him, Are you disposed to aid me in the abduction of a lady?" + +"No," Geoffrey laughed; "but fortunately you have an intermediary ready +at hand." + +"How so?" Gerald exclaimed in surprise. "Why, how on earth can you have +an acquaintance with any ruffians in Cadiz?" + +"Not a very intimate acquaintance, Gerald; but if you take the trouble +to go into the court-yard of the inn when we get back you will see one +of those rascally muleteers who were in league with the robbers who +attacked us on the way. He was in conversation when we came out with a +man who breakfasted with us, and was probably bargaining for a load for +his mules back to Seville. I have no doubt that through him you might +put yourself into communication with half the cutthroats of the town." + +"That is a capital idea, Geoffrey, and I will have a talk with the man +as soon as we get back; for if he is not still there, I am sure to be +able to learn from some of the men about the stables where to find +him." + +"You must go very carefully to work, Gerald," Geoffrey said. "It would +never do to let any of the fellows know the exact object for which you +engaged them, for they might be sure of getting a far larger sum from +the marquis for divulging your plans to carry off his daughter than you +could afford to pay them for their services." + +"I quite see that, and will be careful." + +On their return to the inn Gerald Burke at once made inquiries as to +the muleteer, and learned that he would probably return in an hour to +see if a bargain could be made with a trader for the hire of his mules +back to Seville. + +Gerald waited about until the man came. "I want to have a talk with +you, my friend," he said. + +The muleteer looked at him with a suspicious eye. "I am busy," he said +in a surly tone; "I have no time to waste." + +"But it would not be wasting it if it were to lead to your putting a +dozen crowns in your pocket." + +"Oh, if it is to lead to that, seņor, I can spare an hour, for I don't +think that anything is likely to come out of the job I came here to try +to arrange." + +"We will walk away to a quieter place," Gerald said. "There are too +many people about here for us to talk comfortably. The ramparts are but +two or three minutes' walk; we can talk there without interruption." + +When they arrived upon the ramparts Gerald commenced the conversation. +"I think you were foolish, my friend, not to have taken us into your +confidence the other day before that little affair. You could have made +an opportunity well enough. We stopped to luncheon; if you had drawn me +aside, and told me frankly that some friends of yours were about to +make an attack upon the traders, and that you would guarantee that they +would make it worth my while-" + +"What do you mean by saying my friends, or that I had any knowledge of +the affair beforehand?" the man asked furiously. + +"I say so," Gerald replied, "because I had it on excellent authority. +The wounded robber made a clean breast of the whole affair, and of your +share in it, as well as that of the rascally clerk of one of the +traders. If it had not been for me the merchants would have handed you +over to the magistrates at the place where we stopped that night; but I +dissuaded them, upon the ground that they would have to attend as +witnesses against you, and that it was not worth their while to lose +valuable time merely for the pleasure of seeing you hung. However, all +this is beside the question. What I was saying was, it is a pity you +did not say to me frankly: Your presence here is inopportune; but if +you will stand apart if any unexpected affair takes place, you will get +say two thousand crowns out of the twenty-five thousand my friends are +going to capture. Had you done that, you see, things might have turned +out differently." + +"I did not know," the muleteer stammered. + +"No, you did not know for certain, of course, that I was a soldier of +fortune; but if you had been sharp you might have guessed it. However, +it is too late for that now. Now, what I wanted to ask you was if you +could get me half a dozen of your friends to take service under me in a +little adventure I have to carry out. They will be well paid, and I do +not suppose they will have much trouble over it." + +"And what would you pay me, cabbalero?" the muleteer asked humbly; for +he had been greatly impressed with the valour displayed by the young +Irishman and his servant in the fray, and thought that he intended to +get together a company for adventures on the road, in which case he +might be able to have some profitable dealings with him in the future. + +"I will give you twenty crowns," Gerald replied; "and considering that +you owe your life to my interposition, I think that you ought not to +haggle about terms." + +"The party who attacked us," the muleteer said, "lost their captain and +several of their comrades in that fray, and would I doubt not gladly +enter into your service, seeing that they have received such proof of +your worship's valour." + +"Where could I see them?" Gerald asked. + +"I think that they will be now in Jeres, if that would suit you, seņor; +but if not I could doubtless find a party of men in this town equally +ready for your business." + +"Jeres will do very well for me," Gerald said; "I shall be travelling +that way and will put up at the Fonda where we stopped as we came +through. When are you starting?" + +"It depends whether I make my bargain with a man at your hotel," the +muleteer replied; "and this I doubt not I shall do, for with the twenty +crowns your honour is going to give me I shall not stand out for terms. +He is travelling with clothes from Flanders, and if your worship +thought--" + +"No," Gerald said. "I do not wish to undertake any adventures of that +sort until I have a band properly organized, and have arranged hiding- +places and methods of getting rid of the booty. I will go back with you +to the inn, and if you strike your bargain you can tell me as you pass +out of the gate what evening you will meet me at Jeres." + +On arriving at the inn Gerald lounged at the gate of the court-yard +until the muleteer came out. + +"I will meet your worship on the fifth night from this at Jeres." + +"Very well; here are five crowns as an earnest on our bargain. If you +carry it out well I shall very likely forget to deduct them from the +twenty I promised you. Do not be surprised if you find me somewhat +changed in appearance when you meet me there." + +At the appointed time the muleteer with his train of animals entered +the court-yards of the Fonda at Jeres. Gerald was standing on the steps +of the inn. He had altered the fashion of his hair, had fastened on +large bushy eyebrows which he had obtained from a skilful perruquier in +Cadiz, and a moustache of imposing size turned up at the tips; he wore +high buff leather boots, and there was an air of military swagger about +him, and he was altogether so changed that at the first glance the +muleteer failed to recognize him. As soon as the mules were unburdened, +Gerald found an opportunity of speaking with him. + +"I will go round at once," the man said, "to the place where I shall +certainly obtain news of my friends if they are here. I told your +honour that they might be here, but they may have gone away on some +affair of business, and may be on the road or at Seville. They always +work between this town and Seville." + +"I understand that you may not meet them to-night; if not, I will meet +you again in Seville. How long will you be finding out about them?" + +"I shall know in half an hour, seņor; if they are not here I shall be +back here in less than an hour, but if I find them I shall be detained +longer in order to talk over with them the offer your worship makes." + +"Very well; in an hour you will find me in the street opposite the inn. +I shall wait there until you come. If all is well make a sign and I +will follow you. Do not mention to them that I have in any way +disguised myself. Our acquaintance was so short that I don't fancy they +had time to examine me very closely; and I have my own reasons for +wishing that they should not be acquainted with my ordinary appearance, +and have therefore to some extent disguised myself." + +"I will say nothing about it," the muleteer replied. "Your worship can +depend upon my discretion." + +"That is right," Gerald said. "We may have future dealings together, +and I can reward handsomely those I find trustworthy and punish those +who in the slightest degree disobey my orders." + +In an hour and a half the muleteer returned, made a signal to Gerald +and passed on. The latter joined him at a short distance from the +hotel. + +"It is all settled, seņor. I found the men much dispirited at the loss +of their captain and comrades; and when I proposed to them to take +service under the cabbalero who wrought them such mischief the other +day, they jumped at the idea, saying that under such a valiant leader +there was no fear of the failure of any enterprise they might +undertake." + +A quarter of an hour's walking took them to a small inn of villainous +appearance in one of the smallest lanes of the town. Gerald was wrapped +from head to foot in his cloak, and only his face was visible. He had a +brace of pistols in his belt, and was followed at a short distance, +unnoticed by the muleteer, by Geoffrey, who had arranged to keep close +to the door of any house he entered, and was to be in readiness to rush +in and take part in the fray if he heard the sound of firearms within. + +Gerald himself had not at first entertained any idea of treachery; but +Geoffrey had pointed out that it was quite possible that the robbers +and the muleteer had but feigned acquiescence in his proposals in order +to get him into their power, and take revenge for the loss of their +captain and comrades, and of the valuable booty which had so +unexpectedly slipped through their fingers owing to his intervention. + +The appearance of the six ruffians gathered in the low room, lighted by +a wretched lamp, was not very assuring, and Gerald kept his hand on the +butt of one of his pistols. + +The four robbers who had been engaged in the fray, however, saluted him +respectfully, and the other two members of the band, who had been +absent on other business, followed their example. They had heard from +those present of the extraordinary valour with which the two travelling +companions of the trader had thrown themselves into the fray, and had +alone disposed of their four comrades, and being without a leader, and +greatly disheartened by their ill-luck, they were quite ready to +forgive the misfortunes Gerald had brought upon them, and to accept +such a redoubtable swordsman as their leader. + +Gerald began the conversation. "You have heard," he said, "from our +friend here of the offer I make you. I desire a band of six men on whom +I can rely for an adventure which promises large profit. Don't suppose +that I am going to lead you to petty robberies on the road, in which, +as you learned to your cost the other day, one sometimes gets more hard +knocks than profit. Such adventures may do for petty knaves, but they +are not suited to me. The way to get wealthy is to strike at the rich. +My idea is to establish some place in an out-of-the-way quarter where +there is no fear of prying neighbours, and to carry off and hide there +the sons and daughters of wealthy men and put them to ransom. In the +first instance I am going to undertake a private affair of my own; and +as you will really run no risk in the matter, for I shall separate +myself from you after making my capture, I shall pay you only an +earnest-money of twenty crowns each. In future affairs we shall act +upon the principle of shares. I shall take three shares, a friend who +works with me will take two shares, and you shall take one share +apiece. The risk will really be entirely mine, for I shall take charge +of the captives we make at our rendezvous. You, after lending a hand in +the capture, will return here and hold yourself in readiness to join +me, and carry out another capture as soon as I have made all the +necessary arrangements. Thus, if by any chance we are tracked, I alone +and my friend will run the risk of capture and punishment. In that way +we may, in the course of a few months, amass a much larger booty than +we should in a lifetime spent in these wretched adventures upon +travellers. + +"Now, it is for you to say whether these terms will suit you, and +whether you are ready to follow my orders and obey me implicitly. The +whole task of making the necessary arrangements, or finding out the +habits of the families one of whose members we intend carrying off, of +bribing nurses or duennas, will be all my business. You will simply +have to meet when you are summoned to aid in the actual enterprise, and +then, when our captive is safely housed, to return here or scatter +where you will and live at ease until again summoned. The utmost +fidelity will be necessary. Large rewards will in many cases +be offered for the discovery of the missing persons, and one traitor +would bring ruin upon us all; therefore it will be absolutely necessary +that you take an oath of fidelity to me, and swear one and all to +punish the traitor with death. Do you agree to my proposal?" + +There was a unanimous exclamation of assent. The plan seemed to offer +probabilities of large booty with a minimum of trouble and risk. One +or two suggested that they should like to join in the first capture on +the same terms as the others, but Gerald at once pronounced this to be +impossible. + +"This is my own affair," he said, "and money is not now my object. As +you will only be required to meet at a given hour some evening, and to +carry off a captive who will not be altogether unwilling to come, there +will be little or no risk in the matter, and twenty crowns will not be +bad pay for an evening's work. After that you will, as I have said, +share in the profits of all future captures we may undertake." + +The band all agreed, and at once took solemn oaths of fidelity to their +new leader, and swore to punish by death any one of their number who +should betray the secrets of the body. + +"That is well," Gerald said when the oaths had been taken. "It may be a +week before you receive your first summons. Here are five crowns apiece +for your expenses up to that time. Let one of you be in front of the +great church as the clock strikes eight morning and evening. Do not +wait above five minutes; if I am coming I shall be punctual. In the +meantime take counsel among yourselves as to the best hiding-place that +can be selected. Between you you no doubt know every corner and hole in +the country. I want a place which will be at once lonely and far +removed from other habitations, but it must be at the same time +moderately comfortable, as the captives we take must have no reason to +complain of their treatment while in my hands. Think this matter over +before I again see you." + +Gerald then joined Geoffrey outside, and found that the latter was +beginning to be anxious at his long absence. After a few words saying +that everything had been successfully arranged, the two friends +returned together to their inn. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +THE FESTA AT SEVILLE. + + +And now, Gerald, that you have made your arrangements for the second +half of the plan, how are you going to set about the first? because you +said that you intended to give Donna Inez the option of flying with you +or remaining with her father." + +"So I do still. Before I make any attempt to carry her off I shall +first learn whether she is willing to run the risks." + +"But how are you going to set about it? You may be quite sure that she +never goes outside the garden without having her duenna with her. If +there is a chapel close by, doubtless she will go there once a day; and +it seems to me that this would be the best chance of speaking to her, +for I do not see how you can possibly introduce yourself into the +grounds." + +"That would be quite out of the question, in daylight at any rate, +Geoffrey. I do not suppose she ever goes beyond the terrace by the +house. But if I could communicate with her she might slip out for a few +minutes after dark, when the old lady happened to be taking a nap. The +question is how to get a letter into her hands." + +"I think I might manage that, Gerald. It is not likely that the duenna +ever happened to notice me. I might therefore put on any sort of +disguise as a beggar and take my place on the road as she goes to +chapel, and somehow or other get your note into her hand. I have hoard +Spanish girls are very quick at acting upon the smallest sign, and if I +can manage to catch her eye for a moment she may probably be ingenious +enough to afford me an opportunity of passing the note to her." + +"That might be done," Gerald agreed. "We will at once get disguises. I +will dress myself as an old soldier, with one arm in a sling and a +patch over my eye; you dress up in somewhat the same fashion as a +sailor boy. It is about twelve miles from here to Ribaldo's place. We +can walk that easily enough, dress ourselves up within a mile or two of +the place, and then go on and reconnoitre the ground." + +"I should advise you to write your note before you start; it may be +that some unexpected opportunity for handing it to her may present +itself." + +"I will do that; but let us sally out first and pick up two suits at +some dealer in old clothes. There will be sure to be two or three of +these in the poorer quarter." + +The disguises were procured without difficulty, and putting them in a +small wallet they started before noon on their walk. In four hours they +reached the boundary of the Marquis of Ribaldo's estate. Going into a +wood they assumed the disguises, packed their own clothes in a wallet, +and hid this away in a clump of bushes. Then they again started-Gerald +Burke with his arm in a sling and Geoffrey limping along with the aid +of a thick stick he had cut in the wood. + +On arriving at the village, a quarter of a mile from the gates of the +mansion, they went into a small wine-shop and called for two measures +of the cheapest wine and a loaf of bread. Here they sat for some time, +listening to the conversation of the peasants who frequented the wine- +shop. Sometimes a question was asked of the wayfarers. Gerald replied, +for his companion's Spanish although fluent was not good enough to pass +as that of a native. He replied to the question as to where they had +received their hurts that they were survivors of the Armada, and +grumbled that it was hard indeed that men who had fought in the +Netherlands and had done their duty to their country should be turned +adrift to starve. + +"We have enough to pay for our supper and a night's lodging," he said, +"but where we are going to take our meal tomorrow is more than I can +say, unless we can meet with some charitable people." + +"If you take your place by the roadside to-morrow morning," one of the +peasants said, "you may obtain charity from Donna Inez de Ribaldo. She +comes every morning to mass here; and they say she has a kind heart, +which is more than men give her father the marquis the credit of +possessing. We have not many poor round here, for at this time of year +all hands are employed in the vineyards, therefore there is the more +chance of your obtaining a little help." + +"Thank you; I will take your advice," Gerald said. "I suppose she is +sure to come?" + +"She is sure enough; she never misses when she is staying here." + +That night the friends slept on a bundle of straw in an outhouse behind +the wine-shop, and arranged everything; and upon the following morning +took their seats by the roadside near the village. The bell of the +chapel was already sounding, and in a few minutes they saw two ladies +approaching, followed at a very short distance by a serving-man. They +had agreed that the great patch over Gerald's eye, aided by the false +moustachios, so completely disguised his appearance that they need have +no fear of his being recognized; and it was therefore decided he should +do the talking. As Donna Inez came up he commenced calling out: "Have +pity, gracious ladies, upon two broken-down soldiers. We have gone +through all the dangers and hardships of the terrible voyage of the +great Armada. We served in the ship _San Josef_ and are now +broken-down, and have no means of earning our living." + +Gerald had somewhat altered his natural voice while speaking, but +Geoffrey was watching Donna Inez closely, and saw her start when he +began to speak; and when he said they had been on board the _San +Josef_ a flush of colour came across her face. + +"We must relieve these poor men," she said to the duenna; "it is +pitiful to see them in such a state." + +"We know not that their tale is true," the duenna replied sharply. +"Every beggar in our days pretends to be a broken-down soldier." + +At this moment Donna Inez happened to glance at Geoffrey, who raised +his hand to his face and permitted a corner of a letter to be +momentarily seen. + +"An impostor!" Gerald cried in a loud voice. "To think that I, +suffering from my terrible wounds, should be taken as an impostor," and +with a hideous yell he tumbled down as if in a fit, and rolled over and +over on the ground towards the duenna. + +Seized with alarm at his approach, she turned and ran a few paces +backward. As she did so Geoffrey stepped up to Inez and held out the +note, which she took and concealed instantly in her dress. + +"There is nothing to be alarmed at," she cried to the duenna. "The poor +man is doubtless in a fit. Here, my poor fellow, get aid for your +comrade," and taking out her purse she handed a dollar to Geoffrey, and +then joining the duenna proceeded on her way. + +Geoffrey knelt beside his prostrate companion and appeared to be +endeavouring to restore him, until the ladies and their servant were +out of sight. + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY GIVES INEZ HER LOVER'S NOTE] + +"That was well managed," Gerald Burke said, sitting up as soon as a +turn of the road hid them from view. "Now we shall have our answer to- +morrow. Thank goodness there is no occasion for us to remain any longer +in these garments!" + +They went to the wood and resumed their usual attire, and then walked +to a large village some four miles away, and putting up at the +principal inn remained there until early the next morning; then they +walked back to the village they had left on the previous day and posted +themselves in a thicket by the roadside, so that they could see +passers-by without being themselves observed. + +"My fate will soon be decided now," Gerald said. "Will she wear a white +flower or not?" + +"I am pretty sure that she will," Geoffrey said. "She would not have +started and coloured when she recognized your voice if she did not love +you. I do not think you need be under much uneasiness on that score." + +In half an hour the ladies again came along, followed as before by +their servants. Donna Inez wore a bunch of white flowers in her dress. + +"There is my answer," Gerald said. "Thank heaven! she loves me, and is +ready to fly with me, and will steal out some time after dark to meet +me in the garden." + +As there was no occasion for him to stay longer, Geoffrey returned to +the village where they slept the night before, and accounted for his +companion's absence by saying that he had been detained on business and +would probably not return until late at night, as he would not be able +to see the person with whom he had affairs to transact until late. It +was past ten o'clock when Gerald Burke returned. + +"It is all arranged, Geoffrey. I hid in the garden close by the terrace +as soon as it became dark. An hour later she came out and sauntered +along the terrace until I softly called her name; then she came to me. +She loves me with all her heart, and is ready to share my fate whatever +it may be. Her father only two days ago had ordered her to prepare for +her marriage with Don Philip, and she was in despair until she +recognized my voice yesterday morning. She is going with her father to +a grand festa at Seville next Wednesday. They will stop there two +nights--the one before the festa and the one after. I told her that I +could not say yet whether I should make the attempt to carry her off on +her journey or after her return here, as that must depend upon +circumstances. At any rate, that gives us plenty of time to prepare our +plans. To-morrow we will hire horses and ride to Seville, and I will +there arrange with one of my friends at the Irish College to perform +the ceremony. However, we will talk it all over to-morrow as we ride. I +feel as sleepy as a dog now after the day's excitement." + +Upon the road next day they agreed that if possible they would manage +to get Inez away in Seville itself. Owing to the large number of people +who would be attracted there to witness the grand procession and high +mass at the cathedral, the streets would be crowded, and it might be +possible for Inez to slip away from those with her. If this could be +managed it would be greatly preferable to the employment of the men to +carry her off by force. Therefore they agreed that the band should be +posted so that the party could be intercepted on its way back; but that +this should be a last resource, and that if possible Inez should be +carried off in Seville itself. + +On reaching Seville they put up at an inn. Gerald at once proceeded to +the Irish College. Here he inquired for a young priest, who had been a +near neighbour of his in Ireland and a great friend of his boyhood. He +was, he knew, about to return home. He found that he was at the moment +away from Seville, having gone to supply the place of a village curé +who had been taken suddenly ill. This village was situated, he was +told, some six miles south-east of the town. It was already late in the +afternoon, but time was precious; and Gerald, hiring a fresh horse, +rode out at once to the village. His friend was delighted to see him, +for they had not met since Gerald passed through Seville on his way to +join the Armada at Cadiz, and the young priest had not heard whether he +had escaped the perils of the voyage. + +"It is lucky you have come, Gerald," he said when the first greetings +were over, "for I am going to return to Ireland in a fortnight's time. +I am already appointed to a charge near Cork, and am to sail in a +Bristol ship which is expected in Cadiz about that time. Is there any +chance of my meeting you there?" + +"An excellent chance, Denis, though my route is not as clearly marked +out as yours is. I wish to heaven that I could go by the same ship. And +that leads to what I have come to see you about," and he then told his +friend the service he wished him to render. + +"It is rather a serious business, Gerald; and a nice scrape I should +get in if it were found out that I had solemnized the marriage of a +young lady under age without the consent of her father, and that father +a powerful nobleman. However, I am not the man to fail you at a pinch, +and if matters are well managed there is not much risk of its being +found out that I had a hand in it until I am well away, and once in +Ireland no one is likely to make any great fuss over my having united a +runaway pair in Spain. Besides, if you and the young lady have made up +your minds to run away, it is evidently necessary that you should be +married at once; so my conscience is perfectly clear in the business. +And now, what is your plan?" + +"The only part of my plan that is settled is to bring her here and +marry her. After that I shall have horses ready, and we will ride by +unfrequented roads to Malaga or some other port and take a passage in a +ship sailing say to Italy, for there is no chance of getting a vessel +hence to England. Once in Italy there will be no difficulty in getting +a passage to England. I have with me a young Englishman, as staunch a +friend as one can need. I need not tell you all about how I became +acquainted with him; but he is as anxious to get out of Spain as I am, +and that is saying no little." + +"It seems rather a vague plan, Gerald. There is sure to be a great hue +and cry as soon as the young lady is found to be missing. The marquis +is a man of great influence, and the authorities will use every effort +to enable him to discover her." + +"You see, Denis, they will have no reason for supposing that I have had +any hand in the matter, and therefore no special watch will be set at +the ports. The duenna for her own sake is not likely to say a word +about any passages she may have observed between us at Madrid, and she +is unaware that there have been any communications with her since." + +"I suppose you will at once put on disguises, Gerald." + +"Yes, that will of course be the first thing." + +"If you dress her as a young peasant woman of the better class and +yourself as a small cultivator, I will mention to my servant that I am +expecting my newly-married niece and her husband to stay with me for a +few days. The old woman will have no idea that I, an Irishman, would +not have a Spanish niece, and indeed I do not suppose that she has any +idea that I am not a Spaniard. I will open the church myself and +perform the service late in the evening, so that no one will be aware +of what is going on. Of course I can put up your friend too. Then you +can stay quietly here as long as you like." + +"That will do admirably, Denis; but I think we had best go on the next +morning," Gerald said, "although it will be a day or two before there +is anything like an organized pursuit. It will be supposed that she is +in Seville, and inquiries will at first be confined to that town. If +she leaves a note behind saying that she is determined even to take the +veil rather than marry the man her father has chosen for her, that will +cause additional delay. It will be supposed that she is concealed in +the house of some friend, or that she has sought a refuge in a nunnery, +and at any rate there is not likely to be any search over the country +for some days, especially as her father will naturally be anxious that +what he will consider an act of rebellion on the part of his daughter +shall not become publicly known." + +"All this, of course, is if we succeed in getting her clear away during +the fęte. If we have to fall back on the other plan I was talking of +and carry her off by force on the way home, the search will be +immediate and general. In that case nothing could be better than your +plan that we should stop here quietly for a few days with you. They +will be searching for a band of robbers and will not dream of making +inquiry for the missing girl in a quiet village like this." + +"Well, we will leave that open, Gerald. I shall let it be known that +you are expected, and whenever you arrive you will be welcome." + +As soon as the point was arranged Gerald again mounted his horse and +returned to Seville. There upon the following morning he engaged a +lodging for the three days of the festa in a quiet house in the +outskirts of the town, and they then proceeded to purchase the various +articles necessary for their disguise and that of Inez. The next +morning they started on their return to Jeres. Here Gerald made +arrangements with the band to meet him in a wood on the road to Cadiz +at eight in the morning on the day following the termination of the +festa at Seville. One of the party was to proceed on that day to the +house among the hills they had fixed upon as their hiding-place, and to +get provisions and everything requisite for the reception of their +captive. They received another five crowns each, the remaining fifteen +was to be paid them as soon as they arrived with their captive at the +house. + +The party remained in ignorance as to the age and sex of the person +they were to carry off, and had little curiosity as to the point, as +they regarded this but a small adventure in comparison to the lucrative +schemes in which they were afterwards to be sharers. + +These arrangements made, Gerald and Geoffrey returned to Seville, and +reached that city on the eve of the commencement of the festa, and took +up their abode at the lodging they had hired. On the following morning +they posted themselves in the street by which the party they expected +would arrive. Both were attired in quiet citizen dress, and Gerald +retained his formidable moustachios and bushy eyebrows. + +In two or three hours a coach accompanied by four lackeys on horseback +came up the street, and they saw that it contained the Marquis of +Ribaldo, his daughter, and her duenna. They followed a short distance +behind it until it entered the courtyard of a stately mansion, which +they learnt on inquiry from a passer-by belonged to the Duke of +Sottomayor. The streets were already crowded with people in holiday +attire, the church bells were ringing, and flags and decorations of all +kinds waved along the route that was to be followed by the great +procession. The house did not stand on this line, and it was necessary +therefore for its inmates to pass through the crowd either to the +cathedral or to the balcony of the house from which they might intend +to view the procession pass. + +Half an hour after the arrival of the coach, the marquis and his +daughter, accompanied by Don Philip de Sottomayor, sallied out, +escorted by six armed lackeys, and took their way towards the +cathedral. They had, however, arrived very late, and the crowd had +already gathered so densely that even the efforts of the lackeys and +the angry commands of the marquis and Don Philip failed to enable them +to make a passage. Very slowly indeed they advanced some distance into +the crowd, but each moment their progress became slower. Gerald and +Geoffrey had fallen in behind them and advanced with them as they +worked themselves in the crowd. + +Angry at what they considered the impertinence of the people for +refusing to make way for them, the nobles pressed forward and engaged +in an angry controversy with those in front, who urged, and truly, that +it was simply impossible for them to make a way, so wedged in were they +by the people on all sides. The crowd, neither knowing nor caring who +were those who thus wished to take precedence of the first comers, +began to jeer and laugh at the angry nobles, and when these threatened +to use force threatened in return. + +As soon as her father had left her side, Gerald, who was immediately +behind Inez, whispered in her ear, "Now is the time, Inez. Go with my +friend; I will occupy the old woman." + +"Keep close to me, seņora, and pretend that you are ill," Geoffrey said +to her, and without hesitation Inez turned and followed him, drawing +her mantilla more closely over her face. + +"Let us pass, friends," Geoffrey said as he elbowed his way through +those standing behind them, "the lady needs air," and by vigorous +efforts he presently arrived at the outskirts of the crowd, and struck +off with his charge in the direction of their lodging. "Gerald Burke +will follow us as soon as he can get out," he said. "Everything is +prepared for you, seņora, and all arrangements made." + +"Who are you, sir?" the girl asked. "I do not recall your face, and yet +I seem to have seen it before." + +"I am English, seņora, and am a friend of Gerald Burke's. When in +Madrid I was disguised as his servant; for as an Englishman and a +heretic it would have gone hard with me had I been detected." + +There wore but few people in the streets through which they passed, the +whole population having flocked either to the streets through which the +procession was to pass, or to the cathedral or churches it was to visit +on its way. Gerald had told Inez at their interview that, although he +had made arrangements for carrying her off by force on the journey to +or from Seville, he should, if possible, take advantage of the crowd at +the function to draw her away from her companions. She had, therefore, +put on her thickest lace mantilla, and this now completely covered her +face from the view of passers-by. Several times she glanced back. + +"Do not be uneasy about him, seņora," Geoffrey said. "He will not try +to extricate himself from the crowd until you are discovered to be +missing, as to do so would be to attract attention. As soon as your +loss is discovered he will make his way out, and will then come on at +the top of his speed to the place whither I am conducting you, and I +expect that we shall find him at the door awaiting us." + +A quarter of an hour's walk took them to the lodging, and Inez gave a +little cry of joy as the door was opened to them by Gerald himself. + +"The people of the house are all out," he said, after their first +greeting. "In that room you will find a peasant girl's dress. Dress +yourself as quickly as you can; we shall be ready for you in attire to +match. You had best do up your own things into a bundle, which I will +carry. If they were left here they might, when the news of your being +missing gets abroad, afford a clue to the manner of your escape. I will +tell you all about the arrangements we have made as we go along." + +"Have you arranged--" and she hesitated. + +"Yes, an Irish priest, who is an old friend of mine, will perform the +ceremony this evening." + +A few minutes later two seeming peasants and a peasant girl issued out +from the lodging. The two men carried stout sticks with bundles slung +over them. + +"Be careful of that bundle," Inez said, "for there are all my jewels in +it. After what you had said I concealed them all about me. They are my +fortune, you know. Now, tell me how you got on in the crowd." + +"I first pushed rather roughly against the duenna, and then made the +most profuse apologies, saying that it was shameful people should crowd +so, and that they ought at once to make way for a lady who was +evidently of high rank. This mollified her, and we talked for three or +four minutes; and in the meantime the row in front, caused by your +father and the lackeys quarrelling with the people, grew louder and +louder. The old lady became much alarmed, and indeed the crowd swayed +about so that she clung to my arm. Suddenly she thought of you, and +turning round gave a scream when she found you were missing. 'What is +the matter?' I asked anxiously. 'The young lady with me! She was here +but an instant ago!' (She had forgotten you for fully five minutes.) +'What can have become of her?' + +"I suggested that no doubt you were close by, but had got separated +from her by the pressure of the crowd. However, she began to squall so +loudly that the marquis looked round. He was already in a towering +rage, and he asked angrily,' What are you making all this noise about?' +and then looking round exclaimed, 'Where is Inez?' 'She was here a +moment since!' the old lady exclaimed, 'and now she has got separated +from me.' Your father looked in vain among the crowd, and demanded +whether anyone had seen you. Someone said that a lady who was fainting +had made her way out five minutes before. The marquis used some strong +language to the old lady, and then informed Don Philip what had +happened, and made his way back out of the crowd with the aid of the +lackeys, and is no doubt inquiring for you in all the houses near; but, +as you may imagine, I did not wait. I followed close behind them until +they were out of the crowd, and then slipped away, and once round the +corner took to my heels and made my way back, and got in two or three +minutes before you arrived." + +The two young men talked almost continuously during their walk to the +village in order to keep up the spirits of Donna Inez, and to prevent +her from thinking of the strangeness of her position and the perils +that lay before them before safety could be obtained. Only once she +spoke of the future. + +"Is it true, Gerald, that there are always storms and rain in your +country, and that you never see the sun, for so some of those who were +in the Armada have told me?" + +"It rains there sometimes, Inez, I am bound to admit; but it is often +fine, and the sun never burns one up as it does here. I promise you you +will like it, dear, when you once become accustomed to it." + +"I do not think I shall," she said, shaking her head; "I am accustomed +to the sun, you know. But I would rather be with you even in such an +island as they told me of than in Spain with Don Philip." + +The village seemed absolutely deserted when they arrived there, the +whole population having gone over to Seville to take part in the great +fęte. Father Denis received his fair visitor with the greatest +kindness. "Here, Catherine," he cried to his old servant, "here are the +visitors I told you I expected. It is well that we have the chambers +prepared, and that we killed that capon this morning." + +That evening Gerald Burke and Inez de Ribaldo were married in the +little church, Geoffrey Vickars being the only witness. The next +morning there was a long consultation over their plans. "I could buy +you a cart in the village and a pair of oxen, and you could drive to +Malaga," the priest said, "but there would be a difficulty about +changing your disguises after you had entered the town. I think that +the boldest plan will be the safest one. I should propose that you +should ride as a well-to-do trader to Malaga, with your wife behind you +on a pillion, and your friend here as your servant. Lost as your wife +was in the crowd at the fęte, it will be a long time before the fact +that she has fled will be realized. For a day or two the search will be +conducted secretly, and only when the house of every friend whom she +might have visited has been searched will the aid of the authorities be +called in, and the poorer quarters, where she might have been carried +by two or three ruffians who may have met her as she emerged in a +fainting condition, as is supposed, from the crowd, be ransacked. I do +not imagine that any search will be made throughout the country round +for a week at least, by which time you will have reached Malaga, and, +if you have good fortune, be on board a ship." + +This plan was finally agreed to. Gerald and his friend at once went +over to Seville and purchased the necessary dresses, together with two +strong horses and equipments. It was evening before their return to the +village. Instead of entering it at once they rode on a mile further, +and fastened the horses up in a wood. Gerald would have left them there +alone, but Geoffrey insisted on staying with them for the night. "I +care nothing about sleeping in the open air, Gerald, and it would be +folly to risk the success of our enterprise upon the chance of no one +happening to come through the wood, and finding the animals before you +return in the morning. We had a hearty meal at Seville, and I shall do +very well until morning." + +Gerald and his wife took leave of the friendly priest at daybreak the +next morning, with the hope that they would very shortly meet in +Ireland. They left the village before anyone was stirring. + +The peasant clothes had been left behind them. Gerald carried two +valises, the one containing the garments in which Inez had fled, the +other his own attire-Geoffrey having resumed the dress he had formerly +worn as his servant. + +On arriving at the wood the party mounted, and at once proceeded on +their journey. Four days' travel took them to Malaga, where they +arrived without any adventure whatever. Once or twice they met parties +of rough-looking men; but travelling as they did without baggage +animals, they did not appear promising subjects for robbery, and the +determined appearance of master and man, each armed with sword and +pistols, deterred the fellows from an attempt which promised more hard +knocks than plunder. + +After putting up at an inn in Malaga, Gerald went down at once to the +port to inquire for a vessel bound for Italy. There were three or four +such vessels in the harbour, and he had no difficulty in arranging for +a passage to Naples for himself, his wife, and servant. The vessel was +to sail on the following morning, and it was with a deep feeling of +satisfaction and relief that they went on board her, and an hour later +were outside the port. + +"It seems marvellous to me," Gerald said, as he looked back upon the +slowly-receding town, "that I have managed to carry off my prize with +so little difficulty. I had expected to meet with all sorts of dangers, +and had I been the peaceful trader I looked, our journey could not be +more uneventful." + +"Perhaps you are beginning to think that the prize is not so very +valuable after all," Inez said, "since you have won it so easily." + +"I have not begun to think so yet," Gerald laughed happily. "At any +rate I shall wait until I get you home before such ideas begin to occur +to me." + +"Directly I get to Ireland," Inez said, "I shall write to my father and +tell him that I am married to you, and that I should never have run +away had he not insisted on my marrying a man I hated. I shall, of +course, beg him to forgive me; but I fear he never will." + +"We must hope that he will, Inez, and that he will ask you to come back +to Spain sometimes. I do not care for myself, you know, for as I have +told you my estate in Ireland is amply large enough for my wants; but I +shall be glad, for your sake, that you should be reconciled to him." + +Inez shook her head. + +"You do not know my father, Gerald. I would never go back to Spain +again--not if he promised to give me his whole fortune. My father never +forgives; and were he to entice me back to Spain, it would be only to +shut me up and to obtain a dispensation from Rome annulling the +marriage, which he would have no difficulty in doing. No, you have got +me, and will have to keep me for good. I shall never return to Spain, +never. Possibly when my father hears from me he may send me over money +to make me think he has forgiven me, and to induce me some day or other +to come back to visit him, and so get me into his power again; but +that, Gerald, he shall never do." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +THE SURPRISE OF BREDA. + + +Lionel Vickars had, by the beginning of 1590, come to speak the Dutch +language well and fluently. Including his first stay in Holland he had +now been there eighteen months, and as he was in constant communication +with the Dutch officers and with the population, he had constant +occasion for speaking Dutch, a language much more akin to English than +any other continental tongue, and indeed so closely allied to the +dialect of the eastern counties of England, that the fishermen of our +eastern ports had in those days little difficulty in conversing with +the Hollanders. + +He was one day supping with Sir Francis Vere when Prince Maurice and +several of his officers were also there. The conversation turned upon +the prospects of the campaign of the ensuing spring. Lionel, of course, +took no part in it, but listened attentively to what was being said, +and was very pleased to find that the period of inactivity was drawing +to an end, and that their commanders considered that they had now +gathered a force of sufficient strength to assume the offensive. + +[Illustration: BREDA 1590.] + +"I would," Prince Maurice said, "that we could gain Breda. The city +stands like a great sentinel against every movement towards Flanders, +and enables the Spaniards to penetrate at all times towards the heart +of our country; but I fear that it is altogether beyond our means. It +is one of the strongest cities in the Netherlands, and my ancestors, +who were its lords, little thought that they were fortifying and +strengthening it in order that it might be a thorn in the side of their +country. I would give much, indeed, to be able to wrest it from the +enemy; but I fear it will be long before we can even hope for that. It +could withstand a regular siege by a well-provided army for months; and +as to surprise, it is out of the question, for I hear that the utmost +vigilance is unceasingly maintained." + +A few days after this Lionel was talking with Captain de Heraugičre, +who had also been at the supper. He had taken part in the defence of +Sluys, and was one of the officers with whom Lionel was most intimate. + +"It would be a rare enterprise to surprise Breda," Captain de +Heraugičre said; "but I fear it is hopeless to think of such a thing." + +"I do not see why it should be," Lionel said. "I was reading when I was +last at home about our wars with the Scotch, and there were several +cases in which very strong places that could not have been carried by +assault were captured suddenly by small parties of men who disguised +themselves as waggoners, and hiding a score or two of their comrades in +a waggon covered with firewood, or sacks of grain, boldly went up to +the gates. When there they cut the traces of their horses so that the +gates could not be closed, or the portcullis lowered, and then falling +upon the guards, kept them at bay until a force, hidden near the gates, +ran up and entered the town. I see not why a similar enterprise should +not be attempted at Breda." + +"Nor do I," Captain Heraugičre said; "the question is how to set about +such a scheme." + +"That one could not say without seeing the place," Lionel remarked. "I +should say that a plan of this sort could only be successful after +those who attempted it had made themselves masters of all particulars +of the place and its ways. Everything would depend upon all going +smoothly and without hitches of any kind. If you really think of +undertaking such an adventure, Captain Heraugičre, I should be very +glad to act under you if Sir Francis Vere will give me leave to do so; +but I would suggest that the first step should be for us to go into +Breda in disguise. We might take in a waggon-load of grain for sale, or +merely carry on our backs baskets with country produce, or we could row +up in a boat with fish." + +"The plan is certainly worth thinking of," Captain Heraugičre said. "I +will turn it over in my mind for a day, and will then talk to you +again. It would be a grand stroke, and there would be great honour to +be obtained; but it will not do for me to go to Prince Maurice and lay +it before him until we have a plan completely worked out, otherwise we +are more likely to meet with ridicule than praise." + +The following day Captain Heraugičre called at Lionel's lodgings. "I +have lain awake all night thinking of our scheme," he said, "and have +resolved to carry out at least the first part of it--to enter Breda and +see what are the prospects of success, and the manner in which the +matter had best be set about. I propose that we two disguise ourselves +as fishermen, and going down to the river between Breda and Willemstad +bargain with some fishermen going up to Breda with their catch for the +use of their boat. While they are selling the fish we can survey the +town and see what is the best method of introducing a force into it. +When our plan is completed we will go to Voorne, whither Prince Maurice +starts to-morrow, and lay the matter before him." + +"I will gladly go with you to Breda," Lionel said, "and, as far as I +can, aid you there; but I think that it would be best that you only +should appear in the matter afterwards. I am but a young volunteer, and +it would be well that I did not appear at all in the matter, which you +had best make entirely your own. But I hope, Captain Heraugičre, that +should the prince decide to adopt any plan you may form, and intrust +the matter to you, that you will take me with you in your following." + +"That I will assuredly," Captain Heraugičre said, "and will take care +that if it should turn out successful your share in the enterprise +shall be known." + +"When do you think of setting about it?" Lionel asked. + +"Instantly. My company is at Voorne, and I should return thither with +the prince to-day. I will at once go to him and ask for leave to be +absent on urgent affairs for a week. Do you go to Sir Francis Vere and +ask for a similar time. Do not tell him, if you can help it, the exact +nature of your enterprise. But if you cannot obtain leave otherwise, of +course you must do so. I will be back here in two hours' time. We can +then at once get our disguises, and hire a craft to take us to +Willemstad." + +Lionel at once went across to the quarters of Sir Francis Vere. + +"I have come, Sir Francis, to ask for a week's leave of absence." + +"That you can have, Lionel. What, are you going shooting ducks on the +frozen meres?" + +"No, Sir Francis. I am going on a little expedition with Captain +Heraugičre, who has invited me to accompany him. We have an idea in our +heads that may perhaps be altogether useless, but may possibly bear +fruit. In the first case we would say nothing about it, in the second +we will lay it before you on our return." + +"Very well," Sir Francis said with a smile. "You showed that you could +think at Sluys, and I hope something may come of this idea of yours, +whatever it may be." + +At the appointed time Captain Heraugičre returned, having obtained +leave of absence from the prince. They at once went out into the town +and bought the clothes necessary for their disguise. They returned with +these to their lodgings, and having put them on went down to the wharf, +where they had no difficulty in bargaining with the master of a small +craft to take them to Willemstad, as the Spaniards had no ships +whatever on the water between Rotterdam and Bergen-op-Zoom. The boat +was to wait three days for them at that town, and to bring them back to +Rotterdam. As there was no reason for delay they at once went on board +and cast off. The distance was but thirty miles, and just at nightfall +they stepped ashore at the town of Willemstad. + +The next morning they had no difficulty in arranging with a fisherman +who was going up to Breda with a cargo of fish to take the place of two +of his boatmen at the oars. + +"We want to spend a few hours there," Captain Heraugičre said, "and +will give you five crowns if you will leave two of your men here and +let us take their places." + +"That is a bargain," the man said at once; "that is, if you can row, +for we shall scarce take the tide up to the town, and must keep on +rowing to get there before the ebb begins." + +"We can row, though perhaps not so well as your own men. You are, I +suppose, in the habit of going there, and are known to the guards at +the port? They are not likely, I should think, to notice that you +haven't got the same crew as usual?" + +"There is no fear of that, and if they did I could easily say that two +of my men were unable to accompany me to-day, and that I have hired +fresh hands in their places." + +Two of the men got out. Captain Heraugičre and Lionel Vickars took +their places, and the boat proceeded up the river. The oars were heavy +and clumsy, and the new-comers were by no means sorry when, after a row +of twelve miles, they neared Breda. + +"What are the regulations for entering Breda?" Captain Heraugičre asked +as they approached the town. + +"There are no particular regulations," the master of the boat said, +"save that on entering the port the boat is searched to see that it +contains nothing but fish. None are allowed to enter the gates of the +town without giving their names, and satisfying the officer on guard +that they have business in the place." + +An officer came on board as the boat ran up alongside the quay and +asked a few questions. After assisting in getting the basket of fish on +shore Captain Heraugičre and Lionel sauntered away along the quay, +leaving the fishermen to dispose of their catch to the townspeople, who +had already begun to bargain for them. + +The river Mark flowed through the town, supplying its moats with water. +Where it left the town on the western side was the old castle, with a +moat of its own and strong fortified lines. Within was the quay, with +an open place called the fish-market leading to the gates of the new +castle. There were 600 Spanish infantry in the town and 100 in the +castle, and 100 cavalry. The governor of Breda, Edward Lanzavecchia, +was absent superintending the erection of new fortifications at +Gertruydenberg, and in his absence the town was under the command of +his son Paolo. + +Great vigilance was exercised. All vessels entering port were strictly +examined, and there was a guard-house on the quay. Lying by one of the +wharves was a large boat laden with peat, which was being rapidly +unloaded, the peat being sold as soon as landed, as fuel was very short +in the city. + +"It seems to me," Lionel said as they stood for a minute looking on, +"that this would be just the thing for us. If we could make an +arrangement with the captain of one of these peat-boats we might hide a +number of men in the hold and cover them with peat. A place might be +built large enough, I should think, to hold seventy or eighty men, and +yet be room for a quantity of peat to be stowed over them." + +"A capital idea," Captain Heraugičre said. "The peat comes from above +the town. We must find out where the barges are loaded, and try to get +at one of the captains." + +After a short walk through the town they returned to the boat. The +fisherman had already sold out his stock, and was glad at seeing his +passengers return earlier than he expected; but as the guard was +standing by he rated them severely for keeping him waiting so long, and +with a muttered excuse they took their places in the boat and rowed +down the river. + +"I want you to put us ashore on the left bank as soon as we are out of +sight of the town," Captain Heraugičre said. "As it will be heavy work +getting your boat back with only two of you, I will give you a couple +of crowns beyond the amount I bargained with you for." + +"That will do well enough," the man said. "We have got the tide with +us, and can drop down at our leisure." + +As soon as they were landed they made a wide detour to avoid the town, +and coming down again upon the river above it, followed its banks for +three miles, when they put up at a little inn in the small village of +Leur on its bank. They had scarcely sat down to a meal when a man came +in and called for supper. The landlord placed another plate at the +table near them, and the man at once got into conversation with them, +and they learnt that he was master of a peat-boat that had that morning +left Breda empty. + +"We were in Breda ourselves this morning," Captain Heraugičre said, +"and saw a peat-boat unloading there. There seemed to be a brisk demand +for the fuel." + +"Yes; it is a good trade at present," the man said. "There are only six +of us who have permits to enter the port, and it is as much as we can +do to keep the town supplied with fuel; for, you see, at any moment the +river may be frozen up, so the citizens need to keep a good stock in +hand. I ought not to grumble, since I reap the benefit of the Spanish +regulations; but all these restrictions on trade come mighty hard upon +the people of Breda. It was not so in the old time." + +After supper was over Captain Heraugičre ordered a couple of flasks of +spirits, and presently learned from the boatman that his name was +Adrian Van de Berg, and that he had been at one time a servant in the +household of William of Orange. Little by little Captain Heraugičre +felt his way, and soon found that the boatman was an enthusiastic +patriot. He then confided to him that he himself was an officer in the +State's service, and had come to Breda to ascertain whether there was +any possibility of capturing the town by surprise. + +"We hit on a plan to-day," he said, "which promises a chance of +success; but it needs the assistance of one ready to risk his life." + +"I am ready to risk my life in any enterprise that has a fair chance of +success," the boatman said, "but I do not see how I can be of much +assistance." + +"You can be of the greatest assistance if you will, and will render the +greatest service to your country if you will join in our plan. What we +propose is, that we should construct a shelter of boards four feet high +in the bottom of your boat, leading from your little cabin aft right up +to the bow. In this I calculate we could stow seventy men; then the +peat could be piled over it, and if you entered the port somewhat late +in the afternoon you could manage that it was not unladen so as to +uncover the roof of our shelter before work ceased for the night. Then +we could sally out, overpower the guard on the quay, make for one of +the gates, master the guard there, and open it to our friends without." + +"It is a bold plan and a good one," Van de Berg said, "and I am ready +to run my share of the risk with you. I am so well known in Breda that +they do not search the cargo very closely when I arrive, and I see no +reason why the party hidden below should not escape observation. I will +undertake my share of the business if you decide to carry it out. I +served the prince for fifteen years, and am ready to serve his son. +There are plenty of planks to be obtained at a place three miles above +here, and it would not take many hours to construct the false deck. If +you send a messenger here giving me two days' notice, it shall be built +and the peat stowed on it by the time you arrive." + +It was late at night before the conversation was concluded, and the +next morning Captain Heraugičre and Lionel started on their return, +struck the river some miles below Breda, obtained a passage over the +river in a passing boat late in the afternoon, and, sleeping at +Willemstad, went on board their boat next morning and returned to +Rotterdam. It was arranged that Lionel should say nothing about their +journey until Captain Heraugičre had opened the subject to Prince +Maurice. + +"You are back before your time," Sir Francis Vere said when Lionel +reported himself for duty. "Has anything come of this project of yours, +whatever it may be?" + +"We hope so, sir. Captain Heraugičre will make his report to Prince +Maurice. He is the leader of the party, and therefore we thought it +best that he should report to Prince Maurice, who, if he thinks well of +it, will of course communicate with you." + +The next day a message arrived from Voorne requesting Sir Francis Vere +to proceed thither to discuss with the prince a matter of importance. +He returned after two days' absence, and presently sent for Lionel. + +"This is a rare enterprise that Captain Heraugičre has proposed to the +prince," he said, "and promises well for success. It is to be kept a +profound secret, and a few only will know aught of it until it is +executed. Heraugičre is of course to have command of the party which is +to be hidden in the barge, and is to pick out eighty men from the +garrisons of Gorcum and Lowesteyn. He has begged that you shall be of +the party, as he says that the whole matter was in the first case +suggested to him by you. The rest of the men and officers will be +Dutch." + +A fortnight later, on the 22nd of February, Sir Francis Vere on his +return from the Hague, where Prince Maurice now was, told Lionel that +all was arranged. The message had come down from Van de Berg that the +hiding place was constructed. They were to join Heraugičre the next +day. + +On the 24th of February the little party started. Heraugičre had chosen +young, active, and daring men. With him were Captains Logier and +Fervet, and Lieutenant Held. They embarked on board a vessel, and were +landed near the mouth of the Mark, as De Berg was this time going to +carry the peat up the river instead of down, fearing that the passage +of seventy men through the country would attract attention. The same +night Prince Maurice, Sir Francis Vere, Count Hohenlohe, and other +officers sailed to Willemstad, their destination having been kept a +strict secret from all but those engaged in the enterprise. Six hundred +English troops, eight hundred Dutch, and three hundred cavalry had been +drawn from different garrisons, and were also to land at Willemstad. + +When Heraugičre's party arrived at the point agreed on at eleven +o'clock at night, Van de Berg was not there, nor was the barge; and +angry and alarmed at his absence they searched about for him for hours, +and at last found him in the village of Terheyde. He made the excuse +that he had overslept himself, and that he was afraid the plot had been +discovered. As everything depended upon his co-operation, Heraugičre +abstained from the angry reproaches which the strange conduct of the +man had excited; and as it was now too late to do anything that night, +a meeting was arranged for the following evening, and a message was +despatched to the prince telling him that the expedition was postponed +for a day. On their return, the men all gave free vent to their +indignation. + +"I have no doubt," Heraugičre said, "that the fellow has turned coward +now that the time has come to face the danger. It is one thing to talk +about a matter as long as it is far distant, but another to look it in +the face when it is close at hand. I do not believe that he will come +to-morrow." + +"If he does not he will deserve hanging," Captain Logier said; "after +all the trouble he has given in getting the troops together, and after +bringing the prince himself over." + +"It will go very near hanging if not quite," Heraugičre muttered. "If +he thinks that he is going to fool us with impunity, he is mightily +mistaken. If he is a wise man he will start at daybreak, and get as far +away as he can before night-fall if he does not mean to come." + +The next day the party remained in hiding in a barn, and in the evening +again went down to the river. There was a barge lying there laden high +with turf. A general exclamation of satisfaction broke from all when +they saw it. There were two men on it. One landed and came to meet +them. + +"Where is Van de Berg?" Captain Heraugičre asked as he came up. + +"He is ill and unable to come, but has sent you this letter. My brother +and myself have undertaken the business." + +The letter merely said that the writer was too ill to come, but had +sent in his place his two nephews, one or other of whom always +accompanied him, and who could be trusted thoroughly to carry out the +plan. The party at once went on board the vessel, descended into the +little cabin aft, and then passed through a hole made by the removal of +two planks into the hold that had been prepared for them. Heraugičre +remained on deck, and from time to time descended to inform those below +of the progress being made. It was slow indeed, for a strong wind laden +with sleet blew directly down the river. Huge blocks of ice floated +down, and the two boatmen with their poles had the greatest difficulty +in keeping the boat's head up the stream. + +At last the wind so increased that navigation became impossible, and +the barge was made fast against the bank. From Monday night until +Thursday morning the gale continued. Progress was impossible, and the +party cramped up in the hold suffered greatly from hunger and thirst. +On Thursday evening they could sustain it no longer and landed. They +were for a time scarce able to walk, so cramped were their limbs by +their long confinement, and made their way up painfully to a fortified +building called Nordand, standing far from any other habitations. Here +they obtained food and drink, and remained until at eleven at night one +of the boatmen came to them with news that the wind had changed, and +was now blowing in from the sea. They again took their places on board, +but the water was low in the river, and it was difficult work passing +the shallows, and it was not until Saturday afternoon that they passed +the boom below the town and entered the inner harbour. + +An officer of the guard came off in a boat and boarded the barge. The +weather was so bitterly cold that he at once went into the little cabin +and there chatted with the two boatmen. Those in the hold could hear +every word that was said, and they almost held their breath, for the +slightest noise would betray them. After a while the officer got into +his boat again, saying he would send some men off to warp the vessel +into the castle dock, as the fuel was required by the garrison there. +As the barge was making its way towards the water-gate, it struck upon +a hidden obstruction in the river and began to leak rapidly. The +situation of those in the hold was now terrible, for in a few minutes +the water rose to their knees, and the choice seemed to be presented to +them of being drowned like rats there, or leaping overboard, in which +case they would be captured and hung without mercy. The boatmen plied +the pumps vigorously, and in a short time a party of Italian soldiers +arrived from the shore and towed the vessel into the inner harbour, and +made her fast close to the guard-house of the castle. A party of +labourers at once came on board and began to unload the turf; the need +of fuel both in the town and castle being great, for the weather had +been for some time bitterly cold. + +A fresh danger now arose. The sudden immersion in the icy water in the +close cabin brought on a sudden inclination to sneeze and cough. +Lieutenant Held, finding himself unable to repress his cough, handed +his dagger to Lionel Vickars, who happened to be sitting next to him, +and implored him to stab him to the heart lest his cough might betray +the whole party; but one of the boatmen who was standing close to the +cabin heard the sounds, and bade his companion go on pumping with as +much noise and clatter as possible, while he himself did the same, +telling those standing on the wharf alongside that the boat was almost +full of water. The boatmen behaved with admirable calmness and +coolness, exchanging jokes with acquaintances on the quay, keeping up a +lively talk, asking high prices for their peat, and engaging in long +and animated bargains so as to prevent the turf from being taken too +rapidly ashore. + +At last, when but a few layers of turf remained over the roof of the +hold, the elder brother told the men unloading that it was getting too +dark, and he himself was too tired and worn-out to attend to things +any longer. He therefore gave the men some money and told them to go to +the nearest public-house to drink his health, and to return the first +thing in the morning to finish unloading. The younger of the two +brothers had already left the boat. He made his way through the town, +and started at full speed to carry the news to Prince Maurice that the +barge had arrived safely in the town, and the attempt would be made at +midnight; also of the fact they had learned from those on the wharf, +that the governor had heard a rumour that a force had landed somewhere +on the coast, and had gone off again to Gertruydenberg in all haste, +believing that some design was on foot against that town. His son Paolo +was again in command of the garrison. + +A little before midnight Captain Heraugičre told his comrades that the +hour had arrived, and that only by the most desperate bravery could +they hope to succeed, while death was the certain consequence of +failure. The band were divided into two companies. He himself with one +was to attack the main guardhouse; the other, under Fervet, was to +seize the arsenal of the fortress. Noiselessly they stole out from +their hiding-place, and formed upon the wharf within the inclosure of +the castle. Heraugičre moved straight upon the guard-house. The sentry +was secured instantly; but the slight noise was heard, and the captain +of the watch ran out but was instantly cut down. + +Others came out with torches, but after a brief fight were driven into +the guard-house; when all were shot down through the doors and windows. +Captain Fervet and his band had done equally well. The magazine of the +castle was seized, and its defenders slain. Paolo Lanzavecchia made a +sally from the palace with a few of his adherents, but was wounded and +driven back; and the rest of the garrison of the castle, ignorant of +the strength of the force that had thus risen as it were from the earth +upon them, fled panic-stricken, not even pausing to destroy the bridge +between the castle and the town. + +Young Paolo Lanzavecchia now began a parley with the assailants; but +while the negotiations were going on Hohenlohe with his cavalry came +up--having been apprised by the boatman that the attempt was about to +be made--battered down the palisade near the water-gate, and entered +the castle. A short time afterwards Prince Maurice, Sir Francis Vere, +and other officers arrived with the main body of the troops. But the +fight was over before even Hohenlohe arrived; forty of the garrison +being killed, and not a single man of the seventy assailants. The +burgomaster, finding that the castle had fallen, and that a strong +force had arrived, then sent a trumpeter to the castle to arrange for +the capitulation of the town, which was settled on the following +terms:--All plundering was commuted for the payment of two months' pay +to every soldier engaged in the affair. All who chose might leave the +city, with full protection to life and property. Those who were willing +to remain were not to be molested in their consciences or households +with regard to religion. + +The news of the capture of Breda was received with immense enthusiasm +throughout Holland. It was the first offensive operation that had been +successfully undertaken, and gave new hope to the patriots. + +Parma was furious at the cowardice with which five companies of foot +and one of horse--all picked troops--had fled before the attack of +seventy Hollanders. Three captains were publicly beheaded in Brussels +and a fourth degraded to the ranks, while Lanzavecchia was deprived of +the command of Gertruydenberg. + +For some months before the assault upon Breda the army of Holland had +been gaining vastly in strength and organization. Prince Maurice, aided +by his cousin Lewis William, stadholder of Friesland, had been hard at +work getting it into a state of efficiency. Lewis William, a man of +great energy and military talent, saw that the use of solid masses of +men in the field was no longer fitted to a state of things when the +improvements in firearms of all sorts had entirely changed the +condition of war. He therefore reverted to the old Roman methods, and +drilled his soldiers in small bodies; teaching them to turn and wheel, +advance or retreat, and perform all sorts of manoeuvres with regularity +and order. Prince Maurice adopted the same plan in Holland, and the +tactics so introduced proved so efficient that they were sooner or +later adopted by all civilized nations. + +At the time when William of Orange tried to relieve the hard-pressed +city of Haarlem, he could with the greatest difficulty muster three or +four thousand men for the purpose. The army of the Netherlands was now +22,000 strong, of whom 2000 were cavalry. It was well disciplined, well +equipped, and regularly paid, and was soon to prove that the pains +bestowed upon it had not been thrown away. In the course of the +eighteen years that had followed the capture of Brill and the +commencement of the struggle with Spain, the wealth and prosperity of +Holland had enormously increased. The Dutch were masters of the sea- +coast, the ships of the Zeelanders closed every avenue to the interior, +and while the commerce of Antwerp, Ghent, Bruges, and the other cities +of the provinces that remained in the hands of the Spaniards was for +the time destroyed, and their population fell off by a half, Holland +benefited in proportion. + +From all the Spanish provinces men of energy and wealth passed over in +immense numbers to Holland, where they could pursue their commerce and +industries--free from the exactions and cruelty under which they had +for so many years groaned. The result was that the cities of Holland +increased vastly in wealth and population, and the resources at the +disposal of Prince Maurice enormously exceeded those with which his +father had for so many years sustained the struggle. + +For a while after the capture of Breda there was breathing time in +Holland, and Maurice was busy in increasing and improving his army. +Parma was fettered by the imperious commands of Philip, who had +completely crippled him by withdrawing a considerable number of his +troops for service in the war which he was waging with France. But +above all, the destruction of the Armada, and with it of the naval +supremacy of Spain, had changed the situation. + +Holland was free to carry on her enterprises by sea, and had free +communication and commerce with her English ally, while communication +between Spain and the Netherlands was difficult. Reinforcements could +no longer be sent by sea, and had to be sent across Europe from Italy. +Parma was worn out by exertions, disappointment, and annoyance, and his +health was seriously failing; while opposed to him were three young +commanders--Maurice, Lewis William, and Francis Vere--all men of +military genius and full of confidence and energy. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +A SLAVE IN BARBARY. + + +The _Tarifa_ had left port but a few hours when a strong wind rose +from the north, and rapidly increased in violence until it was blowing +a gale. + +"Inez is terribly ill," Gerald said when he met Geoffrey on deck the +following morning. "I believe at the present moment she would face her +father and risk everything if she could but be put on shore." + +"I can well imagine that. However, she will think otherwise to-morrow +or next day. I believe these Mediterranean storms do not last long. +There is no fear of six weeks of bad weather such as we had when we +were last afloat together." + +"No. I have just been speaking to the captain. He says they generally +blow themselves out in two or three days; but still, even that is not a +pleasant look-out. These vessels are not like your English craft, which +seem to be able to sail almost in the eye of the wind. They are +lubberly craft, and badly handled; and if this gale lasts for three +days we shall be down on the Barbary coast, and I would rather risk +another journey through Spain than get down so near the country of the +Moors." + +"I can understand that," Geoffrey agreed. "However, I see there are +some thirty soldiers forward on their way to join one of the regiments +in Naples, so we ought to be able to beat off any corsair that might +come near us. + +"Yes; but if we got down on their coast we might be attacked by half a +dozen of them," Gerald said. "However, one need not begin to worry +one's self at present; the gale may abate within a few hours." + +At the end of the second day the wind went down suddenly; and through +the night the vessel rolled heavily, for the sea was still high, and +there was not a breath of wind to fill her sails and steady her. By the +morning the sea had gone down, but there was still an absence of wind. + +"We have had a horrible night," Gerald remarked, "but we may think +ourselves fortunate indeed," and he pointed to the south, where the +land was plainly visible at a distance of nine or ten miles. "If the +gale had continued to blow until now we should have been on shore long +before this." + +"We are too near to be pleasant," Geoffrey said, "for they can see us +as plainly as we can see the land. It is to be hoped that a breeze may +spring up from the south before long and enable us to creep off the +land. Unless I am greatly mistaken I can see the masts of some craft or +other in a line with those white houses over there." + +"I don't see them," Gerald replied, gazing intently in the direction in +which Geoffrey pointed. + +"Let us go up to the top, Gerald; we shall see her hull from there +plainly enough." + +On reaching the top Gerald saw at once that his friend's eyes had not +deceived him. + +"Yes, there is a vessel there sure enough, Geoffrey. I cannot see +whether she has one or two masts, for her head is in this direction." + +"That is not the worst of it," Geoffrey said, shading his eyes and +gazing intently on the distant object. "She is rowing; I can see the +light flash on her oars every stroke. That is a Moorish galley, and she +is coming out towards us." + +"I believe you are right," Gerald replied after gazing earnestly for +some time. "Yes, I saw the flash of the oars then distinctly." + +They at once descended to the deck and informed the captain of what +they had seen. He hastily mounted to the top. + +"There is no mistake about it," he said after looking intently for a +short time; "it is one of the Barbary corsairs, and she is making out +towards us. The holy saints preserve us from these bloodthirsty +infidels." + +"The saints will do their work if we do ours," Gerald remarked; "and we +had best do as large a share as possible. What is the number of your +crew, captain?" + +"Nineteen men altogether." + +"And there are thirty soldiers, and six male passengers in the cabin," +Gerald said; "so we muster fifty-four. That ought to be enough to beat +off the corsair." + +On returning to the deck the captain informed the officer in charge of +the troops on board that a Moorish pirate was putting off towards them, +and that unless the wind came to their aid there was no chance of +escaping a conflict with her. + +"Then we must fight her, captain," the officer, who was still a youth, +said cheerfully. "I have thirty men, of whom at least half are +veterans. You have four cannon on board, and there are the crew and +passengers." + +"Fifty-four in all," Gerald said. "We ought to be able to make a good +fight of it." + +Orders were at once given, soldiers and crew were mustered and informed +of the approaching danger. + +"We have got to fight, men, and to fight hard," the young officer said; +"for if we are beaten you know the result--either our throats will be +cut or we shall have to row in their galleys for the rest of our lives. +So there is not much choice." + +In an hour the corsair was half-way between the coast and the vessel. +By this time every preparation had been made for her reception. Arms +had been distributed among the crew and such of the passengers as were +not already provided, the guns had been cast loose and ammunition +brought up, cauldrons of pitch were ranged along the bulwarks and fires +lighted on slabs of stone placed beneath them. The coppers in the +galley were already boiling. + +"Now, captain," the young officer said, "do you and your sailors work +the guns and ladle out the pitch and boiling water, and be in readiness +to catch up their pikes and axes and aid in the defence if the villains +gain a footing on the deck. I and my men and the passengers will do our +best to keep them from climbing up." + +The vessel was provided with sweeps, and the captain had in the first +place proposed to man them; but Gerald pointed out that the corsair +would row three feet to their one, and that it was important that all +should be fresh and vigorous when the pirates came alongside. The idea +had consequently been abandoned, and the vessel lay motionless in the +water while the corsair was approaching. + +Inez, who felt better now that the motion had subsided, came on deck as +the preparations were being made. Gerald told her of the danger that +was approaching. She turned pale. + +"This is dreadful, Gerald. I would rather face death a thousand times +than be captured by the Moors." + +"We shall beat them off, dear, never fear. They will not reckon upon +the soldiers we have on board, and will expect an easy prize. I do not +suppose that, apart from the galley-slaves, they have more men on board +than we have, and fighting as we do for liberty, each of us ought to be +equal to a couple of these Moorish dogs. When the conflict begins you +must go below." + +"I shall not do that," Inez said firmly. "We will share the same fate +whatever it may be, Gerald; and remember that whatever happens I will +not live to be carried captive among them. I will stab myself to the +heart if I see that all is lost." + +"You shall come on deck if you will, Inez, when they get close +alongside. I do not suppose there will be many shots fired--they will +be in too great a hurry to board; but as long as they are shooting you +must keep below. After that come up if you will. It would make a coward +of me did I know that a chance shot might strike you." + +"Very well, then, Gerald, to please you I will go down until they come +alongside, then come what will I shall be on deck." + +As the general opinion on board was that the corsairs would not greatly +outnumber them, while they would be at a great disadvantage from the +lowness of their vessel in the water, there was a general feeling of +confidence, and the approach of the enemy was watched with calmness. +When half a mile distant two puffs of smoke burst out from the +corsair's bows. A moment later a shot struck the ship, and another +threw up the water close to her stern. The four guns of the +_Tarifa_ had been brought over to the side on which the enemy was +approaching, and these were now discharged. One of the shots carried +away some oars on the starboard side of the galley, another struck her +in the bow. There was a slight confusion on board; two or three oars +were shifted over from the port to the starboard side, and she +continued her way. + +The guns were loaded again, bags of bullets being this time inserted +instead of balls. The corsairs fired once more, but their shots were +unanswered; and with wild yells and shouts they approached the +motionless Spanish vessel. + +"She is crowded with men," Gerald remarked to Geoffrey. "She has far +more on board than we reckoned on." + +"We have not given them a close volley yet," Geoffrey replied. "If the +guns are well aimed they will make matters equal." + +[Illustration: GEOFFREY FALLS INTO THE HANDS OF THE CORSAIRS] + +The corsair was little more than her own length away when the captain +gave the order, and the four guns poured their contents upon her +crowded decks. The effect was terrible. The mass of men gathered in her +bow in readiness to board as soon as she touched the _Tarifa_ were +literally swept away. Another half minute she was alongside the +Spaniard, and the Moors with wild shouts of vengeance tried to clamber +on board. + +But they had not reckoned upon meeting with more than the ordinary crew +of a merchant ship. The soldiers discharged their arquebuses, and then +with pike and sword opposed an impenetrable barrier to the assailants, +while the sailors from behind ladled over the boiling pitch and water +through intervals purposely left in the line of the defenders. The +conflict lasted but a few minutes. Well-nigh half the Moors had been +swept away by the discharge of the cannon, and the rest, but little +superior in numbers to the Spaniards, were not long before they lost +heart, their efforts relaxed, and shouts arose to the galley-slaves to +row astern. + +"Now, it is our turn!" the young officer cried. "Follow me, my men; we +will teach the dogs a lesson." As he spoke he sprang from the bulwark +down upon the deck of the corsair. + +Geoffrey, who was standing next to him, followed his example, as did +five or six soldiers. They were instantly engaged in a hand-to-hand +fight with the Moors. In the din and confusion they heard not the +shouts of their comrades. After a minute's fierce fighting, Geoffrey, +finding that he and his companions were being pressed back, glanced +round to see why support did not arrive, and saw that there were +already thirty feet of water between the two vessels. He was about to +spring overboard, when the Moors made a desperate rush, his guard was +beaten down, a blow from a Moorish scimitar fell on his head, and he +lost consciousness. + +It was a long time before he recovered. The first sound he was aware of +was the creaking of the oars. He lay dreamily listening to this, and +wondering what it meant, until the truth suddenly flashed across him. +He opened his eyes and looked round. A heavy weight lay across his +legs, and he saw the young Spanish officer lying dead there. Several +other Spaniards lay close by, while the deck was strewn with the +corpses of the Moors. He understood at once what had happened. The +vessels had drifted apart just as he sprang on board, cutting off those +who had boarded the corsair from all assistance from their friends, and +as soon as they had been overpowered the galley had started on her +return to the port from which she had come out. + +"At any rate," he said to himself, "Gerald and Inez are safe; that is a +comfort, whatever comes of it." + +It was not until the corsair dropped anchor near the shore that the +dispirited Moors paid any attention to those by whom their deck was +cumbered. Then the Spaniards were first examined. Four, who were dead, +were at once tossed overboard. Geoffrey and two others who showed signs +of life were left for the present, a bucket of water being thrown over +each to revive them. The Moorish wounded and the dead were then lowered +into boats and taken on shore for care or burial. Then Geoffrey and the +two Spaniards were ordered to rise. + +All three were able to do so with some difficulty, and were rowed +ashore. They were received when they landed by the curses and +execrations of the people of the little town, who would have torn them +to pieces had not their captors marched them to the prison occupied by +the galley-slaves when on shore, and left them there. Most of the +galley-slaves were far too exhausted by their long row, and too +indifferent to aught but their own sufferings, to pay any attention to +the new-comers. Two or three, however, came up to them and offered to +assist in bandaging their wounds. Their doublets had already been taken +by their captors; but they now tore strips off their shirts, and with +these staunched the bleeding of their wounds. + +"It was lucky for you that five or six of our number were killed by +that discharge of grape you gave us," one of them said, "or they would +have thrown you overboard at once. Although, after all, death is almost +preferable to such a life as ours." + +"How long have you been here?" Geoffrey asked. + +"I hardly know," the other replied; "one almost loses count of time +here. But it is somewhere about ten years. I am sturdy, you see. Three +years at most is the average of our life in the galleys, though there +are plenty die before as many months have passed. I come of a hardy +race. I am not a Spaniard. I was captured in an attack on a town in the +West Indies, and had three years on board one of your galleys at Cadiz. +Then she was captured by the Moors, and here I have been ever since." + +"Then you must be an Englishman!" Geoffrey exclaimed in that language. + +The man stared at him stupidly for a minute, and then burst into tears. +"I have never thought to hear my own tongue again, lad," he said, +holding out his hand. "Aye, I am English, and was one of Hawkins' men. +But how come you to be in a Spanish ship? I have heard our masters say, +when talking together, that there is war now between the English and +Spaniards; that is, war at home. There has always been war out on the +Spanish Main, but they know nothing of that." + +"I was made prisoner in a fight we had with the great Spanish Armada +off Gravelines," Geoffrey said. + +"We heard a year ago from some Spaniards they captured that a great +fleet was being prepared to conquer England; but no news has come to us +since. We are the only galley here, and as our benches were full, the +prisoners they have taken since were sent off at once to Algiers or +other ports, so we have heard nothing. But I told the Spaniards that if +Drake and Hawkins were in England when their great fleet got there, +they were not likely to have it all their own way. Tell me all about +it, lad. You do not know how hungry I am for news from home." + +Geoffrey related to the sailor the tale of the overthrow and +destruction of the Armada, which threw him into an ecstasy of +satisfaction. + +"These fellows," he said, pointing to the other galley-slaves, "have +for the last year been telling me that I need not call myself an +Englishman any more, for that England was only a part of Spain now. I +will open their eyes a bit in the morning. But I won't ask you any more +questions now; it is a shame to have made you talk so much after such a +clip as you have had on the head." + +Geoffrey turned round on the sand that formed their only bed, and was +soon asleep, the last sound he heard being the chuckling of his +companion over the discomfiture of the Armada. + +In the morning the guard came in with a great dish filled with a sort +of porridge of coarsely-ground grain, boiled with water. In a corner of +the yard were a number of calabashes, each composed of half a gourd. +The slaves each dipped one of these into the vessel, and so eat their +breakfast. Before beginning Geoffrey went to a trough, into which a jet +of water was constantly falling from a small pipe, bathed his head and +face, and took a long drink. + +"We may be thankful," the sailor, who had already told him that his +name was Stephen Boldero, said, "that someone in the old times laid on +that water. If it had not been for that I do not know what we should +have done, and a drink of muddy stuff once or twice a day is all we +should have got. That there pure water is just the saving of us." + +"What are we going to do now?" Geoffrey asked. "Does the galley go out +every day?" + +"Bless you, no; sometimes not once a month; only when a sail is made +out in sight, and the wind is light enough to give us the chance of +capturing her. Sometimes we go out on a cruise for a month at a time; +but that is not often. At other times we do the work of the town, mend +the roads, sweep up the filth, repair the quays; do anything, in fact, +that wants doing. The work, except in the galleys, is not above a man's +strength. Some men die under it, because the Spaniards lose heart and +turn sullen, and then down comes the whip on their backs, and they +break their hearts over it; but a man as does his best, and is cheerful +and willing, gets on well enough except in the galleys. + +"That is work; that is. There is a chap walks up and down with a whip, +and when they are chasing he lets it fall promiscuous, and even if you +are rowing fit to kill yourself you do not escape it; but on shore here +if you keep up your spirits things ain't altogether so bad. Now I have +got you here to talk to in my own lingo I feel quite a different man. +For although I have been here ten years, and can jabber in Spanish, I +have never got on with these fellows; as is only natural, seeing that I +am an Englishman and know all about their doings in the Spanish Main, +and hate them worse than poison. Well, our time is up, so I am off. I +do not expect they will make you work till your wounds are healed a +bit." + +This supposition turned out correct, and for the next week Geoffrey was +allowed to remain quietly in the yard when the gang went out to their +work. At the end of that time his wound had closed, and being heartily +sick of the monotony of his life, he voluntarily fell in by the side of +Boldero when the gang was called to work. The overseer was apparently +pleased at this evidence of willingness on the part of the young +captive, and said something to him in his own tongue. This his +companion translated as being an order that he was not to work too hard +for the present. + +"I am bound to say, mate, that these Moors are, as a rule, much better +masters than the Spaniards. I have tried them both, and I would rather +be in a Moorish galley than a Spanish one by a long way, except just +when they are chasing a ship, and are half wild with excitement. These +Moors are not half bad fellows, while it don't seem to me that a +Spaniard has got a heart in him. Then again, I do not think they are +quite so hard on Englishmen as they are on Spaniards; for they hate the +Spaniards because they drove them out of their country. Once or twice I +have had a talk with the overseer when he has been in a special good +humour, and he knows we hate the Spaniards as much as they do, and that +though they call us all Christian dogs, our Christianity ain't a bit +like that of the Spaniards. I shall let him know the first chance I +have that you are English too, and I shall ask him to let you always +work by the side of me." + +As Stephen Boldero had foretold, Geoffrey did not find his work on +shore oppressively hard. He did his best, and as he and his companion +always performed a far larger share of work than that done by any two +of the Spaniards, they gained the good-will of their overlooker, who, +when a fortnight later the principal bey of the place sent down a +request for two slaves to do some rough work in his garden, selected +them for the work. + +"Now we will just buckle to, lad," Stephen Boldero said. "This bey is +the captain of the corsair, and he can make things a deal easier for us +if he chooses; so we will not spare ourselves. He had one of the men up +there two years ago, and kept him for some months, and the fellow found +it so hard when he came back here again that he pined and died off in +no time." + +A guard took them to the bey's house, which stood on high ground behind +the town. The bey came out to examine the men chosen for his work. + +"I hear," he said, "that you are both English, and hate the Spaniards +as much as we do. Well, if I find you work well, you will be well +treated; if not, you will be sent back at once. Now, come with me, and +I shall show you what you have to do." + +The high wall at the back of the garden had been pulled down, and the +bey intended to enlarge the inclosure considerably. + +"You are first," he said, "to dig a foundation for the new wall along +that line marked out by stakes. When that is done you will supply the +masons with stone and mortar. When the wall is finished the new ground +will all have to be dug deeply and planted with shrubs, under the +superintendence of my gardener. While you are working here you will not +return to the prison, but will sleep in that out-house in the garden." + +"You shall have no reason to complain of our work," Boldero said. "We +Englishmen are no sluggards, and we do not want a man always looking +after us as those lazy Spaniards do." + +As soon as they were supplied with tools Geoffrey and his companion set +to work. The trench for the foundations had to be dug three feet deep; +and though the sun blazed fiercely down upon them, they worked +unflinchingly. From time to time the bey's head servant came down to +examine their progress, and occasionally watched them from among the +trees. At noon he bade them lay aside their tools and come into the +shed, and a slave boy brought them out a large dish of vegetables, with +small pieces of meat in it. + +"This is something like food," Stephen said as he sat down to it. "It +is ten years since such a mess as this has passed my lips. I do not +wonder that chap fell ill when he got back to prison if this is the +sort of way they fed him here." + +That evening the Moorish overseer reported to the bey that the two +slaves had done in the course of the day as much work as six of the +best native labourers could have performed, and that without his +standing over them or paying them any attention whatever. Moved by the +report, the bey himself went down to the end of the garden. + +"It is wonderful," he said, stroking his beard. "Truly these Englishmen +are men of sinews. Never have I seen so much work done by two men in a +day. Take care of them, Mahmoud, and see that they are well fed; the +willing servant should be well cared for." + +The work went steadily on until the wall was raised, the ground dug, +and the shrubs planted. It was some months before all this was done, +and the two slaves continued to attract the observation and good-will +of the bey by their steady and cheerful labour. Their work began soon +after sunrise, and continued until noon. Then they had three hours to +themselves to eat their mid-day meal and dose in the shed, and then +worked again until sunset. The bey often strolled down to the edge of +the trees to watch them, and sometimes even took guests to admire the +way in which these two Englishmen, although ignorant that any eyes were +upon them, performed their work. + +His satisfaction was evinced by the abundance of food supplied them, +their meal being frequently supplemented by fruit and other little +luxuries. Severely as they laboured, Geoffrey and his companion were +comparatively happy. Short as was the time that the former had worked +with the gang, he appreciated the liberty he now enjoyed, and +especially congratulated himself upon being spared the painful life of +a galley-slave at sea. As to Boldero, the change from the prison with +the companions he hated, its degrading work, and coarse and scanty +food, made a new man of him. + +He had been but two-and-twenty when captured by the Spaniards, and was +now in the prime of life and strength. The work, which had seemed very +hard to Geoffrey at first, was to him but as play, while the +companionship of his countryman, his freedom from constant +surveillance, the absence of all care, and the abundance and excellence +of his food, filled him with new life; and the ladies of the boy's +household often sat and listened to the strange songs that rose from +the slaves toiling in the garden. + +As the work approached its conclusion Geoffrey and his companion had +many a talk over what would next befall them. There was one reason only +that weighed in favour of the life with the slave-gang. In their +present position there was no possibility whatever, so far as they +could discern, of effecting their escape; whereas, as slaves, should +the galley in which they rowed be overpowered by any ship it attacked, +they would obtain their freedom. The chance of this, however, was +remote, as the fast-rowing galleys could almost always make their +escape should the vessel they attacked prove too strong to be captured. + +When the last bed had been levelled and the last shrub planted the +superintendent told them to follow him into the house, as the bey was +desirous of speaking with them. They found him seated on a divan. + +"Christians," he said, "I have watched you while you have been at work, +and truly you have not spared yourselves in my service, but have +laboured for me with all your strength, well and willingly. I see now +that it is true that the people of your nation differ much from the +Spaniards, who are dogs. + +"I see that trust is to be placed in you, and were you but true +believers I would appoint you to a position where you could win credit +and honour. As it is, I cannot place you over believers in the prophet; +but neither am I willing that you should return to the gang from which +I took you. I will, therefore, leave you free to work for yourselves. +There are many of my friends who have seen you labouring, and will give +you employment. It will be known in the place that you are under my +protection, and that any who insult or ill-treat you will be severely +punished. Should you have any complaint to make, come freely to me and +I will see that justice is done you. + +"This evening a crier will go through the place proclaiming that the +two English galley-slaves have been given their freedom by me, and will +henceforth live in the town without molestation from anyone, carrying +on their work and selling their labour like true believers. The crier +will inform the people that the nation to which you belong is at war +with our enemies the Spaniards, and that, save as to the matter of your +religion, you are worthy of being regarded as friends by all good +Moslems. My superintendent will go down with you in the morning. I have +ordered him to hire a little house for you and furnish it with what is +needful, to recommend you to your neighbours, and to give you a purse +of piastres with which to maintain yourselves until work comes to you." + +Stephen Boldero expressed the warmest gratitude, on the part of his +companion and himself, to the bey for his kindness. + +"I have done but simple justice," the bey said, "and no thanks are +necessary. Faithful work should have its reward, and as you have done +to me so I do to you." + +The next morning as they were leaving, a female slave presented them +with a purse of silver, the gift of the bey's wife and daughters, who +had often derived much pleasure from the songs of the two captives. The +superintendent conducted them to a small hut facing the sea. It was +furnished with the few articles that were, according to native ideas, +necessary for comfort. There were cushions on the divan of baked clay +raised about a foot above the floor, which served as a sofa during the +day and as a bed at night. There was a small piece of carpet on the +floor and a few cooking utensils on a shelf, and some dishes of burnt +clay; and nothing more was required. There was, however, a small chest, +in which, after the superintendent had left, they found two sets of +garments as worn by the natives. + +"This is a comfort indeed," Geoffrey said. "My clothes are all in rags, +and as for yours the less we say about them the better. I shall feel +like a new man in these things." + +"I shall be glad myself," Stephen agreed, "for the clothes they give +the galley-slaves are scarce decent for a Christian man to wear. My +consolation has been that if they had been shocked by our appearance +they would have given us more clothes; but as they did not mind it +there was no reason why I should. Still it would be a comfort to be +cleanly and decent again." + +For the first few days the natives of the place looked askance at these +Christians in their midst, but the bey's orders had been peremptory +that no insults should be offered to them. Two days after their +liberation one of the principal men of the place sent for them and +employed them in digging the foundations for a fountain, and a deep +trench of some hundred yards in length for the pipe for bringing water +to it. After that they had many similar jobs, receiving always the +wages paid to regular workmen, and giving great satisfaction by their +steady toil. Sometimes when not otherwise engaged they went out in +boats with fishermen, receiving a portion of the catch in payment of +their labours. + +So some months passed away. Very frequently they talked over methods of +Escape. The only plan that seemed at all possible was to take a boat +and make out to sea; but they knew that they would be pursued, and if +overtaken would revert to their former life at the galleys, a change +which would be a terrible one indeed after the present life of freedom +and independence. They knew, too, that they might be days before +meeting with a ship, for all traders in the Mediterranean hugged the +northern shores as much as possible in order to avoid the dreaded +corsairs, and there would be a far greater chance of their being +recaptured by one of the Moorish cruisers than of lighting upon a +Christian trader. + +"It is a question of chance," Stephen said, "and when the chance comes +we will seize it; but it is no use our giving up a life against which +there is not much to be said, unless some fair prospect of escape +offers itself to us." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI. + +THE ESCAPE. + + +"In one respect," Geoffrey said, as they were talking over their chance +of escape, "I am sorry that the bey has behaved so kindly to us." + +"What is that?" Stephen Boldero asked in surprise. + +"Well, I was thinking that were it not for that we might manage to +contrive some plan of escape in concert with the galley-slaves, get +them down to the shore here, row off to the galley, overpower the three +or four men who live on board her, and make off with her. Of course we +should have had to accumulate beforehand a quantity of food and some +barrels of water, for I have noticed that when they go out they always +take their stores on board with them, and bring on shore on their +return what has not been consumed. Still, I suppose that could be +managed. However, it seems to me that our hands are tied in that +direction by the kindness of the bey. After his conduct to us it would +be ungrateful in the extreme for us to carry off his galley." + +"So it would, Geoffrey. Besides I doubt whether the plan would succeed. +You may be sure the Spaniards are as jealous as can be of the good +fortune that we have met with, and were we to propose such a scheme to +them the chances are strongly in favour of one of them trying to better +his own position by denouncing us. I would only trust them as far as I +can see them. No, if we ever do anything it must be done by ourselves. +There is no doubt that if some night when there is a strong wind +blowing from the south-east we were to get on board one of these +fishing-boats, hoist a sail, and run before it, we should not be far +off from the coast of Spain before they started to look for us. But +what better should we be there? We can both talk Spanish well enough, +but we could not pass as Spaniards. Besides, they would find out soon +enough that we were not Catholics, and where should we be then? Either +sent to row in their galleys or clapped into the dungeons of the +Inquisition, and like enough burnt alive at the stake. That would be +out of the frying-pan into the fire with vengeance." + +"I think we might pass as Spaniards," Geoffrey said; "for there is a +great deal of difference between the dialects of the different +provinces, and confined as you have been for the last ten years with +Spanish sailors you must have caught their way of talking. Still, I +agree with you it will be better to wait for a bit longer for any +chance that may occur rather than risk landing in Spain again, where +even if we passed as natives we should have as hard work to get our +living as we have here, and with no greater chance of making our way +home again." + +During the time that they had been captives some three or four vessels +had been brought in by the corsair. The men composing the crews had +been either sold as slaves to Moors or Arabs in the interior or sent to +Algiers, which town lay over a hundred miles to the east. They were of +various nationalities, Spanish, French, and Italian, as the two friends +learned from the talk of the natives, for they always abstained from +going near the point where the prisoners were landed, as they were +powerless to assist the unfortunate captives in any way, and the sight +of their distress was very painful to them. + +One day, however, they learned from the people who were running down to +the shore to see the captives landed from a ship that had been brought +in by the corsair during the night, that there were two or three women +among the captives. This was the first time that any females had been +captured since their arrival at the place, for women seldom travelled +far from their homes in those days except the wives of high officials +journeying in great ships that were safe from the attack of the Moorish +corsairs. + +"Let us go down and see them," Boldero said. "I have not seen the face +of a white woman for nine years." + +"I will go if you like," Geoffrey said. "They will not guess that we +are Europeans, for we are burnt as dark as the Moors." + +They went down to the landing-place. Eight men and two women were +landed from the boat. These were the sole survivors of the crew. + +"They are Spaniards," Boldero said. "I pity that poor girl. I suppose +the other woman is her servant." + +The girl, who was about sixteen years of age, was very pale, and had +evidently been crying terribly. She did not seem to heed the cries and +threats with which the townspeople as usual assailed the newly-arrived +captives, but kept her eyes fixed upon one of the captives who walked +before her. + +"That is her father, no doubt," Geoffrey said. "It is probably her last +look at him. Come away, Stephen; I am awfully sorry we came here. I +shall not be able to get that girl's face out of my mind for I don't +know how long." + +Without a word they went back to their hut. They had no particular work +that day. Geoffrey went restlessly in and out, sometimes pacing along +the strand, sometimes coming in and throwing himself on the divan. +Stephen Boldero went on quietly mending a net that had been damaged the +night before, saying nothing, but glancing occasionally with an amused +look at his companion's restless movements, Late in the afternoon +Geoffrey burst out suddenly: "Stephen, we must try and rescue that girl +somehow from her fate." + +"I supposed that was what it was coming to," Boldero said quietly. +"Well, let me hear all about it. I know you have been thinking it over +ever since morning. What are your ideas?" + +"I do not know that I have any ideas beyond getting her and her father +down to a boat and making off." + +"Well, you certainly have not done much if you haven't got farther than +that," Stephen said drily. "Now, if you had spent the day talking it +over with me instead of wandering about like one out of his mind, we +should have got a great deal further than that by this time. However, I +have been thinking for you. I know what you young fellows are. As soon +as I saw that girl's face and looked at you I was dead certain there +was an end of peace and quietness, and that you would be bent upon some +plan of getting her off. It did not need five minutes to show that I +was right; and I have been spending my time thinking, while you have +thrown yours away in fidgeting. + +"Well, I think it is worth trying. Of course it will be a vastly more +difficult job getting the girl and her father away than just taking a +boat and sailing off as we have often talked of doing. Then, on the +other hand, it would altogether alter our position afterwards. By his +appearance and hers I have no doubt he is a well-to-do trader, perhaps +a wealthy one. He walked with his head upright when the crowd were +yelling and cursing, and is evidently a man of courage and +determination. Now, if we had reached the Spanish coast by ourselves we +should have been questioned right and left, and, as I have said all +along, they would soon have found that we were not Spaniards, for we +could not have said where we came from, or given our past history, or +said where our families lived. But it would be altogether different if +we landed with them. Every one would be interested about them. We +should only be two poor devils of sailors who had escaped with them, +and he would help to pass it off and get us employment; so that the +difficulty that has hitherto prevented us from trying to escape is very +greatly diminished. Now, as to getting them away. Of course she has +been taken up to the bey's, and no doubt he will send her as a present +to the bey of Algiers. I know that is what has been done several times +before when young women have been captured. + +"I have been thinking it over, and I do not see a possibility of +getting to speak to her as long as she is at the bey's. I do not see +that it can be done anyhow. She will be indoors most of the time, and +if she should go into the garden there would be other women with her. +Our only plan, as far as I can see at present, would be to carry her +off from her escort on the journey. I do not suppose she will have more +than two, or at most three, mounted men with her, and we ought to be +able to dispose of them. As to her father, the matter is comparatively +easy. We know the ways of the prison, and I have no doubt we can get +him out somehow; only there is the trouble of the question of time. She +has got to be rescued and brought back and hidden somewhere till +nightfall, he has got to be set free the same evening, and we have to +embark early enough to be well out of sight before daylight; and maybe +there will not be a breath of wind stirring. It is a tough job, +Geoffrey, look at it which way you will." + +"It is a tough job," Geoffrey agreed. "I am afraid the escort would be +stronger than you think. A present of this kind to the bey is regarded +as important, and I should say half a dozen horsemen at least will be +sent with her. In that case an attempt at rescue would be hopeless. We +have no arms, and if we had we could not kill six mounted men; and if +even one escaped, our plans would be all defeated. The question is, +would they send her by land? It seems to me quite as likely that they +might send her by water." + +"Yes, that is likely enough, Geoffrey. In that case everything would +depend upon the vessel he sent her in. If it is the great galley there +is an end of it; if it is one of their little coasters it might be +managed. We are sure to learn that before long. The bey might keep her +for a fortnight or so, perhaps longer, for her to recover somewhat from +her trouble and get up her good looks again, so as to add to the value +of the present. If she were well and bright she would be pretty enough +for anything. In the meantime we can arrange our plans for getting her +father away. Of course if she goes with a big escort on horseback, or +if she goes in the galley, there is an end of our plans. I am ready to +help you, Geoffrey, if there is a chance of success; but I am not going +to throw away my life if there is not, and unless she goes down in a +coaster there is an end of the scheme." + +"I quite agree to that," Geoffrey replied; "we cannot accomplish +impossibilities." + +They learned upon the following day that three of the newly-arrived +captives were to take the places of the galley-slaves who had been +killed in the capture of the Spanish ship, which had defended itself +stoutly, and that the others were to be sold for work in the interior. + +"It is pretty certain," Boldero said, "that the trader will not be one +of the three chosen for the galley. The work would break him down in a +month. That makes that part of the business easier, for we can get him +away on the journey inland, and hide him up here until his daughter is +sent off." + +Geoffrey looked round the bare room. + +"Well, I do not say as how we could hide him here," Boldero said in +answer to the look, "but we might hide him somewhere among the sand- +hills outside the place, and take him food at night." + +"Yes, we might do that," Geoffrey agreed. "That could be managed easily +enough, I should think, for there are clumps of bushes scattered all +over the sand-hills half a mile back from the sea. The trouble will be +if we get him here, and find after all that we cannot rescue his +daughter." + +"That will make no difference," Boldero said. "In that case we will +make off with him alone. Everything else will go on just the same. Of +course, I should be very sorry not to save the girl; but, as far as we +are concerned, if we save the father it will answer our purpose." + +Geoffrey made no reply. Just at that moment his own future was a very +secondary matter, in comparison, to the rescue of this unhappy Spanish +girl. + +Geoffrey and his companion had been in the habit of going up +occasionally to the prison. They had won over the guard by small +presents, and were permitted to go in and out with fruit and other +little luxuries for the galley-slaves. They now abstained from going +near the place, in order that no suspicion might fall upon them after +his escape of having had any communication with the Spanish trader. + +Shortly after the arrival of the captives two merchants from the +interior came down, and Geoffrey learned that they had visited the +prison, and had made a bargain with the bey for all the captives except +those transferred to the galley. The two companions had talked the +matter over frequently, and had concluded it was best that only one of +them should be engaged in the adventure, for the absence of both might +be noticed. After some discussion it was agreed that Geoffrey should +undertake the task, and that Boldero should go alone to the house where +they were now at work, and should mention that his friend was unwell, +and was obliged to remain at home for the day. + +As they knew the direction in which the captives would be taken +Geoffrey started before daybreak, and kept steadily along until he +reached a spot where it was probable they would halt for the night. It +was twenty miles away, and there was here a well of water and a grove +of trees. Late in the afternoon he saw the party approaching. It +consisted of the merchants, two armed Arabs, and the five captives, all +of whom were carrying burdens. They were crawling painfully along, +overpowered by the heat of the sun, by the length of the journey, and +by the weight they carried. Several times the Arabs struck them heavily +with their sticks to force them to keep up. + +Geoffrey retired from the other side of the clump of trees, and lay +down in a depression of the sand-hills until darkness came on, when he +again entered the grove, and crawling cautiously forward made his way +close up to the party. A fire was blazing, and a meal had been already +cooked and eaten. The traders and the two Arabs were sitting by the +fire; the captives were lying extended on the ground. Presently, at the +command of one of the Arabs, they rose to their feet and proceeded to +collect some more pieces of wood for the fire. As they returned the +light fell on the gray hair of the man upon whom Geoffrey had noticed +that the girl's eyes were fixed. + +He noted the place where he lay down, and had nothing to do now but to +wait until the party were asleep. He felt sure that no guard would be +set, for any attempt on the part of the captives to escape would be +nothing short of madness. There was nowhere for them to go, and they +would simply wander about until they died of hunger and exhaustion, or +until they were recaptured, in which case they would be almost beaten +to death. In an hour's time the traders and their men lay down by the +fire, and all was quiet. Geoffrey crawled round until he was close to +the Spaniard. He waited until he felt sure that the Arabs were asleep, +and then crawled up to him. The man started as he touched him. + +"Silence, seņor," Geoffrey whispered in Spanish; "I am a friend, and +have come to rescue you." + +"I care not for life; a few days of this work will kill me, and the +sooner the better. I have nothing to live for. They killed my wife the +other day, and my daughter is a captive in their hands. I thank you, +whoever you are, but I will not go." + +"We are going to try to save your daughter too," Geoffrey whispered; +"we have a plan for carrying you both off." + +The words gave new life to the Spaniard. + +"In that case, sir, I am ready. Whoever you are whom God has sent to my +aid I will follow you blindly, whatever comes of it." + +Geoffrey crawled away a short distance, followed by the Spaniard. As +soon as they were well beyond the faint light now given out by the +expiring fire they rose to their feet, and gaining the track took their +way on the backward road. As soon as they were fairly away, Geoffrey +explained to the Spaniard who he was, and how he had undertaken to +endeavour to rescue him. The joy and gratitude of the Spaniard were too +deep for words, and he uttered his thanks in broken tones. When they +had walked about a mile Geoffrey halted. + +"Sit down here," he said. "I have some meat and fruit here and a small +skin of water. We have a long journey before us, for we must get near +the town you left this morning before daybreak, and you must eat to +keep up your strength." + +"I did not think," the Spaniard said, "when we arrived at the well, +that I could have walked another mile had my life depended upon it. Now +I feel a new man, after the fresh hope you have given me. I no longer +feel the pain of my bare feet or the blisters the sun has raised on my +naked back. I am struggling now for more than life--for my daughter. +You shall not find me fail, sir." + +All night they toiled on. The Spaniard kept his promise, and utterly +exhausted as he was, and great as was the pain in his limbs, held on +bravely. With the first dawn of morning they saw the line of the sea +before them. They now turned off from the track, and in another half +hour the Spaniard took shelter in a clump of bushes in a hollow, while +Geoffrey, having left with him the remainder of the supply of +provisions and water, pursued his way and reached the hut just as the +sun was shining in the east, and without having encountered a single +person. + +"Well, have you succeeded?" Boldero asked eagerly, as he entered. + +"Yes; I have got him away. He is in hiding within a mile of this place. +He kept on like a hero. I was utterly tired myself, and how he managed +to walk the distance after what he had gone through in the day is more +than I can tell. His name is Mendez. He is a trader in Cadiz, and owns +many vessels. He was on his way to Italy, with his wife and daughter, +in one of his own ships, in order to gratify the desire of his wife to +visit the holy places at Rome. She was killed by a cannon-shot during +the fight, and his whole heart is now wrapped up in his daughter. And +now, Stephen, I must lie down and sleep. You will have to go to work +alone to-day again, and can truly say that I am still unfit for +labour." + +Four days later it became known in the little town that a messenger had +arrived from the merchant who bought the slaves from the bey, saying +that one of them had made his escape from their first halting-place. + +"The dog will doubtless die in the desert," the merchant wrote; "but if +he should find his way down, or you should hear of him as arriving at +any of the villages, I pray you to send him up to me with a guard. I +will so treat him that it will be a lesson to my other slaves not to +follow his example." + +Every evening after dark Geoffrey went out with a supply of food and +water to the fugitive. For a week he had no news to give him as to his +daughter; but on the eighth night he said that he and his companion had +that morning been sent by the bey on board the largest of the coasting +vessels in the port, with orders to paint the cabins and put them in a +fit state for the reception of a personage of importance. + +"This is fortunate, indeed," Geoffrey went on. "No doubt she is +intended for the transport of your daughter. Her crew consists of a +captain and five men, but at present they are living ashore; and as we +shall be going backwards and forwards to her, we ought to have little +difficulty in getting on board and hiding away in the hold before she +starts. I think everything promises well for the success of our +scheme." + +The bey's superintendent came down the next day to see how matters were +going on on board the vessel. The painting was finished that evening, +and the next day two slaves brought down a quantity of hangings and +cushions, which Geoffrey and his companion assisted the superintendent +to hang up and place in order. Provisions and water had already been +taken on board, and they learnt that the party who were to sail in her +would come off early the next morning. + +At midnight Geoffrey, Boldero, and the Spaniard came down to the little +port, embarked in a fisherman's boat moored at the stairs, and +noiselessly rowed off to the vessel. They mounted on to her deck +barefooted. Boldero was the last to leave the boat, giving her a +vigorous push with his foot in the direction of the shore, from which +the vessel was but some forty yards away. They descended into the hold, +where they remained perfectly quiet until the first light of dawn +enabled them to see what they were doing, and then moved some baskets +full of vegetables, and concealed themselves behind them. + +A quarter of an hour later they heard a boat come alongside, and the +voices of the sailors. Then they heard the creaking of cordage as the +sails were let fall in readiness for a start. Half an hour later +another boat came alongside. There was a trampling of feet on the deck +above them, and the bey's voice giving orders. A few minutes later the +anchor was raised, there was more talking on deck, and then they heard +a boat push off, and knew by the rustle of water against the planks +beside them that the vessel was under way. + +The wind was light and the sea perfectly calm, and beyond the slight +murmur of the water, those below would not have known that the ship was +in motion. It was very hot down in the hold, but fortunately the crew +had not taken the trouble to put on the hatches, and at times a faint +breath of air could be felt below. Geoffrey and his companion talked +occasionally in low tones; but the Spaniard was so absorbed by his +anxiety as to the approaching struggle, and the thought that he might +soon clasp his daughter to his arms, that he seldom spoke. + +No plans could be formed as to the course they were to take, for they +could not tell whether those of the crew off duty would retire to sleep +in the little forecastle or would lie down on deck. Then, too, they +were ignorant as to the number of men who had come on board with the +captive. The overseer had mentioned the day before that he was going, +and it was probable that three or four others would accompany him. +Therefore they had to reckon upon ten opponents. Their only weapons +were three heavy iron bolts, some two feet long. These Boldero had +purchased in exchange for a few fish, when a prize brought in was +broken up as being useless for the purposes of the Moors. + +"What I reckon is," he said, "that you and I ought to be able to settle +two apiece of these fellows before they fairly know what is happening. +The Don ought very well to account for another. So that only leaves +five of them; and five against three are no odds worth speaking of, +especially when the five are woke up by a sudden attack, and ain't sure +how many there are against them. I don't expect much trouble over the +affair." + +"I don't want to kill more of the poor fellows than I can help," +Geoffrey said. + +"No more do I; but you see it's got to be either killing or being +killed, and I am perfectly certain which I prefer. Still, as you say, +if the beggars are at all reasonable I ain't for hurting them, but the +first few we have got to hit hard. When we get matters a little even, +we can speak them fair." + +The day passed slowly, and in spite of their bent and cramped position +Geoffrey and Stephen Boldero dozed frequently. The Spaniard never +closed an eye. He was quite prepared to take his part in the struggle; +and as he was not yet fifty years of age, his assistance was not to be +despised. But the light-hearted carelessness of his companions, who +joked under their breath, and laughed and eat unconcernedly with a +life-and-death struggle against heavy odds before them, surprised him +much. + +As darkness came on the party below became wakeful. Their time was +coming now, and they had no doubt whatever as to the result. Their most +formidable opponents would be the men who had come on board with the +bey's superintendent, as these, no doubt, would be fully armed. As for +the sailors, they might have arms on board, but these would not be +ready to hand, and it was really only with the guards they would have +to deal. + +"I tell you what I think would be a good plan, Stephen," Geoffrey said +suddenly. "You see, there is plenty of spare line down here; if we wait +until they are all asleep we can go round and tie their legs together, +or put ropes round their ankles and fasten them to ring-bolts. If we +could manage that without waking them, we might capture the craft +without shedding any blood, and might get them down into the hold one +after the other." + +"I think that is a very good plan," Stephen agreed. "I do not like the +thought of knocking sleeping men on the head any more than you do; and +if we are careful, we might get them all tied up before an alarm is +given. There, the anchor has gone down. I thought very likely they +would not sail at night. That is capital. You may be sure that they +will be pretty close inshore, and they probably will have only one man +on watch; and as likely as not not even one, for they will not dream of +any possible danger." + +For another two hours the sound of talk on deck went on, but at last +all became perfectly quiet. The party below waited for another half +hour, and then noiselessly ascended the ladder to the deck, holding in +one hand a cudgel, in the other a number of lengths of line cut about +six feet long. Each as he reached the deck lay down flat. The Spaniard +had been told to remain perfectly quiet while the other two went about +their task. + +First they crawled aft, for the bey's guards would, they knew, be +sleeping at that end, and working together they tied the legs of these +men without rousing them. The ropes could not be tightly pulled, as +this would at once have disturbed them. They were therefore fastened +somewhat in the fashion of manacles, so that although the men might +rise to their feet they would fall headlong the moment they tried to +walk. In addition other ropes were fastened to these and taken from one +man to another. Then their swords were drawn from the sheaths and their +knives from their sashes. + +The operation was a long one, as it had to be conducted with the +greatest care and caution. They then crept back to the hatchway and +told the Spaniard that the most formidable enemies had been made safe. + +"Here are a sword and a knife for you, seņor; and now as we are all +armed I consider the ship as good as won, for the sailors are not +likely to make much resistance by themselves. However, we will secure +some of them. The moon will be up in half an hour, and that will be an +advantage to us." + +The captain and three of the sailors were soon tied up like the others. +Two men were standing in the bow of the vessel leaning against the +bulwarks, and when the moon rose it could be seen by their attitude +that both were asleep. + +"Now, we may as well begin," Geoffrey said. "Let us take those two +fellows in the bow by surprise. Hold a knife to their throats, and tell +them if they utter the least sound we will kill them. Then we will make +them go down into the forecastle and fasten them there." + +"I am ready," Stephen said, and they stole forward to the two sleeping +men. They grasped them suddenly by the throat and held a knife before +their eyes, Boldero telling them in a stern whisper that if they +uttered a cry they would be stabbed to the heart. Paralysed by the +sudden attack they did not make the slightest struggle, but accompanied +their unknown assailants to the forecastle and were there fastened in. +Joined now by the Spaniard, Geoffrey and his companion went aft and +roused one of the sleepers there with a threat similar to that which +had silenced the sailors. + +He was, however, a man of different stuff. He gave a loud shout and +grappled with Boldero, who struck him a heavy blow with his fist in the +face, and this for a moment silenced him; but the alarm being given, +the superintendent and the two men struggled to their feet, only +however to fall prostrate as soon as they tried to walk. + +"Lie quiet and keep silence!" Boldero shouted in a threatening voice. +"You are unarmed and at our mercy. Your feet are bound and you are +perfectly helpless. We do not wish to take your lives, but unless you +are quiet we shall be compelled to do so." + +The men had discovered by this time that their arms had gone, and were +utterly disconcerted by the heavy and unexpected fall they had just +had. Feeling that they were indeed at the mercy of their captors, they +lay quiet. + +"Now then," Boldero went on, "one at a time. Keep quiet, you rascals +there!" he broke off, shouting to the sailors who were rolling and +tumbling on the deck forward, "or I will cut all your throats for you. +Now then, Geoffrey, do you and the seņor cut the rope that fastens that +man on the port side to his comrades. March him to the hatchway and +make him go down into the hold. Keep your knives ready and kill him at +once if he offers the slightest resistance." + +One by one the superintendent, the three guards, the captain and +sailors were all made to descend into the hold, and the hatches were +put over it and fastened down. + +"Now, seņor," Geoffrey said, "we can spare you." + +The Spaniard hurried to the cabin, opened the door, and called out his +daughter's name. There was a scream of delight within as Dolores +Mendez, who had been awakened by the tumult, recognized her father's +voice, and leaping up from her couch threw herself into his arms. +Geoffrey and his companion now opened the door of the forecastle and +called the two sailors out. + +"Now," Boldero said, "if you want to save your lives you have got to +obey our orders. First of all fall to work and get up the anchor, and +then shake out the sails again. I will take the helm, Geoffrey, and do +you keep your eye on these two fellows. There is no fear of their +playing any tricks now that they see they are alone on deck, but they +might, if your back were turned, unfasten the hatches. However, I do +not think we need fear trouble that way, as for ought they know we may +have cut the throats of all the others." + +A few minutes later the vessel was moving slowly through the water with +her head to the north-west. + +"We must be out of sight of land if we can by the morning," Stephen +said, when Geoffrey two hours later came to take his place at the helm; +"at any rate until we have passed the place we started from. Once +beyond that it does not matter much; but it will be best either to keep +out of sight of land altogether, or else to sail pretty close to it, so +that they can see the boat is one of their own craft. We can choose +which we will do when we see which way the breeze sets in in the +morning." + +It came strongly from the south, and they therefore determined to sail +direct for Carthagena. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII. + +A SPANISH MERCHANT. + + +As soon as the sails had been set, and the vessel was under way, the +Spaniard came out from the cabin. "My daughter is attiring herself, +seņor," he said to Stephen Boldero, for Geoffrey was at the time at the +helm. "She is longing to see you, and to thank you for the inestimable +services you have rendered to us both. But for you I should now be +dying or dead, my daughter a slave for life in the palace of the bey. +What astonishes us both is, that such noble service should have been +rendered to us by two absolute strangers, and not strangers only, but +by Englishmen--a people with whom Spain is at war--and who assuredly +can have no reason to love us. How came you first to think of +interesting yourself on our behalf?" + +"To tell you the truth, seņor," Stephen Boldero said bluntly, "it was +the sight of your daughter and not of yourself that made us resolve to +save you if possible, or rather, I should say, made my friend Geoffrey +do so. After ten years in the galleys one's heart gets pretty tough, +and although even I felt a deep pity for your daughter, I own it would +never have entered my mind to risk my neck in order to save her. But +Geoffrey is younger and more easily touched, and when he saw her as she +landed pale and white and grief-stricken, and yet looking as if her own +fate touched her less than the parting from you, my good friend +Geoffrey Vickars was well-nigh mad, and declared that in some way or +other, and at whatever risk to ourselves, you must both be saved. In +this matter I have been but a passive instrument in his hands; as +indeed it was only right that I should be, seeing that he is of gentle +blood and an esquire serving under Captain Vere in the army of the +queen, while I am but a rough sailor. What I have done I have done +partly because his heart was in the matter, partly because the +adventure promised, if successful, to restore me to freedom, and partly +also, seņor, for the sake of your brave young daughter." + +"Ah, you are modest, sir," the Spaniard said. "You are one of those who +belittle your own good deeds. I feel indeed more grateful than I can +express to you as well as to your friend." + +The merchant's daughter now appeared at the door of the cabin. Her +father took her hand and led her up to Boldero. "This, Dolores, is one +of the two Englishmen who have at the risk of their lives saved me from +death and you from worse than death. Thank him, my child, and to the +end of your life never cease to remember him in your prayers." + +"I am glad to have been of assistance, seņora," Boldero said as the +girl began to speak; "but as I have just been telling your father, I +have played but a small part in the business, it is my friend Don +Geoffrey Vickars who has been the leader in the matter. He saw you as +you landed at the boat, and then and there swore to save you, and all +that has been done has been under his direction. It was he who followed +and rescued your father, and I have really had nothing to do with the +affair beyond hiding myself in the hole and helping to tie up your +Moors." + +"Ah, sir," the girl said, laying her hands earnestly upon the sailor's +shoulder, "it is useless for you to try to lessen the services you have +rendered us. Think of what I was but an hour since--a captive with the +most horrible of all fates before me, and with the belief that my +father was dying by inches in the hands of some cruel task-master, and +now he is beside me and I am free. This has been done by two strangers, +men of a nation which I have been taught to regard as an enemy. It +seems to me that no words that I can speak could tell you even faintly +what I feel, and it is God alone who can reward you for what you have +done." + +Leaving Boldero the Spaniard and his daughter went to the stern, where +Geoffrey was standing at the helm. + +"My daughter and I have come to thank you, seņor, for having saved us +from the worst of fates and restored us to each other. Your friend +tells me that it is to you it is chiefly due that this has come about, +for that you were so moved to pity at the sight of my daughter when we +first landed, that you declared at once that you would save her from +her fate at whatever risk to yourself, and that since then he has been +but following your directions." + +"Then if he says that, seņor, he belies himself. I was, it is true, the +first to declare that we must save your daughter at any cost if it were +possible to do so; but had I not said so, I doubt not he would have +announced the same resolution. Since then we have planned every thing +together; and as he is older and more experienced than I am, it was +upon his opinion that we principally acted. We had long made up our +minds to escape when the opportunity came. Had it not been that we were +stirred into action by seeing your daughter in the hands of the Moors, +it might have been years before we decided to run the risks. Therefore +if you owe your freedom to us, to some extent we owe ours to you; and +if we have been your protectors so far, we hope that when we arrive in +Spain you will be our protectors there, for to us Spain is as much an +enemy's country as Barbary." + +"That you can assuredly rely upon," the trader replied. "All that I +have is at your disposal." + +For an hour they stood talking. Dolores said but little. She had felt +no shyness with the stalwart sailor, but to this youth who had done her +such signal service she felt unable so frankly to express her feelings +of thankfulness. + +By morning the coast of Africa was but a faint line on the horizon, and +the ship was headed west. Except when any alteration of the sails was +required, the two Moors who acted as the crew were made to retire into +the forecastle, and were there fastened in, Geoffrey and Boldero +sleeping by turns. + +After breakfast the little party gathered round the helm, and at the +request of Juan Mendez, Geoffrey and Stephen both related how it befell +that they had become slaves to the Moors. + +"Your adventures are both singular," the trader said when they had +finished. "Yours, Don Geoffrey, are extraordinary. It is marvellous +that you should have been picked up in that terrible fight, and should +have shared in all the perils of that awful voyage back to Spain +without its being ever suspected that you were English. Once landed in +the service as you say of Seņor Burke, it is not so surprising that you +should have gone freely about Spain. But your other adventures are +wonderful, and you and your friend were fortunate indeed in succeeding +as you did in carrying off the lady he loved; and deeply they must have +mourned your supposed death on the deck of the Moorish galley. And now +tell me what are your plans when you arrive in Spain?" + +"We have no fixed plans, save that we hope some day to be able to +return home," Geoffrey said. "Stephen here could pass well enough as a +Spaniard when once ashore without being questioned, and his idea is, if +there is no possibility of getting on board an English or Dutch ship at +Cadiz, to ship on board a Spaniard, and to take his chance of leaving +her at some port at which she may touch. As for myself, although I +speak Spanish fluently, my accent would at once betray me to be a +foreigner. But if you will take me into your house for a time until I +can see a chance of escaping, my past need not be inquired into. You +could of course mention, were it asked, that I was English by birth, +but had sailed in the Armada with my patron, Mr. Burke, and it would be +naturally supposed that I was an exile from England." + +"That can certainly be managed," the trader said. "I fear that it will +be difficult to get you on board a ship either of your countrymen or of +the Hollanders; these are most closely watched lest fugitives from the +law or from the Inquisition should escape on board them. Still, some +opportunity may sooner or later occur; and the later the better pleased +shall I be, for it will indeed be a pleasure to me to have you with +me." + +In the afternoon Geoffrey said to Stephen, "I have been thinking, +Stephen, about the men in the hold, and I should be glad for them to +return to their homes. If they go with us to Spain they will be made +galley-slaves, and this I should not like, especially in the case of +the bey's superintendent. The bey was most kind to us, and this man +himself always spoke in our favour to him, and behaved well to us. I +think, therefore, that out of gratitude to the bey we should let them +go. The wind is fair, and there are, so far as I can see, no signs of +any change of weather. By to-morrow night the coast of Spain will be in +sight. I see no reason, therefore, why we should not be able to +navigate her until we get near the land, when Mendez can engage the +crew of some fishing-boat to take us into a port. If we put them into +the boat with plenty of water and provisions, they will make the coast +by morning; and as I should guess that we must at present be somewhere +abreast of the port from which we started, they will not be very far +from home when they land." + +"I have no objection whatever, Geoffrey. As you say we were not treated +badly, at any rate from the day when the bey had us up to his house; +and after ten years in the galleys, I do not wish my worst enemies such +a fate. We must, of course, be careful how we get them into the boat." + +"There will be three of us with swords and pistols, and they will be +unarmed," Geoffrey said. "We will put the two men now in the forecastle +into the boat first, and let the others come up one by one and take +their places. We will have a talk with the superintendent first, and +give him a message to the bey, saying that we are not ungrateful for +his kindness to us, but that of course we seized the opportunity that +presented itself of making our escape, as he would himself have done in +similar circumstances; nevertheless that as a proof of our gratitude to +him, we for his sake release the whole party on board, and give them +the means of safely returning." + +An hour later the boat, pulled by four oars, left the side of the ship +with the crew, the superintendent and guards, and the two women who had +come on board to attend upon Dolores upon the voyage. + +The next morning the vessel was within a few miles of the Spanish +coast. An hour later a fishing-boat was hailed, and an arrangement made +with the crew to take the vessel down to Carthagena, which was, they +learned, some fifty miles distant. The wind was now very light, and it +was not until the following day that they entered the port. As it was +at once perceived that the little vessel was Moorish in rigging and +appearance, a boat immediately came alongside to inquire whence she +came. + +Juan Mendez had no difficulty in satisfying the officer as to his +identity, he being well known to several traders in the town. His story +of the attack upon his ship by Barbary pirates, its capture, and his +own escape and that of his daughter by the aid of two Christian +captives, excited great interest as soon as it became known in the +town; for it was rare, indeed, that a captive ever succeeded in making +his escape from the hands of the Moors. It had already been arranged +that, in telling his story, the trader should make as little as +possible of his companions' share in the business, so that public +attention should not be attracted towards them. He himself with Dolores +at once disembarked, but his companions did not come ashore until after +nightfall. + +Stephen Boldero took a Spanish name, but Geoffrey retained his own, as +the story that he was travelling as a servant with Mr. Burke, a well- +known Irish gentleman who had accompanied the Armada, was sufficient to +account for his nationality. Under the plea that he was anxious to +return to Cadiz as soon as possible, Seņor Mendez arranged for horses +and mules to start the next morning. He had sent off two trunks of +clothes to the ship an hour after he landed, and the two Englishmen +therefore escaped all observation, as they wandered about for an hour +or two after landing, and did not go to the inn where Mendez was +staying until it was time to retire to bed. + +The next morning the party started. The clothes that Geoffrey was +wearing were those suited to an employé in a house of business, while +those of Boldero were such as would be worn by the captain or mate of a +merchant vessel on shore. Both were supplied with arms, for although +the party had nothing to attract the cupidity of robbers beyond the +trunks containing the clothes purchased on the preceding day, and the +small amount of money necessary for their travel on the road, the +country was so infested by bands of robbers that no one travelled +unarmed. The journey to Cadiz was, however, accomplished without +adventure. + +The house of Seņor Mendez was a large and comfortable one. Upon the +ground floor were his offices and store-rooms. He himself and his +family occupied the two next floors, while in those above his clerks +and employés lived. His unexpected return caused great surprise, and in +a few hours a number of acquaintances called to hear the story of the +adventures through which he had passed, and to condole with him on the +loss of his wife. At his own request Stephen Boldero had been given in +charge of the principal clerk, and a room assigned to him in the upper +story. + +"I shall be much more comfortable," he said, "among your people, Don +Mendez. I am a rough sailor, and ten years in the galleys don't improve +any manners a man may have had. If I were among your friends I would be +out of place and uncomfortable, and should always have to be bowing and +scraping and exchanging compliments, and besides they would soon find +out that my Spanish was doubtful. I talk a sailor's slang, but I doubt +if I should understand pure Spanish. Altogether, I should be very +uncomfortable, and should make you uncomfortable, and I would very much +rather take my place among the men that work for you until I can get on +board a ship again." + +Geoffrey was installed in the portion of the house occupied by the +merchant, and was introduced by him to his friends simply as the +English gentleman who had rescued him and his daughter from the hands +of the Moors, it being incidentally mentioned that he had sailed in the +Armada, and that he had fallen into the hands of the corsairs in the +course of a voyage made with his friend Mr. Burke to Italy. He at once +took his place as a friend and assistant of the merchant; and as the +latter had many dealings with Dutch and English merchants, Geoffrey was +able to be of considerable use to him in his written communications to +the captains of the various vessels of those nationalities in the port. + +"I think," the merchant said to him a fortnight after his arrival in +Cadiz, "that, if it would not go against your conscience, it would be +most advisable that you should accompany me sometimes to church. Unless +you do this, sooner or later suspicion is sure to be roused, and you +know that if you were once suspected of being a heretic, the +Inquisition would lay its hands upon you in no time." + +"I have no objection whatever," Geoffrey said. "Were I questioned I +should at once acknowledge that I was a Protestant; but I see no harm +in going to a house of God to say my prayers there, while others are +saying theirs in a different manner. There is no church of my own +religion here, and I can see no harm whatever in doing as you suggest." + +"I am glad to hear that that is your opinion," Seņor Mendez said, "for +it is the one point concerning which I was uneasy. I have ordered a +special mass at the church of St. Dominic to-morrow, in thanksgiving +for our safe escape from the hands of the Moors, and it would be well +that you should accompany us there." + +"I will do so most willingly," Geoffrey said. "I have returned thanks +many times, but shall be glad to do so again in a house dedicated to +God's service." + +Accordingly the next day Geoffrey accompanied Don Mendez and his +daughter to the church of St. Dominic, and as he knelt by them wondered +why men should hate each other because they differed as to the ways and +methods in which they should worship God. From that time on he +occasionally accompanied Seņor Mendez to the church, saying his prayers +earnestly in his own fashion, and praying that he might some day be +restored to his home and friends. + +He and the merchant had frequently talked over all possible plans for +his escape, but the extreme vigilance of the Spanish authorities with +reference to the English and Dutch trading ships seemed to preclude any +possibility of his being smuggled on board. Every bale and package was +closely examined on the quay before being sent off. Spanish officials +were on board from the arrival to the departure of each ship, and no +communication whatever was allowed between the shore and these vessels, +except in boats belonging to the authorities, every paper and document +passing first through their hands for examination before being sent on +board. The trade carried on between England, Holland, and Spain at the +time when these nations were engaged in war was a singular one; but it +was permitted by all three countries, because the products of each were +urgently required by the others. It was kept within narrow limits, and +there were frequent angry complaints exchanged between the English +government and that of Holland, when either considered the other to be +going beyond that limit. + +Geoffrey admitted to himself that he might again make the attempt to +return to England, by taking passage as before in a ship bound for +Italy, but he knew that Elizabeth was negotiating with Philip for +peace, and thought that he might as well await the result. He was, +indeed, very happy at Cadiz, and shrank from the thought of leaving it. + +Stephen Boldero soon became restless, and at his urgent request Juan +Mendez appointed him second mate on board one of his ships sailing for +the West Indies, his intention being to make his escape if an +opportunity offered; but if not, he preferred a life of activity to +wandering aimlessly about the streets of Cadiz. He was greatly grieved +to part from Geoffrey, and promised that, should he ever reach England, +he would at once journey down to Hedingham, and report his safety to +his father and mother. + +"You will do very well here, Master Geoffrey," he said. "You are quite +at home with all the Spaniards, and it will not be very long before you +speak the language so well that, except for your name, none would take +you for a foreigner. You have found work to do, and are really better +off here than you would be starving and fighting in Holland. Besides," +he said with a sly wink, "there are other attractions for you. Juan +Mendez treats you as a son, and the seņorita knows that she owes +everything to you. You might do worse than settle here for life. Like +enough you will see me back again in six months' time, for if I see no +chance of slipping off and reaching one of the islands held by the +bucaneers, I shall perforce return in the ship I go out in." + +At parting Seņor Mendez bestowed a bag containing five hundred gold +pieces upon Stephen Boldero as a reward for the service he had rendered +him. + +Geoffrey missed him greatly. For eighteen months they had been +constantly together, and it was the sailor's companionship and +cheerfulness that had lightened the first days of his captivity; and +had it not been for his advice and support he might now have been +tugging at an oar in the bey's corsair galley. Ever since they had been +at Cadiz he had daily spent an hour or two in his society; for when +work was done they generally went for a walk together on the +fortifications, and talked of England and discussed the possibility of +escape. After his departure he was thrown more than before into the +society of the merchant and his daughter. The feeling that Dolores had, +when he first saw her, excited within him had changed its character. +She was very pretty now that she had recovered her life and spirits, +and she made no secret of the deep feeling of gratitude she entertained +towards him. One day, three months after Stephen's departure, Seņor +Mendez, when they were alone together, broached the subject on which +his thoughts had been turned so much of late. + +"Friend Geoffrey," he said, "I think that I am not mistaken in +supposing that you have an affection for Dolores. I have marked its +growth, and although I would naturally have rather bestowed her upon a +countryman, yet I feel that you have a right to her as having saved her +from the horrible fate that would have undoubtedly befallen her, and +that it is not for me, to whom you have restored her, besides saving my +own life, to offer any objection. As to her feelings, I have no doubt +whatever. Were you of my religion and race, such a match would afford +me the greatest happiness. As it is I regret it only because I feel +that some day or other it will lead to a separation from me. It is +natural that you should wish to return to your own country, and as this +war cannot go on for ever, doubtless in time some opportunity for doing +so will arrive. This I foresee and must submit to, but if there is +peace I shall be able occasionally to visit her in her home in England. +I naturally hope that it will be long before I shall thus lose her. She +is my only child, and I shall give as her dower the half of my +business, and you will join me as an equal partner. When the war is +over you can, if you wish, establish yourself in London, and thence +carry on and enlarge the English and Dutch trade of our house. I may +even myself settle there. I have not thought this over at present, nor +is there any occasion to do so. I am a wealthy man and there is no need +for me to continue in business, and I am not sure when the time comes I +shall not prefer to abandon my country rather than be separated from my +daughter. At any rate for the present I offer you her hand and a share +in my business." + +Geoffrey expressed in suitable terms the gratitude and delight he felt +at the offer. It was contrary to Spanish notions that he should receive +from Dolores in private any assurance that the proposal in which she +was so largely concerned was one to which she assented willingly, but +her father at once fetched her in and formally presented her to +Geoffrey as his promised wife, and a month later the marriage was +solemnized at the church of St. Dominic. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +IVRY. + + +The day after the capture of Breda Sir Francis Vere sent for Lionel +Vickars to his quarters. Prince Maurice and several of his principal +officers were there, and the prince thanked him warmly for the share he +had taken in the capture of the town. + +"Captain Heraugičre has told me," he said, "that the invention of the +scheme that has ended so well is due as much to you as to him, that you +accompanied him on the reconnoitring expedition and shared in the +dangers of the party in the barge. I trust Sir Francis Vere will +appoint you to the first ensigncy vacant in his companies, but should +there be likely to be any delay in this I will gladly give you a +commission in one of my own regiments." + +"I have forestalled your wish, prince," Sir Francis said, "and have +this morning given orders that his appointment shall be made out as +ensign in one of my companies, but at present I do not intend him to +join. I have been ordered by the queen to send further aid to help the +King of France against the League. I have already despatched several +companies to Brittany, and will now send two others. I would that my +duties permitted me personally to take part in the enterprise, for the +battle of the Netherlands is at present being fought on the soil of +France; but this is impossible. Several of my friends, however, +volunteers and others, will journey with the two companies, being +desirous of fighting under the banner of Henry of Navarre. Sir Ralph +Pimpernel, who is married to a French Huguenot lady and has connections +at the French court, will lead them. I have spoken to him this morning, +and he will gladly allow my young friend here to accompany him, I think +that it is the highest reward I can give him, to afford him thus an +opportunity of seeing stirring service; for I doubt not that in a very +short time a great battle will be fought. We know that Alva has sent +eighteen hundred of the best cavalry of Flanders to aid the League, and +he is sure to have given orders that they are to be back again as soon +as possible. How do you like the prospect, Lionel?" + +Lionel warmly expressed his thanks to Sir Francis Vere for his +kindness, and said that nothing could delight him more than to take +part in such an enterprise. + +"I must do something at any rate to prove my gratitude for your share +in the capture of this city," Prince Maurice said; "and will send you +presently two of the best horses of those we have found in the +governor's stables, together with arms and armour suitable to your rank +as an officer of Sir Francis Vere." + +Upon the following morning a party of ten knights and gentlemen, +including Lionel Vickars, rode to Bergen-op-Zoom. The two companies, +which were drawn from the garrison of that town, had embarked the +evening before in ships that had come from England to transport them to +France. Sir Ralph Pimpernel and his party at once went on board, and as +soon as their horses were embarked the sails were hoisted. Four days' +voyage took them to the mouth of the Seine, and they landed at Honfleur +on the south bank of the river. There was a large number of ships in +port, for the Protestant princes of Germany were, as well as England, +sending aid to Henry of Navarre, and numbers of gentlemen and +volunteers were flocking to his banners. + +For the moment Henry IV. represented in the eyes of Europe the +Protestant cause. He was supported by the Huguenots of France and by +some of the Catholic noblemen and gentry. Against him were arrayed the +greater portion of the Catholic nobles, the whole faction of the Guises +and the Holy League, supported by Philip of Spain. + +The party from Holland disembarked at mid-day on the 9th of March. +Hearing rumours that a battle was expected very shortly to take place, +Sir Ralph Pimpernel started at once with his mounted party for Dreux, +which town was being besieged by Henry, leaving the two companies of +foot to press on at their best speed behind him. The distance to be +ridden was about sixty miles, and late at night on the 10th they rode +into a village eight miles from Dreux. Here they heard that the Duke of +Mayenne, who commanded the force of the League, was approaching the +Seine at Mantes with an army of ten thousand foot and four thousand +horse. + +"We must mount at daybreak, gentlemen," Sir Ralph Pimpernel said, "or +the forces of the League will get between us and the king. It is +evident that we have but just arrived in time, and it is well we did +not wait for our foot-men." + +The next morning they mounted early and rode on to the royal camp near +Dreux. Here Sir Ralph Pimpernel found Marshal Biron, a relation of his +wife, who at once took him to the king. + +"You have just arrived in time, Sir Ralph," the king said when Marshal +Biron introduced him, "for to-morrow, or at latest the day after, we +are likely to try our strength with Mayenne. You will find many of your +compatriots here. I can offer you but poor hospitality at present, but +hope to entertain you rarely some day when the good city of Paris opens +its gates to us." + +"Thanks, sire," Sir Ralph replied; "but we have come to fight and not +to feast." + +"I think I can promise you plenty of that at any rate," the king said. +"You have ten gentlemen with you, I hear, and also that there are two +companies of foot from Holland now on their way up from Honfleur." + +"They landed at noon the day before yesterday, sire, and will probably +be up to-morrow." + +"They will be heartily welcome, Sir Ralph. Since Parma has sent so +large a force to help Mayenne it is but right that Holland, which is +relieved of the presence of these troops, should lend me a helping +hand." + +Quarters were found for the party in a village near the camp; for the +force was badly provided with tents, the king's resources being at a +very low ebb; he maintained the war, indeed, chiefly by the loans he +received from England and Germany. The next day several bodies of +troops were seen approaching the camp. A quarter of an hour later the +trumpets blew; officers rode about, ordering the tents to be levelled +and the troops to prepare to march. A messenger from Marshal Biron rode +at full speed into the village, where many of the volunteers from +England and Germany, besides the party of Sir Ralph Pimpernel, were +lodged. + +"The marshal bids me tell you, gentlemen, that the army moves at once. +Marshal D'Aumont has fallen back from Ivry; Mayenne is advancing. The +siege will be abandoned at present, and we march towards Nonancourt, +where we shall give battle to-morrow if Mayenne is disposed for it." + +The camps were struck and the waggons loaded, and the army marched to +St. André, a village situated on an elevated plain commanding a view of +all the approaches from the country between the Seine and Eure. + +"This is a fine field for a battle," Sir Ralph said, as the troops +halted on the ground indicated by the camp-marshals. "It is splendid +ground for cavalry to act, and it is upon them the brunt of the +fighting will fall We are a little stronger in foot; for several +companies from Honfleur, our own among them, have come up this morning, +and I hear we muster twelve thousand, which is a thousand more than +they say Mayenne has with him. But then he has four thousand cavalry to +our three thousand; and Parma's regiments of Spaniards, Walloons, and +Italian veterans are far superior troops to Henry's bands of riders, +who are mostly Huguenot noblemen and gentlemen, with their armed +retainers, tough and hardy men to fight, as they have shown themselves +on many a field, but without any of the discipline of Parma's troopers. + +"If Parma himself commanded yonder army I should not feel confident of +the result; but Mayenne, though a skilful general, is slow and +cautious, while Henry of Navarre is full of fire and energy, and brave +almost to rashness. We are to muster under the command of the king +himself. He will have eight hundred horse, formed into six squadrons, +behind him, and upon these will, I fancy, come the chief shock of the +battle. He will be covered on each side by the English and Swiss +infantry; in all four thousand strong. + +"Marshal Biron will be on the right with five troops of horse and four +regiments of French infantry; while on the left will be the troops of +D'Aumont, Montpensier, Biron the younger, D'Angoulęme, and De Givry, +supported in all by two regiments of French infantry, one of Swiss, and +one of German. The marshal showed us the plan of battle last night in +his tent. It is well balanced and devised." + +It was late in the evening before the whole of the force had reached +the position and the tents were erected. One of these had been placed +at the disposal of Sir Ralph's party. Sir Ralph and four of his +companions had been followed by their mounted squires, and these +collected firewood, and supplied the horses with forage from the sacks +they carried slung from their saddles, while the knights and gentlemen +themselves polished up their arms and armour, so as to make as brave a +show as possible in the ranks of the king's cavalry. + +When they had eaten their supper Lionel Vickars strolled through the +camp, and was amused at the contrast presented by the various groups. +The troops of cavalry of the French nobles were gaily attired; the +tents of the officers large and commodious, with rich hangings and +appointments. The sound of light-hearted laughter came from the groups +round the camp-fires, squires and pages moved about thickly, and it was +evident that comfort, and indeed luxury, were considered by the +commanders as essential even upon a campaign. The encampments of the +German, Swiss, and English infantry were of far humbler design. The +tents of the officers were few in number, and of the simplest form and +make. A considerable portion of the English infantry had been drawn +from Holland, for the little army there was still the only body of +trained troops at Elizabeth's disposal. + +The Swiss and Germans were for the most part mercenaries. Some had been +raised at the expense of the Protestant princes, others were paid from +the sums supplied from England. The great proportion of the men were +hardy veterans who had fought under many banners, and cared but little +for the cause in which they were fighting, provided they obtained their +pay regularly and that the rations were abundant and of good quality. + +The French infantry regiments contained men influenced by a variety of +motives. Some were professional soldiers who had fought in many a field +during the long wars that had for so many years agitated France, others +were the retainers of the nobles who had thrown in their cause with +Henry, while others again were Huguenot peasants who were fighting, not +for pay, but in the cause of their religion. + +The cavalry were for the most part composed of men of good family, +relations, connections, or the superior vassals of the nobles who +commanded or officered them. The king's own squadrons were chiefly +composed of Huguenot gentlemen and their mounted retainers; but with +these rode many foreign volunteers like Sir Ralph Pimpernel's party, +attracted to Henry's banner either from a desire to aid the Protestant +cause or to gain military knowledge and fame under so brave and able a +monarch, or simply from the love of excitement and military ardour. + +The camp of this main body of cavalry or "battalia," as the body on +whom the commander of our army chiefly relied for victory was called, +was comparatively still and silent. The Huguenot gentlemen, after the +long years of persecution to which those of their religion had been +exposed, were for the most part poor. Their appointments were simple, +and they fought for conscience' sake, and went into battle with the +stern enthusiasm that afterwards animated Cromwell's Ironsides. + +It was not long before the camp quieted down; for the march had been a +long one, and they would be on their feet by daybreak The king himself, +attended by Marshals D'Aumont and Biron, had gone through the whole +extent of the camp, seen that all was in order, that the troops had +everywhere received their rations, and that the officers were +acquainted with the orders for the morrow. He stayed a short time in +the camp of each regiment and troop, saying a few words of +encouragement to the soldiers, and laughing and joking with the +officers. He paused a short time and chatted with Sir Ralph Pimpernel, +who, at his request, introduced each of his companions to him. + +Lionel looked with interest and admiration at the man who was regarded +as the champion of Protestantism against Popery, and who combined in +himself a remarkable mixture of qualities seldom found existing in one +person. He was brave to excess and apparently reckless in action, and +yet astute, prudent, and calculating in council. With a manner frank, +open, and winning, he was yet able to match the craftiest of opponents +at their own weapons of scheming and duplicity. The idol of the +Huguenots of France, he was ready to purchase the crown of France at +the price of accepting the Catholic doctrines, for he saw that it was +hopeless for him in the long run to maintain himself against the +hostility of almost all the great nobles of France, backed by the great +proportion of the people and aided by the pope and the Catholic powers, +so long as he remained a Protestant. But this change of creed was +scarcely even foreseen by those who followed him, and it was the +apparent hopelessness of his cause, and the gallantry with which he +maintained it, that attracted the admiration of Europe. + +Henry's capital was at the time garrisoned by the troops of the pope +and Spain. The great nobles of France, who had long maintained a sort +of semi-independence of the crown, were all against him, and were +calculating on founding independent kingdoms. He himself was +excommunicated. The League were masters of almost the whole of France, +and were well supplied with funds by the pope and the Catholic powers, +while Henry was entirely dependent for money upon what he could borrow +from Queen Elizabeth and the States of Holland. But no one who listened +to the merry laugh of the king as he chatted with the little group of +English gentlemen would have thought that he was engaged in a desperate +and well-nigh hopeless struggle, and that the following day was to be a +decisive one as to his future fortunes. + +"Well, gentlemen," he said as he turned his horse to ride away, "I must +ask you to lie down as soon as possible. As long as the officers are +awake and talking the men cannot sleep; and I want all to have a good +night's rest. The enemy's camp is close at hand, and the battle is sure +to take place at early dawn." + +As the same orders were given everywhere, the camp was quiet early, and +before daylight the troops were called under arms and ranged in the +order appointed for them to fight in. + +The army of the League was astir in equally good time. In its centre +was the battalia, composed of six hundred splendid cavalry, all +noblemen of France, supported by a column of three hundred Swiss and +two thousand French infantry. On the left were six hundred French +cuirassiers and the eighteen hundred troops of Parma, commanded by +Count Egmont. They were supported by six regiments of French and +Lorrainers, and two thousand Germans. The right wing was composed of +three regiments of Spanish lancers, two troops of Germans, four hundred +cuirassiers, and four regiments of infantry. + +When the sun rose and lighted up the contending armies, the difference +between their appearance was very marked. That of the League was gay +with the gilded armour, waving plumes, and silken scarfs of the French +nobles, whose banners fluttered brightly in the air, while the Walloons +and Flemish rivalled their French comrades in the splendour of their +appointments. In the opposite ranks there was neither gaiety nor show. +The Huguenot nobles and gentlemen, who had for so many years been +fighting for life and religion, were clad in armour dinted in a hundred +battle-fields; and while the nobles of the League were confident of +victory, and loud in demanding to be led against the foe, Henry of +Navarre and his soldiers were kneeling, praying to the God of battles +to enable them to bear themselves well in the coming fight. Henry of +Navarre wore in his helmet a snow-white plume, which he ordered his +troops to keep in view, and to follow wherever they should see it +waving, in case his banner went down. + +Artillery still played but a small part in battles on the field, and +there were but twelve pieces on the ground, equally divided between the +two armies. These opened the battle, and Count Egmont, whose cavalry +had suffered from the fire of the Huguenot cannon, ordered a charge, +and the splendid cavalry of Parma swept down upon the right wing of +Henry. The cavalry under Marshal Biron were unable to withstand the +shock and were swept before them, and Egmont rode on right up to the +guns and sabred the artillerymen. Almost at the same moment the German +riders under Eric of Brunswick, the Spanish and French lancers, charged +down upon the centre of the Royal Army. The rout of the right wing +shook the cavalry in the centre. They wavered, and the infantry on +their flanks fell back, but the king and his officers rode among them, +shouting and entreating them to stand firm. The ground in their front +was soft and checked the impetuosity of the charge of the Leaguers, and +by the time they reached the ranks of the Huguenots they were broken +and disordered, and could make no impression whatever upon them. + +As soon as the charge was repulsed, Henry set his troops in motion, and +the battalia charged down upon the disordered cavalry of the League. +The lancers and cuirassiers were borne down by the impetuosity of the +charge, and Marshal Biron, rallying his troops, followed the king's +white plume into the heart of the battle. Egmont brought up the cavalry +of Flanders to the scene, and was charging at their head when he fell +dead with a musket-ball through the heart. Brunswick went down in the +fight, and the shattered German and Walloon horse were completely +overthrown and cut to pieces by the furious charges of the Huguenot +cavalry. + +At one time the victorious onset was checked by the disappearance of +the king's snow-white plumes, and a report ran through the army that +the king was killed. They wavered irresolutely. The enemy, regaining +courage from the cessation of their attacks, were again advancing, when +the king reappeared bareheaded and covered with dust and blood, but +entirely unhurt. He addressed a few cheerful words to his soldiers, and +again led a charge. It was irresistible; the enemy broke and fled in +the wildest confusion hotly pursued by the royalist cavalry, while the +infantry of the League, who had so far taken no part whatever in the +battle, were seized with a panic, threw away their arms, and sought +refuge in the woods in their rear. + +Thus the battle was decided only by the cavalry, the infantry taking no +part in the fight on either side. Eight hundred of the Leaguers either +fell on the battle-field or were drowned in crossing the river in their +rear. The loss of the royalists was but one-fourth that number. Had the +king pushed forward upon Paris immediately after the battle, the city +would probably have surrendered without a blow; and the Huguenot +leaders urged this course upon him. Biron and the other Catholics, +however, argued that it was better to undertake a regular siege, and +the king yielded to this advice, although the bolder course would have +been far more in accordance with his own disposition. + +He was probably influenced by a variety of motives. In the first place +his Swiss mercenaries were in a mutinous condition, and refused to +advance a single foot unless they received their arrears of pay, and +this Henry, whose chests were entirely empty, had no means of +providing. In the second place he was at the time secretly in +negotiation with the pope for his conversion, and may have feared to +give so heavy a blow to the Catholic cause as would have been effected +by the capture of Paris following closely after the victory of Ivry. At +any rate he determined upon a regular siege. Moving forward he seized +the towns of Lagny on the Marne, and Corbeil on the Seine, thus +entirely cutting off the food supply of Paris. + +Lionel Vickars had borne his part in the charges of the Huguenot +cavalry, but as the company to which he belonged was in the rear of the +battalia, he had no personal encounters with the enemy. + +After the advance towards Paris the duties of the cavalry consisted +entirely in scouting the country, sweeping in provisions for their own +army, and preventing supplies from entering Paris. No siege operations +were undertaken, the king relying upon famine alone to reduce the city. +Its population at the time the siege commenced was estimated at +400,000, and the supply of provisions to be sufficient for a month. It +was calculated therefore that before the League could bring up another +army to its relief, it must fall by famine. + +But no allowance had been made for the religious enthusiasm and +devotion to the cause of the League that animated the population of +Paris. Its governor, the Duke of Nemours, brother of Mayenne, aided by +the three Spanish delegates, the Cardinal Gaetano, and by an army of +priests and monks, sustained the spirits of the population; and though +the people starved by thousands, the city resisted until towards the +end of August. In that month the army of the League, united with twelve +thousand foot and three thousand horse from the Netherlands under Parma +himself, advanced to its assistance; while Maurice of Holland, with a +small body of Dutch troops and reinforcements from England, had +strengthened the army of the king. + +The numbers of the two armies were not unequal. Many of the French +nobles had rallied round Henry after his victory, and of his cavalry +four thousand were nobles and their retainers who served at their own +expense, and were eager for a battle. Parma himself had doubts as to +the result of the conflict. He could rely upon the troops he himself +had brought, but had no confidence in those of the League; and when +Henry sent him a formal challenge to a general engagement, Parma +replied that it was his custom to refuse a combat when a refusal seemed +advantageous for himself, and to offer battle whenever it suited his +purpose to fight. + +For seven days the two armies, each some twenty-five thousand strong, +lay within a mile or two of each other. Then the splendid cavalry of +Parma moved out in order of battle, with banners flying, and the +pennons of the lances fluttering in the wind. The king was delighted +when he saw that the enemy were at last advancing to the fight. He put +his troops at once under arms, but waited until the plan of the enemy's +battle developed itself before making his dispositions. But while the +imposing array of cavalry was attracting the king's attention, Parma +moved off with the main body of his army, threw a division across the +river on a pontoon bridge, and attacked Lagny on both sides. + +When Lagny was first occupied some of Sir Ralph Pimpernel's party were +appointed to take up their quarters there, half a company of the +English, who had come with them from Holland, were also stationed in +the town, the garrison being altogether 1200 strong. Lionel's horse had +received a bullet wound at Ivry, and although it carried him for the +next day or two, it was evident that it needed rest and attention, and +would be unfit to carry his rider for some time. Lionel had no liking +for the work of driving off the cattle of the unfortunate landowners +and peasants, however necessary it might be to keep the army supplied +with food, and was glad of the excuse that his wounded horse afforded +him for remaining quietly in the town when his comrades rode out with +the troop of cavalry stationed there. + +It happened that the officer in command of the little body of English +infantry was taken ill with fever, and Sir Ralph Pimpernel requested +Lionel to take his place. This he was glad to do, as he was more at +home at infantry work than with cavalry. The time went slowly, but +Lionel, who had comfortable quarters in the house of a citizen, did not +find it long. The burgher's family consisted of his wife and two +daughters, and these congratulated themselves greatly upon having an +officer quartered upon them who not only acted as a protection to them +against the insolence of the rough soldiery, but was courteous and +pleasant in his manner, and tried in every way to show that he regarded +himself as a guest and not a master. + +After the first week's stay he requested that instead of having his +meals served to him in a room apart he might take them with the family. +The girls were about Lionel's age, and after the first constraint wore +off he became great friends with them; and although at first he had +difficulty in making himself understood, he rapidly picked up a little +French, the girls acting as his teachers. + +"What do you English do here?" the eldest of them asked him when six +weeks after his arrival they were able to converse fairly in a mixture +of French and Spanish. "Why do you not leave us French people to fight +out our quarrels by ourselves?" + +"I should put it the other way," Lionel laughed. "Why don't you French +people fight out your quarrels among yourselves instead of calling in +foreigners to help you? It is because the Guises and the League have +called in the Spaniards to fight on the Catholic side that the English +and Dutch have come to help the Huguenots. We are fighting the battle +of our own religion here, not the battle of Henry of Navarre." + +"I hate these wars of religion," the girl said. "Why can we not all +worship in our own way?" + +"Ah, that is what we Protestants want to know, Mademoiselle Claire; +that is just what your people won't allow. Did you not massacre the +Protestants In France on the eve of St. Bartholomew? and have not the +Spaniards been for the last twenty years trying to stamp out with fire +and sword the new religion in the Low Countries? We only want to be +left alone." + +"But your queen of England kills the Catholics." + +"Not at all," Lionel said warmly; "that is only one of the stories they +spread to excuse their own doings. It is true that Catholics in England +have been put to death, and so have people of the sect that call +themselves Anabaptists; but this has been because they had been engaged +in plots against the queen, and not because of their religion. The +Catholics of England for the most part joined as heartily as the +Protestants in the preparations for the defence of England in the time +of the Armada. For my part, I cannot understand why people should +quarrel with each other because they worship God in different ways." + +"It is all very bad, I am sure," the girl said; "France has been torn +to pieces by these religious wars for years and years. It is dreadful +to think what they must be suffering in Paris now." + +"Then why don't they open their gates to King Henry instead of starving +themselves at the orders of the legate of the pope and the agent of +Philip of Spain? I could understand if there was another French prince +whom they wanted as king instead of Henry of Navarre. We fought for +years in England as to whether we would have a king from the house of +York or the house of Lancaster, but when it comes to choosing between a +king of your own race and a king named for you by Philip of Spain, I +can't understand it." + +"Never mind, Master Vickars. You know what you are fighting for, don't +you?" + +"I do; I am fighting here to aid Holland. Parma is bringing all his +troops to aid the Guises here, and while they are away the Dutch will +take town after town, and will make themselves so strong that when +Parma goes back he will find the nut harder than ever to crack." + +"How long will Paris hold out, think you, Master Vickars? They say that +provisions are well-nigh spent." + +"Judging from the way in which the Dutch towns held on for weeks and +weeks after, as it seemed, all supplies were exhausted, I should say +that if the people of Paris are as ready to suffer rather than yield as +were the Dutch burghers, they may hold on for a long time yet It is +certain that no provisions can come to them as long as we hold +possession of this town, and so block the river." + +"But if the armies of Parma and the League come they may drive you +away, Master Vickars." + +"It is quite possible, mademoiselle; we do not pretend to be +invincible, but I think there will be some tough fighting first." + +As the weeks went on Lionel Vickars came to be on very intimate terms +with the family. The two maid-servants shared in the general liking for +the young officer. He gave no more trouble than if he were one of the +family, and on one or two occasions when disturbances were caused by +the ill-conduct of the miscellaneous bands which constituted the +garrison, he brought his half company of English soldiers at once into +the house, and by his resolute attitude prevented the marauders from +entering. + +When Parma's army approached Sir Ralph Pimpernel with the cavalry +joined the king, but Lionel shared in the disappointment felt by all +the infantry of the garrison of Lagny that they could take no share in +the great battle that was expected. Their excitement rose high while +the armies lay watching each other. From the position of the town down +by the river neither army was visible from its walls, and they only +learned when occasional messengers rode in how matters were going on. + +One morning Lionel was awoke by a loud knocking at his door. "What is +it?" he shouted, as he sat up in bed. + +"It is I--Timothy Short, Master Vickars. The sergeant has sent me to +wake you in all haste. The Spaniards have stolen a march upon us. They +have thrown a bridge across the river somewhere in the night, and most +all their army stands between us and the king, while a division are +preparing to besiege the town on the other side." Lionel was hastily +throwing on his clothes and arming himself while the man was speaking. + +"Tell the sergeant," he said, "to get the men under arms. I will be +with him in a few minutes." + +When Lionel went out he found that the household was already astir. + +"Go not out fasting," his host said. "Take a cup of wine and some food +before you start. You may be some time before you get an opportunity of +eating again if what they say is true." + +"Thank you heartily," Lionel replied as he sat down to the table, on +which some food had already been placed; "it is always better to fight +full than fasting." + +"Hark you!" the bourgeois said in his ear; "if things go badly with you +make your way here. I have a snug hiding-place, and I shall take refuge +there with my family if the Spaniards capture the town. I have heard of +their doings in Holland, and that when they capture a town they spare +neither age nor sex, and slay Catholics as well as Protestants; +therefore I shall take refuge till matters have quieted down and order +is restored. I shall set to work at once to carry my valuables there, +and a goodly store of provisions. My warehouseman will remain in charge +above. He is faithful and can be trusted, and he will tell the +Spaniards that I am a good Catholic, and lead them to believe that I +fled with my family before the Huguenots entered the town." + +"Thank you greatly," Lionel replied; "should the need arise I will take +advantage of your kind offer. But it should not do so. We have twelve +hundred men here, and half that number of citizens have kept the +Spaniards at bay for months before towns no stronger than this in +Holland. We ought to be able to defend ourselves here for weeks, and +the king will assuredly come to our relief in two or three days at the +outside." + +Upon Lionel sallying out he found the utmost confusion and disorder +reigning. The commandant was hurriedly assigning to the various +companies composing the garrison their places upon the walls. Many of +the soldiers were exclaiming that they had been betrayed, and that it +were best to make terms with the Spaniards at once. The difference +between the air of quiet resolution that marked the conduct of the +people and troops at Sluys and the excitement manifested here struck +Lionel unpleasantly. The citizens all remained in their houses, afraid +lest the exultation they felt at the prospect of deliverance would be +so marked as to enrage the soldiery. Lionel's own company was standing +quietly and in good order in the market-place, and as soon as he +received orders as to the point that he should occupy on the walls +Lionel marched them away. + +In half an hour the Spanish batteries, which had been erected during +the night, opened fire upon several points of the walls. The town was +ill provided with artillery, and the answer was feeble, and before +evening several breaches had been effected, two of the gates blown in, +and the Spaniards advanced to the assault. Lionel and his company, with +one composed of Huguenot gentlemen and their retainers and another of +Germans, defended the gate at which they were posted with great +bravery, and succeeded in repulsing the attacks of the Spaniards time +after time. The latter pressed forward in heavy column, only to recoil +broken and shattered from the archway, which was filled high with their +dead. The defenders had just succeeded in repulsing the last of these +attacks, when some soldiers ran by shouting "All is lost, the Spaniards +have entered the town at three points!" + +The German company at once disbanded and scattered. The Huguenot noble +said to Lionel: "I fear that the news is true; listen to the shouts and +cries in the town behind us. I will march with my men and see if there +is any chance of beating back the Spaniards; if not it were best to lay +down our arms and ask for quarter. Will you try to hold this gate until +I return?" + +"I will do so," Lionel said; "but I have only about thirty men left, +and if the Spaniards come on again we cannot hope to repulse them." + +"If I am not back in ten minutes it will be because all is lost," the +Huguenot said; "and you had then best save yourself as you can." + +But long before the ten minutes passed crowds of fugitives ran past, +and Lionel learned that great numbers of the enemy had entered, and +that they were refusing quarter and slaying all they met. + +"It is useless to stay here longer to be massacred," he said to his +men. "I should advise you to take refuge in the churches, leaving your +arms behind you as you enter. It is evident that further resistance is +useless, and would only cost us our lives. The Spaniards are twenty to +one, and it is evident that all hope of resistance is at an end." The +men were only too glad to accept the advice, and, throwing down their +arms, hurried away. Lionel sheathed his sword, and with the greatest +difficulty made his way through the scene of wild confusion to the +house where he had lodged. The doors of most of the houses were fast +closed, and the inhabitants wore hurling down missiles of all kinds +from the upper windows upon their late masters. The triumphant shouts +of the Spaniards rose loud in the air, mingled with despairing cries +and the crack of firearms. Lionel had several narrow escapes from the +missiles thrown from the windows and roofs, but reached the house of +the merchant safely. The door was half opened. + +"Thanks be to heaven that you have come. I had well-nigh given you up, +and in another minute should have closed the door. The women are all +below, but I waited until the last minute for you." + +Barring the door Lionel's host led the way downstairs into a great +cellar, which served as a warehouse, and extended under the whole +house. He made his way through the boxes and bales to the darkest +corner of the great cellar. Here he pulled up a flag and showed another +narrow stair, at the bottom of which a torch was burning. Bidding +Lionel descend he followed him, lowered the flag behind him, and then +led the way along a narrow passage, at the end of which was a door. +Opening it Lionel found himself in an arched chamber. Two torches were +burning, and the merchant's wife and daughters and the two female +domestics were assembled. There was a general exclamation of gladness +as Lionel entered. + +"We have been greatly alarmed," the mercer's wife said, "lest you +should not be able to gain the house, Master Vickars; for we heard that +the Spaniards are broken in at several points." + +"It was fortunately at the other end of the town to that at which I was +stationed," Lionel said; "and I was just in time. You have a grand +hiding-place here. It looks like the crypt of a church." + +"That is just what it is," the mercer said. "It was the church of a +monastery that stood here a hundred years ago. The monks then moved +into a grander place in Paris, and the monastery and church which +adjoined our house were pulled down and houses erected upon the site. +My grandfather, knowing of the existence of the crypt, thought that it +might afford a rare hiding-place in case of danger, and had the passage +driven from his cellar into it. Its existence could never be suspected; +for as our cellar extends over the whole of our house, as can easily be +seen, none would suspect that there was a hiding-place without our +walls. There are three or four chambers as large as this. One of them +is stored with all my choicest silks and velvets, another will serve as +a chamber for you and me. I have enough provisions for a couple of +months, and even should they burn the house down we are safe enough +here." + + + + +CHAPTER XIX. + +STEENWYK. + + +Three days passed, and then a slight noise was heard as of the trap- +door being raised. Lionel drew his sword. + +"It is my servant, no doubt," the merchant said, "he promised to come +and tell me how things went as soon as he could get an opportunity to +come down unobserved. We should hear more noise if it were the +Spaniards." Taking a light he went along the passage, and returned +immediately afterwards followed by his man; the latter had his head +bound up, and carried his arm in a sling. An exclamation of pity broke +from the ladies. + +"You are badly hurt, Jacques. What has happened?" + +"It is well it is no worse, mistress," he replied. "The Spaniards are +fiends, and behaved as if they were sacking a city of Dutch Huguenots +instead of entering a town inhabited by friends. For an hour or two +they cut and slashed, pillaged and robbed. They came rushing into the +shop, and before I could say a word one run me through the shoulder and +another laid my head open. It was an hour or two before I came to my +senses. I found the house turned topsy-turvy; everything worth taking +had gone, and what was not taken was damaged. I tied up my head and arm +as best I could, and then sat quiet in a corner till the din outside +began to subside. The officers did their best, I hear, and at last got +the men into order. Numbers of the townsfolk have been killed, and +every one of the garrison was butchered. I tell you, mistress, it is +better to have ten Huguenot armies in possession one after another than +one Spanish force, though the latter come as friends and co- +religionists. Well, as soon as things quieted down the soldiers were +divided among the houses of the townsfolk, and we have a sergeant and +ten men quartered above; but half an hour ago they were called away on +some duty, and I took the opportunity to steal down here." + +"Have you told them that we were away, Jacques?" + +"No, monsieur; no one has asked me about it. They saw by the pictures +and shrines that you were good Catholics, and after the first outburst +they have left things alone. But if it is not too dreary for the ladies +here, I should advise you to wait for a time and see how things go +before you show yourselves." + +"That is my opinion too, Jacques. We can wait here for another two +months if need be. Doubtless, unless the Huguenots show signs of an +intention to attack the town, only a small garrison will be left here, +and it may be that those in our house will be withdrawn." + +"Do you think it will be possible for me to make my escape, Jacques?" +Lionel asked. + +"I should think so, sir. Ever since the Spaniards entered the town +boats with provisions for Paris have been coming along in great +numbers. From what I hear the soldiers say there is no chance of a +battle at present, for the Huguenot army have drawn off to a distance, +seeing that Paris is revictualled and that there is no chance of taking +it. They say that numbers of the French lords with the Huguenot army +have drawn off and are making for their homes. At any rate there is no +fear of an attack here, and the gates stand open all day. Numbers of +the townsfolk have been to Paris to see friends there, and I should say +that if you had a disguise you could pass out easily enough." + +The question was discussed for some time. Lionel was very anxious to +rejoin the army, and it was finally settled that Jacques should the +next night bring him down a suit of his own clothes, and the first time +the soldiers were all away should fetch him out, accompany him through +the gates of the town, and act as his guide as far as he could. + +The next night Lionel received the clothes. Two days later Jacques came +down early in the morning to say that the soldiers above had just gone +out on duty. Lionel at once assumed his disguise, and with the +heartiest thanks for the great service they had rendered him took his +leave of the kind merchant and his family. Jacques was charged to +accompany him as far as possible, and to set him well on his way +towards the Huguenot army, for Lionel's small knowledge of French would +be detected by the first person who accosted him. On going out into the +street Lionel found that there were many peasants who had come in to +sell fowls, eggs, and vegetables in the town, and he and Jacques passed +without a question through the gates. + +Jacques had, the evening before, ascertained from the soldiers the +position of Parma's army. A long detour had to be made, and it was two +days before they came in sight of the tents of Henry's camp. They had +observed the greatest precautions on their way, and had only once +fallen in with a troop of Parma's cavalry. These had asked no +questions, supposing that Jacques and his companion were making their +way from Paris to visit their friends after the siege, there being +nothing in their attire to attract attention, still less suspicion. The +peasants they met on their way eagerly demanded news from Paris, but +Jacques easily satisfied them by saying that they had had a terrible +time, and that many had died of hunger, but that now that the river was +open again better times had come. When within a couple of miles of the +army Jacques said goodbye to Lionel, who would have rewarded him +handsomely for his guidance, but Jacques would not accept money. + +"You are the master's guest," he said, "and you saved his house from +plunder when your people were in possession. He and my mistress would +never forgive me if I took money from you. I am well content in having +been able to assist so kind a young gentleman." + +When Lionel arrived at the camp he soon found his way to Sir Ralph +Pimpernel's tent, where he was received as one from the dead. There was +no difficulty in providing himself again with armour and arms, for of +these there were abundance--the spoils of Ivry--in the camp. When he +was reclothed and rearmed Sir Ralph took him to the king's tent, and +from him Henry learned for the first time the circumstances that had +attended the capture of Lagny. + +"And so they put the whole garrison to the sword," the king said with +indignation. "I will make any Spaniards that fall in my hands pay +dearly for it!" + +Henry had indeed been completely out-generalled by his opponent. While +he had been waiting with his army for a pitched battle Parma had +invested Lagny, and there were no means of relieving it except by +crossing the river in the face of the whole army of the enemy, an +enterprise impossible of execution. As soon as Lagny had fallen +provisions and ammunition were at once poured into Paris, two thousand +boat-loads arriving in a single day. + +King Henry's army immediately fell to pieces. The cavalry having +neither food nor forage rode off by hundreds every day, and in a week +but two thousand out of his six thousand horse remained with him. The +infantry also, seeing now no hope of receiving their arrears of pay, +disbanded in large numbers, and after an unsuccessful attempt to carry +Paris by a night attack, the king fell back with the remnant of his +force. Corbeil was assaulted and captured by Parma, and the two great +rivers of Paris were now open. + +If Parma could have remained with his army in France, the cause of +Henry of Navarre would have been lost. But sickness was making ravages +among his troops. Dissensions broke out between the Spaniards, +Italians, and Netherlanders of his army and their French allies, who +hated the foreigners, though they had come to their assistance. Lastly, +his presence was urgently required in the Netherlands, where his work +was as far from being done as ever. Therefore to the dismay of the +Leaguers he started early in November on his march back. + +No sooner did he retire than the king took the field again, recaptured +Lagny and Corbeil, and recommenced the siege of Paris, while his +cavalry hung upon the rear and flanks of Parma's army and harassed them +continually, until they crossed the frontier, where the duke found that +affairs had not improved during his absence. + +Lionel had obtained permission to accompany the force which captured +Lagny, and as soon as they entered the town hurried to the mercer's +house. He found Jacques in possession, and learned that the family had +weeks before left the crypt and reoccupied the house, but had again +taken refuge there when the Huguenots attacked the town. Lionel at once +went below, and was received with delight. He was now able to repay to +some extent the obligations he had received from them, by protecting +them from all interference by the new captors of the town, from whom +the majority of the citizens received harsh treatment for the part they +had taken in attacking the garrison when the Spaniards first entered. + +Prince Maurice's visit to the camp of Henry had been but a short one; +and as soon as Parma had effected the relief of Paris, and there was no +longer a chance of a great battle being fought, he returned to Holland, +followed after the recapture of Lagny by Sir Ralph Pimpernel and the +few survivors of his party, who were all heartily weary of the long +period of inaction that had followed the victory at Ivry. + +They found that during their absence there had been little doing in the +Netherlands, save that Sir Francis Vere, with a small body of English +infantry and cavalry, had stormed some formidable works the Spaniards +had thrown up to prevent relief being given to Recklinghausen, which +they were besieging. He effected the relief of the town and drove off +the besiegers. He then attacked and captured a fort on the bank of the +Rhine, opposite the town of Wesel. + +At the end of the year 1590 there were, including the garrisons, some +eight thousand English infantry and cavalry in Holland, and the year +that followed was to see a great change in the nature of the war. The +efforts of Prince Maurice to improve his army were to bear effect, and +with the assistance of his English allies he was to commence an active +offensive war, to astonish his foes by the rapidity with which he +manoeuvred the new fighting machine he had created, and to commence a +new departure in the tactics of war. + +In May he took the field, requesting Vere to co-operate with him in the +siege of Zutphen. But Sir Francis determined in the first place to +capture on his own account the Zutphen forts on the opposite side of +the river, since these had been lost by the treachery of Roland Yorke. +He dressed up a score of soldiers, some as peasants, others as +countrywomen, and provided them with baskets of eggs and other +provisions. At daybreak these went down by twos and threes to the +Zutphen ferry, as if waiting to be taken across to the town; and while +waiting for the boat to come across for them, they sat down near the +gate of the fort. + +[Illustration: CROSSING THE BRIDGE OF BOATS OVER THE HAVEN.] + +A few minutes later a party of English cavalry were seen riding rapidly +towards the fort. The pretended country people sprang to their feet, +and with cries of alarm ran towards it for shelter. The gates were +thrown open to allow them to enter. As they ran in they drew out the +arms concealed under their clothes and overpowered the guard. The +cavalry dashed up and entered the gate before the garrison could +assemble, and the fort was captured. + +Vere at once began to throw up his batteries for the attack upon the +town across the river, and the prince invested the city on the other +side. So diligently did the besiegers work that before a week had +passed after the surprise of the fort the batteries were completed, +thirty-two guns placed in position, and the garrison, seeing there was +no hope of relief, surrendered. + +On the very day of taking possession of the town, the allies, leaving a +garrison there, marched against Deventer, seven miles down the river, +and within five days had invested the place, and opened their batteries +upon the weakest part of the town. A breach was effected, and a storm +was ordered. A dispute arose between the English, Scotch, and Dutch +troops as to who should have the honour of leading the assault. Prince +Maurice decided in favour of the English, in order that they might have +an opportunity of wiping out the stigma on the national honour caused +by the betrayal of Deventer by the traitor Sir William Stanley. + +To reach the breach it was necessary to cross a piece of water called +the Haven. Sir Francis Vere led the English across the bridge of boats +which had been thrown over the water; but the bridge was too short. +Some of the troops sprang over and pushed boldly for the breach, others +were pushed over and drowned. Many of those behind stripped off their +armour and swam across the Haven, supported by some Dutch troops who +had been told off to follow the assaulting party. But at the breach +they were met by Van der Berg, the governor, with seven companies of +soldiers, and these fought so courageously that the assailants were +unable to win their way up the breach, and fell back at last with a +loss of two hundred and twenty-five men killed and wounded. + +While the assault was going on, the artillery of the besiegers +continued to play upon other parts of the town, and effected great +damage. On the following night the garrison endeavoured to capture the +bridge across the Haven, but were repulsed with loss, and in the +morning the place surrendered. The success of the patriots was due in +no slight degree to the fact that Parma with the greatest part of his +army was again absent in France, and the besieged towns had therefore +no hope of assistance from without. The States now determined to seize +the opportunity of capturing the towns held by the Spaniards in +Friesland. + +The three principal towns in the possession of the Spaniards were +Groningen, Steenwyk, and Coevorden. After capturing several less +important places and forts Prince Maurice advanced against Steenwyk. +But just as he was about to commence the siege he received pressing +letters from the States to hurry south, as Parma was marching with his +whole army to capture the fort of Knodsenburg, which had been raised in +the previous autumn as a preparation for the siege of the important +city of Nymegen. + +The Duke of Parma considered that he had ample time to reduce +Knodsenburg before Prince Maurice could return to its assistance. Two +great rivers barred the prince's return, and he would have to traverse +the dangerous district called the Foul Meadow, and the great quagmire +known as the Rouvenian Morass. But Prince Maurice had now an +opportunity of showing the excellence of the army he had raised and +trained. + +He received the news of Parma's advance on the 15th of July; two days +later he was on the march south, and in five days had thrown bridges of +boats across the two rivers, had crossed morass and swamp, and appeared +in front of the Spanish army. + +One assault had already been delivered by the Spaniards against +Knodsenburg, but this had been repulsed with heavy loss. As soon as the +patriot army approached the neighbourhood, Parma's cavalry went out to +drive in its skirmishers. Vere at once proposed to Prince Maurice to +inflict a sharp blow upon the enemy, and with the approval of the +prince marched with 1200 foot and 500 horse along the dyke which ran +across the low country. Marching to a spot where a bridge crossed a +narrow river he placed half his infantry in ambush there; the other +half a quarter of a mile further back. + +Two hundred light cavalry were sent forward to beat up the enemy's +outposts, and then retreat; the rest of the cavalry were posted in the +rear of the infantry. Another dyke ran nearly parallel with the first, +falling into it at some distance in the rear of Vere's position, and +here Prince Maurice stationed himself with a body of horse and foot to +cover Vere's retreat should he be obliged to fall back. About noon the +light cavalry skirmished with the enemy and fell back, but were not +followed. About half an hour later the scouts brought word that the +Spaniards were at hand. + +Suddenly and without orders 800 of Maurice's cavalry galloped off to +meet the enemy; but they soon came back again at full speed, with a +strong force of Spanish cavalry in pursuit. Vere's infantry at once +sallied out from their ambush among the trees, poured their fire into +the enemy, and charged them with their pikes. The Spaniards turned to +fly, when Vere's cavalry charged them furiously and drove them back in +headlong rout to their own camp, taking a great number of prisoners, +among them many officers of rank, and 500 horses. Parma finding himself +thus suddenly in face of a superior army, with a rapid river in his +rear, fell back across the Waal, and then proceeded to Spa to recruit +his shattered health, leaving Verdugo, an experienced officer, in +command. + +Instead of proceeding to besiege Nymegen, Maurice marched away as +suddenly and quickly as before, and captured Hulst, on the borders of +Zeeland and Brabant, a dozen miles only from Antwerp, and then turning +again was, in three days, back at Nymegen, and had placed sixty-eight +pieces of artillery in position. He opened fire on the 20th of October, +and the next day the important city of Nymegen surrendered. This series +of brilliant successes greatly raised the spirits of the Netherlanders, +and proportionately depressed those of the Spaniards and their +adherents. + +Parma himself was ill from annoyance and disappointment. The army with +which he might have completed the conquest of the Netherlands had, in +opposition to his entreaties and prayers, been frittered away by +Philip's orders in useless expeditions in France, while the young and +active generals of the Dutch and English armies were snatching town +after town from his grasp, and consolidating the Netherlands, so +recently broken up by Spanish strongholds, into a compact body, whose +increasing wealth and importance rendered it every day a more +formidable opponent. It is true that Parma had saved first Paris and +afterwards Rouen for the League, but it was at the cost of loosening +Philip's hold over the most important outpost of the Spanish dominions. + +In the following spring Parma was again forced to march into France +with 20,000 men, and Maurice, as soon as the force started, prepared to +take advantage of its absence. With 6000 foot and 2000 horse he again +appeared at the end of May before Steenwyk. This town was the key to +the province of Drenthe, and one of the safeguards of Friesland; it was +considered one of the strongest fortresses of the time. Its garrison +consisted of sixteen companies of foot and some cavalry, and 1200 +Walloon infantry, commanded by Lewis, the youngest of the Counts de +Berg, a brave lad of eighteen years of age. + +In this siege, for the first time, the spade was used by soldiers in +the field. Hitherto the work had been considered derogatory to troops, +and peasants and miners had been engaged for the work; but Prince +Maurice had taught his soldiers that their duty was to work as well as +fight, and they now proved the value of his teaching. + +The besieged made several successful sorties, and Sir Francis Vere had +been severely wounded in the leg. The cannonade effected but little +damage on the strong walls; but the soldiers, working night and day, +drove mines under two of the principal bastions, and constructed two +great chambers there; these were charged, one with five thousand pounds +of powder, the other with half that quantity. On the 3d of July the +mines were sprung. The bastion of the east gate was blown to pieces and +the other bastion greatly injured, but many of the Dutch troops +standing ready for the assault were also killed by the explosion. + +The storming parties, however, rushed forward, and the two bastions +were captured. This left the town at the mercy of the besiegers. The +next day the garrison surrendered, and were permitted to march away. +Three hundred and fifty had been killed, among them young Count Lewis +Van der Berg, and two hundred had been left behind, severely wounded, +in the town. Between five and six hundred of the besiegers were killed +during the course of the siege. The very day after the surrender of +Steenwyk Maurice marched away and laid siege to Coevorden. This city, +which was most strongly fortified, lay between two great swamps, +between which there was a passage of about half a mile in width. + +Another of the Van der Bergs, Count Frederick, commanded the garrison +of a thousand veterans. Verdugo sent to Parma and Mondragon for aid, +but none could be sent to him, and the prince worked at his +fortifications undisturbed. His force was weakened by the withdrawal of +Sir Francis Vere with three of the English regiments, Elizabeth having +sent peremptory orders that this force should follow those already +withdrawn to aid Henry of Navarre in Brittany. Very unwillingly Vere +obeyed, and marched to Doesburg on the Yssel. But a fortnight after he +arrived there, while he was waiting for ships to transport him to +Brittany the news came to him that Verdugo, having gathered a large +force together, was about to attack Prince Maurice in his camp, and +Vere at once started to the prince's aid. + +On the night of the 6th of September, Verdugo, with 4000 foot and 1800 +cavalry, wearing their shirts outside their armour to enable them to +distinguish each other in the dark, fell upon Maurice's camp. +Fortunately the prince was prepared, having intercepted a letter from +Verdugo to the governor of the town. A desperate battle took place, but +at break of day, while its issue was still uncertain, Vere, who had +marched all night, came up and threw himself into the battle. His +arrival was decisive. Verdugo drew off with a loss of 300 killed, and +five days later Coevorden surrendered, and Prince Maurice's army went +into winter quarters. + +A few weeks later Parma died, killed by the burden Philip threw upon +him, broken down by the constant disappointment of his hopes of +carrying his work to a successful end, by the incessant interference of +Philip with his plans, and by the anxiety caused by the mutinies +arising from his inability to pay his troops, although he had borrowed +to the utmost on his own possessions, and pawned even his jewels to +keep them from starvation. He was undoubtedly the greatest commander of +his age, and had he been left to carry out his own plans would have +crushed out the last ember of resistance in the Netherlands and +consolidated the power of Spain there. + +He was succeeded in his post by the Archduke Albert, but for a time +Ernest Mansfeldt continued to command the army, and to manage the +affairs in the Netherlands. In March, 1593, Prince Maurice appeared +with his army in front of Gertruydenberg. The city itself was an +important one, and its position on the Maas rendered it of the greatest +use to the Spaniards, as through it they were at any moment enabled to +penetrate into the heart of Holland. Gertruydenberg and Groningen, the +capital of Friesland, were now, indeed, the only important places in +the republic that remained in possession of the Spaniards. Hohenlohe +with a portion of the army established himself to the east of the city, +Maurice with its main body to the west. + +Two bridges constructed across the river Douge afforded a means of +communication between two armies, and plank roads were laid across the +swamps for the passage of baggage waggons. Three thousand soldiers +laboured incessantly at the works, which were intended not only to +isolate the city, but to defend the besiegers from any attack that +might be made upon them by a relieving army. The better to protect +themselves, miles of country were laid under water, and palisade work +erected to render the country impregnable by cavalry. + +Ernest Mansfeldt did his best to relieve the town. His son, Count +Charles, with five thousand troops, had been sent into France, but by +sweeping up all the garrisons, he moved with a considerable army +towards Gertruydenberg and challenged Maurice to issue out from his +lines to fight him. But the prince had no idea of risking a certain +success upon the issue of a battle. + +A hundred pieces of artillery on the batteries played incessantly on +the town, while a blockading squadron of Zeeland ships assisted in the +bombardment, and so terrible was the fire, that when the town was +finally taken only four houses were found to have escaped injury. + +Two commandants of the place were killed one after the other, and the +garrison of a thousand veterans, besides the burgher militia, was +greatly reduced in strength. At last, after ninety days' siege, the +town suddenly fell. Upon the 24th of June three Dutch captains were +relieving guard in the trenches near the great north bastion of the +town, when it occurred to them to scale the wall of the fort and see +what was going on inside. They threw some planks across the ditch, and +taking half a company of soldiers, climbed cautiously up. They obtained +a foothold before the alarm was given. There was a fierce hand-to-hand +struggle, and sixteen of the party fell, and nine of the garrison. The +rest fled into the city. The Governor Gysant, rushing to the rescue +without staying to put on his armour, was killed. + +Count Solms came from the besieging camp to investigate the sudden +uproar, and to his profound astonishment was met by a deputation from +the city asking for terms of surrender. Prince Maurice soon afterwards +came up, and the terms of capitulation were agreed upon. The garrison +were allowed to retire with side-arms and baggage, and fifty waggons +were lent to them to carry off their wounded. + +In the following spring Coevorden, which had been invested by Verdugo, +was relieved, and Groningen, the last great city of the Netherlands in +the hands of the Spaniards, was besieged. Mines were driven under its +principal bastion, and when these were sprung, after sixty-five days' +siege, the city was forced to surrender. Thus for the first time, after +years of warfare, Holland, Zeeland, and Friesland became truly united, +and free from the grasp of the hated invader. + +Throughout the last three years of warfare Sir Francis Vere had proved +an able assistant to the prince, and the English troops had fought +bravely side by side with the Dutch; but their contingent had been but +a small one, for the majority of Vere's force had, like that of the +Spaniards, been withdrawn for service in France. The struggle in that +country was nearly at an end. The conversion of Henry of Navarre for +the second time to the Catholic religion had ranged many Catholics, who +had hitherto been opposed to him, under his banner, while many had +fallen away from the ranks of the League in disgust, when Philip of +Spain at last threw off the mask of disinterestedness, and proposed his +nephew the Archduke Ernest as king of France. + +In July, 1595, a serious misfortune befell the allied army. They had +laid siege to Crolle, and had made considerable progress with the +siege, when the Spanish army, under command of Mondragon, the aged +governor of Antwerp, marched to its relief. As the army of Maurice was +inferior in numbers, the States would not consent to a general action. +The siege was consequently raised; and Mondragon having attained his +object, fell back to a position on the Rhine at Orsoy, above Rheinberg, +whence he could watch the movements of the allied army encamped on the +opposite bank at Bislich, a few miles below Wesel. + +The Spanish army occupied both sides of the river, the wing on the +right bank being protected from attack by the river Lippe, which falls +into the Rhine at Wesel, and by a range of moorland hills called the +Testerburg. The Dutch cavalry saw that the slopes of this hill were +occupied by the Spaniards, but believed that their force consisted only +of a few troops of horse. + +Young Count Philip of Nassau proposed that a body of cavalry should +swim the Lippe, and attack and cut them off. Prince Maurice and Sir +Francis Vere gave a very reluctant consent to the enterprise, but +finally allowed him to take a force of five hundred men. + +With him were his brothers Ernest and Louis, his nephew Ernest de +Solms, and many other nobles of Holland. Sir Marcellus Bacx was in +command of them. The English contingent was commanded by Sir Nicholas +Parker and Robert Vere. On August 22d they swam the Lippe and galloped +in the direction where they expected to find two or three troops of +Spanish horse; but Mondragon had received news of their intentions, and +they suddenly saw before them half the Spanish army. Without hesitation +the five hundred English and Dutch horsemen charged desperately into +the enemy's ranks, and fought with extraordinary valour, until, +altogether overpowered by numbers, Philip of Nassau and his nephew +Ernest were both mortally wounded and taken prisoners. + +Robert Vere was slain by a lance-thrust in the face, and many other +nobles and gentlemen fell. Thus died one of the three brave brothers, +for the youngest, Horace, had also joined the army in 1590. The +survivors of the band under Sir Nicholas Parker and Marcellus Bacx +managed to effect their retreat, covered by a reserve Prince Maurice +had posted on the opposite side of the river. + + + + +CHAPTER XX. + +CADIZ. + + +In March, 1596, Sir Francis Vere returned to Holland. He had during his +absence in England been largely taken into the counsels of Queen +Elizabeth, and it had been decided that the war should be carried into +the enemy's country, and a heavy blow struck at the power of Spain. +Vere had been appointed to an important command in the proposed +expedition, and had now come out charged with the mission of persuading +the States-general to co-operate heartily with England, and to +contribute both money and men. There was much discussion in the States; +but they finally agreed to comply with the queen's wishes, considering +that there was no surer way of bringing the war to a termination than +to transport it nearer to the heart of the enemy. + +As soon as the matter was arranged, Sir Francis Vere left the Hague and +went to Middleburg, where the preparations for the Dutch portion of the +expedition were carried out. It consisted of twenty-two Dutch ships, +under Count William of Nassau, and a thousand of the English troops in +the pay of the States. The company commanded by Lionel Vickars was one +of those chosen to accompany the expedition; and on the 22d of April it +started from Flushing and joined the British fleet assembled at Dover. +This was under the command of Lord Howard as lord-admiral, the Earl of +Essex as general, Lord Thomas Howard as vice-admiral, and Sir Walter +Raleigh as rear-admiral. + +Sir Francis Vere was lieutenant-general and lord-marshal. He was to be +the chief adviser of the Earl of Essex, and to have the command of +operations on shore. The ships of war consisted of the _Ark- +Royal_, the _Repulse, Mere-Honour, War-Sprite, Rainbow, Mary, +Rose, Dreadnought, Vanguard, Nonpareil, Lion, Swiftsure, Quittance_, +and _Tremontaine_. There were also twelve ships belonging to +London, and the twenty-two Dutch vessels. The fleet, which was largely +fitted out at the private expense of Lord Howard and the Earl of Essex, +sailed from Dover to Plymouth. Sir Francis Vere went by land, and set +to work at the organization of the army. + +A month was thus spent, and on the 1st of June the fleet set sail. It +carried 6360 soldiers and 1000 volunteers, and was manned by nearly +7000 sailors. There had been some dispute as to the relative ranks of +Sir Francis Vere and Sir Walter Raleigh, and it was settled that Sir +Francis should have precedence on shore, and Sir Walter Raleigh at sea. + +All on board the fleet were full of enthusiasm at the enterprise upon +which they were embarked. It was eight years since the Spanish Armada +had sailed to invade England; now an English fleet was sailing to +attack Spain on her own ground. Things had changed indeed in that time. +Spain, which had been deemed invincible, had suffered many reverses; +while England had made great strides in power, and was now mistress of +the seas, on which Spain had formerly considered herself to be supreme. + +A favourable wind from the north-east carried the fleet rapidly across +the Bay of Biscay, and it proceeded on its way, keeping well out of +sight of the coast of Portugal. The three fastest sailers of the fleet +were sent on ahead as soon as they rounded Cape St. Vincent, with +orders to capture all small vessels which might carry to Cadiz the +tidings of the approach of the fleet. + +[Illustration] + +Early on the morning of the 20th June the fleet anchored off the spit +of San Sebastian on the southern side of the city. + +Cadiz was defended by the fort of San Sebastian on one side and that of +San Felipe on the other; while the fort of Pun tales, on the long spit +of sand connecting the city with the mainland, defended the channel +leading up to Puerto Real, and covered by its guns the Spanish galleys +and ships of war anchored there. Lying off the town when the English +fleet came in sight were forty richly-laden merchant ships about to +sail for Mexico, under the convoy of four great men-of-war, two Lisbon +galleons, two argosies, and three frigates. + +As soon as the English were seen, the merchant ships were ordered up +the channel to Puerto Real, and the men-of-war and the fleet of +seventeen war galleys were ranged under the guns of Fort Puntales to +prevent the English passing up. It had first been decided to attempt a +landing in the harbour of Galeta, on the south side of the city; but a +heavy sea was setting in, and although the troops had been got into the +boats they were re-embarked, and the fleet sailed round and anchored at +the mouth of the channel leading up the bay. A council of war was held +that night, and it was decided that the fleet should move up the bay +with the tide next morning, and attack the Spanish fleet. + +The next morning at daybreak the ships got up their anchors and sailed +up the channel, each commander vieing with the rest in his eagerness to +be first in the fray. They were soon hotly engaged with the enemy; the +fort, men-of-war, and galleys opening a heavy fire upon them, to which, +anchoring as close as they could get to the foe, the English ships +hotly responded. The galleys were driven closer in under the shelter of +the fire of the fort, and the fire was kept up without intermission +from six o'clock in the morning until four in the afternoon. + +By that time the Spaniards had had enough of it. The galleys slipped +their cables and made sail for a narrow channel across the spit, +covered by the guns of the fort. Three of them were captured by Sir +John Wingfield in the _Vanguard_, but the rest got through the +channel and escaped. The men-of-war endeavoured to run ashore, but +boarding parties in boats from the _Ark-Royal_ and _Repulse_ +captured two of them. The Spaniards set fire to the other two. The +argosies and galleons were also captured. Sir Francis Vere at once took +the command of the land operations. The boats were all lowered, and the +regiments of Essex, Vere, Blount, Gerard, and Clifford told off as a +landing party. They were formed in line. The Earl of Essex and Sir +Francis Vere took their places in a boat in advance of the line, and +were followed by smaller boats crowded with gentlemen volunteers. + +They landed between the fort of Puntales and the town. The regiments of +Blount, Gerard, and Clifford were sent to the narrowest part of the +spit to prevent reinforcements being thrown into the place; while those +of Essex and Vere and the gentlemen volunteers turned towards Cadiz. +Each of these parties consisted of about a thousand men. + +The walls of Cadiz were so strong that it had been intended to land +guns from the fleet, raise batteries, and make a breach in the walls. +Vere, however, perceiving some Spanish cavalry and infantry drawn up +outside the walls, suggested to Essex that an attempt should be made to +take the place by surprise. The earl at once agreed to the plan. + +Vere marched the force across to the west side of the spit, his +movements being concealed by the sand-hills from the Spanish. Sir John +Wingfield with two hundred men was ordered to march rapidly on against +the enemy, driving in their skirmishers, and then to retreat hastily +when the main body advanced against him. Three hundred men under Sir +Matthew Morgan were posted as supports to Wingfield, and as soon as the +latter's flying force joined them the whole were to fall upon the +Spaniards and in turn chase them back to the walls, against which the +main body under Essex and Vere were to advance. + +The orders were ably carried out. The Spaniards in hot chase of +Wingfield found themselves suddenly confronted by Morgan's force, who +fell upon them so furiously that they fled back to the town closely +followed by the English. Some of the fugitives made their way in at the +gates, which were hurriedly closed, while others climbed up at the +bastions, which sloped sufficiently to afford foothold. Vere's troops +from the Netherlands, led by Essex, also scaled the bastions and then +an inner wall behind it. As soon as they had captured this they rushed +through the streets, shooting and cutting down any who opposed them. + +Sir Francis Vere, who had also scaled the ramparts, knew that cities +captured by assaults had often been lost again by the soldiers +scattering. He therefore directed the rest of the troops to burst open +the gate. This was with some difficulty effected, and he then marched +them in good order to the market-place, where the Spaniards had rallied +and were hotly engaged with Essex. The opposition was soon beaten down, +and those defending the town-hall were forced to surrender. The troops +were then marched through the town, and the garrison driven either into +the convent of San Francisco or into the castle of Felipe. The convent +surrendered on the same evening and the castle on the following day. +The loss upon the part of the assailants was very small, but Sir John +Wingfield was mortally wounded. + +The English behaved with the greatest courtesy to their captives, their +conduct presenting an extraordinary contrast to that of the Spaniards +under similar circumstance in the Netherlands. The women were treated +with the greatest courtesy, and five thousand inhabitants, including +women and priests, were allowed to leave the town with their clothes. +The terms were that the city should pay a ransom of 520,000 ducats, and +that some of the chief citizens should remain as hostages for payment. + +As soon as the fighting ceased, Lionel Vickars accompanied Sir Francis +Vere through the streets to set guards, and see that no insult was +offered to any of the inhabitants. As they passed along, the door of +one of the mansions was thrown open. A gentleman hurried out; he paused +for a moment, exclaiming, "Sir Francis Vere!" and then looking at +Lionel rushed forward towards him with a cry of delight. Sir Francis +Vere and Lionel stared in astonishment as the former's name was called; +but at the sound of his own name Lionel fell back a step as if +stupefied, and then with a cry of "Geoffrey!" fell into his brother's +arms. + +"It is indeed Geoffrey Vickars!" Sir Francis Vere exclaimed. "Why, +Geoffrey, what miracle is this? We have thought you dead these six +years, and now we find you transmuted into a Spanish don." + +"I may look like one, Sir Francis," Geoffrey said as he shook his old +commander's hand, "but I am English to the backbone still. But my story +is too long to tell now. You will be doubtless too busy to-night to +spare time to listen to it, but I pray you to breakfast with me in the +morning, when I will briefly relate to you the outline of my +adventures. Can you spare my brother for to-night, Sir Francis?" + +"I would do so were there ten times the work to be got through," Sir +Francis replied. "Assuredly I would not keep asunder for a minute two +brothers who have so long been separated. I will breakfast with you in +the morning and hear this strange story of yours; for strange it must +assuredly be, since it has changed my young page of the Netherlands +into a Spanish hidalgo." + +"I am no hidalgo, Sir Francis, but a trader of Cadiz, and I own that +although I have been in some way a prisoner, seeing that I could not +effect my escape, I have not fared badly. Now, Lionel, come in. I have +another surprise for you." + +Lionel, still confused and wonder-stricken at this apparent +resurrection of his brother from the dead, followed him upstairs. +Geoffrey led the way into a handsomely furnished apartment, where a +young lady was sitting with a boy two years old in her lap. + +"Dolores, this is my brother Lionel, of whom you have so often heard me +speak. Lionel, this is my wife and my eldest boy, who is named after +you." + +It was some time before Lionel could completely realize the position, +and it was not until Dolores in somewhat broken English bade him +welcome that he found his tongue. + +"But I cannot understand it all!" he exclaimed, after responding to the +words of Dolores. "I saw my brother in the middle of the battle with +the Armada. We came into collision with a great galleon, we lost one of +our masts, and I never saw Geoffrey afterwards; and we all thought that +he had either been shot by the musketeers on the galleon, or had been +knocked overboard and killed by the falling mast." + +"I had hoped that long before this you would have heard of my safety, +Lionel, for a sailor friend of mine promised if he reached England to +go down at once to Hedingham to tell them there. He left the ship he +was in out in the West Indies, and I hoped had reached home safely." + +"We have heard nothing, Geoffrey. The man has never come with your +message. But now tell me how you were saved." + +"I was knocked over by the mast, Lionel, but as you see I was not +killed. I climbed up into a passing Spanish ship, and concealed myself +in the chains until she was sunk, when I was, with many of the crew, +picked up by the boats of other ships. I pretended to have lost my +senses and my speech, and none suspected that I was English. The ship I +was on board of was one of those which succeeded after terrible +hardships in returning to Spain. An Irish gentleman on board her, to +whom I confided my secret, took me as a servant. After many adventures +I sailed with him for Italy, where we hoped to get a ship for England. +On the way we were attacked by Barbary pirates. We beat them off, but I +was taken prisoner. I remained a captive among them for nearly two +years, and then with a fellow-prisoner escaped, together with Dolores +and her father, who had also been captured by the pirates We reached +Spain in safety, and I have since passed as one of the many exiles from +England and Ireland who have taken refuge here; and Seņor Mendez, my +wife's father, was good enough to bestow her hand upon me, partly in +gratitude for the services I had rendered him in his escape, partly +because he saw she would break her heart if he refused." + +"You know that is not true, Geoffrey," Dolores interrupted. + +"Never mind, Dolores, it is near enough. And with his daughter," he +continued, "he gave me a share in his business. I have been a fortunate +man indeed, Lionel; but I have always longed for a chance to return +home; until now none has ever offered itself, and I have grieved +continually at the thought that my father and mother and you were +mourning for me as dead. Now you have the outline of my story; tell me +about all at home." + +"Our father and mother are both well, Geoffrey, though your supposed +loss was a great blow for them. But is it still home for you, Geoffrey? +Do you really mean to return with us." + +"Of course I do, Lionel. At the time I married I arranged with Seņor +Mendez that whenever an opportunity occurred I was to return home, +taking, of course, Dolores with me. She has been learning English ever +since, and although naturally she would rather that we remained here +she is quite prepared to make her home in England. We have two boys, +this youngster, and a baby three months old; so, you see, you have all +at once acquired nephews as well as a brother and sister. Here is Senor +Mendez. This is my brother, seņor, the Lionel after whom I named my +boy, though I never dreamed that our next meeting would take place +within the walls of Cadiz." + +"You have astounded us, seņor," the merchant said courteously. "We +thought that Cadiz was safe from an attack; and though we were aware +you had defeated our fleet we were astonished indeed when two hours +since we heard by the din and firing in the streets that you had +captured the city. Truly you English do not suffer the grass to grow +under your feet. When we woke this morning no one dreamed of danger, +and now in the course of one day you have destroyed our fleet, captured +our town, and have our lives and properties at your disposal." + +"Your lives are in no danger, seņor, and all who choose are free to +depart without harm or hindrance. But as to your property--I don't mean +yours, of course, because as Geoffrey's father-in-law I am sure that +Sir Francis Vere will inflict no fine upon you--but the city generally +will have to pay, I hear, some half million ducats as ransom." + +"That is as nothing," the Spaniard said, "to the loss the city will +suffer in the loss of the forty merchant ships which you will doubtless +capture or burn. Right glad am I that no cargo of mine is on board any +of them, for I do not trade with Mexico; but I am sure the value of the +ships with their cargoes cannot be less than twenty millions of ducats. +This will fall upon the traders of this town and of Seville. Still, I +own that the ransom of half-a-million for a city like Cadiz seems to me +to be very moderate, and the tranquillity that already prevails in the +town is beyond all praise. Would that such had been the behaviour of my +countrymen in the Netherlands!" + +Don Mendez spoke in a tone of deep depression. Geoffrey made a sign to +his brother to come out on to the balcony, while the merchant took a +seat beside his daughter. + +"'Tis best to leave them alone," he said as they looked down into the +street, where the English and their Dutch allies, many of whom had now +landed, were wandering about examining the public buildings and +churches, while the inhabitants looked with timid curiosity from their +windows and balconies at the men who had, as if by magic, suddenly +become their masters. "I can see that the old gentleman is terribly cut +up. Of course, nothing has been said between us yet, for it was not +until we heard the sound of firing in the streets that anyone thought +there was the smallest risk of your capturing the city. Nevertheless, +he must be sure that I shall take this opportunity of returning home. + +"It has always been understood between us that I should do so as soon +as any safe method of making a passage could be discovered; but after +being here with him more than three years he had doubtless come to +believe that such a chance would never come during his lifetime, and +the thought of an early separation from his daughter, and the break up +of our household here, must be painful to him in the extreme. It has +been settled that I should still remain partner in the firm, and should +manage our affairs in England and Holland; but this will, of course, be +a comparatively small business until peace is restored, and ships are +free to come and go on both sides as they please. But I think it is +likely he will himself come to live with us in England, and that we +shall make that the headquarters of the firm, employing our ships in +traffic with Holland, France, and the Mediterranean until peace is +restored with Spain, and having only an agent here to conduct such +business as we may be able to carry on under the present stringent +regulations. + +"In point of fact, even if we wound up our affairs and disposed of our +ships, it would matter little to us, for Mendez is a very rich man, and +as Dolores is his only child he has no great motive beyond the +occupation it gives him for continuing in business. So you are a +captain now, Lionel! Have you had a great deal of fighting?" + +"Not a great deal. The Spaniards have been too much occupied with their +affairs in France to give us much work to do. In Holland I took part in +the adventure that led to the capture of Breda, did some fighting in +France with the army of Henry of Navarre, and have been concerned in a +good many sieges and skirmishes. I do not know whether you heard of the +death of Robert Vere. He came out just after the business of the +Armada, and fell in the fight the other day near Wesel--a mad business +of Count Philip of Nassau. Horace is serving with his troop. We have +recovered all the cities in the three provinces, and Holland is now +virtually rid of the Spaniards. + +"Things have greatly changed since the days of Sluys and Bergen-op- +Zoom. Holland has increased marvellously in strength and wealth. We +have now a splendidly-organized army, and should not fear meeting the +Spaniards in the open field if they would but give the chance to do so +in anything like equal numbers. Sir Francis is marshal of our army +here, and is now considered the ablest of our generals; and he and +Prince Maurice have never yet met with a serious disaster. But how have +you escaped the Inquisition here, Geoffrey? I thought they laid hands +on every heretic?" + +"So they do," Geoffrey replied; "but you see they have never dreamed +that I was a heretic. The English, Irish, and Scotchmen here, either +serving in the army or living quietly as exiles, are, of course, all +Catholics, and as they suppose me to be one of them, it does not seem +to have entered their minds that I was a Protestant. Since I have been +here I have gone with my wife and father-in-law to church, and have +said my prayers in my own way while they have said theirs. I cannot say +I have liked it, but as there was no church of my own it did not go +against my conscience to kneel in theirs. I can tell you that, after +being for nearly a couple of years a slave among the Moors, one thinks +less of these distinctions than one used to do. Had the Inquisition +laid hands on me and questioned me, I should at once have declared +myself a Protestant; but as long as I was not questioned I thought it +no harm to go quietly and pay my devotions in a church, even though +there were many things in that church with which I wholly disagreed. + +"Dolores and I have talked the matter over often, and have arrived at +the conclusion long since that there is no such great difference +between us as would lead us to hate each other." + +Lionel laughed. + +"I suppose we generally see matters as we want to, Geoffrey; but it +will be rather a shock to our good father and mother when you bring +them home a Catholic daughter." + +"I daresay when she has once settled in England among us, Lionel, she +will turn round to our views on the subject; not that I should ever try +to convert her, but it will likely enough come of itself. Of course, +she has been brought up with the belief that heretics are very terrible +people. She has naturally grown out of that belief now, and is ready to +admit that there may be good heretics as well as good Catholics, which +is a long step for a Spanish woman to take. I have no fear but that the +rest will come in time. At present I have most carefully abstained from +talking with her on the subject. When she is once in England I shall be +able to talk to her freely without endangering her life by doing so." + +Upon the following morning Sir Francis Vere breakfasted with Geoffrey, +and then he and Lionel heard the full account of his adventures, and +the manner in which it came about that he was found established as a +merchant in Cadiz. + +They then talked over the situation. Sir Francis was much vexed that +the lord-admiral had not complied with the earnest request the Earl of +Essex had sent him, as soon as he landed, to take prompt measures for +the pursuit and capture of the merchant ships. Instead of doing this, +the admiral, considering the force that had landed to be dangerously +weak, had sent large reinforcements on shore as soon as the boats came +off, and the consequence was that at dawn that morning masses of smoke +rising from the Puerto Real showed that the Duke of Medina-Sidonia had +set the merchant ships on fire rather than that they should fall into +the hands of the English. + +For a fortnight the captors of Cadiz remained in possession. Senor +Mendez had, upon the day after their entry, discussed the future with +Geoffrey. To the latter's great satisfaction he took it for granted +that his son-in-law would sail with Dolores and the children in the +English fleet, and he at once entered into arrangements with him for +his undertaking the management of the business of the firm in England +and Holland. + +"Had I wound up my affairs I should accompany you at once, for Dolores +is everything to me, and you, Geoffrey, have also a large share of my +affection; but this is impossible. We have at present all our fifteen +ships at sea, and these on their return to port would be confiscated at +once were I to leave. Besides, there are large transactions open with +the merchants at Seville and elsewhere. Therefore I must, for the +present at any rate, remain here. I shall incur no odium by your +departure. It will be supposed that you have reconciled yourself with +your government, and your going home will therefore seem only natural; +and it will be seen that I could not, however much I were inclined, +interfere to prevent the departure of Dolores and the children with +you. + +"I propose to send on board your ships the greater portion of my goods +here suitable for your market. This, again, will not excite bad +feelings, as I shall say that you as my partner insisted upon your +right to take your share of our merchandise back to England with you, +leaving me as my portion our fleet of vessels. Therefore all will go on +here as before. I shall gradually reduce my business and dispose of the +ships, transmitting my fortune to a banker in Brussels, who will be +able to send it to England through merchants in Antwerp, and you can +purchase vessels to replace those I sell. + +"I calculate that it will take me a year to complete all my +arrangements. After that I shall again sail for Italy, and shall come +to England either by sea or by travelling through Germany, as +circumstances may dictate. On arriving in London I shall know where to +find you, for by that time you will be well known there; and at any +rate the bankers to whom my money is sent will be able to inform me of +your address." + +These arrangements were carried out, and at the departure of the fleet, +Geoffrey, with Dolores and the children, sailed in Sir Francis Vere's +ship the _Rainbow_, Sir Francis having insisted on giving up his +own cabin for the use of Dolores. On leaving Cadiz the town was fired, +and the cathedral, the church of the Jesuits, the nunneries of Santa +Maria and Candelaria, two hundred and ninety houses, and, greatest loss +of all, the library of the Jesuits, containing invaluable manuscripts +respecting the Incas of Peru, were destroyed. + +The destruction of the Spanish fleet, and the enormous loss caused by +the burning of Cadiz and the loss of the rich merchant fleet, struck a +terrible blow at the power and resources of Spain. Her trade never +recovered from its effects, and her prestige suffered very greatly in +the eyes of Europe. Philip never rallied from the blow to his pride +inflicted by this humiliation. + +Lionel had at first been almost shocked to find that Geoffrey had +married a Spanish woman and a Catholic; but the charming manner of +Dolores, her evident desire to please, and the deep affection with +which she regarded her husband, soon won his heart. He, Sir Francis +Vere, and the other officers and volunteers on board, vied with each +other in attention to her during the voyage; and Dolores, who had +hitherto been convinced that Geoffrey was a strange exception to the +rule that all Englishmen were rough and savage animals, and who looked +forward with much secret dread to taking up her residence among them, +was quite delighted, and assured Geoffrey she was at last convinced +that all she had heard to the disadvantage of his countrymen was wholly +untrue. + +The fleet touched at Plymouth, where the news of the immense success +they had gained was received with great rejoicings; and after taking in +fresh water and stores, they proceeded along the coast and anchored in +the mouth of the Thames. Here the greater part of the fleet was +disbanded, the _Rainbow_ and a few other vessels sailing up to +Greenwich, where the captains and officers were received with great +honour by the queen, and were feasted and made much of by the city. + +The brothers, the day after the ship cast anchor, proceeded to town, +and there hired horses for their journey down into Essex. This was +accomplished in two days, Geoffrey riding with Dolores on a pillion +behind him with her baby in her lap, while young Lionel was on the +saddle before his uncle. + +When they approached Hedingham Lionel said, "I had best ride forward +Geoffrey to break the news to them of your coming. Although our mother +has always declared that she would not give up hope that you would some +day be restored to us, they have now really mourned you as dead." + +"Very well, Lionel. It is but a mile or so; I will dismount and put the +boy up in the saddle and walk beside him, and we shall be in a quarter +of an hour after you." + +The delight of Mr. and Mrs. Vickars on hearing Geoffrey was alive and +close at hand was so great that the fact he brought home a Spanish +wife, which would under other circumstances have been a great shock to +them, was now scarcely felt, and when the rapturous greeting with which +he was received on his arrival was over, they welcomed his pretty young +wife with a degree of warmth which fully satisfied him. Her welcome +was, of course, in the first place as Geoffrey's wife, but in a very +short time his father and mother both came to love her for herself, and +Dolores very quickly found herself far happier at Hedingham Rectory +than she had thought she could be away from her native Spain. + +The announcement Geoffrey made shortly after his arrival, that he had +altogether abandoned the trade of soldiering, and should in future make +his home in London, trading in conjunction with his father-in-law, +assisted to reconcile them to his marriage. After a fortnight's stay at +Hedingham Geoffrey went up to London, and there took a house in the +city, purchased several vessels, and entered upon business, being +enabled to take at once a good position among the merchants of London, +thanks to the ample funds with which he was provided. + +Two months later he went down to Essex and brought up Dolores and the +children, and established them in his new abode. + +The apprenticeship he had served in trade at Cadiz enabled Geoffrey to +start with confidence in his business. He at once notified all the +correspondents of the firm in the different ports of Europe, that in +future the business carried on by Signor Juan Mendez at Cadiz would +have its headquarters in London, and that the firm would trade with all +ports with the exception of those of Spain. The result was that before +many months had elapsed there were few houses in London doing a larger +trade with the Continent than that of Mendez and Vickars, under which +title they had traded from the time of Geoffrey's marriage with +Dolores. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE BATTLE OF NIEUPORT. + + +The year after the capture of Cadiz, Lionel Vickars sailed under Sir +Francis Vere with the expedition designed to attack the fleet which +Philip of Spain had gathered in Ferrol, with the intention, it was +believed, of invading Ireland in retaliation for the disaster at Cadiz. +The expedition met with terrible weather in the Bay of Biscay, and put +back scattered and disabled to Plymouth and Falmouth. In August they +again sailed, but were so battered by another storm that the expedition +against Ferrol was abandoned, and they sailed to the Azores. There, +after a skirmish with the Spaniards, they scattered among the islands, +but missed the great Spanish fleet laden with silver from the west, and +finally returned to England without having accomplished anything, while +they suffered from another tempest on their way home, and reached +Plymouth with difficulty. + +Fortunately the same storm scattered and destroyed the great Spanish +fleet at Ferrol, and the weather thus for the second time saved England +from invasion. Late in the autumn, after his return from the +expedition, Sir Francis Vere went over to Holland, and by his advice +Prince Maurice prepared in December to attack a force of 4000 Spanish +infantry and 600 cavalry, which, under the command of the Count of +Varras, had gathered at the village of Turnhout, twenty miles from +Breda. + +A force of 5000 foot and 800 horse were secretly assembled at +Gertruydenberg. Sir Francis Vere brought an English regiment, and +personally commanded one of the two troops into which the English +cavalry was divided. Sir Robert Sidney came with 300 of the English +garrison at Flushing, and Sir Alexander Murray with a Scotch regiment. +The expedition started on the 23d of January, 1598, and after marching +twenty-four miles reached the village of Rivels, three miles from +Turnhout, two hours after dark. + +The night was bitter cold, and after cooking supper the men wrapt +themselves up in their cloaks, and lay down on the frozen ground until +daybreak The delay, although necessary, enabled the enemy to make their +escape. The news that the allies had arrived close at hand reached +Count Varras at midnight, and a retreat was at once ordered. Baggage +waggons were packed and despatched, escorted by the cavalry, and before +dawn the whole force was well on its road. Prince Maurice had set off +an hour before daybreak, and on reaching Turnhout found that the rear- +guard of the enemy had just left the village. They had broken down the +wooden bridge across the River Aa, only one plank being left standing, +and had stationed a party to defend it. + +Maurice held a hasty council of war. All, with the exception of Sir +Francis Vere and Sir Marcellus Bacx, were against pursuit, but Maurice +took the advice of the minority. Vere with two hundred Dutch musketeers +advanced against the bridge; his musketry fire drove off the guard, and +with a few mounted officers and the two hundred musketeers he set out +in pursuit. He saw that the enemy's infantry were marching but slowly, +and guessed that they were delayed by the baggage waggons in front. + +The country was wooded, and he threw the musketeers among the trees +with orders to keep up a dropping fire, while he himself with sixteen +horsemen followed closely upon the enemy along the road. Their rear- +guard kept up a skirmishing fire, slightly wounding Vere in the leg; +but all this caused delay, and it was three hours before they emerged +on an open heath, three miles from the bridge. Vere placed his +musketeers among some woods and inclosed fields on the left of the +heath, and ordered them to keep up a brisk fire and to show themselves +as if advancing to the attack. He himself, reinforced by some more +horsemen who had come up, continued to follow in the open. + +The heath was three miles across, and Vere, constantly skirmishing with +the Spanish infantry, who were formed in four solid squares, kept +watching for the appearance of Maurice and the cavalry. At length these +came in sight. Vere galloped up to the prince, and urged that a charge +should be made at once. The prince assented. Vere, with the English +cavalry, charged down upon the rear of the squares, while Hohenlohe +swept down with the Dutch cavalry upon their flanks. The Spanish +musketeers fired and at once fled, and the cavalry dashed in among the +squares of pikemen and broke them. + +Several of the companies of horse galloped on in pursuit of the enemy's +horse and baggage. Vere saw that these would be repulsed, and formed up +the English cavalry to cover their retreat. In a short time the +disordered horse came back at full gallop, pursued by the Spanish +cavalry, but these, seeing Vere's troops ready to receive them, +retreated at once. Count Varras was slain, together with three hundred +of the Spanish infantry. Six hundred prisoners were taken, and thirty- +eight colours fell into the victor's hands. + +The success was gained entirely by the eight hundred allied horse, the +infantry never arriving upon the field. The brilliant little victory, +which was one of the first gained by the allies in the open field, was +the cause of great rejoicings. Not only were the Spaniards no longer +invincible, but they had been routed by a force but one-sixth of their +own number, and the battle showed how greatly the individual prowess of +the two peoples had changed during the progress of the war. + +The Archduke Ernest had died in 1595, and had been succeeded by the +Archduke Albert in the government of the Netherlands. He had with him +no generals comparable with Parma, or even with Alva. His troops had +lost their faith in themselves and their contempt for their foes. +Holland was grown rich and prosperous, while the enormous expenses of +carrying on the war both in the Netherlands and in France, together +with the loss of the Armada, the destruction of the great fleet at +Ferrol, and the capture of Cadiz and the ships there, had exhausted the +resources of Spain, and Philip was driven to make advances for peace to +France and England. Henry IV., knowing that peace with Spain meant an +end of the civil war that had so long exhausted France, at once +accepted the terms of Philip, and made a separate peace, in spite of +the remonstrances of the ambassadors of England and Holland, to both of +which countries he owed it in no small degree that he had been enabled +to support himself against the faction of the Guises backed by the +power of Spain. + +A fresh treaty was made between England and the Netherlands, Sir +Francis Vere being sent out as special ambassador to negotiate. England +was anxious for peace, but would not desert the Netherlands if they on +their part would relieve her to some extent of the heavy expenses +caused by the war. This the States consented to do, and the treaty was +duly signed on both sides. A few days before its conclusion Lord +Burleigh, who had been Queen Elizabeth's chief adviser for forty years, +died, and within a month of its signature Philip of Spain, whose +schemes he had so long opposed, followed him to the grave. + +On the 6th of the previous May Philip had formally ceded the +Netherlands to his daughter Isabella, between whom and the Archduke +Albert a marriage had been arranged. This took place on the 18th of +April following, shortly after his death. It was celebrated at +Valencia, and at the same time King Philip III. was united to Margaret +of Austria. + +In the course of 1599 there was severe fighting on the swampy island +between the rivers Waal and Maas, known as the Bommel-Waat, and a fresh +attempt at invasion by the Spaniards was repulsed with heavy loss, Sir +Francis Vere and the English troops taking a leading part in the +operations. + +The success thus gained decided the States-general to undertake an +offensive campaign in the following year. The plan they decided upon +was opposed both by Prince Maurice and Sir Francis Vere as being +altogether too hazardous; but the States, who upon most occasions were +averse to anything like bold action, upon the present occasion stood +firm to their decision. Their plan was to land an army near Ostend, +which was held by the English, and to besiege the town of Nieuport, +west of Ostend, and after that to attack Dunkirk. In the opinion of the +two generals an offensive operation direct from Holland would have been +far preferable, as in case of disaster the army could fall back upon +one of their fortified towns, whereas, if beaten upon the coast, they +might be cut off from Ostend and entirely destroyed. However, their +opinions were overruled, and the expedition prepared. + +It consisted of 12,000 infantry, 1600 cavalry, and 10 guns. It was +formed into three divisions. The van, 4500 strong, including 1600 +English veterans, was commanded by Sir Francis Vere; the second +division by Count Everard Solms; the rear division by Count Ernest of +Nassau; while Count Louis Gunther of Nassau was in command of the +cavalry. The army embarked at Flushing, and landed at Philippine, a +town at the head of the Braakeman inlet. + +There was at the time only a small body of Spaniards in the +neighbourhood, but as soon as the news reached the Archduke Albert at +Brussels he concentrated his army round Ghent. + +The troops had for some time been in a mutinous state, but, as was +always the case with them, they returned to their habits of military +obedience the moment danger threatened. + +The Dutch army advanced by rapid marches to the neighbourhood of +Ostend, and captured the fort and redoubts which the Spaniards had +raised to prevent its garrison from undertaking offensive operations. + +Two thousand men were left to garrison these important positions, which +lay on the line of march which the Spaniards must take coming from +Bruges to Nieuport. The rest of the army then made their way across the +country, intersected with ditches, and upon the following day arrived +before Nieuport and prepared to besiege it. The Dutch fleet had arrived +off the town, and co-operated with the army in building a bridge across +the little river, and preparing for the siege. + +Towards the evening, however, the news arrived from Ostend, nine miles +away, that a large force of the enemy had appeared before one of the +forts just captured. Most of the officers were of opinion that the +Spanish force was not a large one, and that it was a mere feint to +induce the Dutch to abandon the siege of Nieuport and return to Ostend. +Sir Francis Vere maintained that it was the main body of the archduke's +army, and advised Maurice to march back at once with his whole force to +attack the enemy before they had time to take the forts. + +Later on in the evening, however, two of the messengers arrived with +the news that the forts had surrendered. Prince Maurice then, in +opposition to Vere's advice, sent off 2500 infantry, 500 horse, and 2 +guns, under the command of Ernest of Nassau, to prevent the enemy from +crossing the low ground between Ostend and the sand-hills, Vere +insisting that the whole army ought to move. It fell out exactly as he +predicted; the detachment met the whole Spanish army, and broke and +fled at the first fire, and thus 2500 men were lost in addition to the +2000 who had been left to garrison the forts. + +At break of day the army marched down to the creek, and as soon as the +water had ebbed sufficiently waded across and took up their position +among the sand-hills on the sea-shore. The enemy's army was already in +sight, marching along on the narrow strip of land between the foot of +the dunes and the sea. A few hundred yards towards Ostend the sand- +hills narrowed, and here Sir Francis Vere took up his position with his +division. He placed a thousand picked men, consisting of 250 English, +250 of Prince Maurice's guard, and 500 musketeers, partly upon two +sand-hills called the East and West Hill, and partly in the bottom +between them, where they were covered by a low ridge connecting the two +hills. + +The five hundred musketeers were placed so that their fire swept the +ground on the south, by which alone the enemy's cavalry could pass on +that side. On the other ridge, facing the sea, were seven hundred +English pikemen and musketeers; two hundred and fifty English and fifty +of the guard held the position of East Hill, which was most exposed to +the attack. The rest of the division, which consisted of six hundred +and fifty English and two thousand Dutch, were placed in readiness to +reinforce the advanced party. Half the cavalry, under Count Louis, were +on the right of the dunes, and the other half, under Marcellus Bacx, on +the left by the sea. + +The divisions of Count Solms and Count Ernest of Nassau were also on +the sea-shore in the rear of West Hill. A council of war was held to +decide whether the army should advance to the attack or await it. Vere +advised the latter course, and his advice was adopted. + +The archduke's army consisted of ten thousand infantry, sixteen hundred +horse, and six guns. Marshal Zapena was in command, while the cavalry +were led by the Admiral of Arragon. They rested for two hours before +advancing--waiting until the rise of the tide should render the sands +unserviceable for cavalry, their main reliance being upon their +infantry. Their cavalry led the advance, but the two guns Vere had +placed on West Hill plied them so hotly with shot that they fell back +in confusion. + +It was now high tide, and there were but thirty yards between the sea +and the sand-hills. The Spaniards therefore marched their infantry into +the dunes, while the cavalry prepared to advance between the sand-hills +and the cultivated fields inland. The second and third divisions of +Maurice's army also moved away from the shore inland. They now numbered +but three thousand men, as the four thousand five hundred who had been +lost belonged entirely to these divisions, Sir Francis Vere's division +having been left intact. It was upon the first division that the whole +brunt of the battle fell, they receiving some assistance from the +thousand men remaining under Count Solms that were posted next to them; +while the rear division was never engaged at all. + +At half-past two o'clock on the afternoon of the 2d of June, 1600, the +battle began. Vere's plan was to hold his advanced position as long as +possible, bring the reserves up as required until he had worn out the +Spaniards, then to send for the other two divisions and to fall upon +them. The company of Lionel Vickars formed part of the three hundred +men stationed on the East Hill, where Vere also had taken up his +position. After an exchange of fire for some time five hundred picked +Spanish infantry rushed across the hollow between the two armies, and +charged the hill. For half-an-hour a desperate struggle took place; the +Spaniards were then obliged to fall back behind some low ridges at its +foot. + +In the meantime the enemy's cavalry had advanced along the grass-grown +tract, a hundred and fifty yards wide, between the foot of the dunes +and the cultivated country inland. They were received, however, by so +hot a fire by the five hundred musketeers posted by Vere in the sand- +hills on their flank, and by the two cannon on West Hill, that they +fell back upon their infantry just as the Dutch horse, under Count +Louis, advanced to charge them. + +Vere sent orders to a hundred Englishmen to move round from the ridge +and to attack the Spaniards who had fallen back from the attack of East +Hill, on their flank, while sixty men charged down the hill and engaged +them in front. The Spaniards broke and fled back to their main body. +Then, being largely reinforced, they advanced and seized a sandy knoll +near West Hill. Here they were attacked by the English, and after a +long and obstinate fight forced to retire. The whole of the Spanish +force now advanced, and tried to drive the English back from their +position on the low ridge across the bottom connecting the two hills. +The seven hundred men were drawn from the north ridge, and as the fight +grew hotter the whole of the sixteen hundred English were brought up. + +Vere sent for reinforcements, but none came up, and for hours the +sixteen hundred Englishmen alone checked the advance of the whole of +the Spanish army. Sir Francis Vere was fighting like a private soldier +in the midst of his troops. He received two balls in the leg, but still +kept his seat and encouraged his men. At last the little band, +receiving no aid or reinforcements from the Dutch, were forced to fall +back. As they did so, Vere's horse fell dead under him and partly upon +him, and it was with great difficulty that those around him extricated +him. On reaching the battery on the sands Vere found the thousand Dutch +of his division, who asserted that they had received no orders to +advance. There were also three hundred foot under Sir Horace Vere and +some cavalry under Captain Ball. These and Horace's infantry at once +charged the Spaniards, who were pouring out from the sand-hills near to +the beach, and drove them back. + +[Illustration: Vere's horse shot under him at the fight before Ostend.] + +The Spaniards had now captured East Hill, and two thousand of their +infantry advanced into the valley beyond, and drove back the musketeers +from the south ridge, and a large force advanced along the green way; +but their movements were slow, for they were worn out by their long +struggle, and the English officers had time to rally their men again. +Horace Vere returned from his charge on the beach, and other companies +rallied and joined him, and charged furiously down upon the two +thousand Spaniards. The whole of the Dutch and English cavalry also +advanced. Solms's thousand men came up and took part in the action, and +the batteries plied the Spaniards with their shot. The latter had done +all they could, and were confounded by this fresh attack when they had +considered the victory as won. In spite of the efforts of their +officers they broke and fled in all directions. The archduke headed +their flight, and never drew rein until he reached Brussels. + +Zapena and the Admiral of Arragon were both taken prisoners, and about +a third of the Spanish army killed and wounded. Of the sixteen hundred +English half were killed or wounded; while the rest of the Dutch army +suffered scarcely any loss--a fact that shows clearly to whom the +honour of the victory belongs. Prince Maurice, in his letter to the +queen, attributed his success entirely to the good order and directions +of Sir Francis Vere. Thus, in a pitched battle the English troops met +and defeated an army of six times their strength of the veterans of +Spain, and showed conclusively that the English fighting man had in no +way deteriorated since the days of Agincourt, the last great battle +they had fought upon the Continent. + +The battle at Nieuport may be considered to have set the final seal +upon the independence of Holland. The lesson first taught at Turnhout +had now been impressed with crushing force. The Spaniards were no +longer invincible; they had been twice signally defeated in an open +field by greatly inferior forces. Their prestige was annihilated; and +although a war continued, there was no longer the slightest chance that +the result of the long and bloody struggle would be reversed, or that +Spain would ever again recover her grip of the lost provinces. + +Sir Francis Vere was laid up for some months with his wounds. Among the +officers who fought under him at Nieuport were several whose names were +to become famous for the part they afterwards bore in the civil +struggle in England. Among others were Fairfax, Ogle, Lambart, and +Parker. Among those who received the honour of knighthood for their +behaviour at the battle was Lionel Vickars. He had been severely +wounded in the fight at East Hill, and was sent home to be cured there. +It was some months before he again took the field, which he did upon +the receipt of a letter from Sir Francis Vere, telling him that the +Spaniards were closing in in great force round Ostend, and that his +company was one of those that had been sent off to aid in the defence +of that town. + +During his stay in England he had spent some time with Geoffrey in +London. Juan Mendez had now arrived there, and the business carried on +by him and Geoffrey was flourishing greatly. Dolores had much missed +the outdoor life to which she was accustomed, and her father had bought +a large house with a fine garden in Chelsea; and she and Geoffrey were +now installed there with him, Geoffrey going to and fro from the city +by boat. They had now replaced the Spanish trading vessels by an equal +number of English craft; and at the suggestion of Juan Mendez himself +his name now stood second to that of Geoffrey, for the prejudice +against foreigners was still strong in England. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII. + +OLD FRIENDS. + + +The succession of blows that had been given to the power and commerce +of Spain had immensely benefited the trade of England and Holland. +France, devastated by civil war, had been in no position to take +advantage of the falling off in Spanish commerce, and had indeed +herself suffered enormously by the emigration of tens of thousands of +the most intelligent of her population owing to her persecution of the +Protestants. Her traders and manufacturers largely belonged to the new +religion, and these had carried their industry and knowledge to England +and Holland. Thus the religious bigotry of the kings of Spain and +France had resulted in enormous loss to the trade and commerce of those +countries, and in corresponding advantage to their Protestant rivals. + +Geoffrey Vickars and his partner reaped the full benefit of the change, +and the extensive acquaintance of the Spanish trader with merchants in +all the Mediterranean ports enabled him to turn a large share of the +new current of trade into the hands of Geoffrey and himself. The +capital which he transferred from Spain to England was very much larger +than that employed by the majority of English merchants, whose wealth +had been small indeed in comparison to that of the merchant princes of +the great centres of trade such as Antwerp, Amsterdam, Genoa, and +Cadiz, and Geoffrey Vickars soon came to be looked upon as one of the +leading merchants in the city of London. + +"There can be no doubt, Geoffrey," his brother said as he lay on a +couch in the garden in the early days of his convalescence, and looked +at the river dotted with boats that flowed past it, "the falling of +that mast was a fortunate thing for you. One never can tell how things +will turn out. It would have seemed as if, were you not drowned at +once, your lot would have been either a life's work in the Spanish +galleys, or death in the dungeons of the Inquisition. Instead of this, +here you are a wealthy merchant in the city, with a charming wife, and +a father-in-law who is, although a Spaniard, one of the kindest and +best men I ever met. All this time I, who was not knocked over by that +mast, have been drilling recruits, making long marches, and +occasionally fighting battles, and am no richer now than the day when +we started together as Francis Vere's pages. It is true I have received +the honour of knighthood, and that of course I prize much; but I have +only my captain's pay to support my dignity, and as I hardly think +Spain will continue this useless struggle much longer, in which case +our army in Holland will be speedily disbanded, the prospect before me +is not altogether an advantageous one." + +"You must marry an heiress, Lionel," Geoffrey laughed. "Surely Sir +Lionel Vickars, one of the heroes of Nieuport, and many another field, +should be able to win the heart of some fair English damsel, with broad +acres as her dower. But seriously, Lionel," he went on, changing his +tone, "if peace come, and with it lack of employment, the best thing +for you will be to join me. Mendez is getting on in years; and although +he is working hard at present, in order, as he says, to set everything +going smoothly and well here, he is looking forward to taking matters +more easily, and to spending his time in tranquil pleasure with Dolores +and her children. Therefore, whensoever it pleases you, there is a +place for you here. We always contemplated our lines running in the +same groove, and I should be glad that they should do so still. When +the time comes we can discuss what share you shall have of the +business; but at any rate I can promise you that it shall be sufficient +to make you a rich man." + +"Thank you, with all my heart, Geoffrey. It may be that some day I will +accept your offer, though I fear you will find me but a sorry +assistant. It seems to me that after twelve years of campaigning I am +little fitted for life as a city merchant." + +"I went through plenty of adventure for six years, Lionel, but my +father-in-law has from the first been well satisfied with my capacity +for business. You are not seven-and-twenty yet. You have had enough +rough campaigning to satisfy anyone, and should be glad now of an +easier and more sober method of life. Well, there is no occasion to +settle anything at present, and I can well understand that you should +prefer remaining in the army until the war comes to an end. When it +does so, we can talk the matter over again; only be well assured that +the offer will be always open to you, and that I shall be glad indeed +to have you with me." + +A few days after Lionel left him Geoffrey was passing along Chepe, when +he stopped suddenly, stared hard at a gentleman who was approaching +him, and then rushed towards him with outstretched hand. + +"My dear Gerald!" he exclaimed, "I am glad to see you." + +The gentleman started back with an expression of the profoundest +astonishment. + +"Is it possible?" he cried. "Is it really Geoffrey Vickars?" + +"Myself, and no other, Gerald." + +"The saints be praised! Why, I have been thinking of you all these +years as either dead or labouring at an oar in the Moorish galleys. By +what good fortune did you escape? and how is it I find you here, +looking for all the world like a merchant of the city?" + +"It is too long a story to tell now, Gerald. Where are you staying?" + +"I have lodgings at Westminster, being at present a suitor at court." + +"Is your wife with you?" + +"She is. I have left my four children at home in Ireland." + +"Then bring her to sup with me this evening. I have a wife to introduce +to yours, and as she is also a Spaniard it will doubtless be a pleasure +to them both." + +"You astound me, Geoffrey. However, you shall tell me all about it this +evening, for be assured that we shall come. Inez has so often talked +about you, and lamented the ill-fortune that befell you owing to your +ardour." + +"At six o'clock, then," Geoffrey said. "I generally dwell with my +father-in-law at Chelsea, but am just at present at home. My house is +in St. Mary Axe; anyone there will tell you which it is." + +That evening the two friends had a long talk together Geoffrey learnt +that Gerald Burke reached Italy without further adventure, and thence +took ship to Bristol, and so crossed over to Ireland. On his petition, +and solemn promise of good behaviour in future, he was pardoned and a +small portion of his estate restored to him. He was now in London +endeavouring to obtain a remission of the forfeiture of the rest. + +"I may be able to help you in that," Geoffrey said. "Sir Francis Vere +is high in favour at court, and he will, at my prayer, I feel sure, use +his influence in your favour when I tell him how you acted my friend on +my landing in Spain from the Armada." + +Geoffrey then gave an account of his various adventures from the time +when he was struck down from the deck of the Barbary corsair until the +present time. + +"How was it," he asked when he concluded, "that you did not write to my +parents, Gerald, on your return home? You knew where they lived." + +"I talked the matter over with Inez," Gerald replied, "and we agreed +that it was kinder to them to be silent. Of course they had mourned you +as killed in the fight with the Armada. A year had passed, and the +wound must have somewhat healed. Had I told them that you had escaped +death at that time, had been months with me in Spain, and had, on your +way home, been either killed by the Moors or were a prisoner in their +galleys, it would have opened the wound afresh, and caused them renewed +pain and sorrow." + +"No doubt you were right, Gerald, and that it was, as you say, the +kindest thing to leave them in ignorance of my fate." + +Upon the next visit Sir Francis Vere paid to England, Geoffrey spoke to +him with regard to Gerald Burke's affairs. Sir Francis took the matter +up warmly, and his influence sufficed in a very short time to obtain an +order for the restoration to Gerald of all his estates. Inez and +Dolores became as fast friends as were their husbands; and when the +Burkes came to England Geoffrey's house was their home. + +The meeting with Gerald was followed by a still greater surprise, for +not many days after, when Geoffrey was sitting with his wife and Don +Mendez under the shade of a broad cypress in the garden of the +merchant's house at Chelsea, they saw a servant coming across towards +them, followed by a man in seafaring attire. "Here is a person who +would speak to you, Master Vickars," the servant said. "I told him it +was not your custom to see any here, and that if he had aught to say he +should call at your house in St. Mary Axe; but he said that he had but +just arrived from Hedingham, and that your honour would excuse his +intrusion when you saw him." + +"Bring him up; he may be the bearer of a message from my father," +Geoffrey said; and the servant went back to the man, whom he had left a +short distance off. + +"Master Vickars will speak with you." + +The sailor approached the party. He stood for a minute before Geoffrey +without speaking. Geoffrey looked at him with some surprise, and saw +that the muscles of his face were twitching, and that he was much +agitated. As he looked at him remembrance suddenly flashed upon him, +and he sprang to his feet. "Stephen Boldero!" he exclaimed. + +"Ay, ay, Geoffrey, it is me." + +For a time the men stood with their right hands clasped and the left on +each other's shoulders. Tears fell down the sailor's weather-beaten +cheeks, and Geoffrey himself was too moved to speak. For two years they +had lived as brothers, had shared each other's toils and dangers, had +talked over their plans and hopes together; and it was to Stephen that +Geoffrey owed it that he was not now a galley-slave in Barbary. + +"Old friend, where have you been all this time?" he said at last. "I +had thought you dead, and have grieved sorely for you." + +"I have had some narrow escapes," Stephen said; "but you know I am +tough. I am worth a good many dead men yet." + +"Inez, Seņor Mendez, you both remember Stephen Boldero?" Geoffrey said, +turning to them. + +"We have never forgotten you," the Spaniard said, shaking hands with +the sailor, "nor how much we owe to you. I sent out instructions by +every ship that sailed to the Indies that inquiries should be made for +you; and moreover had letters sent by influential friends to the +governors of most of the islands saying that you had done great service +to me and mine, and praying that if you were in any need or trouble you +might be sent back to Cadiz, and that any moneys you required might be +given to you at my charge. But we have heard nought of you from the day +when the news came that you had left the ship in which you went out." + +"I have had a rough time of it these five years," Stephen said. "But I +care not now that I am home again and have found my friend Geoffrey. I +arrived in Bristol but last week, and started for London on the day I +landed, mindful of my promise to let his people know that he was safe +and well, and with some faint hope that the capture of Cadiz had set +him at liberty. I got to Hedingham last night, and if I had been a +prince Mr. Vickars and his dame and Sir Lionel could not have made more +of me. They were fain that I should stop with them a day or two; but +when I heard that you were in London and had married Seņora Dolores, +and that Seņor Mendez was with you--all of which in no way surprised +me, for methought I saw it coming before I left Cadiz--I could not +rest, but was up at daylight this morning. Your brother offered to +procure me a horse, but I should have made bad weather on the craft, +and after walking from Bristol the tramp up to London was nothing. I +got to your house in the city at four; and, finding that you were here, +took a boat at once, for I could not rest until I saw my friend again." + +Geoffrey at once took him into the house and set him down to a meal; +and when the party were gathered later on in the sitting-room, and the +candles were lighted, Stephen told his story. + +"As you will have heard, we made a good voyage to the Indies. We +discharged our cargo, and took in another. I learned that there were +two English ships cruising near San Domingo, and the Dons were in great +fear of them. I thought that my chance lay in joining them, so when we +were at our nearest port to that island I one night borrowed one of the +ship's boats without asking leave, and made off. I knew the direction +in which San Domingo lay, but no more. My hope was that I should either +fall in with our ships at sea, or, when I made the island, should be +able to gather such information as might guide me to them. When I made +the land, after being four days out, I cruised about till the +provisions and water I had put on board were exhausted, and I could +hold out no longer. Then I made for the island and landed. + +"You may be sure I did not make for a port, where I should be +questioned, but ran ashore in a wooded bay that looked as if no one had +ever set foot there before. I dragged the boat up beyond, as I thought, +the reach of the sea, and started to hunt for food and water. I found +enough berries and things to keep me alive, but not enough to stock my +boat for another cruise. A week after I landed there was a tornado, and +when it cleared off and I had recovered from my fright--for the trees +were blown down like rushes, and I thought my last day was come--I +found that the boat was washed away. I was mightily disheartened at +this, and after much thinking made up my mind that there was nought +for it but to keep along the shore until I arrived at a port, and then to +give out that I was a shipwrecked sailor, and either try to get hold of +another boat, or take passage back to Spain and make a fresh start. +However, the next morning, just as I was starting, a number of natives +ran out of the bush and seized me, and carried me away up into the hills. + +"It was not pleasant at first, for they lit a big fire and were going +to set me on the top of it, taking me for a Spaniard. Seeing their +intentions, I took to arguing with them, and told them in Spanish that +I was no Spaniard, but an Englishman, and that I had been a slave to +the Spaniards and had escaped. Most of them understood some Spanish, +having themselves been made to work as slaves in their plantations, and +being all runaways from the tyranny of their masters. They knew, of +course, that we were the enemies of the Spaniards, and had heard of +places being sacked and ships taken by us. But they doubted my story +for a long time, till at last one of them brought a crucifix that had +somehow fallen into their hands, and held it up before me. When I +struck it down, as a good Protestant should do, they saw that I was not +of the Spanish religion, and so loosed my bonds and made much of me. + +"They could tell me nothing of the whereabouts of our ships, for though +they had seen vessels at times sail by, the poor creatures knew nothing +of the difference of rig between an English craft and a Spaniard. I +abode with them for two years, and aided them in their fights whenever +the Spaniards sent out parties, which they did many times, to capture +them. They were poor, timorous creatures, their spirits being +altogether broken by the tyranny of the Dons; but when they saw that I +feared them not, and was ready at any time to match myself against two +or, if need be, three of the Spaniards, they plucked up heart, and in +time came to fight so stoutly that the Spaniards thought it best to +leave them alone, seeing that we had the advantage of knowing every +foot of the woods, and were able to pounce down upon them when they +were in straitened places and forced to fight at great disadvantage. + +"I was regarded as a great chief by the natives, and could have gone on +living with them comfortably enough had not my thoughts been always +turning homeward, and a great desire to be among my own people, from +whom I had been so long separated, devoured me. At last a Spanish ship +was driven ashore in a gale; she went to pieces, and every soul was +drowned. When the gale abated the natives went down to collect the +stores driven ashore, and I found on the beach one of her boats washed +up almost uninjured, so nothing would do but I must sail away in her. +The natives tried their hardest to persuade me to stay with them, but +finding that my mind was fixed beyond recall they gave way and did +their best to aid me. The boat was well stored with provisions; we made +a sail for her out of one belonging to the ship, and I set off, +promising them that if I could not alight upon an English ship I would +return to them. + +"I had intended to keep my promise, but things turned out otherwise. I +had not been two days at sea when there was another storm, for at one +time of the year they have tornadoes very frequently. I had nothing to +do but to run for it, casting much of my provisions overboard to +lighten the boat, and baling without ceasing to keep out the water she +took in. After running for many hours I was, somewhere about midnight, +cast on shore. I made a shift to save myself, and in the morning found +that I was on a low key. Here I lived for three weeks. Fortunately +there was water in some of the hollows of the rocks, and as turtles +came ashore to lay their eggs I managed pretty well for a time; but the +water dried up, and for the last week I had nought to drink but the +blood of the turtles. One morning I saw a ship passing not far off, and +making a signal with the mast of the boat that had been washed ashore +with me I attracted their attention. I saw that she was a Spaniard, but +I could not help that, for I had no choice but to hail her. They took me +to Porto Rico and there reported me as a shipwrecked sailor they had +picked up. The governor questioned me closely as to what vessel I +had been lost from, and although I made up a good story he had his +doubts. Fortunately it did not enter his mind that I was not a Spaniard; +but he said he believed I was some bad character who had been +marooned by my comrades for murder or some other crime, and so +put me in prison until he could learn something that would verify my story. + +"After three months I was taken out of prison, but was set to work on +the fortifications, and there for another two years I had to stop. Then +I managed to slip away one day, and, hiding till nightfall, made my way +down through the town to the quays and swam out to a vessel at anchor. +I climbed on board without notice, and hid myself below, where I lay +for two days until she got up sail. When I judged she was well away +from the land I went on deck and told my story, that I was a +shipwrecked sailor who had been forced by the governor to work at the +fortifications. They did not believe me, saying that I must be some +criminal who had escaped from justice, and the captain said he should +give me up at the next port the ship touched. Fortunately four days +afterwards a sail hove in sight and gave chase, and before it was dark +was near enough to fire a gun and make us heave to, and a quarter of an +hour later a boat came alongside, and I again heard English spoken for +the first time since I had left you at Cadiz. + +"It was an English bucaneer, who, being short of water and fresh +vegetables, had chased us, though seeing we were but a petty trader and +not likely to have aught else worth taking on board. They wondered much +when I discovered myself to them and told them who I was and how I had +come there; and when, on their rowing me on board their ship, I told +the captain my story he told me that he thought I was the greatest liar +he had ever met. To be a galley-slave among the Spaniards, a galley- +slave among the Moors, a consorter with Indians for two years, and +again a prisoner with the Spaniards for as much more, was more than +fell to the lot of any one man, and he, like the Spanish governor, +believed that I was some rascal who had been marooned, only he thought +that it was from an English ship. However, he said that as I was a +stout fellow he would give me another chance; and when, a fortnight +later, we fell in with a great Spanish galleon and captured her with a +great store of prize-money after a hard fight for six hours, the last +of which was passed on the deck of the Spaniard cutting and slashing-- +for, being laden with silver, she had a company of troops on board in +addition to her crew--the captain said, that though an astonishing liar +there was no better fellow on board a ship, and, putting it to the +crew, they agreed I had well earned my share of the prize-money. When +we had got the silver on board, which was a heavy job I can tell you, +though not an unpleasant one, we put what Spaniards remained alive into +the boats, fired the galleon, and set sail for England, where we +arrived without adventure. The silver was divided on the day before +we cast anchor, the owner's share being first set aside, every man his +share, and the officers theirs in proportion. Mine came to over a thousand +pounds, and it needed two strong men to carry the chest up to the +office of the owners, who gave me a receipt for it, which, as soon as +I got, I started for London; and here, as you see, I am." + +"And now, what do you propose to do with yourself. Stephen?" Geoffrey +asked. + +"I shall first travel down again to Devonshire and see what friends I +have remaining there. I do not expect to find many alive, for fifteen +years make many changes. My father and mother were both dead before I +started, and my uncle, with whom I lived for a time, is scarce like to +be alive now. Still I may find some cousins and friends I knew as a +boy." + +"I should think you have had enough of the sea, Stephen, and you have +now ample to live ashore in comfort for the rest of your life." + +"Yes, I shall go no more to sea," Stephen said. "Except for this last +stroke of luck fortune has always been against me. What I should like, +Master Geoffrey, most of all, would be to come up and work under you. I +could be of advantage in seeing to the loading and unloading vessels +and the storage of cargo. As for pay, I should not want it, having, as +you say, enough to live comfortably upon. Still I should like to be +with you." + +"And I should like to have you with me, Stephen. Nothing would give me +greater pleasure. If you are still of that mind when you return from +Devonshire we can again talk the matter over, and as our wishes are +both the same way we can have no difficulty in coming to an agreement." + +Stephen Boldero remained for a week in London and then journeyed down +to Devonshire. His idea of entering Geoffrey's service was never +carried out, for after he had been gone two months Geoffrey received a +letter from him saying that one of his cousins, who had been but a +little girl when he went away, had laid her orders upon him to buy a +small estate and settle down there, and that as she was willing to +marry him on no other terms he had nothing to do but to assent. + +Once a year, however, regularly to the end of his life Stephen Boldero +came up to London to stay for a fortnight with Geoffrey, always coming +by road, for he declared that he was convinced if he set foot on board +a ship again she would infallibly be wrecked on her voyage to London. + + + + +Chapter XXIII. + +The Siege of Ostend. + + +On the 5th of July, 1601, the Archduke Albert began the siege of Ostend +with 20,000 men and 50 siege-guns. Ostend had been completely rebuilt +and fortified eighteen years previously, and was defended by ramparts, +counterscarps, and two broad ditches. The sand-hills between it and the +sea were cut through, and the water filled the ditches and surrounded +the town. To the south the country was intersected by a network of +canals. The river Yper-Leet came in at the back of the town, and after +mingling with the salt water in the ditches found its way to the sea +through the channels known as the Old Haven and the Geule, the first on +the west, the second on the east of the town. + +On either side of these channels the land rose slightly, enabling the +besiegers to plant their batteries in very advantageous positions. The +garrison at first consisted of but 2000 men under Governor Vander Nood. +The States-general considered the defence of Ostend to be of extreme +importance to the cause, and appointed Sir Francis Vere general of the +army in and about Ostend, and sent with him 600 Dutch troops and eight +companies of English under the command of his brother, Sir Horace. This +raised the garrison to the strength of 3600 men. Sir Francis landed +with these reinforcements on the sands opposite the old town, which +stood near the sea-shore between the Old Haven and the Geule, and was +separated from the new town by a broad channel. He was forced to land +here, as the Spanish guns on the sand-hills commanded the entrances of +the two channels. + +[Illustration: OSTEND 1601.] + +Sixteen thousand of the Spanish troops under the order of the archduke +were encamped to the west of the town, and had 30 of their siege-guns +in position there, while 4000 men were stationed on the east of the +town under Count Bucquoy. Ten guns were in position on that side. +Ostend had no natural advantages for defence beyond the facility of +letting the sea into the numerous channels and ditches which +intersected the city, and protected it from any operations on the south +side. On the east the Geule was broad and deep, and an assault from +this side was very difficult. The Old Haven, on the west side, was fast +filling up, and was fordable for four hours every tide. + +This, therefore, was the weak side of the town. The portion especially +exposed to attack was the low sandy flat on which the old town stood, +to the north of Ostend. It was against this point, separated only from +the enemy's position by the shallow Old Haven, that the Spaniards +concentrated their efforts. The defence here consisted of a work called +the Porc-Espic, and a bastion in its rear called the Helmond. These +works lay to the north of the ditch dividing the old from the new town, +while on the opposite side of this ditch was a fort called the Sand- +hill, from which along the sea face of the town ran strong palisades +and bastions. + +The three principal bastions were named the Schottenburg, Moses' Table, +and the Flamenburg, the last-named defending the entrance to the Geule +on the eastern side. There was a strong wall with three bastions, the +North Bulwark, the East Bulwark or Pekell, and the Spanish Bulwark at +the south-east angle, with an outwork called the Spanish Half-moon on +the other side of the Geule. The south side was similarly defended by a +wall with four strong bastions, while beyond these at the south-west +corner lay a field called the Polder, extending to the point where the +Yper-Leet ran into the ditches. + +Sir Francis Vere's first step after his arrival was to throw up three +redoubts to strengthen the wall round this field, as had the enemy +taken possession of it they might have set the windmills upon it to +work and have drained out many of the ditches. Having secured this +point he cut a passage to the sea between the North-west Bulwark and +the Flamenburg Fort, so that shipping might enter the port without +having to ascend the Geule, exposed to the fire of the Spanish guns. To +annoy the enemy and draw them away from the vital point near the sea, +he then stationed 200 men on some rising ground surrounded by swamps +and ditches at some distance to the south of the city, and from here +they were able to open fire on the enemy's boats coming with supplies +from Bruges. + +The operation was successful. The Spaniards, finding their line of +communication threatened, advanced in force from their position by the +sea, and their forts opened a heavy fire on the little work thrown up. +Other similar attempts would have been made to harass the Spaniards and +divert them from their main work, had not Sir Francis Vere been +severely wounded in the head on the 4th of August by a shot from the +Spanish batteries, which continued to keep up a tremendous fire upon +the town. So serious was the wound that the surgeons were of opinion +that the only chance of saving his life was to send him away from the +din and turmoil of the siege; and on the 10th he was taken to +Middelburg, where he remained for a month, returning to Ostend long +before his wound was properly healed. + +On the 1st of August a batch of recruits had arrived from England, and +on the 8th 1200 more were landed. The fire of the besiegers was now so +heavy that the soldiers were forced to dig underground quarters to +shelter themselves. Sir Horace Vere led out several sorties; but the +besiegers, no longer distracted by the feints contrived by Sir Francis, +succeeded in erecting a battery on the margin of the Old Haven, and +opened fire on the Sand-hill Fort. + +On the 19th of September Sir Francis Vere returned to the town, to the +great joy of the garrison. Reinforcements continued to arrive, and at +this time the garrison numbered 4480. There were, too, a large number +of noblemen and gentlemen from England, France, and Holland, who had +come to learn the art of war under the man who was regarded as the +greatest general of the time. All who were willing to work and learn +were heartily welcomed; those who were unwilling to do so were soon +made to feel that a besieged city was no place for them. + +While the fighting was going on the archduke had attempted to capture +the place by treason. He engaged a traitor named Coningsby; who crossed +to England, obtained letters of introduction to Vere, and then went to +Ostend. Thence he sent intelligence to the besiegers of all that took +place in the town, placing his letters at night in an old boat sunk in +the mud on the bank of the Old Haven, a Spaniard wading across at low +tide and fetching them away. He then attempted to bribe a sergeant to +blow up the powder magazine. The sergeant revealed the plot. Coningsby +was seized and confessed everything, and by an act of extraordinary +clemency was only sentenced to be whipped out of town. + +This act of treachery on the part of the archduke justified the +otherwise dishonourable stratagem afterwards played by Vere upon him. +All through October and November the Spaniards were hard at work +advancing their batteries, sinking great baskets filled with sand in +the Old Haven to facilitate the passage of the troops, and building +floating batteries in the Geule. On the night of the 4th of December +they advanced suddenly to the attack. Vere and his officers leapt from +their beds and rushed to the walls, and after a fierce struggle the +besiegers were driven back. Straw was lighted to enable the musketeers +and gunners to fire upon them as they retreated, and the assault cost +them five hundred lives. + +On the 12th a hard frost set in, and until Christmas a strong gale from +the south-east blew. No succour could reach the town. The garrison were +dwindling fast, and ammunition falling short. It required fully 4000 +men to guard the walls and forts, while but 2500 remained capable of +bearing arms. It was known that the archduke soon intended to make an +assault with his whole force, and Vere knew that he could scarcely hope +to repel it. He called a council of his chief officers, and asked their +opinion whether with the present numbers all parts of the works could +be manned in case of assault, and if not whether it was advisable to +withdraw the guards from all the outlying positions and to hold only +the town. + +They were unanimously of opinion that the force was too small to defend +the whole, but Sir Horace Vere and Sir John Ogle alone gave their +advice to abandon the outlying forts rather than endanger the loss of +the town. The other officers were of opinion that all the works should +be held, although they acknowledged that the disposable force was +incapable of doing so. Some days elapsed, and Vere learned that the +Spanish preparations were all complete, and that they were only waiting +for a low tide to attack. Time was everything, for a change of wind +would bring speedy succour, so without taking council with anyone he +sent Sir John Ogle with a drummer to the side of the Old Haven. + +Don Mateo Serrano came forward, and Ogle gave his message, which was +that General Vere wished to have some qualified person to speak to him. +This was reported to the archduke, who agreed that Serrano and another +Spanish officer should go into the town, and that Ogle and a comrade +should come as hostages into the Spanish camp. Sir John Ogle took his +friend Sir Charles Fairfax with him, and Serrano and Colonel Antonio +crossed into Ostend. The two Englishmen were conducted to the archduke, +who asked Sir John Ogle to tell him if there was any deceit in the +matter. Ogle answered if there were it was more than he knew, for Vere +had simply charged him to carry the message, and that he and Fairfax +had merely come as hostages for the safe return of the Spanish +officers. + +Ogle was next asked whether he thought the general intended sincerely +or not, and could only reply that he was altogether unacquainted with +the general's purpose. + +The next morning Serrano and Antonio returned without having seen Vere. +The pretext on which they had been sent back was that there was some +irregularity in their coming across; but instead of their being sent +back across the Old Haven they were sent across the Geule, and had to +make a long round to regain the archduke's camp. + +Thus a day and a night were gained. The next day, towards evening, the +two Spanish officers were admitted into Ostend, and received very +hospitably by Sir Francis. After supper many healths were drunk, and +then Sir Francis informed them to their astonishment that his proposal +was not that he should surrender Ostend, but that the archduke should +raise the siege. But it was now far too late for them to return, and +they went to bed in the general's quarters. During the two nights thus +gained the defenders had worked incessantly in repairing the palisades +facing the point at which the attack would take place, a work that they +had hitherto been unable to perform owing to the tremendous fire that +the Spaniards kept up night and day upon it. + +At break of day five men-of-war from Zeeland came to anchor off the +town. They brought four hundred men, and provisions and materials of +war of all kinds. They were immediately landed under a heavy fire from +the enemy's batteries on both sides. The firing awoke the two Spanish +envoys, who inquired what was taking place. They were politely informed +by Sir Francis Vere that succour had arrived, and the negotiations were +of course broken off; and they were accordingly sent back, while Ogle +and Fairfax returned to Ostend. + +Vere's account of the transaction was that he had simply asked for two +Spanish officers to speak with him. He had offered no terms, and there +was therefore no breach of faith. The commander of a besieged town, he +insisted, is always at liberty to propose a parley, which the enemy can +accept or not as he chooses. At any rate, it was not for the archduke, +who had hired a traitor to corrupt the garrison, to make a complaint of +treachery. + +Twelve hundred men were employed for the next eight days in +strengthening the works, Sir Francis being always with them at night, +when the water was low, encouraging them by his presence and example. + +Early in January he learned that the enemy were preparing for the +assault, and on the 7th a crushing fire was kept up on the Porc-Espic, +Helmond, and Sand-hill forts. The Spaniards had by this time fired +163,200 cannon-shot into the town, and scarcely a whole house was left +standing. Towards evening they were seen bringing scaling-ladders to +the opposite bank of the Haven. Two thousand Italian and Spanish troops +had been told off to attack the sand-hill, two thousand were to assault +Helmond and the Porc-Espic, two parties of five hundred men each were +to attack other works, while on the east side Count Bucquoy was to +deliver a general assault. + +The English general watched all these preparations with the greatest +vigilance. At high water he closed the west sluice, which let the water +into the town ditch from the Old Haven, in the rear of Helmond, in +order to retain as much water as possible, and stationed his troops at +the various points most threatened. Sir Horace Vere and Sir Charles +Fairfax, with twelve weak companies, some of them reduced to ten or +twelve men, were stationed on the sand-hill. + +Four of the strongest companies garrisoned the Porc-Espic; ten weak +companies and nine cannon loaded with musket bullets defended the +Helmond. These posts were commanded by Sergeant-major Carpenter and +Captain Meetkerk; the rest of the force were disposed at the other +threatened points. Sir Francis himself, with Sir Lionel Vickars as his +right hand, took his post on the wall of the old town, between the +sand-hill and the Schottenburg, which had been much damaged by the +action of the waves during the gales and by the enemy's shot. Barrels +of ashes, heaps of stones and bricks, hoops bound with squibs and +fireworks, ropes of pitch, hand-grenades, and barrels of nails were +collected in readiness to hurl down upon the assailants. + +At dusk the besiegers ceased firing, to allow the guns to cool. Two +engineer officers with fifty stout sappers, who each had a rose-noble +for every quarter of an hour's work, got on to the breach in front of +the sand-hill, and threw up a small breastwork, strengthened by +palisades, across it. An officer crept down towards the Old Haven, and +presently returned with the news that two thousand of the enemy were +wading across, and forming up in battalions on the Ostend side. + +Suddenly a gun boomed out from the archduke's camp as a signal to +Bucquoy, and just as the night had fairly set in the besiegers rushed +to the assault from all points. They were received by a tremendous fire +from the guns of the forts and the muskets of the soldiers; but, +although the effect was serious, they did not hesitate a moment, but +dashed forwards towards the foot of the sand-hill and the wall of the +old town, halted for a moment, poured in a volley, and then rushed into +the breach and against the walls. The volley had been harmless, for +Vere had ordered the men to lie flat until it was given. As the +Spaniards climbed up barrels of ashes were emptied upon them, stones +and heavy timbers hurled down, and flaming hoops cast over their necks. +Three times they climbed to the crest of the sand-hill, and as many +times gained a footing on the Schottenburg; but each time they were +beaten back with great slaughter. As fiercely did they attack at the +other points, but were everywhere repulsed. + +On the east side three strong battalions of the enemy attacked the +outwork across the Geule, known as the Spanish Half-moon. Vere, who was +everywhere supervising the defence, ordered the weak garrison there to +withdraw, and sent a soldier out to give himself up, and to tell them +that the Half-moon was slenderly manned, and to offer to lead them in. +The offer was accepted, and the Spaniards took possession of the work. + +The general's object was to occupy them, and prevent their supporting +their comrades in the western attack. The Half-moon, indeed, was quite +open towards the town. Tide was rising, and a heavy fire was opened +upon the captors of the work from the batteries across the Geule, and +they were driven out with the loss of three hundred men. At length the +assault was repulsed at all points, and the assailants began to retire +across the Old Haven. No sooner did they begin to ford it than Vere +opened the west sluice, and the water in the town ditch rushed down in +a torrent, carrying numbers of the Spaniards away into the sea. + +Altogether, the assault cost the Spaniards two thousand men. An +enormous amount of plunder in arms, gold chains, jewels, and rich +garments were obtained by the defenders from the bodies of the fallen. +The loss of the garrison was only thirty killed and a hundred wounded. + +The repulse of the grand attack upon Ostend by no means put an end to +the siege. Sir Francis Vere, his brother Horace, Sir John Ogle, and Sir +Lionel Vickars left, the general being summoned to assume command in +the field; but the siege continued for two years and a half longer. +Many assaults were repulsed during that time, and the town only +surrendered on the 20th September, 1604, when the sand-hill, which was +the key of the whole position, was at last captured by the Spaniards. + +It was but a heap of ruins that they had become possessed of after +their three years' siege, and its capture had not only cost them an +immense number of men and a vast amount of money, but the long and +gallant defence had secured upon a firm basis the independence of +Holland. While the whole available force of Spain had been so occupied +Prince Maurice and his English allies had captured town after town, and +had beaten the enemy whenever they attempted to show themselves in the +open field. They had more than counterbalanced the loss of Ostend by +the recapture of Sluys, and had so lowered the Spanish pride that not +long afterwards a twelve years' truce was concluded, which virtually +brought the war to an end, and secured for ever the independence of +Holland. + +During the last year or two of the war Sir Francis Vere, worn out by +his fatigues and the countless wounds he had received in the service of +the Netherlands, had resigned his command and retired to England, being +succeeded in his position by Sir Horace. Lionel Vickars fought no more +after he had borne his part in the repulse of the great assault against +Ostend. He had barely recovered from the effect of the wound he had +received at the battle of Nieuport, and the fatigues and anxiety of the +siege, together with the damp air from the marshes, brought on a +serious attack of fever, which completely prostrated him as soon as the +necessity for exertion had passed. He remained some weeks at the Hague, +and then, being somewhat recovered, returned home. + +While throughout all England the greatest enthusiasm had been aroused +by the victory of Nieuport and the repulse of the Spaniards at Ostend, +the feeling was naturally higher in the Vere's county of Essex than +elsewhere. As soon as Lionel Vickars was well enough to take any share +in gaieties he received many invitations to stay at the great houses of +the county, where most of the gentry were more or less closely +connected with the Veres; and before he had been home many months he +married Dorothy Windhurst, one of the richest heiresses in the county, +and a cousin of the Veres. Thus Geoffrey had, after Juan Mendez retired +from taking any active part in the business, to work alone until his +sons were old enough to join him in the business. As soon as they were +able to undertake its active management, Geoffrey bought an estate near +Hedingham, and there settled down, journeying occasionally to London to +see how the affairs of the house went on, and to give advice to his +sons. Dolores had, two or three years after her arrival in England, +embraced the faith of her husband; and although she complained a little +at times of the English climate, she never once regretted the step she +had taken in leaving her native Spain. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, BY ENGLAND'S AID *** + +This file should be named 8beng10.txt or 8beng10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, 8beng11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, 8beng10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext05 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext05 + +Or /etext04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, +91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + + PROJECT GUTENBERG LITERARY ARCHIVE FOUNDATION + 809 North 1500 West + Salt Lake City, UT 84116 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/8beng10.zip b/old/8beng10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..43741e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/8beng10.zip |